This is a modern-English version of The Montessori Method: Scientific Pedagogy as Applied to Child Education in 'The Children's Houses' with Additions and Revisions by the Author, originally written by Montessori, Maria.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
THE
MONTESSORI METHOD
SCIENTIFIC PEDAGOGY AS APPLIED TO CHILD
EDUCATION IN "THE CHILDREN'S HOUSES"
WITH ADDITIONS AND REVISIONS
BY THE AUTHOR
BY
MARIA MONTESSORI
TRANSLATED FROM THE ITALIAN BY
ANNE E. GEORGE
WITH AN INTRODUCTION BY
PROF. HENRY W. HOLMES
OF HARVARD UNIVERSITY
WITH THIRTY-TWO ILLUSTRATIONS FROM PHOTOGRAPHS
NEW YORK
FREDERICK A. STOKES COMPANY
MCMXII
NEW YORK
FREDERICK A. STOKES COMPANY
1912
Copyright, 1912, by
Frederick A. Stokes Company
Copyright, 1912, by
Frederick A. Stokes Co.
All rights reserved, including that of translation into foreign
languages, including the Scandinavian
All rights reserved, including the right to translate into foreign
languages, including Scandinavian
I place at the beginning of this volume, now appearing in the United States, her fatherland, the dear name of
I put at the start of this book, now being released in the United States, my homeland, the cherished name of
ALICE HALLGARTEN
Alice Hallgarten
of New York, who by her marriage to Baron Leopold Franchetti became by choice our compatriot.
of New York, who became our compatriot by choice through her marriage to Baron Leopold Franchetti.
Ever a firm believer in the principles underlying the Case dei Bambini, she, with her husband, forwarded the publication of this book in Italy, and, throughout the last years of her short life, greatly desired the English translation which should introduce to the land of her birth the work so near her heart.
Always a strong supporter of the ideas behind the Case dei Bambini, she and her husband helped publish this book in Italy, and in the last years of her brief life, she really wanted an English translation to bring the work that was so dear to her to her homeland.
To her memory I dedicate this book, whose pages, like an ever-living flower, perpetuate the recollection of her beneficence.
To her memory, I dedicate this book, whose pages, like a timeless flower, keep alive the memory of her kindness.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
Grateful acknowledgment is made to Mrs. Guy Baring, of London, for the loan of her manuscript translation of "Pedagogia Scientifica"; to Mrs. John R. Fisher (Dorothy Canfield) for translating a large part of the new work written by Dr. Montessori for the American Edition; and to The House of Childhood, Inc., New York, for use of the illustrations of the didactic apparatus. Dr. Montessori's patent rights in the apparatus are controlled, for the United States and Canada, by The House of Childhood, Inc.
Grateful acknowledgment goes to Mrs. Guy Baring of London for lending her manuscript translation of "Pedagogia Scientifica"; to Mrs. John R. Fisher (Dorothy Canfield) for translating a significant portion of the new work written by Dr. Montessori for the American Edition; and to The House of Childhood, Inc., New York, for allowing the use of the illustrations of the didactic apparatus. Dr. Montessori's patent rights for the apparatus in the United States and Canada are managed by The House of Childhood, Inc.
The Publishers.
The Publishers.
PREFACE TO THE AMERICAN EDITION
In February, 1911, Professor Henry W. Holmes, of the Division of Education of Harvard University, did me the honour to suggest that an English translation be made of my Italian volume, "Il Metodo della Pedagogia Scientifica applicato all' educazione infantile nelle Case dei Bambini." This suggestion represented one of the greatest events in the history of my educational work. To-day, that to which I then looked forward as an unusual privilege has become an accomplished fact.
In February 1911, Professor Henry W. Holmes from the Division of Education at Harvard University honored me by suggesting an English translation of my Italian book, "Il Metodo della Pedagogia Scientifica applicato all'educazione infantile nelle Case dei Bambini." This suggestion marked one of the most significant moments in my educational journey. Today, what I once anticipated as a unique opportunity has become a reality.
The Italian edition of "Il Metodo della Pedagogia Scientifica" had no preface, because the book itself I consider nothing more than the preface to a more comprehensive work, the aim and extent of which it only indicates. For the educational method for children of from three to six years set forth here is but the earnest of a work that, developing the same principle and method, shall cover in a like manner the successive stages of education. Moreover, the method which obtains in the Case dei Bambini offers, it seems to me, an experimental field for the study of man, and promises, perhaps, the development of a science that shall disclose other secrets of nature.
The Italian edition of "Il Metodo della Pedagogia Scientifica" didn’t have a preface because I see the book itself as just a preface to a larger work, which it only hints at in terms of its goals and scope. The educational approach for children aged three to six presented here is just the beginning of a project that will expand on the same principles and methods to address the later stages of education in a similar way. Furthermore, the approach used in the Case dei Bambini provides what seems to be a testing ground for understanding humanity and may lead to the development of a science that reveals more of nature's secrets.
In the period that has elapsed between the publication of the Italian and American editions, I have had, with my pupils, the opportunity to simplify and render more exact certain practical details of the method, and to gather additional observations concerning discipline. The results attest the vitality of the method and the necessity for an [Pg viii]extended scientific collaboration in the near future, and are embodied in two new chapters written for the American edition. I know that my method has been widely spoken of in America, thanks to Mr. S. S. McClure, who has presented it through the pages of his well-known magazine. Indeed, many Americans have already come to Rome for the purpose of observing personally the practical application of the method in my little schools. If, encouraged by this movement, I may express a hope for the future, it is that my work in Rome shall become the centre of an efficient and helpful collaboration.
In the time since the Italian and American editions were published, I have had the chance, along with my students, to simplify and clarify certain practical details of the method, and to gather more observations about discipline. The results show the effectiveness of the method and the need for an [Pg viii]expanded scientific collaboration in the near future, which are included in two new chapters written for the American edition. I'm aware that my method has received considerable attention in America, thanks to Mr. S. S. McClure, who has featured it in his well-known magazine. In fact, many Americans have already traveled to Rome to see firsthand the practical application of the method in my small schools. If, encouraged by this interest, I might express a hope for the future, it is that my work in Rome will become the center of effective and supportive collaboration.
To the Harvard professors who have made my work known in America and to McClure's Magazine, a mere acknowledgment of what I owe them is a barren response; but it is my hope that the method itself, in its effect upon the children of America, may prove an adequate expression of my gratitude.
To the Harvard professors who have helped make my work known in America and to McClure's Magazine, simply acknowledging what I owe them feels insufficient; however, I hope that the method itself, through its impact on the children of America, will serve as a meaningful expression of my gratitude.
Maria Montessori.
Maria Montessori.
Rome, 1912.
Rome, 1912.
[Pg ix]
[Pg ix]
CONTENTS
PAGE | |
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS | V |
THE AMERICAN EDITION | VII |
INTRODUCTION | XVII |
CHAPTER I | |
A CRITICAL CONSIDERATION OF THE NEW PEDAGOGY IN ITS RELATION TO MODERN SCIENCE | |
Influence of Modern Science upon Pedagogy | 1 |
Italy's part in the development of Scientific Pedagogy | 4 |
Difference between scientific technique and the scientific spirit | 7 |
Direction of the preparation should be toward the spirit rather than toward the mechanism | 9 |
The master to study man in the awakening of his intellectual life | 12 |
Attitude of the teacher in the light of another example | 13 |
The school must permit the free natural manifestations of the child if in the school Scientific Pedagogy is to be born | 15 |
Stationary desks and chairs proof that the principle of slavery still informs the school | 16 |
Conquest of liberty, what the school needs | 19 |
What may happen to the spirit | 20 |
Prizes and punishments, the bench of the soul | 21 |
All human victories, all human progress, stand upon the inner force | 24 |
CHAPTER II | |
HISTORY OF METHODS | |
Necessity of establishing the method peculiar to Scientific Pedagogy | 28 |
Origin of educational system in use in the "Children's Houses" | 31 |
Practical application of the methods of Itard and Séguin in the Orthophrenic School at Rome | 32 |
Origin of the methods for the education of deficients | 33 |
Application of the methods in Germany and France | 35 |
Séguin's first didactic material was spiritual | 37 |
Methods for deficients applied to the education of normal children | 42 |
Social and pedagogic importance of the "Children's Houses"[Pg x] | 44 |
CHAPTER III | |
INAUGURAL ADDRESS DELIVERED ON THE OCCASION OF THE OPENING OF ONE OF THE "CHILDREN'S HOUSES" | |
The Quarter of San Lorenzo before and since the establishment of the "Children's Houses" | 48 |
Evil of subletting the most cruel form of usury | 50 |
The problem of life more profound than that of the intellectual elevation of the poor | 52 |
Isolation of the masses of the poor, unknown to past centuries | 53 |
Work of the Roman Association of Good Building and the moral importance of their reforms | 56 |
The "Children's House" earned by the parents through their care of the building | 60 |
Pedagogical organization of the "Children's House" | 62 |
The "Children's House" the first step toward the socialisation of the house | 65 |
The communised house in its relation to the home and to the spiritual evolution of women | 66 |
Rules and regulations of the "Children's Houses" | 70 |
CHAPTER IV | |
PEDAGOGICAL METHODS USED IN THE "CHILDREN'S HOUSES" | |
Child psychology can be established only through the method of external observation | 72 |
Anthropological consideration | 73 |
Anthropological notes | 77 |
Environment and schoolroom furnishings | 80 |
CHAPTER V | |
DISCIPLINE | |
Discipline through liberty | 86 |
Independence | 95 |
Abolition of prizes and external forms of punishment | 101 |
Biological concept of liberty in pedagogy | 104 |
CHAPTER VI | |
HOW THE LESSON SHOULD BE GIVEN | |
Characteristics of the individual lessons | 107 |
Method of observation the fundamental guide | 108 |
Difference between the scientific and unscientific methods illustrated | 109 |
First task of educators to stimulate life, leaving it then free to develop[Pg xi] | 115 |
CHAPTER VII | |
EXERCISES OF PRACTICAL LIFE | |
Suggested schedule for the "Children's Houses" | 119 |
The child must be prepared for the forms of social life and his attention attracted to these forms | 121 |
Cleanliness, order, poise, conversation | 122 |
CHAPTER VIII | |
REFECTION—THE CHILD'S DIET | |
Diet must be adapted to the child's physical nature | 125 |
Foods and their preparation | 126 |
Drinks | 132 |
Distribution of meals | 133 |
CHAPTER IX | |
MUSCULAR EDUCATION—GYMNASTICS | |
Generally accepted idea of gymnastics is inadequate | 137 |
The special gymnastics necessary for little children | 138 |
Other pieces of gymnastic apparatus | 141 |
Free gymnastics | 144 |
Educational gymnastics | 144 |
Respiratory gymnastics, and labial, dental, and lingual gymnastics | 147 |
CHAPTER X | |
NATURE IN EDUCATION—AGRICULTURAL LABOUR: CULTURE OF PLANTS AND ANIMALS | |
The savage of the Aveyron | 149 |
Itard's educative drama repented in the education of little children | 153 |
Gardening and horticulture basis of a method for education of children | 155 |
The child initiated into observation of the phenomena of life and into foresight by way of auto-education | 156 |
Children are initiated into the virtue of patience and into confident expectation, and are inspired with a feeling for nature | 159 |
The child follows the natural way of development of the human race[Pg xii] | 160 |
CHAPTER XI | |
MANUAL LABOUR—THE POTTER'S ART, AND BUILDING | |
Difference between manual labour and manual gymnastics | 162 |
The School of Educative Art | 163 |
Archæological, historical, and artistic importance of the vase | 164 |
Manufacture of diminutive bricks and construction of diminutive walls and houses | 165 |
CHAPTER XII | |
EDUCATION OF THE SENSES | |
Aim of education to develop the energies | 168 |
Difference in the reaction between deficient and normal children in the presentation of didactic material made up of graded stimuli | 169 |
Education of the senses has as its aim the refinement of the differential perception of stimuli by means of repeated exercises | 173 |
Three Periods of Séguin | 177 |
CHAPTER XIII | |
EDUCATION OF THE SENSES AND ILLUSTRATIONS OF THE DIDACTIC MATERIAL: GENERAL SENSIBILITY: THE TACTILE, THERMIC, BARIC AND STEREOGNOSTIC SENSES | |
Education of the tactile, thermic and baric senses | 185 |
Education of the stereognostic sense | 188 |
Education of the senses of taste and smell | 190 |
Education of the sense of vision | 191 |
Exercises with the three series of cards | 199 |
Education of the chromatic sense | 200 |
Exercise for the discrimination of sounds | 203 |
Musical education | 206 |
Tests for acuteness of hearing | 209 |
A lesson in silence | 212 |
CHAPTER XIV | |
GENERAL NOTES ON THE EDUCATION OF THE SENSES | |
Aim in education biological and social | 215 |
Education of the senses makes men observers and prepares them directly for practical life[Pg xiii] | 218 |
CHAPTER XV | |
INTELLECTUAL EDUCATION | |
Sense exercises a species of auto-education | 224 |
Importance of an exact nomenclature, and how to teach it | 225 |
Spontaneous progress of the child the greatest triumph of Scientific Pedagogy | 228 |
Games of the blind | 231 |
Application of the visual sense to the observation of environment | 232 |
Method of using didactic material: dimensions, form, design | 233 |
Free plastic work | 241 |
Geometric analysis of figures | 243 |
Exercises in the chromatic sense | 244 |
CHAPTER XVI | |
METHOD FOR THE TEACHING OF READING AND WRITING | |
Spontaneous development of graphic language: Séguin and Itard | 246 |
Necessity of a special education that shall fit man for objective observation and direct logical thought | 252 |
Results of objective observation and logical thought | 253 |
Not necessary to begin teaching writing with vertical strokes | 257 |
Spontaneous drawing of normal children | 258 |
Use of Froebel mats in teaching children sewing | 260 |
Children should be taught how before they are made to execute a task | 261 |
Two diverse forms of movement made in writing | 262 |
Experiments with normal children | 267 |
Origin of alphabets in present use | 269 |
CHAPTER XVII | |
DESCRIPTION OF THE METHOD AND DIDACTIC MATERIAL USED | |
Exercise tending to develop the muscular mechanism necessary in holding and using the instrument in writing | 271 |
Didactic material for writing | 271 |
Exercise tending to establish the visual-muscular image of the alphabetical signs, and to establish the muscular memory of the movements necessary to writing | 275 |
Exercises for the composition of words | 281 |
Reading, the interpretation of an idea from written signs | 296 |
Games for the reading of words | 299 |
Games for the reading of phrases | 303 |
Point education has reached in the "Children's Houses"[Pg xiv] | 307 |
CHAPTER XVIII | |
LANGUAGE OF CHILDHOOD | |
Physiological importance of graphic language | 310 |
Two periods in the development of language | 312 |
Analysis of speech necessary | 319 |
Defects of language due to education | 322 |
CHAPTER XIX | |
TEACHING OF NUMERATION: INTRODUCTION TO ARITHMETIC | |
Numbers as represented by graphic signs | 328 |
Exercises for the memory of numbers | 330 |
Addition and subtraction from one to twenty: multiplication and division | 332 |
Lessons on decimals: arithmetical calculations beyond ten | 335 |
CHAPTER XX | |
SEQUENCE OF EXERCISES | |
Sequence and grades in the presentation of material and in the exercises | 338 |
First grade | 338 |
Second grade | 339 |
Third grade | 342 |
Fourth grade | 343 |
Fifth grade | 345 |
CHAPTER XXI | |
GENERAL REVIEW OF DISCIPLINE | |
Discipline better than in ordinary schools | 346 |
First dawning of discipline comes through work | 350 |
Orderly action is the true rest for muscles intended by nature for action | 354 |
The exercise that develops life consists in the repetition, not in the mere grasp of the idea | 358 |
Aim of repetition that the child shall refine his senses through the exercise of attention, of comparison, of judgment | 360 |
Obedience is naturally sacrifice | 363 |
Obedience develops will-power and the capacity to perform the act it becomes necessary to obey | 367 |
CHAPTER XXII | |
CONCLUSIONS AND IMPRESSIONS | |
The teacher has become the director of spontaneous work in the "Children's Houses" | 371 |
The problems of religious education should be solved by positive pedagogy | 372 |
Spiritual influence of the "Children's Houses" | 376 |
ILLUSTRATIONS
Dr. Montessori giving a lesson in touching geometrical insets | Frontispiece |
FACING PAGE | |
Dr. Montessori in the garden of the school at Via Giusti | 144 |
Children learning to button and lace. Ribbon and button frames | 145 |
Children playing a game with tablets of coloured silk | 186 |
Girl touching a letter and boy telling objects by weight | 187 |
Pupils arranging colours in chromatic order | 187 |
Didactic apparatus to teach differentiation of objects | 190 |
Blocks by which children are taught thickness, length and size | 191 |
Geometric insets to teach form | 194 |
Geometric insets and cabinet | 195 |
Cards used in teaching form and contour | 196 |
Frames illustrating lacing; shoe buttoning; buttoning of other garments; hooks and eyes | 200 |
Tablets with silk, for educating the chromatic sense | 201 |
Didactic apparatus for training the sense of touch, and for teaching writing | 282 |
Children touching letters and making words with cardboard script | 283 |
Montessori children eating dinner | 348 |
School at Tarrytown, N. Y. | 349 |
INTRODUCTION
An audience already thoroughly interested awaits this translation of a remarkable book. For years no educational document has been so eagerly expected by so large a public, and not many have better merited general anticipation. That this widespread interest exists is due to the enthusiastic and ingenious articles in McClure's Magazine for May and December, 1911, and January, 1912; but before the first of these articles appeared a number of English and American teachers had given careful study to Dr. Montessori's work, and had found it novel and important. The astonishing welcome accorded to the first popular expositions of the Montessori system may mean much or little for its future in England and America; it is rather the earlier approval of a few trained teachers and professional students that commends it to the educational workers who must ultimately decide upon its value, interpret its technicalities to the country at large, and adapt it to English and American conditions. To them as well as to the general public this brief critical Introduction is addressed.
An audience that’s already very interested is waiting for this translation of an impressive book. For years, no educational document has been so eagerly anticipated by such a large public, and not many have deserved this level of excitement more. This widespread interest comes from the engaging and clever articles in McClure's Magazine from May and December 1911 and January 1912; however, before the first of these articles was published, several English and American educators had closely studied Dr. Montessori's work and found it innovative and significant. The incredible response to the first popular explanations of the Montessori system could mean a lot or a little for its future in England and America; it’s more about the earlier approval from a few trained teachers and professional scholars that makes it appealing to the educational professionals who will ultimately determine its value, explain its technical details to the public, and adapt it to fit English and American contexts. This brief critical introduction is aimed at both them and the general public.
It is wholly within the bounds of safe judgment to call Dr. Montessori's work remarkable, novel, and important. It is remarkable, if for no other reason, because it represents the constructive effort of a woman. We have no other example of an educational system—original at least in its systematic wholeness and in its practical application—worked out and inaugurated by the feminine mind and[Pg xviii] hand. It is remarkable, also, because it springs from a combination of womanly sympathy and intuition, broad social outlook, scientific training, intensive and long-continued study of educational problems, and, to crown all, varied and unusual experience as a teacher and educational leader. No other woman who has dealt with Dr. Montessori's problem—the education of young children—has brought to it personal resources so richly diverse as hers. These resources, furthermore, she has devoted to her work with an enthusiasm, an absolute abandon, like that of Pestalozzi and Froebel, and she presents her convictions with an apostolic ardour which commands attention. A system which embodies such a capital of human effort could not be unimportant. Then, too, certain aspects of the system are in themselves striking and significant: it adapts to the education of normal children methods and apparatus originally used for deficients; it is based on a radical conception of liberty for the pupil; it entails a highly formal training of separate sensory, motor, and mental capacities; and it leads to rapid, easy, and substantial mastery of the elements of reading, writing, and arithmetic. All this will be apparent to the most casual reader of this book.
It’s entirely reasonable to say that Dr. Montessori's work is remarkable, innovative, and significant. It stands out, if for no other reason, because it represents the constructive effort of a woman. We don't have another example of an educational system—original at least in its systematic completeness and in its practical application—developed and launched by a woman's mind and[Pg xviii] hands. It’s also remarkable because it comes from a blend of women’s empathy and intuition, a broad social perspective, scientific training, thorough and prolonged study of educational issues, and, to top it all off, diverse and unique experiences as a teacher and educational leader. No other woman who has tackled Dr. Montessori's challenge—the education of young children—has brought such a rich variety of personal resources to the table. She has devoted herself to her work with enthusiasm and complete dedication, similar to that of Pestalozzi and Froebel, and she shares her beliefs with a passionate fervor that commands attention. A system that incorporates such a wealth of human effort cannot be insignificant. Additionally, some aspects of the system are inherently striking and noteworthy: it adapts methods and tools originally used for special needs children to educate typical kids; it is grounded in a radical idea of freedom for the student; it involves a rigorous training of distinct sensory, motor, and mental skills; and it fosters quick, effortless, and substantial mastery of basic reading, writing, and math. All of this will be clear to even the most casual reader of this book.
None of these things, to be sure, is absolutely new in the educational world. All have been proposed in theory; some have been put more or less completely into practice. It is not unjust, for instance, to point out that much of the material used by Dr. Walter S. Fernald, Superintendent of the Massachusetts Institution for the Feeble-Minded at Waverley, is almost identical with the Montessori material, and that Dr. Fernald has long maintained that it could be used to good effect in the education of normal children. (It may interest American readers to know that Séguin,[Pg xix] on whose work that of Dr. Montessori is based, was once head of the school at Waverley.) So, too, formal training in various psycho-physical processes has been much urged of late by a good many workers in experimental pedagogy, especially by Meumann. But before Montessori, no one had produced a system in which the elements named above were combined. She conceived it, elaborated it in practice, and established it in schools. It is indeed the final result, as Dr. Montessori proudly asserts, of years of experimental effort both on her own part and on the part of her great predecessors; but the crystallisation of these experiments in a programme of education for normal children is due to Dr. Montessori alone. The incidental features which she has frankly taken over from other modern educators she has chosen because they fit into the fundamental form of her own scheme, and she has unified them all in her general conception of method. The system is not original in the sense in which Froebel's system was original; but as a system it is the novel product of a single woman's creative genius.
None of these concepts is entirely new in the education field. They’ve all been suggested in theory; some have even been implemented to varying degrees. It's not unfair to note that a lot of the materials used by Dr. Walter S. Fernald, Superintendent of the Massachusetts Institution for the Feeble-Minded at Waverley, closely resemble Montessori materials, and Dr. Fernald has long argued that they could be effectively used in teaching regular children. (American readers might find it interesting that Séguin,[Pg xix], who inspired Dr. Montessori's work, was once in charge of the school at Waverley.) Similarly, formal training in different psycho-physical processes has recently been promoted by several researchers in experimental pedagogy, especially by Meumann. However, before Montessori, no one had created a system that combined these elements. She developed it, brought it to life in practice, and established it in schools. It truly represents the culmination, as Dr. Montessori proudly claims, of years of experimental work from both her and her prominent predecessors; but the consolidation of these experiments into an educational program for regular children is solely due to Dr. Montessori. The additional elements she has openly adopted from other contemporary educators have been chosen because they fit into the core structure of her approach, and she has integrated them into her overall method. While the system may not be unique in the same way Froebel's was, it is a fresh creation born from a single woman's innovative talent.
As such, no student of elementary education ought to ignore it. The system doubtless fails to solve all the problems in the education of young children; possibly some of the solutions it proposes are partly or completely mistaken; some are probably unavailable in English and American schools; but a system of education does not have to attain perfection in order to merit study, investigation, and experimental use. Dr. Montessori is too large-minded to claim infallibility, and too thoroughly scientific in her attitude to object to careful scrutiny of her scheme and the thorough testing of its results. She expressly states that it is not yet complete. Practically, it is highly probable that the system ultimately adopted in our schools will combine[Pg xx] elements of the Montessori programme with elements of the kindergarten programme, both "liberal" and "conservative." In its actual procedure school work must always be thus eclectic. An all-or-nothing policy for a single system inevitably courts defeat; for the public is not interested in systems as systems, and refuses in the end to believe that any one system contains every good thing. Nor can we doubt that this attitude is essentially sound. If we continue, despite the pragmatists, to believe in absolute principles, we may yet remain skeptical about the logic of their reduction to practice—at least in any fixed programme of education. We are not yet justified, at any rate, in adopting one programme to the exclusion of every other simply because it is based on the most intelligible or the most inspiring philosophy. The pragmatic test must also be applied, and rigorously. We must try out several combinations, watch and record the results, compare them, and proceed cautiously to new experiments. This procedure is desirable for every stage and grade of education, but especially for the earliest stage, because there it has been least attempted and is most difficult. Certainly a system so radical, so clearly defined, and so well developed as that of Dr. Montessori offers for the thoroughgoing comparative study of methods in early education new material of exceptional importance. Without accepting every detail of the system, without even accepting unqualifiedly its fundamental principles, one may welcome it, thus, as of great and immediate value. If early education is worth studying at all, the educator who devotes his attention to it will find it necessary to define the differences in principle between the Montessori programme and other programmes, and to carry out careful tests of the results obtainable from the various systems and their feasible combinations.[Pg xxi]
No student of elementary education should ignore this. The system may not solve all the issues in educating young children; some of the proposed solutions might be partially or completely wrong; some may not even be available in English and American schools. However, an education system doesn’t need to be perfect to be worth studying, investigating, and experimenting with. Dr. Montessori is open-minded enough not to claim infallibility, and she has a scientific attitude that encourages careful examination of her methods and thorough testing of their outcomes. She explicitly states that her system isn’t complete yet. It’s very likely that the system eventually used in our schools will blend elements of the Montessori program with aspects of the kindergarten approach, both progressive and traditional. In practice, school work must always be eclectic. An all-or-nothing approach for a single system leads to failure; the public isn’t interested in systems per se and ultimately doesn’t believe that any one system encompasses everything good. We also can’t question that this viewpoint is fundamentally valid. If we persist, despite practical considerations, in holding onto absolute principles, we might remain doubtful about how they can be applied effectively—at least in a fixed educational program. We aren’t justified, anyway, in choosing one program over others solely because it’s based on the clearest or most inspiring philosophy. The pragmatic test must also be applied rigorously. We should experiment with various combinations, observe and record the outcomes, compare them, and cautiously proceed to new trials. This approach is necessary for every stage and grade of education, but especially for the earliest stage, since it’s been attempted the least and is the most challenging. Certainly, a system as groundbreaking, clearly defined, and well-developed as Dr. Montessori’s provides new and exceptionally important material for comprehensive comparative studies of early education methods. Without accepting every detail of the system or even fully endorsing its fundamental principles, one can still recognize it as highly valuable. If early education is worth examining at all, educators focusing on it will find it essential to clarify the fundamental differences between the Montessori program and others and to conduct careful tests of the results achievable from various systems and their practical combinations.[Pg xxi]
One such combination this Introduction will suggest, and it will discuss also the possible uses of the Montessori apparatus in the home; but it may be helpful first to present the outstanding characteristics of the Montessori system as compared with the modern kindergarten in its two main forms.
One combination this Introduction will suggest, and it will also talk about the possible uses of the Montessori materials at home; but it might be helpful first to highlight the key features of the Montessori system compared to the modern kindergarten in its two main forms.
Certain similarities in principle are soon apparent. Dr. Montessori's views of childhood are in some respects identical with those of Froebel, although in general decidedly more radical. Both defend the child's right to be active, to explore his environment and develop his own inner resources through every form of investigation and creative effort. Education is to guide activity, not repress it. Environment cannot create human power, but only give it scope and material, direct it, or at most but call it forth; and the teacher's task is first to nourish and assist, to watch, encourage, guide, induce, rather than to interfere, prescribe, or restrict. To most American teachers and to all kindergartners this principle has long been familiar; they will but welcome now a new and eloquent statement of it from a modern viewpoint. In the practical interpretation of the principle, however, there is decided divergence between the Montessori school and the kindergarten. The Montessori "directress" does not teach children in groups, with the practical requirement, no matter how well "mediated," that each member of the group shall join in the exercise. The Montessori pupil does about as he pleases, so long as he does not do any harm.
Certain similarities in principle are quickly noticeable. Dr. Montessori's views on childhood are in some ways identical to those of Froebel, although in general they are significantly more radical. Both advocate for the child's right to be active, to explore their surroundings, and to develop their own inner resources through various forms of investigation and creative effort. Education should guide activity, not suppress it. The environment can't create human potential; it can only provide opportunities and resources, direct it, or at most encourage it. The teacher's role is primarily to nurture and support, to observe, encourage, guide, and motivate, rather than to interfere, dictate, or limit. For most American teachers and all kindergartners, this principle has been familiar for a long time; they will now appreciate a new and powerful expression of it from a modern perspective. However, in the practical application of this principle, there is a marked difference between the Montessori school and the kindergarten. The Montessori "directress" does not teach children in groups, where the practical requirement, no matter how well "mediated," is that each group member must participate in the exercise. The Montessori student can do as they please, as long as they don't cause any harm.
Montessori and Froebel stand in agreement also on the need for training of the senses; but Montessori's scheme for this training is at once more elaborate and more direct than Froebel's. She has devised out of Séguin's apparatus a comprehensive and scientific scheme for formal gymnastic[Pg xxii] of the senses; Froebel originated a series of objects designed for a much broader and more creative use by the children, but by no means so closely adapted to the training of sensory discrimination. The Montessori material carries out the fundamental principle of Pestalozzi, which he tried in vain to embody in a successful system of his own: it "develops piece by piece the pupil's mental capacities" by training separately, through repeated exercises, his several senses and his ability to distinguish, compare, and handle typical objects. In the kindergarten system, and particularly in the "liberal" modifications of it, sense training is incidental to constructive and imaginative activity in which the children are pursuing larger ends than the mere arrangement of forms or colours. Even in the most formal work in kindergarten design the children are "making a picture," and are encouraged to tell what it looks like—"a star," "a kite," "a flower."
Montessori and Froebel agree on the importance of training the senses; however, Montessori's approach is more comprehensive and straightforward than Froebel's. She has developed a detailed and scientific method for formal sensory training using Séguin's tools. Froebel created a variety of objects intended for broader and more creative use by children, but they are not as tailored for training sensory discrimination. The Montessori materials implement Pestalozzi's core idea, which he struggled to put into a successful system: they "develop the student's mental abilities piece by piece" by separately training different senses through repeated exercises and enhancing skills to distinguish, compare, and manipulate typical objects. In the kindergarten system, especially in its "liberal" adaptations, sensory training takes a backseat to constructive and imaginative activities, where children are focused on broader goals than just arranging shapes or colors. Even in the most structured kindergarten design work, children are "creating a picture" and are encouraged to explain what it represents—like "a star," "a kite," or "a flower."
As to physical education, the two systems agree in much the same way: both affirm the need for free bodily activity, for rhythmic exercises, and for the development of muscular control; but whereas the kindergarten seeks much of all this through group games with an imaginative or social content, the Montessori scheme places the emphasis on special exercises designed to give formal training in separate physical functions.
When it comes to physical education, the two systems share a lot of similarities: both recognize the importance of free physical activity, rhythmic exercises, and developing muscle control. However, while the kindergarten approach focuses on achieving these goals through group games that have imaginative or social elements, the Montessori method prioritizes specific exercises aimed at providing formal training in individual physical functions.
In another general aspect, however, the agreement between the two systems, strong in principle, leaves the Montessori system less formal rather than more formal in practice. The principle in this case consists of the affirmation of the child's need for social training. In the conservative kindergarten this training is sought once more, largely in group games. These are usually imaginative, and sometimes decidedly symbolic: that is, the children[Pg xxiii] play at being farmers, millers, shoemakers, mothers and fathers, birds, animals, knights, or soldiers; they sing songs, go through certain semi-dramatic activities—such as "opening the pigeon house," "mowing the grass," "showing the good child to the knights," and the like; and each takes his part in the representation of some typical social situation. The social training involved in these games is formal only in the sense that the children are not engaged, as the Montessori children often are, in a real social enterprise, such as that of serving dinner, cleaning the room, caring for animals, building a toy house, or making a garden. It cannot be too strongly emphasized that even the most conservative kindergarten does not, on principle, exclude "real" enterprises of this latter sort; but in a three-hour session it does rather little with them. Liberal kindergartens do more, particularly in Europe, where the session is often longer. Nor does the Montessori system wholly exclude imaginative group games. But Dr. Montessori, despite an evidently profound interest not only in social training, but also in æsthetic, idealistic, and even religious development, speaks of "games and foolish stories" in a casual and derogatory way, which shows that she is as yet unfamiliar with the American kindergartner's remarkable skill and power in the use of these resources. (Of course the American kindergartner does not use "foolish" stories; but stories she does use, and to good effect.) The Montessori programme involves much direct social experience, both in the general life of the school and in the manual work done by the pupils; the kindergarten extends the range of the child's social consciousness through the imagination. The groupings of the Montessori children are largely free and unregulated; the groupings of kindergarten children are more often formal and prescribed.[Pg xxiv]
In another general aspect, however, the agreement between the two systems, strong in principle, makes the Montessori system less formal rather than more formal in practice. The principle here is the acknowledgment of the child's need for social training. In the traditional kindergarten, this training is again sought, mainly through group games. These are usually imaginative and sometimes quite symbolic; that is, the children[Pg xxiii] pretend to be farmers, millers, shoemakers, parents, birds, animals, knights, or soldiers; they sing songs, engage in certain semi-dramatic activities—like "opening the pigeon house," "mowing the grass," "showing the good child to the knights," and the like; and each child plays a role in representing some typical social scenario. The social training in these games is formal only in the sense that the children are not involved, as Montessori children often are, in real social activities, such as serving dinner, cleaning the room, caring for animals, building a toy house, or making a garden. It's important to emphasize that even the most conservative kindergarten does not, in principle, exclude "real" activities of this kind; but during a three-hour session, it does very little with them. Liberal kindergartens do more, especially in Europe, where sessions are often longer. The Montessori system does not completely exclude imaginative group games either. However, Dr. Montessori, despite showing a deep interest in social training, as well as aesthetic, idealistic, and even religious development, refers to "games and silly stories" in a casual and dismissive manner, indicating that she is not yet familiar with the impressive skill and effectiveness American kindergartners have in using these resources. (Of course, American kindergartners don’t use "silly" stories; they do use stories, and effectively.) The Montessori program involves a lot of direct social experience, both in the daily life of the school and in the hands-on work done by the students; the kindergarten broadens the child's social awareness through imagination. The groupings of Montessori children are largely free and unregulated; the groupings of kindergarten children are more often structured and defined.[Pg xxiv]
On one point the Montessori system agrees with the conservative kindergarten, but not with the liberal: it prepares directly for the mastery of the school arts. There can be no doubt that Dr. Montessori has devised a peculiarly successful scheme for teaching children to write, an effective method for the introduction of reading, and good material for early number work. Both types of kindergarten increase, to be sure, the child's general capacity for expression: kindergarten activity adds to his stock of ideas, awakens and guides his imagination, increases his vocabulary, and trains him in the effective use of it. Children in a good kindergarten hear stories and tell them, recount their own experiences, sing songs, and recite verses, all in a company of friendly but fairly critical listeners, which does even more to stimulate and guide expression than does the circle at home. But even the conservative kindergarten does not teach children to write and to read. It does teach them a good deal about number; and it may fairly be questioned whether it does not do more fundamental work in this field than the Montessori system itself. The Froebelian gifts offer exceptional opportunity for concrete illustration of the conceptions of whole and part, through the creation of wholes from parts, and the breaking up of wholes into parts. This aspect of number is at least as important as the series aspect, which children get in counting and for which the Montessori "Long Stair" provides such good material. The Froebelian material may be used very readily for counting, however, and the Montessori material gives some slight opportunity for uniting and dividing. So far as preparation for arithmetic is concerned, a combination of the two bodies of material is both feasible and desirable. The liberal kindergarten, meanwhile, abandoning the use of the[Pg xxv] gifts and occupations for mathematical purposes, makes no attempt to prepare its pupils directly for the school arts.
On one point, the Montessori system aligns with the traditional kindergarten, but not with the progressive: it directly prepares children for mastering school skills. There’s no doubt that Dr. Montessori has created a particularly successful way to teach kids to write, an effective method for introducing reading, and solid materials for early math work. Both types of kindergarten certainly enhance a child's ability to express themselves: kindergarten activities add to their pool of ideas, spark and guide their imagination, expand their vocabulary, and teach them how to use it effectively. Kids in a good kindergarten hear stories and share their own experiences, sing songs, and recite poems, all in a supportive but somewhat critical environment, which does even more to encourage and refine their expression than the family circle at home. However, even the traditional kindergarten doesn’t teach kids to write and read. It does teach a lot about numbers; it’s fair to question whether it does more fundamental work in this area than the Montessori system itself. The Froebelian gifts provide an exceptional opportunity to concretely illustrate the concepts of whole and part, through creating wholes from parts and breaking wholes into parts. This part-whole aspect of numbers is at least as important as the series aspect, which children encounter when counting and for which the Montessori "Long Stair" offers great materials. The Froebelian materials can also be easily used for counting, while Montessori materials provide some minimal opportunities for combining and dividing. For preparing for arithmetic, using a mix of both types of materials is both feasible and beneficial. Meanwhile, the progressive kindergarten, which moves away from using the[Pg xxv] gifts and activities for math purposes, makes no effort to directly prepare its students for the school skills.
Compared with the kindergarten, then, the Montessori system presents these main points of interest: it carries out far more radically the principle of unrestricted liberty; its materials are intended for the direct and formal training of the senses; it includes apparatus designed to aid in the purely physical development of the children; its social training is carried out mainly by means of present and actual social activities; and it affords direct preparation for the school arts. The kindergarten, on the other hand, involves a certain amount of group-teaching, in which children are held—not necessarily by the enforcement of authority, yet by authority, confessedly, when other means fail—to definite activities; its materials are intended primarily for creative use by the children and offer opportunity for mathematical analysis and the teaching of design; and its procedure is rich in resources for the imagination. One thing should be made entirely clear and emphatic: in none of these characteristics are the two systems rigidly antagonistic. Much kindergarten activity is free, and the principle of prescription is not wholly given over by the "Houses of Childhood"—witness their Rules and Regulations; the kindergarten involves direct sense training, and the Montessori system admits some of the Froebel blocks for building and design; there are many purely muscular activities in the kindergarten, and some of the usual kindergarten games are used by Montessori; the kindergarten conducts some gardening, care of animals, construction-work, and domestic business, and the Montessori system admits a few imaginative social plays; both systems (but not the liberal form of the kindergarten)[Pg xxvi] work directly toward the school arts. Since the difference between the two programmes is one of arrangement, emphasis, and degree, there is no fundamental reason why a combination especially adapted to English and American schools cannot be worked out.
Compared to kindergarten, the Montessori system highlights several key points: it more fully embraces the idea of complete freedom; its materials are designed for direct and formal sensory training; it includes tools meant to support the children’s physical development; its social training mainly occurs through real, active social experiences; and it directly prepares children for academic skills. In contrast, kindergarten often involves some group teaching, where children are guided—sometimes through authority when other methods fail—to specific activities; its materials are mainly for creative use by the children and allow for mathematical analysis and design teaching; and its approach is rich in resources for imagination. It’s important to clarify that these two systems are not strictly opposed. Many kindergarten activities are free, and the guidelines are not entirely rigid in the "Houses of Childhood"—as seen in their Rules and Regulations; kindergarten includes direct sensory training, and Montessori incorporates some of the Froebel blocks for building and design; there are plenty of physical activities in kindergarten, and some common kindergarten games are also used in Montessori; kindergarten includes gardening, animal care, construction work, and household activities, while Montessori allows for a few imaginative social play activities; both systems (though not the more flexible type of kindergarten)[Pg xxvi] aim toward academic skills. Since the differences between the two programs are mainly about arrangement, focus, and intensity, there’s no fundamental reason why a combination that suits English and American schools can't be developed.
The broad contrast between a Montessori school and a kindergarten appears on actual observation to be this: whereas the Montessori children spend almost all their time handling things, largely according to their individual inclination and under individual guidance, kindergarten children are generally engaged in group work and games with an imaginative background and appeal. A possible principle of adjustment between the two systems might be stated thus: work with objects designed for formal sensory, motor, and intellectual training should be done individually or in purely voluntary groups; imaginative and social activity should be carried on in regulated groups. This principle is suggested only as a possible basis for education during the kindergarten age; for as children grow older they must be taught in classes, and they naturally learn how to carry out imaginative and social enterprises in free groups, and the former often alone. Nor should it be supposed that the principle is suggested as a rule to which there can be no exception. It is suggested simply as a general working hypothesis, the value of which must be tested in experience. Although it has long been observed by kindergartners themselves that group-work with the Froebelian materials, especially such work as involves geometrical analysis and formal design, soon tires the children, it has been held that the kindergartner could safeguard her pupils from loss of interest or real fatigue by watching carefully for the first signs of weariness and stopping the work promptly on their appearance. For[Pg xxvii] small groups of the older children, who can do work of this sort with ease and enjoyment, no doubt the inevitable restraint of group teaching is a negligible factor, the fatiguing effects of which any good kindergartner can forestall. But for younger children a régime of complete freedom would seem to promise better results—at least so far as work with objects is concerned. In games, on the other hand, group teaching means very little restraint and the whole process is less tiring any way. To differentiate in method between these two kinds of activity may be the best way to keep them both in an effective educational programme.
The clear difference between a Montessori school and a kindergarten becomes obvious when you observe them: Montessori kids spend nearly all their time working with things, mainly according to their personal interests and with individual guidance, while kindergarten kids typically participate in group activities and games that are imaginative and engaging. A possible approach to balance the two systems could be stated like this: tasks involving objects meant for structured sensory, motor, and intellectual training should be done individually or in voluntary groups, while imaginative and social activities should take place in organized groups. This idea is just a suggestion for educating children in kindergarten; as kids get older, they need to be taught in classrooms, and they naturally learn how to carry out imaginative and social projects in free groups, and often on their own. It shouldn't be assumed that this suggestion is a strict rule with no exceptions. It's presented merely as a general idea that needs to be tested through experience. Although kindergartners have long noticed that group work with Froebel materials, especially tasks involving geometric analysis and formal design, quickly tires children, they believe that the kindergartner can keep their students interested and prevent real fatigue by closely monitoring the first signs of weariness and stopping the work at the right time. For[Pg xxvii] small groups of older children, who can do this kind of work easily and enjoyably, the usual limitations of group teaching are likely a minor issue that a good kindergartner can manage. However, for younger children, a system with complete freedom might yield better results—at least regarding work with objects. In contrast, in games, group teaching involves very little restriction and is generally less tiring. Differentiating between these two types of activities may be the best way to keep both effective within an educational program.
To speak of an effective educational programme leads at once, however, to an important aspect of the Montessori system, quite aside from its relation to the kindergarten, with which this Introduction must now deal. This is the social aspect, which finds its explanation in Dr. Montessori's own story of her first school. In any discussion of the availability of the Montessori system in English and American schools—particularly in American public schools and English "Board" schools—two general conditions under which Dr. Montessori did her early work in Rome should be borne in mind. She had her pupils almost all day long, practically controlling their lives in their waking hours; and her pupils came for the most part from families of the laboring class. We cannot expect to achieve the results Dr. Montessori has achieved if we have our pupils under our guidance only two or three hours in the morning, nor can we expect exactly similar results from children whose heredity and experience make them at once more sensitive, more active, and less amenable to suggestion than hers. If we are to make practical application of the Montessori scheme we must not neglect to consider the[Pg xxviii] modifications of it which differing social conditions may render necessary.
Talking about an effective educational program brings us to an important aspect of the Montessori system, separate from its connection to kindergarten, which this Introduction will now address. This is the social aspect, explained by Dr. Montessori's own story of her first school. In any discussion about implementing the Montessori system in English and American schools—especially in American public schools and English "Board" schools—there are two key conditions from Dr. Montessori's early work in Rome that we should keep in mind. She had her students almost all day, practically controlling their lives during their waking hours, and her students mostly came from working-class families. We can't expect to achieve the same results Dr. Montessori did if we only have our students for two or three hours in the morning, nor can we expect similar outcomes from children whose backgrounds and experiences make them more sensitive, more active, and less open to suggestion than hers. To practically apply the Montessori approach, we must consider the adjustments that different social conditions may require.
The conditions under which Dr. Montessori started her original school in Rome do not, indeed, lack counterpart in large cities the world over. When one reads her eloquent "Inaugural Address" it is impossible not to wish that a "School within the Home" might stand as a centre of hopeful child life in the midst of every close-built city block. Better, of course, if there were no hive-like city tenements at all, and if every family could give to its own children on its own premises enough of "happy play in grassy places." Better if every mother and father were in certain ways an expert in child psychology and hygiene. But while so many unfortunate thousands still live in the hateful cliff-dwellings of our modern cities, we must welcome Dr. Montessori's large conception of the social function of her "Houses of Childhood" as a new gospel for the schools which serve the city poor. No matter what didactic apparatus such schools may use, they should learn of Dr. Montessori the need of longer hours, complete care of the children, closer co-operation with the home, and larger aims. In such schools, too, it is probable that the two fundamental features of Dr. Montessori's work—her principle of liberty and her scheme for sense training—will find their completest and most fruitful application.
The conditions under which Dr. Montessori started her original school in Rome are definitely similar to those found in big cities around the world. When you read her powerful "Inaugural Address," it's hard not to hope for a "School within the Home" to serve as a center of supportive child development in every densely populated city block. Of course, it would be better if there were no cramped city tenements at all, and if every family could provide their children with plenty of "happy play in grassy places." It would also be ideal if every mother and father had a good understanding of child psychology and hygiene. But as so many unfortunate thousands continue to live in the oppressive high-rise buildings of our modern cities, we must embrace Dr. Montessori's broad vision for her "Houses of Childhood" as a refreshing approach for the schools that serve the urban poor. Regardless of the teaching tools these schools may use, they should learn from Dr. Montessori the importance of longer hours, comprehensive care for the children, better collaboration with families, and greater aspirations. In these schools, it’s likely that the two key aspects of Dr. Montessori's work—her principle of freedom and her system for sensory education—will find their most complete and effective application.
It is just these fundamental features, however, which will be most bitterly attacked whenever the social status of the original Casa dei Bambini is forgotten. Anthropometric measurements, baths, training in personal self-care, the serving of meals, gardening, and the care of animals we may hear sweepingly recommended for all schools, even for those with a three-hour session and a socially favored class of pupils; but the need for individual[Pg xxix] liberty and for the training of the senses will be denied even in the work of schools where the conditions correspond closely to those at San Lorenzo. Of course no practical educator will actually propose bathtubs for all schools, and no doubt there will be plenty of wise conservatism about transferring to a given school any function now well discharged by the homes that support it. The problems raised by the proposal to apply in all schools the Montessori conception of discipline and the Montessori sense-training are really more difficult to solve. Is individual liberty a universal educational principle, or a principle which must be modified in the case of a school with no such social status as that of the original "House of Childhood"? Do all children need sense training, or only those of unfavorable inheritance and home environment? No serious discussion of the Montessori system can avoid these questions. What is said in answer to them here is written in the hope that subsequent discussion may be somewhat influenced to keep in view the really deciding factor in each case—the actual situation in the school.
It’s these basic features that will face the most intense criticism whenever people forget the social status of the original Casa dei Bambini. We might hear broad recommendations for things like anthropometric measurements, baths, personal care training, meal serving, gardening, and animal care for all schools, even those with short three-hour sessions and privileged students; but the necessity for individual[Pg xxix] freedom and sensory training will often be overlooked, even in schools that closely resemble the conditions at San Lorenzo. Of course, no practical educator would actually suggest that every school should have bathtubs, and there will likely be a lot of cautious conservatism about applying any functions that homes currently handle well. The challenges raised by the idea of implementing the Montessori approach to discipline and sensory training in all schools are much tougher to address. Is individual freedom a universal educational principle, or does it need to be adjusted for schools lacking the social status of the original "House of Childhood"? Do all children require sensory training, or just those coming from disadvantaged backgrounds? A serious exploration of the Montessori system can't ignore these questions. What is presented here in response to them is intended to encourage further discussions to focus on the crucial factor in each situation—the actual circumstances in the school.
There is occasion enough in these questions, to be sure, for philosophical and scientific argument. The first question involves an ethical issue, the second a psychological issue, and both may be followed through to purely metaphysical issues. Dr. Montessori believes in liberty for the pupil because she thinks of life "as a superb goddess, ever advancing to new conquests." Submission, loyalty, self-sacrifice seem to her, apparently, only incidental necessities of life, not essential elements of its eternal form. There is obvious opportunity here for profound difference of philosophic theory and belief. She seems to hold, too, that sense perception forms the sole basis for the mental and hence for the moral life; that "sense training will pre[Pg xxx]pare the ordered foundation upon which the child may build up a clear and strong mentality," including, apparently, his moral ideals; and that the cultivation of purpose and of the imaginative and creative capacities of children is far less important than the development of the power to learn from the environment by means of the senses. These views seem to agree rather closely with those of Herbart and to some extent with those of Locke. Certainly they offer material for both psychological and ethical debate. Possibly, however, Dr. Montessori would not accept the views here ascribed to her on the evidence of this book; and in any case these are matters for the philosopher and the psychologist. A pedagogical issue is never wholly an issue of high principle.
There's plenty of room in these questions for philosophical and scientific debate. The first question raises an ethical issue, the second a psychological issue, and both can lead to purely metaphysical discussions. Dr. Montessori advocates for the freedom of the student because she views life "as a superb goddess, ever advancing to new conquests." She appears to see submission, loyalty, and self-sacrifice as merely necessary parts of life, not essential elements of its eternal nature. There’s clearly a chance for significant differences in philosophical beliefs and theories here. She also seems to assert that sense perception is the only foundation for mental and, therefore, moral life; that "sense training will prepare the ordered foundation upon which the child may build up a clear and strong mentality," which also includes his moral ideals; and that nurturing purpose and imaginative and creative skills in children is much less vital than developing the ability to learn from their surroundings through their senses. These ideas seem to align quite closely with those of Herbart and somewhat with Locke. They certainly provide material for both psychological and ethical discussions. However, Dr. Montessori might not agree with the interpretations made here based on the evidence from this book; and in any case, these are issues for philosophers and psychologists. A pedagogical issue is never entirely a matter of high principle.
Can it reasonably be maintained, then, that an actual situation like that in the first "House of Childhood" at Rome is the only situation in which the Montessori principle of liberty can justifiably find full application? Evidently the Roman school is a true Republic of Childhood, in which nothing need take precedence of the child's claim to pursue an active purpose of his own. Social restraints are here reduced to a minimum; the children must, to be sure, subordinate individual caprice to the demands of the common good, they are not allowed to quarrel or to interfere with each other, and they have duties to perform at stated times; but each child is a citizen in a community governed wholly in the interests of the equally privileged members thereof, his liberty is rarely interfered with, he is free to carry out his own purposes, and he has as much influence in the affairs of the commonwealth as the average member of an adult democracy. This situation is never duplicated in the home, for a child is not only a member of the family, whose interests are to be considered with[Pg xxxi] the rest, but literally a subordinate member, whose interests must often be frankly set aside for those of an adult member or for those of the household itself. Children must come to dinner at dinner time, even if continued digging in the sand would be more to their liking or better for their general development of muscle, mind, or will. It is possible, of course, to refine on the theory of the child's membership in the family community and of the right of elders to command, but practically it remains true that the common conditions of family life prohibit any such freedom as is exercised in a Montessori school. In the same way a school of large enrollment that elects to cover in a given time so much work that individual initiative cannot be trusted to compass it, is forced to teach certain things at nine o'clock and others at ten, and to teach in groups; and the individual whose life is thus cabined and confined must get what he can. For a given school the obvious question is, Considering the work to be done in the time allowed, can we give up the safeguards of a fixed programme and group teaching? The deeper question lies here: Is the work to be done in itself so important that it is worth while to have the children go through it under compulsion or on interest induced by the teacher? Or to put it another way: May not the work be so much less important than the child's freedom that we had better trust to native curiosity and cleverly devised materials anyway and run the risk of his losing part of the work, or even the whole of it?
Is it reasonable to say that an actual situation like the one in the first "House of Childhood" in Rome is the only place where the Montessori principle of freedom can truly be applied? Clearly, the Roman school is a genuine Republic of Childhood, where the child's right to pursue their own active interests takes precedence. Social rules are kept to a minimum; children must, of course, put aside personal whims for the common good, they can't fight or interfere with each other, and they have specific responsibilities to fulfill at designated times; but each child is a member of a community that operates entirely for the benefit of all its equally valued members. Their freedom is rarely challenged, they can follow their own goals, and they have as much say in community matters as the average adult citizen in a democracy. This kind of situation can’t really be found at home, because a child is not only part of the family, whose interests must be considered alongside others, but is also a subordinate member, whose needs are often set aside for those of adults or the household. Children have to come to dinner at dinner time, even if they’d rather keep playing in the sand, which might be better for their physical, mental, or emotional development. It’s possible to refine the idea of a child's role in the family and the authority of elders, but in practice, the typical conditions of family life don’t allow for the kind of freedom that exists in a Montessori school. Likewise, a large school that decides to cover a lot of material in a short time can’t trust individual initiative to handle it all; they must schedule some lessons for nine o'clock and others for ten, and teach in groups. The individual who finds their life limited and restricted must make do with whatever they can get. The key question for any school is, given the amount of work that needs to be done in the available time, can we afford to give up the structure of a fixed schedule and group teaching? The deeper question is: Is the work we need to cover so important that it’s worth making children go through it under pressure or to motivate them with the teacher's influence? Or to put it another way: Is the work possibly so much less important than the child’s freedom that we might be better off trusting their natural curiosity and well-designed materials anyway, even if it risks them missing out on some of the work, or even all of it?
For schools beyond the primary grade there will be no doubt as to the answer to this question. There are many ways in which school work may safely be kept from being the deadening and depressing process it so often is, but the giving up of all fixed and limited schedules and the[Pg xxxii] prescriptions of class teaching is not one of them. Even if complete liberty of individual action were possible in schools of higher grade, it is not certain that it would be desirable: for we must learn to take up many of our purposes in life under social imperative. But with young children the question becomes more difficult. What work do we wish to make sure that each child does? If our schools can keep but half a day, is there time enough for every child to cover this work without group teaching at stated times? Is the prescription and restraint involved in such group teaching really enough to do the children any harm or to make our teaching less effective? Can we not give up prescription altogether for parts of the work and minimise it for others? The general question of individual liberty is thus reduced to a series of practical problems of adjustment. It is no longer a question of total liberty or no liberty at all, but a question of the practical mediation of these extremes. When we consider, furthermore, that the teacher's skill and the attractiveness of her personality, the alluring power of the didactic apparatus and the ease with which it enables children to learn, to say nothing of a cheerful and pleasant room and the absence of set desks and seats, may all work together to prevent scheduled teaching in groups from becoming in the least an occasion for restraint, it is plain that in any given school there may be ample justification for abating the rigour of Dr. Montessori's principle of freedom. Every school must work out its own solution of the problem in the face of its particular conditions.
For schools beyond elementary grades, there's no doubt about the answer to this question. There are many ways to ensure that schoolwork doesn't become the dull and depressing process it often is, but abandoning all fixed schedules and the requirements of class teaching isn't one of them. Even if total freedom of individual action were possible in higher-grade schools, it's not guaranteed to be a good idea; we need to learn to pursue many of our life goals under social obligations. However, with young children, the question gets trickier. What work do we want to ensure every child completes? If our schools can only operate for half a day, is there enough time for each child to do this work without group teaching at scheduled times? Does the structure and limitations of group teaching really harm the children or make our teaching less effective? Can't we eliminate requirements entirely for parts of the work and reduce them for others? The broader question of individual liberty then becomes a series of practical adjustment issues. It is no longer about total freedom versus no freedom, but about finding practical ways to mediate these extremes. Moreover, when we consider the teacher's skill, the appeal of her personality, the engaging power of teaching tools, and the comfort of a cheerful classroom without rigid desks and seating, it becomes clear that in any given school, there might be plenty of reasons to ease the strictness of Dr. Montessori's principle of freedom. Each school must find its own solution to this problem based on its unique circumstances.
The adoption of sense-training would seem to be much less a matter for variable decision. Some children may need less than others, but for all children between the ages of three and five the Montessori material will prove fas[Pg xxxiii]cinating as well as profitable. A good deal of modern educational theory has been based on the belief that children are interested only in what has social value, social content, or "real use"; yet a day with any normal child will give ample evidence of the delight that children take in purely formal exercises. The sheer fascination of tucking cards under the edge of a rug will keep a baby happy until any ordinary supply of cards is exhausted; and the wholly sensory appeal of throwing stones into the water gives satisfaction enough to absorb for a long time the attention of older children—to say nothing of grown-ups. The Montessori apparatus satisfies sense hunger when it is keen for new material, and it has besides a puzzle-interest which children eagerly respond to. Dr. Montessori subordinates the value of the concrete mental content her material supplies to its value in rendering the senses more acute; yet it is by no means certain that this content—purely formal as it is—does not also give the material much of its importance. Indeed, the refinement of sensory discrimination may not in itself be particularly valuable. What Professor G. M. Whipple says on this point in his Manual of Menial and Physical Tests (p. 130) has much weight:
The adoption of sense-training seems to be much less a matter of personal choice. Some children may need less than others, but for all kids between the ages of three and five, the Montessori materials will be both fascinating and beneficial. A lot of modern educational theory is based on the idea that children are only interested in things with social value, social relevance, or practical use; however, spending a day with any typical child shows how much joy they find in purely formal activities. The simple pleasure of tucking cards under the edge of a rug can keep a baby entertained until all the cards are gone, and the purely sensory appeal of throwing stones into the water captivates older children—and even adults—for a long time. The Montessori materials satisfy a child’s craving for new experiences, and they also have a puzzle-like interest that children eagerly engage with. Dr. Montessori prioritizes the enhancement of sensory perception that her materials provide over the actual concrete mental content they offer, but it’s not clear that this mental content—though purely formal—doesn’t also contribute significantly to the materials’ importance. In fact, simply refining sensory discrimination might not hold much value in itself. What Professor G. M. Whipple mentions about this in his Manual of Mental and Physical Tests (p. 130) is quite compelling:
The use of sensory tests in correlation work is particularly interesting. In general, some writers are convinced that keen discrimination is a prerequisite to keen intelligence, while others are equally convinced that intelligence is essentially conditioned by "higher" processes, and only remotely by sensory capacity—barring, of course, such diminution of capacity as to interfere seriously with the experiencing of sensations, as in partial deafness or partial loss of vision. While it is scarcely the place here to discuss the evolutionary significance of discriminative sensitivity, it may be pointed out that the normal capacity is many times in excess of the actual demands of life, and that it is consequently difficult to understand why nature has been so prolific and generous; to[Pg xxxiv] understand, in other words, what is the sanction for the seemingly hypertrophied discriminative capacity of the human sense organs. The usual "teleological explanations" of our sensory life fail to account for this discrepancy. Again, the very fact of the existence of this surplus capacity seems to negative at the outset the notion that sensory capacity can be a conditioning factor in intelligence—with the qualification already noted.
The use of sensory tests in correlation work is particularly intriguing. In general, some authors believe that sharp discrimination is essential for sharp intelligence, while others are equally convinced that intelligence mainly relies on "higher" processes and is only indirectly influenced by sensory ability—unless, of course, there's a significant reduction in capacity that seriously affects the ability to experience sensations, like in cases of partial deafness or partial vision loss. While this isn't the right place to discuss the evolutionary importance of discriminative sensitivity, it's worth noting that normal capacity far exceeds the actual demands of life, making it hard to comprehend why nature has been so abundant and generous; in other words, what justifies the apparently excessive discriminative capacity of human sense organs. The typical "teleological explanations" for our sensory experiences fail to explain this gap. Moreover, the mere existence of this surplus capacity seems to challenge the idea that sensory capacity could significantly influence intelligence—with the exception already mentioned.
It is quite possible that the real pedagogical value of the Montessori apparatus is due to the fact that it keeps children happily engaged in the exercise of their senses and their fingers when they crave such exercise most and to the further fact that it teaches them without the least strain a good deal about forms and materials. These values are not likely to be much affected by differing school conditions.
It’s very likely that the true educational value of the Montessori materials comes from the way they keep kids happily engaged in using their senses and hands when they need that activity the most. Additionally, these tools teach them a lot about shapes and materials without any pressure. These benefits probably won’t be significantly influenced by different school environments.
In the use of the material for sense-training, English and American teachers may find profit in two general warnings. First, it should not be supposed that sense training alone will accomplish all that Dr. Montessori accomplishes through the whole range of her school activities. To fill up most of a morning with sense-training is to give it (except perhaps in the case of the youngest pupils) undue importance. It is not even certain that the general use of the senses will be much affected by it, to say nothing of the loss of opportunity for larger physical and social activity. Second, the isolation of the senses should be used with some care. To shut off sight is to take one step toward sleep, and the requirement that a child concentrate his attention, in this situation, on the sense perceptions he gets by other means than vision must not be maintained too long. No small strain is involved in mental action without the usual means of information and control.
When using materials for sensory training, English and American teachers should keep two main warnings in mind. First, it shouldn't be assumed that sensory training alone can achieve everything that Dr. Montessori does through her full range of school activities. Spending most of the morning on sensory training gives it (except maybe for the youngest students) too much importance. It's uncertain whether this will significantly impact the overall use of the senses, not to mention the missed opportunities for broader physical and social engagement. Second, isolating the senses should be approached with care. Blocking out sight can lead to a state closer to sleep, and requiring a child to focus solely on the sensory information they receive from other senses without using their vision shouldn't be enforced for too long. There's a considerable strain involved in mental activities without the usual sources of information and control.
The proposal, mentioned above, of a feasible combina[Pg xxxv]tion of the Montessori system and the kindergarten may now be set forth. If it is put very briefly and without defense or prophecy, it is because it is made without dogmatism, simply in the hope that it will prove suggestive to some open-minded teacher who is willing to try out any scheme that promises well for her pupils. The conditions supposed are those of the ordinary American public-school kindergarten, with a two-year programme beginning with children three and a half or four years old, a kindergarten with not too many pupils, with a competent kindergartner and assistant kindergartner, and with some help from training-school students.
The proposal mentioned earlier for a workable combination of the Montessori method and kindergarten can now be presented. If it's stated briefly and without extensive justification or predictions, it's because it's offered without strict adherence to doctrine, simply hoping to inspire some open-minded teacher willing to experiment with any approach that looks promising for her students. The assumed conditions are those of a typical American public school kindergarten, featuring a two-year program starting with children around three and a half or four years old, a kindergarten with a manageable number of students, and a qualified lead teacher and assistant teacher, along with some support from training school students.
The first proposal is for the use of the Montessori material during the better part of the first year instead of the regular Froebelian material. To the use of the Montessori devices—including the gymnastic apparatus—some of the time now devoted to pictures and stories should also be applied. It is not suggested that no Froebelian material should be used, but that the two systems be woven into each other, with a gradual transition from the free, individual use of the Montessori objects to the same sort of use of the large sizes of the Froebel gifts, especially the second, third, and fourth. When the children seem to be ready for it, a certain amount of more formal work with the gifts should be begun. In the second year the Froebelian gift work should predominate, without absolute exclusion of the Montessori exercises. In the latter part of the second year the Montessori exercises preparatory to writing should be introduced. Throughout the second year the full time for stories and picture work should be given to them, and in both years the morning circle and the games should be carried on as usual. The luncheon period should of course remain the same. One part of Dr. Mon[Pg xxxvi]tessori's programme the kindergartner and her assistant should use every effort to incorporate in their work—the valuable training in self-help and independent action afforded in the care of the materials and equipment by the children themselves. This need not be confined to the Montessori apparatus. Children who have been trained to take out, use, and put away the Montessori objects until they are ready for the far richer variety of material in the Froebelian system, should be able to care for it also. Of course if there are children who can return in the afternoon, it would be very interesting to attempt the gardening, which both Froebel and Montessori recommend, and the Montessori vase-work.
The first proposal is to use Montessori materials for most of the first year instead of the usual Froebelian materials. Some of the time currently spent on pictures and stories should be devoted to using Montessori tools, including gym equipment. It's not suggested that Froebelian materials be entirely excluded, but rather that both systems be integrated, gradually transitioning from the free, individual use of Montessori objects to using the larger sizes of Froebel gifts, especially the second, third, and fourth. When the children are ready, some more formal work with the gifts should start. In the second year, Froebelian gift work should be more prominent, but Montessori activities should not be completely eliminated. Toward the end of the second year, Montessori exercises that prepare for writing should be introduced. Throughout the second year, enough time should be allocated for stories and picture activities, and in both years, the morning circle and games should continue as usual. The lunch period should, of course, stay the same. One aspect of Dr. Montessori's program that the kindergarten teacher and her assistant should strive to incorporate into their work is the important training in self-help and independent action provided through the care of materials and equipment by the children themselves. This doesn’t have to be limited to the Montessori equipment. Children who have learned to take out, use, and put away Montessori objects should also be able to care for the richer variety of materials found in the Froebelian system. If there are children who can return in the afternoon, it would be very engaging to try gardening, which both Froebel and Montessori recommend, as well as Montessori vase work.
For the possible scorn of those to whom all compromise is distasteful, the author of this Introduction seeks but one compensation—that any kindergartner who may happen to adopt his suggestion will let him study the results.
For the potential disdain of those who dislike compromise, the author of this Introduction asks for just one reward—that any kindergartner who decides to follow his suggestion will allow him to observe the outcomes.
As to the use of the Montessori system in the home, one or two remarks must suffice. In the first place, parents should not expect that the mere presence of the material in the nursery will be enough to work an educational miracle. A Montessori directress does no common "teaching," but she is called upon for very skillful and very tiring effort. She must watch, assist, inspire, suggest, guide, explain, correct, inhibit. She is supposed, in addition, to contribute by her work to the upbuilding of a new science of pedagogy; but her educational efforts—and education is not an investigative and experimental effort, but a practical and constructive one—are enough to exhaust all her time, strength, and ingenuity. It will do no harm—except perhaps to the material itself—to have the Montessori material at hand in the home, but it must be used[Pg xxxvii] under proper guidance if it is to be educationally effective. And besides, it must not be forgotten that the material is by no means the most important feature of the Montessori programme. The best use of the Montessori system in the home will come through the reading of this book. If parents shall learn from Dr. Montessori something of the value of child life, of its need for activity, of its characteristic modes of expression, and of its possibilities, and shall apply this knowledge wisely, the work of the great Italian educator will be successful enough.
Regarding the use of the Montessori system at home, a couple of points should be made. First, parents shouldn't assume that just having the materials in the nursery will magically lead to educational success. A Montessori teacher doesn't engage in typical "teaching"; her role involves a lot of skillful and sometimes exhausting work. She needs to observe, assist, inspire, suggest, guide, explain, correct, and even hold back at times. Plus, she's expected to help develop a new science of education. However, her educational efforts—education isn’t just about research and experimentation; it’s practical and constructive—will consume all her time, energy, and creativity. Having the Montessori materials available at home won't hurt—unless it perhaps damages the materials themselves—but they need to be used with proper guidance to be educationally effective. It's also important to remember that the materials aren't the most crucial part of the Montessori program. The best way to utilize the Montessori system at home is by reading this book. If parents learn from Dr. Montessori about the value of child life, the importance of activity, their unique ways of expressing themselves, and their potential, and wisely apply this knowledge, then the efforts of the great Italian educator will be quite successful.
This Introduction cannot close without some discussion, however limited, of the important problems suggested by the Montessori method of teaching children to write and to read. We have in American schools admirable methods for the teaching of reading; by the Aldine method, for instance, children of fair ability read without difficulty ten or more readers in the first school year, and advance rapidly toward independent power. Our instruction in writing, however, has never been particularly noteworthy. We have been trying recently to teach children to write a flowing hand by the "arm movement," without much formation of separate letters by the fingers, and our results seem to prove that the effort with children before the age of ten is not worth while. Sensible school officers are content to let children in the first four grades write largely by drawing the letters, and there has been, a fairly general conviction that writing is not in any case especially important before the age of eight or nine. In view of Dr. Montessori's success in teaching children of four and five to write with ease and skill, must we not revise our estimate of the value of writing and our procedure in teaching it? What changes may we profitably introduce in our teaching of reading?[Pg xxxviii]
This Introduction can't wrap up without discussing, even briefly, the significant issues raised by the Montessori method for teaching kids to read and write. In American schools, we have great methods for teaching reading; for example, with the Aldine method, children with average abilities can read ten or more books in their first school year and move quickly towards reading independently. However, our approach to teaching writing has never been particularly impressive. Recently, we've been trying to teach kids to write in a smooth style using an "arm movement," without much involvement of their fingers to form separate letters, and the results suggest that this effort with kids younger than ten isn't worthwhile. Smart school administrators are okay with kids in the first four grades writing mostly by shaping the letters, and there's been a general belief that writing isn't very important before the age of eight or nine. Given Dr. Montessori's success in teaching four- and five-year-olds to write with ease and skill, shouldn't we reconsider how we value writing and our methods of teaching it? What changes can we beneficially make in our approach to teaching reading?[Pg xxxviii]
Here again our theory and our practice have suffered from the headstrong advocacy of general principles. Because by clumsy methods children used to be kept at the task of learning the school arts to the undoubted detriment of their minds and bodies, certain writers have advocated the total exclusion of reading and writing from the early grades. Many parents refuse to send their children to school until they are eight, preferring to let them "run wild." This attitude is well justified by school conditions in some places; but where the schools are good, it ignores not only the obvious advantages of school life quite aside from instruction in written language, but also the almost complete absence of strain afforded by modern methods. Now that the Montessori system adds a new and promising method to our resources, it is the more unreasonable: for as a fact normal children are eager to read and write at six, and have plenty of use for these accomplishments.
Once again, our theory and practice have been hampered by the stubborn insistence on broad principles. Because of outdated methods, children were often forced to stick to learning basic skills, which harmed their mental and physical well-being. Some writers have pushed for completely dropping reading and writing in early grades. Many parents choose not to send their kids to school until they turn eight, opting instead to let them "run wild." While this mindset can be justified by poor school conditions in some areas, it overlooks the clear benefits of school life beyond just learning to read and write, and the lack of stress that modern teaching methods provide. With the Montessori system introducing a fresh and effective approach, this stance seems even more unreasonable; normal children are actually eager to read and write by age six and have plenty of opportunities to use these skills.
This does not mean, however, that reading and writing are so important for young children that they should be unduly emphasised. If we can teach them without strain, let us do so, and the more effectively the better; but let us remember, as Dr. Montessori does, that reading and writing should form but a subordinate part of the experience of a child and should minister in general to his other needs. With the best of methods the value of reading and writing before six is questionable. Our conscious life is bookish enough as it is, and it would seem on general grounds a safer policy to defer written language until the age of normal interest in it, and even then not to devote to it more time than an easy and gradual mastery demands.
This doesn’t mean, though, that reading and writing are so crucial for young kids that we should overemphasize them. If we can teach them without putting too much pressure on them, then let’s do that, and the more effectively the better; but let’s keep in mind, as Dr. Montessori does, that reading and writing should only be a small part of a child’s overall experience and should support their other needs. Even with the best methods, the importance of reading and writing before age six is questionable. Our everyday lives are already filled with books, and it seems safer to wait until children have a natural interest in written language before introducing it, and even then, we shouldn’t spend more time on it than is needed for a relaxed and gradual understanding.
Of the technical advantages of the Montessori scheme[Pg xxxix] for writing there can be little doubt. The child gains ready control over his pencil through exercises which have their own simple but absorbing interest; and if he does not learn to write with an "arm movement," we may be quite content with his ability to draw a legible and handsome script. Then he learns the letters—their forms, their names, and how to make them—through exercises which have the very important technical characteristic of involving a thorough sensory analysis of the material to be mastered. Meumann has taught us of late the great value in all memory work of complete impression through prolonged and intensive analytical study. In the teaching of spelling, for instance, it is comparatively useless to devise schemes for remembering unless the original impressions are made strong and elaborate; and it is only by careful, varied, and detailed sense impression that such material as the alphabet can be thus impressed. So effective is the Montessori scheme for impressing the letters—especially because of its novel use of the sense of touch—that the children learn how to make the whole alphabet before the abstract and formal character of the material leads to any diminution of interest or enthusiasm. Their initial curiosity over the characters they see their elders use is enough to carry them through.
The technical benefits of the Montessori approach for writing are undeniable. Children quickly gain control over their pencils through engaging exercises that are simple yet captivating; even if they don’t learn to write using "arm movements," we can be satisfied with their ability to create a clear and attractive script. They start learning the letters—their shapes, names, and how to write them—through activities that require a thorough sensory analysis of the materials. Recently, Meumann has highlighted the importance of creating strong, lasting impressions through in-depth analytical study in all memory tasks. For example, in teaching spelling, it’s largely ineffective to create memory aids unless the original learning experiences are strong and detailed; effective learning of the alphabet relies on careful, varied, and thorough sensory impressions. The Montessori method effectively instills knowledge of the letters—particularly through its innovative use of touch—allowing children to learn the entire alphabet before the abstract nature of the material diminishes their interest or enthusiasm. Their initial curiosity about the letters they see adults use is enough to keep them engaged.
In Italian the next step is easy. The letters once learned, it is a simple matter to combine them into words, for Italian spelling is so nearly phonetic that it presents very little difficulty to any one who knows how to pronounce. It is at just this point that the teaching of English reading by the Montessori method will find its greatest obstacle. Indeed, it is the unphonetic character of English spelling that has largely influenced us to give up the alphabet method of teaching children to read. Other reasons,[Pg xl] to be sure, have also induced us to teach by the word and the sentence method; but this one has been and will continue to be the deciding factor. We have found it more effective to teach children whole words, sentences, or rhymes by sight, adding to sense impressions the interest aroused by a wide range of associations, and then analysing the words thus acquired into their phonetic elements to give the children independent power in the acquisition of new words. Our marked success with this method makes it by no means certain that it is "in the characteristic process of natural development" for children to build up written words from their elements—sounds and syllables. It would seem, on the contrary, as James concluded, that the mind works quite as naturally in the opposite direction—grasping wholes first, especially such as have a practical interest, and then working down to their formal elements. In the teaching of spelling, of course, the wholes (words) are already known at sight—that is, the pupil recognises them easily in reading—and the process aims at impressing upon the child's mind the exact order of their constituent elements. It is because reading and spelling are in English such completely separate processes that we can teach a child to read admirably without making him a "good speller" and are forced to bring him to the latter glorious state by new endeavours. We gain by this separation both in reading and in spelling, as experience and comparative tests—popular superstition to the contrary notwithstanding—have conclusively proved. The mastery of the alphabet by the Montessori method will be of great assistance in teaching our children to write, but of only incidental assistance in teaching them to read and to spell.
In Italian, the next step is simple. Once you learn the letters, it's easy to put them together into words because Italian spelling is so close to how it's pronounced that anyone who knows how to say the words won’t have much trouble. This is exactly where teaching English reading using the Montessori method faces its biggest challenge. The main issue is that English spelling isn’t phonetic, which has largely influenced our decision to abandon the alphabet method for teaching kids to read. Other factors, [Pg xl] have also led us to use the word and sentence method, but this one remains the key reason. We’ve found that it works better to teach children whole words, sentences, or rhymes by sight, enhancing their understanding with a wide range of associations, and then breaking down the words they learned into their phonetic parts to help them gain independence in learning new words. Our success with this method doesn’t guarantee that it’s “the natural process of development” for children to build written words from sounds and syllables. On the contrary, as James concluded, the mind seems to work just as naturally in the opposite direction—first understanding complete concepts, especially those that have practical value, before breaking them down into their basic parts. When teaching spelling, of course, the whole words are already recognized visually—that is, the student easily identifies them when reading—and the goal is to reinforce the exact sequence of their individual components in the child’s mind. Because reading and spelling in English are such distinct processes, we can teach a child to read well without making them a "good speller," and we have to help them achieve that latter skill through additional effort. This separation benefits both reading and spelling, as experience and comparative tests—popular myths aside—have conclusively shown. Mastering the alphabet through the Montessori method will greatly help our children learn to write, but it will only provide incidental support in teaching them to read and spell.
Once more, then, this Introduction attempts to suggest[Pg xli] a compromise. In the school arts the programme used to such good effect in the Italian schools and the programme which has been so well worked out in English and American schools may be profitably combined. We can learn much about writing and reading from Dr. Montessori—especially from the freedom her children have in the process of learning to write and in the use of their newly acquired power, as well as from her device for teaching them to read connected prose. We can use her materials for sense training and lead as she does to easy mastery of the alphabetic symbols. Our own schemes for teaching reading we can retain, and doubtless the phonetic analysis they involve we shall find easier and more effective because of our adoption of the Montessori scheme for teaching the letters. The exact adjustment of the two methods is of course a task for teachers in practice and for educational leaders.
Once again, this Introduction aims to suggest[Pg xli] a compromise. The art programs that were so effective in Italian schools can be combined with the well-developed programs in English and American schools. We can learn a lot about writing and reading from Dr. Montessori—especially from the freedom her students have while learning to write and using their new skills, as well as from her method for teaching them to read connected prose. We can utilize her materials for sensory training and, like she does, lead to an easy understanding of the alphabetic symbols. We can keep our own reading instruction plans, and the phonetic analysis they include will likely become easier and more effective thanks to our adoption of the Montessori approach to teaching letters. The precise integration of these two methods is, of course, a task for practicing teachers and educational leaders.
To all educators this book should prove most interesting. Not many of them will expect that the Montessori method will regenerate humanity. Not many will wish to see it—or any method—produce a generation of prodigies such as those who have been heralded recently in America. Not many will approve the very early acquisition by children of the arts of reading and writing. But all who are fair-minded will admit the genius that shines from the pages which follow, and the remarkable suggestiveness of Dr. Montessori's labors. It is the task of the professional student of education to-day to submit all systems to careful comparative study, and since Dr. Montessori's inventive power has sought its tests in practical experience rather than in comparative investigation, this duller task remains to be done. But however he may scrutinise the results of her work, the educator who reads of it here will honour[Pg xlii] in the Dottoressa Maria Montessori the enthusiasm, the patience, and the constructive insight of the scientist and the friend of humanity.
To all educators, this book should be quite interesting. Not many will expect that the Montessori method will change humanity. Not many will want to see it—or any method—create a generation of prodigies like those recently celebrated in America. Not many will approve of very young children learning to read and write. Yet, all fair-minded individuals will acknowledge the brilliance that comes through in the following pages, along with the incredible inspiration from Dr. Montessori's work. The task of today's professional education researcher is to carefully compare all systems, and since Dr. Montessori's creative approach was based on practical experience rather than comparative studies, that more tedious work is still left to be done. However, regardless of how they analyze the results of her work, the educator who reads about it here will appreciate in Dottoressa Maria Montessori the enthusiasm, patience, and insightful innovation of both a scientist and a friend to humanity.[Pg xlii]
Henry W. Holmes.
Henry W. Holmes.
Harvard University,
February 22, 1912.
Harvard University,
February 22, 1912.
THE MONTESSORI METHOD
CHAPTER I
A Critical Look at the New Teaching Methods and Their Connection to Modern Science
It is not my intention to present a treatise on Scientific Pedagogy. The modest design of these incomplete notes is to give the results of an experiment that apparently opens the way for putting into practice those new principles of science which in these last years are tending to revolutionise the work of education.
It’s not my goal to write a detailed study on Scientific Pedagogy. The simple aim of these incomplete notes is to share the results of an experiment that seems to pave the way for applying the new scientific principles that have been changing the field of education in recent years.
Much has been said in the past decade concerning the tendency of pedagogy, following in the footsteps of medicine, to pass beyond the purely speculative stage and base its conclusions on the positive results of experimentation. Physiological or experimental psychology which, from Weber and Fechner to Wundt, has become organised into a new science, seems destined to furnish to the new pedagogy that fundamental preparation which the old-time metaphysical psychology furnished to philosophical pedagogy. Morphological anthropology applied to the physical study of children, is also a strong element in the growth of the new pedagogy.
A lot has been discussed over the past decade about how education is moving beyond theory, much like medicine, and is starting to base its conclusions on actual experimental results. Physiological or experimental psychology, which has evolved from Weber and Fechner to Wundt into a formal science, seems set to provide the new education methods with the essential foundation that traditional metaphysical psychology offered to philosophical education. Additionally, morphological anthropology, applied to the physical study of children, is also a significant factor in the development of new educational approaches.
But in spite of all these tendencies, Scientific Pedagogy has never yet been definitely constructed nor defined. It is something vague of which we speak, but which does not,[Pg 2] in reality, exist. We might say that it has been, up to the present time, the mere intuition or suggestion of a science which, by the aid of the positive and experimental sciences that have renewed the thought of the nineteenth century, must emerge from the mist and clouds that have surrounded it. For man, who has formed a new world through scientific progress, must himself be prepared and developed through a new pedagogy. But I will not attempt to speak of this more fully here.
But despite all these trends, Scientific Pedagogy has yet to be clearly established or defined. It's something vague that we talk about, but it doesn't, [Pg 2] in reality, exist. We could say that up to now, it has been merely an intuition or a suggestion of a science that, with the help of the positive and experimental sciences that have transformed thinking in the nineteenth century, must emerge from the fog and uncertainty that have surrounded it. After all, people who have created a new world through scientific advancement must also be prepared for and supported by a new approach to education. However, I won't try to delve into this more deeply here.
Several years ago, a well-known physician established in Italy a School of Scientific Pedagogy, the object of which was to prepare teachers to follow the new movement which had begun to be felt in the pedagogical world. This school had, for two or three years, a great success, so great, indeed, that teachers from all over Italy flocked to it, and it was endowed by the City of Milan with a splendid equipment of scientific material. Indeed, its beginnings were most propitious, and liberal help was afforded it in the hope that it might be possible to establish, through the experiments carried on there, "the science of forming man."
Several years ago, a well-known doctor set up a School of Scientific Pedagogy in Italy, aimed at training teachers to embrace the new movement starting to emerge in education. For two or three years, this school enjoyed great success—so much so that teachers from all over Italy flocked to it, and the City of Milan provided it with an impressive array of scientific resources. Its early days were very promising, and generous support was given in the hope that it could help establish, through the experiments conducted there, "the science of shaping individuals."
The enthusiasm which welcomed this school was, in a large measure, due to the warm support given it by the distinguished anthropologist, Giuseppe Sergi, who for more than thirty years had earnestly laboured to spread among the teachers of Italy the principles of a new civilisation based upon education. "To-day in the social world," said Sergi, "an imperative need makes itself felt—the reconstruction of educational methods; and he who fights for this cause, fights for human regeneration." In his pedagogical writings collected in a volume under the title of "Educazione ed Istruzione" (Pensieri),[1] he gives a[Pg 3] résumé of the lectures in which he encouraged this new movement, and says that he believes the way to this desired regeneration lies in a methodical study of the one to be educated, carried on under the guidance of pedagogical anthropology and of experimental psychology.
The excitement around this school was largely because of the strong support from the renowned anthropologist, Giuseppe Sergi, who had dedicated over thirty years to promoting the principles of a new civilization based on education among Italian teachers. "Today in society," Sergi said, "there's a clear necessity for change—the reconstruction of educational methods; and anyone who fights for this cause, fights for human renewal." In his educational writings compiled in a volume titled "Educazione ed Istruzione" (Pensieri),[1] he provides a[Pg 3] summary of the lectures where he promoted this new movement, and he asserts that he believes the path to this desired renewal lies in a systematic study of the individual being educated, conducted under the guidance of pedagogical anthropology and experimental psychology.
"For several years I have done battle for an idea concerning the instruction and education of man, which appeared the more just and useful the more deeply I thought upon it. My idea was that in order to establish natural, rational methods, it was essential that we make numerous, exact, and rational observations of man as an individual, principally during infancy, which is the age at which the foundations of education and culture must be laid.
"For several years, I have fought for an idea about how to teach and educate people, which seemed more right and useful the more I thought about it. My idea is that to create natural, rational methods, we need to make many precise and logical observations of individuals, especially during infancy, which is when the foundations of education and culture need to be established."
"To measure the head, the height, etc., does not indeed mean that we are establishing a system of pedagogy, but it indicates the road which we may follow to arrive at such a system, since if we are to educate an individual, we must have a definite and direct knowledge of him."
"Measuring a person's head, height, etc., doesn't necessarily mean we're creating an educational system, but it shows the path we can take to reach one. If we're going to educate someone, we need to have clear and direct knowledge about them."
The authority of Sergi was enough to convince many that, given such a knowledge of the individual, the art of educating him would develop naturally. This, as often happens, led to a confusion of ideas among his followers, arising now from a too literal interpretation, now from an exaggeration, of the master's ideas. The chief trouble lay in confusing the experimental study of the pupil, with his education. And since the one was the road leading to the other, which should have grown from it naturally and rationally, they straightway gave the name of Scientific Pedagogy to what was in truth pedagogical anthropology. These new converts carried as their banner, the "Biographical Chart," believing that once this ensign[Pg 4] was firmly planted upon the battle-field of the school, the victory would be won.
The authority of Sergi was enough to convince many that, with such a deep understanding of the individual, the art of educating him would come naturally. As often happens, this led to a mix-up among his followers, stemming from either a too-literal interpretation or an exaggeration of the master’s ideas. The main issue was the confusion between the experimental study of the student and his education. Since one should lead naturally and logically to the other, they quickly dubbed what was essentially pedagogical anthropology as Scientific Pedagogy. These new followers carried the “Biographical Chart” as their symbol, believing that once this banner[Pg 4] was firmly planted on the battlefield of the school, the victory would be theirs.
The so-called School of Scientific Pedagogy, therefore, instructed the teachers in the taking of anthropometric measurements, in the use of esthesiometric instruments, in the gathering of Psychological Data—and the army of new scientific teachers was formed.
The School of Scientific Pedagogy taught teachers how to take anthropometric measurements, use esthesiometric instruments, and collect psychological data—resulting in a new generation of scientific educators.
It should be said that in this movement Italy showed herself to be abreast of the times. In France, in England, and especially in America, experiments have been made in the elementary schools, based upon a study of anthropology and psychological pedagogy, in the hope of finding in anthropometry and psychometry, the regeneration of the school. In these attempts it has rarely been the teachers who have carried on the research; the experiments have been, in most cases, in the hands of physicians who have taken more interest in their especial science than in education. They have usually sought to get from their experiments some contribution to psychology, or anthropology, rather than to attempt to organise their work and their results toward the formation of the long-sought Scientific Pedagogy. To sum up the situation briefly, anthropology and psychology have never devoted themselves to the question of educating children in the schools, nor have the scientifically trained teachers ever measured up to the standards of genuine scientists.
It should be noted that in this movement, Italy proved to be in sync with the times. In France, England, and especially in America, there have been experiments in elementary schools based on studies in anthropology and psychological pedagogy, hoping to discover in anthropometry and psychometry a way to rejuvenate education. In these efforts, it has often not been the teachers conducting the research; rather, the experiments have mostly been carried out by physicians who were more focused on their specific fields than on education. They typically aimed to derive insights for psychology or anthropology instead of organizing their work and findings towards creating the long-desired Scientific Pedagogy. In summary, neither anthropology nor psychology has dedicated itself to the challenge of educating children in schools, nor have scientifically trained teachers consistently met the standards of true scientists.
The truth is that the practical progress of the school demands a genuine fusion of these modern tendencies, in practice and thought; such a fusion as shall bring scientists directly into the important field of the school and at the same time raise teachers from the inferior intellectual level to which they are limited to-day. Toward this eminently practical ideal the University School of Peda[Pg 5]gogy, founded in Italy by Credaro, is definitely working. It is the intention of this school to raise Pedagogy from the inferior position it has occupied as a secondary branch of philosophy, to the dignity of a definite science, which shall, as does Medicine, cover a broad and varied field of comparative study.
The truth is that the practical advancement of schools requires a real fusion of these modern trends, both in practice and thought; a fusion that brings scientists directly into the essential realm of education while also elevating teachers from the lower intellectual level they are restricted to today. The University School of Peda[Pg 5]gogy, established in Italy by Credaro, is actively pursuing this very practical goal. This school aims to elevate pedagogy from its current status as a secondary branch of philosophy to the level of a legitimate science that, like medicine, encompasses a wide and diverse field of comparative study.
And among the branches affiliated with it will most certainly be found Pedagogical Hygiene, Pedagogical Anthropology, and Experimental Psychology.
And among the branches connected to it, you will definitely find Educational Hygiene, Educational Anthropology, and Experimental Psychology.
Truly, Italy, the country of Lombroso, of De-Giovanni, and of Sergi, may claim the honour of being pre-eminent in the organisation of such a movement. In fact, these three scientists may be called the founders of the new tendency in Anthropology: the first leading the way in criminal anthropology, the second in medical anthropology, and the third in pedagogical anthropology. For the good fortune of science, all three of them have been the recognised leaders of their special lines of thought, and have been so prominent in the scientific world that they have not only made courageous and valuable disciples, but have also prepared the minds of the masses to receive the scientific regeneration which they have encouraged. (For reference, see my treatise "Pedagogical Anthropology.")[2]
Italy, the home of Lombroso, De-Giovanni, and Sergi, can proudly claim to be the leader in organizing such a movement. These three scientists are considered the pioneers of a new direction in Anthropology: the first is a leader in criminal anthropology, the second in medical anthropology, and the third in pedagogical anthropology. Fortunately for the field of science, all three have been recognized as leaders in their areas of expertise and have been so influential that they have inspired both brave and valuable followers, while also preparing the public to embrace the scientific renewal they have advocated. (For reference, see my treatise "Pedagogical Anthropology.")[2]
Surely all this is something of which our country may be justly proud.
Surely all this is something our country can be proud of.
To-day, however, those things which occupy us in the field of education are the interests of humanity at large, and of civilisation, and before such great forces we can recognise only one country—the entire world. And in a cause of such great importance, all those who have given [Pg 6]any contribution, even though it be only an attempt not crowned with success, are worthy of the respect of humanity throughout the civilised world. So, in Italy, the schools of Scientific Pedagogy and the Anthropological Laboratories, which have sprung up in the various cities through the efforts of elementary teachers and scholarly inspectors, and which have been abandoned almost before they became definitely organised, have nevertheless a great value by reason of the faith which inspired them, and because of the doors they have opened to thinking people.
Today, however, the issues that engage us in education are the interests of humanity as a whole and civilization itself. Before such significant forces, we can only recognize one country—the entire world. In a cause of such great importance, everyone who has made any contribution, even if it was just an unsuccessful attempt, deserves the respect of all civilized people. In Italy, the schools of Scientific Pedagogy and the Anthropological Laboratories that have emerged in various cities through the efforts of elementary teachers and educational inspectors, though they were abandoned almost before they were fully organized, still hold great value due to the passion that inspired them and the opportunities they have created for thoughtful individuals.
It is needless to say that such attempts were premature and sprang from too slight a comprehension of new sciences still in the process of development. Every great cause is born from repeated failures and from imperfect achievements. When St. Francis of Assisi saw his Lord in a vision, and received from the Divine lips the command—"Francis, rebuild my Church!"—he believed that the Master spoke of the little church within which he knelt at that moment. And he immediately set about the task, carrying upon his shoulders the stones with which he meant to rebuild the fallen walls. It was not until later that he became aware of the fact that his mission was to renew the Catholic Church through the spirit of poverty. But the St. Francis who so ingenuously carried the stones, and the great reformer who so miraculously led the people to a triumph of the spirit, are one and the same person in different stages of development. So we, who work toward one great end, are members of one and the same body; and those who come after us will reach the goal only because there were those who believed and laboured before them. And, like St. Francis, we have believed that by carrying the hard and barren stones of the experimental[Pg 7] laboratory to the old and crumbling walls of the school, we might rebuild it. We have looked upon the aids offered by the materialistic and mechanical sciences with the same hopefulness with which St. Francis looked upon the squares of granite, which he must carry upon his shoulders.
It goes without saying that such efforts were premature and came from a limited understanding of new sciences that were still developing. Every great cause is born from repeated failures and imperfect successes. When St. Francis of Assisi saw his Lord in a vision and received the command from the Divine—"Francis, rebuild my Church!"—he thought the Master was referring to the small church where he was kneeling at that moment. He immediately got to work, carrying the stones he intended to use to rebuild the fallen walls. It was only later that he realized his mission was to renew the Catholic Church through the spirit of poverty. However, the St. Francis who eagerly carried the stones and the great reformer who led the people to a spiritual triumph are the same person at different stages of growth. We, who strive towards a common goal, are all part of the same body; those who come after us will only reach the destination because of those who believed and worked hard before them. Like St. Francis, we believe that by carrying the heavy and unyielding stones from the experimental laboratory to the aged and crumbling walls of the school, we might rebuild it. We have regarded the support provided by the materialistic and mechanical sciences with the same optimism that St. Francis had while looking at the granite blocks he had to shoulder.
Thus we have been drawn into a false and narrow way, from which we must free ourselves, if we are to establish true and living methods for the training of future generations.
So, we've gotten caught up in a false and limited approach, and we need to break free from it if we want to create real and effective ways to educate future generations.
To prepare teachers in the method of the experimental sciences is not an easy matter. When we shall have instructed them in anthropometry and psychometry in the most minute manner possible, we shall have only created machines, whose usefulness will be most doubtful. Indeed, if it is after this fashion that we are to initiate our teachers into experiment, we shall remain forever in the field of theory. The teachers of the old school, prepared according to the principles of metaphysical philosophy, understood the ideas of certain men regarded as authorities, and moved the muscles of speech in talking of them, and the muscles of the eye in reading their theories. Our scientific teachers, instead, are familiar with certain instruments and know how to move the muscles of the hand and arm in order to use these instruments; besides this, they have an intellectual preparation which consists of a series of typical tests, which they have, in a barren and mechanical way, learned how to apply.
Training teachers in experimental sciences is challenging. Even if we thoroughly instruct them in anthropometry and psychometry, we might just end up creating machines, whose effectiveness would be questionable. If this is how we plan to introduce our teachers to experiments, we will remain stuck in theory. Teachers from the old school, trained in metaphysical philosophy, grasped the ideas of certain authoritative figures, discussing them and reading their theories. In contrast, our scientific teachers are familiar with certain instruments and know how to use their hands and arms to operate them; additionally, they have an intellectual background that consists of a series of typical tests that they have mechanically learned to conduct.
The difference is not substantial, for profound differences cannot exist in exterior technique alone, but lie rather within the inner man. Not with all our initiation into scientific experiment have we prepared new masters,[Pg 8] for, after all, we have left them standing without the door of real experimental science; we have not admitted them to the noblest and most profound phase of such study,—to that experience which makes real scientists.
The difference isn’t significant, because deep differences can’t just come from outside techniques but come from within a person. Even with all our training in scientific experimentation, we haven’t created new masters,[Pg 8] because, in the end, we’ve left them waiting outside the door of true experimental science; we haven’t let them into the most prestigious and profound aspect of this study—into the experiences that turn people into real scientists.
And, indeed, what is a scientist? Not, certainly, he who knows how to manipulate all the instruments in the physical laboratory, or who in the laboratory of the chemist handles the various reactives with deftness and security, or who in biology knows how to make ready the specimens for the microscope. Indeed, it is often the case that an assistant has a greater dexterity in experimental technique than the master scientist himself. We give the name scientist to the type of man who has felt experiment to be a means guiding him to search out the deep truth of life, to lift a veil from its fascinating secrets, and who, in this pursuit, has felt arising within him a love for the mysteries of nature, so passionate as to annihilate the thought of himself. The scientist is not the clever manipulator of instruments, he is the worshipper of nature and he bears the external symbols of his passion as does the follower of some religious order. To this body of real scientists belong those who, forgetting, like the Trappists of the Middle Ages, the world about them, live only in the laboratory, careless often in matters of food and dress because they no longer think of themselves; those who, through years of unwearied use of the microscope, become blind; those who in their scientific ardour inoculate themselves with tuberculosis germs; those who handle the excrement of cholera patients in their eagerness to learn the vehicle through which the diseases are transmitted; and those who, knowing that a certain chemical preparation may be an explosive, still persist in testing their theories at the risk of their lives. This[Pg 9] is the spirit of the men of science, to whom nature freely reveals her secrets, crowning their labours with the glory of discovery.
And really, what is a scientist? It's definitely not someone who just knows how to work all the tools in a physical lab, or who skillfully handles various chemicals in a chemistry lab, or who prepares samples for a microscope in biology. In fact, it's often the case that an assistant has more skill in experimental techniques than the lead scientist. We call someone a scientist because they see experiments as a way to discover the deeper truths of life, to uncover the fascinating secrets of the universe, and who has found within themselves a profound love for the mysteries of nature that makes them forget about themselves. A scientist isn't just a clever operator of instruments; they're a devotee of nature, wearing their passion like a badge, much like someone devoted to a religious order. True scientists include those who, like the Trappists of the Middle Ages, lose themselves in their work and forget the world around them, often neglecting their own meals and appearance because they’re focused entirely on their research; those who, after years of using a microscope, end up going blind; those who, in their dedicated pursuit of knowledge, deliberately expose themselves to tuberculosis germs; those who handle cholera waste in order to understand how the disease spreads; and those who know that a certain chemical could explode but still continue to test their theories at the risk of their own safety. This[Pg 9] embodies the spirit of scientists, who are granted the privilege of discovering nature's secrets, earning them the glory of discovery.
There exists, then, the "spirit" of the scientist, a thing far above his mere "mechanical skill," and the scientist is at the height of his achievement when the spirit has triumphed over the mechanism. When he has reached this point, science will receive from him not only new revelations of nature, but philosophic syntheses of pure thought.
There is, then, the "spirit" of the scientist, something far beyond just his "mechanical skill," and the scientist reaches the peak of his accomplishment when this spirit has overcome the mechanics. When he gets to this point, science will benefit from not only new discoveries about nature but also philosophical insights born from pure thought.
It is my belief that the thing which we should cultivate in our teachers is more the spirit than the mechanical skill of the scientist; that is, the direction of the preparation should be toward the spirit rather than toward the mechanism. For example, when we considered the scientific preparation of teachers to be simply the acquiring of the technique of science, we did not attempt to make these elementary teachers perfect anthropologists, expert experimental psychologists, or masters of infant hygiene; we wished only to direct them toward the field of experimental science, teaching them to manage the various instruments with a certain degree of skill. So now, we wish to direct the teacher, trying to awaken in him, in connection with his own particular field, the school, that scientific spirit which opens the door for him to broader and bigger possibilities. In other words, we wish to awaken in the mind and heart of the educator an interest in natural phenomena to such an extent that, loving nature, he shall understand the anxious and expectant attitude of one who has prepared an experiment and who awaits a revelation from it.[3]
I believe that what we should focus on cultivating in our teachers is more about the spirit than just the technical skills of a scientist; that is, the direction of the preparation should lean toward the spirit rather than the mechanics. For instance, when we thought of scientific training for teachers as simply learning science techniques, we didn't aim to turn these elementary teachers into perfect anthropologists, expert experimental psychologists, or masters of child hygiene; we just wanted to guide them toward the world of experimental science, teaching them to use various tools with a reasonable level of skill. Now, we want to guide teachers, helping them to awaken in themselves, in relation to their specific field in the school, that scientific spirit which opens up broader and greater possibilities. In other words, we want to spark in the minds and hearts of educators an interest in natural phenomena to the point that, by loving nature, they will appreciate the eager and expectant mindset of someone who has set up an experiment and is waiting for insights from it.[3]
The instruments are like the alphabet, and we must know how to manage them if we are to read nature; but as the book, which contains the revelation of the greatest thoughts of an author, uses in the alphabet the means of composing the external symbols or words, so nature, through the mechanism of the experiment, gives us an infinite series of revelations, unfolding for us her secrets.
The instruments are like the alphabet, and we need to know how to use them if we want to understand nature; just as a book, which holds the greatest thoughts of an author, uses the alphabet to create external symbols or words, nature reveals her secrets to us through the process of experimentation, offering an endless series of discoveries.
Now one who has learned to spell mechanically all the words in his spelling-book, would be able to read in the same mechanical way the words in one of Shakespeare's plays, provided the print were sufficiently clear. He who is initiated solely into the making of the bare experiment, is like one who spells out the literal sense of the words in the spelling-book; it is on such a level that we leave the teachers if we limit their preparation to technique alone.
Now, someone who has learned to spell all the words in their spelling book would be able to read the words in one of Shakespeare's plays in the same mechanical way, as long as the print is clear enough. A person who only knows how to perform the basic experiment is like someone who just sounds out the literal meaning of the words in the spelling book; if we only focus on technique in their training, that's where we leave the teachers.
We must, instead, make of them worshippers and interpreters of the spirit of nature. They must be like him who, having learned to spell, finds himself, one day, able to read behind the written symbols the thought of Shakespeare, or Goethe, or Dante. As may be seen, the difference is great, and the road long. Our first error was, however, a natural one. The child who has mastered the spelling-book gives the impression of knowing how to read. Indeed, he does read the signs over the shop doors, the names of newspapers, and every word that comes under his eyes. It would be very natural if, entering a library, this child should be deluded into thinking that he knew how to read the sense of all the books he saw there. But attempting to do this, he would soon feel that "to know how to read mechanically" is nothing, and that he needs to go back to school. So it is with the teachers whom we have[Pg 11] thought to prepare for scientific pedagogy by teaching them anthropometry and psychometry.
We need to turn them into worshippers and interpreters of the spirit of nature. They should be like someone who, after learning to spell, realizes one day that they can read the underlying ideas of Shakespeare, Goethe, or Dante beyond the written words. Clearly, there's a big difference, and it’s a long journey. However, our initial mistake was a common one. The child who has mastered the spelling book gives the impression of knowing how to read. In fact, they can read the signs on shop doors, the names of newspapers, and any word that appears in front of them. It wouldn’t be surprising if this child, walking into a library, mistakenly believes they can understand the meaning of all the books in there. But when they try to do this, they quickly realize that "knowing how to read mechanically" means very little, and that they need to return to school. The same goes for the teachers we have[Pg 11] trained for scientific pedagogy by teaching them anthropometry and psychometry.
But let us put aside the difficulty of preparing scientific masters in the accepted sense of the word. We will not even attempt to outline a programme of such preparation, since this would lead us into a discussion which has no place here. Let us suppose, instead, that we have already prepared teachers through long and patient exercises for the observation of nature, and that we have led them, for example, to the point attained by those students of natural sciences who rise at night and go into the woods and fields that they may surprise the awakening and the early activities of some family of insects in which they are interested. Here we have the scientist who, though he may be sleepy and tired with walking, is full of watchfulness, who is not aware that he is muddy or dusty, that the mist wets him, or the sun burns him; but is intent only upon not revealing in the least degree his presence, in order that the insects may, hour after hour, carry on peacefully those natural functions which he wishes to observe. Let us suppose these teachers to have reached the standpoint of the scientist who, half blind, still watches through his microscope the spontaneous movements of some particular infusory animalcule. These creatures seem to this scientific watcher, in their manner of avoiding each other and in their way of selecting their food, to possess a dim intelligence. He then disturbs this sluggish life by an electric stimulus, observing how some group themselves about the positive pole, and others about the negative. Experimenting further, with a luminous stimulus, he notices how some run toward the light, while[Pg 12] others fly from it. He investigates these and like phenomena; having always in mind this question: whether the fleeing from or running to the stimulus be of the same character as the avoidance of one another or the selection of food—that is, whether such differences are the result of choice and are due to that dim consciousness, rather than to physical attraction or repulsion similar to that of the magnet. And let us suppose that this scientist, finding it to be four o'clock in the afternoon, and that he has not yet lunched, is conscious, with a feeling of pleasure, of the fact that he has been at work in his laboratory instead of in his own home, where they would have called him hours ago, interrupting his interesting observation, in order that he might eat.
But let’s set aside the challenge of training scientific experts in the traditional sense. We won’t even try to outline a program for such training, as that would lead us into a discussion that isn’t relevant here. Instead, let’s assume we’ve already prepared teachers through long and careful practice for the observation of nature, leading them, for instance, to reach the level of those natural science students who wake up at night to venture into the woods and fields, hoping to capture the early activities of some insect family they’re studying. Here we have the scientist, who despite being tired and possibly sleepy, is intensely focused, unaware of being muddy or dusty, that the mist is drenching him, or that the sun is scorching him; all that matters to him is not revealing his presence so that the insects can carry out their natural functions undisturbed hour after hour. Let’s say these teachers have reached the perspective of a scientist who, even with impaired vision, watches through his microscope the spontaneous movements of a specific microscopic organism. To this scientific observer, these organisms, in their way of avoiding each other and choosing their food, seem to possess a vague intelligence. He then interrupts their sluggish existence with an electric stimulus, observing how some gather around the positive pole while others cluster around the negative. Continuing his experiments with a light stimulus, he notes how some move towards the light while others flee from it. He explores these and similar phenomena, always pondering whether fleeing from or approaching the stimulus is similar to their avoidance of each other or their food selection—that is, whether these differences stem from choice linked to that vague awareness, or if they’re simply physical attraction or repulsion like that of magnets. And let’s imagine this scientist realizes it’s four o'clock in the afternoon and he hasn’t had lunch yet; he feels pleased that he has been working in the lab instead of at home, where he would’ve been called away hours ago, interrupting his fascinating observations for a meal.
Let us imagine, I say, that the teacher has arrived, independently of his scientific training, at such an attitude of interest in the observation of natural phenomena. Very well, but such a preparation is not enough. The master, indeed, is destined in his particular mission not to the observation of insects or of bacteria, but of man. He is not to make a study of man in the manifestations of his daily physical habits as one studies some family of insects, following their movements from the hour of their morning awakening. The master is to study man in the awakening of his intellectual life.
Let’s imagine that the teacher has developed a genuine interest in observing natural phenomena, regardless of their scientific background. That’s great, but it’s not enough. The teacher’s role isn’t just to observe insects or bacteria; it’s to study humans. They shouldn't analyze people’s daily physical habits like a scientist tracks a family of insects from the moment they wake up. Instead, the teacher should focus on the awakening of human intellectual life.
The interest in humanity to which we wish to educate the teacher must be characterised by the intimate relationship between the observer and the individual to be observed; a relationship which does not exist between the student of zoology or botany and that form of nature which he studies. Man cannot love the insect or the chemical reaction which he studies, without sacrificing a part of himself. This self-sacrifice seems to one who looks at it[Pg 13] from the standpoint of the world, a veritable renunciation of life itself, almost a martyrdom.
The interest in humanity that we want to instill in the teacher should be marked by a close connection between the observer and the individual being observed; a connection that doesn’t happen between a student of zoology or botany and the aspect of nature they study. A person can’t love the insect or the chemical reaction they examine without giving up a part of themselves. This self-sacrifice may seem, to an outside observer[Pg 13], like a true renunciation of life itself, almost like martyrdom.
But the love of man for man in a far more tender thing, and so simple that it is universal. To love in this way is not the privilege of any especially prepared intellectual class, but lies within the reach of all men.
But the love that one person has for another is something much more tender and so simple that it's universal. Loving like this isn't just for a particular intellectual class; it's something all people can do.
To give an idea of this second form of preparation, that of the spirit, let us try to enter into the minds and hearts of those first followers of Christ Jesus as they heard Him speak of a Kingdom not of this world, greater far than any earthly kingdom, no matter how royally conceived. In their simplicity they asked of Him, "Master, tell us who shall be greatest in the Kingdom of Heaven!" To which Christ, caressing the head of a little child who, with reverent, wondering eyes, looked into His face, replied, "Whosoever shall become as one of these little ones, he shall be greatest in the Kingdom of Heaven." Now let us picture among those to whom these words were spoken, an ardent, worshipping soul, who takes them into his heart. With a mixture of respect and love, of sacred curiosity and of a desire to achieve this spiritual greatness, he sets himself to observe every manifestation of this little child. Even such an observer placed in a classroom filled with little children will not be the new educator whom we wish to form. But let us seek to implant in the soul the self-sacrificing spirit of the scientist with the reverent love of the disciple of Christ, and we shall have prepared the spirit of the teacher. From the child itself he will learn how to perfect himself as an educator.
To give an idea of this second way of preparation, that of the spirit, let's try to understand the minds and hearts of those first followers of Christ Jesus as they heard Him talk about a Kingdom that isn't of this world, much greater than any earthly kingdom, no matter how grand it seems. In their simplicity, they asked Him, "Master, tell us who will be the greatest in the Kingdom of Heaven!" To which Christ, gently touching the head of a little child who looked up at Him with reverent, curious eyes, replied, "Whoever becomes like one of these little ones will be the greatest in the Kingdom of Heaven." Now let's imagine one of the people who heard these words, an eager, devoted soul, who takes them to heart. With a mix of respect and love, sacred curiosity, and a desire to achieve this spiritual greatness, he focuses on observing every action of this little child. Even a person observing in a classroom filled with little children won't be the new educator we want to develop. But if we strive to instill in the soul the self-sacrificing spirit of the scientist along with the reverent love of a disciple of Christ, we will have prepared the spirit of the teacher. From the child itself, he will learn how to improve as an educator.
Let us consider the attitude of the teacher in the light of another example. Picture to yourself one of our bota[Pg 14]nists or zoologists experienced in the technique of observation and experimentation; one who has travelled in order to study "certain fungi" in their native environment. This scientist has made his observations in open country and, then, by the aid of his microscope and of all his laboratory appliances, has carried on the later research work in the most minute way possible. He is, in fact, a scientist who understands what it is to study nature, and who is conversant with all the means which modern experimental science offers for this study.
Let's look at the teacher's attitude through another example. Imagine one of our botanists or zoologists who is skilled in observation and experimentation; someone who has traveled to study "certain fungi" in their natural habitat. This scientist has made observations in the field and then, using a microscope and all the lab tools available, has conducted detailed research. He is truly a scientist who knows how to study nature and is familiar with all the methods that modern experimental science provides for this purpose.
Now let us imagine such a man appointed, by reason of the original work he has done, to a chair of science in some university, with the task before him of doing further original research work with hymenoptera. Let us suppose that, arrived at his post, he is shown a glass-covered case containing a number of beautiful butterflies, mounted by means of pins, their outspread wings motionless. The student will say that this is some child's play, not material for scientific study, that these specimens in the box are more fitly a part of the game which the little boys play, chasing butterflies and catching them in a net. With such material as this the experimental scientist can do nothing.
Now let's picture a man appointed to a university science position because of the original work he's done, tasked with conducting further original research on hymenoptera. Once he arrives at his position, he's shown a glass-covered display case containing several beautiful butterflies, pinned in place with their wings spread out and motionless. The student might say that this is child's play, not suitable for scientific study, and that these specimens belong more to the games little boys play, chasing butterflies and catching them in a net. The experimental scientist can't do anything with material like this.
The situation would be very much the same if we should place a teacher who, according to our conception of the term, is scientifically prepared, in one of the public schools where the children are repressed in the spontaneous expression of their personality till they are almost like dead beings. In such a school the children, like butterflies mounted on pins, are fastened each to his place, the desk, spreading the useless wings of barren and meaningless knowledge which they have acquired.[Pg 15]
The situation would be pretty much the same if we put a teacher, who we believe is scientifically qualified, in one of the public schools where the kids are stifled in their natural expression until they seem almost lifeless. In such a school, the kids, like butterflies stuck on pins, are anchored to their desks, displaying the pointless wings of empty and meaningless knowledge they have learned.[Pg 15]
It is not enough, then, to prepare in our Masters the scientific spirit. We must also make ready the school for their observation. The school must permit the free, natural manifestations of the child if in the school scientific pedagogy is to be born. This is the essential reform.
It's not enough to just develop a scientific mindset in our teachers. We also need to create an environment in schools that allows for the child's natural expressions. If we want scientific teaching methods to emerge in schools, we need to ensure they support the child's free and authentic development. This is the crucial change we need.
No one may affirm that such a principle already exists in pedagogy and in the school. It is true that some pedagogues, led by Rousseau, have given voice to impracticable principles and vague aspirations for the liberty of the child, but the true concept of liberty is practically unknown to educators. They often have the same concept of liberty which animates a people in the hour of rebellion from slavery, or perhaps, the conception of social liberty, which although it is a more elevated idea is still invariably restricted. "Social liberty" signifies always one more round of Jacob's ladder. In other words it signifies a partial liberation, the liberation of a country, of a class, or of thought.
No one can claim that such a principle already exists in education and schools. It's true that some educators, inspired by Rousseau, have expressed impractical ideas and vague hopes for the child's freedom, but the true concept of freedom is largely unknown to teachers. They often share the same notion of freedom that motivates people during a rebellion against slavery, or perhaps the idea of social freedom, which, although it is a more advanced concept, is still consistently limited. "Social freedom" always implies one more step on Jacob's ladder. In other words, it means a partial liberation—the liberation of a country, a class, or an idea.
That concept of liberty which must inspire pedagogy is, instead, universal. The biological sciences of the nineteenth century have shown it to us when they have offered us the means for studying life. If, therefore, the old-time pedagogy foresaw or vaguely expressed the principle of studying the pupil before educating him, and of leaving him free in his spontaneous manifestations, such an intuition, indefinite and barely expressed, was made possible of practical attainment only after the contribution of the experimental sciences during the last century. This is not a case for sophistry or discussion, it is enough that we state our point. He who would say that the principle of liberty informs the pedagogy of to-day, would make us smile as at a child who, before the box of mounted butterflies, should insist that they were alive and could fly. The[Pg 16] principle of slavery still pervades pedagogy, and, therefore, the same principle pervades the school. I need only give one proof—the stationary desks and chairs. Here we have, for example, a striking evidence of the errors of the early materialistic scientific pedagogy which, with mistaken zeal and energy, carried the barren stones of science to the rebuilding of the crumbling walls of the school. The schools were at first furnished with the long, narrow benches upon which the children were crowded together. Then came science and perfected the bench. In this work much attention was paid to the recent contributions of anthropology. The age of the child and the length of his limbs were considered in placing the seat at the right height. The distance between the seat and the desk was calculated with infinite care, in order that the child's back should not become deformed, and, finally, the seats were separated and the width so closely calculated that the child could barely seat himself upon it, while to stretch himself by making any lateral movements was impossible. This was done in order that he might be separated from his neighbour. These desks are constructed in such a way as to render the child visible in all his immobility. One of the ends sought through this separation is the prevention of immoral acts in the schoolroom. What shall we say of such prudence in a state of society where it would be considered scandalous to give voice to principles of sex morality in education, for fear we might thus contaminate innocence? And, yet, here we have science lending itself to this hypocrisy, fabricating machines! Not only this; obliging science goes farther still, perfecting the benches in such a way as to permit to the greatest possible extent the immobility of the child, or, if you wish, to repress every movement of the child.[Pg 17]
The idea of liberty that should drive education is, in fact, universal. The biological sciences of the 19th century have revealed this to us by providing the tools to study life. While old pedagogical methods hinted at or vaguely acknowledged the necessity of understanding the student before teaching them and allowing them the freedom to express themselves spontaneously, this insight was only practically realized after the advancements in experimental sciences in the last century. There's no need for complicated arguments; we simply need to state our position. Anyone who claims that the principle of liberty characterizes today's education would make us chuckle, like a child who insists that mounted butterflies are alive and can fly. The principle of oppression still dominates education, and thus, it also governs the school environment. I just need to point out one example—the fixed desks and chairs. This clearly illustrates the mistakes of early materialistic educational science, which, with misguided enthusiasm, brought in dry scientific theories to try to fix the failing school system. Initially, schools used long, narrow benches where children were crammed together. Then came scientific advancements, improving the benches. This involved considering recent findings in anthropology, including the child's age and limb length to set the seat height correctly. The distance between the seat and the desk was meticulously calculated to prevent back problems in children, and ultimately, the seats were spaced so closely that a child could barely sit down, making any movement impossible. This design was intended to keep them isolated from each other. These desks are made so that the child is visible in their stillness. One goal of this separation is to prevent immoral behavior in the classroom. What can we say about such caution in a society where discussing sexual morality in education is seen as scandalous, out of fear of tainting innocence? Yet, here we see science supporting this hypocrisy, creating these robotic setups! Not only that, but compliant science goes even further, designing the benches to maximize the child's immobility, or, if you prefer, to suppress every movement of the child.
It is all so arranged that, when the child is well-fitted into his place, the desk and chair themselves force him to assume the position considered to be hygienically comfortable. The seat, the foot-rest, the desks are arranged in such a way that the child can never stand at his work. He is allotted only sufficient space for sitting in an erect position. It is in such ways that schoolroom desks and benches have advanced toward perfection. Every cult of the so-called scientific pedagogy has designed a model scientific desk. Not a few nations have become proud of their "national desk,"—and in the struggle of competition these various machines have been patented.
Everything is set up so that when a child is properly positioned, the desk and chair automatically guide them into a posture that's considered hygienically comfortable. The seat, footrest, and desks are designed so that the child cannot stand while working. They are given just enough space to sit upright. This is how school desks and benches have improved over time. Every trend in what’s called scientific pedagogy has created an ideal scientific desk. Many countries boast about their "national desk," and in the competition, these various designs have been patented.
Undoubtedly there is much that is scientific underlying the construction of these benches. Anthropology has been drawn upon in the measuring of the body and the diagnosis of the age; physiology, in the study of muscular movements; psychology, in regard to perversion of instincts; and, above all, hygiene, in the effort to prevent curvature of the spine. These desks were indeed scientific, following in their construction the anthropological study of the child. We have here, as I have said, an example of the literal application of science to the schools.
There’s definitely a lot of science behind the design of these benches. Anthropology has been used to measure the body and determine age; physiology has been involved in studying muscle movements; psychology has looked into instinctual issues; and, most importantly, hygiene has focused on preventing spinal curvature. These desks are truly scientific, built according to the anthropological research on children. What we have here, as I mentioned, is a clear example of applying science directly to education.
I believe that before very long we shall all be struck with great surprise by this attitude. It will seem incomprehensible that the fundamental error of the desk should not have been revealed earlier through the attention given to the study of infant hygiene, anthropology, and sociology, and through the general progress of thought. The marvel is greater when we consider that during the past years there has been stirring in almost every nation a movement toward the protection of the child.
I think that soon we will all be really surprised by this mindset. It will seem unbelievable that the main mistake of the desk wasn’t uncovered sooner, considering the focus on studying child hygiene, anthropology, and sociology, along with the overall progress in thinking. It's even more astonishing when we realize that, in recent years, there has been a movement in nearly every country aimed at protecting children.
I believe that it will not be many years before the public, scarcely believing the descriptions of these scien[Pg 18]tific benches, will come to touch with wondering bands the amazing seats that were constructed for the purpose of preventing among our school children curvature of the spine!
I think it won’t be long before people, hardly believing the descriptions of these scientific benches, will eagerly touch the incredible seats made to help prevent curved spines among our school kids!
The development of these scientific benches means that the pupils were subjected to a régime, which, even though they were born strong and straight, made it possible for them to become humpbacked! The vertebral column, biologically the most primitive, fundamental, and oldest part of the skeleton, the most fixed portion, of our body, since the skeleton is the most solid portion of the organism—the vertebral column, which resisted and was strong through the desperate struggles of primitive man when he fought against the desert-lion, when he conquered the mammoth, when he quarried the solid rock and shaped the iron to his uses, bends, and cannot resist, under the yoke of the school.
The development of these scientific benches means that the students were put through a system that, even though they were born strong and healthy, caused them to become hunchbacked! The spine, which is the most primitive, fundamental, and oldest part of the skeleton, is also the most rigid part of our body. Since the skeleton is the most solid part of the organism, the spine, which endured and was strong through the desperate struggles of early humans when they battled against lions, conquered mammoths, quarried solid rock, and shaped iron for their needs, now bends and cannot withstand the pressure of the school.
It is incomprehensible that so-called science should have worked to perfect an instrument of slavery in the school without being enlightened by one ray from the movement of social liberation, growing and developing throughout the world. For the age of scientific benches was also the age of the redemption of the working classes from the yoke of unjust labor.
It’s hard to believe that what’s called science has helped create a tool of oppression in schools without being influenced by the global movement for social freedom that is growing and evolving. The era of scientific advancements coincided with the era of the working class gaining freedom from the burden of unfair labor.
The tendency toward social liberty is most evident, and manifests itself on every hand. The leaders of the people make it their slogan, the labouring masses repeat the cry, scientific and socialistic publications voice the same movement, our journals are full of it. The underfed workman does not ask for a tonic, but for better economic conditions which shall prevent malnutrition. The miner who, through the stooping position maintained during many hours of the day, is subject to inguinal rupture, does[Pg 19] not ask for an abdominal support, but demands shorter hours and bettor working conditions, in order that he may be able to lead a healthy life like other men.
The push for social freedom is really clear and shows up everywhere. The leaders of the people make it their rallying cry, the working class echoes their demands, scientific and socialist publications promote the same cause, and our newspapers are filled with it. The underpaid worker isn’t looking for a quick fix but for better economic conditions that will stop malnutrition. The miner, who spends long hours in a bent position and risks injury, doesn’t just want a supportive belt; he wants shorter hours and better working conditions so he can live a healthy life like everyone else.
And when, during this same social epoch, we find that the children in our schoolrooms are working amid unhygienic conditions, so poorly adapted to normal development that even the skeleton becomes deformed, our response to this terrible revelation is an orthopedic bench. It is much as if we offered to the miner the abdominal brace, or arsenic to the underfed workman.
And when, during this same social period, we see that the kids in our classrooms are working in unhealthy conditions, so ill-suited for normal growth that even their skeletons are becoming deformed, our reaction to this awful discovery is an orthopedic bench. It's like giving the miner a stomach brace, or arsenic to the malnourished worker.
Some time ago a woman, believing me to be in sympathy with all scientific innovations concerning the school, showed me with evident satisfaction a corset or brace for pupils. She had invented this and felt that it would complete the work of the bench.
Some time ago, a woman, thinking I was in favor of all scientific innovations in education, showed me with obvious pride a corset or brace for students. She had created this and believed it would enhance the work of the classroom.
Surgery has still other means for the treatment of spinal curvature. I might mention orthopedic instruments, braces, and a method of periodically suspending the child, by the head or shoulders, in such a fashion that the weight of the body stretches and thus straightens the vertebral column. In the school, the orthopedic instrument in the shape of the desk is in great favour to-day; someone proposes the brace—one step farther and it will be suggested that we give the scholars a systematic course in the suspension method!
Surgery has other ways to treat spinal curvature as well. I could mention orthopedic devices, braces, and a method of hanging the child by the head or shoulders periodically, so the weight of the body stretches and straightens the spine. In schools, orthopedic desks are very popular today; someone might suggest using braces—soon it will be proposed that we provide students with a regular course in the suspension method!
All this is the logical consequence of a material application of the methods of science to the decadent school. Evidently the rational method of combating spinal curvature in the pupils, is to change the form of their work—so that they shall no longer be obliged to remain for so many hours a day in a harmful position. It is a conquest of liberty which the school needs, not the mechanism of a bench.[Pg 20]
All of this is the natural result of applying scientific methods to the outdated school system. Clearly, the smart way to tackle spinal curvature in students is to transform the nature of their work so they won't have to stay in a harmful position for so many hours each day. The school needs a freedom gain, not just a rigid structure.[Pg 20]
Even were the stationary seat helpful to the child's body, it would still be a dangerous and unhygienic feature of the environment, through the difficulty of cleaning the room perfectly when the furniture cannot be moved. The foot-rests, which cannot be removed, accumulate the dirt carried in daily from the street by the many little feet. To-day there is a general transformation in the matter of house furnishings. They are made lighter and simpler so that they may be easily moved, dusted, and even washed. But the school seems blind to the transformation of the social environment.
Even if the fixed seat was beneficial for the child's body, it would still be a risky and unhygienic aspect of the environment because it's hard to clean the room thoroughly when the furniture can't be moved. The footrests, which can't be taken off, collect dirt brought in daily from the street by many little feet. Today, there's a widespread change in how we furnish our homes. They're designed to be lighter and simpler so they can be easily moved, dusted, and even washed. But schools seem unaware of the changes happening in society.
It behooves us to think of what may happen to the spirit of the child who is condemned to grow in conditions so artificial that his very bones may become deformed. When we speak of the redemption of the workingman, it is always understood that beneath the most apparent form of suffering, such as poverty of the blood, or ruptures, there exists that other wound from which the soul of the man who is subjected to any form of slavery must suffer. It is at this deeper wrong that we aim when we say that the workman must be redeemed through liberty. We know only too well that when a man's very blood has been consumed or his intestines wasted away through his work, his soul must have lain oppressed in darkness, rendered insensible, or, it may be, killed within him. The moral degradation of the slave is, above all things, the weight that opposes the progress of humanity—humanity striving to rise and held back by this great burden. The cry of redemption speaks far more clearly for the souls of men than for their bodies.
We need to consider what might happen to the spirit of a child forced to grow up in conditions so unnatural that it may even deform their bones. When we talk about the liberation of the working class, it’s understood that beneath the visible suffering—like poverty or physical injuries—there's a deeper wound, one that harms the soul of anyone subjected to any form of slavery. It’s this deeper injustice we address when we say workers must be freed through liberty. We know all too well that when a person’s very blood is drained or their body is worn down by hard labor, their soul must lie oppressed in darkness, left numb, or maybe even extinguished. The moral degradation of the enslaved is, above all, the weight that hinders humanity’s progress—humanity striving to ascend but held back by this immense burden. The call for redemption resonates much more for the souls of people than for their bodies.
What shall we say then, when the question before us is that of educating children?[Pg 21]
What should we say then, when the topic at hand is educating children?[Pg 21]
We know only too well the sorry spectacle of the teacher who, in the ordinary schoolroom, must pour certain cut and dried facts into the heads of the scholars. In order to succeed in this barren task, she finds it necessary to discipline her pupils into immobility and to force their attention. Prizes and punishments are every-ready and efficient aids to the master who must force into a given attitude of mind and body those who are condemned to be his listeners.
We are all too familiar with the sad scene of the teacher who, in a typical classroom, has to stuff certain fixed facts into the minds of the students. To succeed in this unproductive task, she feels it's essential to discipline her students into stillness and to capture their attention. Rewards and punishments are readily available and effective tools for the teacher who needs to push her students into a specific mindset and posture, as they are stuck being her audience.
It is true that to-day it is deemed expedient to abolish official whippings and habitual blows, just as the awarding of prizes has become less ceremonious. These partial reforms are another prop approved of by science, and offered to the support of the decadent school. Such prizes and punishments are, if I may be allowed the expression, the bench of the soul, the instrument of slavery for the spirit. Here, however, these are not applied to lessen deformities, but to provoke them. The prize and the punishment are incentives toward unnatural or forced effort, and, therefore we certainly cannot speak of the natural development of the child in connection with them. The jockey offers a piece of sugar to his horse before jumping into the saddle, the coachman beats his horse that he may respond to the signs given by the reins; and, yet, neither of these runs so superbly as the free horse of the plains.
It's true that today, it's considered wise to get rid of official whippings and regular beatings, just as award ceremonies have become less formal. These small reforms are part of what science supports and what the declining educational system endorses. These rewards and punishments are, if I may put it this way, the bench of the soul, a tool for controlling the spirit. However, here, they aren’t used to reduce issues, but to provoke them. Rewards and punishments are incentives for unnatural or forced efforts, so we certainly can't consider them part of a child's natural development. The jockey offers a sugar cube to his horse before climbing into the saddle; the coachman hits his horse to get it to follow the reins. Yet, neither of these animals runs as beautifully as a wild horse out on the plains.
And here, in the case of education, shall man place the yoke upon man?
And here, in the case of education, will one person burden another?
True, we say that social man is natural man yoked to society. But if we give a comprehensive glance to the moral progress of society, we shall see that little by little, the yoke is being made easier, in other words, we shall see that nature, or life, moves gradually toward triumph. The yoke of the slave yields to that of the servant,[Pg 22] and the yoke of the servant to that of the workman.
Sure, we say that social individuals are natural individuals connected to society. But if we take a broad look at the moral development of society, we will observe that little by little, the burden is becoming lighter; in other words, we will see that nature, or life, is slowly moving towards victory. The burden of the slave gives way to that of the servant, and the burden of the servant shifts to that of the worker.[Pg 22]
All forms of slavery tend little by little to weaken and disappear, even the sexual slavery of woman. The history of civilisation is a history of conquest and of liberation. We should ask in what stage of civilisation we find ourselves and if, in truth, the good of prizes and of punishments be necessary to our advancement. If we have indeed gone beyond this point, then to apply such a form of education would be to draw the new generation back to a lower level, not to lead them into their true heritage of progress.
All forms of slavery gradually tend to weaken and fade away, including the sexual slavery of women. The history of civilization is a history of conquest and liberation. We should consider what stage of civilization we are in and whether, in reality, rewards and punishments are necessary for our progress. If we have truly passed this stage, then using such methods of education would merely drag the new generation back to a lower level, rather than guiding them toward their rightful progress.
Something very like this condition of the school exists in society, in the relation between the government and the great numbers of the men employed in its administrative departments. These clerks work day after day for the general national good, yet they do not feel or see the advantage of their work in any immediate reward. That is, they do not realise that the state carries on its great business through their daily tasks, and that the whole nation is benefited by their work. For them the immediate good is promotion, as passing to a higher class is for the child in school. The man who loses sight of the really big aim of his work is like a child who has been placed in a class below his real standing: like a slave, he is cheated of something which is his right. His dignity as a man is reduced to the limits of the dignity of a machine which must be oiled if it is to be kept going, because it does not have within itself the impulse of life. All those petty things such as the desire for decorations or medals, are but artificial stimuli, lightening for the moment the dark, barren path in which he treads.
Something very similar to this situation in schools exists in society, particularly in the relationship between the government and the many people employed in its administrative departments. These clerks work day after day for the greater good of the nation, yet they don't feel or see the benefits of their work in any immediate way. They don't realize that the state conducts its important business through their daily tasks, and that the whole country benefits from their efforts. For them, the immediate reward is promotion, just like moving up a grade is for a student in school. A person who loses sight of the larger purpose of their work is like a student placed in a class below their true level: like a slave, they are denied something that is rightfully theirs. Their dignity as a person is reduced to the level of a machine that needs to be maintained to keep functioning, as it lacks the internal drive of life. All those small desires for awards or medals are just artificial motivators, briefly brightening the dark, unproductive path they walk.
In the same way we give prizes to school children. And[Pg 23] the fear of not achieving promotion, withholds the clerk from running away, and binds him to his monotonous work, even as the fear of not passing into the next class drives the pupil to his book. The reproof of the superior is in every way similar to the scolding of the teacher. The correction of badly executed clerical work is equivalent to the bad mark placed by the teacher upon the scholar's poor composition. The parallel is almost perfect.
In the same way we give awards to students. And[Pg 23] the fear of not getting a promotion keeps the clerk from leaving and ties him to his repetitive job, just like the fear of failing a class motivates the student to study. The criticism from a boss is very similar to a teacher's reprimand. Fixing poorly done clerical work is like the bad grade a teacher gives for a student's weak paper. The comparison is almost spot on.
But if the administrative departments are not carried on in a way which would seem suitable to a nation's greatness; if corruption too easily finds a place; it is the result of having extinguished the true greatness of man in the mind of the employee, and of having restricted his vision to those petty, immediate facts, which he has come to look upon as prizes and punishments. The country stands, because the rectitude of the greater number of its employees is such that they resist the corruption of the prizes and punishments, and follow an irresistible current of honesty. Even as life in the social environment triumphs against every cause of poverty and death, and proceeds to new conquests, so the instinct of liberty conquers all obstacles, going from victory to victory.
But if the administrative departments aren't run in a way that reflects a nation's greatness; if corruption easily takes root; it results from destroying the true greatness of individuals in the minds of employees, limiting their perspective to petty, immediate issues that they see as rewards and punishments. The country endures because most of its employees are upright enough to resist the temptations of rewards and punishments and follow an undeniable path of honesty. Just like social life overcomes every cause of poverty and death and moves toward new achievements, so does the instinct for freedom overcome all challenges, moving from one victory to the next.
It is this personal and yet universal force of life, a force often latent within the soul, that sends the world forward.
It’s this personal yet universal life force, a power often lying dormant within the soul, that pushes the world ahead.
But he who accomplishes a truly human work, he who does something really great and victorious, is never spurred to his task by those trifling attractions called by the name of "prizes," nor by the fear of those petty ills which we call "punishments." If in a war a great army of giants should fight with no inspiration beyond the desire to win promotion, epaulets, or medals, or through fear of[Pg 24] being shot, if these men were to oppose a handful of pygmies who were inflamed by love of country, the victory would go to the latter. When real heroism has died within an army, prizes and punishments cannot do more than finish the work of deterioration, bringing in corruption and cowardice.
But someone who achieves a truly human feat, someone who does something truly great and victorious, is never driven to their task by those trivial incentives called "prizes," nor by the fear of those minor consequences we refer to as "punishments." If in a war a massive army of giants were to fight without any motivation other than the desire for promotions, epaulets, or medals, or out of fear of being shot, and these giants were to face a small group of pygmies who were fired up by love for their country, the victory would go to the latter. When genuine heroism has vanished from an army, rewards and punishments can only accelerate the decline, leading to corruption and cowardice.
All human victories, all human progress, stand upon the inner force.
All human achievements and progress depend on inner strength.
Thus a young student may become a great doctor if he is spurred to his study by an interest which makes medicine his real vocation. But if he works in the hope of an inheritance, or of making a desirable marriage, or if indeed he is inspired by any material advantage, he will never become a true master or a great doctor, and the world will never make one step forward because of his work. He to whom such stimuli are necessary, had far better never become a physician. Everyone has a special tendency, a special vocation, modest, perhaps, but certainly useful. The system of prizes may turn an individual aside from this vocation, may make him choose a false road, for him a vain one, and forced to follow it, the natural activity of a human being may be warped, lessened, even annihilated.
A young student can become a great doctor if they're motivated by a genuine interest that makes medicine their true calling. However, if they study for an inheritance, to secure a good marriage, or any other material gain, they'll never become a real master or a great doctor, and the world won't progress because of their efforts. Those who need such incentives would be better off not becoming physicians. Everyone has a unique talent or calling, which might seem modest but is definitely valuable. The prize system can distract someone from their true vocation, leading them down a false path that feels pointless, and if forced to follow that path, a person's natural ability may be distorted, diminished, or even extinguished.
We repeat always that the world progresses and that we must urge men forward to obtain progress. But progress comes from the new things that are born, and these, not being foreseen, are not rewarded with prizes: rather, they often carry the leader to martyrdom. God forbid that poems should ever be born of the desire to be crowned in the Capitol! Such a vision need only come into the heart of the poet and the muse will vanish. The poem must spring from the soul of the poet, when he thinks neither of himself nor of the prize. And if he does win[Pg 25] the laurel, he will feel the vanity of such a prize. The true reward lies in the revelation through the poem of his own triumphant inner force.
We always say that the world progresses and that we need to push people forward to achieve that progress. But progress comes from the new things that come to life, and since these things are unexpected, they often go unrecognized and can even lead the innovator to martyrdom. God forbid that poems should ever arise from the wish to be celebrated in the Capitol! Such a thought should only enter a poet's heart for the muse to disappear. The poem must come from the poet's soul when he isn’t thinking about himself or the reward. And if he does earn[Pg 25] the laurel, he will feel the emptiness of that prize. The real reward is the revelation of his own powerful inner strength through the poem.
There does exist, however, an external prize for man; when, for example, the orator sees the faces of his listeners change with the emotions he has awakened, he experiences something so great that it can only be likened to the intense joy with which one discovers that he is loved. Our joy is to touch, and conquer souls, and this is the one prize which can bring us a true compensation.
There is, however, an external reward for humans; when, for instance, the speaker sees the expressions of their audience shift with the feelings they've stirred, they feel something so profound that it can only be compared to the deep joy of realizing that someone loves you. Our joy comes from reaching and influencing hearts, and this is the only reward that can truly compensate us.
Sometimes there is given to us a moment when we fancy ourselves to be among the great ones of the world. These are moments of happiness given to man that he may continue his existence in peace. It may be through love attained or because of the gift of a son, through a glorious discovery or the publication of a book; in some such moment we feel that there exists no man who is above us. If, in such a moment, someone vested with authority comes forward to offer us a medal or a prize, he is the important destroyer of our real reward—"And who are you?" our vanished illusion shall cry, "Who are you that recalls me to the fact that I am not the first among men? Who stands so far above me that he may give me a prize?" The prize of such a man in such a moment can only be Divine.
Sometimes we get a moment when we imagine ourselves to be among the greats of the world. These are moments of joy that people have to help them carry on in peace. It might come from love found or the blessing of a child, from a brilliant discovery or the release of a book; in that moment, we feel there’s no one above us. If, during such a moment, someone in a position of authority steps forward to give us a medal or an award, they disrupt our true reward—“And who are you?” our faded illusion might shout, “Who are you to remind me that I’m not the greatest among men? Who stands so high above me that they can hand me a prize?” The reward from such a person in that moment can only be Divine.
As for punishments, the soul of the normal man grows perfect through expanding, and punishment as commonly understood is always a form of repression. It may bring results with those inferior natures who grow in evil, but these are very few, and social progress is not affected by them. The penal code threatens us with punishment if we are dishonest within the limits indicated by the laws. But we are not honest through fear of the laws; if we[Pg 26] do not rob, if we do not kill, it is because we love peace, because the natural trend of our lives leads us forward, leading us ever farther and more definitely away from the peril of low and evil acts.
When it comes to punishments, the soul of a normal person grows better through expansion, and punishment, as we usually think of it, is a form of repression. It might yield results with those less capable individuals who become caught up in wrongdoing, but these cases are rare, and they don't impact social progress. The penal code threatens us with punishment if we act dishonestly within the laws’ boundaries. However, we aren't honest out of fear of the law; we don't steal or kill because we value peace, and because our natural inclinations guide us forward, moving us increasingly away from the danger of base and immoral actions.
Without going into the ethical or metaphysical aspects of the question, we may safely affirm that the delinquent before he transgresses the law, has, if he knows of the existence of a punishment, felt the threatening weight of the criminal code upon him. He has defined it, or he has been lured into the crime, deluding himself with the idea that he would be able to avoid the punishment of the law. But there has occurred within his mind, a struggle between the crime and the punishment. Whether it be efficacious in hindering crime or not, this penal code is undoubtedly made for a very limited class of individuals; namely, criminals. The enormous majority of citizens are honest without any regard whatever to the threats of the law.
Without diving into the ethical or philosophical sides of the issue, we can confidently say that a person who breaks the law, if they are aware of the possibility of punishment, has felt the looming pressure of the legal system weighing on them. They have either acknowledged it or been tempted into committing the crime, convincing themselves that they could escape the law's consequences. However, a battle between the crime and the punishment has taken place in their mind. Whether or not this legal system effectively prevents crime, it is clearly designed for a very small group of people—namely, criminals. The vast majority of citizens are honest, completely unaffected by the law's threats.
The real punishment of normal man is the loss of the consciousness of that individual power and greatness which are the sources of his inner life. Such a punishment often falls upon men in the fullness of success. A man whom we would consider crowned by happiness and fortune may be suffering from this form of punishment. Far too often man does not see the real punishment which threatens him.
The true punishment for an ordinary person is losing awareness of their personal power and greatness, which are the foundations of their inner life. This kind of punishment often comes to those who seem to have it all—success and happiness. Someone we view as completely fulfilled and fortunate might actually be enduring this form of suffering. Too often, people fail to recognize the real threat of this punishment looming over them.
And it is just here that education may help.
And this is exactly where education can make a difference.
To-day we hold the pupils in school, restricted by those instruments so degrading to body and spirit, the desk—and material prizes and punishments. Our aim in all this is to reduce them to the discipline of immobility and silence,—to lead them,—where? Far too often toward no definite end.[Pg 27]
Today we keep students in school, confined by those tools that degrade both body and spirit, the desk—and the material rewards and punishments. Our goal in all this is to mold them into a state of immobility and silence,—to guide them,—where? Too often, it’s toward no clear purpose.[Pg 27]
Often the education of children consists in pouring into their intelligence the intellectual contents of school programmes. And often these programmes have been compiled in the official department of education, and their use is imposed by law upon the teacher and the child.
Often, educating children involves filling their minds with the academic content outlined in school programs. Frequently, these programs are created by the official education department, and their use is mandated by law for both teachers and students.
Ah, before such dense and wilful disregard of the life which is growing within these children, we should hide our heads in shame and cover our guilty faces with our hands!
Ah, in response to such stubborn and blatant neglect of the lives developing within these children, we should be ashamed and cover our guilty faces with our hands!
Sergi says truly: "To-day an urgent need imposes itself upon society: the reconstruction of methods in education and instruction, and he who fights for this cause, fights for human regeneration."
Sergi says truly: "Today an urgent need is pressing on society: the overhaul of methods in education and instruction, and anyone who fights for this cause is fighting for human renewal."
[1] Trevisini, 1892.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Trevisini, 1892.
[2] Montessori: "L'Antropologia Pedagogica." Vallardi.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Montessori: "Pedagogical Anthropology." Vallardi.
CHAPTER II
Methods in History
If we are to develop a system of scientific pedagogy, we must, then, proceed along lines very different from those which have been followed up to the present time. The transformation of the school must be contemporaneous with the preparation of the teacher. For if we make of the teacher an observer, familiar with the experimental methods, then we must make it possible for her to observe and to experiment in the school. The fundamental principle of scientific pedagogy must be, indeed, the liberty of the pupil;—such liberty as shall permit a development of individual, spontaneous manifestations of the child's nature. If a new and scientific pedagogy is to arise from the study of the individual, such study must occupy itself with the observation of free children. In vain should we await a practical renewing of pedagogical methods from methodical examinations of pupils made under the guidance offered to-day by pedagogy, anthropology, and experimental psychology.
If we're going to create a system of scientific teaching, we need to take a completely different approach than we've used so far. The change in schools has to happen at the same time as preparing teachers. If we want teachers to be observers who understand experimental methods, we have to enable them to observe and experiment in the classroom. The core principle of scientific teaching must be the freedom of the student;—a freedom that allows for the natural and spontaneous development of a child's personality. If a new and scientific approach to teaching is going to come from the study of the individual, that study must focus on observing free children. We shouldn't expect a practical renewal of teaching methods from systematic examinations of students guided by today's pedagogy, anthropology, and experimental psychology.
Every branch of experimental science has grown out of the application of a method peculiar to itself. Bacteriology owes its scientific content to the method of isolation and culture of microbes. Criminal, medical, and pedagogical anthropology owe their progress to the application of anthropological methods to individuals of various classes, such as criminals, the insane, the sick of the clinics,[Pg 29] scholars. So experimental psychology needs as its starting point an exact definition of the technique to be used in making the experiment.
Every branch of experimental science has developed from a unique method specific to it. Bacteriology owes its scientific basis to the methods of isolating and cultivating microbes. Criminal, medical, and educational anthropology have advanced through the application of anthropological methods to various groups, such as criminals, the mentally ill, patients in clinics, and scholars. Likewise, experimental psychology requires a precise definition of the techniques to be employed in conducting experiments.[Pg 29]
To put it broadly, it is important to define the method, the technique, and from its application to await the definite result, which must be gathered entirely from actual experience. One of the characteristics of experimental sciences is to proceed to the making of an experiment without preconceptions of any sort as to the final result of the experiment itself. For example, should we wish to make scientific observations concerning the development of the head as related to varying degrees of intelligence, one of the conditions of such an experiment would be to ignore, in the taking of the measurements, which were the most intelligent and which the most backward among the scholars examined. And this because the preconceived idea that the most intelligent should have the head more fully developed will inevitably alter the results of the research.
To put it simply, it's important to define the method, the technique, and then from its application, wait for the definitive result, which must be derived entirely from actual experience. One of the key traits of experimental sciences is to carry out an experiment without any preconceived notions about the final outcome of the experiment itself. For example, if we want to make scientific observations about the development of the head in relation to different levels of intelligence, one of the requirements for such an experiment would be to ignore, when taking measurements, which scholars are the most intelligent and which are the least. This is because the preconceived notion that the most intelligent should have a more developed head will inevitably skew the results of the research.
He who experiments must, while doing so, divest himself of every preconception. It is clear then that if we wish to make use of a method of experimental psychology, the first thing necessary is to renounce all former creeds and to proceed by means of the method in the search for truth.
Anyone who experiments must, while doing so, let go of all preconceptions. It’s clear that if we want to use a method of experimental psychology, the first thing we need to do is abandon all previous beliefs and use the method in our search for truth.
We must not start, for example, from any dogmatic ideas which we may happen to have held upon the subject of child psychology. Instead, we must proceed by a method which shall tend to make possible to the child complete liberty. This we must do if we are to draw from the observation of his spontaneous manifestations conclusions which shall lead to the establishment of a truly scientific child psychology. It may be that such a[Pg 30] method holds for us great surprises, unexpected possibilities.
We shouldn't begin with any fixed ideas we might have about child psychology. Instead, we need to use a method that allows the child complete freedom. This is essential if we want to observe their natural behaviors and reach conclusions that will help us create a truly scientific understanding of child psychology. This approach might reveal significant surprises and unexpected possibilities for us.
Child psychology and pedagogy must establish their content by successive conquests arrived at through the method of experimentation.
Child psychology and teaching methods need to define their content through a series of achievements gained by using experimentation.
Our problem then, is this: to establish the method peculiar to experimental pedagogy. It cannot be that used in other experimental sciences. It is true that scientific pedagogy is rounded out by hygiene, anthropology, and psychology, and adopts in part the technical method characteristic of all three, although limiting itself to a special study of the individual to be educated. But in pedagogy this study of the individual, though it must accompany the very different work of education, is a limited and secondary part of the science as a whole.
Our problem now is this: to establish the method specific to experimental pedagogy. It can't be the same as what’s used in other experimental sciences. It's true that scientific pedagogy is informed by hygiene, anthropology, and psychology, and it partially adopts the technical methods typical of all three, although it focuses more specifically on studying the individual being educated. However, in pedagogy, this focus on the individual, while it must accompany the very different work of education, is a limited and secondary aspect of the science overall.
This present study deals in part with the method used in experimental pedagogy, and is the result of my experiences during two years in the "Children's Houses." I offer only a beginning of the method, which I have applied to children between the ages of three and six. But I believe that these tentative experiments, because of the surprising results which they have given, will be the means of inspiring a continuation of the work thus undertaken.
This study explores the method used in experimental teaching and is based on my experiences over two years in the "Children's Houses." I present only the initial approach that I've applied with children aged three to six. However, I believe that these preliminary experiments, due to their unexpected results, will encourage further development of this work.
Indeed, although our educational system, which experience has demonstrated to be excellent, is not yet entirely completed, it nevertheless constitutes a system well enough established to be practical in all institutions where young children are cared for, and in the first elementary classes.
Indeed, while our educational system, which experience has shown to be excellent, isn't fully complete yet, it is still established enough to be practical in all institutions that care for young children and in the early elementary classes.
Perhaps I am not exact when I say that the present work springs from two years of experience. I do not believe that these later attempts of mine could alone have rendered possible all that I set forth in this book. The[Pg 31] origin of the educational system in use in the "Children's Houses" is much more remote, and if this experience with normal children seems indeed rather brief, it should be remembered that it sprang from preceding pedagogical experiences with abnormal children, and that considered in this way, it represents a long and thoughtful endeavour.
Maybe I’m not being precise when I say that this work comes from two years of experience. I don’t think these later efforts of mine could have fully accounted for everything I discuss in this book. The[Pg 31] foundation of the educational system used in the "Children's Houses" goes back much further, and while my experience with typical children may seem quite short, it’s important to remember that it is built on earlier teaching experiences with atypical children. Viewed this way, it represents a long and thoughtful journey.
About fifteen years ago, being assistant doctor at the Psychiatric Clinic of the University of Rome, I had occasion to frequent the insane asylums to study the sick and to select subjects for the clinics. In this way I became interested in the idiot children who were at that time housed in the general insane asylums. In those days thyroid organotherapy was in full development, and this drew the attention of physicians to deficient children. I myself, having completed my regular hospital services, had already turned my attention to the study of children's diseases.
About fifteen years ago, while I was an assistant doctor at the Psychiatric Clinic of the University of Rome, I had the opportunity to visit mental hospitals to study patients and select subjects for the clinics. During this time, I developed an interest in the children with intellectual disabilities who were housed in those general mental hospitals. Back then, thyroid organotherapy was being actively developed, which caught the attention of doctors towards children with deficiencies. Having finished my regular hospital duties, I had already started focusing on studying child health issues.
It was thus that, being interested in the idiot children, I became conversant with the special method of education devised for these unhappy little ones by Edward Séguin, and was led to study thoroughly the idea, then beginning to be prevalent among the physicians, of the efficacy of "pedagogical treatment" for various morbid forms of disease such as deafness, paralysis, idiocy, rickets, etc. The fact that pedagogy must join with medicine in the treatment of disease was the practical outcome of the thought of the time. And because of this tendency the method of treating disease by gymnastics became widely popular. I, however, differed from my colleagues in that I felt that mental deficiency presented chiefly a pedagogical, rather than mainly a medical, problem. Much was said in the medical congresses of the medico-pedagogic method for the treatment and education of the feeble[Pg 32] minded, and I expressed my differing opinion in an address on Moral Education at the Pedagogical Congress of Turin in 1898. I believe that I touched a chord already vibrant, because the idea, making its way among the physicians and elementary teachers, spread in a flash as presenting a question of lively interest to the school.
I became interested in the education of children with intellectual disabilities and learned about the special teaching methods created for them by Edward Séguin. This led me to study the emerging belief among doctors about the effectiveness of "pedagogical treatment" for various medical conditions like deafness, paralysis, and intellectual disabilities. At the time, it became clear that education should work alongside medicine in treating illnesses. This shift in thinking made the approach of using gymnastics to treat diseases really popular. However, I believed that mental deficiencies were primarily an educational challenge, not just a medical one. There was a lot of discussion at medical conferences about the combined medical and educational approach for helping those with intellectual challenges. I shared my different perspective in a speech on Moral Education at the Pedagogical Congress in Turin in 1898. I felt I struck a chord because the idea quickly gained traction among doctors and educators, as it raised an important issue for schools.
In fact I was called upon by my master, Guido Baccelli, the great Minister of Education, to deliver to the teachers of Rome a course of lectures on the education of feeble-minded children. This course soon developed into the State Orthophrenic School, which I directed for more than two years.
In fact, my boss, Guido Baccelli, the prominent Minister of Education, asked me to give a series of lectures to the teachers of Rome on educating children with intellectual disabilities. This series quickly turned into the State Orthophrenic School, which I led for over two years.
In this school we had an all-day class of children composed of those who in the elementary schools were considered hopelessly deficient. Later on, through the help of a philanthropic organisation, there was founded a Medical Pedagogic Institute where, besides the children from the public schools, we brought together all of the idiot children from the insane asylums in Rome.
In this school, we had an all-day class for kids who were seen as hopelessly behind in elementary schools. Later, with support from a charitable organization, a Medical Pedagogic Institute was established where, in addition to the kids from public schools, we also brought together all the children with intellectual disabilities from the mental hospitals in Rome.
I spent these two years with the help of my colleagues in preparing the teachers of Rome for a special method of observation and education of feeble-minded children. Not only did I train teachers, but what was much more important, after I had been in London and Paris for the purpose of studying in a practical way the education of deficients, I gave myself over completely to the actual teaching of the children, directing at the same time the work of the other teachers in our institute.
I spent these two years working with my colleagues to prepare the teachers in Rome for a specialized method of observing and educating children with intellectual disabilities. I not only trained teachers, but more importantly, after studying the practical aspects of educating these children in London and Paris, I fully dedicated myself to actually teaching the kids while also overseeing the work of the other teachers at our institute.
I was more than an elementary teacher, for I was present, or directly taught the children, from eight in the morning to seven in the evening without interruption. These two years of practice are my first and indeed my true degree in pedagogy. From the very beginning of[Pg 33] my work with deficient children (1898 to 1900) I felt that the methods which I used had in them nothing peculiarly limited to the instruction of idiots. I believed that they contained educational principles more rational than those in use, so much more so, indeed, that through their means an inferior mentality would be able to grow and develop. This feeling, so deep as to be in the nature of an intuition, became my controlling idea after I had left the school for deficients, and, little by little, I became convinced that similar methods applied to normal children would develop or set free their personality in a marvellous and surprising way.
I was more than just an elementary teacher; I was there, directly teaching the kids, from eight in the morning until seven in the evening without a break. Those two years of experience were my first and truly my real qualification in teaching. Right from the start of my work with children with disabilities (1898 to 1900), I felt that the methods I used weren’t just meant for teaching those considered "idiots." I believed they had educational principles that were much more rational than what was commonly used, so much so that they could help a less developed mind grow and thrive. This deep feeling, almost like an instinct, became my main idea after I left the special school, and gradually, I became convinced that applying similar methods to normal kids would wonderfully and surprisingly unleash their personalities.
It was then that I began a genuine and thorough study of what is known as remedial pedagogy, and, then, wishing to undertake the study of normal pedagogy and of the principles upon which it is based, I registered as a student of philosophy at the University. A great faith animated me, and although I did not know that I should ever be able to test the truth of my idea, I gave up every other occupation to deepen and broaden its conception. It was almost as if I prepared myself for an unknown mission.
It was then that I started a real and thorough study of what’s known as remedial education, and wanting to dive into the study of regular education and the principles behind it, I enrolled as a philosophy student at the University. I was filled with great hope, and even though I didn’t know if I would ever be able to test the truth of my idea, I abandoned all other activities to explore and expand its understanding. It felt almost like I was getting ready for an unknown mission.
The methods for the education of deficients had their origin at the time of the French Revolution in the work of a physician whose achievements occupy a prominent place in the history of medicine, as he was the founder of that branch of medical science which to-day is known as Otiatria (diseases of the ear).
The ways to educate people with disabilities started during the French Revolution with the work of a doctor whose accomplishments hold a significant place in medical history, as he founded the field of medicine now known as Otiatria (ear diseases).
He was the first to attempt a methodical education of the sense of hearing. He made these experiments in the institute for deaf mutes founded in Paris by Pereire, and actually succeeded in making the semi-deaf hear clearly. Later on, having in charge for eight years the idiot boy[Pg 34] known as "the wild boy of Aveyron," he extended to the treatment of all the senses those educational methods which had already given such excellent results in the treatment of the sense of hearing. A student of Pinel, Itard, was the first educator to practise the observation of the pupil in the way in which the sick are observed in the hospitals, especially those suffering from diseases of the nervous system.
He was the first to try a systematic approach to educating the sense of hearing. He conducted these experiments at the institute for deaf-mutes founded in Paris by Pereire and actually succeeded in helping the semi-deaf hear clearly. Later, after working for eight years with the boy known as "the wild boy of Aveyron," he applied the educational methods that had already shown great success in teaching the sense of hearing to the treatment of all the senses. A student of Pinel, Itard, was the first educator to practice the observation of the student in the same way that patients are observed in hospitals, especially those suffering from nervous system disorders.
The pedagogic writings of Itard are most interesting and minute descriptions of educational efforts and experiences, and anyone reading them to-day must admit that they were practically the first attempts at experimental psychology. But the merit of having completed a genuine educational system for deficient children was due to Edward Séguin, first a teacher and then a physician. He took the experiences of Itard as his starting point, applying these methods, modifying and completing them during a period of ten years' experience with children taken from the insane asylums and placed in, a little school in Rue Pigalle in Paris. This method was described for the first time in a volume of more than six hundred pages, published in Paris in 1846, with the title: "Traitement Moral, Hygiène et Education des Idiots." Later Séguin emigrated to the United States of America where he founded many institutions for deficients, and where, after another twenty years of experience, he published the second edition of his method, under a very different title: "Idiocy and its Treatment by the Physiological Method." This volume was published in New York in 1886, and in it Séguin had carefully defined his method of education, calling it the physiological method. He no longer referred in the title to a method for the "education of idiots" as if the method were special to them, but spoke[Pg 35] now of idiocy treated by a physiological method. If we consider that pedagogy always had psychology as its base, and that Wundt defines a "physiological psychology," the coincidence of these ideas must strike us, and lead us to suspect in the physiological method some connection with physiological psychology.
The educational writings of Itard provide fascinating and detailed accounts of teaching efforts and experiences. Anyone reading them today has to acknowledge that they were practically the first attempts at experimental psychology. However, the credit for developing a real educational system for children with disabilities goes to Edward Séguin, who started as a teacher and later became a physician. He built on Itard's experiences as a foundation, applying, modifying, and enhancing these methods over ten years of working with children taken from mental health facilities and placed in a small school on Rue Pigalle in Paris. This method was first described in a comprehensive volume of over six hundred pages published in Paris in 1846, titled "Traitement Moral, Hygiène et Education des Idiots." Later, Séguin moved to the United States, where he established many institutions for individuals with disabilities, and after another twenty years of experience, he published the second edition of his method under a very different title: "Idiocy and its Treatment by the Physiological Method." This book was published in New York in 1886, where Séguin thoroughly defined his educational approach, calling it the physiological method. He no longer referred to it specifically as a method for the "education of idiots," which suggested it was exclusive to them, but instead talked about idiocy treated through a physiological method. Considering that pedagogy has always relied on psychology, and that Wundt defines "physiological psychology," the overlap of these ideas is noteworthy and suggests a connection between the physiological method and physiological psychology.
While I was assistant at the Psychiatric Clinic, I had read Edward Séguin's French book, with great interest. But the English book which was published in New York twenty years later, although it was quoted in the works about special education by Bourneville, was not to be found in any library. I made a vain quest for it, going from house to house of nearly all the English physicians, who were known to be specially interested in deficient children, or who were superintendents of special schools. The fact that this book was unknown in England, although it had been published in the English language, made me think that the Séguin system had never been understood. In fact, although Séguin was constantly quoted in all the publications dealing with institutions for deficients, the educational applications described, were quite different from the applications of Séguin's system.
While I was an assistant at the Psychiatric Clinic, I read Edward Séguin's French book with great interest. However, the English book published in New York twenty years later, although referenced in Bourneville's works about special education, could not be found in any library. I made a fruitless search for it, visiting nearly all the English doctors who were known to have a special interest in children with disabilities or who were heads of special schools. The fact that this book was unknown in England, despite being published in English, made me think that the Séguin system had never been properly understood. In fact, although Séguin was frequently cited in all publications discussing institutions for disabled individuals, the educational applications described were quite different from those of Séguin's system.
Almost everywhere the methods applied to deficients are more or less the same as those in use for normal children. In Germany, especially, a friend who had gone there in order to help me in my researches, noticed that although special materials existed here and there in the pedagogical museums of the schools for deficients, these materials were rarely used. Indeed, the German educators hold the principle that it is well to adapt to the teaching of backward children, the same method used for normal ones; but these methods are much more objective in Germany than with us.[Pg 36]
Almost everywhere, the methods used for individuals with disabilities are pretty much the same as those used for typical children. In Germany, especially, a friend who went there to help with my research noticed that although there were special materials available in the pedagogical museums of schools for individuals with disabilities, these materials were rarely utilized. In fact, German educators believe that it's beneficial to apply the same teaching methods used for typical children to those who are behind in their development; however, these methods are much more objective in Germany than they are here.[Pg 36]
At the Bicêtre, where I spent some time, I saw that it was the didactic apparatus of Séguin far more than his method which was being used, although, the French text was in the hands of the educators. The teaching there was purely mechanical, each teacher following the rules according to the letter. I found, however, wherever I went, in London as well as in Paris, a desire for fresh counsel and for new experiences, since far too often Séguin's claim that with his methods the education of idiots was actually possible, had proved only a delusion.
At Bicêtre, where I spent some time, I noticed that it was mainly Séguin's teaching tools rather than his method that were being used, even though the French text was in the educators' hands. The instruction there was purely mechanical, with each teacher strictly adhering to the rules. However, I found, wherever I went, in London as well as in Paris, a desire for new ideas and experiences, since far too often Séguin's assertion that his methods made it possible to educate those with intellectual disabilities had turned out to be just an illusion.
After this study of the methods in use throughout Europe I concluded my experiments upon the deficients of Rome, and taught them throughout two years. I followed Séguin's book, and also derived much help from the remarkable experiments of Itard.
After studying the methods used across Europe, I wrapped up my experiments with the students in Rome and taught them for two years. I followed Séguin's book and also gained a lot from Itard's amazing experiments.
Guided by the work of these two men, I had manufactured a great variety of didactic material. These materials, which I have never seen complete in any institution, became in the hands of those who knew how to apply them, a most remarkable and efficient means, but unless rightly presented, they failed to attract the attention of the deficients.
Guided by the work of these two men, I created a wide range of educational materials. These materials, which I’ve never seen fully available in any institution, became a remarkable and effective tool in the hands of those who knew how to use them, but if not presented properly, they didn’t grab the attention of the students who needed them.
I felt that I understood the discouragement of those working with feeble-minded children, and could see why they had, in so many cases, abandoned the method. The prejudice that the educator must place himself on a level with the one to be educated, sinks the teacher of deficients into a species of apathy. He accepts the fact that he is educating an inferior personality, and for that very reason he does not succeed. Even so those who teach little children too often have the idea that they are educating babies and seek to place themselves on the child's level by approaching him with games, and often with foolish[Pg 37] stories. Instead of all this, we must know how to call to the man which lies dormant within the soul of the child. I felt this, intuitively, and believed that not the didactic material, but my voice which called to them, awakened the children, and encouraged them to use the didactic material, and through it, to educate themselves. I was guided in my work by the deep respect which I felt for their misfortune, and by the love which these unhappy children know how to awaken in those who are near them.
I felt like I understood the frustration of those working with kids who have intellectual disabilities and could see why they often gave up on that approach. The bias that educators need to lower themselves to the level of the student leads teachers of these kids into a kind of indifference. They accept that they are teaching someone they see as less capable, and that alone is why they don't succeed. Similarly, those who teach young children often believe they are just teaching toddlers and try to connect with them through games and often silly [Pg 37] stories. Instead of this, we should know how to reach the person that lies dormant within the child's spirit. I felt this instinctively and believed that it wasn't the teaching material, but my voice that called out to them, awakening the children and encouraging them to engage with the material, paving the way for their own education. My work was guided by the deep respect I felt for their challenges and by the love that these unfortunate children inspire in those around them.
Séguin, too, expressed himself in the same way on this subject. Reading his patient attempts, I understand clearly that the first didactic material used by him was spiritual. Indeed, at the close of the French volume, the author, giving a résumé of his work, concludes by saying rather sadly, that all he has established will be lost or useless, if the teachers are not prepared for their work. He holds rather original views concerning the preparation of teachers of deficients. He would have them good to look upon, pleasant-voiced, careful in every detail of their personal appearance, doing everything possible to make themselves attractive. They must, he says, render themselves attractive in voice and manner, since it is their task to awaken souls which are frail and weary, and to lead them forth to lay hold upon the beauty and strength of life.
Séguin also shared similar thoughts on this topic. Reading his careful efforts, I clearly see that the first teaching tools he used were spiritual. In fact, at the end of the French volume, the author, summarizing his work, sadly states that everything he has established will be lost or useless if the teachers are not ready for their work. He has rather unique ideas about preparing teachers for individuals with disabilities. He believes they should have a pleasant appearance, a nice voice, and pay attention to every detail of their personal presentation, doing everything they can to be appealing. They must, he says, make themselves attractive in voice and demeanor, as it is their job to uplift fragile and weary souls and guide them to embrace the beauty and strength of life.
This belief that we must act upon the spirit, served as a sort of secret key, opening to me the long series of didactic experiments so wonderfully analysed by Edward Séguin,—experiments which, properly understood, are really most efficacious in the education of idiots. I myself obtained most surprising results through their application, but I must confess that, while my efforts showed themselves in the intellectual progress of my pupils, a[Pg 38] peculiar form of exhaustion prostrated me. It was as if I gave to them some vital force from within me. Those things which we call encouragement, comfort, love, respect, are drawn from the soul of man, and the more freely we give of them, the more do we renew and reinvigorate the life about us.
This belief that we need to engage with the spirit acted as a kind of secret key, unlocking for me the long list of educational experiments brilliantly analyzed by Edward Séguin—experiments that, when properly understood, are truly very effective in teaching individuals with intellectual disabilities. I achieved some surprising results using these methods, but I have to admit that, while my work reflected in the intellectual growth of my students, a[Pg 38] strange kind of exhaustion overwhelmed me. It felt like I was giving them some inner life force of my own. The things we call encouragement, comfort, love, and respect come from the human soul, and the more freely we share them, the more we refresh and energize the life around us.
Without such inspiration the most perfect external stimulus may pass unobserved. Thus the blind Saul, before the glory of the sun, exclaimed, "This?—It is the dense fog!"
Without such inspiration, even the most perfect external stimulus can go unnoticed. So, the blind Saul, confronted with the brilliance of the sun, exclaimed, "This?—It’s just a thick fog!"
Thus prepared, I was able to proceed to new experiments on my own account. This is not the place for a report of these experiments, and I will only note that at this time I attempted an original method for the teaching of reading and writing, a part of the education of the child which was most imperfectly treated in the works of both Itard and Séguin.
Thus prepared, I was able to move on to new experiments on my own. This isn’t the place to detail those experiments, and I will just mention that during this time I tried out a new approach to teaching reading and writing, an area of child education that was handled very poorly in the works of both Itard and Séguin.
I succeeded in teaching a number of the idiots from the asylums both to read and to write so well that I was able to present them at a public school for an examination together with normal children. And they passed the examination successfully.
I managed to teach several of the individuals from the asylums how to read and write well enough that I could present them at a public school for an exam alongside regular kids. And they passed the exam successfully.
These results seemed almost miraculous to those who saw them. To me, however, the boys from the asylums had been able to compete with the normal children only because they had been taught in a different way. They had been helped in their psychic development, and the normal children had, instead, been suffocated, held back. I found myself thinking that if, some day, the special education which had developed these idiot children in such a marvellous fashion, could be applied to the development of normal children, the "miracle" of which my friends talked would no longer be possible. The abyss[Pg 39] between the inferior mentality of the idiot and that of the normal brain can never be bridged if the normal child has reached his full development.
These results seemed almost miraculous to those who witnessed them. To me, though, the boys from the asylums were able to compete with the typical children only because they had been taught differently. They had received support in their mental development, while the typical children had, instead, been stifled and held back. I found myself thinking that if, someday, the specialized education that had developed these intellectually challenged children in such an incredible way could be applied to the growth of typical children, the "miracle" my friends talked about would no longer be possible. The gap[Pg 39] between the lower mentality of the intellectually challenged and that of the typical brain can never be bridged if the typical child has reached his full potential.
While everyone was admiring the progress of my idiots, I was searching for the reasons which could keep the happy healthy children of the common schools on so low a plane that they could be equalled in tests of intelligence by my unfortunate pupils!
While everyone was busy admiring the progress of my students, I was looking for the reasons that could keep the happy, healthy kids from regular schools at such a low level that they could be matched in intelligence tests by my struggling pupils!
One day, a directress in the Institute for Deficients, asked me to read one of the prophecies of Ezekiel which had made a profound impression upon her, as it seemed to prophesy the education of deficients.
One day, a director at the Institute for Deficients asked me to read one of Ezekiel's prophecies that had deeply impacted her because it seemed to predict the education of those with deficiencies.
"The hand of the Lord was upon me, and carried me out in the spirit of the Lord, and set me down in the midst of the valley which was full of bones.
"The hand of the Lord was on me, and the Spirit of the Lord took me and set me down in the middle of a valley filled with bones."
"And caused me to pass by them round about: and, behold, there were very many in the open valley; and, lo, they were very dry.
"And made me walk all around them: and, look, there were a lot of them in the open valley; and, wow, they were really dry."
"And he said unto me, Son of man, can these bones live? And I answered, O Lord God, thou knowest.
"And he said to me, Son of man, can these bones live? And I answered, O Lord God, you know."
"Again he said unto me, Prophesy upon these bones, and say unto them, O ye dry hones, hear the word of the Lord.
"Once more, he said to me, 'Prophesy to these bones and tell them, O you dry bones, listen to the word of the Lord.'"
"Thus saith the Lord God unto these bones; Behold, I will cause breath to enter into you, and ye shall live:
"Then the Lord God said to these bones: Look, I will put breath in you, and you will live."
"And I will lay sinews upon you, and will bring up flesh upon you, and cover you with skin, and put breath in you, and ye shall live; and ye shall know that I am the Lord.
"And I will put tendons on you, and bring flesh upon you, and cover you with skin, and put breath in you, and you will live; and you will know that I am the Lord."
"So I prophesied as I was commanded: and as I prophesied, there was a noise, and behold a shaking, and the bones came together, bone to his bone.
"So I spoke as I was instructed: and as I spoke, there was a sound, and suddenly a shaking, and the bones came together, bone to its bone."
"And when I beheld, lo, the sinews and the flesh came[Pg 40] up upon them, and the skin covered them above: but there was no breath in them.
"And when I looked, suddenly, the muscles and the flesh appeared[Pg 40] on them, and the skin covered them, but there was no breath in them."
"Then said he unto me, Prophesy unto the wind, prophesy, son of man, and say to the wind, Thus saith the Lord God; Come from the four winds, O breath, and breathe upon these slain, that they may live.
"Then he said to me, 'Prophesy to the wind, prophesy, son of man, and say to the wind, This is what the Lord God says: Come from the four winds, O breath, and breathe on these slain so that they may live.'"
"So I prophesied as He commanded me, and the breath came into them, and they lived, and stood up upon their feet, an exceeding great army.
"So I spoke as He instructed me, and the breath entered into them, and they came to life, standing up on their feet, an enormous army."
"Then he said unto me, Son of man, these bones are the whole house of Israel: behold, they say, Our bones are dried, and our hope is lost: we are cut off for our parts."
"Then he said to me, Son of man, these bones represent the entire house of Israel: look, they say, Our bones are dried up, and our hope is gone: we are cut off from our parts."
In fact, the words—"I will cause breath to enter into you, and ye shall live," seem to me to refer to the direct individual work of the master who encourages, calls to, and helps his pupil, preparing him for education. And the remainder—"I will lay sinews upon you, and will bring up flesh upon you," recalled the fundamental phrase which sums up Séguin's whole method,—"to lead the child, as it were, by the hand, from the education of the muscular system, to that of the nervous system, and of the senses." It was thus that Séguin taught the idiots how to walk, how to maintain their equilibrium in the most difficult movements of the body—such as going up stairs, jumping, etc., and finally, to feel, beginning the education of the muscular sensations by touching, and reading the difference of temperature, and ending with the education of the particular senses.
In fact, the words—"I will make breath enter you, and you will live," really seem to refer to the individual work of the teacher who encourages, calls to, and helps their student, getting them ready for education. The rest—"I will put sinews on you, and will bring up flesh on you," reminds me of the key phrase that captures Séguin's whole method—"to guide the child, so to speak, by the hand, from teaching the muscular system to teaching the nervous system and the senses." That's how Séguin taught those with intellectual disabilities how to walk, how to keep their balance during the most challenging movements—like going upstairs, jumping, etc.—and ultimately, to feel, starting with teaching muscular sensations through touch, recognizing temperature differences, and finishing with the education of the specific senses.
But if the training goes no further than this, we have only led these children to adapt themselves to a low order of life (almost a vegetable existence). "Call to the Spirit," says the prophecy, and the spirit shall enter into them, and they shall have life. Séguin, indeed, led the[Pg 41] idiot from the vegetative to the intellectual life, "from the education, of the senses to general notions, from general notions to abstract thought, from abstract thought to morality." But when this wonderful work is accomplished, and by means of a minute physiological analysis and of a gradual progression in method, the idiot has become a man, he is still an inferior in the midst of his fellow men, an individual who will never be able fully to adapt himself to the social environment: "Our bones are dried, and our hope is lost; we are cut off for our parts."
But if the training doesn’t go beyond this point, we have only helped these children adjust to a lower level of existence (almost like a plant). "Call to the Spirit," the prophecy says, and the spirit will enter them, and they will have life. Séguin, in fact, took the[Pg 41] person with intellectual disabilities from a vegetative state to an intellectual life, "from sensory education to general concepts, from general concepts to abstract thinking, from abstract thinking to morality." But even when this amazing work is done, and through detailed physiological analysis and a gradual methodical approach, the individual has become a person, he still remains inferior among his peers, someone who will never be able to completely fit into the social environment: "Our bones are dried, and our hope is lost; we are cut off for our parts."
This gives us another reason why the tedious method of Séguin was so often abandoned; the tremendous difficulty of the means, did not justify the end. Everyone felt this, and many said, "There is still so much to be done for normal children!"
This gives us another reason why the tedious method of Séguin was often abandoned; the huge difficulty of the means didn’t justify the end. Everyone felt this, and many said, "There is still so much to be done for typical children!"
Having through actual experience justified my faith in Séguin's method, I withdrew from active work among deficients, and began a more thorough study of the works of Itard and Séguin. I felt the need of meditation. I did a thing which I had not done before, and which perhaps few students have been willing to do,—I translated into Italian and copied out with my own hand, the writings of these men, from beginning to end, making for myself books as the old Benedictines used to do before the diffusion of printing.
After confirming my belief in Séguin's method through actual experience, I stepped back from actively working with people with intellectual disabilities and began a deeper exploration of Itard and Séguin's works. I felt the need to reflect. I did something I hadn't done before, and which maybe few students have been willing to do—I translated into Italian and hand-copied the writings of these men from start to finish, creating my own books just like the old Benedictines used to do before printing became widespread.
I chose to do this by hand, in order that I might have time to weigh the sense of each word, and to read, in truth, the spirit of the author. I had just finished copying the 600 pages of Séguin's French volume when I received from New York a copy of the English book published in 1866. This old volume had been found among the books discarded from the private library of a New York physi[Pg 42]cian. I translated it with the help of an English friend. This volume did not add much in the way of new pedagogical experiments, but dealt with the philosophy of the experiences described in the first volume. The man who had studied abnormal children for thirty years expressed the idea that the physiological method, which has as its base the individual study of the pupil and which forms its educative methods upon the analysis of physiological and psychological phenomena, must come also to be applied to normal children. This step, he believed, would show the way to a complete human regeneration.
I decided to do this by hand so that I could take the time to consider the meaning of each word and truly understand the author's spirit. I had just finished copying the 600 pages of Séguin's French book when I received a copy of the English version published in 1866 from New York. This old book had been discovered among the discarded books from a private library of a New York physician. I translated it with the help of an English friend. This volume didn’t add much in terms of new teaching methods, but it focused on the philosophy of the experiences described in the first volume. The man who had studied abnormal children for thirty years expressed the belief that the physiological method, which is based on individual study of the student and develops educational methods from the analysis of physiological and psychological phenomena, should also be applied to normal children. He believed that this step would pave the way for complete human regeneration.
The voice of Séguin seemed to be like the voice of the forerunner crying in the wilderness, and my thoughts were filled with the immensity and importance of a work which should be able to reform the school and education.
The voice of Séguin sounded like a forerunner shouting in the wilderness, and my thoughts were consumed by the vastness and significance of a task that could transform the school and education.
At this time I was registered at the University as a student of philosophy, and followed the courses in experimental psychology, which had only recently been established in Italian universities, namely, at Turin, Rome and Naples. At the same time I made researches in Pedagogic Anthropology in the elementary schools, studying in this way the methods in organisation used for the education of normal children. This work led to the teaching of Pedagogic Anthropology in the University of Rome.
At that time, I was enrolled at the University as a philosophy student and took courses in experimental psychology, which had only recently been introduced in Italian universities, specifically in Turin, Rome, and Naples. Simultaneously, I researched Pedagogic Anthropology in elementary schools, examining the methods and organization used for the education of regular children. This work resulted in the introduction of Pedagogic Anthropology as a subject at the University of Rome.
I had long wished to experiment with the methods for deficients in a first elementary class of normal children, but I had never thought of making use of the homes or institutions where very young children were cared for. It was pure chance that brought this new idea to my mind.
I had wanted to try out the methods for kids with developmental delays in a first-grade class of typical children for a long time, but I never considered using the homes or facilities where very young kids were taken care of. It was purely by chance that this new idea came to me.
It was near the end of the year 1906, and I had just returned from Milan, where I had been one of a committee at the International Exhibition for the assignment of[Pg 43] prizes in the subjects of Scientific Pedagogy and Experimental Psychology. A great opportunity came to me, for I was invited by Edoardo Talamo, the Director General of the Roman Association for Good Building, to undertake the organisation of infant schools in its model tenements. It was Signor Talamo's happy idea to gather together in a large room all the little ones between the ages of three and seven belonging to the families living in the tenement. The play and work of these children was to be carried on under the guidance of a teacher who should have her own apartment in the tenement house. It was intended that every house should have its school, and as the Association for Good Building already owned more than 400 tenements in Rome the work seemed to offer tremendous possibilities of development. The first school was to be established in January, 1907, in a large tenement house in the Quarter of San Lorenzo. In the same Quarter the Association already owned fifty-eight buildings, and according to Signor Talamo's plans we should soon be able to open sixteen of these "schools within the house."
It was close to the end of 1906, and I had just returned from Milan, where I had been on a committee at the International Exhibition to award[Pg 43] prizes in Scientific Pedagogy and Experimental Psychology. A great opportunity came my way when Edoardo Talamo, the Director General of the Roman Association for Good Building, invited me to organize preschools in its model apartment buildings. Signor Talamo came up with the fantastic idea of gathering all the kids between the ages of three and seven from the families living in the building into a large room. The children would play and learn under the supervision of a teacher who would have her own apartment in the building. The plan was for every building to have its own school, and since the Association for Good Building already owned over 400 apartment buildings in Rome, this work seemed to have incredible potential for growth. The first school was set to open in January 1907 in a large apartment building in the San Lorenzo district. In that same district, the Association already owned fifty-eight buildings, and according to Signor Talamo's plans, we would soon be able to open sixteen of these "schools within the house."
This new kind of school was christened by Signora Olga Lodi, a mutual friend of Signor Talamo and myself, under the fortunate title of Casa dei Bambini or "The Children's House." Under this name the first of our schools was opened on the sixth of January, 1907, at 58 Via dei Masi. It was confided to the care of Candida Nuccitelli and was under my guidance and direction.
This new type of school was named by Signora Olga Lodi, a mutual friend of Signor Talamo and me, with the fortunate title of Casa dei Bambini or "The Children's House." Under this name, the first of our schools opened on January 6, 1907, at 58 Via dei Masi. It was entrusted to the care of Candida Nuccitelli and was under my guidance and direction.
From the very first I perceived, in all its immensity, the social and pedagogical importance of such institutions, and while at that time my visions of a triumphant future seemed exaggerated, to-day many are beginning to understand that what I saw before was indeed the truth.
From the very beginning, I recognized, in all its vastness, the social and educational significance of such institutions, and while back then my visions of a successful future seemed inflated, today many are starting to realize that what I saw back then was indeed the truth.
On the seventh of April of the same year, 1907, a sec[Pg 44]ond "Children's House" was opened in the Quarter of San Lorenzo; and on the eighteenth of October, 1908, another was inaugurated by the Humanitarian Society in Milan in the Quarter inhabited by workingmen. The workshops of this same society undertook the manufacture of the materials which we used.
On April 7th of the same year, 1907, a second "Children's House" was opened in the San Lorenzo district; and on October 18th, 1908, another was launched by the Humanitarian Society in Milan in the area where working-class people lived. The workshops of this same society produced the materials we used.
On the fourth of November following, a third "Children's House" was opened in Rome, this time not in the people's Quarter, but in a modern building for the middle classes, situated in Via Famagosta, in that part of the city known as the Prati di Castello; and in January, 1909, Italian Switzerland began to transform its orphan asylums and children's homes in which the Froebel system had been used, into "Children's Houses" adopting our methods and materials.
On November 4th of the following year, a third "Children's House" opened in Rome, this time not in a working-class area, but in a modern building for the middle class, located on Via Famagosta in the part of the city known as Prati di Castello. In January 1909, Italian Switzerland started to transform its orphanages and children's homes that had been using the Froebel system into "Children's Houses," adopting our methods and materials.
The "Children's House" has a twofold importance: the social importance which it assumes through its peculiarity of being a school within the house, and its purely pedagogic importance gained through its methods for the education of very young children, of which I now made a trial.
The "Children's House" is important for two reasons: it has social significance because it's a school located within a home, and it holds educational value for its teaching methods aimed at very young children, which I am now testing.
As I have said, Signor Talamo's invitation gave me a wonderful opportunity for applying the methods used with deficients to normal children, not of the elementary school age, but of the age usual in infant asylums.
As I mentioned, Signor Talamo's invitation provided me a great chance to apply the techniques used with those who need extra help to typical kids, not in elementary school, but at the age typically found in daycare centers.
If a parallel between the deficient and the normal child is possible, this will be during the period of early infancy when the child who has not the force to develop and he who is not yet developed are in some ways alike.
If we can draw a comparison between a child with deficiencies and a normal child, it would be during early infancy, when the child who lacks the strength to develop and the child who is not yet developed share some similarities.
The very young child has not yet acquired a secure co-ordination of muscular movements, and, therefore, walks imperfectly, and is not able to perform the ordinary acts of life, such as fastening and unfastening its garments.[Pg 45] The sense organs, such as the power of accommodation of the eye, are not yet completely developed; the language is primordial and shows those defects common to the speech of the very young child. The difficulty of fixing the attention, the general instability, etc., are characteristics which the normal infant and the deficient child have in common. Preyer, also, in his psychological study of children has turned aside to illustrate the parallel between pathological linguistic defects, and those of normal children in the process of developing.
The very young child hasn't yet developed strong coordination of their muscles, so they walk awkwardly and struggle with everyday tasks, like fastening and unfastening their clothes.[Pg 45] Their sense organs, including the ability of the eye to focus, aren't fully developed yet; their language is basic and shows the typical flaws of a young child's speech. Issues with attention, general restlessness, and other similar traits are common to both typical infants and those with developmental challenges. Preyer, in his psychological study of children, also highlighted the similarities between language problems in children with developmental issues and those in normally developing children.
Methods which made growth possible to the mental personality of the idiot ought, therefore, to aid the development of young children, and should be so adapted as to constitute a hygienic education of the entire personality of a normal human being. Many defects which become permanent, such as speech defects, the child acquires through being neglected during the most important period of his age, the period between three and six, at which time he forms and establishes his principal functions.
Methods that enabled the growth of the mental capacity of individuals with intellectual disabilities should, therefore, support the development of young children and be designed to provide a healthy education for the complete personality of a typical person. Many permanent issues, like speech problems, arise from neglect during the crucial developmental stage between the ages of three and six, when children build and strengthen their key abilities.
Here lies the significance of my pedagogical experiment in the "Children's Houses." It represents the results of a series of trials made by me, in the education of young children, with methods already used with deficients. My work has not been in any way an application, pure and simple, of the methods of Séguin to young children, as anyone who will consult the works of the author will readily see. But it is none the less true that, underlying these two years of trial, there is a basis of experiment which goes back to the days of the French Revolution, and which represents the earnest work of the lives of Itard and Séguin.
Here lies the importance of my teaching experiment in the "Children's Houses." It reflects the outcomes of a series of trials I've conducted in educating young children, using methods that have already been applied to those with learning difficulties. My work has not simply been a straightforward application of Séguin's methods to young kids, as anyone who looks into the author's works will easily recognize. However, it is still true that behind these two years of experimentation, there is a foundation of study that traces back to the French Revolution, representing the dedicated efforts of Itard and Séguin.
As for me, thirty years after the publication of Séguin's second book, I took up again the ideas and, I may even[Pg 46] say, the work of this great man, with the same freshness of spirit with which he received the inheritance of the work and ideas of his master Itard. For ten years I not only made practical experiments according to their methods, but through reverent meditation absorbed the works of these noble and consecrated men, who have left to humanity most vital proof of their obscure heroism.
As for me, thirty years after the publication of Séguin's second book, I revisited the ideas and, I can even say, the work of this great man with the same enthusiasm he had when he took on the legacy of his mentor Itard. For ten years, I not only conducted practical experiments based on their methods, but through respectful contemplation, I absorbed the works of these admirable and dedicated individuals, who have left humanity significant evidence of their quiet heroism.
Thus my ten years of work may in a sense be considered as a summing up of the forty years of work done by Itard and Séguin. Viewed in this light, fifty years of active work preceded and prepared for this apparently brief trial of only two years, and I feel that I am not wrong in saying that these experiments represent the successive work of three physicians, who from Itard to me show in a greater or less degree the first steps along the path of psychiatry.
So, my ten years of work can be seen as a culmination of the forty years of efforts by Itard and Séguin. When viewed this way, you can see that fifty years of active work laid the groundwork for this seemingly short two-year trial. I believe I'm justified in saying that these experiments reflect the ongoing contributions of three doctors, from Itard to myself, who, to varying extents, represent the initial strides in the field of psychiatry.
As definite factors in the civilisation of the people, the "Children's Houses" deserve a separate volume. They have, in fact, solved so many of the social and pedagogic problems in ways which have seemed to be Utopian, that they are a part of that modern transformation of the home which must most surely be realised before many years have passed. In this way they touch directly the most important side of the social question—that which deals with the intimate or home life of the people.
As key elements in the development of society, the "Children's Houses" deserve their own book. They have really addressed so many social and educational issues in ways that seemed idealistic, making them a significant part of the ongoing transformation of home life that will undoubtedly come to fruition in the near future. In this way, they directly connect to the most important aspect of social issues: the personal or home life of individuals.
It is enough here to reproduce the inaugural discourse delivered by me on the occasion of the opening of the second "Children's House" in Rome, and to present the rules and regulations[4] which I arranged in accordance with the wishes of Signor Talamo.
It’s sufficient to share the opening speech I gave during the launch of the second "Children’s House" in Rome and to outline the rules and regulations[4] that I set up based on Signor Talamo’s requests.
It will be noticed that the club to which I refer, and the dispensary which is also an out-patients' institution for medical and surgical treatment (all such institutions be[Pg 47]ing free to the inhabitants) have already been established. In the modern tenement—Casa Moderna in the Prati di Castello, opened November 4, 1908, through the philanthropy of Signor Talamo—they are also planning to annex a "communal kitchen."
It should be noted that the club I'm talking about, along with the dispensary which also serves as an outpatient facility for medical and surgical treatment (all such facilities being free to the residents) are already up and running. In the modern apartment building—Casa Moderna in the Prati di Castello, opened November 4, 1908, thanks to the generosity of Signor Talamo—they're also planning to add a "community kitchen."
[4] See page 70.
CHAPTER III
Inaugural Address Given at the Opening of One of the "Children's Houses"
It may be that the life lived by the very poor is a thing which some of you here to-day have never actually looked upon in all its degradation. You may have only felt the misery of deep human poverty through the medium of some great book, or some gifted actor may have made your soul vibrato with its horror.
It’s possible that the lives of the very poor are something that some of you here today have never truly witnessed in all of its despair. You might have only experienced the misery of extreme poverty through a powerful book, or perhaps a talented actor has made your heart resonate with its horror.
Let us suppose that in some such moment a voice should cry to you, "Go look upon these homes of misery and blackest poverty. For there have sprung up amid the terror and the suffering, cases of happiness, of cleanliness, of peace. The poor are to have an ideal house which shall be their own. In Quarters where poverty and vice ruled, a work of moral redemption is going on. The soul of the people is being set free from the torpor of vice, from the shadows of ignorance. The little children too have a 'House' of their own. The new generation goes forward to meet the new era, the time when misery shall no longer be deplored but destroyed. They go to meet the time when the dark dens of vice and wretchedness shall have become things of the past, and when no trace of them shall be found among the living." What a change of emotions we should experience! and how we should hasten[Pg 49] here, as the wise men guided by a dream and a star hastened to Bethlehem!
Let’s imagine that in some moment like this, a voice calls out to you, "Go see these homes of misery and extreme poverty. Because amidst the fear and suffering, there are instances of happiness, cleanliness, and peace. The poor will have a house that truly belongs to them. In areas where poverty and vice dominate, a process of moral redemption is taking place. The spirit of the people is being liberated from the lethargy of vice and the ignorance that surrounds them. The little children also have a 'House' of their own. The new generation is moving forward to embrace a new era, a time when misery will not just be mourned but eradicated. They are approaching the time when the dark places of vice and despair will be part of history, and no signs of them will be found among the living." What a shift in emotions we would feel! And how urgently we would rush[Pg 49] here, just like the wise men who followed a dream and a star to Bethlehem!
I have spoken thus in order that you may understand the great significance, the real beauty, of this humble room, which seems like a bit of the house itself set apart by a mother's hand for the use and happiness of the children of the Quarter. This is the second "Children's House"[5] which has been established within the ill-favoured Quarter of San Lorenzo.
I’ve said this so you can grasp the importance and true charm of this simple room, which looks like a part of the house set aside by a mother for the joy and comfort of the kids in the neighborhood. This is the second "Children's House"[5] that has been created in the less fortunate neighborhood of San Lorenzo.
The Quarter of San Lorenzo is celebrated, for every newspaper in the city is filled with almost daily accounts of its wretched happenings. Yet there are many who are not familiar with the origin of this portion of our city.
The Quarter of San Lorenzo is famous, as nearly every newspaper in the city is packed with almost daily reports of its unfortunate events. Still, there are many who don't know the history of this part of our city.
It was never intended to build up here a tenement district for the people. And indeed San Lorenzo is not the People's Quarter, it is the Quarter of the poor. It is the Quarter where lives the underpaid, often unemployed workingman, a common type in a city which has no factory industries. It is the home of him who undergoes the period of surveillance to which he is condemned after his prison sentence is ended. They are all here, mingled, huddled together.
It was never meant to create a housing area for the community here. And in fact, San Lorenzo is not the People's Quarter; it is the Quarter of the poor. It is where the underpaid, often unemployed workers live, a common sight in a city that lacks factory industries. It's the place for those who are under constant watch after their prison sentences are over. They are all here, mixed together, huddled close.
The district of San Lorenzo sprang into being between 1884 and 1888 at the time of the great building fever. No standards either social or hygienic guided these new constructions. The aim in building was simply to cover with walls square foot after square foot of ground. The more space covered, the greater the gain of the interested Banks and Companies. All this with a complete disregard of the disastrous future which they were preparing. It was natural that no one should concern himself with[Pg 50] the stability of the building he was creating, since in no case would the property remain in the possession of him who built it.
The San Lorenzo district came to life between 1884 and 1888 during a massive construction boom. There were no social or health standards guiding these new buildings. The goal was simply to cover as much ground as possible with walls. The more area covered, the greater the profits for the involved banks and companies. All this was done with complete disregard for the disastrous future they were creating. It was only natural that no one cared about the stability of the buildings they were making since no one would keep the property they built anyway.
When the storm burst, in the shape of the inevitable building panic of 1888 to 1890, these unfortunate houses remained for a long time untenanted. Then, little by little, the need of dwelling-places began to make itself felt, and these great houses began to fill. Now, those speculators who had been so unfortunate as to remain possessors of these buildings could not, and did not wish to, add fresh capital to that already lost, so the houses constructed in the first place in utter disregard of all laws of hygiene, and rendered still worse by having been used as temporary habitations, came to be occupied by the poorest class in the city.
When the storm hit, during the unavoidable build-up of panic from 1888 to 1890, these unfortunate houses stayed empty for a long time. Gradually, the need for places to live became apparent, and these large houses started to fill up. The speculators who were stuck owning these buildings were not willing, and didn’t want to, invest more money into what they had already lost. As a result, the houses, which had been built with complete disregard for hygiene, and were made worse by being used as temporary homes, ended up being occupied by the poorest people in the city.
The apartments not being prepared for the working class, were too large, consisting of five, six, or seven rooms. These were rented at a price which, while exceedingly low in relation to the size, was yet too high for any one family of very poor people. This led to the evil of subletting. The tenant who has taken a six room apartment at eight dollars a month sublets rooms at one dollar and a half or two dollars a month to those who can pay so much, and a corner of a room, or a corridor, to a poorer tenant, thus making an income of fifteen dollars or more, over and above the cost of his own rent.
The apartments weren't designed for the working class; they were too big, with five, six, or seven rooms. They were rented at a price that, while very low for such size, was still too high for any one family of low income. This created the problem of subletting. A tenant renting a six-room apartment for eight dollars a month would sublet rooms for one and a half or two dollars a month to those who can afford that, and even part of a room or a hallway to someone even poorer, making an income of fifteen dollars or more on top of their own rent.
This means that the problem of existence is in great part solved for him, and that in every case he adds to his income through usury. The one who holds the lease traffics in the misery of his fellow tenants, lending small sums at a rate which generally corresponds to twenty cents a[Pg 51] week for the loan of two dollars, equivalent to an annual rate of 500 per cent.
This means that the issue of survival is largely taken care of for him, and in every situation, he increases his income through lending at high interest. The person who has the lease profits from the suffering of his fellow tenants, lending small amounts at a rate that usually amounts to twenty cents a[Pg 51] week for a two-dollar loan, which translates to an annual rate of 500 percent.
Thus we have in the evil of subletting the most cruel form of usury: that which only the poor know how to practise upon the poor.
Thus we have in the curse of subletting the most cruel form of exploitation: one that only the poor know how to practice on each other.
To this we must add the evils of crowded living, promiscuousness, immorality, crime. Every little while the newspapers uncover for us one of these intérieurs: a large family, growing boys and girls, sleep in one room; while one corner of the room is occupied by an outsider, a woman who receives the nightly visits of men. This is seen by the girls and the boys; evil passions are kindled that lead to the crime and bloodshed which unveil for a brief instant before our eyes, in some lurid paragraph, this little detail of the mass of misery.
To this, we need to add the problems of crowded living, casual relationships, immorality, and crime. Every so often, the newspapers expose one of these situations: a large family with growing boys and girls shares one room, while a corner is taken up by an outsider—a woman who receives nightly visits from men. The girls and boys witness this; unhealthy desires are ignited, leading to the crimes and violence that momentarily reveal, in some shocking article, this small part of the larger misery.
Whoever enters, for the first time, one of these apartments is astonished and horrified. For this spectacle of genuine misery is not at all like the garish scene he has imagined. We enter here a world of shadows, and that which strikes us first is the darkness which, even though it be midday, makes it impossible to distinguish any of the details of the room.
Whoever steps into one of these apartments for the first time is shocked and frightened. The sight of real misery is nothing like the bright scene they had pictured. We enter a world of shadows, and what hits us first is the darkness that, even in the middle of the day, makes it impossible to see any details of the room.
When the eye has grown accustomed to the gloom, we perceive, within, the outlines of a bed upon which lies huddled a figure—someone ill and suffering. If we have come to bring money from some society for mutual aid, a candle must be lighted before the sum can be counted and the receipt signed. Oh, when we talk of social problems, how often we speak vaguely, drawing upon our fancy for details instead of preparing ourselves to judge intelligently through a personal investigation of facts and conditions.
When your eyes get used to the darkness, you can make out the shape of a bed with a figure curled up on it—someone who is sick and in pain. If we’re here to deliver money from a mutual aid society, we need to light a candle before we can count the money and sign the receipt. Oh, when we discuss social issues, how often do we speak in broad terms, relying on our imagination for details instead of getting ready to understand things clearly by personally investigating the facts and conditions?
We discuss earnestly the question of home study for[Pg 52] school children, when for many of them home means a straw pallet thrown down in the corner of some dark hovel. We wish to establish circulating libraries that the poor may read at home. We plan to send among these people books which shall form their domestic literature—books through whose influence they shall come to higher standards of living. We hope through the printed page to educate these poor people in matters of hygiene, of morality, of culture, and in this we show ourselves profoundly ignorant of their most crying needs. For many of them have no light by which to read!
We seriously discuss the issue of home study for[Pg 52] school children, when for many of them, home is just a straw mat in the corner of a dark shed. We want to set up circulating libraries so that the poor can read at home. We intend to send books to these people that will make up their home literature—books that will inspire them to pursue higher living standards. We hope that through printed words, we can educate these individuals about hygiene, morality, and culture, and in doing so, we reveal our complete ignorance of their most urgent needs. Because many of them have no light to read by!
There lies before the social crusader of the present day a problem more profound than that of the intellectual elevation of the poor; the problem, indeed, of life.
There lies before today’s social activist a challenge deeper than just lifting the poor intellectually; it’s really about life.
In speaking of the children born in these places, even the conventional expressions must be changed, for they do not "first see the light of day"; they come into a world of gloom. They grow among the poisonous shadows which envelope over-crowded humanity. These children cannot be other than filthy in body, since the water supply in an apartment originally intended to be occupied by three or four persons, when distributed among twenty or thirty is scarcely enough for drinking purposes!
In talking about the children born in these areas, even the usual phrases need to be updated, because they don't "first see the light of day"; they enter a world of darkness. They grow up among the toxic shadows that surround overcrowded communities. These children can't help but be unclean, since the water supply in an apartment originally meant for three or four people, when shared among twenty or thirty, is barely enough just for drinking!
We Italians have elevated our word "casa" to the almost sacred significance of the English word "home," the enclosed temple of domestic affection, accessible only to dear ones.
We Italians have raised our word "casa" to have nearly the sacred meaning of the English word "home," the private sanctuary of family love, open only to those who are dear to us.
Far removed from this conception is the condition of the many who have no "casa," but only ghastly walls within which the most intimate acts of life are exposed upon the pillory. Here, there can be no privacy, no modesty, no gentleness; here, there is often not even light, nor air, nor water! It seems a cruel mockery to introduce[Pg 53] here our idea of the home as essential to the education of the masses, and as furnishing, along with the family, the only solid basis for the social structure. In doing this we would be not practical reformers but visionary poets.
Completely different from this idea is the reality for so many who have no "home," only grim walls where the most private aspects of life are laid bare. Here, there is no privacy, no modesty, no kindness; often there is not even light, air, or water! It seems cruelly ironic to present[Pg 53] our concept of home as crucial for the education of the masses, providing, along with the family, the only solid foundation for social structure. In doing so, we would be not practical reformers but idealistic dreamers.
Conditions such as I have described make it more decorous, more hygienic, for these people to take refuge in the street and to let their children live there. But how often these streets are the scene of bloodshed, of quarrel, of sights so vile as to be almost inconceivable. The papers tell us of women pursued and killed by drunken husbands! Of young girls with the fear of worse than death, stoned by low men. Again, we see untellable things—a wretched woman thrown, by the drunken men who have preyed upon her, forth into the gutter. There, when day has come, the children of the neighbourhood crowd about her like scavengers about their dead prey, shouting and laughing at the sight of this wreck of womanhood, kicking her bruised and filthy body as it lies in the mud of the gutter!
Conditions like the ones I’ve described make it more proper and sanitary for these people to seek shelter in the street and to let their children live there. But how often these streets become scenes of violence, arguments, and sights so horrific they’re almost unbelievable. The news reports tell us about women chased and killed by intoxicated husbands! About young girls terrified of something worse than death, attacked by low men. Again, we witness unspeakable things—a miserable woman thrown out, by the drunken men who have exploited her, into the gutter. There, when day breaks, the neighborhood children gather around her like scavengers drawn to dead prey, shouting and laughing at the sight of this broken woman, kicking her bruised and filthy body as it lies in the mud of the gutter!
Such spectacles of extreme brutality are possible here at the very gate of a cosmopolitan city, the mother of civilisation and queen of the fine arts, because of a new fact which was unknown to past centuries, namely, the isolation of the masses of the poor.
Such displays of extreme brutality are happening here at the entrance of a cosmopolitan city, the heart of civilization and the center of the fine arts, because of a new reality that previous centuries didn’t know about, namely, the isolation of the masses of the poor.
In the Middle Ages, leprosy was isolated: the Catholics isolated the Hebrews in the Ghetto; but poverty was never considered a peril and an infamy so great that it must be isolated. The homes of the poor were scattered among those of the rich and the contrast between these was a commonplace in literature up to our own times. Indeed, when I was a child in school, teachers, for the purpose of moral education, frequently resorted to the illustration of the kind princess who sends help to the poor cottage next[Pg 54] door, or of the good children from the great house who carry food to the sick woman in the neighbouring attic.
In the Middle Ages, leprosy was set apart: the Catholics segregated the Hebrews in the Ghetto; however, poverty was never seen as a danger or disgrace so severe that it warranted isolation. The homes of the poor were mixed in among those of the wealthy, and the contrast between them was a common theme in literature up to the present day. In fact, when I was in school as a child, teachers often used the example of the kind princess who provides aid to the poor cottage next[Pg 54] door, or of the good children from the big house who bring food to the sick woman in the nearby attic.
To-day all this would be as unreal and artificial as a fairy tale. The poor may no longer learn from their more fortunate neighbours lessons in courtesy and good breeding, they no longer have the hope of help from them in cases of extreme need. We have herded them together far from us, without the walls, leaving them to learn of each other, in the abandon of desperation, the cruel lessons of brutality and vice. Anyone in whom the social conscience is awake must see that we have thus created infected regions that threaten with deadly peril the city which, wishing to make all beautiful and shining according to an æsthetic and aristocratic ideal, has thrust without its walls whatever is ugly or diseased.
Today, all of this would feel as unrealistic and artificial as a fairy tale. The poor can no longer gain insights on manners and etiquette from their more fortunate neighbors, nor do they have any hope of receiving help in times of extreme need. We have pushed them away from us, isolating them outside the city, leaving them to learn from one another, in the depths of despair, the harsh lessons of brutality and vice. Anyone with a social conscience must realize that we have created infected areas that pose a serious threat to the city, which, in its pursuit of beauty and an aesthetic ideal, has banished anything deemed ugly or diseased beyond its walls.
When I passed for the first time through these streets, it was as if I found myself in a city upon which some great disaster had fallen. It seemed to me that the shadow of some recent struggle still oppressed the unhappy people who, with something very like terror in their pale faces, passed me in these silent streets. The very silence seemed to signify the life of a community interrupted, broken. Not a carriage, not even the cheerful voice of the ever-present street vender, nor the sound of the hand-organ playing in the hope of a few pennies, not even these things, so characteristic of poor quarters, enter here to lighten this sad and heavy silence.
When I walked through these streets for the first time, it felt like I had stumbled into a city that had experienced some great disaster. It seemed to me that the shadow of a recent struggle still weighed heavily on the unfortunate people who passed by with what looked like fear in their pale faces in these quiet streets. The silence itself felt like a sign of a community’s life that had been interrupted, shattered. There was not a single carriage, not even the cheerful voice of the street vendor, or the sound of a hand-organ playing in hopes of earning a few pennies—none of these things, which are usually so typical of poor neighborhoods, came here to lift this sad and heavy silence.
Observing these streets with their deep holes, the doorsteps broken and tumbling, we might almost suppose that this disaster had been in the nature of a great inundation which had carried the very earth away; but looking about us at the houses stripped of all decorations, the walls broken and scarred, we are inclined to think that it was[Pg 55] perhaps an earthquake which has afflicted this quarter. Then, looking still more closely, we see that in all this thickly settled neighbourhood there is not a shop to be found. So poor is the community that it has not been possible to establish even one of those popular bazars where necessary articles are sold at so low a price as to put them within the reach of anyone. The only shops of any sort are the low wine shops which open their evil-smelling doors to the passer-by. As we look upon all this, it is borne upon us that the disaster which has placed its weight of suffering upon these people is not a convulsion of nature, but poverty—poverty with its inseparable companion, vice.
Watching these streets with their deep potholes, the broken and crumbling doorsteps, one might think that a massive flood had washed everything away. But looking around at the houses stripped of all their decorations, with cracked and scarred walls, we might believe it was perhaps an earthquake that hit this area. Then, upon closer inspection, we notice that in this densely populated neighborhood, there's not a single shop in sight. The community is so impoverished that it hasn't been able to support even one of those popular markets where essential items are sold at prices low enough for anyone to afford. The only establishments around are grimy wine shops that open their foul-smelling doors to passersby. As we take all this in, it becomes clear that the disaster weighing heavily on these people is not a natural calamity, but poverty—poverty with its constant companion, vice.
This unhappy and dangerous state of things, to which our attention is called at intervals by newspaper accounts of violent and immoral crime, stirs the hearts and consciences of many who come to undertake among these people some work of generous benevolence. One might almost say that every form of misery inspires a special remedy and that all have been tried here, from the attempt to introduce hygienic principles into each house, to the establishment of crêches, "Children's Houses," and dispensaries.
This troubling and risky situation, which we are reminded of now and then by news reports of violent and immoral crimes, stirs the hearts and consciences of many who decide to help these people with acts of kindness. You could almost say that every type of suffering calls for a unique solution and that all have been attempted here, from trying to implement sanitary practices in every home to setting up daycare centers, "Children's Houses," and clinics.
But what indeed is benevolence? Little more than an expression of sorrow; it is pity translated into action. The benefits of such a form of charity cannot be great, and through the absence of any continued income and the lack of organisation it is restricted to a small number of persons. The great and widespread peril of evil demands, on the other hand, a broad and comprehensive work directed toward the redemption of the entire community. Only such an organisation, as, working for the good of others, shall itself grow and prosper through the general prosperity which it has made possible, can make a place[Pg 56] for itself in this quarter and accomplish a permanent good work.
But what is benevolence, really? It’s just a way to show compassion; it’s pity turned into action. The benefits of this type of charity aren’t that significant, and because there’s no steady funding and it lacks structure, it can only help a small number of people. In contrast, the widespread threat of evil requires a broad, organized effort aimed at uplifting the whole community. Only an organization that works for the benefit of others and thrives through the overall prosperity it creates can establish a lasting place[Pg 56] for itself in this area and achieve a meaningful and lasting impact.
It is to meet this dire necessity that the great and kindly work of the Roman Association of Good Building has been undertaken. The advanced and highly modern way in which this work is being carried on is due to Edoardo Talamo, Director General of the Association. His plans, so original, so comprehensive, yet so practical, are without counterpart in Italy or elsewhere.
It is to address this urgent need that the wonderful and generous efforts of the Roman Association of Good Building have been initiated. The innovative and cutting-edge approach to this work is thanks to Edoardo Talamo, the Director General of the Association. His plans, original, comprehensive, and highly practical, have no equivalent in Italy or anywhere else.
This Association was incorporated three years ago in Rome, its plan being to acquire city tenements, remodel them, put them into a productive condition, and administer them as a good father of a family would.
This Association was established three years ago in Rome, with the goal of acquiring city properties, renovating them, making them functional, and managing them like a responsible family member.
The first property acquired comprised a large portion of the Quarter of San Lorenzo, where to-day the Association possesses fifty-eight houses, occupying a ground space of about 30,000 square metres, and containing, independent of the ground floor, 1,600 small apartments. Thousands of people will in this way receive the beneficent influence of the protective reforms of the Good Building Association. Following its beneficent programme, the Association set about transforming these old houses, according to the most modern standards, paying as much attention to questions related to hygiene and morals as to those relating to buildings. The constructional changes would make the property of real and lasting value, while the hygienic and moral transformation, would, through the improved condition of the inmates, make the rent from these apartments a more definite asset.
The first property acquired included a large part of the Quarter of San Lorenzo, where today the Association owns fifty-eight houses, covering about 30,000 square meters and containing, aside from the ground floor, 1,600 small apartments. Thousands of people will benefit from the positive impact of the Good Building Association's protective reforms. Following its beneficial program, the Association began transforming these old houses to meet modern standards, focusing on hygiene and moral issues as much as on construction. The structural changes would give the property real and lasting value, while the hygienic and moral improvements would enhance the living conditions of the residents, making the rent from these apartments a more reliable asset.
The Association of Good Building therefore decided upon a programme which would permit of a gradual attainment of their ideal. It is necessary to proceed slowly because it is not easy to empty a tenement house at a time[Pg 57] when houses are scarce, and the humanitarian principles which govern the entire movement make it impossible to proceed more rapidly in this work of regeneration. So it is, that the Association has up to the present time transformed only three houses in the Quarter of San Lorenzo. The plan followed in this transformation is as follows:
The Association of Good Building decided on a plan that would allow for a gradual achievement of their ideal. It's important to take things slow because it's not easy to clear out a tenement building at a time when housing is limited, and the humanitarian principles that guide the whole movement prevent them from moving any faster in this process of renewal. As a result, the Association has only transformed three buildings in the San Lorenzo neighborhood so far. The approach taken in this transformation is as follows:
A: To demolish in every building all portions of the structure not originally constructed with the idea of making homes, but, from a purely commercial standpoint, of making the rental roll larger. In other words, the new management tore down those parts of the building which encumbered the central court, thus doing away with dark, ill-ventilated apartments, and giving air and light to the remaining portion of the tenement. Broad airy courts take the place of the inadequate air and light shafts, rendering the remaining apartments more valuable and infinitely more desirable.
A: To remove from every building all parts of the structure that weren't originally designed for living, but rather for increasing profits. In other words, the new management demolished the sections that obstructed the central courtyard, eliminating dark, poorly ventilated apartments, and allowing more air and light into the rest of the tenement. Spacious, open courtyards replaced the inadequate air and light shafts, making the remaining apartments more valuable and far more appealing.
B: To increase the number of stairways, and to divide the room space in a more practical way. The large six or seven room suites are reduced to small apartments of one, two, or three rooms, and a kitchen.
B: To add more stairways and to divide the room space in a more practical way. The large six or seven room suites are changed into small apartments with one, two, or three rooms and a kitchen.
The importance of such changes may be recognised from the economic point of view of the proprietor as well as from the standpoint of the moral and material welfare of the tenant. Increasing the number of stairways diminishes that abuse of walls and stairs inevitable where so many persons must pass up and down. The tenants more readily learn to respect the building and acquire habits of cleanliness and order. Not only this, but in reducing the chances of contact among the inhabitants of the house, especially late at night, a great advance has been made in the matter of moral hygiene.
The significance of these changes can be seen from both the owner's financial perspective and the tenant's moral and material well-being. Adding more stairways reduces the wear and tear on walls and stairs that comes with high foot traffic. Tenants are more likely to appreciate the building and develop habits of cleanliness and order. Additionally, by decreasing the chances of interactions among residents, especially late at night, we've made significant progress in promoting moral hygiene.
The division of the house into small apartments has done[Pg 58] much toward this moral regeneration. Each family is thus set apart, homes are made possible, while the menacing evil of subletting together with all its disastrous consequences of overcrowding and immorality is checked in the most radical way.
The division of the house into small apartments has done[Pg 58] a lot for this moral improvement. Each family is now separated, homes are made possible, and the harmful issue of subletting, along with all its negative effects of overcrowding and immorality, is effectively addressed.
On one side this arrangement lessens the burden of the individual lease holders, and on the other increases the income of the proprietor, who now receives those earnings which were the unlawful gain of the system of subletting. When the proprietor who originally rented an apartment of six rooms for a monthly rental of eight dollars, makes such an apartment over into three small, sunny, and airy suites consisting of one room and a kitchen, it is evident that he increases his income.
On one hand, this setup reduces the financial strain on individual renters, while on the other hand, it boosts the income for the owner, who now collects earnings that were previously gained through the illegal practice of subletting. When the owner who originally rented a six-room apartment for eight dollars a month transforms that apartment into three small, bright, and airy suites with one room and a kitchen each, it's clear that they are increasing their income.
The moral importance of this reform as it stands to-day is tremendous, for it has done away with those evil influences and low opportunities which arise from crowding and from promiscuous contact, and has brought to life among these people, for the first time, the gentle sentiment of feeling themselves free within their own homes, in the intimacy of the family.
The moral significance of this reform today is immense, as it has eliminated the harmful influences and negative situations that come from overcrowding and random interactions, and has introduced for the first time the comforting feeling of being free in their own homes, within the closeness of the family.
But the project of the Association goes beyond even this. The house which it offers to its tenants is not only sunny and airy, but in perfect order and repair, almost shining, and as if perfumed with purity and freshness. These good things, however, carry with them a responsibility which the tenant must assume if he wishes to enjoy them. He must pay an actual tax of care and good will. The tenant who receives a clean house must keep it so, must respect the walls from the big general entrance to the interior of his own little apartment. He who keeps his house in good condition receives the recognition and consideration due such a tenant. Thus all the tenants unite in an ennobling[Pg 59] warfare for practical hygiene, an end made possible by the simple task of conserving the already perfect conditions.
But the Association's project goes even further than that. The home it offers its tenants isn't just sunny and spacious; it's also in perfect shape, almost gleaming, and seems to be infused with cleanliness and freshness. However, these benefits come with a responsibility that tenants have to take on if they want to enjoy them. They need to pay a literal tax of care and good will. A tenant who receives a clean home must maintain it, taking care of everything from the main entrance to their own little apartment. Those who keep their homes in good condition earn the recognition and respect that such tenants deserve. In this way, all tenants come together in a noble[Pg 59] effort for practical hygiene, made possible by the simple task of conserving the already perfect conditions.
Here indeed is something new! So far only our great national buildings have had a continued maintenance fund. Here, in these houses offered to the people, the maintenance is confided to a hundred or so workingmen, that is, to all the occupants of the building. This care is almost perfect. The people keep the house in perfect condition, without a single spot. The building in which we find ourselves to-day has been for two years under the sole protection of the tenants, and the work of maintenance has been left entirely to them. Yet few of our houses can compare in cleanliness and freshness with this home of the poor.
Here’s something truly new! Until now, only our major national buildings have had a dedicated maintenance fund. But here, in these homes provided for the people, the upkeep is entrusted to about a hundred working individuals, meaning all the residents of the building. Their care is nearly flawless. The residents maintain the house in excellent condition, without a single blemish. The building we’re in today has been solely under the tenants' care for two years, with all maintenance responsibilities handed over to them. Yet, few of our homes can match the cleanliness and freshness of this shelter for the less fortunate.
The experiment has been tried and the result is remarkable. The people acquire together with the lore of home-making, that of cleanliness. They come, moreover, to wish to beautify their homes. The Association helps this by placing growing plants and trees in the courts and about the halls.
The experiment has been conducted, and the results are impressive. People learn not only about home-making but also about cleanliness. They also begin to desire to beautify their homes. The Association supports this by placing potted plants and trees in the courtyards and around the hallways.
Out of this honest rivalry in matters so productive of good, grows a species of pride new to this quarter; this is the pride which the entire body of tenants takes in having the best-cared-for building and in having risen to a higher and more civilised plane of living. They not only live in a house, but they know how to live, they know how to respect the house in which they live.
Out of this genuine competition in things that lead to good, a new kind of pride has emerged in this neighborhood; it’s the pride that all the tenants share in having the best-maintained building and having achieved a higher, more civilized way of living. They don’t just live in a house; they know how to live, they know how to respect the house they live in.
This first impulse has led to other reforms. From the clean home will come personal cleanliness. Dirty furniture cannot be tolerated in a clean house, and those persons living in a permanently clean house will come to desire personal cleanliness.
This initial urge has sparked further changes. A tidy home will lead to personal hygiene. You can't have dirty furniture in a clean house, and people living in a consistently clean environment will naturally want to maintain their own cleanliness.
One of the most important hygienic reforms of the As[Pg 60]sociation is that of the baths. Each remodeled tenement has a place set apart for bathrooms, furnished with tubs or shower, and having hot and cold water. All the tenants in regular turn may use these baths, as, for example, in various tenements the occupants go according to turn, to wash their clothes in the fountain in the court. This is a great convenience which invites the people to be clean. These hot and cold baths within the house are a great improvement upon the general public baths. In this way we make possible to these people, at one and the same time, health and refinement, opening not only to the sun, but to progress, those dark habitations once the vile caves of misery.
One of the most significant hygiene reforms of the Association is the introduction of the baths. Each renovated apartment building includes a designated area for bathrooms, equipped with tubs or showers and both hot and cold water. All tenants can use these baths in a scheduled rotation; for instance, in various buildings, residents take turns washing their clothes at the fountain in the courtyard. This is a great convenience that encourages cleanliness. These hot and cold baths inside the home are a considerable improvement over the public baths. In this way, we provide these people with both health and a sense of refinement, opening up their once dark and miserable living spaces to sunlight and progress.
But in striving to realise its ideal of a semi-gratuitous maintenance of its buildings, the Association met with a difficulty in regard to those children under school age, who must often be left alone during the entire day while their parents went out to work. These little ones, not being able to understand the educative motives which taught their parents to respect the house, became ignorant little vandals, defacing the walls and stairs. And here we have another reform the expense of which may be considered as indirectly assumed by the tenants as was the care of the building. This reform may be considered as the most brilliant transformation of a tax which progress and civilisation have as yet devised. The "Children's House" is earned by the parents through the care of the building. Its expenses are met by the sum that the Association would have otherwise been forced to spend upon repairs. A wonderful climax, this, of moral benefits received! Within the "Children's House," which belongs exclusively to those children under school age, working mothers may safely leave their little ones, and may proceed with a feeling of great[Pg 61] relief and freedom to their own work. But this benefit, like that of the care of the house, is not conferred without a tax of care and of good will. [6]The Regulations posted on the walls announce it thus:
But in trying to achieve its ideal of maintaining its buildings with minimal costs, the Association faced a challenge with children who were too young for school and often had to be left alone all day while their parents went to work. These little ones, unable to grasp the educational reasons that taught their parents to respect the building, became unaware little vandals, damaging the walls and stairs. Here we have another reform whose costs can be seen as indirectly covered by the tenants, just like the upkeep of the building. This reform can be seen as the most brilliant transformation of a burden, which progress and civilization have ever come up with. The "Children's House" is funded by the parents through their care of the building. Its costs are covered by the amount the Association would have had to spend on repairs. What a wonderful payoff this is for the moral benefits received! Inside the "Children's House," which is exclusively for children under school age, working mothers can safely leave their little ones and go to their jobs feeling a great sense of relief and freedom. However, this benefit, like the care of the house, doesn’t come without a cost of attention and goodwill. [6]The Regulations posted on the walls announce it like this:
"The mothers are obliged to send their children to the 'Children's House' clean, and to co-operate with the Directress in the educational work."
"The mothers are required to send their children to the 'Children's House' clean and to work together with the Directress in the educational efforts."
Two obligations: namely, the physical and moral care of their own children. If the child shows through its conversation that the educational work of the school is being undermined by the attitude taken in his home, he will be sent back to his parents, to teach them thus how to take advantage of their good opportunities. Those who give themselves over to low-living, to fighting, and to brutality, shall feel upon them the weight of those little lives, so needing care. They shall feel that they themselves have once more cast into the darkness of neglect those little creatures who are the dearest part of the family. In other words, the parents must learn to deserve the benefit of having within the house the great advantage of a school for their little ones.
Two responsibilities: specifically, the physical and moral care of their own children. If a child demonstrates through their conversation that the school’s educational efforts are being undermined by their home environment, they will be sent back to their parents to help them understand how to make the most of their good opportunities. Those who engage in low living, fighting, and brutality will feel the weight of those young lives that need care. They will realize that they have once again thrown into the darkness of neglect those little beings who are the most beloved part of the family. In other words, parents must learn to deserve the privilege of having a school for their little ones in their home.
"Good will," a willingness to meet the demands of the Association is enough, for the directress is ready and willing to teach them how. The regulations say that the mother must go at least once a week, to confer with the directress, giving an account of her child, and accepting any helpful advice which the directress may be able to give. The advice thus given will undoubtedly prove most illuminating in regard to the child's health and education, since to each of the "Children's Houses" is assigned a physician as well as a directress.
"Goodwill," a willingness to meet the demands of the Association, is sufficient, as the director is eager to teach them how. The regulations state that the mother must visit at least once a week to discuss her child, provide updates, and receive any helpful advice the director may offer. The advice given will undoubtedly be very enlightening concerning the child's health and education, as each of the "Children's Houses" has both a physician and a director assigned.
The directress is always at the disposition of the[Pg 62] mothers, and her life, as a cultured and educated person, is a constant example to the inhabitants of the house, for she is obliged to live in the tenement and to be therefore a co-habitant with the families of all her little pupils. This is a fact of immense importance. Among these almost savage people, into these houses where at night no one dared go about unarmed, there has come not only to teach, but to live the very life they live, a gentlewoman of culture, an educator by profession, who dedicates her time and her life to helping those about her! A true missionary, a moral queen among the people, she may, if she be possessed of sufficient tact and heart, reap an unheard-of harvest of good from her social work.
The director is always available to the mothers, and her life, as a cultured and educated person, serves as a constant example to the residents of the house. She has to live in the building, making her a housemate with the families of all her little students. This is extremely important. Among these nearly wild people, in homes where no one dared to walk around at night without being armed, a cultured woman, an educator by profession, has come not only to teach but to live the same life they live. She dedicates her time and life to helping those around her! A true missionary, a moral leader among the people, she can, if she has enough tact and compassion, achieve an incredible amount of good through her community work.
This house is verily new; it would seem a dream impossible of realisation, but it has been tried. It is true that there have been before this attempts made by generous persons to go and live among the poor to civilise them. But such work is not practical, unless the house of the poor is hygienic, making it possible for people of better standards to live there. Nor can such work succeed in its purpose unless some common advantage or interest unites all of the tenants in an effort toward better things.
This house is truly new; it seems like an impossible dream, but it has been attempted. It’s true that there have been previous efforts by kind people to live among the poor to help improve their lives. However, such work isn’t practical unless the homes of the poor are hygienic, allowing people of higher standards to live there. Moreover, this effort cannot succeed in its goals unless there is a shared benefit or interest that brings all the tenants together in striving for better conditions.
This tenement is new also because of the pedagogical organisation of the "Children's House." This is not simply a place where the children are kept, not just an asylum, but a true school for their education, and its methods are inspired by the rational principles of scientific pedagogy.
This tenement is also new because of the way the "Children's House" is organized. It's not just a place where kids are supervised, not merely an asylum, but a real school focused on their education, and its methods are based on the rational principles of scientific teaching.
The physical development of the children is followed, each child being studied from the anthropological standpoint. Linguistic exercises, a systematic sense-training, and exercises which directly fit the child for the duties of practical life, form the basis of the work done. The teach[Pg 63]ing is decidedly objective, and presents an unusual richness of didactic material.
The children's physical development is monitored, with each child being examined from an anthropological perspective. The program includes linguistic exercises, systematic sensory training, and activities that prepare the child for practical life duties, forming the foundation of the work. The teaching is clearly objective and offers a unique wealth of instructional materials.
It is not possible to speak of all this in detail. I must, however, mention that there already exists in connection with the school a bathroom, where the children may be given hot or cold baths and where they may learn to take a partial bath, hands, face, neck, ears. Wherever possible the Association has provided a piece of ground in which the children may learn to cultivate the vegetables in common use.
It’s not possible to go into detail about all of this. I do need to point out that there is already a bathroom connected to the school, where the kids can take hot or cold baths and learn how to wash themselves partially—hands, face, neck, and ears. Whenever possible, the Association has set aside a piece of land where the children can learn to grow commonly used vegetables.
It is important that I speak here of the pedagogical progress attained by the "Children's House" as an institution. Those who are conversant with the chief problems of the school know that to-day much attention is given to a great principle, one that is ideal and almost beyond realisation,—the union of the family and the school in the matter of educational aims. But the family is always something far away from the school, and is almost always regarded as rebelling against its ideals. It is a species of phantom upon which the school can never lay its hands. The home is closed not only to pedagogical progress, but often to social progress. We see here for the first time the possibility of realising the long-talked-of pedagogical ideal. We have put the school within the house; and this is not all. We have placed it within the house as the property of the collectivity, leaving under the eyes of the parents the whole life of the teacher in the accomplishment of her high mission.
It’s important for me to mention the educational progress achieved by the "Children's House" as an institution. Those familiar with the main challenges in education know that today, a lot of focus is placed on a significant principle—one that is idealistic and nearly impossible to realize: the connection between family and school in terms of educational goals. However, the family often feels distant from the school and is usually seen as resisting its ideals. It’s like a phantom that the school can never grasp. The home not only shuts itself off from educational progress but often from social progress as well. Here, we see for the first time the potential to achieve the long-discussed educational ideal. We have put the school within the house; and that’s not all. We have made it a community asset, allowing parents to witness the entire life of the teacher as she fulfills her important mission.
This idea of the collective ownership of the school is new and very beautiful and profoundly educational.
This concept of shared ownership of the school is fresh, inspiring, and deeply educational.
The parents know that the "Children's House" is their property, and is maintained by a portion of the rent they pay. The mothers may go at any hour of the day to watch,[Pg 64] to admire, or to meditate upon the life there. It is in every way a continual stimulus to reflection, and a fount of evident blessing and help to their own children. We may say that the mothers adore the "Children's House," and the directress. How many delicate and thoughtful attentions these good mothers show the teacher of their little ones! They often leave sweets or flowers upon the sill of the schoolroom window, as a silent token, reverently, almost religiously, given.
The parents know that the "Children's House" belongs to them and is maintained by part of the rent they pay. The mothers can come by at any time of day to observe, admire, or reflect on life there. It consistently inspires thought and is a clear source of blessing and support for their own children. We can say that the mothers truly adore the "Children's House" and the director. These amazing mothers show so many thoughtful gestures toward their children's teacher! They often leave treats or flowers on the schoolroom window sill as a quiet, respectful, almost sacred offering.
And when after three years of such a novitiate, the mothers send their children to the common schools, they will be excellently prepared to co-operate in the work of education, and will have acquired a sentiment, rarely found even among the best classes; namely, the idea that they must merit through their own conduct and with their own virtue, the possession of an educated son.
And when after three years of this kind of training, the mothers send their children to public schools, they will be well-prepared to take part in the education process, and they will have developed an attitude, which is rarely seen even among the upper classes; the belief that they must earn through their own behavior and with their own character, the privilege of having an educated son.
Another advance made by the "Children's Houses" as an institution is related to scientific pedagogy. This branch of pedagogy, heretofore, being based upon the anthropological study of the pupil whom it is to educate, has touched only a few of the positive questions which tend to transform education. For a man is not only a biological but a social product, and the social environment of individuals in the process of education, is the home. Scientific pedagogy will seek in vain to better the new generation if it does not succeed in influencing also the environment within which this new generation grows! I believe, therefore, that in opening the house to the light of new truths, and to the progress of civilisation we have solved the problem of being able to modify directly, the environment of the new generation, and have thus made it possible to apply, in a practical way, the fundamental principles of scientific pedagogy.[Pg 65]
Another advance made by the "Children's Houses" as an institution relates to scientific pedagogy. This area of education, until now, has been based on studying the pupil it aims to educate, but it has only addressed a few of the pressing issues that could change education. A person is not just a biological entity but also a social one, and the social environment of individuals undergoing education is their home. Scientific pedagogy will struggle to improve the new generation if it cannot also influence the environment in which this new generation develops! Therefore, I believe that by opening the house to new truths and the progress of civilization, we have figured out how to directly modify the environment of the new generation, making it possible to practically apply the fundamental principles of scientific pedagogy.[Pg 65]
The "Children's House" marks still another triumph; it is the first step toward the socialisation of the house. The inmates find under their own roof the convenience of being able to leave their little ones in a place, not only safe, but where they have every advantage.
The "Children's House" represents another success; it is the first step toward the socialization of the home. The residents find that they can leave their children in a place that is not only safe but also offers every benefit.
And let it be remembered that all the mothers in the tenement may enjoy this privilege, going away to their work with easy minds. Until the present time only one class in society might have this advantage. Rich women were able to go about their various occupations and amusements, leaving their children in the hands of a nurse or a governess. To-day the women of the people who live in these remodeled houses, may say, like the great lady, "I have left my son with the governess and the nurse." More than this, they may add, like the princess of the blood, "And the house physician watches over them and directs their sane and sturdy growth." These women, like the most advanced class of English and American mothers, possess a "Biographical Chart," which, filled for the mother by the directress and the doctor, gives her the most practical knowledge of her child's growth and condition.
And let’s remember that all the mothers in the building can enjoy this privilege, heading off to work with peace of mind. Until now, only one class in society had this advantage. Wealthy women could go about their various jobs and leisure activities, leaving their kids in the care of a nanny or a governess. Today, the women from the community living in these updated homes can say, just like the affluent lady, "I have left my son with the governess and the nurse." Furthermore, they can add, like a royal, "And the house doctor monitors them and ensures their healthy and strong development." These women, similar to the most progressive class of mothers in England and America, have a "Biographical Chart," which, completed by the director and the doctor for the mother, provides her with essential knowledge about her child's growth and well-being.
We are all familiar with the ordinary advantages of the communistic transformation of the general environment. For example, the collective use of railway carriages, of street lights, of the telephone, all these are great advantages. The enormous production of useful articles, brought about by industrial progress, makes possible to all, clean clothes, carpets, curtains, table-delicacies, better tableware, etc. The making of such benefits generally tends to level social caste. All this we have seen in its reality. But the communising of persons is new. That the collectivity shall benefit from the services of the servant, the nurse, the teacher—this is a modern ideal.[Pg 66]
We all know the obvious benefits of the communal transformation of our environment. For instance, shared use of train cars, streetlights, and telephones are all significant advantages. The massive production of useful goods, driven by industrial advancements, allows everyone access to clean clothes, carpets, curtains, delicious meals, better dishes, and so on. The creation of these benefits generally helps reduce social class distinctions. We have all witnessed this in real life. But the idea of communal living applied to people is new. The belief that the community should benefit from the contributions of a servant, a caregiver, or a teacher is a modern ideal.[Pg 66]
We have in the "Children's Houses" a demonstration of this ideal which is unique in Italy or elsewhere. Its significance is most profound, for it corresponds to a need of the times. We can no longer say that the convenience of leaving their children takes away from the mother a natural social duty of first importance; namely, that of caring for and educating her tender offspring. No, for to-day the social and economic evolution calls the working-woman to take her place among wage-earners, and takes away from her by force those duties which would be most dear to her! The mother must, in any event, leave her child, and often with the pain of knowing him to be abandoned. The advantages furnished by such institutions are not limited to the labouring classes, but extend also to the general middle-class, many of whom work with the brain. Teachers, professors, often obliged to give private lessons after school hours, frequently leave their children to the care, of some rough and ignorant maid-of-all-work. Indeed, the first announcement of the "Children's House" was followed by a deluge of letters from persons of the better class demanding that these helpful reforms be extended to their dwellings.
We have in the "Children's Houses" a unique demonstration of this ideal in Italy and beyond. Its importance is deeply felt because it meets a current need. We can no longer claim that the convenience of leaving their children takes away from a mother's crucial social responsibility: to care for and educate her young children. Today, the changing social and economic landscape requires working women to join the workforce, often forcing them to forgo those responsibilities that are most precious to them! Mothers must leave their children behind, often experiencing the pain of knowing they are left alone. The benefits provided by these institutions are not just for working-class families; they also help many in the middle class, including those who work in jobs that require mental effort. Teachers and professors, who often need to give private lessons after school, frequently leave their children in the care of some rough and uneducated maid. In fact, when the "Children's House" was first announced, it generated a flood of letters from people in higher social classes asking for these helpful reforms to be brought to their homes.
We are, then, communising a "maternal function," a feminine duty, within the house. We may see here in this practical act the solving of many of woman's problems which have seemed to many impossible of solution. What then will become of the home, one asks, if the woman goes away from it? The home will be transformed and will assume the functions of the woman.
We are, then, bringing a "maternal function," a feminine duty, into the communal space of the home. In this practical shift, we can address many of the issues women have faced that seemed impossible to resolve. So, what happens to the home if the woman leaves? The home will change and take on the roles traditionally held by women.
I believe that in the future of society other forms of communistic life will come.
I believe that in the future, society will see other types of communal living.
Take, for example, the infirmary; woman is the natural nurse for the dear ones of her household. But who does[Pg 67] not know how often in these days she is obliged to tear herself unwillingly from the bedside of her sick to go to her work? Competition is great, and her absence from her post threatens the tenure of the position from which she draws the means of support. To be able to leave the sick one in a "house-infirmary," to which she may have access any free moments she may have, and where she is at liberty to watch during the night, would be an evident advantage to such a woman.
Take the infirmary, for instance; a woman is the natural caregiver for her loved ones at home. But who doesn’t know how often these days she has to pull herself away from the bedside of her sick family members to go to work? The competition is tough, and being absent from her job puts her position—and the income she relies on—at risk. Having the option to leave her sick loved one in a "house-infirmary," where she can check in during any free moments and is free to stay overnight, would be a clear benefit for her.
And how great would be the progress made in the matter of family hygiene, in all that relates to isolation and disinfection! Who does not know the difficulties of a poor family when one child is ill of some contagions disease, and should be isolated from the others? Often such a family may have no kindred or friends in the city to whom the other children may be sent.
And how much progress would be made in family hygiene regarding isolation and disinfection! Who doesn't understand the challenges a poor family faces when one child is sick with a contagious disease and needs to be kept away from the others? Often, such a family may not have any relatives or friends in the city to whom the other children can be sent.
Much more distant, but not impossible, is the communal kitchen, where the dinner ordered in the morning is sent at the proper time, by means of a dumb-waiter, to the family dining-room. Indeed, this has been successfully tried in America. Such a reform would be of the greatest advantage to those families of the middle-class who must confide their health and the pleasures of the table to the hands of an ignorant servant who ruins the food. At present, the only alternative in such cases is to go outside the home to some café where a cheap table d'hôte may be had.
Much farther away, but still doable, is the communal kitchen, where dinner ordered in the morning is sent at the right time, through a dumbwaiter, to the family dining room. In fact, this has already been successfully implemented in America. Such a change would greatly benefit middle-class families who have to rely on an unskilled servant who messes up the food. Currently, the only other option for them is to go out to a café where they can find a cheap prix fixe meal.
Indeed, the transformation of the house must compensate for the loss in the family of the presence of the woman who has become a social wage-earner.
Indeed, the changes made to the house should make up for the absence of the woman in the family who has become a working professional.
In this way the house will become a centre, drawing into itself all those good things which have hitherto been lacking: schools, public baths, hospitals, etc.[Pg 68]
In this way, the house will become a hub, gathering all the good things that have been missing until now: schools, public baths, hospitals, etc.[Pg 68]
Thus the tendency will be to change the tenement houses, which have been places of vice and peril, into centres of education, of refinement, of comfort. This will be helped if, besides the schools for the children, there may grow up also clubs and reading-rooms for the inhabitants, especially for the men, who will find there a way to pass the evening pleasantly and decently. The tenement-club, as possible and as useful in all social classes as is the "Children's House," will do much toward closing the gambling-houses and saloons to the great moral advantage of the people. And I believe that the Association of Good Building will before long establish such clubs in its reformed tenements here in the Quarter of San Lorenzo; clubs where the tenants may find newspapers and books, and where they may hear simple and helpful lectures.
So, the goal will be to transform the tenement houses, which have been sites of vice and danger, into centers of learning, culture, and comfort. This will be supported by not only having schools for the children but also by developing clubs and reading rooms for the residents, particularly for the men, who will find a way to spend their evenings in a pleasant and respectable manner. The tenement club, which can be as feasible and beneficial across all social classes as the "Children's House," will greatly contribute to shutting down gambling dens and bars, which will benefit the community morally. I believe that the Association of Good Building will soon set up such clubs in its improved tenements here in the San Lorenzo area; clubs where the residents can access newspapers and books, and where they can attend simple and beneficial lectures.
We are, then, very far from the dreaded dissolution of the home and of the family, through the fact that woman has been forced by changed social and economic conditions to give her time and strength to remunerative work. The home itself assumes the gentle feminine attributes of the domestic housewife. The day may come when the tenant, having given to the proprietor of the house a certain sum, shall receive in exchange whatever is necessary to the comfort of life; in other words, the administration shall become the steward of the family.
We are far from the feared breakdown of the home and family just because women have had to dedicate their time and energy to paid work due to changing social and economic conditions. The home itself takes on the caring qualities of a homemaker. There may come a time when a tenant, after paying a certain amount to the property owner, receives everything needed for a decent standard of living in return; in other words, the management will become the caretaker of the family.
The house, thus considered, tends to assume in its evolution a significance more exalted than even the English word "home" expresses. It does not consist of walls alone, though these walls be the pure and shining guardians of that intimacy which is the sacred symbol of the family. The home shall become more than this. It lives! It has a soul. It may be said to embrace its inmates with the[Pg 69] tender, consoling arms of woman. It is the giver of moral life, of blessings; it cares for, it educates and feeds the little ones. Within it, the tired workman shall find rest and newness of life. He shall find there the intimate life of the family, and its happiness.
The house, when you think about it, takes on a significance that’s even greater than what the English word "home" conveys. It isn’t just about the walls, even if those walls are the bright and shining protectors of the intimate space that represents the family. A home is so much more than that. It’s alive! It has a soul. You could say it wraps its inhabitants in the[Pg 69] tender, comforting embrace of a woman. It gives moral support, blessings; it nurtures, educates, and feeds the little ones. Inside, the weary worker will find rest and a fresh start. There, he will discover the closeness of family life and its joy.
The new woman, like the butterfly come forth from the chrysalis, shall be liberated from all those attributes which once made her desirable to man only as the source of the material blessings of existence. She shall be, like man, an individual, a free human being, a social worker; and, like man, she shall seek blessing and repose within the house, the house which has been reformed and communised.
The new woman, like a butterfly emerging from its cocoon, will be free from all the traits that once made her appealing to men solely as a provider of material comforts. She will be, like men, an individual, a free human being, a contributor to society; and, like men, she will seek fulfillment and peace within the home, a home that has been transformed and shared.
She shall wish to be loved for herself and not as a giver of comfort and repose. She shall wish a love free from every form of servile labour. The goal of human love is not the egotistical end of assuring its own satisfaction—it is the sublime goal of multiplying the forces of the free spirit, making it almost Divine, and, within such beauty and light, perpetuating the species.
She will want to be loved for who she is, not just for the comfort and peace she provides. She will desire a love that doesn't involve any kind of servitude. The aim of true love isn't just to fulfill selfish desires; it's about enhancing the power of the free spirit, elevating it to something almost divine, and within that beauty and light, continuing the human race.
This ideal love is made incarnate by Frederick Nietzsche, in the woman of Zarathustra, who conscientiously wished her son to be better than she. "Why do you desire me?" she asks the man. "Perhaps because of the perils of a solitary life?
This ideal love is brought to life by Frederick Nietzsche, in the woman of Zarathustra, who sincerely wanted her son to be better than she was. "Why do you want me?" she asks the man. "Maybe because of the dangers of being alone?
"In that case go far from me. I wish the man who has conquered himself, who has made his soul great. I wish the man who has conserved a clean and robust body. I wish the man who desires to unite with me, body and soul, to create a son! A son better, more perfect, stronger, than any created heretofore!"
"In that case, stay away from me. I want the man who has mastered himself, who has made his spirit strong. I want the man who has kept a healthy and fit body. I want the man who wishes to join with me, body and soul, to have a son! A son who is better, more perfect, and stronger than any that has come before!"
To better the species consciously, cultivating his own health, his own virtue, this should be the goal of man's married life. It is a sublime concept of which, as yet,[Pg 70] few think. And the socialised home of the future, living, provident, kindly; educator and comforter; is the true and worthy home of those human mates who wish to better the species, and to send the race forward triumphant into the eternity of life!
To consciously improve humanity by focusing on his own health and virtue should be the goal of a man's married life. This is a noble idea that, so far, few people consider. The future home, which is socialized, supportive, and compassionate; an educator and a source of comfort; is the real and deserving home for those partners who want to enhance the species and help humanity advance successfully into the eternity of life!
RULES AND REGULATIONS OF THE "CHILDREN'S HOUSES"
The Roman Association of Good Building hereby establishes within its tenement house number, a "Children's House," in which may be gathered together all children under common school age, belonging to the families of the tenants.
The Roman Association of Good Building establishes a "Children's House" in its tenement building, where all children of common school age and younger, from the families of the tenants, can gather together.
The chief aim of the "Children's House" is to offer, free of charge, to the children of those parents who are obliged to absent themselves for their work, the personal care which the parents are not able to give.
The main goal of the "Children's House" is to provide, at no cost, personal care for the children of parents who have to be away for work, care that the parents are unable to give.
In the "Children's House" attention is given to the education, the health, the physical and moral development of the children. This work is carried on in a way suited to the age of the children.
In the "Children's House," focus is placed on the education, health, and physical and moral development of the children. This work is carried out in a manner appropriate for their age.
There shall be connected with the "Children's House" a Directress, a Physician, and a Caretaker.
There will be a Director, a Doctor, and a Caretaker associated with the "Children's House."
The programme and hours of the "Children's House" shall be fixed by the Directress.
The schedule and hours for the "Children's House" will be set by the Director.
There may be admitted to the "Children's House" all the children in the tenement between the ages of three and seven.
All children living in the tenement between the ages of three and seven can be admitted to the "Children's House."
The parents who wish to avail themselves of the advantages of the "Children's House" pay nothing. They must, however, assume these binding obligations:
The parents who want to take advantage of the "Children's House" pay nothing. They do, however, have to take on these binding obligations:
(a) To send their children to the "Children's House" at the appointed time, clean in body and clothing, and provided with a suitable apron.
(a) To send their kids to the "Children's House" at the right time, clean in body and clothes, and wearing a suitable apron.
(b) To show the greatest respect and deference toward the Directress and toward all persons connected with the "Children's House," and to co-operate with the Directress herself in the education of the children. Once a week, at least, the mothers may talk with the Directress, giving her information concerning the home life of the child, and receiving helpful advice from her.
(b) To show the utmost respect and consideration toward the Directress and everyone involved with the "Children's House," and to work together with the Directress in educating the children. At least once a week, mothers can meet with the Directress to share information about their child's home life and get helpful advice from her.
There shall be expelled from the "Children's House":
There will be removed from the "Children's House":
(a) Those children who present themselves unwashed, or in soiled clothing.
(a) Those kids who show up unwashed or in dirty clothes.
(b) Those who show themselves to be incorrigible.
(b) Those who prove to be unchangeable.
(c) Those whose parents fail in respect to the persons connected with the "Children's House," or who destroy through bad conduct the educational work of the institution.
(c) Those whose parents do not fulfill their obligations regarding the individuals involved with the "Children's House," or who undermine the educational efforts of the institution through poor behavior.
[6] See page 70.
__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See p. 70.
CHAPTER IV
Teaching Methods Used in the "Children's Houses"
As soon as I knew that I had at my disposal a class of little children, it was my wish to make of this school a field for scientific experimental pedagogy and child psychology. I started with a view in which Wundt concurs; namely, that child psychology does not exist. Indeed, experimental researches in regard to childhood, as, for example, those of Preyer and Baldwin, have been made upon not more than two or three subjects, children of the investigators. Moreover, the instruments of psychometry must be greatly modified and simplified before they can be used with children, who do not lend themselves passively as subjects for experimentation. Child psychology can be established only through the method of external observation. We must renounce all idea of making any record of internal states, which can be revealed only by the introspection of the subject himself. The instruments of psychometric research, as applied to pedagogy, have up to the present time been limited to the esthesiometric phase of the study.
As soon as I found out that I had a group of little kids to work with, I wanted to turn this school into a space for scientific experimental teaching and child psychology. I started with the belief that, as Wundt agrees, child psychology doesn’t really exist. In fact, experimental research on childhood, like the work done by Preyer and Baldwin, has only focused on a couple of kids, usually the researchers’ own. Plus, the tools for psychometry need to be significantly adjusted and simplified before they can be used with children, who aren’t willing to just sit still as subjects for experiments. We can only build child psychology through external observation. We have to give up on the idea of documenting internal states, which can only be disclosed by the child’s own introspection. So far, the tools for psychometric research in education have mostly been limited to the esthesiometric stage of the study.
My intention was to keep in touch with the researches of others, but to make myself independent of them, proceeding to my work without preconceptions of any kind. I retained as the only essential, the affirmation, or, rather, the definition of Wundt, that "all methods of experimental [Pg 73]psychology may be reduced to one; namely, carefully recorded observation of the subject."
My goal was to stay updated with others' research while being independent, focusing on my work without any biases. I kept as the only essential the statement, or rather, the definition by Wundt, that "all methods of experimental psychology can be reduced to one; that is, carefully recorded observation of the subject."
Treating of children, another factor must necessarily intervene: the study of the development. Here too, I retained the same general criterion, but without clinging to any dogma about the activity of the child according to age.
When discussing children, another factor must definitely be considered: the study of development. Here, too, I maintained the same general principle, but I didn’t hold onto any strict beliefs about how a child's activity varies with age.
ANTHROPOLOGICAL CONSIDERATION
In regard to physical development, my first thought was given to the regulating of anthropometric observations, and to the selection of the most important observations to be made.
In terms of physical development, my first thought was focused on regulating anthropometric observations and choosing the most important measurements to take.
I designed an anthropometer provided with the metric scale, varying between .50 metre and 1.50 metres. A small stool, 30 centimetres high, could be placed upon the floor of the anthropometer for measurements taken in a sitting position. I now advise making the anthropometer with a platform on either side of the pole bearing the scale, so that on one side the total stature can be measured, and on the other the height of the body when seated. In the second case, the zero is indicated at 30 centimetres; that is, it corresponds to the seat of the stool, which is fixed. The indicators on the vertical post are independent one of the other and this makes it possible to measure two children at the same time. In this way the inconvenience and waste of time caused by having to move the seat about, is obviated, and also the trouble of having to calculate the difference in the metric scale.
I created an anthropometer with a metric scale that measures between 0.50 meters and 1.50 meters. A small stool, 30 centimeters high, can be placed on the floor of the anthropometer for measurements taken while sitting. I now recommend designing the anthropometer with a platform on either side of the pole with the scale, so that one side measures total height and the other measures height when seated. In the second case, the zero point is set at 30 centimeters, which corresponds to the height of the stool seat, which is fixed in place. The indicators on the vertical post operate independently, allowing for the measurement of two children at the same time. This approach eliminates the inconvenience and time wasted in adjusting the seat and also removes the need to calculate differences on the metric scale.
Having thus facilitated the technique of the researches, I decided to take the measurements of the children's stature, seated and standing, every month, and in order to have these regulated as exactly as possible in their re[Pg 74]lation to development, and also to give greater regularity to the research work of the teacher, I made a rule that the measurements should be taken on the day on which the child completed each month of his age. For this purpose I designed a register arranged on the following plan:—
Having made the research process easier, I decided to measure the children's height, both seated and standing, every month. To ensure these measurements were as accurate as possible regarding their growth and to provide more consistency for the teacher's research work, I established a rule that the measurements should be taken on the day the child turned each month older. For this, I created a register set up as follows:—

The spaces opposite each number are used to register the name of the child born on that day of the month. Thus the teacher knows which scholars she must measure on the days which are marked on the calendar, and she fills in his measurements to correspond with the month in which he was born. In this way a most exact registration can be arrived at without having the teacher feel that she is overburdened, or fatigued.
The spaces next to each number are for recording the name of the child born on that date. This way, the teacher knows which students she needs to measure on the days indicated on the calendar, and she fills in their measurements to match the month they were born. This allows for very accurate records without making the teacher feel overwhelmed or exhausted.
With regard to the weight of the child, I have arranged that it shall be taken every week on a pair of scales which I have placed in the dressing-room where the children are given their bath. According to the day on which the child is born, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, etc., we have him weighed when he is ready to take a bath. Thus the children's baths (no small matter when we consider[Pg 75] a class of fifty) are sub-divided into seven days, and from three to five children go to the bath every day. Certainly, theoretically, a daily bath would be desirable, but in order to manage this a large bath or a number of small ones would be necessary, so that a good many children could be bathed at once. Even a weekly bath entails many difficulties, and sometimes has to be given up. In any case, I have distributed the taking of the weight in the order stated with the intention of thus arranging for and making sure of periodical baths.[7]
Regarding the child's weight, I've set up a system where we weigh them every week on scales I've placed in the dressing room where the kids get their baths. Depending on the day of the week the child is born—Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, etc.—we measure their weight when they're ready for a bath. This way, the children's baths (which is quite a task when managing a group of fifty) are spread out over seven days, with three to five children bathing each day. While a daily bath would be ideal in theory, it would require a large tub or several smaller ones so that many kids can bathe at the same time. Even a weekly bath comes with its own challenges and sometimes has to be skipped. In any case, I've organized the weighing process as mentioned to ensure that periodic baths are managed effectively.[7]
The form here given shows the register which we use in recording the weight of the children. Every page of the register corresponds to a month.
The form provided here displays the log we use to record the children's weight. Each page of the log corresponds to a month.
It seems to me that the anthropological measurements, the taking and recording of which I have just described, should be the only ones with which the schoolmistress need occupy herself; and, therefore, the only ones which should be taken actually within the school. It is my plan that other measurements should be taken by a physician, who either is, or is preparing to be, a specialist in infant anthropology. In the meantime, I take these special measurements myself.
It seems to me that the anthropological measurements I just described should be the only ones the schoolteacher needs to focus on; therefore, they should be the only ones taken at the school. I plan for other measurements to be taken by a doctor who is either already a specialist in child anthropology or in training to become one. In the meantime, I'm taking these special measurements myself.

The examination made by the physician must necessarily be complex, and to facilitate and regulate the taking of these measurements I have designed and had printed biological charts, of which I here give an example.[Pg 77]
The examination conducted by the doctor has to be thorough, and to make it easier to take these measurements, I created and printed biological charts, an example of which I provide here.[Pg 77]

As will be seen, these charts are very simple. I made them so because I wished the doctor and the schoolmistress to be able to use them freely and independently.
As you’ll see, these charts are really straightforward. I created them that way because I wanted the doctor and the schoolteacher to be able to use them easily and on their own.
By this method the anthropometrical records are arranged in an orderly way, while the simplicity of the mechanism, and the clearness of the charts, guarantee the making of such observations as I have considered fundamental. Referring to the physician's biographical chart, I advise that once a year the following measurements be taken: Circumference of the head; the two greater diameters of the head; the circumference of the chest; and the cephalic, ponderal, and stature indices. Further information concerning the selection of these measurements may be found in my treatise, "Antropologia Pedagogica." The physician is asked to take these measurements during the week, or at least within the month, in which the child completes a year of his age, and, if it is possible, on the birthday itself. In this way the task of the physician will also be made easier, because of its regularity. We have, at the most, fifty children in each of our schools, and the birthdays of these scattered over the 365 days of the year make it possible for the physician to take his measurements from time to time, so that the burden of his work is not heavy. It is the duty of the teacher to inform the doctor of the birthdays of the children.
By this method, the anthropometric records are organized systematically, while the simplicity of the mechanism and the clarity of the charts ensure observations that I believe are essential. Referring to the physician's biographical chart, I recommend that once a year the following measurements be taken: head circumference; the two largest diameters of the head; chest circumference; and the cephalic, weight, and height indices. More information regarding the selection of these measurements can be found in my work, "Antropologia Pedagogica." The physician is asked to take these measurements during the week or at least within the month in which the child turns one year old, and, if possible, on the child's birthday itself. This way, the physician's task will also be made easier due to its regularity. We have, at most, fifty children in each of our schools, and since their birthdays are spread out over the 365 days of the year, this allows the physician to take measurements periodically without a heavy workload. It is the teacher's responsibility to inform the doctor of the children's birthdays.
The taking of these anthropometrical measurements has also an educational side to it, for the pupils, when they leave the "Children's House," know how to answer with clearness and certainty the following questions:—
The process of taking these measurements has an educational aspect as well, because when the students leave the "Children's House," they know how to respond clearly and confidently to the following questions:—
On what day of the week were you born?
On what day of the week were you born?
On what day of the month?
On what day of the month?
And with all this they will have acquired habits of order, and, above all, they will have formed the habit of observing themselves. Indeed, I may say here, that the children take a great pleasure in being measured; at the first glance of the teacher and at the word stature, the child begins instantly to take off his shoes, laughing and running to place himself upon the platform of the anthropometer; placing himself of his own accord in the normal position so perfectly that the teacher needs only to arrange the indicator and read the result.
And with all this, they will have developed habits of order, and, most importantly, they will have gotten into the habit of self-observation. In fact, I can say that the children really enjoy being measured; at the first sight of the teacher and at the mention of their height, the child immediately starts taking off their shoes, laughing and rushing to stand on the anthropometer platform; positioning themselves perfectly in the standard pose so that the teacher only has to adjust the indicator and read the result.
Aside from the measurements which the physician takes with the ordinary instruments (calipers and metal yard measure), he makes observations upon the children's colouring, condition of their muscles, state of their lymphatic glands, the condition of the blood, etc. He notices any malformations; describes any pathological conditions with care (any tendency to rickets, infant paralysis, defective sight, etc.). This objective study of the child will guide the doctor when he finds it advisable to talk with the parents concerning its condition. Following this, when the doctor has found it desirable, he makes a thorough, sanitary inspection of the home of the child, prescribing necessary treatment and eventually doing away with such troubles as eczema, inflammation of the ear, feverish conditions, intestinal disturbances, etc. This careful following of the case in hand is greatly assisted by the existence of the dispensary within the house, which makes feasible direct treatment and continual observation.
Aside from the measurements that the doctor takes with standard tools (like calipers and a metal yardstick), he observes the children's skin tone, muscle condition, state of their lymph nodes, quality of their blood, and so on. He looks for any deformities and carefully describes any health issues (such as signs of rickets, infantile paralysis, poor eyesight, etc.). This detailed examination of the child helps guide the doctor when it's appropriate to discuss the child's condition with the parents. After this, when the doctor deems it necessary, he conducts a thorough health inspection of the child's home, recommending treatment and addressing issues like eczema, ear infections, fevers, digestive problems, and more. This careful monitoring of the child's case is greatly supported by the existence of the dispensary within the house, which allows for direct treatment and ongoing observation.
I have found that the usual question asked patients who present themselves at the clinics, are not adapted for use in our schools, as the members of the families living in these tenements are for the greater part perfectly normal.
I have found that the typical questions asked of patients who come to the clinics are not suitable for use in our schools since most of the families living in these apartments are completely normal.
I therefore encourage the directress of the school to[Pg 80] gather from her conversations with the mothers information of a more practical sort. She informs herself as to the education of the parents, their habits, the wages earned, the money spent for household purposes, etc., and from all this she outlines a history of each family, much on the order of those used by Le-Play. This method is, of course, practical only where the directress lives among the families of her scholars.
I encourage the school director to[Pg 80] gather practical information from her conversations with the mothers. She should learn about the parents' education, their habits, the wages they earn, the money they spend on household needs, and so on. From all this, she can create a profile of each family, similar to those used by Le-Play. This approach is only effective if the director lives among the families of her students.
In every case, however, the physician's advice to the mothers concerning the hygienic care of each particular child, as well as his directions concerning hygiene in general, will prove most helpful. The directress should act as the go-between in these matters, since she is in the confidence of the mothers, and since from her, such advice comes naturally.
In every case, the doctor's advice to the mothers about the hygiene care of each child, as well as his general hygiene recommendations, will be very helpful. The director should act as the intermediary in these matters, as she has the trust of the mothers, and such advice comes naturally from her.
ENVIRONMENT: SCHOOLROOM FURNISHINGS
The method of observation must undoubtedly include the methodical observation of the morphological growth of the pupils. But let me repeat that, while this element necessarily enters, it is not upon this particular kind of observation that the method is established.
The method of observation must definitely include the methodical observation of the morphological growth of the students. But let me emphasize that, while this element is essential, it is not solely based on this specific type of observation that the method is founded.
The method of observation is established upon one fundamental base—the liberty of the pupils in their spontaneous manifestations.
The method of observation is built on one fundamental principle—the freedom of the students in their natural expressions.
With this in view, I first turned my attention to the question of environment, and this, of course, included the furnishing of the schoolroom. In considering an ample playground with space for a garden as an important part of this school environment, I am not suggesting anything new.
With this in mind, I first focused on the question of the environment, which, of course, included the setup of the classroom. When I think about a spacious playground with room for a garden as a key part of this school environment, I'm not proposing anything new.
The novelty lies, perhaps, in my idea for the use of this open-air space, which is to be in direct communication[Pg 81] with the schoolroom, so that the children may be free to go and come as they like, throughout the entire day. I shall speak of this more fully later on.
The new idea might be in how I plan to use this outdoor space, which will be directly connected to the classroom, allowing the kids to come and go as they please all day long. I’ll discuss this in more detail later.
The principal modification in the matter of school furnishings is the abolition of desks, and benches or stationary chairs. I have had tables made with wide, solid, octagonal legs, spreading in such a way that the tables are at the same time solidly firm and very light, so light, indeed, that two four-year-old children can easily carry them about. These tables are rectangular and sufficiently large to accommodate two children on the long side, there being room for three if they sit rather close together. There are smaller tables at which one child may work alone.
The main change in school furniture is getting rid of desks and fixed benches or chairs. I've had tables made with wide, sturdy, octagonal legs that are designed to be both strong and lightweight; in fact, two four-year-old kids can easily lift them. These tables are rectangular and big enough for two children to sit on the longer side, with space for three if they sit closely. There are also smaller tables for one child to work at by themselves.
I also designed and had manufactured little chairs. My first plan for these was to have them cane seated, but experience has shown the wear on these to be so great, that I now have chairs made entirely of wood. These are very light and of an attractive shape. In addition to these, I have in each schoolroom a number of comfortable little armchairs, some of wood and some of wicker.
I also designed and had small chairs made. I initially planned for them to have cane seats, but I've learned from experience that they wear out too quickly, so now I have chairs made entirely of wood. These are very lightweight and have an attractive design. Additionally, I have several comfy little armchairs in each classroom, some made of wood and others of wicker.
Another piece of our school furniture consists of a little washstand, so low that it can be used by even a three-year-old child. This is painted with a white waterproof enamel and, besides the broad, upper and lower shelves which hold the little white enameled basins and pitchers, there are small side shelves for the soap-dishes, nail-brushes, towels, etc. There is also a receptacle into which the basins may be emptied. Wherever possible, a small cupboard provides each child with a space where he may keep his own soap, nail-brush, tooth-brush, etc.
Another piece of our school furniture is a small washstand, designed low enough for even a three-year-old to use. It’s painted with a white waterproof enamel, and besides the wide top and bottom shelves for the little white enameled basins and pitchers, there are small side shelves for soap dishes, nail brushes, towels, and so on. There’s also a spot for emptying the basins. Whenever possible, a small cupboard gives each child a place to store their own soap, nail brush, toothbrush, and more.
In each of our schoolrooms we have provided a series of long low cupboards, especially designed for the reception[Pg 82] of the didactic materials. The doors of these cupboards open easily, and the care of the materials is confided to the children. The tops of these cases furnish room for potted plants, small aquariums, or for the various toys with which the children are allowed to play freely. We have ample blackboard space, and these boards are so hung as to be easily used by the smallest child. Each blackboard is provided with a small case in which are kept the chalk, and the white cloths which we use instead of the ordinary erasers.
In each of our classrooms, we’ve set up a series of long, low cabinets specifically designed to hold the learning materials. The doors of these cabinets open easily, and the kids are responsible for taking care of the materials. The tops of these cabinets provide space for potted plants, small aquariums, or various toys that the kids can play with freely. We have plenty of blackboard space, and these boards are positioned so that even the smallest child can use them easily. Each blackboard comes with a small case that holds the chalk and the white cloths we use instead of regular erasers.
Above the blackboards are hung attractive pictures, chosen carefully, representing simple scenes in which children would naturally be interested. Among the pictures in our "Children's Houses" in Rome we have hung a copy of Raphael's "Madonna della Seggiola," and this picture we have chosen as the emblem of the "Children's Houses." For indeed, these "Children's Houses" represent not only social progress, but universal human progress, and are closely related to the elevation of the idea of motherhood, to the progress of woman and to the protection of her offspring. In this beautiful conception, Raphael has not only shown us the Madonna as a Divine Mother holding in her arms the babe who is greater than she, but by the side of this symbol of all motherhood, he has placed the figure of St. John, who represents humanity. So in Raphael's picture we see humanity rendering homage to maternity,—maternity, the sublime fact in the definite triumph of humanity. In addition to this beautiful symbolism, the picture has a value as being one of the greatest works of art of Italy's greatest artist. And if the day shall come when the "Children's Houses" shall be established throughout the world, it is our wish that this picture of Raphael's shall have its place in each of the schools,[Pg 83] speaking eloquently of the country in which they originated.
Above the blackboards, there are beautiful pictures hung up, selected thoughtfully, showcasing simple scenes that will naturally capture children's interest. Among the artworks in our "Children's Houses" in Rome, we have displayed a copy of Raphael's "Madonna della Seggiola," which we chose as the emblem of the "Children's Houses." These "Children's Houses" symbolize not just social progress, but also universal human advancement, closely tied to the upliftment of the idea of motherhood, the advancement of women, and the protection of their children. In this stunning artwork, Raphael portrays the Madonna as a Divine Mother cradling in her arms the child who is greater than she is, and next to this symbol of motherhood, he has included St. John, representing humanity. Thus, in Raphael's painting, we witness humanity paying tribute to motherhood—motherhood, an essential aspect of the triumph of humanity. Beyond this beautiful symbolism, the artwork is also invaluable as one of the masterpieces created by Italy's greatest artist. If the time comes when the "Children's Houses" are established worldwide, we hope that Raphael's artwork will be displayed in each of the schools, eloquently representing the country of its origin.[Pg 83]
The children, of course, cannot comprehend the symbolic significance of the "Madonna of the Chair," but they will see something more beautiful than that which they feel in more ordinary pictures, in which they see mother, father, and children. And the constant companionship with this picture will awaken in their heart a religious impression.
The children, of course, can’t understand the symbolic meaning of the "Madonna of the Chair," but they will see something more beautiful than what they feel in more ordinary pictures, where they see mother, father, and children. And being around this picture all the time will stir a religious feeling in their hearts.
This, then, is the environment which I have selected for the children we wish to educate.
This is the environment I've chosen for the children we want to educate.
I know the first objection which will present itself to the minds of persons accustomed to the old-time methods of discipline;—the children in these schools, moving about, will overturn the little tables and chairs, producing noise and disorder; but this is a prejudice which has long existed in the minds of those dealing with little children, and for which there is no real foundation.
I understand the first argument that people used to traditional discipline will have;—the kids in these schools, running around, will knock over the small tables and chairs, causing noise and chaos; but this is a bias that has been around for a long time among those who work with young children, and it has no real basis in fact.
Swaddling clothes have for many centuries been considered necessary to the new-born babe, walking-chairs to the child who is learning to walk. So in the school, we still believe it necessary to have heavy desks and chairs fastened to the floor. All these things are based upon the idea that the child should grow in immobility, and upon the strange prejudice that, in order to execute any educational movement, we must maintain a special position of the body;—as we believe that we must assume a special position when we are about to pray.
Swaddling clothes have been seen as essential for newborns for many centuries, just like walking chairs are for toddlers learning to walk. Similarly, in schools, we still think it's necessary to have heavy desks and chairs attached to the floor. All of this is based on the idea that children should grow while being immobile and on the odd belief that to engage in any educational activity, we need to maintain a specific body position—much like we think we need to adopt a certain posture when we're about to pray.
Our little tables and our various types of chairs are all light and easily transported, and we permit the child to select the position which he finds most comfortable. He can make himself comfortable as well as seat himself[Pg 84] in his own place. And this freedom is not only an external sign of liberty, but a means of education. If by an awkward movement a child upsets a chair, which falls noisily to the floor, he will have an evident proof of his own incapacity; the same movement had it taken place amid stationary benches would have passed unnoticed by him. Thus the child has some means by which he can correct himself, and having done so he will have before him the actual proof of the power he has gained: the little tables and chairs remain firm and silent each in its own place. It is plainly seen that the child has learned to command his movements.
Our small tables and different types of chairs are all lightweight and easy to move around, and we allow the child to choose the position they find most comfortable. They can get comfortable as well as sit down[Pg 84] in their own spot. This freedom not only shows a sign of liberty but also serves as a way of learning. If a child accidentally knocks over a chair, causing it to crash loudly to the ground, it provides clear evidence of their own clumsiness; the same action wouldn’t have gotten their attention if it happened with fixed benches. In this way, the child has a way to self-correct, and once they do, they’ll have tangible proof of the control they've gained: the little tables and chairs stay steady and quiet in their places. It’s clear that the child has learned to manage their movements.
In the old method, the proof of discipline attained lay in a fact entirely contrary to this; that is, in the immobility and silence of the child himself. Immobility and silence which hindered the child from learning to move with grace and with discernment, and left him so untrained, that, when he found himself in an environment where the benches and chairs were not nailed to the floor, he was not able to move about without overturning the lighter pieces of furniture. In the "Children's Houses" the child will not only learn to move gracefully and properly, but will come to understand the reason for such deportment. The ability to move which he acquires here will be of use to him all his life. While he is still a child, he becomes capable of conducting himself correctly, and yet, with perfect freedom.
In the old way, proving discipline was all about the child being still and quiet, which actually went against this idea. That stillness and silence kept the child from learning how to move gracefully and with understanding, leaving them so untrained that when they were in a place where the benches and chairs weren't stuck to the floor, they couldn’t move around without knocking over lighter pieces of furniture. In the "Children's Houses," the child will not only learn to move gracefully and appropriately, but they will also understand why it's important. The ability to move that they gain here will benefit them for their entire life. Even as a child, they will learn to handle themselves correctly while still enjoying complete freedom.
The Directress of the Casa dei Bambini at Milan constructed under one of the windows a long, narrow shelf upon which she placed the little tables containing the metal geometric forms used in the first lessons in design. But the shelf was too narrow, and it often happened that the children in selecting the pieces which they wished to[Pg 85] use would allow one of the little tables to fall to the floor, thus upsetting with great noise all the metal pieces which it held. The directress intended to have the shelf changed, but the carpenter was slow in coming, and while waiting for him she discovered that the children had learned to handle these materials so carefully that in spite of the narrow and sloping shelf, the little tables no longer fell to the floor.
The director of the Casa dei Bambini in Milan built a long, narrow shelf under one of the windows where she put the small tables with metal geometric shapes used in the initial design lessons. However, the shelf was too narrow, and it often happened that when the kids chose the pieces they wanted to use, they would accidentally knock one of the little tables down to the floor, causing all the metal pieces on it to spill out loudly. The director planned to have the shelf adjusted, but the carpenter was slow to arrive. While waiting for him, she noticed that the children had learned to handle the materials so carefully that despite the narrow and sloping shelf, the little tables no longer fell to the floor.
The children, by carefully directing their movements, had overcome the defect in this piece of furniture. The simplicity or imperfection of external objects often serves to develop the activity and the dexterity of the pupils. This has been one of the surprises of our method as applied in the "Children's Houses."
The children, by carefully directing their movements, had fixed the flaw in this piece of furniture. The simplicity or imperfection of outside objects often helps to enhance the activity and skill of the students. This has been one of the surprises of our approach as applied in the "Children's Houses."
It all seems very logical, and now that it has been actually tried and put into words, it will no doubt seem to everyone as simple as the egg of Christopher Columbus.
It all seems very logical, and now that it has actually been tested and expressed, it will surely appear to everyone as simple as Columbus's egg.
[7] Incidentally, I may say, that I have invented a means of bathing children contemporaneously, without having a large bath. In order to manage this, I thought of having a long trough with supports at the bottom, on which small, separate tubs could rest, with rather large holes in the bottom. The little tubs are filled from the large trough, into which the water runs and then goes into all the little tubs together, by the law of the levelling of liquids, going through the holes in the bottom. When the water is settled, it does not pass from tub to tub, and the children will each have their own bath. The emptying of the trough brings with it the simultaneous emptying of the little tubs, which being of light metal, will be easily moved from the bottom of the big tub, in order to clean it. It is not difficult to imagine arranging a cork for the hole at the bottom. These are only projects for the future!
[7] By the way, I've come up with a way to bathe kids at the same time without needing a big bathtub. To make this work, I designed a long trough supported at the bottom, where smaller, separate tubs can sit with large holes in the bottom. The small tubs get filled from the big trough, as water runs into all of them at once, following the principle of liquid leveling through the holes. Once the water settles, it doesn’t move between the tubs, so each child has their own bath. When the trough is emptied, the small tubs empty simultaneously, and since they’re made of lightweight metal, they can be easily lifted out of the big tub for cleaning. It's easy to picture a cork for the hole at the bottom. These are just ideas for the future!
CHAPTER V.
Discipline
The pedagogical method of observation has for its base the liberty of the child; and liberty is activity.
The teaching method of observation is based on the freedom of the child; and freedom is activity.
Discipline must come through liberty. Here is a great principle which is difficult for followers of common-school methods to understand. How shall one obtain discipline in a class of free children? Certainly in our system, we have a concept of discipline very different from that commonly accepted. If discipline is founded upon liberty, the discipline itself must necessarily be active. We do not consider an individual disciplined only when he has been rendered as artificially silent as a mute and as immovable as a paralytic. He is an individual annihilated, not disciplined.
Discipline must come from freedom. This is a key idea that can be tough for those who stick to traditional school methods to grasp. How does one achieve discipline in a classroom full of free children? In our approach, we have a definition of discipline that's quite different from the usual one. If discipline is based on freedom, then it has to be active. We don’t see a person as disciplined just because they’ve been made as silent as someone who can’t speak and as still as someone who is paralyzed. That person is annihilated, not disciplined.
We call an individual disciplined when he is master of himself, and can, therefore, regulate his own conduct when it shall be necessary to follow some rule of life. Such a concept of active discipline is not easy either to comprehend or to apply. But certainly it contains a great educational principle, very different from the old-time absolute and undiscussed coercion to immobility.
We consider someone disciplined when they have control over themselves and can manage their behavior when it's important to stick to a certain set of life rules. This idea of active discipline is not easy to understand or put into practice. However, it definitely includes a significant educational principle, which is quite different from the traditional, unquestioned pressure to stay still.
A special technique is necessary to the teacher who is to lead the child along such a path of discipline, if she is to make it possible for him to continue in this way all his life, advancing indefinitely toward perfect self-mastery. Since the child now learns to move rather than[Pg 87] to sit still, he prepares himself not for the school, but for life; for he becomes able, through habit and through practice, to perform easily and correctly the simple acts of social or community life. The discipline to which the child habituates himself here is, in its character, not limited to the school environment but extends to society.
A special technique is needed by the teacher who wants to guide the child on a path of discipline, so that they can continue this way throughout their life, moving steadily towards achieving perfect self-control. Since the child is now learning to move instead of just sitting still, they are getting ready not just for school, but for life; they become capable, through routine and practice, of doing the simple tasks of social or community life easily and correctly. The discipline the child develops here isn’t just for school but reaches out into society.
The liberty of the child should have as its limit the collective interest; as its form, what we universally consider good breeding. We must, therefore, check in the child whatever offends or annoys others, or whatever tends toward rough or ill-bred acts. But all the rest,—every manifestation having a useful scope,—whatever it be, and under whatever form it expresses itself, must not only be permitted, but must be observed by the teacher. Here lies the essential point; from her scientific preparation, the teacher must bring not only the capacity, but the desire, to observe natural phenomena. In our system, she must become a passive, much more than an active, influence, and her passivity shall be composed of anxious scientific curiosity, and of absolute respect for the phenomenon which she wishes to observe. The teacher must understand and feel her position of observer: the activity must lie in the phenomenon.
The freedom of the child should be limited by the collective interest and guided by what we all consider good manners. Therefore, we need to curb anything in the child that offends or annoys others or leads to rude or uncivil behavior. However, everything else—every action that serves a useful purpose—regardless of its form, should not only be allowed but actively encouraged by the teacher. This is the crucial point; from her training, the teacher must possess not only the ability but also the desire to observe natural phenomena. In our approach, she should be more of a passive influence than an active one, and her passivity should consist of a keen scientific curiosity and total respect for the phenomenon she aims to observe. The teacher must understand and feel her role as an observer: the activity should come from the phenomenon itself.
Such principles assuredly have a place in schools for little children who are exhibiting the first psychic manifestations of their lives. We cannot know the consequences of suffocating a spontaneous action at the time when the child is just beginning to be active: perhaps we suffocate life itself. Humanity shows itself in all its intellectual splendour during this tender age as the sun shows itself at the dawn, and the flower in the first unfolding of the petals; and we must respect religiously, reverently, these first indications of individuality. If any[Pg 88] educational act is to be efficacious, it will be only that which tends to help toward the complete unfolding of this life. To be thus helpful it is necessary rigorously to avoid the arrest of spontaneous movements and the imposition of arbitrary tasks. It is of course understood, that here we do not speak of useless or dangerous acts, for these must be suppressed, destroyed.
Such principles definitely belong in schools for young children who are showing the first signs of their personalities. We can’t predict the consequences of stifling a spontaneous action when a child is just starting to be active: we might be stifling life itself. Humanity shines in all its intellectual brilliance during this delicate age, just like the sun appears at dawn or a flower as it first blooms; we must respect these early signs of individuality with utmost care and reverence. If any educational action is to be effective, it will only be the one that helps support the full development of this life. To be truly helpful, we must strictly avoid the stopping of spontaneous movements and the imposition of arbitrary tasks. Of course, we’re not talking about pointless or dangerous actions, as those must be stopped and eliminated.
Actual training and practice are necessary to fit for this method teachers who have not been prepared for scientific observation, and such training is especially necessary to those who have been accustomed to the old domineering methods of the common school. My experiences in training teachers for the work in my schools did much to convince me of the great distance between these methods and those. Even an intelligent teacher, who understands the principle, finds much difficulty in putting it into practice. She can not understand that her new task is apparently passive, like that of the astronomer who sits immovable before the telescope while the worlds whirl through space. This idea, that life acts of itself, and that in order to study it, to divine its secrets or to direct its activity, it is necessary to observe it and to understand it without intervening—this idea, I say, is very difficult for anyone to assimilate and to put into practice.
Actual training and practice are necessary to prepare teachers for this method, especially those who haven't been trained in scientific observation and those used to the old controlling methods of traditional schools. My experiences in training teachers for the work in my schools really convinced me of the significant difference between these methods. Even a smart teacher who understands the principle struggles to apply it in real life. She can't grasp that her new role is actually passive, similar to the astronomer who sits still at the telescope while the planets move across the sky. This notion, that life operates on its own, and that to study it, uncover its secrets, or guide its actions, one must observe and understand it without interfering—this idea, I say, is very difficult for anyone to assimilate and put into practice.
The teacher has too thoroughly learned to be the one free activity of the school; it has for too long been virtually her duty to suffocate the activity of her pupils. When in the first days in one of the "Children's Houses" she does not obtain order and silence, she looks about her embarrassed as if asking the public to excuse her, and calling upon those present to testify to her innocence. In[Pg 89] vain do we repeat to her that the disorder of the first moment is necessary. And finally, when we oblige her to do nothing but watch, she asks if she had not better resign, since she is no longer a teacher.
The teacher has learned so well to be the only active force in the school; it's been her responsibility for too long to suppress her students' activity. When, in the early days at one of the "Children's Houses," she fails to maintain order and silence, she looks around awkwardly as if she's asking everyone to forgive her, and appealing to those present to vouch for her innocence. In[Pg 89] vain do we insist to her that the initial chaos is necessary. Eventually, when we force her to do nothing but watch, she wonders if she should just resign, since she feels she’s no longer a teacher.
But when she begins to find it her duty to discern which are the acts to hinder and which are those to observe, the teacher of the old school feels a great void within herself and begins to ask if she will not be inferior to her new task. In fact, she who is not prepared finds herself for a long time abashed and impotent; whereas the broader the teacher's scientific culture and practice in experimental psychology, the sooner will come for her the marvel of unfolding life, and her interest in it.
But when she starts to see it as her responsibility to figure out which actions to avoid and which to take, the traditional teacher feels a deep emptiness inside and wonders if she will be good enough for her new role. In reality, someone who isn't ready will feel embarrassed and helpless for a long time; on the other hand, the more extensive the teacher's knowledge and experience in experimental psychology, the quicker she'll experience the wonder of emerging life and her fascination with it.
Notari, in his novel, "My Millionaire Uncle," which is a criticism of modern customs, gives with that quality of vividness which is peculiar to him, a most eloquent example of the old-time methods of discipline. The "uncle" when a child was guilty of such a number of disorderly acts that he practically upset the whole town, and in desperation he was confined in a school. Here "Fufu," as he was called, experiences his first wish to be kind, and feels the first moving of his soul when he is near to the pretty little Fufetta, and learns that she is hungry and has no luncheon.
Notari, in his novel "My Millionaire Uncle," which critiques modern customs, provides a vivid example of old-school discipline. The "uncle," as a child, was so misbehaved that he nearly disrupted the entire town, and out of desperation, he was sent to a school. There, "Fufu," as he was called, experiences his first desire to be kind and feels the first stirrings of his soul when he is close to the pretty little Fufetta and discovers that she is hungry and has no lunch.
"He glanced around, looked at Fufetta, rose, took his little lunch basket, and without saying a word placed it in her lap.
He glanced around, looked at Fufetta, stood up, grabbed his small lunch basket, and without saying a word, set it in her lap.
"Then he ran away from her, and, without knowing why he did so, hung his head and burst into tears.
"Then he ran away from her, and, without knowing why, he hung his head and started crying."
"My uncle did not know how to explain to himself the reason for this sudden outburst.
"My uncle couldn't figure out why this sudden outburst happened."
"He had seen for the first time two kind eyes full of sad tears, and he had felt moved within himself, and at[Pg 90] the same time a great shame had rushed over him; the shame of eating near to one who had nothing to eat.
"He saw for the first time two kind eyes filled with sad tears, and he felt a deep emotional response inside himself. At the same time, a wave of shame washed over him—the shame of eating in front of someone who had nothing to eat."
"Not knowing how to express the impulse of his heart, nor what to say in asking her to accept the offer of his little basket, nor how to invent an excuse to justify his offering it to her, he remained the victim of this first deep movement of his little soul.
"Not knowing how to express what he felt, nor how to ask her to accept the offer of his small basket, nor how to come up with an excuse for giving it to her, he remained caught up in this first deep emotion of his little soul."
"Fufetta, all confused, ran to him quickly. With great gentleness she drew away the arm in which he had hidden his face.
"Fufetta, feeling confused, ran to him quickly. With great care, she gently pulled away the arm where he had hidden his face."
"'Do not cry, Fufu,' she said to him softly, almost as if pleading with him. She might have been speaking to her beloved rag doll, so motherly and intent was her little face, and so full of gentle authority, her manner.
"Don't cry, Fufu," she said to him softly, almost like she was begging him. She could have been talking to her cherished rag doll, her little face so caring and focused, and her way so full of gentle authority.
"Then the little girl kissed him, and my uncle yielding to the influence which had filled his heart, put his arms around her neck, and, still silent and sobbing, kissed her in return. At last, sighing deeply, he wiped from his face and eyes the damp traces of his emotion, and smiled again.
"Then the little girl kissed him, and my uncle, giving in to the feelings that had overwhelmed him, wrapped his arms around her neck and, still quietly sobbing, kissed her back. Finally, with a deep sigh, he wiped the tears from his face and eyes and smiled again."
"A strident voice called out from the other end of the courtyard:
"A loud voice shouted from the other side of the courtyard:
"'Here, here, you two down there—be quick with you; inside, both of you!'
"'Hey, you two down there—hurry up; get inside, both of you!'"
"It was the teacher, the guardian. She crushed that first gentle stirring in the soul of a rebel with the same blind brutality that she would have used toward two children engaged in a fight.
"It was the teacher, the guardian. She crushed that first gentle stir in the soul of a rebel with the same blind brutality she would have applied to two kids in a fight."
"It was the time for all to go back into the school—and everybody had to obey the rule."
"It was time for everyone to head back to school—and everyone had to follow the rule."
Thus I saw my teachers act in the first days of my practice school in the "Children's Houses." They almost involuntarily recalled the children to immobility without[Pg 91] observing and distinguishing the nature of the movements they repressed. There was, for example, a little girl who gathered her companions about her and then, in the midst of them, began to talk and gesticulate. The teacher at once ran to her, took hold of her arms, and told her to be still; but I, observing the child, saw that she was playing at being teacher or mother to the others, and teaching them the morning prayer, the invocation to the saints, and the sign of the cross: she already showed herself as a director. Another child, who continually made disorganised and misdirected movements, and who was considered abnormal, one day, with an expression of intense attention, set about moving the tables. Instantly they were upon him to make him stand still because he made too much noise. Yet this was one of the first manifestations, in this child, of movements that were co-ordinated and directed toward a useful end, and it was therefore an action that should have been respected. In fact, after this the child began to be quiet and happy like the others whenever he had any small objects to move about and to arrange upon his desk.
So, I observed my teachers during the early days of my practice at the "Children's Houses." They almost automatically pulled the kids back into stillness without [Pg 91] noticing or recognizing the nature of the movements they were stopping. For instance, there was a little girl who gathered her friends around her and then started talking and gesturing in their midst. The teacher quickly rushed over, grabbed her arms, and told her to be quiet; however, I saw that she was playing at being a teacher or a mother to the others, teaching them the morning prayer, the invocation to the saints, and how to make the sign of the cross: she was already showing herself as a leader. Another child, who frequently made chaotic and misdirected movements and was considered abnormal, one day, with a look of intense focus, began moving the tables. Instantly, they rushed to him to make him stop because he was making too much noise. Yet, this was one of the first signs in this child of coordinated movements that were aimed at a useful purpose, and it was therefore an action that deserved respect. In fact, after this, the child started to be calm and happy like the others whenever he had small objects to move around and arrange on his desk.
It often happened that while the directress replaced in the boxes various materials that had been used, a child would draw near, picking up the objects, with the evident desire of imitating the teacher. The first impulse was to send the child back to her place with the remark, "Let it alone; go to your seat." Yet the child expressed by this act a desire to be useful; the time, with her, was ripe for a lesson in order.
It often happened that while the teacher put away various materials that had been used, a child would come over, picking up the objects, clearly wanting to imitate the teacher. The first instinct was to send the child back to her seat with a comment like, "Leave it alone; go sit down." However, the child was showing a desire to be helpful; for her, it was the right time for a lesson in organization.
One day, the children had gathered themselves, laughing and talking, into a circle about a basin of water containing some floating toys. We had in the school a little boy barely two and a half years old. He had been left[Pg 92] outside the circle, alone, and it was easy to see that he was filled with intense curiosity. I watched him from a distance with great interest; he first drew near to the other children and tried to force his way among them, but he was not strong enough to do this, and he then stood looking about him. The expression of thought on his little face was intensely interesting. I wish that I had had a camera so that I might have photographed him. His eye lighted upon a little chair, and evidently he made up his mind to place it behind the group of children and then to climb up on it. He began to move toward the chair, his face illuminated with hope, but at that moment the teacher seized him brutally (or, perhaps, she would have said, gently) in her arms, and lifting him up above the heads of the other children showed him the basin of water, saying, "Come, poor little one, you shall see too!"
One day, the children gathered around a basin of water with some floating toys, laughing and chatting in a circle. There was a little boy in our school who was barely two and a half years old. He had been left outside the circle, alone, and it was clear that he was filled with intense curiosity. I watched him from a distance, very interested; he first approached the other kids and tried to push his way in, but he wasn't strong enough. So, he just stood there, looking around. The thoughtful expression on his little face was captivating. I wished I had a camera to capture him. His eyes spotted a small chair, and it seemed like he decided to place it behind the group of children and then climb onto it. He started moving towards the chair, his face lighting up with hope, but at that moment, the teacher grabbed him harshly (or maybe she would have said gently) in her arms, lifted him high above the heads of the other children, and showed him the basin of water, saying, "Come, poor little one, you can see it too!"
Undoubtedly the child, seeing the floating toys, did not experience the joy that he was about to feel through conquering the obstacle with his own force. The sight of those objects could be of no advantage to him, while his intelligent efforts would have developed his inner powers.
Undoubtedly, the child, seeing the floating toys, did not feel the joy he was about to experience by overcoming the obstacle with his own strength. The sight of those objects offered him no advantage, while his intelligent efforts would have nurtured his inner abilities.
The teacher hindered the child, in this case, from educating himself, without giving him any compensating good in return. The little fellow had been about to feel himself a conqueror, and he found himself held within two imprisoning arms, impotent. The expression of joy, anxiety, and hope, which had interested me so much faded from his face and left on it the stupid expression of the child who knows that others will act for him.
The teacher held back the child from learning on his own, without offering him any benefit in return. The little guy was just about to feel like a winner, and instead, he found himself trapped in two restraining arms, powerless. The look of joy, anxiety, and hope that had captured my attention faded from his face, leaving behind the blank expression of a child who knows that others will do things for him.
When the teachers were weary of my observations, they began to allow the children to do whatever they pleased. I saw children with their feet on the tables, or with their[Pg 93] fingers in their noses, and no intervention was made to correct them. I saw others push their companions, and I saw dawn in the faces of these an expression of violence; and not the slightest attention on the part of the teacher. Then I had to intervene to show with what absolute rigour it is necessary to hinder, and little by little suppress, all those things which we must not do, so that the child may come to discern clearly between good and evil.
When the teachers got tired of my observations, they started letting the kids do whatever they wanted. I saw kids with their feet on the tables, or fingers in their noses, and no one stepped in to correct them. I watched others push their friends, and I noticed a kind of violent look on their faces; yet the teacher paid no attention at all. So, I had to step in to demonstrate how absolutely necessary it is to stop, and gradually eliminate, all those behaviors we shouldn’t tolerate, so that the child can clearly understand the difference between right and wrong.
If discipline is to be lasting, its foundations must be laid in this way and these first days are the most difficult for the directress. The first idea that the child must acquire, in order to be actively disciplined, is that of the difference between good and evil; and the task of the educator lies in seeing that the child does not confound good with immobility, and evil with activity, as often happens in the case of the old-time discipline. And all this because our aim is to discipline for activity, for work, for good; not for immobility, not for passivity, not for obedience.
If discipline is going to be effective in the long run, it needs to be established in this way, and the first days are the hardest for the teacher. The initial concept the child needs to understand in order to be actively disciplined is the distinction between good and evil; the educator's role is to ensure that the child doesn’t mistake good for stillness and evil for action, which is a common misunderstanding from traditional methods. This is all because our goal is to teach discipline for action, for work, for good; not for stillness, not for passivity, not for obedience.
A room in which all the children move about usefully, intelligently, and voluntarily, without committing any rough or rude act, would seem to me a classroom very well disciplined indeed.
A room where all the kids move around productively, thoughtfully, and willingly, without doing anything harsh or disrespectful, would, to me, be a truly well-disciplined classroom.
To seat the children in rows, as in the common schools, to assign to each little one a place, and to propose that they shall sit thus quietly observant of the order of the whole class as an assemblage—this can be attained later, as the starting place of collective education. For also, in life, it sometimes happens that we must all remain seated and quiet; when, for example, we attend a concert or a lecture. And we know that even to us, as grown people, this costs no little sacrifice.[Pg 94]
To arrange the children in rows, like in regular schools, to assign each child a spot, and to suggest that they sit quietly, paying attention to the entire class as a group—this can be achieved later, as the starting point of collective education. In life, we sometimes have to sit still and be quiet; for instance, when we go to a concert or a lecture. And we know that even for us adults, this requires a significant sacrifice.[Pg 94]
If we can, when we have established individual discipline, arrange the children, sending each one to his own place, in order, trying to make them understand the idea that thus placed they look well, and that it is a good thing to be thus placed in order, that it is a good and pleasing arrangement in the room, this ordered and tranquil adjustment of theirs—then their remaining in their places, quiet and silent, is the result of a species of lesson, not an imposition. To make them understand the idea, without calling their attention too forcibly to the practice, to have them assimilate a principle of collective order—that is the important thing.
If we can, once we’ve established individual discipline, we should arrange the children, sending each one to their own spot, in order, helping them understand that when they’re positioned this way, they look good, and that it’s a positive thing to be organized, creating a nice and pleasing arrangement in the room. This calm and orderly setup of theirs—then staying in their places, quiet and silent, stems from a sort of lesson, not from an imposition. The key is to help them grasp the idea without drawing their attention too forcefully to the practice, allowing them to internalize a principle of collective order—that’s what really matters.
If, after they have understood this idea, they rise, speak, change to another place, they no longer do this without knowing and without thinking, but they do it because they wish to rise, to speak, etc.; that is, from that state of repose and order, well understood, they depart in order to undertake some voluntary action; and knowing that there are actions which are prohibited, this will give them a new impulse to remember to discriminate between good and evil.
If, after they have understood this idea, they get up, speak, or move to another place, they no longer do this mindlessly; instead, they do it because they want to rise, to speak, etc. In other words, from that state of rest and order, which is well understood, they leave to take on some voluntary action. Knowing that there are actions that are forbidden, this will motivate them to remember to differentiate between good and evil.
The movements of the children from the state of order become always more co-ordinated and perfect with the passing of the days; in fact, they learn to reflect upon their own acts. Now (with the idea of order understood by the children) the observation of the way in which the children pass from the first disordered movements to those which are spontaneous and ordered—this is the book of the teacher; this is the book which must inspire her actions; it is the only one in which she must read and study if she is to become a real educator.
The way the children move from chaos to order becomes increasingly coordinated and perfected as the days go by; they start to think about their own actions. Now that the children understand the concept of order, observing how they transition from their initial random movements to more spontaneous and organized ones is essential—this is the teacher’s guide. This is the book that should inspire her efforts; it’s the only one she should read and study if she wants to be a true educator.
For the child with such exercises makes, to a certain extent, a selection of his own tendencies, which were at[Pg 95] first confused in the unconscious disorder of his movements. It is remarkable how clearly individual differences show themselves, if we proceed in this way; the child, conscious and free, reveals himself.
For the child engaging in such activities, to some degree, chooses his own tendencies, which were initially mixed up in the unconscious chaos of his movements. It's striking how clearly individual differences emerge when we take this approach; the child, aware and liberated, shows himself.
There are those who remain quietly in their seats, apathetic, or drowsy; others who leave their places to quarrel, to fight, or to overturn the various blocks and toys, and then there are those others who set out to fulfil a definite and determined act—moving a chair to some particular spot and sitting down in it, moving one of the unused tables and arranging upon it the game they wish to play.
There are people who sit quietly in their seats, indifferent or sleepy; others who get up to argue, to fight, or to knock over the different blocks and toys, and then there are those who take action with purpose—moving a chair to a specific spot and sitting down, moving one of the unused tables and setting up the game they want to play.
Our idea of liberty for the child cannot be the simple concept of liberty we use in the observation of plants, insects, etc.
Our idea of freedom for a child can't just be the same basic concept of freedom we apply when observing plants, insects, and so on.
The child, because of the peculiar characteristics of helplessness with which he is born, and because of his qualities as a social individual is circumscribed by bonds which limit his activity.
The child, due to the unique traits of helplessness he is born with and because of his nature as a social being, is restricted by bonds which limit his activity.
An educational method that shall have liberty as its basis must intervene to help the child to a conquest of these various obstacles. In other words, his training must be such as shall help him to diminish, in a rational manner, the social bonds, which limit his activity.
An educational method that is based on liberty must step in to assist the child in overcoming these different obstacles. In other words, their training should help reduce, in a rational way, the social bonds that restrict their activity.
Little by little, as the child grows in such an atmosphere, his spontaneous manifestations will become more clear, with the clearness of truth, revealing his nature. For all these reasons, the first form of educational intervention must tend to lead the child toward independence.
Little by little, as the child grows in this environment, his natural expressions will become more clear, with the clarity of truth, showing his true nature. For all these reasons, the initial approach to education must focus on guiding the child toward independence.
INDEPENDENCE
No one can be free unless he is independent: therefore, the first, active manifestations of the child's individual liberty must be so guided that through this activity he[Pg 96] may arrive at independence. Little children, from the moment in which they are weaned, are making their way toward independence.
No one can be free unless they are independent: therefore, the initial expressions of a child's individual freedom should be directed in a way that helps them achieve independence through this activity. Little kids, from the moment they are weaned, are on their path to independence.
What is a weaned child? In reality it is a child that has become independent of the mother's breast. Instead of this one source of nourishment he will find various kinds of food; for him the means of existence are multiplied, and he can to some extent make a selection of his food, whereas he was at first limited absolutely to one form of nourishment.
What is a weaned child? Essentially, it's a child who has become independent from breastfeeding. Instead of relying on just this single source of food, they discover different types of nourishment; for them, the options for sustenance increase, and they can partially choose what they eat, whereas initially they were restricted to just one type of nourishment.
Nevertheless, he is still dependent, since he is not yet able to walk, and cannot wash and dress himself, and since he is not yet able to ask for things in a language which is clear and easily understood. He is still in this period to a great extent the slave of everyone. By the age of three, however, the child should have been able to render himself to a great extent independent and free.
Nevertheless, he is still dependent since he can't walk yet, can't wash or dress himself, and isn't able to clearly and easily ask for things. During this time, he is still largely at the mercy of everyone. By the age of three, however, the child should be able to be mostly independent and free.
That we have not yet thoroughly assimilated the highest concept of the term independence, is due to the fact that the social form in which we live is still servile. In an age of civilisation where servants exist, the concept of that form of life which is independence cannot take root or develop freely. Even so in the time of slavery, the concept of liberty was distorted and darkened.
The reason we haven't fully embraced the true meaning of the term independence is that the social structure we live in is still servile. In a civilized society where there are servants, the idea of a form of life that embodies independence can't really take hold or grow. Even back in the era of slavery, the idea of freedom was twisted and obscured.
Our servants are not our dependents, rather it is we who are dependent upon them.
Our servants aren’t our dependents; it’s actually us who depend on them.
It is not possible to accept universally as a part of our social structure such a deep human error without feeling the general effects of it in the form of moral inferiority. We often believe ourselves to be independent simply because no one commands us, and because we command others; but the nobleman who needs to call a servant to his aid is really a dependent through his own inferiority.[Pg 97] The paralytic who cannot take off his boots because of a pathological fact, and the prince who dare not take them off because of a social fact, are in reality reduced to the same condition.
It's impossible to accept such a significant human mistake as a normal part of our society without experiencing its overall effects as a sense of moral inferiority. We often think we're independent just because no one tells us what to do and we give orders to others; however, the nobleman who needs to call a servant for help is actually dependent due to his own shortcomings. [Pg 97] The person who can't take off their boots due to a medical issue, and the prince who won't take them off because of societal pressures, are essentially in the same situation.
Any nation that accepts the idea of servitude and believes that it is an advantage for man to be served by man, admits servility as an instinct, and indeed we all too easily lend ourselves to obsequious service, giving to it such complimentary names as courtesy, politeness, charity.
Any nation that accepts the idea of servitude and believes that it's beneficial for one person to serve another acknowledges servility as a natural instinct, and in fact, we often fall into the trap of obsequious service, dressing it up with flattering terms like courtesy, politeness, and charity.
In reality, he who is served is limited in his independence. This concept will be the foundation of the dignity of the man of the future; "I do not wish to be served, because I am not an impotent." And this idea must be gained before men can feel themselves to be really free.
In reality, those who are served have limited independence. This idea will be the basis of the dignity of the future person; "I do not want to be served, because I am not powerless." And this belief needs to be embraced before people can truly feel free.
Any pedagogical action, if it is to be efficacious in the training of little children, must tend to help the children to advance upon this road of independence. We must help them to learn to walk without assistance, to run, to go up and down stairs, to lift up fallen objects, to dress and undress themselves, to bathe themselves, to speak distinctly, and to express their own needs clearly. We must give such help as shall make it possible for children to achieve the satisfaction of their own individual aims and desires. All this is a part of education for independence.
Any teaching effort, to be effective in training young children, must aim to help them progress on the path to independence. We need to assist them in learning to walk unassisted, to run, to go up and down stairs, to pick up things they’ve dropped, to dress and undress themselves, to bathe themselves, to speak clearly, and to express their needs properly. We should provide support that enables children to pursue their own personal goals and desires. All of this is part of education for independence.
We habitually serve children; and this is not only an act of servility toward them, but it is dangerous, since it tends to suffocate their useful, spontaneous activity. We are inclined to believe that children are like puppets, and we wash them and feed them as if they were dolls. We do not stop to think that the child who does not do, does not know how to do. He must, nevertheless, do[Pg 98] these things, and nature has furnished him with the physical means for carrying on these various activities, and with the intellectual means for learning how to do them. And our duty toward him is, in every case, that of helping him to make a conquest of such useful acts as nature intended he should perform for himself. The mother who feeds her child without making the least effort to teach him to hold the spoon for himself and to try to find his mouth with it, and who does not at least eat herself, inviting the child to look and see how she does it, is not a good mother. She offends the fundamental human dignity of her son,—she treats him as if he were a doll, when he is, instead, a man confided by nature to her care.
We usually take care of children, and this isn’t just being submissive to them; it’s actually risky because it can stifle their natural, useful activities. We tend to think of children as if they’re puppets, and we wash and feed them like they’re dolls. We don’t realize that a child who doesn’t act, doesn’t learn how to act. He still needs to do[Pg 98] these things, and nature has provided him with the physical ability to engage in these various activities, as well as the mental capacity to learn how to do them. Our responsibility toward him is, in every situation, to assist him in achieving the important tasks that nature intended for him to accomplish by himself. A mother who feeds her child without making the slightest effort to teach him to hold the spoon for himself and to try bringing it to his mouth, and who doesn’t at least eat herself while encouraging the child to watch and learn from her, is not a good mother. She undermines her son’s fundamental human dignity—she treats him as if he were a doll when he is, in fact, a human being entrusted to her care by nature.
Who does not know that to teach a child to feed himself, to wash and dress himself, is a much more tedious and difficult work, calling for infinitely greater patience, than feeding, washing and dressing the child one's self? But the former is the work of an educator, the latter is the easy and inferior work of a servant. Not only is it easier for the mother, but it is very dangerous for the child, since it doses the way and puts obstacles in the path of the life which is developing.
Who doesn't know that teaching a child to feed, wash, and dress themselves is much more tedious and requires a lot more patience than just doing those things for them? But the former is the job of an educator, while the latter is the easy and lesser role of a servant. Not only is it easier for the mother, but it's also very harmful for the child, as it hinders their development and creates obstacles in their growing journey.
The ultimate consequences of such an attitude on the part of the parent may be very serious indeed. The grand gentleman who has too many servants not only grows constantly more and more dependent upon them, until he is, finally, actually their slave, but his muscles grow weak through inactivity and finally lose their natural capacity for action. The mind of one who does not work for that which he needs, but commands it from others, grows heavy and sluggish. If such a man should some day awaken to the fact of his inferior position and should wish to re[Pg 99]gain once more his own independence, he would find that he had no longer the force to do so. These dangers should be presented to the parents of the privileged social classes, if their children are to use independently and for right the special power which is theirs. Needless help is an actual hindrance to the development of natural forces.
The ultimate consequences of such an attitude from a parent can be very serious. The wealthy gentleman who has too many servants becomes increasingly dependent on them, eventually becoming their slave. His muscles weaken from inactivity and lose their natural ability to function. The mind of someone who doesn’t work for what they need, but instead just commands it from others, becomes dull and sluggish. If this man ever realizes his inferior position and wants to regain his independence, he will find he no longer has the strength to do so. These risks should be explained to the parents of privileged social classes if their children are to use the special advantages they have responsibly and independently. Unnecessary help actually hinders the development of natural abilities.
Oriental women wear trousers, it is true, and European women, petticoats; but the former, even more than the latter, are taught as a part of their education the art of not moving. Such an attitude toward woman leads to the fact that man works not only for himself, but for woman. And the woman wastes her natural strength and activity and languishes in slavery. She is not only maintained and served, she is, besides, diminished, belittled, in that individuality which is hers by right of her existence as a human being. As an individual member of society, she is a cypher. She is rendered deficient in all those powers and resources which tend to the preservation of life. Let me illustrate this:
Oriental women do wear trousers, and European women do wear petticoats; however, the former, even more so than the latter, are taught as part of their upbringing the skill of not moving. This viewpoint towards women results in men working not just for themselves, but for women as well. Meanwhile, women squander their natural strength and energy and suffer in servitude. They are not just supported and waited on; they are also diminished and undervalued in the individuality that belongs to them as human beings. As individual members of society, they become nothing but a number. They are deprived of all the abilities and resources that contribute to life’s preservation. Let me illustrate this:
A carriage containing a father, mother, and child, is going along a country road. An armed brigand stops the carriage with the well-known phrase, "Your money or your life." Placed in this situation, the three persons in the carriage act in very different ways. The man, who is a trained marksman, and who is armed with a revolver, promptly draws, and confronts the assassin. The boy, armed only with the freedom and lightness of his own legs, cries out and betakes himself to flight. The woman, who is not armed in any way whatever, neither artificially nor naturally (since her limbs, not trained for activity, are hampered by her skirts), gives a frightened gasp, and sinks down unconscious.
A carriage with a father, mother, and child is traveling down a country road. An armed robber stops the carriage with the familiar phrase, "Your money or your life." In this situation, the three people in the carriage react very differently. The man, a skilled marksman carrying a revolver, quickly draws his weapon and faces the attacker. The boy, with only his own legs for protection, screams and runs away. The woman, completely unarmed and hindered by her skirts, gasps in fear and collapses, fainting from the shock.
These three diverse reactions are in close relation to[Pg 100] the state of liberty and independence of each of the three individuals. The swooning woman is she whose cloak is carried for her by attentive cavaliers, who are quick to pick up any fallen object that she may be spared all exertion.
These three different reactions are closely linked to[Pg 100] the state of freedom and independence of each of the three individuals. The fainting woman is the one whose cloak is carried for her by eager gentlemen, who are quick to retrieve any item she drops so she can avoid any effort.
The peril of servilism and dependence lies not only in that "useless consuming of life," which leads to helplessness, but in the development of individual traits which indicate all too plainly a regrettable perversion and degeneration of the normal man. I refer to the domineering and tyrannical behaviour with examples of which we are all only too familiar. The domineering habit develops side by side with helplessness. It is the outward sign of the state of feeling of him who conquers through the work of others. Thus it often happens that the master is a tyrant toward his servant. It is the spirit of the task-master toward the slave.
The danger of servitude and reliance isn’t just in the "pointless wasting of life," which leads to powerlessness, but in the growth of individual traits that clearly show a sad distortion and decline of the normal person. I’m talking about the bossy and oppressive behavior we all recognize. This domineering tendency emerges alongside helplessness. It’s the outward sign of someone who succeeds through the efforts of others. Therefore, it often occurs that the boss is a tyrant to their employee. It’s the attitude of the taskmaster toward the slave.
Let us picture to ourselves a clever and proficient workman, capable, not only of producing much and perfect work, but of giving advice in his workshop, because of his ability to control and direct the general activity of the environment in which he works. The man who is thus master of his environment will be able to smile before the anger of others, showing that great mastery of himself which comes from consciousness of his ability to do things. We should not, however, be in the least surprised to know that in his home this capable workman scolded his wife if the soup was not to his taste, or not ready at the appointed time. In his home, he is no longer the capable workman; the skilled workman here is the wife, who serves him and prepares his food for him. He is a serene and pleasant man where he is powerful through being efficient, but is domineering where he is served. Per[Pg 101]haps if he should learn how to prepare his soup he might become a perfect man! The man who, through his own efforts, is able to perform all the actions necessary for his comfort and development in life, conquers himself, and in doing so multiplies his abilities and perfects himself as an individual.
Let’s imagine a skilled and capable worker who can not only produce a lot of quality work but also give advice in his workshop because he knows how to manage and guide the overall activity in his environment. The man who masters his surroundings can stay calm in the face of others' anger, displaying the self-control that comes from being aware of his abilities. However, it shouldn’t surprise us that at home, this competent worker can scold his wife if the soup isn’t to his liking or isn’t ready on time. At home, he is no longer the skilled worker; instead, the real skilled worker is his wife, who prepares his meals. He is calm and pleasant where he holds power through his efficiency, but he can be overbearing when he is the one being served. If he learned to make his own soup, he might become a truly well-rounded person! A man who can handle all the actions necessary for his comfort and personal growth through his own efforts conquers himself, and in doing so, enhances his abilities and perfects himself as an individual.
We must make of the future generation, powerful men, and by that we mean men who are independent and free.
We need to create a future generation of strong individuals, and by that, we mean individuals who are independent and free.
ABOLITION OF PRIZES AND OF EXTERNAL FORMS OF PUNISHMENT
Once we have accepted and established such principles, the abolition of prizes and external forms of punishment will follow naturally. Man, disciplined through liberty, begins to desire the true and only prize which will never belittle or disappoint him,—the birth of human power and liberty within that inner life of his from which his activities must spring.
Once we embrace and establish these principles, the removal of rewards and external punishments will happen naturally. A person, shaped by freedom, starts to crave the genuine and ultimate reward that will never diminish or let him down—the emergence of human strength and freedom within his inner self, from which all his actions must originate.
In my own experience I have often marvelled to see how true this is. During our first months in the "Children's Houses," the teachers had not yet learned to put into practice the pedagogical principles of liberty and discipline. One of them, especially, busied herself, when I was absent, in remedying my ideas by introducing a few of those methods to which she had been accustomed. So, one day when I came in unexpectedly, I found one of the most intelligent of the children wearing a large Greek cross of silver, hung from his neck by a fine piece of white ribbon, while another child was seated in an armchair which had been conspicuously placed in the middle of the room.
In my experience, I’ve often been amazed by how true this is. During our first months in the "Children's Houses," the teachers hadn’t yet learned to apply the educational principles of freedom and discipline. One teacher, in particular, took it upon herself, when I wasn’t around, to adjust my ideas by reintroducing some of the methods she was used to. So, one day when I walked in unexpectedly, I found one of the brightest kids wearing a large silver Greek cross around his neck, held up by a delicate piece of white ribbon, while another child was sitting in an armchair that had been prominently placed in the center of the room.
The first child had been rewarded, the second was being punished. The teacher, at least while I was present,[Pg 102] did not interfere in any way, and the situation remained as I had found it. I held my peace, and placed myself where I might observe quietly.
The first child had been rewarded, the second was being punished. The teacher, at least while I was there,[Pg 102] did not get involved at all, and the situation stayed as I had found it. I stayed silent and positioned myself where I could watch quietly.
The child with the cross was moving back and forth, carrying the objects with which he had been working, from his table to that of the teacher, and bringing others in their place. He was busy and happy. As he went back and forth he passed by the armchair of the child who was being punished. The silver cross slipped from his neck and fell to the floor, and the child in the armchair picked it up, dangled it on its white ribbon, looking at it from all sides, and then said to his companion: "Do you see what you have dropped?" The child turned and looked at the trinket with an air of indifference; his expression seemed to say; "Don't interrupt me," his voice replied "I don't care." "Don't you care, really?" said the punished one calmly. "Then I will put it on myself." And the other replied, "Oh, yes, put it on," in a tone that seemed to add, "and leave me in peace!"
The child with the cross was moving back and forth, carrying the things he had been using from his table to the teacher’s and bringing back more. He was busy and happy. As he passed by the chair of the child who was being punished, the silver cross slipped from his neck and fell to the floor. The child in the chair picked it up, dangled it from its white ribbon, examined it from all angles, and then said to his classmate, “Do you see what you dropped?” The child turned and glanced at the trinket with a look of indifference; his expression seemed to say, “Don’t interrupt me,” and his voice replied, “I don’t care.” “You really don’t care?” the punished child asked calmly. “Then I’ll just put it on myself.” The other replied, “Oh, sure, put it on,” in a tone that seemed to add, “and leave me alone!”
The boy in the armchair carefully arranged the ribbon so that the cross lay upon the front of his pink apron where he could admire its brightness and its pretty form, then he settled himself more comfortably in his little chair and rested his arms with evident pleasure upon the arms of the chair. The affair remained thus, and was quite just. The dangling cross could satisfy the child who was being punished, but not the active child, content and happy with his work.
The boy in the armchair carefully positioned the ribbon so that the cross rested on the front of his pink apron, where he could appreciate its brightness and lovely shape. Then he settled himself more comfortably in his little chair and rested his arms, clearly enjoying the moment, on the arms of the chair. It stayed like this, and it felt right. The dangling cross could please the child who was being punished, but not the lively child, who was content and happy with his activities.
One day I took with me on a visit to another of the "Children's Houses" a lady who praised the children highly and who, opening a box she had brought, showed them a number of shining medals, each tied with a bright red ribbon. "The mistress," she said "will put these on[Pg 103] the breasts of those children who are the cleverest and the best."
One day, I brought along a woman on a visit to another one of the "Children's Houses." She spoke very highly of the kids and, when she opened a box she had brought, showed them several shiny medals, each attached to a bright red ribbon. "The mistress," she said, "will give these to the children who are the smartest and the best."
As I was under no obligation to instruct this visitor in my methods, I kept silence, and the teacher took the box. At that moment, a most intelligent little boy of four, who was seated quietly at one of the little tables, wrinkled his forehead in an act of protest and cried out over and over again;—"Not to the boys, though, not to the boys!"
As I didn't have to explain my methods to this visitor, I remained silent, and the teacher took the box. At that moment, a very bright little boy, just four years old, who was sitting quietly at one of the small tables, frowned in protest and kept shouting, "Not to the boys, though, not to the boys!"
What a revelation! This little fellow already knew that he stood among the best and strongest of his class, although no one had ever revealed this fact to him, and he did not wish to be offended by this prize. Not knowing how to defend his dignity, he invoked the superior quality of his masculinity!
What a revelation! This little guy already knew that he was among the best and strongest of his class, even though no one had ever told him this, and he didn't want to be insulted by this recognition. Not knowing how to defend his pride, he called upon the greater quality of his masculinity!
As to punishments, we have many times come in contact with children who disturbed the others without paying any attention to our corrections. Such children were at once examined by the physician. When the case proved to be that of a normal child, we placed one of the little tables in a corner of the room, and in this way isolated the child; having him sit in a comfortable little armchair, so placed that he might see his companions at work, and giving him those games and toys to which he was most attracted. This isolation almost always succeeded in calming the child; from his position he could see the entire assembly of his companions, and the way in which they carried on their work was an object lesson much more efficacious than any words of the teacher could possibly have been. Little by little, he would come to see the advantages of being one of the company working so busily before his eyes, and he would really wish to go back and do as the others did. We have in this way led back again[Pg 104] to discipline all the children who at first seemed to rebel against it. The isolated child was always made the object of special care, almost as if he were ill. I myself, when I entered the room, went first of all directly to him, caressing him, as if he were a very little child. Then I turned my attention to the others, interesting myself in their work, asking questions about it as if they had been little men. I do not know what happened in the soul of these children whom we found it necessary to discipline, but certainly the conversion was always very complete and lasting. They showed great pride in learning how to work and how to conduct themselves, and always showed a very tender affection for the teacher and for me.
When it comes to punishments, we've often encountered children who disturbed others and ignored our corrections. We would have these children examined by a doctor, and if they were found to be normal, we would place a small table in a corner of the room to isolate them. They would sit in a comfy little armchair, positioned so they could see their classmates working, and we would give them the games and toys that interested them most. This isolation usually helped calm them down; from that spot, they could observe the whole group and see how engaged their peers were in their activities, which turned out to be a much more effective lesson than anything we could say. Gradually, they began to realize the benefits of being part of the busy group in front of them and genuinely wanted to join in and do what the others were doing. This approach successfully brought back to discipline all the children who initially resisted it. The isolated child received special care, almost as if they were unwell. When I entered the room, my first action was to go directly to that child, giving them affection as if they were very young. After that, I would turn my attention to the others, showing interest in their work and asking them questions as if they were little adults. I can't quite know what went on in the minds of those children who needed discipline, but the change was always very profound and lasting. They took great pride in learning how to work and behave appropriately, and they showed a deep affection for the teacher and for me.
THE BIOLOGICAL CONCEPT OF LIBERTY IN PEDAGOGY
From a biological point of view, the concept of liberty in the education of the child in his earliest years must be understood as demanding those conditions adapted to the most favourable development of his entire individuality. So, from the physiological side as well as from the mental side, this includes the free development of the brain. The educator must be as one inspired by a deep worship of life, and must, through this reverence, respect, while he observes with human interest, the development of the child life. Now, child life is not an abstraction; it is the life of individual children. There exists only one real biological manifestation: the living individual; and toward single individuals, one by one observed, education must direct itself. By education must be understood the active help given to the normal expansion of the life of the child. The child is a body which grows, and a soul which develops,—these two forms, physiological and psychic, have one eternal font, life itself. We must neither mar[Pg 105] nor stifle the mysterious powers which lie within these two forms of growth, but we must await from them the manifestations which we know will succeed one another.
From a biological perspective, the idea of liberty in a child's early education should be understood as requiring conditions that support the best development of their whole individuality. This means, both physiologically and mentally, allowing for the free development of the brain. The educator should be someone inspired by a deep worship of life, and through this reverence, respect and observe with genuine interest the development of the child's life. Child life is not an abstract concept; it is the life of individual children. There is only one true biological manifestation: the living individual; and education must focus on each individual, one by one. Education should be understood as the active help provided for the natural growth of the child's life. The child is both a growing body and a developing soul—these two aspects, physiological and psychological, share one eternal source: life itself. We must neither distort nor suppress the mysterious powers that exist within these two forms of growth, but we must await from them the developments that we know will occur in sequence.
Environment is undoubtedly a secondary factor in the phenomena of life; it can modify in that it can help or hinder, but it can never create. The modern theories of evolution, from Naegeli to De Vries, consider throughout the development of the two biological branches, animal and vegetable, this interior factor as the essential force in the transformation of the species and in the transformation of the individual. The origins of the development, both in the species and in the individual, lie within. The child does not grow because he is nourished, because he breathes, because he is placed in conditions of temperature to which he is adapted; he grows because the potential life within him develops, making itself visible; because the fruitful germ from which his life has come develops itself according to the biological destiny which was fixed for it by heredity. Adolescence does not come because the child laughs, or dances, or does gymnastic exercises, or is well nourished; but because he has arrived at that particular physiological state. Life makes itself manifest,—life creates, life gives:—and is in its turn held within certain limits and bound by certain laws which are insuperable. The fixed characteristics of the species do not change,—they can only vary.
Environment is definitely a secondary factor in the phenomena of life; it can influence, helping or hindering, but it can never create. Modern theories of evolution, from Naegeli to De Vries, recognize this internal factor as the essential force behind the transformation of species and the development of individuals. The origins of development, both in species and individuals, lie within. A child doesn't grow because he is nourished, because he breathes, because he is in an environment with suitable temperatures; he grows because the potential life within him develops and becomes visible; because the fruitful germ from which his life emerged develops according to the biological destiny set by heredity. Adolescence doesn't arrive because the child laughs, dances, does gymnastic exercises, or is well nourished; it comes because he has reached that specific physiological state. Life makes itself known—life creates, life gives—and is also constrained within certain limits and bound by certain laws that cannot be surpassed. The fixed characteristics of the species do not change; they can only vary.
This concept, so brilliantly set forth by De Vries in his Mutation Theory, illustrates also the limits of education. We can act on the variations which are in relation to the environment, and whose limits vary slightly in the species and in the individual, but we cannot act upon the mutations. The mutations are bound by some mysterious tie[Pg 106] to the very font of life itself, and their power rises superior to the modifying elements of the environment.
This idea, so skillfully presented by De Vries in his Mutation Theory, also highlights the limitations of education. We can influence the variations that relate to the environment, and whose limits change only slightly among species and individuals, but we can't affect the mutations. The mutations are somehow intricately connected[Pg 106] to the source of life itself, and their power outweighs the modifying factors of the environment.
A species, for example, cannot mutate or change into another species through any phenomenon of adaptation, as, on the other hand, a great human genius cannot be suffocated by any limitation, nor by any false form of education.
A species, for example, can't mutate or change into another species through any process of adaptation, just as a great human genius can't be stifled by any limitation or by any misleading type of education.
The environment acts more strongly upon the individual life the less fixed and strong this individual life may be. But environment can act in two opposite senses, favouring life, and stifling it. Many species of palm, for example, are splendid in the tropical regions, because the climatic conditions are favourable to their development, but many species of both animals and plants have become extinct in regions to which they were not able to adapt themselves.
The environment has a greater impact on individual lives the less stable and resilient those lives are. However, the environment can influence life in two contrasting ways: it can support life or suffocate it. For instance, many species of palm thrive in tropical regions because the climate is ideal for their growth, but many animal and plant species have gone extinct in areas where they couldn't adapt.
Life is a superb goddess, always advancing, overthrowing the obstacles which environment places in the way of her triumph. This is the basic or fundamental truth,—whether it be a question of species or of individuals, there persists always the forward march of those victorious ones in whom this mysterious life-force is strong and vital.
Life is an amazing goddess, always moving forward, overcoming the obstacles that the environment puts in her path. This is the essential truth—whether we’re talking about species or individuals, there’s always the relentless progress of those who have this powerful life-force within them.
It is evident that in the case of humanity, and especially in the case of our civil humanity, which we call society, the important and imperative question is that of the care, or perhaps we might say, the culture of human life.
It’s clear that when it comes to humanity, especially our civil humanity, which we refer to as society, the crucial and urgent question is about the care, or maybe we could say the culture of human life.
CHAPTER VI
How the Lessons Should Be Conducted
"Let all thy words be counted."
Dante, Inf., canto X.
"Make sure every word you say is meaningful."
Dante, Inf., canto X.
Given the fact that, through the régime of liberty the pupils can manifest their natural tendencies in the school, and that with this in view we have prepared the environment and the materials (the objects with which the child is to work), the teacher must not limit her action to observation, but must proceed to experiment.
Since the students can express their natural tendencies in a free environment at school, and we have designed the setting and materials (the things the child will use) with this in mind, the teacher shouldn't just stick to observing, but should also move on to experimenting.
In this method the lesson corresponds to an experiment. The more fully the teacher is acquainted with the methods of experimental psychology, the better will she understand how to give the lesson. Indeed, a special technique is necessary if the method is to be properly applied. The teacher must at least have attended the training classes in the "Children's Houses," in order to acquire a knowledge of the fundamental principles of the method and to understand their application. The most difficult portion of this training is that which refers to the method for discipline.
In this approach, the lesson is like an experiment. The more familiar the teacher is with the techniques of experimental psychology, the better she will be at delivering the lesson. In fact, a specific technique is needed for the method to be applied correctly. The teacher should have participated in the training sessions at the "Children's Houses" to gain an understanding of the basic principles of the method and know how to apply them. The most challenging part of this training relates to the method for discipline.
In the first days of the school the children do not learn the idea of collective order; this idea follows and comes as a result of those disciplinary exercises through which the child learns to discern between good and evil. This being the case, it is evident that, at the outset the teacher cannot give collective lessons. Such lessons, indeed, will always be very rare, since the children being free are not[Pg 108] obliged to remain in their places quiet and ready to listen to the teacher, or to watch what she is doing. The collective lessons, in fact, are of very secondary importance, and have been almost abolished by us.
In the early days of school, children don't grasp the concept of collective order; this understanding comes later as a result of the disciplinary activities that help them learn to distinguish between right and wrong. Given this situation, it's clear that, initially, the teacher cannot give collective lessons. In fact, such lessons will always be very rare, since the children, being free, are not[Pg 108] required to sit quietly in their places and listen to the teacher or observe what she is doing. Collective lessons, in fact, are of very little importance and have been nearly eliminated by us.
CHARACTERISTICS OF THE INDIVIDUAL LESSONS:—CONCISENESS, SIMPLICITY, OBJECTIVITY
The lessons, then, are individual, and brevity must be one of their chief characteristics. Dante gives excellent advice to teachers when he says, "Let thy words be counted." The more carefully we cut away useless words, the more perfect will become the lesson. And in preparing the lessons which she is to give, the teacher must pay special attention to this point, counting and weighing the value of the words which she is to speak.
The lessons are individual, and brevity should be one of their main traits. Dante offers great advice to teachers when he says, "Let your words be counted." The more we eliminate unnecessary words, the better the lesson will be. When preparing the lessons she will teach, the teacher needs to focus on this aspect, considering and evaluating the significance of the words she will use.
Another characteristic quality of the lesson in the "Children's Houses" is its simplicity. It must be stripped of all that is not absolute truth. That the teacher must not lose herself in vain words, is included in the first quality of conciseness; this second, then, is closely related to the first: that is, the carefully chosen words must be the most simple it is possible to find, and must refer to the truth.
Another key aspect of the lesson in the "Children's Houses" is its simplicity. It should be free from anything that isn't absolute truth. The teacher should avoid getting lost in unnecessary words, which ties into the first quality of being concise; this second quality is closely linked to the first: meaning that the carefully selected words must be as simple as possible and must relate to the truth.
The third quality of the lesson is its objectivity. The lesson must be presented in such a way that the personality of the teacher shall disappear. There shall remain in evidence only the object to which she wishes to call the attention of the child. This brief and simple lesson must be considered by the teacher as an explanation of the object and of the use which the child can make of it.
The third quality of the lesson is its objectivity. The lesson should be delivered in a way that the teacher's personality fades into the background. Only the object that she wants the child to focus on should stand out. This short and straightforward lesson should be viewed by the teacher as an explanation of the object and how the child can use it.
In the giving of such lessons the fundamental guide must be the method of observation, in which is included and understood the liberty of the child. So the teacher shall observe whether the child interests himself in the[Pg 109] object, how he is interested in it, for how long, etc., even noticing the expression of his face. And she must take great care not to offend the principles of liberty. For, if she provokes the child to make an unnatural effort, she will no longer know what is the spontaneous activity of the child. If, therefore, the lesson rigorously prepared in this brevity, simplicity and truth is not understood by the child, is not accepted by him as an explanation of the object,—the teacher must be warned of two things:—first, not to insist by repeating the lesson; and second, not to make the child feel that he has made a mistake, or that he is not understood, because in doing so she will cause him to make an effort to understand, and will thus alter the natural state which must be used by her in making her psychological observation. A few examples may serve to illustrate this point.
In giving these lessons, the main guide should be the method of observation, which includes and respects the child's freedom. The teacher should observe whether the child shows interest in the[Pg 109] object, how he engages with it, for how long, and so on, even paying attention to his facial expressions. She must be careful not to violate the principles of freedom. If she pushes the child to make an unnatural effort, she will lose track of the child’s spontaneous activity. Therefore, if the lesson, which is carefully prepared for brevity, simplicity, and truth, is not understood or accepted by the child as an explanation of the object, the teacher must be aware of two things: first, not to insist by repeating the lesson; and second, not to make the child feel that he has made a mistake or that he isn't understood, because doing so will lead him to struggle to understand, thus disrupting the natural state she needs for her psychological observation. A few examples might help illustrate this point.
Let us suppose, for example, that the teacher wishes to teach to a child the two colours, red and blue. She desires to attract the attention of the child to the object. She says, therefore, "Look at this." Then, in order to teach the colours, she says, showing him the red, "This is red," raising her voice a little and pronouncing the word "red" slowly and clearly; then showing him the other colour, "This is blue." In order to make sure that the child has understood, she says to him, "Give me the red,"—"Give me the blue." Let us suppose that the child in following this last direction makes a mistake. The teacher does not repeat and does not insist; she smiles, gives the child a friendly caress and takes away the colours.
Let's say the teacher wants to teach a child the two colors, red and blue. She wants to grab the child's attention. So she says, "Look at this." Then, to teach the colors, she shows him the red and says, "This is red," raising her voice slightly and pronouncing "red" slowly and clearly; then she shows him the other color and says, "This is blue." To check if the child understands, she asks, "Give me the red,"—"Give me the blue." Now, if the child makes a mistake when following this last direction, the teacher doesn’t repeat or insist; she smiles, gives the child a friendly pat, and takes away the colors.
Teachers ordinarily are greatly surprised at such simplicity. They often say, "But everybody knows how to do that!" Indeed, this again is a little like the egg of[Pg 110] Christopher Columbus, but the truth is that not everyone knows how to do this simple thing (to give a lesson with such simplicity). To measure one's own activity, to make it conform to these standards of clearness, brevity and truth, is practically a very difficult matter. Especially is this true of teachers prepared by the old-time methods, who have learned to labour to deluge the child with useless, and often, false words. For example, a teacher who had taught in the public schools often reverted to collectivity. Now in giving a collective lesson much importance is necessarily given to the simple thing which is to be taught, and it is necessary to oblige all the children to follow the teacher's explanation, when perhaps not all of them are disposed to give their attention to the particular lesson in hand. The teacher has perhaps commenced her lesson in this way:—"Children, see if you can guess what I have in my hand!" She knows that the children cannot guess, and she therefore attracts their attention by means of a falsehood. Then she probably says,—"Children, look out at the sky. Have you ever looked at it before? Have you never noticed it at night when it is all shining with stars? No! Look at my apron. Do you know what colour it is? Doesn't it seem to you the same colour as the sky? Very well then, look at this colour I have in my hand. It is the same colour as the sky and my apron. It is blue. Now look around you a little and see if you can find something in the room which is blue. And do you know what colour cherries are, and the colour of the burning coals in the fireplace, etc., etc."
Teachers are usually very surprised by such simplicity. They often say, "But everyone knows how to do that!" The truth is, this is a bit like Christopher Columbus's egg, but not everyone knows how to do this simple thing (giving a lesson with such simplicity). To measure one's own actions and align them with these standards of clarity, brevity, and truth is actually quite challenging. This is especially true for teachers trained by traditional methods, who have learned to overwhelm students with unnecessary and often incorrect information. For example, a teacher who has taught in public schools often defaults to a collective approach. In giving a collective lesson, a lot of emphasis is placed on the simple concept being taught, and it's necessary to ensure all the kids are following the teacher's explanation, even if not all of them are paying attention to the specific lesson. The teacher might start her lesson like this: "Children, see if you can guess what I have in my hand!" She knows the children can't guess, so she grabs their attention with a bit of deception. Then she probably says, "Children, look at the sky. Have you ever looked at it before? Have you never noticed it at night when it's shining with stars? No? Well, look at my apron. Do you know what color it is? Doesn't it look the same color as the sky? Great! Now, look at this color I have in my hand. It's the same color as the sky and my apron. It’s blue. Now look around a bit and see if you can find anything in the room that is blue. And do you know what color cherries are and what color the burning coals in the fireplace are, etc., etc."
Now in the mind of the child after he has made the useless effort of trying to guess there revolves a confused mass of ideas,—the sky, the apron, the cherries, etc. It will be difficult for him to extract from all this confusion the[Pg 111] idea which it was the scope of the lesson to make clear to him; namely, the recognition of the two colours, blue and red. Such a work of selection is almost impossible for the mind of a child who is not yet able to follow a long discourse.
Now in the child's mind, after making the pointless effort to guess, there’s a jumble of ideas—like the sky, the apron, the cherries, and so on. It will be tough for him to pull from this chaos the[Pg 111] concept that the lesson aimed to clarify for him: recognizing the two colors, blue and red. This task of selecting is nearly impossible for a child who isn’t yet able to follow a lengthy explanation.
I remember being present at an arithmetic lesson where the children were being taught that two and three make five. To this end, the teacher made use of a counting board having coloured beads strung on its thin wires. She arranged, for example, two beads on the top line, then on a lower line three, and at the bottom five beads. I do not remember very clearly the development of this lesson, but I do know that the teacher found it necessary to place beside the two beads on the upper wire a little cardboard dancer with a blue skirt, which she christened on the spot the name of one of the children in the class, saying, "This is Mariettina." And then beside the other three beads she placed a little dancer dressed in a different colour, which she called "Gigina." I do not know exactly how the teacher arrived at the demonstration of the same, but certainly she talked for a long time with these little dancers, moving them about, etc. If I remember the dancers more clearly than I do the arithmetic process, how must it have been with the children? If by such a method they were able to learn that two and three make five, they must have made a tremendous mental effort, and the teacher must have found it necessary to talk with the little dancers for a long time.
I remember being in an arithmetic lesson where the kids were taught that two and three equal five. To illustrate this, the teacher used a counting board with colored beads on thin wires. She placed two beads on the top row, three on a lower row, and five at the bottom. I don’t remember the details of the lesson very well, but I do remember that the teacher thought it was important to put a little cardboard dancer with a blue skirt next to the two beads on the upper wire, which she named after one of the kids in the class, saying, "This is Mariettina." Then, next to the three beads, she placed another little dancer in a different color and called her "Gigina." I’m not sure how the teacher connected this to the math, but she definitely spent a long time talking to these little dancers and moving them around. If I remember the dancers more vividly than the math process, how must it have been for the kids? If that was how they learned that two and three make five, they must have worked really hard mentally, and the teacher must have needed to engage with the little dancers for quite a while.
In another lesson a teacher wished to demonstrate to the children the difference between noise and sound. She began by telling a long story to the children. Then suddenly someone in league with her knocked noisily at the door. The teacher stopped and cried out—"What is it![Pg 112] What's happened! What is the matter! Children, do you know what this person at the door has done? I can no longer go on with my story, I cannot remember it any more. I will have to leave it unfinished. Do you know what has happened? Did you hear! Have you understood? That was a noise, that is a noise. Oh! I would much rather play with this little baby (taking up a mandolin which she had dressed up in a table cover). Yes, dear baby, I had rather play with you. Do you see this baby that I am holding in my arms?" Several children replied, "It isn't a baby." Others said, "It's a mandolin." The teacher went on—"No, no, it is a baby, really a baby. I love this little baby. Do you want me to show you that it is a baby? Keep very, very quiet then. It seems to me that the baby is crying. Or, perhaps it is talking, or perhaps it is going to say papa or mamma." Putting her hand under the cover, she touched the strings of the mandolin. "There! did you hear the baby cry! Did you hear it call out?" The children cried out—"It's a mandolin, you touched the strings, you made it play." The teacher then replied, "Be quiet, be quiet, children. Listen to what I am going to do." Then she uncovered the mandolin and began to play on it, saying, "This is sound."
In another lesson, a teacher wanted to show the kids the difference between noise and sound. She started by telling them a long story. Then suddenly, someone in on the act knocked loudly at the door. The teacher stopped and yelled, "What is it! What happened! What’s the matter! Kids, do you know what this person at the door has done? I can’t continue my story; I can’t remember it anymore. I’ll have to leave it unfinished. Do you know what happened? Did you hear? Do you understand? That was a noise, that is noise. Oh! I’d much rather play with this little baby," (grabbing a mandolin that she had covered with a tablecloth). "Yes, dear baby, I’d rather play with you. Do you see this baby I’m holding?" Some kids replied, "It’s not a baby." Others said, "It’s a mandolin." The teacher continued, "No, no, it’s a baby, really a baby. I love this little baby. Do you want me to show you that it’s a baby? Then keep very, very quiet. It seems to me that the baby is crying. Or maybe it’s talking, or maybe it’s about to say papa or mama." Putting her hand under the covering, she touched the strings of the mandolin. "There! Did you hear the baby cry? Did you hear it call out?" The kids shouted, "It’s a mandolin, you touched the strings, you made it play." The teacher then said, "Be quiet, be quiet, kids. Listen to what I’m going to do." Then she uncovered the mandolin and started to play it, saying, "This is sound."
To suppose that the child from such a lesson as this shall come to understand the difference between noise and sound is ridiculous. The child will probably get the impression that the teacher wished to play a joke, and that she is rather foolish, because she lost the thread of her discourse when she was interrupted by noise, and because she mistook a mandolin for a baby. Most certainly, it is the figure of the teacher herself that is impressed upon the[Pg 113] child's mind through such a lesson, and not the object for which the lesson was given.
To think that a child could learn the difference between noise and sound from a lesson like this is silly. The child will likely believe that the teacher was trying to make a joke and that she is somewhat foolish for losing her train of thought when interrupted by noise and for confusing a mandolin with a baby. It’s definitely the image of the teacher that sticks in the child's mind from this lesson, not the actual subject she was trying to teach.
To obtain a simple lesson from a teacher who has been prepared according to the ordinary methods, is a very difficult task. I remember that, after having explained the material fully and in detail, I called upon one of my teachers to teach, by means of the geometric insets, the difference between a square and a triangle. The task of the teacher was simply to fit a square and a triangle of wood into the empty spaces made to receive them. She should then have shown the child how to follow with his finger the contours of the wooden pieces and of the frames into which they fit, saying, meanwhile, "This is a square—this is a triangle." The teacher whom I had called upon began by having the child touch the square, saying, "This is a line,—another,—another,—and another. There are four lines: count them with your little finger and tell me how many there are. And the corners,—count the corners, feel them with your little finger. See, there are four corners too. Look at this piece well. It is a square." I corrected the teacher, telling her that in this way she was not teaching the child to recognise a form, but was giving him an idea of sides, of angles, of number, and that this was a very different thing from that which she was to teach in this lesson. "But," she said, trying to justify herself, "it is the same thing." It is not, however, the same thing. It is the geometric analysis and the mathematics of the thing. It would be possible to have an idea of the form of the quadrilateral without knowing how to count to four, and, therefore, without appreciating the number of sides and angles. The sides and the angles are abstractions which in themselves do not ex[Pg 114]ist; that which does exist is this piece of wood of a determined form. The elaborate explanations of the teacher not only confused the child's mind, but bridged over the distance that lies between the concrete and the abstract, between the form of an object and the mathematics of the form.
To get a simple lesson from a teacher trained in the usual ways is quite a challenge. I recall, after fully explaining the material in detail, I asked one of my teachers to demonstrate, using geometric shapes, the difference between a square and a triangle. The teacher's job was merely to fit a square and a triangle made of wood into the slots designed for them. She was then supposed to guide the child in tracing the edges of the wooden pieces and the frames they fit into, saying, “This is a square—this is a triangle.” The teacher I chose started by having the child touch the square, stating, “This is a line—another—another—and another. There are four lines: count them with your little finger and tell me how many there are. And the corners—count the corners, feel them with your little finger. Look, there are four corners too. Observe this piece closely. It is a square.” I corrected the teacher, explaining that by doing this, she was not teaching the child to recognize a shape but was instead giving them an understanding of sides, angles, and numbers, which is a completely different objective for this lesson. “But,” she protested, trying to defend herself, “it’s the same thing.” It is not, however, the same thing. It relates to the geometric analysis and the mathematics behind it. One could understand the shape of a quadrilateral without being able to count to four, and therefore without recognizing the number of sides and angles. The sides and angles are abstractions that do not actually exist; what does exist is this piece of wood with a specific shape. The teacher’s detailed explanations not only confused the child's understanding but also blurred the line between the concrete and the abstract, between an object's form and the mathematics related to that form.
Let as suppose, I said to the teacher, that an architect shows you a dome, the form of which interests you. He can follow one of two methods in showing you his work: he can call attention to the beauty of line, the harmony of the proportions, and may then take you inside the building and up into the cupola itself, in order that you may appreciate the relative proportion of the parts in such a way that your impression of the cupola as a whole shall be founded on general knowledge of its parts, or he can have you count the windows, the wide or narrow cornices, and can, in fact, make you a design showing the construction; he can illustrate for you the static laws and write out the algebraic formulæ necessary in the calculation of such laws. In the first place, you will be able to retain in your mind the form of the cupola; in the second, you will have understood nothing, and will come away with the impression that the architect fancied himself speaking to a fellow engineer, instead of to a traveller whose object was to become familiar with the beautiful things about him. Very much the same thing happens if we, instead of saying to the child, "This is a square," and by simply having him touch the contour establish materially the idea of the form, proceed rather to a geometrical analysis of the contour.
Let's imagine I said to the teacher that an architect shows you a dome that catches your interest. He can take one of two approaches in presenting his work: he can point out the beauty of the lines and the harmony of the proportions, and then take you inside the building and up into the dome itself so you can appreciate how the parts relate to each other. This way, your overall impression of the dome will be based on a solid understanding of its components. Alternatively, he can have you count the windows, look at the wide or narrow cornices, and even make you a design that illustrates the construction. He can explain the physical laws and write out the algebraic formulas needed to calculate those laws. In the first scenario, you'll have a clear mental image of the dome; in the second, you won't understand anything and will leave thinking the architect assumed he was talking to a fellow engineer instead of a traveler who wanted to appreciate the beautiful things around him. A similar situation occurs if we tell a child, "This is a square," and instead of simply letting him touch the shape to grasp the concept of the form, we dive into a geometrical analysis of the outline.
Indeed, we should feel that we are making the child precocious if we taught him the geometric forms in the plane, presenting at the same time the mathematical con[Pg 115]cept, but we do not believe that the child is too immature to appreciate the simple form; on the contrary, it is no effort for a child to look at a square window or table,—he sees all these forms about him in his daily life. To call his attention to a determined form is to clarify the impression he has already received of it, and to fix the idea of it. It is very much as if, while we are looking absent-mindedly at the shore of a lake, an artist should suddenly say to us—"How beautiful the curve is that the shore makes there under the shade of that cliff." At his words, the view which we have been observing almost unconsciously, is impressed upon our minds as if it had been illuminated by a sudden ray of sunshine, and we experience the joy of having crystallised an impression which we had before only imperfectly felt.
Indeed, we should feel that we're making the child advanced if we teach him about geometric shapes in the plane while also introducing the mathematical concept, but we don't think the child is too immature to appreciate the simple form; on the contrary, it's easy for a child to notice a square window or table—they see these shapes all around them in their daily lives. Drawing their attention to a specific shape helps clarify the impression they've already received and solidifies the idea of it. It's similar to when we're gazing absent-mindedly at a lake's shore, and an artist suddenly points out, "Look how beautiful the curve of the shore is under that cliff." With those words, the view we've been observing almost unconsciously gets etched into our minds as if illuminated by a sudden ray of sunshine, and we feel the joy of having crystallized an impression we previously only vaguely sensed.
And such is our duty toward the child: to give a ray of light and to go on our way.
And that's our responsibility to the child: to provide a bit of light and then continue on our path.
I may liken the effects of these first lessons to the impressions of one who walks quietly, happily, through a wood, alone, and thoughtful, letting his inner life unfold freely. Suddenly, the chime of a distant bell recalls him to himself, and in that awakening he feels more strongly than before the peace and beauty of which he has been but dimly conscious.
I can compare the effects of these first lessons to the feelings of someone who strolls peacefully and contentedly through a quiet forest, alone and reflective, allowing their inner thoughts to flow freely. Suddenly, the sound of a distant bell brings them back to reality, and in that moment of realization, they become more aware than ever of the tranquility and beauty they had only vaguely perceived before.
To stimulate life,—leaving it then free to develop, to unfold,—herein lies the first task of the educator. In such a delicate task, a great art must suggest the moment, and limit the intervention, in order that we shall arouse no perturbation, cause no deviation, but rather that we shall help the soul which is coming into the fulness of life, and which shall live from its own forces. This art must accompany the scientific method.[Pg 116]
To inspire life—allowing it to be free to grow and unfold—this is the primary goal of the educator. In such a sensitive task, a significant skill must indicate the right moment and limit interference, so we don't create any disturbances or lead it off course. Instead, we should support the soul that is coming into its full life, allowing it to thrive from its own strengths. This skill must work alongside the scientific method.[Pg 116]
When the teacher shall have touched, in this way, soul for soul, each one of her pupils, awakening and inspiring the life within them as if she were an invisible spirit, she will then possess each soul, and a sign, a single word from her shall suffice; for each one will feel her in a living and vital way, will recognise her and will listen to her. There will come a day when the directress herself shall be filled with wonder to see that all the children obey her with gentleness and affection, not only ready, but intent, at a sign from her. They will look toward her who has made them live, and will hope and desire to receive from her, new life.
When the teacher has connected with each of her students on a deep level, awakening and inspiring their inner potential as if she were an unseen spirit, she will then have a hold on each individual. A single word or gesture from her will be enough; each student will feel her presence in a vibrant and real way, will recognize her, and will pay attention to her. There will come a day when the director herself will be amazed to see that all the children respond to her with kindness and warmth, not just willing but eager, at her signal. They will look to her, the one who has given them life, hoping and wanting to receive new inspiration from her.
Experience has revealed all this, and it is something which forms the chief source of wonder for those who visit the "Children's Houses." Collective discipline is obtained as if by magic force. Fifty or sixty children from two and a half years to six years of age, all together, and at a single time know how to hold their peace so perfectly that the absolute silence seems that of a desert. And, if the teacher, speaking in a low voice, says to the children, "Rise, pass several times around the room on the tips of your toes and then come back to your place in silence" all together, as a single person, the children rise, and follow the order with the least possible noise. The teacher with that one voice has spoken to each one; and each child hopes from her intervention to receive some light and inner happiness. And feeling so, he goes forth intent and obedient like an anxious explorer, following the order in his own way.
Experience has shown all this, and it's a major source of amazement for those who visit the "Children's Houses." Collective discipline is achieved almost magically. Fifty or sixty kids, aged two and a half to six years, can all stay completely silent at once, creating a stillness that feels like a desert. When the teacher quietly tells the children, "Stand up, walk around the room on your toes a few times, and then return to your spot in silence," they all rise together and follow the instruction with minimal noise. The teacher, with that one voice, has communicated with each child; each one hopes to gain some insight and inner joy from her guidance. Feeling this way, each child moves forward eagerly and obediently, like a curious explorer, following the directions in their own manner.
In this matter of discipline we have again something of the egg of Christopher Columbus. A concert-master must[Pg 117] prepare his scholars one by one in order to draw from their collective work great and beautiful harmony; and each artist must perfect himself as an individual before he can be ready to follow the voiceless commands of the master's baton.
In this matter of discipline, we have again something like the egg of Christopher Columbus. A concert master must[Pg 117] prepare his students one by one to create great and beautiful harmony from their collective work; and each artist must refine themselves as an individual before they can be ready to follow the silent commands of the master's baton.
How different is the method which we follow in the public schools! It is as if a concert-master taught the same monotonous and sometimes discordant rhythm contemporaneously to the most diverse instruments and voices.
How different is the approach we use in public schools! It’s like a conductor teaching the same boring and sometimes out-of-tune rhythm at the same time to all sorts of instruments and voices.
Thus we find that the most disciplined members of society are the men who are best trained, who have most thoroughly perfected themselves, but this is the training or the perfection acquired through contact with other people. The perfection of the collectivity cannot be that material and brutal solidarity which comes from mechanical organisation alone.
Thus we see that the most disciplined members of society are the men who are best trained, who have most fully developed themselves, but this training or perfection is gained through interaction with other people. The perfection of the community cannot be the material and harsh solidarity that comes from organization alone.
In regard to infant psychology, we are more richly endowed with prejudices than with actual knowledge bearing upon the subject. We have, until the present day, wished to dominate the child through force, by the imposition of external laws, instead of making an interior conquest of the child, in order to direct him as a human soul. In this way, the children have lived beside us without being able to make us know them. But if we cut away the artificiality with which we have enwrapped them, and the violence through which we have foolishly thought to discipline them, they will reveal themselves to us in all the truth of child nature.
When it comes to understanding infant psychology, we have more biases than actual knowledge on the topic. Until now, we have tried to control children with force and strict rules, rather than truly understanding them and guiding them as individuals. Because of this, children have lived alongside us without us really knowing them. But if we remove the artificial ways we have wrapped them up and the harsh methods we foolishly believed would discipline them, they will show us their true nature.
Their gentleness is so absolute, so sweet, that we recognise in it the infancy of that humility which can remain oppressed by every form of yoke, by every injustice; and child love and knowledge is such that it surpasses every[Pg 118] other love and makes us think that in very truth humanity must carry within it that passion which pushes the minds of men to the successive conquest of thought, making easier from century to century the yokes of every form of slavery.
Their kindness is so complete, so gentle, that we see in it the beginnings of a humility that can withstand any burden, any injustice; and childlike love and knowledge are such that they surpass all[Pg 118] other kinds of love and lead us to believe that humanity must inherently possess that drive which compels people to continually conquer new ideas, making the chains of every form of oppression easier to bear from generation to generation.
CHAPTER VII
Life Skills Exercises
PROPOSED WINTER SCHEDULE OF HOURS IN THE "CHILDREN'S HOUSES"
Opening at Nine O'clock—Closing at Four O'clock
9-10. Entrance. Greeting. Inspection as to personal cleanliness. Exercises of practical life; helping one another to take off and put on the aprons. Going over the room to see that everything is dusted and in order. Language: Conversation period: Children give an account of the events of the day before. Religious exercises.
9-10. Entrance. Greeting. Check for personal cleanliness. Practical life activities; assisting each other in putting on and taking off the aprons. Walking around the room to ensure everything is dusted and organized. Language: Conversation time: Children share what happened the day before. Religious activities.
10-11. Intellectual exercises. Objective lessons interrupted by short rest periods. Nomenclature, Sense exercises.
10-11. Mental workouts. Structured lessons with short breaks in between. Vocabulary, Sensory exercises.
11-11:30. Simple gymnastics: Ordinary movements done gracefully, normal position of the body, walking, marching in line, salutations, movements for attention, placing of objects gracefully.
11-11:30. Basic gymnastics: Everyday movements performed gracefully, normal body posture, walking, marching in formation, greetings, signals for attention, placing objects elegantly.
11:30-12. Luncheon: Short prayer.
11:30-12. Lunch: Short prayer.
12-1. Free games.
Free games.
1-2. Directed games, if possible, in the open air. During this period the older children in turn go through with the exercises of practical life, cleaning the room, dusting, putting the material in order. General inspection for cleanliness: Conversation.
1-2. Supervised games, if feasible, outdoors. During this time, the older kids take turns with practical life exercises, like cleaning the room, dusting, and organizing the materials. Overall check for cleanliness: discussion.
2-3. Manual work. Clay modelling, design, etc.
2-3. Hands-on work. Clay modeling, design, etc.
3-4. Collective gymnastics and songs, if possible in the open air. Exercises to develop forethought: Visiting, and caring for, the plants and animals.
3-4. Group gymnastics and songs, preferably outdoors. Activities to promote consideration: Visiting and taking care of the plants and animals.
As soon as a school is established, the question of schedule arises. This must be considered from two points of view; the length of the school-day and the distribution of study and of the activities of life.
As soon as a school is set up, the issue of the schedule comes up. This needs to be looked at from two perspectives: the length of the school day and how study and daily activities are organized.
I shall begin by affirming that in the "Children's Houses," as in the school for deficients, the hours may be very long, occupying the entire day. For poor children, and especially for the "Children's Houses" annexed to workingmen's tenements, I should advise that the school-day should be from nine in the morning to five in the evening in winter, and from eight to six in summer. These long hours are necessary, if we are to follow a directed line of action which shall be helpful to the growth of the child. It goes without saying, that in the case of little children such a long school-day should be interrupted by at least an hour's rest in bed. And here lies the great practical difficulty. At present we must allow our little ones to sleep in their seats in a wretched position, but I foresee a time, not distant, when we shall be able to have a quiet, darkened room where the children may sleep in low-swung hammocks. I should like still better to have this nap taken in the open air.
I will start by saying that in the "Children's Houses," just like in the school for kids with special needs, the hours can be very long, taking up the entire day. For underprivileged children, especially those in the "Children's Houses" attached to working-class housing, I recommend that the school day run from nine in the morning to five in the evening in winter, and from eight to six in summer. These extended hours are essential if we want to provide a structured environment that supports the child’s development. It's obvious that for young children, such a long school day should include at least an hour’s rest in bed. Here lies a significant practical challenge. Right now, we have to let our little ones sleep in their seats in uncomfortable positions, but I can envision a time soon when we will have a calm, darkened room where children can nap in gently swinging hammocks. I would even prefer to have this rest outdoors.
In the "Children's Houses" in Rome we send the little ones to their own apartments for the nap, as this can be done without their having to go out into the streets.
In the "Children's Houses" in Rome, we send the kids to their own rooms for their nap since this can be arranged without them having to go outside.
It must be observed that these long hours include not only the nap, but the luncheon. This must be considered in such schools as the "Children's Houses," whose aim is [Pg 121]to help and to direct the growth of children in such an important period of development as that from three to six years of age.
It’s important to note that these long hours include not just the nap but also lunch. This should be taken into account in schools like the "Children's Houses," which aim to support and guide children during the crucial development period from ages three to six. [Pg 121]
The "Children's House" is a garden of child culture, and we most certainly do not keep the children for so many hours in school with the idea of making students of them!
The "Children's House" is a place for child culture, and we definitely don't keep the kids in school for so many hours just to turn them into students!
The first step which we must take in our method is to call to the pupil. We call now to his attention, now to his interior life, now to the life he leads with others. Making a comparison which must not be taken in a literal sense,—it is necessary to proceed as in experimental psychology or anthropology when one makes an experiment,—that is, after having prepared the instrument (to which in this case the environment may correspond) we prepare the subject. Considering the method as a whole, we must begin our work by preparing the child for the forms of social life, and we must attract his attention to these forms.
The first step we need to take in our approach is to call to the student. We now direct his attention, now to his inner life, now to the life he shares with others. Making a comparison that shouldn't be taken literally, it's necessary to proceed like in experimental psychology or anthropology when conducting an experiment—that is, after setting up the instruments (which in this case, corresponds to the environment), we prepare the subject. Looking at the method as a whole, we should start our work by getting the child ready for the different aspects of social life, and we need to draw his attention to these aspects.
In the schedule which we outlined when we established the first "Children's House," but which we have never followed entirely, (a sign that a schedule in which the material is distributed in arbitrary fashion is not adapted to the régime of liberty) we begin the day with a series of exercises of practical life, and I must confess that these exercises were the only part of the programme which proved thoroughly stationary. These exercises were such a success that they formed the beginning of the day in all of the "Children's Houses." First:
In the schedule we laid out when we set up the first "Children's House," which we’ve never completely followed (a sign that a schedule where the material is organized randomly isn't suitable for a system based on freedom), we start the day with a series of practical life exercises, and I must admit that these exercises were the only part of the program that remained consistent. These exercises were so successful that they became the starting point for the day in all the "Children's Houses." First:
Cleanliness.
Hygiene.
Order.
Order.
Poise.
Composure.
Conversation.
Chat.
As soon as the children arrive at school we make an inspection for cleanliness. If possible, this should be carried on in the presence of the mothers, but their attention should not be called to it directly. We examine the hands, the nails, the neck, the ears, the face, the teeth; and care is given to the tidiness of the hair. If any of the garments are torn or soiled or ripped, if the buttons are lacking, or if the shoes are not clean, we call the attention of the child to this. In this way, the children become accustomed to observing themselves and take an interest in their own appearance.
As soon as the kids get to school, we do a cleanliness check. If we can, we’d like the moms to be there, but we won’t draw their attention to what we're doing. We look at the kids’ hands, nails, necks, ears, faces, and teeth, and we also pay attention to how tidy their hair is. If any of their clothes are torn, dirty, or ripped, if they’re missing buttons, or if their shoes aren't clean, we point it out to the child. This way, the kids get used to checking themselves and start caring about how they look.
The children in our "Children's Houses" are given a bath in turn, but this, of course, can not be done daily. In the class, however, the teacher, by using a little washstand with small pitchers and basins, teaches the children to take a partial bath: for example, they learn how to wash their hands and clean their nails. Indeed, sometimes we teach them how to take a foot-bath. They are shown especially how to wash their ears and eyes with great care. They are taught to brush their teeth and rinse their mouths carefully. In all of this, we call their attention to the different parts of the body which they are washing, and to the different means which we use in order to cleanse them: clear water for the eyes, soap and water for the hands, the brush for the teeth, etc. We teach the big ones to help the little ones, and, so, encourage the younger children to learn quickly to take care of themselves.
The kids in our "Children's Houses" take turns getting a bath, but of course, that can't happen every day. In class, though, the teacher uses a small washstand with little pitchers and basins to teach the children how to take a partial bath: for instance, they learn to wash their hands and clean their nails. Sometimes, we even show them how to do a foot bath. They're especially taught to wash their ears and eyes with care. They learn to brush their teeth and rinse their mouths thoroughly. Throughout this process, we focus their attention on the different parts of the body they're washing and the various methods we use to clean them: clear water for the eyes, soap and water for the hands, a brush for the teeth, and so on. We teach the older kids to help the younger ones, encouraging the little ones to quickly learn to take care of themselves.
After this care of their persons, we put on the little aprons. The children are able to put these on themselves, or, with the help of each other. Then we begin our visit about the schoolroom. We notice if all of the various materials are in order and if they are clean. The[Pg 123] teacher shows the children how to clean out the little corners where dust has accumulated, and shows them how to use the various objects necessary in cleaning a room,—dust-cloths, dust-brushes, little brooms, etc. All of this, when the children are allowed to do it by themselves, is very quickly accomplished. Then the children go each to his own place. The teacher explains to them that the normal position is for each child to be seated in his own place, in silence, with his feet together on the floor, his hands resting on the table, and his head erect. In this way she teaches them poise and equilibrium. Then she has them rise on their feet in order to sing the hymn, teaching them that in rising and sitting down it is not necessary to be noisy. In this way the children learn to move about the furniture with poise and with care. After this we have a series of exercises in which the children learn to move gracefully, to go and come, to salute each other, to lift objects carefully, to receive various objects from each other politely. The teacher calls attention with little exclamations to a child who is clean, a room which is well ordered, a class seated quietly, a graceful movement, etc.
After taking care of themselves, we put on the little aprons. The children can put these on by themselves or help each other. Then we start our round of the classroom. We check if all the materials are organized and clean. The[Pg 123] teacher shows the children how to clean the little corners where dust has built up and teaches them how to use different cleaning tools—dust cloths, dust brushes, small brooms, etc. When the children are allowed to do it by themselves, it gets done quickly. Then the children return to their own spots. The teacher explains that the proper position is for each child to sit quietly in their own seat, with their feet together on the floor, hands resting on the table, and head up. This way, she teaches them balance and composure. Then she has them stand to sing the hymn, showing them that it doesn’t have to be noisy when standing up or sitting down. This helps the kids learn to move around the furniture with grace and care. After this, we have a series of exercises where the children learn to move elegantly, come and go, greet one another, lift objects carefully, and politely hand things to each other. The teacher points out with little exclamations when a child is clean, a room is tidy, a class is seated quietly, or a movement is graceful, etc.
From such a starting point we proceed to the free teaching. That is, the teacher will no longer make comments to the children, directing them how to move from their seats, etc., she will limit herself to correcting the disordered movements.
From this starting point, we move on to free teaching. This means the teacher won't give comments to the children, telling them how to get out of their seats, etc.; she will only focus on correcting any disorganized movements.
After the directress has talked in this way about the attitude of the children and the arrangement of the room, she invites the children to talk with her. She questions them concerning what they have done the day before, regulating her inquiries in such a way that the children need not report the intimate happenings of the family but their[Pg 124] individual behaviour, their games, attitude to parents, etc. She will ask if they have been able to go up the stairs without getting them muddy, if they have spoken politely to their friends who passed, if they have helped their mothers, if they have shown in their family what they have learned at school, if they have played in the street, etc. The conversations are longer on Monday after the vacation, and on that day the children are invited to tell what they have done with the family; if they have gone away from home, whether they have eaten things not usual for children to eat, and if this is the case we urge them not to eat these things and try to teach them that they are bad for them. Such conversations as these encourage the unfolding or development of language and are of great educational value, since the directress can prevent the children from recounting happenings in the house or in the neighbourhood, and can select, instead, topics which are adapted to pleasant conversation, and in this way can teach the children those things which it is desirable to talk about; that is, things with which we occupy ourselves in life, public events, or things which have happened in the different houses, perhaps, to the children themselves—as baptism, birthday parties, any of which may serve for occasional conversation. Things of this sort will encourage children to describe, themselves. After this morning talk we pass to the various lessons.
After the teacher has discussed the behavior of the children and the setup of the room, she invites them to talk with her. She asks them about what they did the day before, framing her questions so that the children don't have to share private family matters, but rather their individual behavior, games, attitudes toward their parents, and so on. She might ask if they managed to go upstairs without getting muddy, if they spoke politely to friends they saw, if they helped their mothers, if they demonstrated what they learned at school to their family, if they played outside, etc. The conversations last longer on Monday after the break, and on that day the kids are encouraged to share what they did with their families; if they went away from home, whether they tried any unusual foods for kids, and if so, we encourage them not to eat those things and emphasize that they're unhealthy. These types of conversations help develop language skills and are very valuable for education, as the teacher can steer the children away from discussing happenings in their homes or neighborhoods and instead choose topics that spark pleasant discussions. This way, she teaches the children what’s good to talk about—things we engage with in life, public events, or occurrences in various homes, maybe something they experienced themselves, like baptisms or birthday parties, which can lead to interesting conversations. Topics like these motivate the children to describe their own experiences. After this morning talk, we move on to the various lessons.
CHAPTER VIII
Reflection—The Child's Diet
In connection with the exercises of practical life, it may be fitting to consider the matter of refection.
In relation to practical life exercises, it might be appropriate to think about the topic of reflection.
In order to protect the child's development, especially in neighbourhoods where standards of child hygiene are not yet prevalent in the home, it would be well if a large part at least of the child's diet could be entrusted to the school. It is well known to-day that the diet must be adapted to the physical nature of the child; and as the medicine of children is not the medicine of adults in reduced doses, so the diet must not be that of the adult in lesser quantitative proportions. For this reason I should prefer that even in the "Children's Houses" which are situated in tenements and from which little ones, being at home, can go up to eat with the family, school refection should be instituted. Moreover, even in the case of rich children, school refection would always be advisable until a scientific course in cooking shall have introduced into the wealthier families the habit of specialising in children's food.
To support a child's growth, especially in neighborhoods where good hygiene practices aren't yet common at home, it would be beneficial for a significant portion of the child's meals to be provided by the school. It's well understood today that a child's diet needs to suit their physical needs; just as children's medicine isn't just a smaller dose of adult medicine, their diet shouldn't simply be a smaller version of an adult's diet. For this reason, I'd prefer that even in the "Children's Houses" located in apartment buildings, where kids can go home to eat with their families, meals provided at school should be established. Additionally, even for wealthy children, providing meals at school is always a good idea until a proper cooking course teaches wealthier families how to focus on children's nutrition.
The diet of little children must be rich in fats and sugar: the first for reserve matter and the second for plastic tissue. In fact, sugar is a stimulant to tissues in the process of formation.
The diet of young children should be high in fats and sugar: fats for energy reserves and sugar for building tissue. In fact, sugar acts as a stimulant for tissues that are still developing.
As for the form of preparation, it is well that the alimentary substances should always be minced, because[Pg 126] the child has not yet the capacity for completely masticating the food, and his stomach is still incapable of fulfilling the function of mincing food matter.
When it comes to the form of preparation, it's important that the food is always minced, because[Pg 126] the child isn't able to chew the food thoroughly yet, and their stomach can't break down food properly.
Consequently, soups, purées, and meat balls, should constitute the ordinary form of dish for the child's table.
Consequently, soups, purees, and meatballs should be the standard types of dishes for the child's table.
The nitrogenous diet for a child from two or three years of age ought to be constituted chiefly of milk and eggs, but after the second year broths are also to be recommended. After three years and a half meat can be given; or, in the case of poor children, vegetables. Fruits are also to be recommended for children.
The nitrogen-rich diet for a child aged two or three should mainly consist of milk and eggs, but after the second year, broths should also be included. After three and a half years, meat can be introduced; for underprivileged children, vegetables are a good option. Fruits are also recommended for children.
Perhaps a detailed summary on child diet may be useful, especially for mothers.
Perhaps a detailed summary on children's diets would be helpful, especially for moms.
Method of Preparing Broth for Little Children. (Age three to six; after that the child may use the common broth of the family.) The quantity of meat should correspond to 1 gramme for every cubic centimetre of broth and should be put in cold water. No aromatic herbs should be used, the only wholesome condiment being salt. The meat should be left to boil for two hours. Instead of removing the grease from the broth it is well to add butter to it, or, in the case of the poor, a spoonful of olive oil; but substitutes for butter, such as margerine, etc., should never be used. The broth must be prepared fresh; it would be well, therefore, to put the meat on the fire two hours before the meal, because as soon as broth is cool there begins to take place a separation of chemical substances, which are injurious to the child and may easily cause diarrhea.
How to Prepare Broth for Young Children. (Ages three to six; after that, the child can have the family broth.) The amount of meat should be 1 gram for every cubic centimeter of broth and should be added to cold water. No herbs should be used; the only seasoning allowed is salt. The meat should be boiled for two hours. Instead of removing the fat from the broth, it's better to add butter, or for those with fewer resources, a spoonful of olive oil; however, do not use substitutes for butter, like margarine, etc. The broth must be made fresh; it's best to start cooking the meat two hours before the meal, because once the broth cools, harmful substances start to separate, which can be detrimental to the child and may easily cause diarrhea.
Soups. A very simple soup, and one to be highly recommended for children, is bread boiled in salt water or in broth and abundantly seasoned with oil. This is the classic soup of poor children and an excellent means of[Pg 127] nutrition. Very like this, is the soup which consists of little cubes of bread toasted in butter and allowed to soak in the broth which is itself fat with butter. Soups of grated bread also belong in this class.
Soups. A really easy soup, which is great for kids, is bread boiled in salt water or broth and generously seasoned with oil. This is the traditional soup for low-income families and a fantastic source of[Pg 127] nutrition. Similar to this is the soup made with small cubes of bread toasted in butter and soaked in broth that’s rich with butter. Soups made with grated bread also fall into this category.
Pastine,[10] especially the glutinous pastine, which are of the same nature, are undoubtedly superior to the others for digestibility, but are accessible only to the privileged social classes.
Pastine,[10] especially the sticky pastine, which are similar in nature, are definitely better than the others for digestion, but are only available to the privileged social classes.
The poor should know how much more wholesome is a broth made from remnants of stale bread, than soups of coarse spaghetti—often dry and seasoned with meat juice. Such soups are most indigestible for little children.
The less fortunate should understand how much better a broth made from leftover stale bread is compared to soups made from cheap spaghetti—often dry and flavored with meat juices. These soups are really hard to digest for young children.
Excellent soups are those consisting of purées of vegetables (beans, peas, lentils). To-day one may find in the shops dried vegetables especially adapted for this sort of soups. Boiled in salt water, the vegetables are peeled, put to cool and passed through a sieve (or simply compressed, if they are already peeled). Butter is then added, and the paste is stirred slowly into the boiling water, care being taken that it dissolves and leaves no lumps.
Great soups are those made from pureed vegetables (like beans, peas, and lentils). Nowadays, you can find dried vegetables in stores that are perfect for this kind of soup. Boil the vegetables in salted water, peel them, let them cool, and then pass them through a sieve (or just mash them if they’re already peeled). Next, add butter, and slowly stir the paste into the boiling water, making sure it dissolves without leaving any lumps.
Vegetable soups can also be seasoned with pork. Instead of broth, sugared milk may be the base of vegetable purées.
Vegetable soups can also be flavored with pork. Instead of broth, sweetened milk can serve as the base for vegetable purées.
I strongly recommend for children a soup of rice boiled in broth or milk; also cornmeal broth, provided it be seasoned with abundant butter, but not with cheese. (The porridge form—polenta, really cornmeal mush, is to be highly recommended on account of the long cooking.)
I highly recommend a soup made with rice boiled in broth or milk for kids; also, cornmeal broth is a good option as long as it's seasoned with plenty of butter, but skip the cheese. (The porridge version—polenta, which is basically cornmeal mush—is highly recommended because it takes a long time to cook.)
The poorer classes who have no meat-broth can feed [Pg 128]their children equally well with soups of boiled bread and porridge seasoned with oil.
The poorer classes who don’t have meat broth can feed [Pg 128]their children just as well with soups made from boiled bread and porridge flavored with oil.
Milk and Eggs. These are foods which not only contain nitrogenous substances in an eminently digestible form, but they have the so-called enzymes which facilitate assimilation into the tissues, and, hence, in a particular way, favour the growth of the child. And they answer so much the better this last most important condition if they are fresh and intact, keeping in themselves, one may say, the life of the animals which produced them.
Milk and Eggs. These foods contain easily digestible proteins and have the so-called enzymes that help with absorption into the tissues, which, in turn, supports a child's growth. They are particularly beneficial for this crucial condition when they are fresh and intact, essentially holding the vitality of the animals that produced them.
Milk fresh from the cow, and the egg while it is still warm, are assimilable to the highest degree. Cooking, on the other hand, makes the milk and eggs lose their special conditions of assimilability and reduces the nutritive power in them to the simple power of any nitrogenous substance.
Milk straight from the cow, and the egg while it's still warm, are extremely easy to digest. Cooking, on the other hand, causes the milk and eggs to lose their unique digestibility and decreases their nutritional value to the level of any other nitrogen-rich substance.
To-day, consequently, there are being founded special dairies for children where the milk produced is sterile; the rigorous cleanliness of the surroundings in which the milk-producing animals live, the sterilisation of the udder before milking, of the hands of the milker, and of the vessels which are to contain the milk, the hermetic sealing of these last, and the refrigerating bath immediately after the milking, if the milk is to be carried far,—otherwise it is well to drink it warm, procure a milk free from bacteria which, therefore, has no need of being sterilised by boiling, and which preserves intact its natural nutritive powers.
Today, there are special dairies for children being established where the milk produced is sterile. The strict cleanliness of the environment where the milk-producing animals live, the sterilization of the udder before milking, the hands of the milker, and the containers for the milk, the airtight sealing of these containers, and the refrigeration right after milking—if the milk needs to be transported a long distance—are all essential. If not, it’s better to drink it warm, ensuring it’s bacteria-free, so it doesn’t need to be sterilized by boiling and retains its natural nutrients.
As much may be said of eggs; the best way of feeding them to a child is to take them still warm from the hen and have him eat them just as they are, and then digest them in the open air. But where this is not prac[Pg 129]ticable, eggs must be chosen fresh, and barely heated in water, that is to say, prepared à la coque.
You can say the same about eggs; the best way to serve them to a child is to take them fresh from the hen and let him eat them as they are, then have him digest them outside. But where this isn't possible, eggs should be selected fresh and lightly heated in water, which means cooked à la coque.
All other forms of preparation, milk-soup, omelettes, and so forth, do, to be sure, make of milk and eggs an excellent food, more to be recommended than others; but they take away the specific properties of assimilation which characterise them.
All other ways of preparing food, like milk soup, omelets, and so on, do indeed make milk and eggs a great meal, even more so than others; however, they lose the unique properties of digestion that define them.
Meat. All meats are not adapted to children, and even their preparation must differ according to the age of the child. Thus, for example, children from three to five years of age ought to eat only more or less finely-ground meats, whereas at the age of five children are capable of grinding meat completely by mastication; at that time it is well to teach the child accurately how to masticate because he has a tendency to swallow food quickly, which may produce indigestion and diarrhea.
Meat. Not all meats are suitable for children, and even how they're prepared should vary based on the child's age. For instance, kids aged three to five should only eat meats that are more or less finely ground, while at age five, children can chew meat thoroughly on their own. At that point, it's important to teach the child how to chew properly because they tend to swallow their food too quickly, which can lead to indigestion and diarrhea.
This is another reason why school-refection in the "Children's Houses" would be a very serviceable as well as convenient institution, as the whole diet of the child could then be rationally cared for in connection with the educative system of the Houses.
This is another reason why school reflection in the "Children's Houses" would be a practical and convenient institution, as the child's entire diet could then be rationally managed in conjunction with the educational system of the Houses.
The meats most adapted to children are so-called white meats, that is, in the first place, chicken, then veal; also the light flesh of fish, (sole, pike, cod).
The meats that are best suited for kids are what we call white meats, which includes chicken first and then veal; also the lighter types of fish, like sole, pike, and cod.
After the age of four, filet of beef may also be introduced into the diet, but never heavy and fat meats like that of the pig, the capon, the eel, the tunny, etc., which are to be absolutely excluded along with mollusks and crustaceans, (oysters, lobsters), from the child's diet.
After the age of four, you can also start adding filet of beef to the diet, but you should never include heavy and fatty meats like pork, capon, eel, tuna, etc., which must be absolutely excluded along with shellfish and crustaceans (oysters, lobsters) from the child's diet.
Croquettes made of finely ground meat, grated bread, milk, and beaten eggs, and fried in butter, are the most wholesome preparation. Another excellent preparation[Pg 130] is to mould into balls the grated meat, with sweet fruit-preserve, and eggs beaten up with sugar.
Croquettes made from finely ground meat, breadcrumbs, milk, and beaten eggs, and fried in butter, are the healthiest option. Another great preparation is to shape the grated meat into balls mixed with sweet fruit preserves and eggs whisked with sugar.
At the age of five, the child may be given breast of roast fowl, and occasionally veal cutlet or filet of beef.
At the age of five, the child can be served roast chicken, and sometimes veal cutlet or beef filet.
Boiled meat must never be given to the child, because meat is deprived of many stimulating and even nutritive properties by boiling and rendered less digestible.
Boiled meat should never be given to the child, because boiling takes away many stimulating and even nutritious qualities from the meat and makes it harder to digest.
Nerve Feeding Substances. Besides meat a child who has reached the age of four may be given fried brains and sweetbreads, to be combined, for example, with chicken croquettes.
Nerve Feeding Substances. In addition to meat, a child who is four years old can be given fried brains and sweetbreads, which can be paired, for instance, with chicken croquettes.
Milk Foods. All cheeses are to be excluded from the child's diet.
Milk Foods. All cheeses should be removed from the child's diet.
The only milk product suitable to children from three to six years of age is fresh butter.
The only milk product that's suitable for kids aged three to six is fresh butter.
Custard. Custard is also to be recommended provided it be freshly prepared, that is immediately before being eaten, and with very fresh milk and eggs: if such conditions cannot be rigorously fulfilled, it is preferable to do without custard, which is not a necessity.
Custard. Custard is also recommended as long as it is freshly prepared, meaning right before it’s eaten, and made with very fresh milk and eggs: if these conditions can't be strictly met, it's better to skip the custard, as it's not essential.
Bread. From what we have said about soups, it may be inferred that bread is an excellent food for the child. It should be well selected; the crumb is not very digestible, but it can be utilised, when it is dry, to make a bread broth; but if one is to give the child simply a piece of bread to eat, it is well to offer him the crust, the end of the loaf. Bread sticks are excellent for those who can afford them.
Bread. Based on what we've discussed about soups, it's clear that bread is an excellent food for children. It should be chosen carefully; the crumb isn't very easy to digest, but when it's dry, it can be used to make a bread broth. However, if you're just giving a child a piece of bread, it's better to offer them the crust, the end of the loaf. Breadsticks are great for those who can afford them.
Bread contains many nitrogenous substances and is very rich in starches, but is lacking in fats; and as the fundamental substances of diet are, as is well known, three in number, namely, proteids, (nitrogenous substances), starches, and fats, bread is not a complete food;[Pg 131] it is necessary therefore to offer the child buttered bread, which constitutes a complete food and may be considered as a sufficient and complete breakfast.
Bread has a lot of protein-rich substances and is high in starch, but it doesn’t contain much fat. Since the main components of a diet are well known to be three: proteins (which are nitrogen-based), starches, and fats, bread isn’t a complete food;[Pg 131] so it’s important to give the child buttered bread, which makes a complete meal and is a suitable and balanced breakfast.
Green Vegetables. Children must never eat raw vegetables, such as salads and greens, but only cooked ones; indeed they are not to be highly recommended either cooked or raw, with the exception of spinach which may enter with moderation into the diet of children.
Green Vegetables. Kids should never eat raw vegetables, like salads and greens, only cooked ones; in fact, they're generally not highly recommended either cooked or raw, except for spinach, which can be included in children's diets in moderation.
Potatoes prepared in a purée with much butter form, however, an excellent complement of nutrition for children.
Potatoes made into a buttery purée are, however, an excellent source of nutrition for kids.
Fruits. Among fruits there are excellent foods for children. They too, like milk and eggs, if freshly gathered, retain a living quality which aids assimilation.
Fruits. Fruits are great foods for kids. Just like milk and eggs, if they are freshly picked, they maintain a living quality that helps with digestion.
As this condition, however, is not easily attainable in cities, it is necessary to consider also the diet of fruits which are not perfectly fresh and which, therefore, should be prepared and cooked in various ways. All fruits are not to be advised for children; the chief properties to be considered are the degree of ripeness, the tenderness and sweetness of the pulp, and its acidity. Peaches, apricots, grapes, currants, oranges, and mandarins, in their natural state, can be given to little children with great advantage. Other fruits, such as pears, apples, plums, should be cooked or prepared in syrup.
Since this condition is hard to achieve in cities, we also need to think about fruits that aren't perfectly fresh and should be prepared and cooked in different ways. Not all fruits are suitable for children; the main factors to consider are the level of ripeness, the tenderness and sweetness of the flesh, and its acidity. Peaches, apricots, grapes, currants, oranges, and mandarins, when fresh, can be very beneficial for young children. Other fruits, like pears, apples, and plums, should be cooked or made into a syrup.
Figs, pineapples, dates, melons, cherries, walnuts, almonds, hazelnuts, and chestnuts, are excluded for various reasons from the diet of early childhood.
Figs, pineapples, dates, melons, cherries, walnuts, almonds, hazelnuts, and chestnuts are left out of the diets for young children for different reasons.
The preparation of fruit must consist in removing from it all indigestible parts, such as the peel, and also such parts as the child inadvertently may absorb to his detriment, as, for example, the seed.
The preparation of fruit must involve removing all indigestible parts, like the peel, as well as any parts that a child might accidentally swallow to their harm, such as the seeds.
Children of four or five should be taught early how[Pg 132] carefully the seeds must be thrown away and how the fruits are peeled. Afterwards, the child so educated may be promoted to the honour of receiving a fine fruit intact, and he will know how to eat it properly.
Children around four or five should be taught early how[Pg 132] to carefully discard seeds and peel fruits. Later on, a child with this knowledge can be given the privilege of receiving a nice fruit whole, and they will know how to eat it correctly.
The culinary preparation of fruits consists essentially in two processes: cooking, and seasoning with sugar.
The cooking of fruits mainly involves two steps: heating them and adding sugar for flavor.
Besides simple cooking, fruits may be prepared as marmalades and jellies, which are excellent but are naturally within the reach of the wealthier classes only. While jellies and marmalades may be allowed, candied fruits,—on the other hand,—marrons glacés, and the like, are absolutely excluded from the child's diet.
Besides basic cooking, fruits can be made into marmalades and jellies, which are great but typically accessible only to the wealthy. While jellies and marmalades are acceptable, candied fruits—like marrons glacés and similar treats—are completely off-limits for children.
Seasonings. An important phase of the hygiene of child diet concerns seasonings—with a view to their rigorous limitation. As I have already indicated, sugar and some fat substances along with kitchen salt (sodium chloride) should constitute the principal part of the seasonings.
Seasonings. A key aspect of keeping a child's diet healthy is about seasonings—emphasizing their strict limitation. As I've mentioned before, sugar, certain fats, and kitchen salt (sodium chloride) should make up the main part of the seasonings.
To these may be added organic acids (acetic acid, citric acid) that is, vinegar and lemon juice; this latter can be advantageously used on fish, on croquettes, on spinach, etc.
To these, you can add organic acids (like acetic acid and citric acid), which means vinegar and lemon juice; the latter can be effectively used on fish, croquettes, spinach, and more.
Other condiments suitable to little children are some aromatic vegetables like garlic and rue which disinfect the intestines and the lungs, and also have a direct anthelminthic action.
Other condiments suitable for young children include aromatic vegetables like garlic and rue that help disinfect the intestines and lungs and also have a direct action against worms.
Spices, on the other hand, such as pepper, nutmeg, cinnamon, clove, and especially mustard, are to be absolutely abolished.
Spices like pepper, nutmeg, cinnamon, clove, and especially mustard should be completely eliminated.
Drinks. The growing organism of the child is very rich in water, and, hence, needs a constant supply of moisture. Among the beverages, the best, and indeed the only one, to be unreservedly advised is pure fresh spring[Pg 133] water. To rich children might be allowed the so-called table waters which are slightly alkaline, such as those of San Gemini, Acqua Claudia, etc., mixed with syrups, as, for example, syrup of black cherry.
Drinks. The growing child’s body is made up of a lot of water, so it requires a steady supply of hydration. Among the drinks, the best, and really the only one that should be fully recommended, is pure fresh spring[Pg 133] water. Wealthy children might be given the so-called table waters that are slightly alkaline, like those from San Gemini, Acqua Claudia, etc., mixed with syrups, such as black cherry syrup.
It is now a matter of general knowledge that all fermented beverages, and those exciting to the nervous system, are injurious to children; hence, all alcoholic and caffeic beverages are absolutely eliminated from child diet. Not only liquors, but wine and beer, ought to be unknown to the child's taste, and coffee and tea should be inaccessible to childhood.
It is now widely known that all fermented drinks, as well as those that stimulate the nervous system, are harmful to children; therefore, all alcoholic and caffeinated beverages should be completely removed from a child's diet. Not only should liquor be avoided, but wine and beer should also be unfamiliar to a child's palate, and coffee and tea should be off-limits during childhood.
The deleterious action of alcohol on the child organism needs no illustration, but in a matter of such vital importance insistent repetition is never superfluous. Alcohol is a poison especially fatal to organisms in the process of formation. Not only does it arrest their total development (whence infantilism, idiocy), but also predisposes the child to nervous maladies (epilepsy, meningitis), and to maladies of the digestive organs, and metabolism (cirrhosis of the liver, dyspepsia, anæmia).
The harmful effects of alcohol on a child's body are well-known, but in such an important issue, repeating the facts is never excessive. Alcohol is a toxin that is particularly dangerous for developing bodies. It not only halts their overall growth (leading to conditions like infantilism and idiocy), but also makes children more susceptible to nervous disorders (like epilepsy and meningitis), as well as digestive and metabolic issues (such as cirrhosis of the liver, indigestion, and anemia).
If the "Children's Houses" were to succeed in enlightening the people on such truths, they would be accomplishing a very lofty hygienic work for the new generations.
If the "Children's Houses" were successful in educating people about these truths, they would be doing a crucial health task for future generations.
Instead of coffee, children may be given roasted and boiled barley, malt, and especially chocolate which is an excellent child food, particularly when mixed with milk.
Instead of coffee, kids can have roasted and boiled barley, malt, and especially chocolate, which is a great food for children, especially when mixed with milk.
DISTRIBUTION OF THE MEALS
Another chapter of child diet concerns the distribution of the meals. Here, one principle must dominate, and must be diffused, among mothers, namely, that the children shall be kept to rigorous meal hours in order that[Pg 134] they may enjoy good health and have excellent digestion. It is true that there prevails among the people (and it is one of the forms of maternal ignorance most fatal to children) the prejudice that children in order to grow well must be eating almost continuously, without regularity, nibbling almost habitually a crust of bread. On the contrary, the child, in view of the special delicacy of his digestive system, has more need of regular meals than the adult has. It seems to me that the "Children's Houses" with very prolonged programmes are, for this reason, suitable places for child culture, as they can direct the child's diet. Outside of their regular meal hours, children should not eat.
Another chapter on children's diets focuses on meal distribution. One key principle must be emphasized to mothers: children should stick to strict meal times to ensure they maintain good health and have excellent digestion. It's true that a common belief among people—one of the most harmful forms of maternal ignorance—is that children need to eat almost constantly, without any routine, and habitually nibble on a piece of bread. On the contrary, due to the delicate nature of a child's digestive system, they actually need regular meals more than adults do. I believe that "Children's Houses" with long, structured schedules are ideal for child development because they can manage children's diets. Children should not eat outside of their regular meal times.
In a "Children's House" with a long programme there ought to be two meals, a hearty one about noon, and a light one about four in the afternoon.
In a "Children's House" with a long program, there should be two meals: a substantial one around noon and a light one around four in the afternoon.
At the hearty meal, there should be soup, a meat dish, and bread, and, in the case of rich children, also fruits or custard, and butter on the bread.
At the hearty meal, there should be soup, a meat dish, and bread, and, for wealthy kids, there should also be fruits or custard, along with butter on the bread.
At the four o'clock meal there should be prepared a light lunch, which from a simple piece of bread can range to buttered bread, and to bread accompanied by a fruit marmalade, chocolate, honey, custard, etc. Crisp crackers, biscuits, and cooked fruits, etc., might also be usefully employed. Very suitably the lunch might consist of bread soaked in milk or an egg à la coque with bread sticks, or else of a simple cup of milk in which is dissolved a spoonful of Mellin's Food. I recommend Mellin's Food very highly, not only in infancy, but also much later on account of its properties of digestibility and nutrition, and on account of its flavour, which is so pleasing to children.
At the four o'clock meal, you should prepare a light lunch that can range from a simple piece of bread to buttered bread, or bread served with fruit jam, chocolate, honey, custard, etc. Crisp crackers, biscuits, and cooked fruits can also be useful options. A suitable lunch might include bread soaked in milk or a soft-boiled egg with breadsticks, or simply a cup of milk with a spoonful of Mellin's Food mixed in. I highly recommend Mellin's Food, not only for infants but also later on because of its digestibility, nutritional value, and the flavor that kids really enjoy.
Mellin's Food is a powder prepared from barley and wheat, and containing in a concentrated and pure state the[Pg 135] nutritive substances proper to those cereals; the powder is slowly dissolved in hot water in the bottom of the same cup which is to be used for drinking the mixture, and very fresh milk is then poured on top.
Mellin's Food is a powder made from barley and wheat, containing concentrated and pure nutrients from those grains. The powder is slowly dissolved in hot water at the bottom of the same cup that will be used to drink the mixture, and then very fresh milk is poured on top.
The child would take the other two meals in his own home, that is, the morning breakfast and the supper, which latter must be very light for children so that shortly after they may be ready to go to bed. On these meals it would be well to give advice to mothers, urging them to help complete the hygienic work of the "Children's Houses," to the profit of their children.
The child would have the other two meals at home, which means breakfast in the morning and a very light supper so that they are ready to go to bed shortly after. It would be a good idea to offer advice to mothers, urging them to support the efforts of the "Children's Houses" for the benefit of their children.
The morning breakfast for the rich might be milk and chocolate, or milk and extract of malt, with crackers, or, better, with toasted bread spread with butter or honey; for the poor, a cup of fresh milk, with bread.
The breakfast in the morning for the wealthy could be milk and chocolate, or milk and malt extract, with crackers, or even better, with toasted bread topped with butter or honey; for the less fortunate, just a cup of fresh milk with bread.
For the evening meal, a soup is to be advised (children should eat soups twice a day), and an egg à la coque or a cup of milk; or rice soup with a base of milk, and buttered bread, with cooked fruits, etc.
For dinner, it's recommended to have soup (kids should have soup twice a day), along with a soft-boiled egg or a cup of milk; or rice soup made with milk, buttered bread, and cooked fruits, etc.
As for the alimentary rations to be calculated, I refer the reader to the special treatises on hygiene: although practically such calculations are of no great utility.
As for the food portions to be figured out, I direct the reader to the specific writings on hygiene; although in practice, these calculations aren't very useful.
In the "Children's Houses," especially in the case of the poor, I should make extensive use of the vegetable soups and I should have cultivated in the garden plots vegetables which can be used in the diet, in order to have them plucked in their freshness, cooked, and enjoyed. I should try, possibly, to do the same for the fruits, and, by the raising of animals, to have fresh eggs and pure milk. The milking of the goats could be done directly by the larger children, after they had scrupulously washed their hands. Another important educative application[Pg 136] which school-refection in the "Children's Houses" has to offer, and which concerns "practical life," consists in the preparing of the table, arranging the table linen, learning its nomenclature, etc. Later, I shall show how this exercise can gradually increase in difficulty and constitute a most important didactic instrument.
In the "Children's Houses," especially for those who are poor, I would make heavy use of vegetable soups, and I would grow vegetables in the garden plots to be picked fresh, cooked, and enjoyed. I would also try to do the same for fruits, and by raising animals, have fresh eggs and pure milk. The older children could directly milk the goats after thoroughly washing their hands. Another important educational aspect[Pg 136] that school reflection in the "Children's Houses" offers, related to "practical life," is setting the table, preparing the tablecloth, learning its names, and so on. Later, I'll show how this activity can gradually become more challenging and serve as a key teaching tool.
It is sufficient to intimate here that it is very important to teach the children to eat with cleanliness, both with respect to themselves and with respect to their surroundings (not to soil the napkins, etc.), and to use the table implements (which, at least, for the little ones, are limited to the spoon, and for the larger children extended to the fork and knife).
It’s enough to say that it’s really important to teach kids to eat cleanly, both for themselves and for their environment (like not getting the napkins dirty, etc.), and to use the utensils (which, at least for the little ones, are limited to a spoon, and for the older kids include a fork and knife).
CHAPTER IX
Fitness Education—Gymnastics
The generally accepted idea of gymnastics is, I consider, very inadequate. In the common schools we are accustomed to describe as gymnastics a species of collective muscular discipline which has as its aim that children shall learn to follow definite ordered movements given in the form of commands. The guiding spirit in such gymnastics is coercion, and I feel that such exercises repress spontaneous movements and impose others in their place. I do not know what the psychological authority for the selection of these imposed movements is. Similar movements are used in medical gymnastics in order to restore a normal movement to a torpid muscle or to give back a normal movement to a paralysed muscle. A number of chest movements which are given in the school are advised, for example, in medicine for those who suffer from intestinal torpidity, but truly I do not well understand what office such exercises can fulfil when they are followed by squadrons of normal children. In addition to these formal gymnastics we have those which are carried on in a gymnasium, and which are very like the first steps in the training of an acrobat. However, this is not the place for criticism of the gymnastics used in our common schools. Certainly in our case we are not considering such gymnastics. Indeed, many who hear me speak of gymnastics for infant schools very plainly show disap[Pg 138]probation and they will disapprove more heartily when they hear me speak of a gymnasium for little children. Indeed, if the gymnastic exercises and the gymnasium were those of the common schools, no one would agree more heartily than I in the disapproval expressed by these critics.
The usual idea of gymnastics is, in my opinion, quite limited. In regular schools, we often describe gymnastics as a kind of group physical training aimed at getting children to perform specific ordered movements based on commands. The main focus in this type of gymnastics is control, and I believe these exercises stifle natural movements and replace them with imposed ones. I’m not sure what the psychological basis is for choosing these imposed movements. Similar movements are used in medical gymnastics to help restore normal movement in inactive muscles or to help paralyzed muscles regain function. Certain chest exercises recommended in schools are suggested in medical contexts for those experiencing sluggish digestion, but honestly, I don’t really understand what these exercises can achieve when done by groups of healthy children. Besides these structured gymnastics, we also have those done in a gym, which resemble the early training stages of an acrobat. However, this isn't the right time to critique the gymnastics taught in our regular schools. We’re definitely not considering those types of gymnastics here. In fact, many people react negatively when I talk about gymnastics for young children, and their disapproval will be even stronger when I mention a gym for little kids. If the gymnastics exercises and the gym were similar to what’s done in regular schools, I would completely agree with the critics' disapproval.
We must understand by gymnastics and in general by muscular education a series of exercises tending to aid the normal development of physiological movements (such as walking, breathing, speech), to protect this development, when the child shows himself backward or abnormal in any way, and to encourage in the children those movements which are useful in the achievement of the most ordinary acts of life; such as dressing, undressing, buttoning their clothes and lacing their shoes, carrying such objects as balls, cubes, etc. If there exists an age in which it is necessary to protect a child by means of a series of gymnastic exercises, between three and six years is undoubtedly the age. The special gymnastics necessary, or, better still, hygienic, in this period of life, refer chiefly to walking. A child in the general morphological growth of his body is characterised by having a torso greatly developed in comparison with the lower limbs. In the new-born child the length of the torso, from the top of the head to the curve of the groin, is equal to 68 per cent of the total length of the body. The limbs then are barely 32 per cent of the stature. During growth these relative proportions change in a most noticeable way; thus, for example, in the adult the torso is fully half of the entire stature and, according to the individual, corresponds to 51 or 52 per cent of it.
We need to understand that by gymnastics and muscular education, we mean a series of exercises aimed at supporting the normal development of physical movements (like walking, breathing, talking), protecting this development when a child appears to be delayed or unusual in any way, and encouraging in children those movements that are important for accomplishing everyday tasks like getting dressed, undressing, buttoning their clothes, and tying their shoes, as well as carrying things like balls, cubes, etc. If there’s a time when it’s essential to support a child with specific gymnastic exercises, it’s definitely between the ages of three and six. The specific exercises needed, or better yet, hygienic activities during this period, mainly focus on walking. A child’s body during general growth is characterized by having a torso that is much bigger compared to their legs. For instance, in a newborn, the length of the torso, from the top of the head to the curve of the groin, makes up 68 percent of the total body length. The limbs only account for about 32 percent of their height. As they grow, these proportions change significantly; for example, in adults, the torso makes up about half of their total height and can correspond to 51 or 52 percent depending on the individual.
This morphological difference between the new-born child and the adult is bridged so slowly during growth[Pg 139] that in the first years of the child's life the torso still remains tremendously developed as compared with the limbs. In one year the height of the torso corresponds to 65 per cent of the total stature, in two years to 63, in three years to 62.
This difference in body shape between a newborn and an adult changes very gradually as the child grows[Pg 139]. In the early years of life, the torso is still much more developed compared to the limbs. At one year old, the height of the torso makes up 65 percent of the total height, 63 percent at two years, and 62 percent at three years.
At the age when a child enters the infant school his limbs are still very short as compared with his torso; that is, the length of his limbs barely corresponds to 38 per cent of the stature. Between the years of six and seven the proportion of the torso to the stature is from 57 to 56 per cent In such a period therefore the child not only makes a noticeable growth in height, (he measures indeed at the age of three years about 0.85 metre and at six years 1.05 metres) but, changing so greatly the relative proportions between the torso and the limbs, the latter make a most decided growth. This growth is related to the layers of cartilage which still exist at the extremity of the long bones and is related in general to the still incomplete ossification of the entire skeleton. The tender bones of the limbs must therefore sustain the weight of the torso which is then disproportionately large. We cannot, if we consider all these things, judge the manner of walking in little children by the standard set for our own equilibrium. If a child is not strong, the erect posture and walking are really sources of fatigue for him, and the long bones of the lower limbs, yielding to the weight of the body, easily become deformed and usually bowed. This is particularly the case among the badly nourished children of the poor, or among those in whom the skeleton structure, while not actually showing the presence of rickets, still seems to be slow in attaining normal ossification.
At the age when a child starts infant school, their limbs are still quite short compared to their torso; in fact, the length of their limbs is only about 38 percent of their total height. Between the ages of six and seven, the proportion of the torso to the height is between 57 and 56 percent. During this time, a child not only experiences significant growth in height (measuring about 0.85 meters at three years old and 1.05 meters at six years old) but also sees a considerable change in the balance between their torso and limbs, leading to a pronounced growth in the latter. This growth is linked to the cartilage still present at the ends of the long bones and is part of the overall incomplete ossification of the entire skeleton. The soft bones in their limbs must support the weight of the torso, which is relatively large. Considering all this, we can't judge the way little children walk by the standards we use for our own balance. If a child isn't strong, standing upright and walking can be genuinely exhausting for them, and the long bones in their lower limbs, under the weight of their body, can easily become deformed and typically bow. This is especially true for poorly nourished children from low-income families or those whose skeletal structure, while not showing clear signs of rickets, still appears to be delayed in reaching normal ossification.
We are wrong then if we consider little children from[Pg 140] this physical point of view as little men. They have, instead, characteristics and proportions that are entirely special to their age. The tendency of the child to stretch out on his back and kick his legs in the air is an expression of physical needs related to the proportions of his body. The baby loves to walk on all fours just because, like the quadruped animals, his limbs are short in comparison with his body. Instead of this, we divert these natural manifestations by foolish habits which we impose on the child. We hinder him from throwing himself on the earth, from stretching, etc., and we oblige him to walk with grown people and to keep up with them; and excuse ourselves by saying that we don't want him to become capricious and think he can do as he pleases! It is indeed a fatal error and one which has made bow-legs common among little children. It is well to enlighten the mothers on these important particulars of infant hygiene. Now we, with the gymnastics, can, and, indeed, should, help the child in his development by making our exercises correspond to the movement which he needs to make, and in this way save his limbs from fatigue.
We are mistaken if we view little children from[Pg 140] this physical perspective as little adults. They have unique traits and proportions that are specific to their age. A child's tendency to lie on their back and kick their legs in the air is a natural response to their body's needs. Babies love to crawl on all fours because, like four-legged animals, their limbs are short in relation to their bodies. Instead, we disrupt these natural behaviors with silly habits we impose on them. We stop them from rolling on the ground, stretching, and so on, and we force them to walk alongside adults and keep up, justifying this by saying we don't want them to become spoiled and think they can do whatever they want! This is truly a significant mistake that has contributed to bow legs being common among young children. It’s important to inform mothers about these crucial aspects of infant care. Now, with gymnastics, we can—and should—assist children in their development by making our exercises align with the movements they need to make, thus preventing fatigue in their limbs.
One very simple means for helping the child in his activity was suggested to me by my observation of the children themselves. The teacher was having the children march, leading them about the courtyard between the walls of the house and the central garden. This garden was protected by a little fence made of strong wires which were stretched in parallel lines, and were supported at intervals by wooden palings driven into the ground. Along the fence, ran a little ledge on which the children were in the habit of sitting down when they were tired of marching. In addition to this, I always brought out little chairs, which I placed against the wall.[Pg 141] Every now and then, the little ones of two and one half and three years would drop out from the marching line, evidently being tired; but instead of sitting down on the ground or on the chairs, they would run to the little fence and catching hold of the upper line of wire they would walk along sideways, resting their feet on the wire which was nearest the ground. That this gave them a great deal of pleasure, was evident from the way in which they laughed as, with bright eyes, they watched their larger companions who were marching about. The truth was that these little ones had solved one of my problems in a very practical way. They moved themselves along on the wires, pulling their bodies sideways. In this way, they moved their limbs without throwing upon them the weight of the body. Such an apparatus placed in the gymnasium for little children, will enable them to fulfil the need which they feel of throwing themselves on the floor and kicking their legs in the air; for the movements they make on the little fence correspond even more correctly to the same physical needs. Therefore, I advise the manufacture of this little fence for use in children's playrooms. It can be constructed of parallel bars supported by upright poles firmly fixed on to the heavy base. The children, while playing upon this little fence, will be able to look out and see with, great pleasure what the other children are doing in the room.
One simple way to help kids with their activities came to me from watching the children themselves. The teacher was having them march around the courtyard between the walls of the house and the central garden. This garden was surrounded by a small fence made of strong wires stretched in parallel lines, supported at intervals by wooden posts driven into the ground. Along the fence, there was a little ledge where the kids would sit when they got tired of marching. I also brought out little chairs and placed them against the wall.[Pg 141] Every now and then, the little ones, around two and a half to three years old, would drop out of the marching line, clearly tired. But instead of sitting on the ground or in the chairs, they would run to the little fence and grab hold of the top wire, walking sideways while resting their feet on the wire closest to the ground. It was obvious they were having a lot of fun, laughing with bright eyes as they watched their bigger friends march around. The truth is these little ones had found a practical solution to one of my problems. They moved themselves along the wires, pulling their bodies sideways, allowing them to move their limbs without putting the weight of their bodies on them. Such a setup in the gym for young children would meet their need to throw themselves on the floor and kick their legs in the air; the movements they make on the little fence actually correspond even more closely to those physical needs. Therefore, I recommend creating this little fence for use in children's playrooms. It can be built with parallel bars supported by upright poles securely fixed to a heavy base. While playing on this little fence, the children will be able to look out and enjoy watching what the other kids are doing in the room.
Other pieces of gymnasium apparatus can be constructed upon the same plan, that is, having as their aim the furnishing of the child with a proper outlet for his individual activities. One of the things invented by Séguin to develop the lower limbs, and especially to strengthen the articulation of the knee in weak children, is the trampolino.[Pg 142]
Other pieces of gym equipment can be built on the same idea, which is to provide children with a suitable way to express their individual activities. One of the inventions by Séguin aimed at developing the lower limbs, particularly to strengthen the knee joint in weak children, is the trampoline.[Pg 142]
This is a kind of swing, having a very wide seat, so wide, indeed, that the limbs of the child stretched out in front of him are entirely supported by this broad seat. This little chair is hung from strong cords and is left swinging. The wall in front of it is reinforced by a strong smooth board against which the children press their feet in pushing themselves back and forth in the swing. The child seated in this swing exercises his limbs, pressing his feet against the board each time that he swings toward the wall. The board against which he swings may be erected at some distance from the wall, and may be so low that the child can see over the top of it. As he swings in this chair, he strengthens his limbs through the species of gymnastics limited to the lower limbs, and this he does without resting the weight of his body upon his legs. Other pieces of gymnastic apparatus, less important from the hygienic standpoint, but very amusing to the children, may be described briefly. "The Pendulum," a game which may be played by one child or by several, consists of rubber balls hung on a cord. The children seated in their little armchairs strike the ball, sending it from one to another. It is an exercise for the arms and for the spinal column, and is at the same time an exercise in which the eye gauges the distance of bodies in motion. Another game, called "The Cord," consists of a line, drawn on the earth with chalk, along which the children walk. This helps to order and to direct their free movements in a given direction. A game like this is very pretty, indeed, after a snowfall, when the little path made by the children shows the regularity of the line they have traced, and encourages a pleasant war among them in which each one tries to make his line in the snow the most regular.[Pg 143]
This is a type of swing with a very wide seat, so wide that the child's legs extended in front of him are fully supported by it. This little chair hangs from strong cords and swings back and forth. The wall in front is reinforced with a sturdy smooth board that the children push against with their feet to swing. The child in this swing works out his legs by pressing his feet against the board every time he swings toward the wall. The board can be set back from the wall, and it might be low enough for the child to see over it. As he swings in this chair, he strengthens his legs through a form of gymnastics focused on the lower body, doing so without putting weight on his legs. Other gym equipment, while less essential for health but very fun for kids, can be briefly mentioned. "The Pendulum," a game for one or several children, features rubber balls hanging from a cord. The kids sit in their small chairs and hit the ball, passing it to each other. It exercises their arms and spine while also helping their eyes track moving objects. Another game, called "The Cord," involves walking along a chalk line drawn on the ground. This helps organize and direct their movements in a specific way. This game looks really nice after it snows, as the path made by the kids shows the neat line they created, encouraging a friendly competition among them to make their line in the snow as regular as possible.[Pg 143]
The little round stair is another game, in which a little wooden stairway, built on the plan of the spiral, is used. This little stair is enclosed on one side by a balustrade on which the children can rest their hands. The other side is open and circular. This serves to habituate the children to climbing and descending stairs without holding on to the balustrade, and teaches them to move up and down with movements that are poised and self-controlled. The steps must be very low and very shallow. Going up and down on this little stair, the very smallest children can learn movements which they cannot follow properly in climbing ordinary stairways in their homes, in which the proportions are arranged for adults.
The little round stair is another activity that uses a small wooden spiral staircase. This staircase has a balustrade on one side for the kids to rest their hands on, while the other side is open and circular. It helps the children get used to climbing and going down stairs without holding onto the balustrade, teaching them to move up and down in a balanced and controlled way. The steps need to be very low and shallow. By going up and down this small staircase, even the tiniest children can learn movements that they can’t practice properly on regular stairways at home, which are designed for adults.
Another piece of gymnasium apparatus, adapted for the broad-jump, consists of a low wooden platform painted with various lines, by means of which the distance jumped may be gauged. There is a small flight of stairs which may be used in connection with this plane, making it possible to practise and to measure the high-jump.
Another piece of gym equipment, designed for the broad jump, is a low wooden platform painted with different lines to measure the distance jumped. There's a small set of stairs that can be used with this platform, allowing for practice and measurement of the high jump.
I also believe that rope-ladders may be so adapted as to be suitable for use in schools for little children. Used in pairs, these would, it seems to me, help to perfect a great variety of movements, such as kneeling, rising, bending forward and backward, etc.; movements which the child, without the help of the ladder, could not make without losing his equilibrium. All of these movements are useful in that they help the child to acquire, first, equilibrium, then that co-ordination of the muscular movements necessary to him. They are, moreover, helpful in that they increase the chest expansion. Besides all this, such movements as I have described, reinforce the hand in its most primitive and essential action, prehension;—the movement which necessarily precedes all the finer move[Pg 144]ments of the hand itself. Such apparatus was successfully used by Séguin to develop the general strength and the movement of prehension in his idiotic children.
I also think that rope ladders can be modified to be appropriate for use in schools for young children. When used in pairs, they could help improve a variety of movements like kneeling, standing up, bending forward and backward, and so on; movements that children couldn't perform without the ladder without losing their balance. All these movements are beneficial as they help the child first achieve balance, and then develop the coordination of muscle movements they need. Additionally, these exercises help expand the lungs. Furthermore, the movements I've described strengthen the hand in its most basic and crucial function, grasping; which is the movement that comes before all the more precise movements of the hand itself. This kind of equipment was effectively used by Séguin to enhance the overall strength and grasping ability in his students with intellectual disabilities.
The gymnasium, therefore, offers a field for the most varied exercises, tending to establish the co-ordination of the movements common in life, such as walking, throwing objects, going up and down stairs, kneeling, rising, jumping, etc.
The gym offers a space for a wide range of exercises, aimed at improving the coordination of movements we use in everyday life, like walking, throwing things, going up and down stairs, kneeling, standing up, jumping, and so on.
FREE GYMNASTICS
By free gymnastics I mean those which are given without any apparatus. Such gymnastics are divided into two classes: directed and required exercises, and free games. In the first class, I recommend the march, the object of which should be not rhythm, but poise only. When the march is introduced, it is well to accompany it with the singing of little songs, because this furnishes a breathing exercise very helpful in strengthening the lungs. Besides the march, many of the games of Froebel which are accompanied by songs, very similar to those which the children constantly play among themselves, may be used. In the free games, we furnish the children with balls, hoops, bean bags and kites. The trees readily offer themselves to the game of "Pussy wants a corner," and many simple games of tag.
By free gymnastics, I mean those that are done without any equipment. These gymnastics are split into two categories: structured exercises and free play. In the first category, I suggest including marching, which should focus on balance rather than rhythm. When introducing the march, it’s a good idea to pair it with singing little songs, as this provides a breathing exercise that’s very useful for strengthening the lungs. Along with marching, many of Froebel’s games, which include songs similar to those that children play on their own, can also be used. For free play, we provide children with balls, hoops, bean bags, and kites. Trees are perfect for playing “Pussy wants a corner” and many simple tag games.

EDUCATIONAL GYMNASTICS
Under the name of educational gymnastics, we include two series of exercises which really form a part of other school work, as, for instance, the cultivation of the earth, the care of plants and animals (watering and pruning the plants, carrying the grain to the chickens, etc.). These activities call for various co-ordinated movements, as, for [Pg 145] example, in hoeing, in getting down to plant things, and in rising; the trips which children make in carrying objects to some definite place, and in making a definite practical use of these objects, offer a field for very valuable gymnastic exercises. The scattering of minute objects, such as corn and oats, is valuable, and also the exercise of opening and closing the gates to the garden and to the chicken yard. All of these exercises are the more valuable in that they are carried on in the open air. Among our educational gymnastics we have exercises to develop co-ordinated movements of the fingers, and these prepare the children for the exercises of practical life, such as dressing and undressing themselves. The didactic material which forms the basis of these last named gymnastics is very simple, consisting of wooden frames, each mounted with two pieces of cloth, or leather, to be fastened and unfastened by means of the buttons and buttonholes, hooks and eyes, eyelets and lacings, or automatic fastenings.
Under the term educational gymnastics, we include two groups of exercises that are actually part of other school activities, such as gardening and taking care of plants and animals (watering and pruning plants, feeding the chickens, etc.). These tasks require various coordinated movements, like hoeing, bending down to plant things, and standing up. The trips children take to carry objects to specific locations and to use these objects practically provide a great opportunity for valuable gymnastic exercises. Scattering small items like corn and oats is beneficial, as are the exercises involved in opening and closing the gates to the garden and the chicken coop. All of these activities are even more valuable because they are done outdoors. Among our educational gymnastics, we have exercises designed to develop the coordinated movements of the fingers, preparing children for practical life skills like getting dressed and undressed. The teaching materials for these finger exercises are very simple and consist of wooden frames, each with two pieces of cloth or leather that can be fastened and unfastened using buttons and buttonholes, hooks and eyes, eyelets and laces, or automatic fasteners.

In our "Children's Houses" we use ten of these frames, so constructed that each one of them illustrates a different process in dressing or undressing.
In our "Children's Houses," we use ten of these frames, each designed to show a different way of getting dressed or undressed.
One: mounted with heavy pieces of wool which are to be fastened by means of large bone buttons—corresponds to children's dresses.
One: equipped with thick wool pieces that are to be secured with large bone buttons—similar to children's dresses.
Two: mounted with pieces of linen to be fastened with pearl buttons—corresponds to a child's underwear.
Two: equipped with pieces of linen to be secured with pearl buttons—similar to a child's underwear.
Three: leather pieces mounted with shoe buttons—in fastening these leather pieces the children make use of the button-hook—corresponds to a child's shoes.
Three: leather pieces attached with shoe buttons—in fastening these leather pieces, the children use the button-hook—corresponds to a child's shoes.
Four: pieces of leather which are laced together by means of eyelets and shoe laces.
Four: pieces of leather that are laced together with eyelets and shoelaces.
Five: two pieces of cloth to be laced together. (These[Pg 146] pieces are boned and therefore correspond to the little bodices worn by the peasants in Italy.)
Five: two pieces of fabric to be laced together. (These[Pg 146] pieces are structured and therefore similar to the small bodices worn by peasants in Italy.)
Six: two pieces of stuff to be fastened by means of large hooks and eyes.
Six: two pieces of material to be connected using large hooks and eyes.
Seven: two pieces of linen, to be fastened by means of small hooks and worked eyelets.
Seven: two pieces of linen, to be connected using small hooks and eyelets.
Eight: two pieces of cloth to be fastened by means of broad coloured ribbon, which is to be tied into bows.
Eight: two pieces of fabric that will be secured with a wide, colorful ribbon, which will be tied into bows.
Nine: pieces of cloth laced together with round cord, on the same order as the fastenings on many of the children's underclothes.
Nine: pieces of fabric woven together with round string, similar to the closures on many of the kids' underwear.
Ten: two pieces to be fastened together by means of the modern automatic fasteners.
Ten: two pieces to be hooked together using modern automatic fasteners.
Through the use of such toys, the children can practically analyse the movements necessary in dressing and undressing themselves, and can prepare themselves separately for these movements by means of repeated exercises. We succeed in teaching the child to dress himself without his really being aware of it, that is, without any direct or arbitrary command we have led him to this mastery. As soon as he knows how to do it, he begins to wish to make a practical application of his ability, and very soon he will be proud of being sufficient unto himself, and will take delight in an ability which makes his body free from the hands of others, and which leads him the sooner to that modesty and activity which develops far too late in those children of to-day who are deprived of this most practical form of education. The fastening games are very pleasing to the little ones, and often when ten of them are using the frames at the same time, seated around the little tables, quiet and serious, they give the impression of a workroom filled with tiny workers.
Through the use of such toys, the children can effectively analyze the movements needed for dressing and undressing themselves, and can prepare for these movements through repeated practice. We manage to teach the child to dress on their own without them even realizing it, meaning that without any direct or enforced command, we have guided them to this skill. Once they know how to do it, they start wanting to put their ability into practice, and before long, they'll be proud of their independence, enjoying the skill that frees their body from relying on others, which helps them develop the modesty and activity that often comes too late for kids today who miss out on this practical form of education. The fastening games are very enjoyable for the little ones, and often, when ten of them are using the frames at the same time, sitting around the small tables, quiet and focused, they create the impression of a workshop filled with tiny workers.
RESPIRATORY GYMNASTICS
The purpose of these gymnastics is to regulate the respiratory movements: in other words, to teach the art of breathing. They also help greatly the correct formation of the child's speech habits. The exercises which we use were introduced into school literature by Professor Sala. We have chosen the simple exercises described by him in his treatise, "Cura della Balbuzie."[11] These include a number of respiratory gymnastic exercises with which are co-ordinated muscular exercises. I give here an example:
The purpose of these exercises is to regulate breathing movements: in other words, to teach the art of breathing. They also significantly contribute to the proper formation of a child's speech habits. The exercises we use were introduced into school literature by Professor Sala. We've selected the simple exercises he described in his book, "Cura della Balbuzie."[11] These include a variety of breathing exercises paired with muscular exercises. Here’s an example:
Mouth wide open, tongue held flat, hands on hips.
Mouth wide open, tongue flat, hands on hips.
Breathe deeply, lift the shoulders rapidly, lowering the diaphragm.
Breathe in deeply, quickly lift your shoulders, and drop your diaphragm.
Expel breath slowly, lowering shoulders slowly, returning to normal position.
Expel your breath slowly, relax your shoulders, and return to a neutral position.
The directress should select or devise simple breathing exercises, to be accompanied with arm movements, etc.
The director should choose or create simple breathing exercises that include arm movements, etc.
Exercises for proper use of lips, tongue, and teeth. These exercises teach the movements of the lips and tongue in the pronunciation of certain fundamental consonant sounds, reinforcing the muscles, and making them ready for these movements. These gymnastics prepare the organs used in the formation of language.
Exercises for the proper use of lips, tongue, and teeth. These exercises teach the movements of the lips and tongue in pronouncing certain basic consonant sounds, strengthening the muscles and getting them ready for these movements. These practices prepare the organs used in forming language.
In presenting such exercises we begin with the entire class, but finish by testing the children individually. We ask the child to pronounce, aloud and with force, the first syllable of a word. When all are intent upon putting the greatest possible force into this, we call each child separately, and have him repeat the word. If he pronounces[Pg 148] it correctly, we send him to the right, if badly, to the left. Those who have difficulty with the word, are then encouraged to repeat it several times. The teacher takes note of the age of the child, and of the particular defects in the movements of the muscles used in articulating. She may then touch the muscles which should be used, tapping, for example, the curve of the lips, or even taking hold of the child's tongue and placing it against the dental arch, or showing him clearly the movements which she herself makes when pronouncing the syllable. She must seek in every way to aid the normal development of the movements necessary to the exact articulation of the word.
In doing these exercises, we start with the whole class but end by testing each child individually. We ask the child to pronounce, aloud and with force, the first syllable of a word. When everyone is focused on putting in as much force as possible, we call each child up one by one and have them repeat the word. If they pronounce[Pg 148] it correctly, we direct them to the right; if not, to the left. Those who struggle with the word are encouraged to repeat it multiple times. The teacher observes the child's age and the specific issues with the muscle movements involved in speech. She might then touch the muscles that need to be engaged, tapping the curve of the lips, or even gently guiding the child's tongue against the dental arch, or demonstrating the movements she makes while pronouncing the syllable. She should do everything possible to support the natural development of the movements required for precise articulation of the word.
As the basis for these gymnastics we have the children pronounce the words: pane—fame—tana—zina—stella—rana—gatto.
As the foundation for these exercises, we have the children say the words: pane—fame—tana—zina—stella—rana—gatto.
In the pronunciation of pane, the child should repeat with much force, pa, pa, pa, thus exercising the muscles producing orbicular contraction of the lips.
In saying pane, the child should strongly repeat pa, pa, pa, which helps strengthen the muscles that make the lips round.
In fame repeating fa, fa, fa, the child exercises the movements of the lower lip against the upper dental arch.
In fame repeating fa, fa, fa, the child practices moving the lower lip against the upper teeth.
In tana, having him repeat ta, ta, ta, we cause him to exercise the movement of the tongue against the upper dental arch.
In tana, by making him say ta, ta, ta, we get him to move his tongue against the upper dental arch.
In zina, we provoke the contact of the upper and lower dental arches.
In zina, we create contact between the upper and lower rows of teeth.
With stella we have him repeat the whole word, bringing the teeth together, and holding the tongue (which has a tendency to protrude) close against the upper teeth.
With stella, we have him say the whole word again, bringing his teeth together and keeping his tongue (which tends to stick out) close against his upper teeth.
In rana we have him repeat r, r, r, thus exercising the tongue in the vibratory movements. In gatto we hold the voice upon the guttural g.
In rana, we have him say r, r, r, which helps to exercise the tongue with its vibrating movements. In gatto, we keep the voice on the guttural g.
CHAPTER X
Nature in Learning—Agricultural Labor: Cultivation of Plants and Animals
Itard, in a remarkable pedagogical treatise: "Des premiers développements du jeune sauvage de l'Aveyron," expounds in detail the drama of a curious, gigantic education which attempted to overcome the psychical darkness of an idiot and at the same time to snatch a man from primitive nature.
Itard, in an impressive educational work: "Des premiers développements du jeune sauvage de l'Aveyron," elaborates on the intriguing, grand journey of education that aimed to break through the mental barriers of someone who was considered an idiot and, at the same time, pull a person away from their primitive roots.
The savage of the Aveyron was a child who had grown up in the natural state: criminally abandoned in a forest where his assassins thought they had killed him, he was cured by natural means, and had survived for many years free and naked in the wilderness, until, captured by hunters, he entered into the civilised life of Paris, showing by the scars with which his miserable body was furrowed the story of the struggles with wild beasts, and of lacerations caused by falling from heights.
The wild boy of Aveyron was a child who had lived in the wild. Abandoned in a forest by those who thought they had killed him, he survived through natural means, spending many years free and naked in the wilderness. Eventually captured by hunters, he was introduced to the civilized life of Paris, and the scars on his battered body told the story of his battles with wild animals and injuries from falls.
The child was, and always remained, mute; his mentality, diagnosed by Pinel as idiotic, remained forever almost inaccessible to intellectual education.
The child was, and always remained, mute; his mindset, diagnosed by Pinel as idiotic, stayed almost completely out of reach of any intellectual education.
To this child are due the first steps of positive pedagogy. Itard, a physician of deaf-mutes and a student of philosophy, undertook his education with methods which he had already partially tried for treating defective hearing—believing at the beginning that the savage showed char[Pg 150]acteristics of inferiority, not because he was a degraded organism, but for want of education. He was a follower of the principles of Helvetius: "Man is nothing without the work of man"; that is, he believed in the omnipotence of education, and was opposed to the pedagogical principle which Rousseau had promulgated before the Revolution: "Tout est bien sortant des mains de l'Auteur des choses, tout dégénère dans les mains de l'homme,"—that is, the work of education is deleterious and spoils the man.
To this child belong the initial steps of positive teaching methods. Itard, a doctor specializing in deaf-mutes and studying philosophy, began his education using techniques he had partially applied to treat hearing disabilities—believing initially that the savage exhibited traits of inferiority not because he was a degraded being, but due to a lack of education. He adhered to Helvetius' principles: "Man is nothing without the work of man"; meaning he believed in the power of education and opposed the educational principle that Rousseau stated before the Revolution: "Tout est bien sortant des mains de l'Auteur des choses, tout dégénère dans les mains de l'homme,"—implying that the process of education is harmful and corrupts the individual.
The savage, according to the erroneous first impression of Itard, demonstrated experimentally by his characteristics the truth of the former assertion. When, however, he perceived, with the help of Pinel, that he had to do with an idiot, his philosophical theories gave place to the most admirable, tentative, experimental pedagogy.
The wild boy, based on Itard's mistaken initial impression, showed through his behavior the validity of the previous claim. However, when he realized, with Pinel's assistance, that he was dealing with a person with intellectual challenges, his philosophical ideas shifted to a remarkable, experimental approach to teaching.
Itard divides the education of the savage into two parts. In the first, he endeavours to lead the child from natural life to social life; and in the second, he attempts the intellectual education of the idiot. The child in his life of frightful abandonment had found one happiness; he had, so to speak, immersed himself in, and unified himself with, nature, taking delight in it—rains, snow, tempests, boundless space, had been his sources of entertainment, his companions, his love. Civil life is a renunciation of all this: but it is an acquisition beneficent to human progress. In Itard's pages we find vividly described the moral work which led the savage to civilisation, multiplying the needs of the child and surrounding him with loving care. Here is a sample of the admirably patient work of Itard as observer of the spontaneous expressions of his pupil: it can most truly give teachers, who are to prepare for the experimental method, an idea of the patience and the self-ab[Pg 151]negation necessary in dealing with a phenomenon which is to be observed:
Itard breaks down the education of the wild child into two parts. In the first part, he tries to guide the child from a natural existence to one within society; in the second part, he focuses on educating the child intellectually. In his life of extreme neglect, the child found one source of happiness; he had, so to speak, immersed himself in and become one with nature, enjoying it—rain, snow, storms, and endless space were his sources of entertainment, his companions, and his love. Living in society means giving up all this, but it also brings benefits for human progress. In Itard's writings, we see a vivid description of the moral effort that guided the wild child toward civilization, increasing the child's needs and surrounding him with care and affection. Here’s an example of the wonderfully patient work of Itard as an observer of the spontaneous expressions of his student: it can truly give teachers, who are preparing for the experimental method, a sense of the patience and self-ab[Pg 151]negation needed when dealing with a phenomenon that requires observation:
"When, for example, he was observed within his room, he was seen to be lounging with oppressive monotony, continually directing his eyes toward the window, with his gaze wandering in the void. If on such occasions a sudden storm blew up, if the sun, hidden behind the clouds, peeped out of a sudden, lighting the atmosphere brilliantly, there were loud bursts of laughter and almost convulsive joy. Sometimes, instead of these expressions of joy, there was a sort of frenzied rage: he would twist his arms, put his clenched fists upon his eyes, gnashing his teeth and becoming dangerous to those about him.
When, for example, he was seen in his room, he looked like he was lounging with a heavy boredom, constantly staring out the window with his gaze lost in the emptiness. If, during those times, a sudden storm broke out, or if the sun, which had been hiding behind the clouds, suddenly broke through and lit up the atmosphere brilliantly, there would be loud bursts of laughter and almost uncontrollable joy. Sometimes, instead of these joyful expressions, he would enter a kind of frenzied rage: he would twist his arms, press his clenched fists against his eyes, gnash his teeth, and become threatening to those around him.
"One morning, when the snow fell abundantly while he was still in bed, he uttered a cry of joy upon awaking, leaped from his bed, ran to the window and then to the door; went and came impatiently from one to the other; then ran out undressed as he was into the garden. There, giving vent to his joy with the shrillest of cries, he ran, rolled in the snow, gathered it up in handfuls, and swallowed it with incredible avidity.
"One morning, while the snow was falling heavily and he was still in bed, he let out a shout of joy when he woke up, jumped out of bed, ran to the window, and then to the door. He went back and forth impatiently between the two, before running outside in his pajamas into the garden. There, expressing his joy with loud screams, he ran around, rolled in the snow, scooped it up in handfuls, and eagerly ate it."
"But his sensations at sight of the great spectacles of nature did not always manifest themselves in such a vivid and noisy manner. It is worthy of note that in certain cases they were expressed by a quiet regret and melancholy. Thus, it was when the rigour of the weather drove everybody from the garden that the savage of the Aveyron chose to go there. He would walk around it several times and finally sit down upon the edge of the fountain.
"But his feelings when he saw the great wonders of nature didn't always show up in such a lively and loud way. It’s important to point out that sometimes they came out as a quiet sadness and longing. This was the case when the harsh weather chased everyone out of the garden, and that's when the wild man of Aveyron decided to go there. He would walk around it a few times and then finally sit down on the edge of the fountain."
"I have often stopped for whole hours, and with indescribable pleasure, to watch him as he sat thus—to see how his face, inexpressive or contracted by grimaces, gradually assumed an expression of sadness, and of melancholy[Pg 152] reminiscence, while his eyes were fixed upon the surface of the water into which from time to time he would throw a few dead leaves.
"I have often stopped for whole hours, and with indescribable pleasure, to watch him as he sat like this—to see how his face, either blank or twisted by grimaces, gradually took on an expression of sadness and melancholy[Pg 152] reminiscence, while his eyes were fixed on the surface of the water, into which he would occasionally toss a few dead leaves."
"If when there was a full moon, a sheaf of mild beams penetrated into his room, he rarely failed to wake and to take his place at the window. He would remain there for a large part of the night, erect, motionless, with his head thrust forward, his eyes fixed on the countryside lighted by the moon, plunged in a sort of contemplative ecstasy, the immobility and silence of which were only interrupted at long intervals by a breath as deep as a sigh, which died away in a plaintive sound of lamentation."
"If there was a full moon and a gentle beam of light came into his room, he usually woke up and took his spot by the window. He would stay there for a large part of the night, standing still, with his head leaning forward, his eyes focused on the moonlit countryside, lost in a kind of contemplative trance, a silence and stillness that was only broken occasionally by a deep sigh, fading into a soft sound of sorrow."
Elsewhere, Itard relates that the boy did not know the walking gait which we use in civilised life, but only the running gait, and tells how he, Itard, ran after him at the beginning, when he took him out into the streets of Paris, rather than violently check the boy's running.
Elsewhere, Itard mentions that the boy didn’t know the walking gait that we use in civilized life, but only the running gait. He describes how he, Itard, chased after the boy at first when he took him out into the streets of Paris, instead of forcefully stopping the boy's running.
The gradual and gentle leading of the savage through all the manifestations of social life, the early adaptation of the teacher to the pupil rather than of the pupil to the teacher, the successive attraction to a new life which was to win over the child by its charms, and not be imposed upon him violently so that the pupil should feel it as a burden and a torture, are as many precious educative expressions which may be generalised and applied to the education of children.
The gradual and gentle guidance of the wild child through all aspects of social life, the early adjustment of the teacher to the student instead of the other way around, the ongoing allure of a new life that aims to captivate the child with its appeal rather than force it upon them as a burden or torture, are all valuable educational principles that can be generalized and applied to the education of children.
I believe that there exists no document which offers so poignant and so eloquent a contrast between the life of nature and the life of society, and which so graphically shows that society is made up solely of renunciations and restraints. Let it suffice to recall the run, checked to a walk, and the loud-voiced cry, checked to the modulations of the ordinary speaking voice.[Pg 153]
I believe there's no document that highlights such a powerful and clear contrast between the natural world and society, and that illustrates so vividly that society is entirely built on sacrifices and limitations. Just think about how running turns into walking, and how a loud shout gets toned down to the usual tone of voice.[Pg 153]
And, yet, without any violence, leaving to social life the task of charming the child little by little, Itard's education triumphs. It is true that civilised life is made by renunciation of the life of nature; it is almost the snatching of a man from the lap of earth; it is like snatching the new-born child from its mother's breast; but it is also a new life.
And yet, without any violence, allowing social life to gradually charm the child, Itard's education succeeds. It’s true that civilized life involves giving up a natural existence; it’s almost like pulling a person away from the earth’s embrace; it’s like taking a newborn away from its mother’s breast; but it’s also a new life.
In Itard's pages we see the final triumph of the love of man over the love of nature: the savage of the Aveyron ends by feeling and preferring the affection of Itard, the caresses, the tears shed over him, to the joy of immersing himself voluptuously in the snow, and of contemplating the infinite expanse of the sky on a starry night: one day after an attempted escape into the country, he returns of his own accord, humble and repentant, to find his good soup and his warm bed.
In Itard's writings, we witness the ultimate victory of love for humanity over love for nature: the wild boy from Aveyron ultimately starts to feel and prefers Itard's affection, the hugs, and the tears shed for him over the pleasure of indulging in the snow and gazing at the vast sky on a starry night. One day, after trying to escape to the countryside, he willingly returns, feeling humble and sorry, to enjoy his comforting soup and warm bed.
It is true that man has created enjoyments in social life and has brought about a vigorous human love in community life. But nevertheless he still belongs to nature, and, especially when he is a child, he must needs draw from it the forces necessary to the development of the body and of the spirit. We have intimate communications with nature which have an influence, even a material influence, on the growth of the body. (For example, a physiologist, isolating young guinea pigs from terrestrial magnetism by means of insulators, found that they grew up with rickets.)
It’s true that people have created pleasures in social life and have fostered a strong sense of community love. However, they still belong to nature, and especially as children, they need to draw from it the resources essential for their physical and emotional development. We have close connections with nature that affect, even physically, the growth of our bodies. (For example, a physiologist who separated young guinea pigs from the Earth’s magnetic field using insulators discovered that they grew up with rickets.)
In the education of little children Itard's educative drama is repeated: we must prepare man, who is one among the living creatures and therefore belongs to nature, for social life, because social life being his own peculiar work, must also correspond to the manifestation of his natural activity.[Pg 154]
In teaching young children, Itard's educational approach is echoed: we need to prepare individuals, who are part of the living world and thus part of nature, for social life. Since social life is a unique task for them, it should also reflect their natural abilities.[Pg 154]
But the advantages which we prepare for him in this social life, in a great measure escape the little child, who at the beginning of his life is a predominantly vegetative creature.
But the benefits we create for him in this social life largely go unnoticed by the little child, who at the start of his life is mainly a vegetative being.
To soften this transition in education, by giving a large part of the educative work to nature itself, is as necessary as it is not to snatch the little child suddenly and violently from its mother and to take him to school; and precisely this is done in the "Children's Houses," which are situated within the tenements where the parents live, where the cry of the child reaches the mother and the mother's voice answers it.
To make this shift in education smoother, it's important to let nature play a big role in the learning process, just like it's essential not to abruptly and forcefully take a small child away from their mother and send them off to school. This is exactly what happens in the "Children's Houses," which are located right in the same buildings where the parents live, allowing the child's cry to reach the mother and the mother’s voice to respond.
Nowadays, under the form of child hygiene, this part of education is much cultivated: children are allowed to grow up in the open air, in the public gardens, or are left for many hours half naked on the seashore, exposed to the rays of the sun. It has been understood, through the diffusion of marine and Apennine colonies, that the best means of invigorating the child is to immerse him in nature.
Today, in the form of child hygiene, this part of education is highly valued: children are encouraged to grow up outdoors, in public gardens, or are left for many hours mostly undressed on the beach, exposed to the sun's rays. Through the spread of seaside and mountain communities, it's been recognized that the best way to strengthen a child is to immerse them in nature.
Short and comfortable clothing for children, sandals for the feet, nudity of the lower extremities, are so many liberations from the oppressive shackles of civilisation.
Short and comfy clothes for kids, sandals for their feet, and being bare-legged are all ways to break free from the heavy restrictions of society.
It is an obvious principle that we should sacrifice to natural liberties in education only as much as is necessary for the acquisition of the greater pleasures which are offered by civilisation without useless sacrifices.
It’s a clear principle that we should give up our natural freedoms in education only as much as is necessary to gain the greater pleasures that civilization provides, without unnecessary sacrifices.
But in all this progress of modern child education, we have not freed ourselves from the prejudice which denies children spiritual expression and spiritual needs, and makes us consider them only as amiable vegetating bodies to be cared for, kissed, and set in motion. The education which a good mother or a good modern teacher gives to-[Pg 155]day to the child who, for example, is running about in a flower garden is the counsel not to touch the flowers, not to tread on the grass; as if it were sufficient for the child to satisfy the physiological needs of his body by moving his legs and breathing fresh air.
But in all this progress in modern child education, we haven't escaped the mindset that ignores children's spiritual expression and needs, viewing them only as pleasant beings to be cared for, hugged, and entertained. The education that a good mother or a good modern teacher provides today to a child, for instance, running around in a flower garden, is the advice "not to touch the flowers" and "not to walk on the grass," as if it were enough for the child to meet their physical needs just by moving around and breathing fresh air.
But if for the physical life it is necessary to have the child exposed to the vivifying forces of nature, it is also necessary for his psychical life to place the soul of the child in contact with creation, in order that he may lay up for himself treasure from the directly educating forces of living nature. The method for arriving at this end is to set the child at agricultural labour, guiding him to the cultivation of plants and animals, and so to the intelligent contemplation of nature.
But while it's essential for a child's physical well-being to be exposed to nature's life-giving forces, it's just as important for their mental well-being to connect their soul with the world around them, so they can gather valuable experiences from the enriching influence of living nature. The way to achieve this is by involving the child in agricultural work, teaching them how to grow plants and care for animals, and encouraging thoughtful observation of nature.
Already, in England Mrs. Latter has devised the basis for a method of child education by means of gardening and horticulture. She sees in the contemplation of developing life the bases of religion, since the soul of the child may go from the creature to the Creator. She sees in it also the point of departure for intellectual education, which she limits to drawing from life as a step toward art, to the ideas about plants, insects, and seasons, which spring from agriculture, and to the first notions of household life, which spring from the cultivation and the culinary preparation of certain alimentary products that children later serve upon the table, providing afterwards also for the washing of the utensils and tableware.
In England, Mrs. Latter has created the foundation for a method of educating children through gardening and horticulture. She believes that observing developing life forms the basis of religion, as a child's soul can move from the created world to the Creator. She also sees this approach as a starting point for intellectual education, which she focuses on drawing from life as a step towards art, understanding plants, insects, and seasons that come from agriculture, and introducing basic concepts of household life through growing and preparing foods that children will later serve at the table, including cleaning the dishes and tableware afterwards.
Mrs. Latter's conception is too one-sided; but her institutions, which continue to spread in England, undoubtedly complete the natural education which, up to this time limited to the physical side, has already been so efficacious in invigorating the bodies of English children. Moreover, her experience offers a positive corroboration of the[Pg 156] practicability of agricultural teaching in the case of little children.
Mrs. Latter's ideas are a bit narrow-minded; however, her programs, which are still growing in England, definitely add to the natural education that, until now, has focused mostly on the physical aspect and has already been very effective in strengthening the bodies of English kids. Additionally, her experience provides solid evidence of the[Pg 156] feasibility of teaching agriculture to young children.
As for deficients, I have seen agriculture applied on a large scale to their education at Paris by the means which the kindly spirit of Baccelli tried to introduce into the elementary schools when he attempted to institute the "little educative gardens." In every little garden are sown different agricultural products, demonstrating practically the proper method and the proper time for seeding and for crop gathering, and the period of development of the various products; the manner of preparing the soil, of enriching it with natural or chemical manures, etc. The same is done for ornamental plants and for gardening, which is the work yielding the best income for deficients, when they are of an age to practise a profession.
Regarding individuals with disabilities, I’ve seen farming used on a large scale to educate them in Paris, thanks to the kind efforts of Baccelli, who tried to bring "little educational gardens" into elementary schools. In each little garden, various crops are planted, which practically demonstrate the correct methods and timing for planting seeds and harvesting, as well as the growth periods of different produce. It also covers how to prepare the soil and enhance it with natural or chemical fertilizers, among other things. The same principles apply to ornamental plants and gardening, which provide the best income for individuals with disabilities when they are of age to pursue a profession.
But this side of education, though it contains, in the first place, an objective method of intellectual culture, and, in addition, a professional preparation, is not, in my opinion, to be taken into serious consideration for child education. The educational conception of this age must be solely that of aiding the psycho-physical development of the individual; and, this being the case, agriculture and animal culture contain in themselves precious means of moral education which can be analysed far more than is done by Mrs. Latter, who sees in them essentially a method of conducting the child's soul to religious feeling. Indeed, in this method, which is a progressive ascent, several gradations can be distinguished: I mention here the principal ones:
But this aspect of education, while it includes a structured approach to intellectual growth and professional training, shouldn't be seriously considered for child education, in my view. The focus of education today should be on supporting the psychological and physical development of individuals. In this context, agriculture and animal husbandry offer valuable opportunities for moral education that can be explored much more deeply than Mrs. Latter suggests, who primarily views them as a way to guide a child's spirit toward religious feelings. In fact, this approach has a progressive structure with several stages that can be identified. Here are the main ones:
First. The child is initiated into observation of the phenomena of life. He stands with respect to the plants and animals in relations analogous to those in which the observing teacher stands towards him. Little by little,[Pg 157] as interest and observation grow, his zealous care for the living creatures grows also, and in this way, the child can logically be brought to appreciate the care which the mother and the teacher take of him.
First. The child starts to observe the events of life. He interacts with plants and animals in ways similar to how the observing teacher interacts with him. Gradually,[Pg 157] as his curiosity and observation skills develop, his enthusiastic concern for the living beings around him increases as well. This helps the child logically understand and appreciate the care that his mother and teacher provide for him.
Second. The child is initiated into foresight by way of auto-education; when he knows that the life of the plants that have been sown depends upon his care in watering them, and that of the animals, upon his diligence in feeding them, without which the little plant dries up and the animals suffer hunger, the child becomes vigilant, as one who is beginning to feel a mission in life. Moreover, a voice quite different from that of his mother and his teacher calling him to his duties, is speaking here, exhorting him never to forget the task he has undertaken. It is the plaintive voice of the needy life which lives by his care. Between the child and the living creatures which he cultivates there is born a mysterious correspondence which induces the child to fulfil certain determinate acts without the intervention of the teacher, that is, leads him to an auto-education.
Second. The child learns about foresight through self-education; when he realizes that the plants he has sown depend on his care in watering them, and the animals rely on his effort in feeding them, without which the little plant wilts and the animals go hungry, the child becomes aware, as someone starting to find purpose in life. Additionally, there is a voice, different from that of his mother and teacher, urging him to remember his responsibilities. It is the urgent voice of the life that relies on his care. A mysterious connection forms between the child and the living things he nurtures, prompting him to carry out specific actions without the teacher's guidance, that is, leading him to self-education.
The rewards which the child reaps also remain between him and nature: one fine day after long patient care in carrying food and straw to the brooding pigeons, behold the little ones! behold a number of chickens peeping about the setting hen which yesterday sat motionless in her brooding place! behold one day the tender little rabbits in the hutch where formerly dwelt in solitude the pair of big rabbits to which he had not a few times lovingly carried the green vegetables left over in his mother's kitchen!
The rewards the child gains are still just between him and nature: one beautiful day, after patiently taking food and straw to the nesting pigeons, look at the little ones! Look at a bunch of chicks pecking around the sitting hen who just yesterday was still in her nest! One day, see the adorable little rabbits in the hutch where there used to be only the pair of big rabbits to which he had lovingly brought leftover greens from his mom's kitchen!
I have not yet been able to institute in Rome the breeding of animals, but in the "Children's Houses" at Milan there are several animals, among them a pair of pretty little white American fowl that live in a diminutive and[Pg 158] elegant chalet, similar in construction to a Chinese pagoda: in front of it, a little piece of ground inclosed by a rampart is reserved for the pair. The little door of the chalet is locked at evening, and the children take care of it in turn. With what delight they go in the morning to unlock the door, to fetch water and straw, and with what care they watch during the day, and at evening lock the door after having made sure that the fowl lack nothing! The teacher informs me that among all the educative exercises this is the most welcome, and seems also the most important of all. Many a time when the children are tranquilly occupied in tasks, each at the work he prefers, one, two, or three, get up silently, and go out to cast a glance at the animals to see if they need care. Often it happens that a child absents himself for a long time and the teacher surprises him watching enchantedly the fish gliding ruddy and resplendent in the sunlight in the waters of the fountain.
I haven't managed to start an animal breeding program in Rome yet, but at the "Children's Houses" in Milan, there are several animals, including a pair of charming little white American chickens living in a small and elegant chalet, resembling a Chinese pagoda: in front of it, a small area enclosed by a low wall is set aside for the pair. The tiny door of the chalet is locked in the evening, and the children take turns caring for it. They delight in going in the morning to unlock the door, fetch water and straw, and they carefully monitor the chickens throughout the day, locking the door in the evening after making sure the chickens have everything they need! The teacher tells me that out of all the educational activities, this is the most popular and seems to be the most significant. Many times, while the children are peacefully occupied with their tasks, each engaged in their preferred work, one, two, or three of them silently get up and go outside to check on the animals to see if they need anything. It often happens that a child stays away for a long time, and the teacher finds him mesmerized, watching the fish swimming brightly and beautifully in the sunlight in the fountain's waters.
One day I received from the teacher in Milan a letter in which she spoke to me with great enthusiasm of a truly wonderful piece of news. The little pigeons were hatched. For the children it was a great festival. They felt themselves to some extent the parents of these little ones, and no artificial reward which had flattered their vanity would ever have provoked such a truly fine emotion. Not less great are the joys which vegetable nature provides. In one of the "Children's Houses" at Rome, where there was no soil that could be cultivated, there have been arranged, through the efforts of Signora Talamo, flower-pots all around the large terrace, and climbing plants near the walls. The children never forget to water the plants with their little watering-pots.
One day, I got a letter from my teacher in Milan, where she shared some incredibly exciting news. The baby pigeons had hatched. For the kids, it was a huge celebration. They felt like they were the parents of these little ones, and no fake reward that flattered their pride could ever bring about such a genuine emotion. The joys that nature provides are equally significant. In one of the "Children's Houses" in Rome, where there wasn’t any soil to cultivate, Signora Talamo arranged flower pots all around the large terrace and climbing plants along the walls. The kids always remember to water the plants with their little watering cans.
One day I found them seated on the ground, all in a[Pg 159] circle, around a splendid red rose which had bloomed in the night; silent and calm, literally immersed in mute contemplation.
One day I found them sitting on the ground, all in a[Pg 159] circle around a gorgeous red rose that had bloomed overnight; they were silent and calm, completely absorbed in quiet reflection.
Third. The children are initiated into the virtue of patience and into confident expectation, which is a form of faith and of philosophy of life.
Third. The children learn about the value of patience and confident expectation, which is a kind of faith and a way of looking at life.
When the children put a seed into the ground, and wait until it fructifies, and see the first appearance of the shapeless plant, and wait for the growth and the transformations into flower and fruit, and see how some plants sprout sooner and some later, and how the deciduous plants have a rapid life, and the fruit-trees a slower growth, they end by acquiring a peaceful equilibrium of conscience, and absorb the first germs of that wisdom which so characterised the tillers of the soil in the time when they still kept their primitive simplicity.
When the kids plant a seed in the ground and wait for it to grow, watching the first signs of the formless plant appear, they wait for it to develop into a flower and bear fruit. They notice how some plants sprout sooner while others take longer, and how the deciduous plants grow quickly while fruit trees grow more slowly. In the end, they gain a sense of calm and start to absorb the early hints of the wisdom that characterized the farmers back when they still had their simple, natural way of life.
Fourth. The children are inspired with a feeling for nature, which is maintained by the marvels of creation—that creation which rewards with a generosity not measured by the labour of those who help it to evolve the life of its creatures.
Fourth. The children have a deep appreciation for nature, which is nurtured by the wonders of the world—that world which rewards in a way that can't be measured by the efforts of those who contribute to the lives of its creatures.
Even while at the work, a sort of correspondence arises between the child's soul and the lives which are developed under his care. The child loves naturally the manifestations of life: Mrs. Latter tells us how easily little ones are interested even in earthworms and in the movement of the larvæ of insects in manure, without feeling that horror which we, who have grown up isolated from nature, experience towards certain animals. It is well then, to develop this feeling of trust and confidence in living creatures, which is, moreover, a form of love, and of union with the universe.
Even when working, a kind of connection forms between the child's spirit and the lives that grow under their care. Children naturally love signs of life: Mrs. Latter shares how easily little ones become fascinated with earthworms and the movements of insect larvae in manure, without feeling the fear that we, who have grown up disconnected from nature, feel toward certain animals. It’s important to nurture this sense of trust and confidence in living beings, which is also a form of love and a connection to the universe.
But what most develops a feeling of nature is the cul[Pg 160]tivation of the living things, because they by their natural development give back far more than they receive, and show something like infinity in their beauty and variety. When the child has cultivated the iris or the pansy, the rose or the hyacinth, has placed in the soil a seed or a bulb and periodically watered it, or has planted a fruit-bearing shrub, and the blossomed flower and the ripened fruit offer themselves as a generous gift of nature, a rich reward for a small effort; it seems almost as if nature were answering with her gifts to the feeling of desire, to the vigilant love of the cultivator, rather than striking a balance with his material efforts.
But what really enhances the feeling of nature is the cultivation of living things, because they naturally give back much more than they take, and display almost infinite beauty and variety. When a child has nurtured the iris or the pansy, the rose or the hyacinth, has planted a seed or a bulb in the soil and regularly watered it, or has planted a fruit-bearing shrub, and the blooming flower and ripe fruit present themselves as a generous gift from nature, a rich reward for a small effort; it feels almost like nature is responding with her gifts to the feeling of desire, to the attentive love of the cultivator, rather than just balancing his material efforts.
It will be quite different when the child has to gather the material fruits of his labour: motionless, uniform objects, which are consumed and dispersed rather than increased and multiplied.
It will be very different when the child has to collect the material fruits of his work: still, uniform objects that are used up and scattered instead of growing and multiplying.
The difference between the products of nature and those of industry, between divine products and human products—it is this that must be born spontaneously in the child's conscience, like the determination of a fact.
The difference between nature's creations and those made by humans, between what is divine and what is human—it’s something that should naturally develop in a child's awareness, just like recognizing a fact.
But at the same time, as the plant must give its fruit, so man must give his labour.
But just like a plant has to bear fruit, a person has to contribute their work.
Fifth. The child follows the natural way of development of the human race. In short, such education makes the evolution of the individual harmonise with that of humanity. Man passed from the natural to the artificial state through agriculture: when he discovered the secret of intensifying the production of the soil, he obtained the reward of civilisation.
Fifth. The child follows the natural way of development of the human race. In short, this kind of education aligns individual growth with the progress of humanity. Humans transitioned from a natural to an artificial state through agriculture: when they uncovered the secret to boosting soil production, they reaped the benefits of civilization.
The same path must be traversed by the child who is destined to become a civilised man.
The same path must be taken by the child who is meant to become a civilized person.
The action of educative nature so understood is very practically accessible. Because, even if the vast stretch[Pg 161] of ground and the large courtyard necessary for physical education are lacking, it will always be possible to find a few square yards of land that may be cultivated, or a little place where pigeons can make their nest, things sufficient for spiritual education. Even a pot of flowers at the window can, if necessary, fulfil the purpose.
The concept of education in this sense is quite accessible. Even if there's not enough space or a large area for physical education, you can always find a small patch of land that can be used or a little spot for pigeons to nest—these are enough for spiritual growth. Even a flower pot on the windowsill can serve this purpose if needed.
In the first "Children's House" in Rome we have a vast courtyard, cultivated as a garden, where the children are free to run in the open air—and, besides, a long stretch of ground, which is planted on one side with trees, has a branching path in the middle, and on the opposite side, has broken ground for the cultivation of plants. This last, we have divided into so many portions, reserving one for each child.
In the first "Children's House" in Rome, we have a large courtyard, designed as a garden, where the children can run freely in the fresh air. Additionally, there’s a long area of land, lined with trees on one side, featuring a winding path in the center, and on the other side, uneven ground for growing plants. We've divided this last area into several sections, setting aside one for each child.
While the smaller children run freely up and down the paths, or rest in the shade of the trees, the possessors of the earth (children from four years of age up), are sowing, or hoeing, watering or examining, the surface of the soil watching for the sprouting of plants. It is interesting to note the following fact: the little reservations of the children are placed along the wall of the tenement, in a spot formerly neglected because it leads to a blind road; the inhabitants of the house, therefore, had the habit of throwing from those windows every kind of offal, and at the beginning our garden was thus contaminated.
While the younger kids run around freely on the paths or relax in the shade of the trees, the owners of the land (kids aged four and up) are planting, hoeing, watering, or checking the soil for signs of sprouting plants. It's interesting to point out that the small patches the children have are along the wall of the apartment building, in a place that was once overlooked because it leads to a dead-end street; the residents of the building were used to tossing all kinds of garbage out their windows, so at first, our garden was contaminated by that.
But, little by little, without any exhortation on our part, solely through the respect born in the people's mind for the children's labour, nothing more fell from the windows, except the loving glances and smiles of the mothers upon the soil which was the beloved possession of their little children.
But gradually, without us having to say anything, just through the respect that the community felt for the children's work, nothing else came from the windows except the affectionate looks and smiles of the mothers toward the land that was their little children's cherished possession.
CHAPTER XI
Hands-On Work—The Craft of Pottery and Construction
Manual labour is distinguished from manual gymnastics by the fact that the object of the latter is to exercise the hand, and the former, to accomplish a determinate work, being, or simulating, a socially useful object. The one perfects the individual, the other enriches the world; the two things are, however, connected because, in general, only one who has perfected his own hand can produce a useful product.
Manual labor is different from manual exercise because the purpose of the latter is to work out the hand, while the former aims to complete a specific task, either creating or mimicking something that is socially useful. One develops the individual, while the other benefits the world; however, the two are linked because, generally, only someone who has honed their own skills can create a useful product.
I have thought wise, after a short trial, to exclude completely Froebel's exercises, because weaving and sewing on cardboard are ill adapted to the physiological state of the child's visual organs where the powers of the accommodation of the eye have not yet reached complete development; hence, these exercises cause an effort of the organ which may have a fatal influence on the development of the sight. The other little exercises of Froebel, such as the folding of paper, are exercises of the hand, not work.
I have decided, after a brief trial, to completely remove Froebel's exercises because weaving and sewing on cardboard are not suitable for the child's visual development, as their eyes have not fully matured yet. Therefore, these activities put a strain on their eyes, which could negatively impact their sight development. The other small exercises from Froebel, like paper folding, are activities for the hands, not actual work.
There is still left plastic work,—the most rational among all the exercises of Froebel,—which consists in making the child reproduce determinate objects in clay.
There is still some plastic work left—the most logical of all Froebel's exercises—which involves having the child recreate specific objects with clay.
In consideration, however, of the system of liberty which I proposed, I did not like to make the children copy anything, and, in giving them clay to fashion in their own manner, I did not direct the children to produce useful things; nor was I accomplishing an educative result, inas[Pg 163]much as plastic work, as I shall show later, serves for the study of the psychic individuality of the child in his spontaneous manifestations, but not for his education.
However, considering the system of freedom I proposed, I didn't want to have the kids copy anything. When I gave them clay to shape however they liked, I didn't instruct them to make useful things; nor was I achieving an educational outcome. As I will later explain, artistic work allows us to explore the unique personality of the child in their natural expressions, but it doesn’t contribute to their education.
I decided therefore to try in the "Children's Houses" some very interesting exercises which I had seen accomplished by an artist, Professor Randone, in the "School of Educative Art" founded by him. This school had its origin along with the society for young people, called Giovinezza Gentile, both school and society having the object of educating youth in gentleness towards their surroundings—that is, in respect for objects, buildings, monuments: a really important part of civil education, and one which interested me particularly on account of the "Children's Houses," since that institution has, as its fundamental aim, to teach precisely this respect for the walls, for the house, for the surroundings.
I decided to try some really interesting exercises in the "Children's Houses" that I had seen done by an artist, Professor Randone, at the "School of Educative Art" he founded. This school was established along with a society for young people called Giovinezza Gentile, both of which aimed to educate youth to be gentle toward their surroundings—meaning respect for objects, buildings, and monuments. This is a crucial part of civil education that particularly caught my interest regarding the "Children's Houses," as that institution's main goal is to teach this respect for the walls, for the house, and for the environment.
Very suitably, Professor Randone had decided that the society of Giovinezza Gentile could not be based upon sterile theoretical preachings of the principles of citizenship, or upon moral pledges taken by the children; but that it must proceed from an artistic education which should lead the youth to appreciate and love, and consequently respect, objects and especially monuments and historic buildings. Thus the "School of Educative Art" was inspired by a broad artistic conception including the reproduction of objects which are commonly met in the surroundings; the history and pre-history of their production, and the illustration of the principal civic monuments which, in Rome, are in large measure composed of archæological monuments. In order the more directly to accomplish his object, Professor Randone founded his admirable school in an opening in one of the most artistic parts of the walls of Rome, namely, the wall of Belisarius,[Pg 164] overlooking the Villa Umberto Primo—a wall which has been entirely neglected by the authorities and by no means respected by the citizens, and upon which Randone lavished care, decorating it with graceful hanging gardens on the outside, and locating within it the School of Art which was to shape the Giovinezza Gentile.
Very appropriately, Professor Randone had determined that the society of Giovinezza Gentile should not be built on dry theoretical teachings about the principles of citizenship, or on moral commitments made by the children; instead, it needed to stem from an artistic education that would encourage young people to appreciate, love, and therefore respect, objects, especially monuments and historic buildings. As a result, the "School of Educative Art" was founded on a broad artistic vision that included the reproduction of objects commonly found in the environment, the history and pre-history of their creation, and the depiction of major civic monuments, many of which in Rome are actually archaeological sites. To more directly achieve his goal, Professor Randone established his remarkable school in an opening in one of the most artistic sections of the walls of Rome, specifically the wall of Belisarius,[Pg 164] overlooking the Villa Umberto Primo—a wall that has been completely overlooked by the authorities and not respected by the citizens, which Randone took great care to enhance, adorning it with elegant hanging gardens on the outside, and placing within it the School of Art that would help shape the Giovinezza Gentile.
Here Randone has tried, very fittingly, to rebuild and revive a form of art which was once the glory of Italy and of Florence—the potter's art, that is, the art of constructing vases.
Here Randone has effectively attempted to reconstruct and revive an art form that was once the pride of Italy and Florence—the potter's art, specifically the art of making vases.
The archæological, historical, and artistic importance of the vase is very great, and may be compared with the numismatic art. In fact the first object of which humanity felt the need was the vase, which came into being with the utilisation of fire, and before the discovery of the production of fire. Indeed the first food of mankind was cooked in a vase.
The archaeological, historical, and artistic significance of the vase is immense and can be compared to numismatic art. In fact, the first item that humanity felt a need for was the vase, which emerged with the use of fire, even before the discovery of how to create fire. Truly, the first food that humans ate was cooked in a vase.
One of the things most important, ethnically, in judging the civilisation of a primitive people is the grade of perfection attained in pottery; in fact, the vase for domestic life and the axe for social life are the first sacred symbols which we find in the prehistoric epoch, and are the religious symbols connected with the temples of the gods and with the cult of the dead. Even to-day, religious cults have sacred vases in their Sancta Sanctorum.
One of the most important aspects, in terms of ethnicity, when evaluating the civilization of a primitive people is the level of perfection achieved in pottery; in fact, the vase for daily living and the axe for social purposes are the first sacred symbols we encounter in prehistoric times, and they are the religious symbols related to the temples of the gods and the worship of the dead. Even today, religious practices have sacred vases in their Sancta Sanctorum.
People who have progressed in civilisation show their feeling for art and their æsthetic feeling also in vases which are multiplied in almost infinite form, as we see in Egyptian, Etruscan, and Greek art.
People who have advanced in civilization express their appreciation for art and their aesthetic sense in vases that are replicated in nearly endless varieties, as seen in Egyptian, Etruscan, and Greek art.
The vase then comes into being, attains perfection, and is multiplied in its uses and its forms, in the course of human civilisation; and the history of the vase follows the history of humanity itself. Besides the civil[Pg 165] and moral importance of the vase, we have another and practical one, its literal adaptability to every modification of form, and its susceptibility to the most diverse ornamentation; in this, it gives free scope to the individual genius of the artist.
The vase is created, reaches its perfection, and becomes variously used and shaped throughout human civilization; its story mirrors that of humanity itself. Beyond its social and ethical significance, the vase also has a practical value: its ability to adapt to countless forms and its openness to a wide range of decorations; this allows artists to fully express their unique creativity.
Thus, when once the handicraft leading to the construction of vases has been learned (and this is the part of the progress in the work, learned from the direct and graduated instruction of the teacher), anyone can modify it according to the inspiration of his own æsthetic taste and this is the artistic, individual part of the work. Besides this, in Randone's school the use of the potter's wheel is taught, and also the composition of the mixture for the bath of majolica ware, and baking the pieces in the furnace, stages of manual labour which contain an industrial culture.
So, once you learn the craft of making vases (which comes from the hands-on, step-by-step guidance of the teacher), anyone can adjust it based on their own aesthetic preferences, and that’s the artistic, personal aspect of the work. Additionally, at Randone's school, they teach how to use the potter's wheel, how to mix the materials for the majolica glaze, and how to fire the pieces in the kiln—these are all parts of the manual labor that contribute to an industrial skill set.
Another work in the School of Educative Art is the manufacture of diminutive bricks, and their baking in the furnace, and the construction of diminutive walls built by the same processes which the masons use in the construction of houses, the bricks being joined by means of mortar handled with a trowel. After the simple construction of the wall,—which is very amusing for the children who build it, placing brick on brick, superimposing row on row,—the children pass to the construction of real houses,—first, resting on the ground, and, then, really constructed with foundations, after a previous excavation of large holes in the ground by means of little hoes and shovels. These little houses have openings corresponding to windows and doors, and are variously ornamented in their façades by little tiles of bright and multi-coloured majolica: the tiles themselves being manufactured by the children.[Pg 166]
Another project in the School of Educative Art is making small bricks, baking them in the kiln, and building tiny walls using the same techniques that masons use for real houses. The bricks are joined together with mortar applied with a trowel. After the children have fun building the wall—stacking one brick on top of another, layer by layer—they move on to building actual houses. First, they create houses sitting directly on the ground, and then they build them properly with foundations after digging big holes in the ground using small hoes and shovels. These little houses have openings for windows and doors and are decorated on the facades with small tiles made of bright, colorful majolica, which the children also make themselves.[Pg 166]
Thus the children learn to appreciate the objects and constructions which surround them, while a real manual and artistic labour gives them profitable exercise.
Thus the children learn to appreciate the objects and constructions that surround them, while engaging in actual hands-on and artistic work provides them with valuable practice.
Such is the manual training which I have adopted in the "Children's Houses"; after two or three lessons the little pupils are already enthusiastic about the construction of vases, and they preserve very carefully their own products, in which they take pride. With their plastic art they then model little objects, eggs or fruits, with which they themselves fill the vases. One of the first undertakings is the simple vase of red clay filled with eggs of white clay; then comes the modelling of the vase with one or more spouts, of the narrow-mouthed vase, of the vase with a handle, of that with two or three handles, of the tripod, of the amphora.
This is the hands-on training I've implemented in the "Children's Houses." After just a couple of lessons, the kids are already excited about making vases, and they take great care to keep their creations, which they are proud of. Using their skills in arts and crafts, they then shape little objects like eggs or fruits to fill their vases. One of the first projects is a simple red clay vase filled with white clay eggs. After that, they work on making vases with one or more spouts, narrow-mouth vases, vases with handles, and those with two or three handles, as well as tripods and amphoras.
For children of the age of five or six, the work of the potter's wheel begins. But what most delights the children is the work of building a wall with little bricks, and seeing a little house, the fruit of their own hands, rise in the vicinity of the ground in which are growing plants, also cultivated by them. Thus the age of childhood epitomises the principal primitive labours of humanity, when the human race, changing from the nomadic to the stable condition, demanded of the earth its fruit, built itself shelter, and devised vases to cook the foods yielded by the fertile earth.
For kids around five or six years old, the work at the potter's wheel begins. But what really excites them is building a wall with tiny bricks and watching a little house, made by their own hands, rise up alongside the plants they’ve also grown. This way, childhood embodies the main basic tasks of humanity, when people transitioned from being nomadic to settling down, asking the earth for its produce, building shelters, and creating pots to cook the food provided by the fertile land.
CHAPTER XII
Sensory Education
In a pedagogical method which is experimental the education of the senses must undoubtedly assume the greatest importance. Experimental psychology also takes note of movements by means of sense measurements.
In an experimental teaching approach, the education of the senses must definitely be of utmost importance. Experimental psychology also considers movements through sensory measurements.
Pedagogy, however, although it may profit by psychometry is not designed to measure the sensations, but educate the senses. This is a point easily understood, yet one which is often confused. While the proceedings of esthesiometry are not to any great extent applicable to little children, the education of the senses is entirely possible.
Pedagogy, while it can benefit from psychometry, isn't meant to measure sensations, but rather to educate the senses. This is a concept that’s easy to grasp, yet frequently misunderstood. Although the methods of esthesiometry aren’t very applicable to young children, the education of the senses is completely achievable.
We do not start from the conclusions of experimental psychology. That is, it is not the knowledge of the average sense conditions according to the age of the child which leads us to determine the educational applications we shall make. We start essentially from a method, and it is probable that psychology will be able to draw its conclusions from pedagogy so understood, and not vice versa.
We don’t begin with the conclusions of experimental psychology. In other words, it’s not the understanding of typical sensory experiences based on a child’s age that guides us in deciding the educational methods we’ll use. Instead, we fundamentally start from a method, and it’s likely that psychology will be able to derive its conclusions from pedagogy as understood in this way, and not vice versa.
The method used by me is that of making a pedagogical experiment with a didactic object and awaiting the spontaneous reaction of the child. This is a method in every way analogous to that of experimental psychology.
The method I use involves conducting a teaching experiment with a learning tool and observing the child's natural reactions. This approach is very similar to that of experimental psychology.
I make use of a material which, at first glance, may be confused with psychometric material. Teachers from[Pg 168] Milan who had followed the course in the Milan school of experimental psychology, seeing my material exposed, would recognise among it, measures of the perception of colour, hardness, and weight, and would conclude that, in truth, I brought no new contribution to pedagogy since these instruments were already known to them.
I use a material that might initially seem similar to psychometric tools. Teachers from[Pg 168] Milan who attended the course in the Milan school of experimental psychology would see my material and recognize measures of color perception, hardness, and weight. They would think that I hadn’t introduced anything new to pedagogy since these instruments were already familiar to them.
But the great difference between the two materials lies in this: The esthesiometer carries within itself the possibility of measuring; my objects on the contrary, often do not permit a measure, but are adapted to cause the child to exercise the senses.
But the main difference between the two materials is this: The esthesiometer can actually measure; my objects, on the other hand, often can't be measured but are designed to help the child exercise their senses.
In order that an instrument shall attain such a pedagogical end, it is necessary that it shall not weary but shall divert the child. Here lies the difficulty in the selection of didactic material. It is known that the psychometric instruments are great consumers of energy—for this reason, when Pizzoli wished to apply them to the education of the senses, he did not succeed because the child was annoyed by them, and became tired. Instead, the aim of education is to develop the energies.
To achieve a pedagogical goal, an instrument must engage the child without making them feel weary, but rather diverted. This is the challenge when selecting teaching materials. It's known that psychometric tools can be big energy consumers—for this reason, when Pizzoli tried to use them to enhance sensory education, he failed because the child found them irritating and became exhausted. Instead, the goal of education is to cultivate energies.
Psychometric instruments, or better, the instruments of esthesiometry, are prepared in their differential gradations upon the laws of Weber, which were in truth drawn from experiments made upon adults.
Psychometric tools, or more accurately, the tools of esthesiometry, are developed in various levels based on Weber's laws, which were actually derived from experiments conducted on adults.
With little children, we must proceed to the making of trials, and must select the didactic materials in which they show themselves to be interested.
With young kids, we need to start experimenting and choose teaching materials that they are actually interested in.
This I did in the first year of the "Children's Houses" adopting a great variety of stimuli, with a number of which I had already experimented in the school for deficients.
This I did in the first year of the "Children's Houses," using a wide range of stimuli, some of which I had already tested in the school for kids with difficulties.
Much of the material used for deficients is abandoned in the education of the normal child—and much that is[Pg 169] used has been greatly modified. I believe, however, that I have arrived at a selection of objects (which I do not here wish to speak of in the technical language of psychology as stimuli) representing the minimum necessary to a practical sense education.
Much of the material intended for those with deficiencies is neglected in the education of typical children—and much of what is used has been significantly altered. However, I believe I've come up with a selection of objects (which I won't refer to here in the technical terms of psychology as stimuli) that represent the minimum necessary for a practical sense education.
These objects constitute the didactic system (or set of didactic materials) used by me. They are manufactured by the House of Labour of the Humanitarian Society at Milan.
These items make up the didactic system (or collection of teaching materials) that I use. They are produced by the House of Labour of the Humanitarian Society in Milan.
A description of the objects will be given as the educational scope of each is explained. Here I shall limit myself to the setting forth of a few general considerations.
A description of the objects will be provided as the educational purpose of each is explained. Here, I'll focus on a few general points.
First. The difference in the reaction between deficient and normal children, in the presentation of didactic material made up of graded stimuli. This difference is plainly seen from the fact that the same didactic material used with deficients makes education possible, while with normal children it provokes auto-education.
First. The difference in how deficient and normal children react to graded stimuli in educational materials. This difference is clearly evident from the fact that the same educational material used with deficient children makes learning possible, while with normal children it encourages self-directed learning.
This fact is one of the most interesting I have met with in all my experience, and it inspired and rendered possible the method of observation and liberty.
This fact is one of the most interesting I've encountered in all my experience, and it inspired and made possible the method of observation and liberty.
Let us suppose that we use our first object,—a block in which solid geometric forms are set. Into corresponding holes in the block are set ten little wooden cylinders, the bases diminishing gradually about the millimetres. The game consists in taking the cylinders out of their places, putting them on the table, mixing them, and then putting each one back in its own place. The aim is to educate the eye to the differential perception of dimensions.
Let's say we use our first object—a block with solid geometric shapes. There are ten small wooden cylinders with bases that gradually get smaller by a few millimeters, which fit into matching holes in the block. The game involves taking the cylinders out, placing them on the table, mixing them up, and then putting each one back in its correct spot. The goal is to train the eye to perceive differences in size.
With the deficient child, it would be necessary to begin with exercises in which the stimuli were much more[Pg 170] strongly contrasted, and to arrive at this exercise only after many others had preceded it.
With the struggling child, it would be important to start with exercises that had much morestrongly contrasted stimuli, and to get to this exercise only after many others had come before it.
With normal children, this is, on the other hand, the first object which we may present, and out of all the didactic material this is the game preferred by the very little children of two and a half and three years. Once we arrived at this exercise with a deficient child, it was necessary continually and actively to recall his attention, inviting him to look at the block and showing him the various pieces. And if the child once succeeded in placing all the cylinders properly, he stopped, and the game was finished. Whenever the deficient child committed an error, it was necessary to correct it, or to urge him to correct it himself, and when he was able to correct an error he was usually quite indifferent.
With typical kids, this is, on the other hand, the first object we can present, and out of all the teaching materials, this is the game most favored by young children around two and a half to three years old. When we got to this exercise with a child who has developmental delays, we had to constantly and actively grab his attention, encouraging him to look at the block and showing him the different pieces. If the child managed to place all the cylinders correctly once, he would stop, and the game would be over. Whenever the child made a mistake, it was essential to correct it or encourage him to fix it himself, and when he was able to correct a mistake, he usually didn't seem to care much.
Now the normal child, instead, takes spontaneously a lively interest in this game. He pushes away all who would interfere, or offer to help him, and wishes to be alone before his problem.
Now the typical child, instead, takes a lively interest in this game on his own. He pushes away anyone who tries to interfere or offer help, and he wants to be alone with his problem.
It had already been noted that little ones of two or three years take the greatest pleasure in arranging small objects, and this experiment in the "Children's Houses" demonstrates the truth of this assertion.
It has already been observed that toddlers around two or three years old find the most joy in organizing small items, and this experiment in the "Children's Houses" shows that this statement is true.
Now, and here is the important point, the normal child attentively observes the relation between the size of the opening and that of the object which he is to place in the mould, and is greatly interested in the game, as is clearly shown by the expression of attention on the little face.
Now, here's the key point: the typical child carefully watches the relationship between the size of the opening and the object they are going to put in the mold, and they're really engaged in the game, which is clearly reflected in the focused expression on their little face.
If he mistakes, placing one of the objects in an opening that is small for it, he takes it away, and proceeds to make various trials, seeking the proper opening. If he makes a contrary error, letting the cylinder fall into[Pg 171] an opening that is a little too large for it, and then collects all the successive cylinders in openings just a little too large, he will find himself at the last with the big cylinder in his hand while only the smallest opening is empty. The didactic material controls every error. The child proceeds to correct himself, doing this in various ways. Most often he feels the cylinders or shakes them, in order to recognise which are the largest. Sometimes, he sees at a glance where his error lies, pulls the cylinders from the places where they should not be, and puts those left out where they belong, then replaces all the others. The normal child always repeats the exercise with growing interest.
If he makes a mistake by putting one of the objects into an opening that's too small, he takes it out and tries different openings to find the right one. If he makes the opposite mistake by dropping the cylinder into an opening that's a bit too large and then collects all the other cylinders in openings that are also a bit too large, he will eventually end up with the big cylinder in his hand while only the smallest opening is empty. The educational material addresses every mistake. The child corrects himself in various ways. Most often, he feels the cylinders or shakes them to identify which ones are the largest. Sometimes, he instantly sees where he went wrong, takes the cylinders out of the spots where they don't belong, places the ones he missed in the right spots, and then puts everything else back. The typical child always repeats the exercise with increasing interest.
Indeed, it is precisely in these errors that the educational importance of the didactic material lies, and when the child with evident security places each piece in its proper place, he has outgrown the exercise, and this piece of material becomes useless to him.
Indeed, it’s in these errors that the educational value of the teaching materials really shines. When the child confidently puts each piece in its correct spot, they’ve moved beyond the exercise, and that piece of material becomes ineffective for them.
This self-correction leads the child to concentrate his attention upon the differences of dimensions, and to compare the various pieces. It is in just this comparison that the psycho-sensory exercise lies.
This self-correction helps the child focus on the differences in size and compare the different pieces. It's in this comparison that the psycho-sensory exercise occurs.
There is, therefore, no question here of teaching the child the knowledge of the dimensions, through the medium of these pieces. Neither is it our aim that the child shall know how to use, without an error, the material presented to him thus performing the exercises well.
There’s no point in teaching the child the knowledge of the dimensions through these pieces. Nor is our goal for the child to use the material presented to him without making mistakes while performing the exercises correctly.
That would place our material on the same basis as many others, for example that of Froebel, and would require again the active work of the teacher, who busies herself furnishing knowledge, and making haste to correct every error in order that the child may learn the use of the objects.[Pg 172]
That would put our approach on the same level as many others, like Froebel’s, and would again demand the active involvement of the teacher, who dedicates herself to providing knowledge and quickly correcting any mistakes so that the child can learn how to use the objects.[Pg 172]
Here instead it is the work of the child, the auto-correction, the auto-education which acts, for the teacher must not interfere in the slightest way. No teacher can furnish the child with the agility which he acquires through gymnastic exercises: it is necessary that the pupil perfect himself through his own efforts. It is very much the same with the education of the senses.
Here, it's the child's effort, the self-correction, and the self-education that matters, for the teacher must not interfere in the slightest way. No teacher can provide the child with the agility he gains through physical exercises: it's essential that the pupil perfects himself through his own efforts. The same goes for the education of the senses.
It might be said that the same thing is true of every form of education; a man is not what he is because of the teachers he has had, but because of what he has done.
It could be argued that the same applies to all types of education; a person isn't defined by the teachers they've had, but by their own actions.
One of the difficulties of putting this method into practice with teachers of the old school, lies in the difficulty of preventing them from intervening when the little child remains for some time puzzled before some error, and with his eyebrows drawn together and his lips puckered, makes repeated efforts to correct himself. When they see this, the old-time teachers are seized with pity, and long, with an almost irresistible force, to help the child. When we prevent this intervention, they burst into words of compassion for the little scholar, but he soon shows in his smiling face the joy of having surmounted an obstacle.
One of the challenges of applying this method with traditional teachers is stopping them from jumping in when a young child is struggling with a mistake. The child, with furrowed brows and pursed lips, makes several attempts to fix it on their own. When old-school teachers see this, they feel a rush of sympathy and a strong urge to assist the child. If we stop this interference, they express their concern for the young student, but soon the child’s smiling face reflects the happiness of overcoming the challenge.
Normal children repeat such exercises many times. This repetition varies according to the individual. Some children after having completed the exercise five or six times are tired of it. Others will remove and replace the pieces at least twenty times, with an expression of evident interest. Once, after I had watched a little one of four years repeat this exercise sixteen times, I had the other children sing in order to distract her, but she continued unmoved to take out the cylinders, mix them up and put them back in their places.
Normal kids do this kind of exercise many times. How often they repeat it depends on the child. Some kids get bored after doing it five or six times. Others will take the pieces out and put them back at least twenty times, clearly showing they’re interested. Once, after I saw a four-year-old do this exercise sixteen times, I had the other kids sing to distract her, but she kept right on taking out the cylinders, mixing them up, and putting them back in their spots.
An intelligent teacher ought to be able to make most interesting individual psychological observations, and, to[Pg 173] a certain point, should be able to measure the length of time for which the various stimuli held the attention.
An intelligent teacher should be able to make the most interesting observations about individual psychology and, to some extent, should be able to measure how long different stimuli keep students' attention.
In fact, when the child educates himself, and when the control and correction of errors is yielded to the didactic material, there remains for the teacher nothing but to observe. She must then be more of a psychologist than a teacher, and this shows the importance of a scientific preparation on the part of the teacher.
In fact, when the child learns on their own, and when the control and correction of mistakes is handled by the educational material, there is nothing left for the teacher but to observe. She needs to be more of a psychologist than a teacher, which highlights the importance of having a solid scientific background as a teacher.
Indeed, with my methods, the teacher teaches little and observes much, and, above all, it is her function to direct the psychic activity of the children and their physiological development. For this reason I have changed the name of teacher into that of directress.
Indeed, with my methods, the teacher teaches little and observes much, and, above all, it is her role to guide the mental activity of the children and their physical development. For this reason, I have changed the name of teacher to that of directress.
At first this name provoked many smiles, for everyone asked whom there was for this teacher to direct, since she had no assistants, and since she must leave her little scholars in liberty. But her direction is much more profound and important than that which is commonly understood, for this teacher directs the life and the soul.
At first, this name made everyone smile because they wondered who this teacher would guide since she had no assistants and had to let her little students be free. But her guidance is much deeper and more meaningful than most people realize, because this teacher guides the life and the soul.
Second. The education of the senses has, as its aim, the refinement of the differential perception of stimuli by means of repeated exercises.
Second. The training of the senses aims to sharpen the ability to notice differences in stimuli through repeated practice.
There exists a sensory culture, which is not generally taken into consideration, but which is a factor in esthesiometry.
There is a sensory culture that is usually overlooked, but it plays a role in esthesiometry.
For example, in the mental tests which are used in France, or in a series of tests which De Sanctis has established for the diagnosis of the intellectual status, I have often seen used cubes of different sizes placed at varying distances. The child was to select the smallest and the largest, while the chronometer measured the time of reaction between the command and the execution of the act. Account was also taken of the errors. I repeat that[Pg 174] in such experiments the factor of culture is forgotten and by this I mean sensory culture.
For example, in the mental tests used in France, or in a series of tests established by De Sanctis for the diagnosis of intellectual status, I've often seen cubes of different sizes placed at varying distances. The child was supposed to select the smallest and the largest, while a chronometer measured the time between the command and the action. Errors were also noted. I want to emphasize that[Pg 174] in such experiments, the factor of culture is overlooked, and by this, I mean sensory culture.
Our children have, for example, among the didactic material for the education of the senses, a series of ten cubes. The first has a base of ten centimetres, and the others decrease, successively, one centimetre as to base, the smallest cube having a base of one centimetre. The exercise consists in throwing the blocks, which are pink in colour, down upon a green carpet, and then building them up into a little tower, placing the largest cube as the base, and then placing the others in order of size until the little cube of one centimetre is placed at the top.
Our children have, for example, a set of ten cubes as part of the sensory education materials. The first cube is ten centimeters on each side, and the others decrease in size by one centimeter each, with the smallest cube measuring one centimeter. The exercise involves tossing the pink blocks onto a green carpet and then stacking them into a small tower, starting with the largest cube on the bottom and arranging the others in order of size, finishing with the one-centimeter cube at the top.
The little one must each time select, from the blocks scattered upon the green carpet, "the largest" block. This game is most entertaining to the little ones of two years and a half, who, as soon as they have constructed the little tower, tumble it down with little blows of the hand, admiring the pink cubes as they lie scattered upon the green carpet. Then, they begin again the construction, building and destroying a definite number of times.
The toddler has to choose, each time, from the blocks scattered on the green carpet, "the biggest" block. This game is really fun for two-and-a-half-year-olds, who, once they’ve built the little tower, knock it down with gentle taps of their hands, admiring the pink cubes as they lie spread out on the green carpet. Then, they start building again, constructing and destroying for a set number of times.
If we were to place before these tests one of my children from three to four years, and one of the children from the first elementary (six or seven years old), my pupil would undoubtedly manifest a shorter period of reaction, and would not commit errors. The same may be said for the tests of the chromatic sense, etc.
If we were to put one of my kids who is three or four years old and one of the kids from the first grade (six or seven years old) up against these tests, my student would definitely show a quicker reaction time and wouldn’t make mistakes. The same goes for the tests on color perception, etc.
This educational method should therefore prove interesting to students of experimental psychology as well as to teachers.
This teaching method should be interesting to both students of experimental psychology and teachers.
In conclusion, let me summarize briefly: Our didactic material renders auto-education possible, permits a methodical education of the senses. Not upon the ability of the teacher does such education rest, but upon the[Pg 175] didactic system. This presents objects which, first, attract the spontaneous attention of the child, and, second, contain a rational gradation of stimuli.
In conclusion, let me summarize briefly: Our educational materials make self-education possible and allow for a systematic education of the senses. This type of education doesn't rely on the teacher's ability, but on the[Pg 175] didactic system. This system presents objects that first capture the child's natural attention and second, contain a logical progression of stimuli.
We must not confuse the education of the senses, with the concrete ideas which may be gathered from our environment by means of the senses. Nor must this education of the senses be identical in our minds with the language through which is given the nomenclature corresponding to the concrete idea, nor with the acquisition of the abstract idea of the exercises.
We must not mix up the education of our senses with the specific ideas we can gather from our surroundings through those senses. Also, this education of the senses shouldn't be confused with the language used to label the concrete idea, nor with the understanding of the abstract idea from the exercises.
Let us consider what the music master does in giving instruction in piano playing. He teaches the pupil the correct position of the body, gives him the idea of the notes, shows him the correspondence between the written notes and the touch and the position of the fingers, and then he leaves the child to perform the exercise by himself. If a pianist is to be made of this child, there must, between the ideas given by the teacher and the musical exercises, intervene long and patient application to those exercises which serve to give agility to the articulation of the fingers and of the tendons, in order that the co-ordination of special muscular movements shall become automatic, and that the muscles of the hand shall become strong through their repeated use.
Let’s look at what a music teacher does when teaching piano. They show the student the correct body posture, explain the concept of notes, demonstrate how written notes correspond to finger placement and touch, and then allow the student to practice on their own. If this child is to become a pianist, there has to be a long and patient dedication to practicing those exercises that develop finger and tendon agility. This way, the coordination of specific muscle movements will become automatic, and the muscles in the hand will strengthen through repeated use.
The pianist must, therefore, act for himself, and the more his natural tendencies lead him to persist in these exercises the greater will be his success. However, without the direction of the master the exercise will not suffice to develop the scholar into a true pianist.
The pianist must, therefore, act for himself, and the more his natural tendencies lead him to persist in these exercises, the greater his success will be. However, without the guidance of a teacher, the exercise alone won't be enough to develop the student into a true pianist.
The directress of the "Children's House" must have a clear idea of the two factors which enter into her work—the guidance of the child, and the individual exercise.
The director of the "Children's House" must have a clear understanding of the two factors involved in her work—the guidance of the child and the individual exercise.
Only after she has this concept clearly fixed in her[Pg 176] mind, may she proceed to the application of a method to guide the spontaneous education of the child and to impart necessary notions to him.
Only after she has this concept clearly fixed in her[Pg 176] mind can she proceed to applying a method to guide the child's spontaneous education and teach him the necessary concepts.
In the opportune quality and in the manner of this intervention lies the personal art of the educator.
In the right timing and approach of this intervention lies the personal art of the educator.
For example, in the "Children's House" in the Prati di Castello, where the pupils belong to the middle-class, I found, a month after the opening of the school, a child of five years who already knew how to compose any word, as he knew the alphabet perfectly—he had learned it in two weeks. He knew how to write on the blackboard, and in the exercises in free design he showed himself not only to be an observer, but to have some intuitive idea of perspective, drawing a house and chair very cleverly. As for the exercises of the chromatic sense, he could mix together the eight gradations of the eight colours which we use, and from this mass of sixty-four tablets, each wound with silk of a different colour or shade, he could rapidly separate the eight groups. Having done this, he would proceed with ease to arrange each colour series in perfect gradation. In this game the child would almost cover one of the little tables with a carpet of finely-shaded colours. I made the experiment, taking him to the window and showing him in full daylight one of the coloured tablets, telling him to look at it well, so that he might be able to remember it. I then sent him to the table on which all the gradations were spread out, and asked him to find the tablet like the one at which he had looked. He committed only very slight errors, often choosing the exact shade but more often the one next it, rarely a tint two grades removed from the right one. This boy had then a power of discrimination and a colour memory which were almost prodigious. Like all the other children, he[Pg 177] was exceedingly fond of the colour exercises. But when I asked the name of the white colour spool, he hesitated for a long time before replying uncertainly "white." Now a child of such intelligence should have been able, even without the special intervention of the teacher, to learn the name of each colour.
For example, in the "Children's House" in the Prati di Castello, where the students are from middle-class backgrounds, I discovered a five-year-old child about a month after the school opened. This child already knew how to spell any word, as he had mastered the alphabet perfectly—he learned it in just two weeks. He could write on the blackboard, and in the free design exercises, he demonstrated both keen observation and some intuitive understanding of perspective, skillfully drawing a house and a chair. When it came to color exercises, he could mix the eight gradations of the eight colors we used, and from a collection of sixty-four tablets, each wrapped in silk of a different color or shade, he could quickly sort them into eight groups. Once he did this, he easily arranged each color series in perfect gradation. In this activity, he would almost cover one of the small tables with a beautifully blended array of colors. I conducted an experiment by taking him to the window and showing him one of the colored tablets in full light, asking him to really focus on it so he could remember it. I then had him go to the table with all the gradations laid out and asked him to find the tablet that matched the one he had just seen. He made only minor mistakes, often choosing the exact shade and, more often, the one next to it, rarely selecting a color two shades off from the correct one. This boy displayed almost incredible discrimination and color memory. Like all the other children, he was very fond of the color exercises. However, when I asked him the name of the white color spool, he hesitated a long time before answering uncertainly, "white." A child with such intelligence should have been able, even without direct guidance from the teacher, to learn the name of each color.
The directress told me that having noticed that the child had great difficulty in retaining the nomenclature of the colours, she had up until that time left him to exercise himself freely with the games for the colour sense. At the same time he had developed rapidly a power over written language, which in my method as presented through a series of problems to be solved. These problems are presented as sense exercises. This child was, therefore, most intelligent. In him the discriminative sensory perceptions kept pace with great intellectual activities—attention and judgment. But his memory for names was inferior.
The director told me that she noticed the child had a hard time remembering the names of colors, so she had let him play freely with the games designed for developing color sense up until that point. Meanwhile, he had quickly gained a strong ability in written language, which I teach through a series of problems to be solved. These problems are presented as sensory exercises. This child was, therefore, very intelligent. His ability to discriminate sensory perceptions matched his great intellectual activities—attention and judgment. However, his memory for names was weaker.
The directress had thought best not to interfere, as yet, in the teaching of the child. Certainly, the education of the child was a little disordered, and the directress had left the spontaneous explanation of his mental activities excessively free. However desirable it may be to furnish a sense education as a basis for intellectual ideas, it is nevertheless advisable at the same time to associate the language with these perceptions.
The director thought it best not to interfere in the child's education just yet. Sure, the child's education was a bit unorganized, and the director had allowed the spontaneous explanation of his mental activities to be too free. While it’s important to provide a sense education as a foundation for intellectual ideas, it’s also advisable to link the language with these perceptions at the same time.
In this connection I have found excellent for use with normal children the three periods of which the lesson according to Séguin consists:
In this regard, I have found the three periods that make up the lesson according to Séguin to be excellent for use with typical children:
First Period. The association of the sensory perception with the name.
First Period. The connection between sensory perception and its name.
For example, we present to the child, two colours, red and blue. Presenting the red, we say simply, "This is[Pg 178] red," and presenting the blue, "This is blue." Then, we lay the spools upon the table under the eyes of the child.
For example, we show the child two colors, red and blue. When we show the red, we say simply, "This is red," and when we show the blue, "This is blue." Then, we place the spools on the table for the child to see.
Second Period. Recognition of the object corresponding to the name. We Say to the child, "Give me the red," and then, "Give me the blue."
Second Period. Recognizing the object that matches the name. We say to the child, "Give me the red one," and then, "Give me the blue one."
Third Period. The remembering of the name corresponding to the object. We ask the child, showing him the object, "What is this?" and he should respond, "Red."
Third Period. Remembering the name that goes with the object. We ask the child, showing him the object, "What is this?" and he should reply, "Red."
Séguin insists strongly upon these three periods, and urges that the colours be left for several instants under the eyes of the child. He also advises us never to present the colour singly, but always two at a time, since the contrast helps the chromatic memory. Indeed, I have proved that there cannot be a better method for teaching colour to the deficients, who, with this method were able to learn the colours much more perfectly than normal children in the ordinary schools who have had a haphazard sense education. For normal children however there exists a period preceding the Three Periods of Séguin—a period which contains the real sense education. This is the acquisition of a fineness of differential perception, which can be obtained only through auto-education.
Séguin strongly emphasizes these three stages and recommends that colors be shown to the child for several moments. He also suggests that we should never present a color alone, but always in pairs, as the contrast reinforces color memory. In fact, I have found that this method is the best way to teach color to those with disabilities, who can learn colors much more effectively than typical children in regular schools that have had a random sensory education. However, for typical children, there is a period preceding Séguin's Three Periods—one that includes the real sense education. This is the development of a refined ability to differentiate, which can be achieved only through self-directed learning.
This, then, is an example of the great superiority of the normal child, and of the greater effect of education which such pedagogical methods may exercise upon the mental development of normal as compared with deficient children.
This is an example of how much better a typical child does and how much more impact education can have on the mental growth of normal kids compared to those who have deficiencies.
The association of the name with the stimulus is a source of great pleasure to the normal child. I remember, one day, I had taught a little girl, who was not yet three years old, and who was a little tardy in the development of language, the names of three colours. I had the children place one of their little tables near a window, and[Pg 179] seating myself in one of the little chairs, I seated the little girl in a similar chair at my right.
The connection between names and what they refer to brings a lot of joy to an average child. I remember one day when I taught a little girl, who wasn’t yet three and was a bit slow in learning to speak, the names of three colors. I had the kids set up one of their little tables by a window, and [Pg 179] I sat in one of the tiny chairs while the little girl sat in a similar chair to my right.
I had, on the table, six of the colour spools in pairs, that is two reds, two blues, two yellows. In the First Period, I placed one of the spools before the child, asking her to find the one like it. This I repeated for all three of the colours, showing her how to arrange them carefully in pairs. After this I passed to the Three Periods of Séguin. The little girl learned to recognise the three colours and to pronounce the name of each.
I had six color spools on the table in pairs: two reds, two blues, and two yellows. In the first session, I placed one of the spools in front of the child, asking her to find the matching one. I repeated this for all three colors, showing her how to neatly arrange them in pairs. After that, I moved on to the Three Periods of Séguin. The little girl learned to recognize the three colors and pronounce the name of each one.
She was so happy that she looked at me for a long time, and then began to jump up and down. I, seeing her pleasure, said to her, laughing, "Do you know the colours?" and she replied, still jumping up and down, "Yes! YES!" Her delight was inexhaustible; she danced about me, waiting joyously for me to ask her the same question, that she might reply with the same enthusiasm, "Yes! Yes!"
She was so happy that she stared at me for a long time and then started jumping up and down. Seeing her joy, I laughed and asked, "Do you know the colors?" She answered, still jumping, "Yes! YES!" Her excitement was endless; she danced around me, eagerly waiting for me to ask her the same question so she could respond with the same enthusiasm, "Yes! Yes!"
Another important particular in the technique of sense education lies in isolating the sense, whenever this is possible. So, for example, the exercises on the sense of hearing can be given more successfully in an environment not only of silence, but even of darkness.
Another important aspect of sense education is isolating the sense, whenever possible. For instance, exercises focused on the sense of hearing can be more effective in a setting that is not only quiet but also dark.
For the education of the senses in general, such as in the tactile, thermic, baric, and stereognostic exercises, we blindfold the child. The reasons for this particular technique have been fully set forth by psychology. Here, it is enough to note that in the case of normal children the blindfold greatly increases their interest, without making the exercises degenerate into noisy fun, and without having the child's attention attracted more to the bandage than to the sense-stimuli upon which we wish to focus the attention.[Pg 180]
To help kids develop their senses, like touch, temperature, weight, and spatial awareness, we blindfold them. Psychology has thoroughly explained why this method works well. For regular children, wearing a blindfold makes the activities much more engaging without turning them into chaotic playtime, and it ensures the child focuses more on the sensory experiences rather than the blindfold itself.[Pg 180]
For example, in order to test the acuteness of the child's sense of hearing (a most important thing for the teacher to know), I use an empiric test which is coming to be used almost universally by physicians in the making of medical examinations. This test is made by modulating the voice, reducing it to a whisper. The child is blindfolded, or the teacher may stand behind him, speaking his name, in a whisper and from varying distances. I establish a solemn silence in the schoolroom, darken the windows, have the children bow their heads upon their hands which they hold in front of their eyes. Then I call the children by name, one by one, in a whisper, lighter for those who are nearer me, and more clearly for those farther away. Each child awaits, in the darkness, the faint voice which calls him, listening intently, ready to run with keenest joy toward the mysterious and much, desired call.
For example, to test how well the child can hear (which is really important for the teacher to know), I use a hands-on test that's becoming pretty common among doctors in medical exams. This test involves lowering my voice to a whisper. The child is blindfolded, or the teacher can stand behind them, saying their name in a whisper from different distances. I create a solemn silence in the classroom, darken the windows, and have the kids bow their heads on their hands in front of their eyes. Then, I call the children by name, one at a time, in a whisper—softer for those closest to me and clearer for those farther away. Each child waits in the dark, listening intently for the soft voice that calls them, eager to run joyfully toward the mysterious and eagerly awaited call.
The normal child may be blindfolded in the games where, for example, he is to recognise various weights, for this does help him to intensify and concentrate his attention upon the baric stimuli which he is to test. The blindfold adds to his pleasure, since he is proud of having been able to guess.
The average child can be blindfolded in games where they need to identify different weights, as this helps them focus and concentrate on the weight sensations they are testing. The blindfold also enhances their enjoyment, as they take pride in being able to make accurate guesses.
The effect of these games upon deficient children is very different. When placed in darkness, they often go to sleep, or give themselves up to disordered acts. When the blindfold is used, they fix their attention upon the bandage itself, and change the exercise into a game, which does not fulfil the end we have in view with the exercise.
The impact of these games on children with deficiencies is quite different. When in the dark, they often fall asleep or engage in chaotic behaviors. When a blindfold is used, they focus on the bandage itself and turn the activity into a game, which does not achieve the purpose we intended with the exercise.
We speak, it is true, of games in education, but it must be made clear that we understand by this term a free activity, ordered to a definite end; not disorderly noise, which distracts the attention.[Pg 181]
We talk about games in education, but we need to clarify that we mean a structured activity aimed at a specific goal; not chaotic noise that distracts attention.[Pg 181]
The following pages of Itard give an idea of the patient experiments made by this pioneer in pedagogy. Their lack of success was due largely to errors which successive experiments have made it possible to correct, and in part to the mentality of his subject.
The following pages of Itard show the patient experiments conducted by this pioneer in education. Their lack of success was mainly due to mistakes that later experiments have allowed us to fix, and partly because of the mindset of his subject.
"IV: In this last experiment it was not necessary, as in the one preceding, to demand that the pupil repeat the sounds which he perceived. This double work, distributing his attention, was outside the plane of my purpose, which was to educate each organ separately. I, therefore, limited myself to following the simple perception of sounds. To be certain of this result, I placed my pupil in front of me with his eyes blinded, his fists closed, and had him extend a finger every time that I made a sound. He understood this arrangement, and as soon as the sound reached his ear, the finger was raised, with a species of impetuosity, and often, with demonstrations of joy which left no doubt as to the pleasure the pupil took in these bizarre lessons. Indeed, whether it be that he found a real pleasure in the sound of the human voice, or that he had at last conquered the annoyance he at first felt on being deprived of the light for so long a time, the fact remains that more than once, during the intervals of rest, he came to me with his blindfold in his hand, holding it over his eyes, and jumping with joy when he felt my hands tying it about his head.
"IV: In this last experiment, it wasn't necessary, like in the one before, to ask the student to repeat the sounds he heard. This dual task would split his focus, which wasn’t the goal; I aimed to train each sense individually. So, I limited myself to observing his basic perception of sounds. To ensure this worked, I had the student sit in front of me with his eyes covered, fists closed, and instructed him to lift a finger every time I made a sound. He understood this setup, and as soon as he heard a sound, his finger shot up, often with enthusiasm and joy, clearly showing how much he enjoyed these unusual lessons. Whether he genuinely loved the sound of the human voice or had simply gotten used to being in the dark for so long, it was clear that more than once, during breaks, he approached me with his blindfold in hand, holding it over his eyes and jumping with excitement when he felt my hands tying it around his head."
"V: Having thoroughly assured myself, through such experiments as the one described above, that all sounds of the voice, whatever their intensity, were perceived by Vittorio, I proceeded to the attempt of making him compare these sounds. It was no longer a case of simply noting the sounds of the voice, but of perceiving the differences and of appreciating all these modifications and[Pg 182] varieties of tone which go to make up the music of the word. Between this task and the preceding there stretched a prodigious difference, especially for a being whose development was dependent upon gradual effort, and who advanced toward civilisation only because I led thitherward so gently that he was unconscious of the progress. Facing the difficulty now presented, I had need to arm myself more strongly than ever with patience and gentleness, encouraged by the hope that once I had surmounted this obstacle all would have been done for the sense of hearing.
V: After thoroughly confirming, through experiments like the one described above, that Vittorio could perceive all sounds of the voice, regardless of their intensity, I moved on to making him compare these sounds. It was no longer just about noticing the sounds of the voice, but about recognizing the differences and appreciating all the nuances and variations of tone that create the music of words. There was a huge difference between this task and the previous one, especially for someone whose development relied on gradual effort, and who only advanced toward civilization because I led him there so gently that he was unaware of the progress. Facing this new challenge, I needed to equip myself with even more patience and gentleness, fueled by the hope that once I overcame this hurdle, I would have completed the work on his sense of hearing.
"We began with the comparison of the vowel sounds, and here, too, made use of the hand to assure ourselves as to the result of our experiments. Each one of the fingers was made the sign of one of the five vowels. Thus the thumb represented A and was to be raised whenever this vowel was pronounced; the index finger was the sign for E; the middle finger for I; and so on.
"We started by comparing the vowel sounds, using our hands to confirm the results of our experiments. Each finger represented one of the five vowels. The thumb stood for A and was raised whenever this vowel was pronounced; the index finger signified E; the middle finger represented I; and so on."
"VI: Not without fatigue, and not for a long time, was I able to give a distinct idea of the vowels. The first to be clearly distinguished was O, and then followed A. The three others presented much greater difficulty, and were for a long time confused. At last, however, the ear began to perceive distinctly, and, then, there returned in all their vivacity, those demonstrations of joy of which I have spoken. This continued until the pleasure taken in the lessons began to be boisterous, the sounds became confused, and the finger was raised indiscriminately. The outbursts of laughter became indeed so excessive that I lost patience! As soon as I placed the blindfold over his eyes the shouts of laughter began."
"VI: It wasn’t easy, and it took a while, but I finally managed to get a clear understanding of the vowels. The first one I recognized was O, followed by A. The other three were much harder to distinguish and were confused for a long time. Eventually, though, my ear started to pick up the differences clearly, and all the joyful reactions I mentioned before came back with full force. This went on until the excitement in the lessons became too loud, the sounds got mixed up, and fingers were pointing everywhere. The laughter got so out of control that I lost my patience! As soon as I put the blindfold over his eyes, the laughter erupted."
Itard, finding it impossible to continue his educational[Pg 183] work, decided to do away with the blindfold, and, indeed, the shouts ceased, but now the child's attention was distracted by the slightest movement about him. The blindfold was necessary, but the boy had to be made to understand that he must not laugh so much and that he was having a lesson. The corrective means of Itard and their touching results are worth reporting here!
Itard, unable to continue his educational[Pg 183] work, decided to remove the blindfold. While the shouting stopped, the child's focus was now easily diverted by even the slightest movement around him. The blindfold was essential, but the boy needed to learn that he should not laugh so much and that he was in a lesson. Itard's corrective methods and their moving outcomes are worth sharing here!
"I wished to intimidate him with my manner, not being able to do so with my glance. I armed myself with a tambourine and struck it lightly whenever he made a mistake. But he mistook this correction for a joke, and his joy became more noisy than ever. I then felt that I must make the correction a little more severe. It was understood, and I saw, with a mixture of pain and pleasure, revealed in the darkened face of this boy the fact that the feeling of injury surpassed the unhappiness of the blow. Tears came from beneath the blindfold, he urged me to take it off, but, whether from embarrassment or fear, or from some inner preoccupation, when freed from the bandage he still kept his eyes tightly closed. I could not laugh at the doleful expression of his face, the closed eyelids from between which trickled an occasional tear! Oh, in this moment, as in many others, ready to renounce my task, and feeling that the time I had consecrated to it was lost, how I regretted ever having known this boy, and bow severely I condemned the barren and inhuman curiosity of the men who in order to make scientific advancement had torn him away from a life, at least innocent and happy!"
"I wanted to intimidate him with my attitude since I couldn't do it with my gaze. I picked up a tambourine and tapped it lightly every time he made a mistake. But he took this correction as a joke, and his laughter got even louder. I realized I needed to make the correction a bit harsher. It was understood, and I noticed, with a mix of pain and pleasure, that the distress from the hurt was greater than his sadness from the slap. Tears flowed from under the blindfold; he asked me to take it off, but whether out of embarrassment, fear, or some inner thought, even when I removed the blindfold, he still kept his eyes tightly shut. I couldn't laugh at the sorrowful look on his face, with tears occasionally streaming from behind his closed eyelids! Oh, in that moment, as in so many others, I was ready to abandon my task, feeling that the time I had dedicated to it was wasted. I deeply regretted ever meeting this boy, and I harshly condemned the cold and inhumane curiosity of the people who, in pursuit of scientific progress, had ripped him away from a life that was at least innocent and happy!"
Here also is demonstrated the great educative superiority of scientific pedagogy for normal children.
Here, the significant educational advantages of scientific teaching methods for typical children are also shown.
Finally, one particular of the technique consists in the[Pg 184] distribution of the stimuli. This will be treated more fully in the description of the didactic system (materials) and of the sense education. Here it is enough to say that one should proceed from few stimuli strongly contrasting, to many stimuli in gradual differentiation always more fine and imperceptible. So, for example, we first present, together, red and blue; the shortest rod beside the longest; the thinnest beside the thickest, etc., passing from these to the delicately differing tints, and to the discrimination of very slight differences in length and size.
Finally, one specific technique involves the [Pg 184] distribution of the stimuli. This will be covered in more detail in the description of the teaching system (materials) and sensory education. For now, it’s sufficient to say that we should start with a few strongly contrasting stimuli, and then move on to many stimuli that gradually differentiate into finer and subtler variations. For instance, we first present red and blue together; the shortest rod next to the longest; the thinnest beside the thickest, and so on, progressing from these to gently varying shades and then to the recognition of very slight differences in length and size.
CHAPTER XIII
Education of the Senses and Examples of the Teaching Material: General Sensitivity; the Tactile, Thermal, Pressure, and Stereognostic Senses
The education of the tactile and the thermic senses go together, since the warm bath, and heat in general, render the tactile sense more acute. Since to exercise the tactile sense it is necessary to touch, bathing the hands in warm water has the additional advantage of teaching the child a principle of cleanliness—that of not touching objects with hands that are not clean. I therefore apply the general notions of practical life, regarding the washing of the hands, care of the nails, to the exercises preparatory to the discrimination of tactile stimuli.
The development of the sense of touch and the sense of temperature go hand in hand, as warm water baths and heat, in general, enhance the sense of touch. To engage the sense of touch, we need to touch, and immersing the hands in warm water also helps teach the child an important principle of cleanliness—specifically, not touching things with unclean hands. Therefore, I incorporate basic concepts of daily life, like handwashing and nail care, into activities that prepare for the ability to distinguish different tactile sensations.
The limitation of the exercises of the tactile sense to the cushioned tips of the fingers, is rendered necessary by practical life. It must be made a necessary phase of education because it prepares for a life in which man exercises and uses the tactile sense through the medium of these finger tips. Hence, I have the child wash his hands carefully with soap, in a little basin; and in another basin I have him rinse them in a bath of tepid water. Then I show him how to dry and rub his hands gently, in this way preparing for the regular bath. I next teach the child how to touch, that is, the manner in which he should touch surfaces. For this it is necessary to take[Pg 186] the finger of the child and to draw it very, very lightly over the surface.
The limitation of exercises for the sense of touch to the cushioned tips of the fingers is necessary for practical life. It has to be a crucial part of education because it prepares a person for a life where they use their sense of touch through these fingertips. So, I have the child wash their hands thoroughly with soap in a small basin; then, in another basin, I have them rinse their hands in warm water. After that, I show them how to dry and gently rub their hands, preparing them for a regular bath. Next, I teach the child how to touch, meaning the way they should feel different surfaces. For this, it's important to take the child's finger and gently glide it over the surface.
Another particular of the technique is to teach the child to hold his eyes closed while he touches, encouraging him to do this by telling him that he will be able to feel the differences better, and so leading him to distinguish, without the help of sight, the change of contact. He will quickly learn, and will show that he enjoys the exercise. Often after the introduction of such exercises, it is a common thing to have a child come to you, and, closing his eyes, touch with great delicacy the palm of your hand or the cloth of your dress, especially any silken or velvet trimmings. They do verily exercise the tactile sense. They enjoy keenly touching any soft pleasant surface, and become exceedingly keen in discriminating between the differences in the sandpaper cards.
Another aspect of the technique is to teach the child to keep their eyes closed while they touch things, encouraging them by saying that this will help them feel the differences better, enabling them to distinguish changes in contact without relying on sight. They will quickly learn and will show enjoyment in the exercise. After introducing such activities, it's common for a child to come to you, close their eyes, and gently touch the palm of your hand or the fabric of your dress, especially any silk or velvet trimmings. They really do exercise their sense of touch. They love feeling any soft, pleasant surface and become very skilled at distinguishing between the different textures of sandpaper cards.
The Didactic Material consists of; a—a rectangular wooden board divided into two equal rectangles, one covered with very smooth paper, or having the wood polished until a smooth surface is obtained; the other covered with sandpaper, b—a tablet like the preceding covered with alternating strips of smooth paper and sandpaper.
The Didactic Material includes: a—a rectangular wooden board divided into two equal rectangles, one side covered with very smooth paper or polished wood for a smooth finish; the other side covered with sandpaper, b—a tablet similar to the first one, featuring alternating strips of smooth paper and sandpaper.
I also make use of a collection of paper slips, varying through many grades from smooth, fine cardboard to coarsest sandpaper. The stuffs described elsewhere are also used in these lessons.
I also use a range of paper slips, varying from smooth, fine cardboard to the roughest sandpaper. The materials mentioned elsewhere are also utilized in these lessons.
As to the Thermic Sense, I use a set of little metal bowls, which are filled with water at different degrees of temperature. These I try to measure with a thermometer, so that there may be two containing water of the same temperature.
As for the Thermic Sense, I use a set of small metal bowls filled with water at different temperatures. I try to measure these with a thermometer so that there are two bowls containing water at the same temperature.

Kids playing a game with colored silk tablets

I have designed a set of utensils which are to be made of very light metal, and filled with water. These have covers, and to each is attached a thermometer. The bowl touched from the outside gives the desired impression of heat.
I’ve created a set of utensils made of lightweight metal, filled with water. They come with lids, and each one has a thermometer attached. The bowl feels warm to the touch from the outside.
I also have the children put their hands into cold, tepid, and warm water, an exercise which they find most diverting. I should like to repeat this exercise with the feet, but I have not bad an opportunity to make the trial.
I also have the kids put their hands in cold, lukewarm, and warm water, an activity they find really fun. I’d like to try this exercise with their feet, but I haven't had a chance to do that yet.
For the education of the baric sense (sense of weight), I use with great success little wooden tablets, six by eight centimetres, having a thickness of 1/2 centimetre. These tablets are in three different qualities of wood, wistaria, walnut, and pine. They weigh respectively, 24, 18, and 12 grammes, making them differ in weight by 6 grammes. These tablets should be very smooth; if possible, varnished in such a way that every roughness shall be eliminated, but so that the natural colour of the wood shall remain. The child, observing the colour, knows that they are of differing weights, and this offers a means of controlling the exercise. He takes two of the tablets in his hands, letting them rest upon the palm at the base of his outstretched fingers. Then he moves his hands up and down in order to gauge the weight. This movement should come to be, little by little, almost insensible. We lead the child to make his distinction purely through the difference in weight, leaving out the guide of the different colours, and closing his eyes. He learns to do this of himself, and takes great interest in "guessing."
For teaching the sense of weight, I successfully use small wooden tablets that are six by eight centimeters and half a centimeter thick. These tablets are made from three types of wood: wisteria, walnut, and pine. They weigh 24, 18, and 12 grams, respectively, differing by 6 grams. These tablets should be very smooth; if possible, they should be varnished to remove any roughness while keeping the wood's natural color. The child, observing the color, understands that the tablets have different weights, which helps in controlling the exercise. He holds two tablets in his hands, resting them on the palm at the base of his outstretched fingers. Then, he moves his hands up and down to feel the weight. This movement should gradually become almost imperceptible. We guide the child to differentiate weight purely based on its difference, ignoring the varying colors and closing his eyes. He learns to do this independently and finds it very engaging to "guess."
The game attracts the attention of those near, who gather in a circle about the one who has the tablets, and who take turns in guessing. Sometimes the children[Pg 188] spontaneously make use of the blindfold, taking turns, and interspersing the work with peals of joyful laughter.
The game draws in everyone nearby, who form a circle around the person with the tablets, taking turns to guess. Sometimes the kids[Pg 188] spontaneously use a blindfold, passing it around while mixing in bursts of joyful laughter.
EDUCATION OF THE STEREOGNOSTIC SENSE
The education of this sense leads to the recognition of objects through feeling, that is, through the simultaneous help of the tactile and muscular senses.
The education of this sense leads to recognizing objects through touch, meaning it involves the combined assistance of both the sense of touch and muscle perception.
Taking this union as a basis, we have made experiments which have given marvellously successful educational results. I feel that for the help of teachers these exercises should be described.
Taking this union as a foundation, we have conducted experiments that have produced wonderfully successful educational outcomes. I believe that for the benefit of teachers, these exercises should be detailed.
The first didactic material used by us is made up of the bricks and cubes of Froebel. We call the attention of the child to the form of the two solids, have him feel them carefully and accurately, with his eyes open, repeating some phrase serving to fix his attention upon the particulars of the forms presented. After this the child is told to place the cubes to the right, the bricks to the left, always feeling them, and without looking at them. Finally the exercise is repeated, by the child blindfolded. Almost all the children succeed in the exercise, and after two or three times, are able to eliminate every error. There are twenty-four of the bricks and cubes in all, so that the attention may be held for some time through this "game"—but undoubtedly the child's pleasure is greatly increased by the fact of his being watched by a group of his companions, all interested and eager.
The first teaching material we use consists of Froebel's bricks and cubes. We get the child's attention focused on the shapes of the two solids, encouraging them to feel them carefully with their eyes open, while repeating a phrase to help them concentrate on the details of the shapes. After this, the child is instructed to place the cubes on the right and the bricks on the left, again feeling them without looking. Finally, the activity is repeated with the child blindfolded. Almost all the children manage to complete the task, and after doing it two or three times, they can eliminate any mistakes. There are a total of twenty-four bricks and cubes, so this "game" can hold their attention for a while—plus, the child's enjoyment is definitely heightened by being observed by a group of peers who are all interested and eager.
One day a directress called my attention to a little girl of three years, one of our very youngest pupils, who had repeated this exercise perfectly. We seated the little girl comfortably in an armchair, close to the table. Then, placing the twenty-four objects before her upon the table,[Pg 189] we mixed them, and calling the child's attention to the difference in form, told her to place the cubes to the right and the bricks to the left. When she was blindfolded she began the exercise as taught by us, taking an object in each hand, feeling each and putting it in its right place. Sometimes she took two cubes, or two bricks, sometimes she found a brick in the right hand, a cube in the left. The child had to recognise the form, and to remember throughout the exercise the proper placing of the different objects. This seemed to me very difficult for a child of three years.
One day, a teacher pointed out a little girl who was just three years old, one of our youngest students, who had perfectly completed this exercise. We settled the little girl comfortably in an armchair, right next to the table. Then, we placed the twenty-four objects in front of her on the table,[Pg 189] mixed them up, and directed her attention to the differences in shape, telling her to put the cubes on the right and the bricks on the left. When she was blindfolded, she started the exercise as we had taught her, taking one object in each hand, feeling them, and placing them in the correct spots. Sometimes she picked up two cubes or two bricks, and sometimes she found a brick in her right hand and a cube in her left. The child had to identify the shapes and remember where each object belonged throughout the exercise. I found this quite challenging for a three-year-old.
But observing her I saw that she not only performed the exercise easily, but that the movements with which we had taught her to feel the form were superfluous. Indeed the instant she had taken the two objects in her hands, if it so happened that she had taken a cube with the left hand and a brick in the right, she exchanged them immediately, and then began the laborious feeling the form which we had taught and which she perhaps, believed to be obligatory. But the objects had been recognised by her through the first light touch, that is, the recognition was contemporaneous to the taking.
But as I watched her, I noticed that she not only did the exercise easily, but that the movements we taught her to feel the shape were unnecessary. In fact, the moment she picked up the two objects, if she happened to grab a cube with her left hand and a brick with her right, she immediately swapped them and then started the complicated process of feeling the shape that we had taught her, which she maybe believed was required. However, she had already recognized the objects with her first light touch; in other words, the recognition happened simultaneously with her picking them up.
Continuing my study of the subject, I found that this little girl was possessed of a remarkable functional ambidexterity—I should be very glad to make a wider study of this phenomenon having in view the desirability of a simultaneous education of both hands.
Continuing my study of the topic, I discovered that this little girl had an amazing ability for functional ambidexterity—I would be very interested in doing a more extensive study of this phenomenon, considering the benefits of teaching both hands at the same time.
I repeated the exercise with other children and found that they recognise the objects before feeling their contours. This was particularly true of the little ones. Our educational methods in this respect furnished a remarkable exercise in associative gymnastics, leading to a rapidity of judgment which was truly surprising and had the[Pg 190] advantage of being perfectly adapted to very young children.
I did the same exercise with other kids and discovered that they recognized the objects before actually touching them. This was especially the case with the little ones. Our teaching methods in this regard provided an impressive workout for their associative skills, resulting in a speed of judgment that was genuinely surprising and was perfectly suited for very young children.
These exercises of the stereognostic sense may be multiplied in many ways—they amuse the children who find delight in the recognition of a stimulus, as in the thermic exercises; for example—they may raise any small objects, toy soldiers, little balls, and, above all, the various coins in common use. They come to discriminate between small forms varying very slightly, such as corn, wheat, and rice.
These exercises for developing the stereognostic sense can be expanded in many different ways—they entertain kids who enjoy recognizing different stimuli, like in the thermal exercises; for example, they can lift small objects, toy soldiers, little balls, and especially the different coins that are commonly used. They learn to differentiate between small shapes that vary only slightly, like corn, wheat, and rice.
They are very proud of seeing without eyes, holding out their hands and crying, "Here are my eyes!" "I can see with my hands!" Indeed, our little ones walking in the ways we have planned, make us marvel over their unforeseen progress, surprising us daily. Often, while they are wild with delight over some new conquest,—we watch, in deepest wonder and meditation.
They are very proud of seeing without eyes, holding out their hands and saying, "Here are my eyes!" "I can see with my hands!" Truly, our little ones, following the paths we’ve charted for them, leave us in awe of their unexpected growth, surprising us every day. Often, while they are thrilled about some new achievement, we watch in deep wonder and reflection.
EDUCATION OF THE SENSES OF TASTE AND SMELL
This phase of sense education is most difficult, and I have not as yet had any satisfactory results to record. I can only say that the exercises ordinarily used in the tests of psychometry do not seem to me to be practical for use with young children.
This phase of sensory education is the most challenging, and I haven’t had any satisfactory results to report so far. I can only say that the activities typically used in psychometry tests don’t seem practical for young children.
The olfactory sense in children is not developed to any great extent, and this makes it difficult to attract their attention by means of this sense. We have made use of one test which has not been repeated often enough to form the basis of a method. We have the child smell fresh violets, and jessamine flowers. We then blindfold him, saying, "Now we are going to present you with flowers." A little friend then holds a bunch of violets under the child's nose, that he may guess the name of the flower. For greater or less intensify we present fewer flowers, or even one single blossom.
The sense of smell in children isn't that well developed, which makes it hard to catch their attention using this sense. We've tried a test that hasn't been repeated enough to establish a solid method. We have the child smell fresh violets and jasmine flowers. Then, we blindfold them and say, "Now we're going to show you some flowers." A little friend holds a bunch of violets under the child's nose so they can guess the name of the flower. To adjust the intensity, we present fewer flowers or even just a single bloom.
Copyright, 1912, by Carl R. Byoir
Copyright, 1912, by Carl R. Byoir

Copyright, 1912 by Carl R. Byoir
Copyright, 1912 by Carl R. Byoir

Blocks used to teach children about thickness, length, and size.
But this part of education, like that of the sense of taste, can be obtained by the child during the luncheon hour;—when he can learn to recognise various odours.
But this aspect of education, like the sense of taste, can be acquired by the child during lunch;—when he can learn to identify different scents.
As to taste, the method of touching the tongue with various solutions, bitter or acid, sweet, salty, is perfectly applicable. Children of four years readily lend themselves to such games, which serve as a reason for showing them how to rinse their mouths perfectly. The children enjoy recognising various flavours, and learn, after each test, to fill a glass with tepid water, and carefully rinse their months. In this way the exercise for the sense of taste is also an exercise in hygiene.
When it comes to taste, the technique of having kids touch their tongues with different solutions—bitter, sour, sweet, salty—works really well. Four-year-olds are eager to participate in these activities, which provide a good opportunity to teach them how to rinse their mouths properly. The kids love identifying different flavors, and after each tasting, they learn to fill a glass with warm water and rinse their mouths carefully. This way, practicing their sense of taste also doubles as a hygiene lesson.
EDUCATION OF THE SENSE OF VISION
I. Differential Visual Perception of Dimensions
First. Solid Insets: This material consists of three solid blocks of wood each 55 centimetres long, 6 centimetres high and 8 centimetres wide. Each block contains ten wooden pieces, set into corresponding holes. These pieces are cylindrical in shape and are to be handled by means of a little wooden or brass button which is fixed in the centre of the top. The cases of cylinders are in appearance much like the cases of weights used by chemists. In the first set of the series, the cylinders are all of equal height (55 millimetres) but differ in diameter. The smallest cylinder has a diameter of 1 centimetre, and the others increase in diameter at the rate of 1/2 centimetre. In the second set, the cylinders are all of equal diameter, corresponding to half the diameter of the largest cylinder in the preceding series—(27 millimetres). The cylin[Pg 192]ders in this set differ in height, the first being merely a little disk only a centimetre high, the others increase 5 millimetres each, the tenth one being 55 millimetres high. In the third set, the cylinders differ both in height and diameter, the first being 1 centimetre high and 1 centimetre in diameter and each succeeding one increasing 1/2 centimetre in height and diameter. With these insets, the child, working by himself, learns to differentiate objects according to thickness, according to height, and according to size.
First. Solid Insets: This material consists of three solid blocks of wood, each 55 centimeters long, 6 centimeters high, and 8 centimeters wide. Each block contains ten wooden pieces, fitted into matching holes. These pieces are cylindrical and are handled using a small wooden or brass button fixed in the center of the top. The appearance of the cylinder cases is similar to the cases of weights used by chemists. In the first set of the series, all the cylinders are the same height (55 millimeters) but differ in diameter. The smallest cylinder has a diameter of 1 centimeter, and the others increase in diameter by 1/2 centimeter. In the second set, the cylinders all have the same diameter, which is half the diameter of the largest cylinder in the previous series—(27 millimeters). The cylinders in this set vary in height, starting with a small disk that is only 1 centimeter high, with the others increasing by 5 millimeters each, culminating in the tenth one being 55 millimeters high. In the third set, the cylinders differ in both height and diameter, with the first being 1 centimeter high and 1 centimeter in diameter, and each subsequent one increasing by 1/2 centimeter in both height and diameter. With these insets, the child learns to differentiate objects based on thickness, height, and size while working independently.
In the schoolroom, these three sets may be played with by three children gathered about a table, an exchange of games adding variety. The child takes the cylinders out of the moulds, mixes them upon the table, and then puts each back into its corresponding opening. These objects are made of hard pine, polished and varnished.
In the classroom, these three sets can be used by three kids sitting around a table, giving a variety of games to play. The child takes the cylinders out of the molds, mixes them on the table, and then puts each one back into its matching spot. These items are made of sturdy pine, polished and varnished.
Second. Large pieces in graded dimensions:—There are three sets of blocks which come under this head, and it is desirable to have two of each of these sets in every school.
Second. Large pieces in different sizes:—There are three sets of blocks that fall into this category, and it's a good idea to have two of each of these sets in every school.
(a) Thickness: this set consists of objects which vary from thick to thin. There are ten quadrilateral prisms, the largest of which has a base of 10 centimetres, the others decreasing by 1 centimetre. The pieces are of equal length, 20 centimetres. These prisms are stained a dark brown. The child mixes them, scattering them over the little carpet, and then puts them in order, placing one against the other according to the graduations of thickness, observing that the length shall correspond exactly. These blocks, taken from the first to the last, form a species of stair, the steps of which grow broader toward the top. The child may begin with the thinnest piece or with the thickest, as suits his pleasure. The control of the exer[Pg 193]cise is not certain, as it was in the solid cylindrical insets. There, the large cylinders could not enter the small opening, the taller ones would project beyond the top of the block, etc. In this game of the Big Stair, the eye of the child can easily recognise an error, since if he mistakes, the stair is irregular, that is, there will be a high step, behind which, the step which should have ascended, decreases.
(a) Thickness: this set includes objects that range from thick to thin. There are ten quadrilateral prisms, with the largest having a base of 10 centimeters, and the others decreasing by 1 centimeter. All the pieces are the same length, 20 centimeters. These prisms are stained a dark brown. The child mixes them, spreading them out over the small carpet, and then arranges them in order, placing one against another based on their thickness, ensuring that the lengths match up perfectly. When arranged from first to last, these blocks create a kind of stair, with the steps becoming wider toward the top. The child can start with either the thinnest or the thickest piece, depending on what they prefer. The control of this exercise is not certain, as it was with the solid cylindrical insets. There, the larger cylinders couldn’t fit into the smaller openings, and the taller ones would stick out over the top of the block, etc. In this game of the Big Stair, the eye of the child can easily spot a mistake; if they get it wrong, the stair becomes irregular, meaning there will be a tall step behind which the step that should have gone up decreases.
(b) Length: Long and Short Objects:—This set consists of ten rods. These are four-sided, each face being 3 centimetres. The first rod is a metre long, and the last a decimetre. The intervening rods decrease, from first to last, 1 decimetre each. Each space of 1 decimetre is painted alternately red or blue. The rods, when placed close to each other, must be so arranged that the colours correspond, forming so many transverse stripes—the whole set when arranged has the appearance of a rectangular triangle made up of organ pipes, which decrease on the side of the hypothenuse.
(b) Length: Long and Short Objects:—This set consists of ten rods. Each rod has four sides, and each face measures 3 centimeters. The first rod is a meter long, and the last one is a decimeter. The rods in between decrease in length by 1 decimeter each. Each 1 decimeter section is painted alternately red and blue. When the rods are placed closely together, they should be arranged so that the colors align, creating several transverse stripes—the entire set, when arranged, resembles a right triangle made up of organ pipes, decreasing along the hypotenuse.
The child arranges the rods which have first been scattered and mixed. He puts them together according to the graduation of length, and observes the correspondence of colours. This exercise also offers a very evident control of error, for the regularity of the decreasing length of the stairs along the hypothenuse will be altered if the rods are not properly placed.
The child organizes the rods that were initially scattered and mixed. He aligns them based on their lengths and notices the matching colors. This activity also provides a clear way to spot mistakes, as the pattern of decreasing lengths along the hypotenuse will be disrupted if the rods aren’t arranged correctly.
This most important set of blocks will have its principal application in arithmetic, as we shall see. With it, one may count from one to ten and may construct the addition and other tables, and it may constitute the first steps in the study of the decimal and metric system.
This essential set of blocks will primarily be used in math, as we will demonstrate. With it, you can count from one to ten, create addition tables and other calculations, and it can serve as the initial steps in learning the decimal and metric systems.
(c) Size: Objects, Larger and Smaller:—This set is made up of ten wooden cubes painted in rose-coloured[Pg 194] enamel. The largest cube has a base of 10 centimetres, the smallest, of 1 centimetre, the intervening ones decrease 1 centimetre each. A little green cloth carpet goes with these blocks. This may be of oilcloth or cardboard. The game consists of building the cubes up, one upon another, in the order of their dimensions, constructing a little tower of which the largest cube forms the base and the smallest the apex. The carpet is placed on the floor, and the cubes are scattered upon it. As the tower is built upon the carpet, the child goes through the exercise of kneeling, rising, etc. The control is given by the irregularity of the tower as it decreases toward the apex. A cube misplaced reveals itself, because it breaks the line. The most common error made by the children in playing with these blocks at first, is that of placing the second cube as the base and placing the first cube upon it, thus confusing the two largest blocks. I have noted that the same error was made by deficient children in the repeated trials I made with the tests of De Sanctis. At the question, "Which is the largest?" the child would take, not the largest, but that nearest it in size.
(c) Size: Objects, Larger and Smaller:—This set is made up of ten wooden cubes painted in rose-colored enamel. The largest cube has a base of 10 centimeters, the smallest has a base of 1 centimeter, and the others decrease by 1 centimeter each. A small green cloth carpet accompanies these blocks. It can be made of oilcloth or cardboard. The game involves stacking the cubes on top of each other in order of their size, creating a little tower where the largest cube is the base and the smallest is the top. The carpet is placed on the floor, and the cubes are scattered on it. As the tower is built on the carpet, the child engages in actions like kneeling and rising. The irregularity of the tower as it narrows toward the top helps with control. A misplaced cube stands out because it disrupts the alignment. The most common mistake children make when first playing with these blocks is using the second cube as the base and putting the first cube on top, confusing the two largest blocks. I've also noticed that the same mistake was made by children with developmental delays in the repeated trials I conducted with De Sanctis's tests. When asked, "Which is the largest?" the child would choose the cube that is not the largest but is closest in size.
Any of these three sets of blocks may be used by the children in a slightly different game. The pieces may be mixed upon a carpet or table, and then put in order upon another table at some distance. As he carries each piece, the child must walk without letting his attention wander, since he must remember the dimensions of the piece for which he is to look among the mixed blocks.
Any of these three sets of blocks can be used by the children in a slightly different game. The pieces can be mixed up on a carpet or table, and then sorted on another table a bit farther away. As they carry each piece, the child has to walk without getting distracted, since they need to remember the dimensions of the piece they're trying to find among the mixed blocks.
Copyright, 1912, by Carl R. Byoir
Copyright, 1912, by Carl R. Byoir

The games played in this way are excellent for children of four or five years; while the simple work of arranging the pieces in order upon the same carpet where they have been mixed is more adapted to the little ones between three and four years of age. The construction of the tower [Pg 195] with the pink cubes is very attractive to little ones of less than three years, who knock it down and build it up time after time.
The games played this way are great for kids aged four or five, while the simple task of putting the pieces in order on the same carpet where they've been mixed is better suited for younger kids between three and four. Building the tower [Pg 195] with the pink cubes is really appealing to toddlers under three, who love to knock it down and rebuild it over and over.
Copyright, 1912, by Carl R. Byoir
Copyright, 1912, by Carl R. Byoir

II. Differential Visual Perception of Form and Visual-tactile-muscular Perception
Didactic Material. Plane geometric insets of wood: The idea of these insets goes back to Itard and was also applied by Séguin.
Didactic Material. Flat geometric wood pieces: The concept of these pieces originates from Itard and was also utilized by Séguin.
In the school for deficients I had made and applied these insets in the same form used by my illustrious predecessors. In these there were two large tablets of wood placed one above the other and fastened together. The lower board was left solid, while the upper one was perforated by various geometric figures. The game consisted in placing in these openings the corresponding wooden figures which, in order that they might be easily handled, were furnished with a little brass knob.
In the school for those with disabilities, I created and used these insets in the same way as my famous predecessors. There were two large wooden boards, stacked one on top of the other and secured together. The bottom board was solid, while the top board had various geometric shapes cut out of it. The game involved fitting the matching wooden pieces into these openings, which had a small brass knob to make them easier to grab.
In my school for deficients, I had multiplied the games calling for these insets, and distinguished between those used to teach colour and those used to teach form. The insets for teaching colour were all circles, those used for teaching form were all painted blue. I had great numbers of these insets made in graduations of colour and in an infinite variety of form. This material was most expensive and exceedingly cumbersome.
In my school for students with special needs, I increased the number of games using these insets and made a distinction between those for teaching colors and those for teaching shapes. The insets for teaching colors were all circles, while the ones for teaching shapes were all painted blue. I had many of these insets made in various color gradations and an endless variety of shapes. This material was very expensive and quite bulky.
In many later experiments with normal children, I have, after many trials, completely excluded the plane geometric insets as an aid to the teaching of colour, since this material offers no control of errors, the child's task being that of covering the forms before him.
In many later experiments with typical kids, I have, after trying many times, completely removed the flat geometric shapes as a tool for teaching color, since this material doesn’t help in identifying mistakes, and the child's job is just to cover the shapes in front of them.
I have kept the geometric insets, but have given them a new and original aspect. The form in which they are[Pg 196] now made was suggested to me by a visit to the splendid manual training school in the Reformatory of St. Michael in Rome. I saw there wooden models of geometric figures, which could be set into corresponding frames or placed above corresponding forms. The scope of these materials was to lead to exactness in the making of the geometric pieces in regard to control of dimension and form; the frame furnishing the control necessary for the exactness of the work.
I’ve kept the geometric insets but given them a fresh and original look. The design they have now was inspired by a visit to the impressive manual training school at the Reformatory of St. Michael in Rome. There, I saw wooden models of geometric shapes that could be fitted into matching frames or placed above corresponding forms. The purpose of these materials was to promote precision in creating the geometric pieces in terms of dimension and shape; the frame provided the control needed for the accuracy of the work.
This led me to think of making modifications in my geometric insets, making use of the frame as well as of the inset I therefore made a rectangular tray, which measured 30x20 centimetres. This tray was painted a dark blue and was surrounded by a dark frame. It was furnished with a cover so arranged that it would contain six of the square frames with their insets. The advantage of this tray is that the forms may be changed, thus allowing us to present any combination we choose. I have a number of blank wooden squares which make it possible to present as few as two or three geometric forms at a time, the other spaces being filled in by the blanks. To this material I have added a set of white cards, 10 centimetres square. These cards form a series presenting the geometric forms in other aspects. In the first of the series, the form is cut from blue paper and mounted upon the card. In the second box of cards, the contour of the same figures is mounted in the same blue paper, forming an outline one centimetre in width. On the third set of cards the contour of the geometric form is outlined by a blank line. We have then the tray, the collection of small frames with their corresponding insets, and the set of the cards in three series.
This made me think about modifying my geometric insets, using both the frame and the inset. I ended up making a rectangular tray that measures 30x20 centimeters. This tray is painted dark blue and has a dark frame around it. It comes with a cover arranged to hold six square frames with their insets. The benefit of this tray is that the shapes can be changed, allowing us to display any combination we want. I have several blank wooden squares that enable us to showcase as few as two or three geometric shapes at a time, filling in the other spaces with the blanks. Additionally, I included a set of white cards, each 10 centimeters square. These cards create a series that presents the geometric forms in different ways. In the first series, the shape is cut from blue paper and attached to the card. In the second set of cards, the contour of the same figures is mounted in the same blue paper, creating a one-centimeter-wide outline. In the third set of cards, the outline of the geometric shape is formed by a blank line. So we have the tray, the collection of small frames with their corresponding insets, and the set of cards in three series.
Copyright, 1912, by Carl R. Byoir
Copyright, 1912, by Carl R. Byoir

I also designed a case containing six trays. The front of this box may be lowered when the top is raised and the trays may be drawn out as one opens the drawers of a desk. Each drawer contains six of the small frames with their respective insets. In the first drawer I keep the four plain wooden squares and two frames, one containing a rhomboid, and the other a trapezoid. In the second, I have a series consisting of a square, and five rectangles of the same length, but varying in width. The third drawer contains six circles which diminish in diameter. In the fourth are six triangles, in the fifth, five polygons from a pentagon to a decagon. The sixth drawer contains six curved figures (an ellipse, an oval, etc., and a flower-like figure formed by four crossed arcs).
I also created a case with six trays. The front of this box can be lowered when the top is raised, allowing the trays to slide out just like the drawers of a desk. Each drawer holds six small frames with their matching inserts. In the first drawer, I keep four plain wooden squares and two frames—one with a rhomboid and the other with a trapezoid. In the second drawer, there’s a series that includes a square and five rectangles that are the same length but differ in width. The third drawer holds six circles that get smaller in diameter. The fourth drawer has six triangles, and the fifth features five polygons ranging from a pentagon to a decagon. The sixth drawer contains six curved figures (an ellipse, an oval, etc., and a flower-like shape made by four intersecting arcs).
Exercise with the Insets. This exercise consists in presenting to the child the large frame or tray in which we may arrange the figures as we wish to present them. We proceed to take out the insets, mix them upon the table, and then invite the child to put them back in place. This game may be played by even the younger children and holds the attention for a long period, though not for so long a time as the exercise with the cylinders. Indeed, I have never seen a child repeat this exercise more than five or six times. The child, in fact, expends much energy upon this exercise. He must recognise the form and must look at it carefully.
Exercise with the Insets. This exercise involves presenting the child with a large frame or tray where we can arrange the figures as we want to show them. We start by taking out the insets, mixing them up on the table, and then inviting the child to put them back in place. Even younger children can play this game, which captures their attention for a considerable time, although not as long as the exercise with the cylinders. In fact, I've never seen a child repeat this exercise more than five or six times. The child really puts a lot of energy into this exercise. They have to recognize the shape and examine it closely.
At first many of the children only succeed in placing the insets after many attempts, trying for example to place a triangle in a trapezoid, then in a rectangle, etc. Or when they have taken a rectangle, and recognise where it should go, they will still place it with the long side of the inset across the short side of the opening, and will only after many attempts, succeed in placing it. After three or four successive lessons, the child recognises the geomet[Pg 198]ric figures with extreme facility and places the insets with a security which has a tinge of nonchalance, or of slight contempt for an exercise that is too easy. This is the moment in which the child may be led to a methodical observation of the forms. We change the forms in the frame and pass from contrasted frames to analogous ones. The exercise is easy for the child, who habituates himself to placing the pieces in their frames without errors or false attempts.
At first, many of the children only manage to place the insets after several tries, like attempting to fit a triangle into a trapezoid, and then into a rectangle, and so on. Or when they pick up a rectangle and recognize where it should go, they still end up placing it with the long side of the inset facing the short side of the opening. They'll only succeed in placing it correctly after several attempts. After three or four lessons, the child easily recognizes the geometric shapes and places the insets with confidence that feels a bit casual, or with a hint of dismissiveness towards an exercise that seems too easy. This is the moment when the child can be guided to observe the shapes more systematically. We change the shapes in the frame and move from contrasting frames to similar ones. The exercise becomes straightforward for the child, who gets used to fitting the pieces into their frames accurately and without mistakes.
The first period of these exercises is at the time when the child is obliged to make repeated trials with figures that are strongly contrasted in form. The recognition is greatly helped by associating with the visual sense the muscular-tactile perception of the forms. I have the child touch[12] the contour of the piece with the index finger of his right hand, and then have him repeat this with the contour of the frame into which the pieces must fit. We succeed in making this a habit with the child. This is very easily attained, since all children love to touch things. I have already learned, through my work with deficient children, that among the various forms of sense memory that of the muscular sense is the most precocious. Indeed, many children who have not arrived at the point of recognising a figure by looking at it, could recognise it by touching it, that is, by computing the movements necessary to the following of its contour. The same is true of the greater number of normal children;—confused as to where to place a figure, they turn it about trying in vain to fit it in, yet as soon as they have touched the two contours of the piece and its frame, they succeed in placing it perfectly. [Pg 199]Undoubtedly, the association of the muscular-tactile sense with that of vision, aids in a most remarkable way the perception of forms and fixes them in memory.
The first phase of these exercises occurs when the child needs to make repeated attempts with shapes that are clearly different in appearance. The process of recognition is greatly enhanced by connecting the visual sense with the muscle-tactile perception of the shapes. I instruct the child to touch[12] the outline of the piece using the index finger of his right hand, and then to do the same with the outline of the frame that the pieces need to fit into. We work on making this a habit for the child. This is easily achieved since all children enjoy touching things. Through my experience with children with learning disabilities, I’ve found that among the various forms of sensory memory, the muscular sense is the most advanced. In fact, many children who aren’t yet able to recognize a shape by looking at it can identify it by touching it, meaning they can figure out the movements needed to follow its outline. The same applies to most typical children; when unsure about where to place a shape, they tend to rotate it in frustration trying to fit it, yet as soon as they touch both outlines of the piece and its frame, they manage to place it accurately. [Pg 199]Clearly, connecting the muscle-tactile sense with vision significantly enhances the perception of shapes and helps solidify them in memory.
In such exercises, the control is absolute, as it was in the solid insets. The figure can only enter the corresponding frame. This makes it possible for the child to work by himself, and to accomplish a genuine sensory auto-education, in the visual perception of form.
In these activities, the control is complete, just like it was with the solid insets. The figure can only fit into the correct frame. This allows the child to work independently and achieve true sensory self-education in visually perceiving shapes.
Exercise with the three series of cards. First series. We give the child the wooden forms and the cards upon which the white figure is mounted. Then we mix the cards upon the table; the child must arrange them in a line upon his table (which he loves to do), and then place the corresponding wooden pieces upon the cards. Here the control lies in the eyes. The child must recognise this figure, and place the wooden piece upon it so perfectly that it will cover and hide the paper figure. The eye of the child here corresponds to the frame, which materially led him at first to bring the two pieces together. In addition to covering the figure, the child is to accustom himself to touching the contour of the mounted figures as a part of the exercise (the child always voluntarily follows those movements); and after he has placed the wooden inset he again touches the contour, adjusting with his finger the superimposed piece until it exactly covers the form beneath.
Exercise with the three series of cards. First series. We give the child the wooden shapes and the cards with the white figures on them. Then we mix the cards on the table; the child has to arrange them in a line on their table (which they love to do), and then place the matching wooden pieces on the cards. Here, the control is visual. The child must recognize this figure and position the wooden piece on it perfectly so that it completely covers and hides the paper figure. The child's eye corresponds to the frame, which directly guided them to bring the two pieces together initially. In addition to covering the figure, the child should get used to touching the outline of the mounted figures as part of the exercise (the child always voluntarily follows those movements); after placing the wooden inset, they touch the outline again, adjusting with their finger the piece on top until it perfectly covers the shape underneath.
Second Series. We give a number of cards to the child together with the corresponding wooden insets. In this second series, the figures are repeated by an outline of blue paper. The child through these exercises is passing gradually from the concrete to the abstract. At first, he handled only solid objects. He then passed to a plane figure, that is, to the plane which in itself does not exist.[Pg 200] He is now passing to the line, but this line does not represent for him the abstract contour of a plane figure. It is to him the path which he has so often followed with his index finger; this line is the trace of a movement. Following again the contour of the figure with his finger, the child receives the impression of actually leaving a trace, for the figure is covered by his finger and appears as he moves it. It is the eye now which guides the movement, but it must be remembered that this movement was already prepared for when the child touched the contours of the solid pieces of wood.
Second Series. We give the child a set of cards along with the matching wooden inserts. In this second series, the shapes are outlined with blue paper. Through these activities, the child is gradually moving from the concrete to the abstract. Initially, they handled only solid objects. Then they transitioned to a plane figure, which is a flat representation that doesn't exist on its own.[Pg 200] Now, they are moving to the line, but this line doesn't represent the abstract outline of a plane figure for them. Instead, it is the path they've often traced with their index finger; this line is the mark of a movement. By tracing the figure with their finger again, the child gets the sensation of actually leaving a mark, as the figure is covered by their finger and becomes visible as they move it. Their eye now directs the movement, but it should be noted that this movement was already prepared when the child interacted with the contours of the solid wooden pieces.
Third Series. We now present to the child the cards upon which the figures are drawn in black, giving him, as before, the corresponding wooden pieces. Here, he has actually passed to the line; that is, to an abstraction, yet here, too, there is the idea of the result of a movement.
Third Series. We now introduce the child to the cards with the figures drawn in black, providing him, as before, the matching wooden pieces. Here, he has truly moved on to the line; that is, to an abstraction, yet there is still the concept of the outcome of a movement.
This cannot be, it is true, the trace left by the finger, but, for example, that of a pencil which is guided by the hand in the same movements made before. These geometric figures in simple outline have grown out of a gradual series of representations which were concrete to vision and touch. These representations return to the mind of the child when he performs the exercise of superimposing the corresponding wooden figures.
This can’t be, it’s true, the mark left by a finger, but rather that of a pencil which is guided by the hand in the same motions made before. These geometric shapes in simple outline have developed from a gradual series of representations that were tangible to sight and touch. These representations come back to the child’s mind when he practices layering the matching wooden figures.
Copyright, 1912, by Carl R. Byoir
Copyright, 1912, by Carl R. Byoir

III. Differential Visual Perception of Colours:—Education of the Chromatic Sense
In many of our lessons on the colours, we make use of pieces of brightly-coloured stuffs, and of balls covered with wool of different colours. The didactic material for the education of the chromatic sense is the following, which I have established after a long series of tests made upon normal children, (in the institute for deficients, I used as I [Pg 201] have said above, the geometric insets). The present material consists of small flat tablets, which are wound with coloured wool or silk. These tablets have a little wooden border at each end which prevents the silk-covered card from touching the table. The child is also taught to take hold of the piece by these wooden extremities, so that he need not soil the delicate colours. In this way, we are able to use this material for a long time without having to renew it.
In many of our lessons on colors, we use pieces of bright fabric and balls covered with wool in various colors. The teaching materials for developing the sense of color are based on a long series of tests conducted on normal children. (In the institute for those with learning disabilities, as I mentioned earlier, I used geometric insets.) The current materials consist of small flat tablets wrapped in colored wool or silk. These tablets have a small wooden border at each end to keep the silk-covered card from touching the table. Children are also taught to hold the pieces by these wooden ends so they don't get the delicate colors dirty. This way, we can use these materials for a long time without needing to replace them.
Copyright, 1912, by Carl R. Byoir
Copyright, 1912, by Carl R. Byoir

Designed for developing the sense of color. The tablets are displayed in the boxes where they are stored.
I have chosen eight tints, and each one has with it eight gradations of different intensity of colour. There are, therefore, sixty-four colour-tablets in all. The eight tints selected are black (from grey to white), red, orange, yellow, green, blue, violet and brown. We have duplicate boxes of these sixty-four colours, giving us two of each exercise. The entire set, therefore, consists of one hundred twenty-eight tablets. They are contained in two boxes, each divided into eight equal compartments so that one box may contain sixty-four tablets.
I’ve chosen eight colors, and each one comes with eight shades of varying intensity. So, there are a total of sixty-four color tablets. The eight colors selected are black (from grey to white), red, orange, yellow, green, blue, violet, and brown. We have duplicate sets of these sixty-four colors, giving us two of each exercise. Overall, the entire collection consists of one hundred twenty-eight tablets. They’re housed in two boxes, each divided into eight equal sections so that one box can hold sixty-four tablets.
Exercises with the Colour-tablets. For the earliest of these exercises, we select three strong colours: for example, red, blue, and yellow, in pairs. These six tablets we place upon the table before the child. Showing him one of the colours, we ask him to find its duplicate among the mixed tablets upon the table. In this way, we have him arrange the colour-tablets in a column, two by two, pairing them according to colour.
Exercises with the Color Tablets. For the first of these exercises, we choose three bold colors: for instance, red, blue, and yellow, in pairs. We place these six tablets on the table in front of the child. By showing him one of the colors, we ask him to find its match among the mixed tablets on the table. This way, we have him organize the color tablets in a column, two by two, pairing them by color.
The number of tablets in this game may be increased until the eight colours, or sixteen tablets, are given at once. When the strongest tones have been presented, we may proceed to the presentation of lighter tones, in the same way. Finally, we present two or three tablets of the same colour, but of different tone, showing the child how to[Pg 202] arrange these in order of gradation. In this way, the eight gradations are finally presented.
The number of tablets in this game can be increased until there are eight colors or sixteen tablets shown at once. Once the strongest colors have been displayed, we can move on to showing lighter colors in the same way. Finally, we present two or three tablets of the same color but in different shades, teaching the child how to[Pg 202] arrange these in order of gradation. This way, the eight gradations are ultimately presented.
Following this, we place before the child the eight gradations of two different colours (red and blue); he is shown how to separate the groups and then arrange each group in gradation. As we proceed we offer groups of more nearly related colours; for example, blue and violet, yellow and orange, etc.
Following this, we present the child with eight shades of two different colors (red and blue); we show him how to separate the groups and then arrange each group in order. As we move forward, we offer groups of colors that are more closely related; for example, blue and violet, yellow and orange, etc.
In one of the "Children's Houses," I have seen the following game played with the greatest success and interest, and with surprising rapidity. The directress places upon a table, about which the children are seated, as many colour groups as there are children, for example, three. She then calls each child's attention to the colour each is to select, or which she assigns to him. Then, she mixes the three groups of colours upon the table. Each child takes rapidly from the mixed heap of tablets all the gradations of his colour, and proceeds to arrange the tablets, which, when thus placed in a line, give the appearance of a strip of shaded ribbon.
In one of the "Children's Houses," I saw a game played with a lot of success and interest, and surprisingly fast. The teacher sets up as many color groups on a table as there are children, for example, three. She then directs each child to focus on the color they need to pick, or assigns one to them. Next, she mixes the three color groups on the table. Each child quickly grabs from the mixed pile of tablets all the shades of their assigned color and arranges them in a line, which looks like a strip of shaded ribbon.
In another "House," I have seen the children take the entire box, empty the sixty-four colour-tablets upon the table and after carefully mixing them, rapidly collect them into groups and arrange them in gradation, constructing a species of little carpet of delicately coloured and intermingling tints. The children very quickly acquire an ability before which we stand amazed. Children of three years are able to put all of the tints into gradation.
In another "House," I've seen the kids take the whole box, dump the sixty-four color tablets on the table, and after mixing them up carefully, quickly group them and arrange them by color, creating a sort of little carpet of delicately colored and blended shades. The kids pick this up incredibly fast, and we are amazed by their abilities. Even three-year-olds can sort all the colors in order.
Experiments in Colour-memory. Experiments in colour-memory may be made by showing the child a tint, allowing him to look at it as long as he will, and then asking him to go to a distant table upon which all of the colours are arranged and to select from among them the tint simi[Pg 203]lar to the one at which he has looked. The children succeed in this game remarkably, committing only slight errors. Children of five years enjoy this immensely, taking great pleasure in comparing the two spools and judging as to whether they have chosen correctly.
Experiments in Color Memory. Experiments in color memory can be conducted by showing a child a color, letting them look at it for as long as they want, and then asking them to go to a faraway table where all the colors are laid out and pick the color that is similar to the one they just viewed. The kids do really well at this task, making only minor mistakes. Five-year-olds find this especially fun, taking great joy in comparing the two spools and deciding if they made the right choice.
At the beginning of my work, I made use of an instrument invented by Pizzoli. This consisted of a small brown disk having a half-moon shape opening at the top. Various colours were made to pass behind this opening, by means of a rotary disk which was composed of strips of various colours. The teacher called the attention of the child to a certain colour, then turned the disk, asking him to indicate the same disk when it again showed itself in the opening. This exercise rendered the child inactive, preventing him from controlling the material. It is not, therefore, an instrument which can promote the education of the senses.
At the beginning of my work, I used a tool created by Pizzoli. It was a small brown disk with a half-moon shape opening at the top. Different colors passed through this opening using a rotary disk made of strips of various colors. The teacher would direct the child's attention to a specific color, then turn the disk and ask the child to identify the same disk when it appeared again in the opening. This exercise left the child passive, preventing them from engaging with the material. So, it’s not a tool that can enhance the education of the senses.
EXERCISE FOR THE DISCRIMINATION OF SOUNDS
It would be desirable to have in this connection the didactic material used for the "auricular education" in the principal institutions for deaf mutes in Germany and America. These exercises are an introduction to the acquisition of language, and serve in a very special way to centre the children's discriminative attention upon the "modulations of the sound of the human voice."
It would be great to have the teaching materials used for "auricular education" in the main institutions for deaf individuals in Germany and America. These exercises introduce the process of learning language and specifically help focus the children's ability to differentiate the "modulations of the sound of the human voice."
With very young children linguistic education must occupy a most important place. Another aim of such exercises is to educate the ear of the child to noises so that he shall accustom himself to distinguish every slight noise and compare it with sounds, coming to resent harsh or disordered noises. Such sense education has a value in that it exercises æsthetic taste, and may be applied in a most[Pg 204] noteworthy way to practical discipline. We all know how the younger children disturb the order of the room by shouts, and by the noise of over-turned objects.
With very young children, language education must take a very important role. Another goal of these activities is to train the child's ear to different sounds, helping them learn to identify every faint noise and compare it with sounds, which leads them to dislike unpleasant or chaotic noises. This kind of sensory education is valuable because it develops aesthetic taste and can be applied in a significant way to practical discipline. We all know how younger children disrupt the order of the room with their shouting and the noise of knocked-over objects.
The rigorous scientific education of the sense of hearing is not practically applicable to the didactic method. This is true because the child cannot exercise himself through his own activity as he does for the other senses. Only one child at a time can work with any instrument producing the gradation of sounds. In other words, absolute silence is necessary for the discrimination of sounds.
The detailed scientific education about hearing isn't really practical for teaching methods. This is because a child can't practice on their own the way they can with the other senses. Only one child at a time can use any instrument that creates different sounds. In other words, complete silence is needed to tell sounds apart.
Signorina Maccheroni, Directress, first of the "Children's House" in Milan and later in the one in Franciscan Convent at Rome, has invented and has had manufactured a series of thirteen bells hung upon a wooden frame. These bells are to all appearances, identical, but the vibrations brought about by a blow of a hammer produce the following thirteen notes:
Signorina Maccheroni, the director, first of the "Children's House" in Milan and later at the Franciscan Convent in Rome, has created and had made a set of thirteen bells hung on a wooden frame. These bells look identical, but the vibrations caused by a hammer strike produce the following thirteen notes:

The set consists of a double series of thirteen bells and there are four hammers. Having struck one of the bells in the first series, the child must find the corresponding sound in the second. This exercise presents grave difficulty, as the child does not know how to strike each time with the same force, and therefore produces sounds which vary in intensity. Even when the teacher strikes the bells, the children have difficulty in distinguishing between sounds. So we do not feel that this instrument in its present form is entirely practical.
The set includes a double series of thirteen bells and has four hammers. After striking one of the bells in the first series, the child must identify the matching sound in the second series. This task is quite challenging, as the child struggles to strike each bell with consistent force, resulting in varying sound intensities. Even when the teacher strikes the bells, the children find it hard to tell the sounds apart. Therefore, we believe this instrument, as it currently is, isn't entirely practical.
For the discrimination of sounds, we use Pizzoli's series of little whistles. For the gradation of noises, we use[Pg 205] small boxes filled with different substances, more or less fine (sand or pebbles). The noises are produced by shaking the boxes.
For sound discrimination, we use Pizzoli's series of small whistles. For varying noise levels, we use[Pg 205]small boxes filled with different materials, ranging from coarse to fine (like sand or pebbles). The sounds are created by shaking the boxes.
In the lessons for the sense of hearing I proceed as follows: I have the teachers establish silence in the usual way and then I continue the work, making the silence more profound. I say, "St! St!" in a series of modulations, now sharp and short, now prolonged and light as a whisper. The children, little by little, become fascinated by this. Occasionally I say, "More silent still—more silent."
In the lessons for the sense of hearing, I do the following: I have the teachers create silence in the usual way and then I continue the work, deepening the silence. I say, "Quiet! Quiet!" in various tones, sometimes sharp and brief, other times drawn out and soft like a whisper. The children gradually become captivated by this. Occasionally, I say, "Even quieter—more quiet."
I then begin the sibilant St! St! again, making it always lighter and repeating "More silent still," in a barely audible voice. Then I say still in a low whisper, "Now, I hear the clock, now I can hear the buzzing of a fly's wings, now I can hear the whisper of the trees in the garden."
I then start the hissing "Shh! Shh!" again, making it softer each time and repeating "Even quieter," in a barely audible voice. Then I whisper, "Now I hear the clock, now I can hear the buzz of a fly's wings, now I can hear the rustle of the trees in the garden."
The children, ecstatic with joy, sit in such absolute and complete silence that the room seems deserted; then I whisper, "Let us close our eyes." This exercise repeated, so habituates the children to immobility and to absolute silence that, when one of them interrupts, it needs only a syllable, a gesture to call him back immediately to perfect order.
The kids, overjoyed, sit in such total silence that the room feels empty; then I whisper, "Let’s close our eyes." This practice, repeated, trains the kids to remain still and quiet so much that when one of them breaks the silence, it only takes a word or a gesture to bring them back to perfect order.
In the silence, we proceeded to the production of sounds and noises, making these at first strongly contrasted, then, more nearly alike. Sometimes we present the comparisons between noise and sound. I believe that the best results can be obtained with the primitive means employed by Itard in 1805. He used the drum and the bell. His plan was a graduated series of drums for the noises,—or, better, for the heavy harmonic sounds, since these belong to a musical instrument,—and a series of bells. The diapason, the whistles, the boxes, are not attractive to the child, and do not educate the sense of hearing as do these other instru[Pg 206]ments. There is an interesting suggestion in the fact that the two great human institutions, that of hate (war), and that of love (religion), have adopted these two opposite instruments, the drum and the bell.
In the quiet, we started making sounds and noises, initially contrasting them sharply, then gradually making them more similar. Sometimes we compare noise and sound. I think the best results come from the basic methods Itard used in 1805. He utilized the drum and the bell. His approach involved a series of progressively tuned drums for the louder sounds—more accurately, for the deep harmonic sounds, since these are part of a musical instrument—and a set of bells. The piano, whistles, and boxes don't engage the child and don’t develop the sense of hearing as effectively as those other instruments. It's interesting to note that the two major human institutions, hate (war) and love (religion), have chosen these two contrasting instruments, the drum and the bell.
I believe that after establishing silence it would be educational to ring well-toned bells, now calm and sweet, now clear and ringing, sending their vibrations through the child's whole body. And when, besides the education of the ear, we have produced a vibratory education of the whole body, through these wisely selected sounds of the bells, giving a peace that pervades the very fibres of his being, then I believe these young bodies would be sensitive to crude noises, and the children would come to dislike, and to cease from making, disordered and ugly noises.
I think that after creating a moment of silence, it would be valuable to ring well-tuned bells, sometimes calm and soothing, other times clear and resonant, sending their vibrations throughout the child’s entire body. And when, in addition to training the ear, we have created a vibratory education that engages the whole body through these carefully chosen sounds of the bells, bringing a sense of peace that fills every part of their being, then I believe these young bodies would become sensitive to loud, harsh noises, and the children would learn to dislike and stop making disordered and unpleasant sounds.
In this way one whose ear has been trained by a musical education suffers from strident or discordant notes. I need give no illustration to make clear the importance of such education for the masses in childhood. The new generation would be more calm, turning away from the confusion and the discordant sounds, which strike the ear to-day in one of the vile tenements where the poor live, crowded together, left by us to abandon themselves to the lower, more brutal human instincts.
In this way, someone with a musical education can’t stand harsh or clashing notes. I don’t need to provide examples to highlight how important this education is for children. The new generation would be calmer, avoiding the chaos and jarring sounds that fill the air today in the rundown apartments where the poor live, crammed together, abandoned by us to give in to the more base and brutal human instincts.
Musical Education
Music Education
This must be carefully guided by method. In general, we see little children pass by the playing of some great musicians as an animal would pass. They do not perceive the delicate complexity of sounds. The street children gather about the organ grinder, crying out as if to hail with joy the noises which will come instead of sounds.
This needs to be carefully directed by a method. Generally, we see young kids ignore the playing of great musicians like an animal might walk by. They don't notice the subtle intricacies of the sounds. The street kids gather around the organ grinder, shouting as if to celebrate the noises that will replace the music.
For the musical education we must create instruments as well as music. The scope of such an instrument in[Pg 207] addition to the discrimination of sounds, is to awaken a sense of rhythm, and, so to speak, to give the impulse toward calm and co-ordinate movements to those muscles already vibrating in the peace and tranquillity of immobility.
For musical education, we need to create instruments as well as music. The purpose of such an instrument in[Pg 207] goes beyond just recognizing sounds; it’s also to develop a sense of rhythm and, so to speak, to encourage impulse towards calm and coordinated movements in the muscles that are already resonating in the peace and stillness of inactivity.
I believe that stringed instruments (perhaps some very much simplified harp) would be the most convenient. The stringed instruments together with the drum and the bells form the trio of the classic instruments of humanity. The harp is the instrument of "the intimate life of the individual." Legend places it in the hand of Orpheus, folk-lore puts it into fairy hands, and romance gives it to the princess who conquers the heart of a wicked prince.
I think stringed instruments (maybe a simplified harp) would be the easiest to use. Stringed instruments, along with drums and bells, create the classic trio of human instruments. The harp represents "the personal life of an individual." Legends show it in the hands of Orpheus, folklore gives it to fairies, and romance assigns it to the princess who wins the heart of a wicked prince.
The teacher who turns her back upon her scholars to play, (far too often badly), will never be the educator of their musical sense.
The teacher who turns her back on her students to play, (too often poorly), will never be the educator of their musical understanding.
The child needs to be charmed in every way, by the glance as well as by the pose. The teacher who, bending toward them, gathering them about her, and leaving them free to stay or go, touches the chords, in a simple rhythm, puts herself in communication with them, in relation with their very souls. So much the better if this touch can be accompanied by her voice, and the children left free to follow her, no one being obliged to sing. In this way she can select as "adapted to education," those songs which were followed by all the children. So she may regulate the complexity of rhythm to various ages, for she will see now only the older children following the rhythm, now, also the little ones. At any rate, I believe that simple and primitive instruments are the ones best adapted to the awakening of music in the soul of the little child.
The child needs to be engaged in every way, through looks as well as through posture. The teacher, leaning in towards them, gathers them close and gives them the freedom to stay or leave, makes a simple rhythm that connects with them, relating to their very souls. It’s even better if this connection can be accompanied by her voice, allowing the children to follow her freely, without anyone being forced to sing. This way, she can choose songs that are "suitable for education" and that all the children enjoy. She can adjust the complexity of the rhythm to suit different ages, noticing that sometimes only the older children follow the rhythm, and at other times, the little ones do too. In any case, I believe that simple and basic instruments are best for awakening music in the hearts of young children.
I have tried to have the Directress of the "Children's House" in Milan, who is a gifted musician, make a num[Pg 208]ber of trials, and experiments, with a view to finding out more about the muscular capacity of young children. She has made many trials with the pianoforte, observing how the children are not sensitive to the musical tone, but only to the rhythm. On a basis of rhythm she arranged simple little dances, with the intention of studying the influence of the rhythm itself upon the co-ordination of muscular movements. She was greatly surprised to discover the educational disciplinary effect of such music. Her children, who had been led with great wisdom and art through liberty to a spontaneous ordering of their acts and movements, had nevertheless lived in the streets and courts, and had an almost universal habit of jumping.
I have tried to get the Director of the "Children's House" in Milan, who is a talented musician, to conduct several tests and experiments to learn more about the physical abilities of young children. She has conducted many experiments with the piano, noticing that the children are not sensitive to the musical tone but only to the rhythm. Based on rhythm, she created simple little dances to study how rhythm itself affects the coordination of their movements. She was very surprised to find the educational and disciplinary impact of such music. Her children, who had been guided wisely and skillfully towards a spontaneous organization of their actions and movements, had nevertheless spent time in the streets and alleys and had developed an almost universal habit of jumping.
Being a faithful follower of the method of liberty, and not considering that jumping was a wrong act, she had never corrected them.
Being a loyal supporter of the method of freedom, and not believing that jumping was a wrong action, she had never corrected them.
She now noticed that as she multiplied and repeated the rhythm exercises, the children little by little left off their ugly jumping, until finally it was a thing of the past. The directress one day asked for an explanation of this change of conduct. Several little ones looked at her without saying anything. The older children gave various replies, whose meaning was the same.
She now realized that as she multiplied and repeated the rhythm exercises, the children gradually stopped their awkward jumping, until it eventually became a thing of the past. One day, the director asked for an explanation for this change in behavior. Several little ones looked at her in silence. The older children offered different answers, but their meanings were the same.
"It isn't nice to jump."
"Jumping isn't nice."
"Jumping is ugly."
"Jumping is awkward."
"It's rude to jump."
"Don’t interrupt."
This was certainly a beautiful triumph for our method!
This was definitely a beautiful victory for our method!
This experience shows that it is possible to educate the child's muscular sense, and it shows how exquisite the refinement of this sense may be as it develops in relation to the muscular memory, and side by side with the other forms of sensory memory.
This experience demonstrates that it's possible to develop a child's muscular sense, and it highlights how refined this sense can become as it evolves alongside muscular memory and other types of sensory memory.
Tests for Acuteness of Hearing
Hearing Tests
The only entirely successful experiments which we have made so far in the "Children's Houses" are those of the clock, and of the lowered or whispered voice. The trial is purely empirical, and does not lend itself to the measuring of the sensation, but it is, however, most useful in that it helps us to an approximate knowledge of the child's auditory acuteness.
The only completely successful experiments we've conducted so far in the "Children's Houses" are with the clock and the lowered or whispered voice. The trial is purely empirical and can't be measured in terms of sensation, but it is very useful because it gives us a rough idea of the child's hearing ability.
The exercise consists in calling attention, when perfect silence has been established, to the ticking of the clock, and to all the little noises not commonly audible to the ear. Finally we call the little ones, one by one from an adjoining room, pronouncing each name in a low voice. In preparing for such an exercise it is necessary to teach the children the real meaning of silence.
The exercise involves drawing attention, once complete silence has been achieved, to the ticking of the clock and to all the subtle sounds that usually go unnoticed. Finally, we call the kids, one by one from another room, saying each name softly. To prepare for this exercise, it's essential to teach the children the true meaning of silence.
Toward this end I have several games of silence, which help in a surprising way to strengthen the remarkable discipline of our children.
Toward this end, I have several games of silence, which help in a surprising way to strengthen the remarkable discipline of our kids.
I call the children's attention to myself, telling them to see how silent I can be. I assume different positions; standing, sitting, and maintain each pose silently, without movement. A finger moving can produce a noise, even though it be imperceptible. We may breathe so that we may be heard. But I maintain absolute silence, which is not an easy thing to do. I call a child, and ask him to do as I am doing. He adjusts his feet to a better position, and this makes a noise! He moves an arm, stretching it out upon the arm of his chair; it is a noise. His breathing is not altogether silent, it is not tranquil, absolutely unheard as mine is.
I get the kids' attention and ask them to see how quiet I can be. I take different positions—standing, sitting—and I stay in each pose completely still, without making a sound. Even a moving finger can make noise, even if it's too quiet to notice. We might breathe in a way that could be heard. But I keep total silence, which isn't easy. I call one child over and ask him to mimic what I'm doing. He shifts his feet for a better stance, and that makes a noise! He moves his arm, stretching it out on the armrest of his chair; that's a noise too. His breathing isn’t completely silent; it’s not calm, not entirely unheard like mine is.
During these manœuvres on the part of the child, and[Pg 210] while my brief comments are followed by intervals of immobility and silence, the other children are watching and listening. Many of them are interested in the fact, which they have never noticed before; namely, that we make so many noises of which we are not conscious, and that there are degrees of silence. There is an absolute silence where nothing, absolutely nothing moves. They watch me in amazement when I stand in the middle of the room, so quietly that it is really as if "I were not." Then they strive to imitate me, and to do even better. I call attention here and there to a foot that moves, almost inadvertently. The attention of the child is called to every part of his body in an anxious eagerness to attain to immobility.
During these movements by the child, and[Pg 210] while my brief comments are followed by moments of stillness and silence, the other kids are watching and listening. Many of them are fascinated by something they've never noticed before: that we make so many sounds without being aware of it, and that there are degrees of silence. There's a complete silence where nothing, absolutely nothing moves. They look at me in awe when I stand in the middle of the room so quietly that it feels like "I’m not even here." Then they try to copy me and do even better. I point out here and there a foot that moves, almost without realizing it. The child's focus is drawn to every part of their body in a eager desire to achieve stillness.
When the children are trying in this way, there is established a silence very different from that which we carelessly call by that name.
When the kids are trying like this, a silence is created that's totally different from what we usually just call silence.
It seems as if life gradually vanishes, and that the room becomes, little by little, empty, as if there were no longer anyone in it. Then we begin to hear the tick-tock of the clock, and this sound seems to grow in intensity as the silence becomes absolute. From without, from the court which before seemed silent, there come varied noises, a bird chirps, a child passes. The children sit fascinated by that silence as if by some conquest of their own. "Here," says the directress, "here there is no longer anyone; the children have all gone away."
It feels like life is slowly fading away, and the room is becoming emptier and emptier, as if no one is left inside. Then we start to hear the tick-tock of the clock, and the sound seems to grow louder as the silence becomes complete. From outside, from the courtyard that once seemed quiet, come various noises—a bird chirps, a child walks by. The children sit captivated by that silence, as if it’s something they’ve achieved on their own. "Here," says the director, "here there’s no one left; all the children have gone away."
Having arrived at that point, we darken the windows, and tell the children to close their eyes, resting their heads upon their hands. They assume this position, and in the darkness the absolute silence returns.
Having reached that point, we cover the windows and tell the kids to close their eyes, resting their heads on their hands. They take this position, and in the darkness, complete silence returns.
"Now listen," we say. "A soft voice is going to call your name." Then going to a room behind the children, and standing within the open door, I call in a low voice,[Pg 211] lingering over the syllables as if I were calling from across the mountains. This voice, almost occult, seems to reach the heart and to call to the soul of the child. Each one as he is called, lifts his head, opens his eyes as if altogether happy, then rises, silently seeking not to move the chair, and walks on the tips of his toes, so quietly that he is scarcely heard. Nevertheless his step resounds in the silence, and amid the immobility which persists.
"Now listen," we say. "A soft voice is going to call your name." Then, going to a room behind the children and standing in the open door, I call out in a soft voice,[Pg 211] stretching out the syllables as if I were calling from far away. This voice, almost mysterious, seems to touch the heart and reach the soul of the child. Each one, as he is called, lifts his head and opens his eyes, looking genuinely happy, then gets up, trying not to move the chair, and walks on his tiptoes, so quietly that he can barely be heard. Still, his footsteps echo in the silence, amidst the stillness that remains.
Having reached the door, with a joyous face, he leaps into the room, choking back soft outbursts of laughter. Another child may come to hide his face against my dress, another, turning, will watch his companions sitting like statues silent and waiting. The one who is called feels that he is privileged, that he has received a gift, a prize. And yet they know that all will be called, "beginning with the most silent one in all the room." So each one tries to merit by his perfect silence the certain call. I once saw a little one of three years try to suffocate a sneeze, and succeed! She held her breath in her little breast, and resisted, coming out victorious. A most surprising effort!
Having reached the door, with a joyful expression, he jumps into the room, stifling soft bursts of laughter. One child might come to hide their face against my dress, while another, turning around, watches their friends sitting still like statues, silent and waiting. The one who is called feels special, as if they've received a gift, a prize. Yet they all know that everyone will be called, starting with the quietest one in the room. So each child tries to earn their turn by maintaining perfect silence. I once saw a three-year-old attempt to hold back a sneeze and manage it! She held her breath in her little chest and resisted, emerging victorious. A truly impressive effort!
This game delights the little ones beyond measure. Their intent faces, their patient immobility, reveal the enjoyment of a great pleasure. In the beginning, when the soul of the child was unknown to me, I had thought of showing them sweetmeats and little toys, promising to give them to the ones who were called, supposing that the gifts would be necessary to persuade the child to make the necessary effort. But I soon found that this was unnecessary.
This game brings immense joy to the little ones. Their focused expressions and stillness show just how much they enjoy it. At first, when I didn't really understand the child's spirit, I thought about offering them treats and small toys, promising to give them to those who were chosen, thinking that these gifts would be needed to motivate the child to put in the effort. But I quickly realized that this wasn't needed.
The children, after they had made the effort necessary to maintain silence, enjoyed the sensation, took pleasure in the silence itself. They were like ships safe in a tranquil harbour, happy in having experienced something new,[Pg 212] and to have won a victory over themselves. This, indeed, was their recompense. They forgot the promise of sweets, and no longer cared to take the toys, which I had supposed would attract them. I therefore abandoned that useless means, and saw, with surprise, that the game became constantly more perfect, until even children of three years of age remained immovable in the silence throughout the time required to call the entire forty children out of the room! It was then that I learned that the soul of the child has its own reward, and its peculiar spiritual pleasures. After such exercises it seemed to me that the children came closer to me, certainly they became more obedient, more gentle and sweet. We had, indeed, been isolated from the world, and had passed several minutes during which the communion between us was very close, I wishing for them and calling to them, and they receiving in the perfect silence the voice which was directed personally toward each one of them, crowning each in turn with happiness.
The children, after putting in the effort to stay quiet, really enjoyed the feeling of silence itself. They were like ships safely docked in a calm harbor, happy to have experienced something new, [Pg 212] and proud of their self-control. This was their reward. They forgot about the promise of sweets and no longer cared about the toys I thought would attract them. So I let go of that ineffective strategy and was surprised to see that the game kept getting better, to the point where even three-year-olds stayed perfectly still in silence while I called all forty kids out of the room! It was then that I realized the child's soul has its own rewards and unique spiritual joys. After these activities, it felt like the children drew closer to me; they became more obedient, gentler, and sweeter. We had, after all, been cut off from the outside world, sharing several moments of a deep connection where I called to them, and they received my voice in perfect silence, bringing each of them happiness in turn.
A Lesson in Silence
A Lesson in Silence
I am about to describe a lesson which proved most successful in teaching the perfect silence to which it is possible to attain. One day as I was about to enter one of the "Children's Houses," I met in the court a mother who held in her arms her little baby of four months. The little one was swaddled, as is still the custom among the people of Rome—an infant thus in the swaddling bands is called by us a pupa. This tranquil little one seemed the incarnation of peace. I took her in my arms, where she lay quiet and good. Still holding her I went toward the schoolroom, from which the children now ran to meet me. They always welcomed me thus, throwing their arms about me, clinging to my skirts, and almost tumbling me over in[Pg 213] their eagerness. I smiled at them, showing them the "pupa." They understood and skipped about me looking at me with eyes brilliant with pleasure, but did not touch me through respect for the little one that I held in my arms.
I’m about to share a lesson that was really effective in teaching the deep silence one can achieve. One day, just as I was about to enter one of the “Children's Houses,” I encountered a mother in the courtyard holding her four-month-old baby. The little one was wrapped up, as is still the custom in Rome—an infant like this is referred to as a pupa. This calm little baby seemed to embody peace. I scooped her up in my arms, where she lay quietly. While still holding her, I walked toward the classroom, where the children came running to greet me. They always welcomed me like this, throwing their arms around me, grabbing at my skirts, and almost knocking me over in their excitement. I smiled at them, showing them the "pupa." They got the message and danced around me, their eyes sparkling with joy, but they didn’t touch me out of respect for the little one I was holding.
I went into the schoolroom with the children clustered about me. We sat down, I seating myself in a large chair instead of, as usual, in one of their little chairs. In other words, I seated myself solemnly. They looked at my little one with a mixture of tenderness and joy. None of us had yet spoken a word. Finally I said to them, "I have brought you a little teacher." Surprised glances and laughter. "A little teacher, yes, because none of you know how to be quiet as she does." At this all the children changed their positions and became quiet. "Yet no one holds his limbs and feet as quietly as she." Everyone gave closer attention to the position of limbs and feet. I looked at them smiling, "Yes, but they can never be as quiet as hers. You move a little bit, but she, not at all; none of you can be as quiet as she." The children looked serious. The idea of the superiority of the little teacher seemed to have reached them. Some of them smiled, and seemed to say with their eyes that the swaddling bands deserved all the merit. "Not one of you can be silent, voiceless as she." General silence. "It is not possible to be as silent as she, because,—listen to her breathing—how delicate it is; come near to her on your tiptoes."
I walked into the classroom with the kids gathered around me. We sat down, and I took a seat in a big chair instead of, like usual, one of their small chairs. In other words, I sat down with some seriousness. They looked at my little one with a mix of affection and joy. None of us had talked yet. Finally, I said to them, "I brought you a little teacher." They gave surprised looks and laughed. "A little teacher, yes, because none of you are as quiet as she is." At this, all the kids shifted and settled down. "Yet none of you holds your limbs and feet as quietly as she does." Everyone focused on how their limbs and feet were positioned. I smiled at them, saying, "Yes, but your quiet can never match hers. You fidget a bit, but she doesn't move at all; none of you can be as quiet as she is." The kids looked serious. The idea that the little teacher was superior seemed to sink in. Some of them smiled, as if to say with their eyes that the swaddling clothes deserved all the credit. "None of you can be silent, voiceless like her." A general hush fell over the room. "It's impossible to be as silent as she is, because—listen to how she breathes—it's so delicate; come close to her on your tiptoes."
Several children rose, and came slowly forward on tiptoe, bending toward the baby. Great silence. "None of you can breathe so silently as she." The children looked about amazed, they had never thought that even when sitting quietly they were making noises, and that the silence of a little babe is more profound than the silence of[Pg 214] grown people. They almost ceased to breathe. I rose. "Go out quietly, quietly," I said, "walk on the tips of your toes and make no noise." Following them I said, "And yet I still hear some sounds, but she, the baby, walks with me and makes no sound. She goes out silently!" The children smiled. They understood the truth and the jest of my words. I went to the open window, and placed the baby in the arms of the mother who stood watching us.
Several children stood up and slowly made their way forward on tiptoe, leaning toward the baby. A deep silence fell. "None of you can be as quiet as she is." The children looked around in surprise; they had never realized that even when sitting still, they were making noise, and that the silence of a little baby is deeper than the silence of[Pg 214] grown-ups. They almost stopped breathing. I stood up. "Go outside quietly, quietly," I said, "walk on your toes and make no noise." As I followed them, I added, "And yet I can still hear some sounds, but she, the baby, walks with me and makes no noise. She leaves silently!" The children smiled. They grasped the truth and the joke in my words. I went to the open window and placed the baby in the arms of the mother who was watching us.
The little one seemed to have left behind her a subtle charm which enveloped the souls of the children. Indeed, there is in nature nothing more sweet than the silent breathing of a new-born babe. There is an indescribable majesty about this human life which in repose and silence gathers strength and newness of life. Compared to this, Wordsworth's description of the silent peace of nature seems to lose its force. "What calm, what quiet! The one sound the drip of the suspended oar." The children, too, felt the poetry and beauty in the peaceful silence of a new-born human life.
The little one seemed to leave behind a subtle charm that wrapped around the souls of the children. Truly, there’s nothing sweeter in nature than the gentle breathing of a newborn. There’s an indescribable majesty in this human life that, in its stillness and silence, gathers strength and freshness. Compared to this, Wordsworth's description of nature's quiet peace feels less impactful. "What calm, what quiet! The only sound is the drip of the hanging oar." The children also sensed the poetry and beauty in the peaceful silence of a newborn's life.
[12] Here and elsewhere throughout the book the word "touch" is used not only to express contact between the fingers and an object, but the moving of fingers or hand over an object or its outline.
[12] Here and in other parts of the book, the word "touch" is used not just to describe contact between fingers and an object, but also to refer to the movement of fingers or hands across an object or its shape.
CHAPTER XIV
General Notes on Educating the Senses
I do not claim to have brought to perfection the method of sense training as applied to young children. I do believe, however, that it opens a new field for psychological research, promising rich and valuable results.
I don’t say I’ve perfected the method of sensory training for young children. However, I do think it opens up a new area for psychological research, offering promising and valuable outcomes.
Experimental psychology has so far devoted its attention to perfecting the instruments by which the sensations are measured. No one has attempted the methodical preparation of the individual for the sensations. It is my belief that the development of psychometry will owe more to the attention given to the preparation of the individual than to the perfecting of the instrument.
Experimental psychology has so far focused on perfecting the tools used to measure sensations. No one has tried to systematically prepare individuals for the sensations. I believe that the progress of psychometry will depend more on how we prepare the individual than on enhancing the tools.
But putting aside this purely scientific side of the question, the education of the senses must be of the greatest pedagogical interest.
But putting aside this purely scientific aspect of the issue, the education of the senses has to be of significant pedagogical interest.
Our aim in education in general is two-fold, biological and social. From the biological side we wish to help the natural development of the individual, from the social standpoint it is our aim to prepare the individual for the environment. Under this last head technical education may be considered as having a place, since it teaches the individual to make use of his surroundings. The education of the senses is most important from both these points of view. The development of the senses indeed precedes that of superior intellectual activity and the child between three and seven years is in the period of formation.[Pg 216]
Our goal in education is two-fold: biological and social. From a biological perspective, we want to support the natural growth of the individual, while from a social standpoint, we aim to prepare the individual for their environment. In this context, technical education plays a crucial role as it teaches individuals to utilize their surroundings effectively. The education of the senses is essential from both perspectives. In fact, the development of the senses comes before advanced intellectual activity, and children between the ages of three and seven are in a critical formative stage.[Pg 216]
We can, then, help the development of the senses while they are in this period. We may graduate and adapt the stimuli just as, for example, it is necessary to help the formation of language before it shall be completely developed.
We can help develop the senses during this stage. We can gradually adjust the stimuli just like it's necessary to support language development before it is fully formed.
All education of little children must be governed by this principle—to help the natural psychic and physical development of the child.
All education for young children should be guided by this principle—to support the child's natural psychic and physical development.
The other aim of education (that of adapting the individual to the environment) should be given more attention later on when the period of intense development is past.
The other goal of education (helping the individual fit into their environment) should receive more focus later on after the intense development phase is over.
These two phases of education are always interlaced, but one or the other has prevalence according to the age of the child. Now, the period of life between the ages of three and seven years covers a period of rapid physical development. It is the time for the formation of the sense activities as related to the intellect The child in this age develops his senses. His attention is further attracted to the environment under the form of passive curiosity.
These two phases of education are always intertwined, but one tends to dominate based on the child's age. The stage of life between three and seven years is marked by rapid physical growth. It's the time for forming sensory activities linked to the intellect. During this age, the child develops their senses, and their attention is increasingly drawn to their surroundings through passive curiosity.
The stimuli, and not yet the reasons for things, attract his attention. This is, therefore, the time when we should methodically direct the sense stimuli, in such a way that the sensations which he receives shall develop in a rational way. This sense training will prepare the ordered foundation upon which he may build up a clear and strong mentality.
The stimuli, not yet the reasons for things, grab his attention. So, this is the time when we should systematically guide the sensory stimuli so that the sensations he experiences can develop in a logical way. This sensory training will create the organized foundation upon which he can build a clear and strong mindset.
It is, besides all this, possible with the education of the senses to discover and eventually to correct defects which to-day pass unobserved in the school. Now the time comes when the defect manifests itself in an evident and irreparable inability to make use of the forces of[Pg 217] life about him. (Such defects as deafness and near-sightedness.) This education, therefore, is physiological and prepares directly for intellectual education, perfecting the organs of sense, and the nerve-paths of projection and association.
It’s also possible, through sensory education, to identify and eventually correct flaws that often go unnoticed in schools today. At some point, these flaws become obvious and result in a clear and irreversible inability to use the life forces around them. (For example, issues like deafness and nearsightedness.) Therefore, this education is physiological and directly prepares for intellectual learning by refining the sensory organs and the nerve pathways involved in projection and association.
But the other part of education, the adaptation of the individual to his environment, is indirectly touched. We prepare with our method the infancy of the humanity of our time. The men of the present civilisation are preeminently observers of their environment because they must utilise to the greatest possible extent all the riches of this environment.
But the other aspect of education, the way individuals adjust to their surroundings, is indirectly addressed. We prepare through our method for the early development of the humanity of our time. The people of today's civilization are mainly observers of their environment because they need to take full advantage of all the resources available in it.
The art of to-day bases itself, as in the days of the Greeks, upon observation of the truth.
The art of today, like in the days of the Greeks, is based on observing the truth.
The progress of positive science is based upon its observations and all its discoveries and their applications, which in the last century have so transformed our civic environment, were made by following the same line—that is, they have come through observation. We must therefore prepare the new generation for this attitude, which has become necessary in our modern civilised life. It is an indispensable means—man must be so armed if he is to continue efficaciously the work of our progress.
The advancement of positive science relies on its observations and all its discoveries and applications, which in the last century have drastically changed our social environment, achieved by following the same approach—that is, through observation. We must therefore equip the new generation with this mindset, which has become essential in our modern civilized life. It is a crucial tool—people must be prepared this way if they are to effectively continue our progress.
We have seen the discovery of the Roentgen Rays born of observation. To the same methods are due the discovery of Hertzian waves, and vibrations of radium, and we await wonderful things from the Marconi telegraph. While there has been no period in which thought has gained so much from positive study as the present century, and this same century promises new light in the field of speculative philosophy and upon spiritual questions, the theories upon the matter have themselves led to most interesting metaphysical concepts. We may say[Pg 218] that in preparing the method of observation, we have also prepared the way leading to spiritual discovery.
We have witnessed the discovery of X-rays resulting from observation. The same methods led to the discovery of radio waves and radium vibrations, and we are looking forward to amazing advancements from the Marconi telegraph. There hasn't been a time where thought has benefited so much from empirical study as in this century, and this century promises new insights into speculative philosophy and spiritual matters. The theories around this have also led to fascinating metaphysical ideas. We can say[Pg 218] that by developing the method of observation, we have also paved the way for spiritual discoveries.
The education of the senses makes men observers, and not only accomplishes the general work of adaptation to the present epoch of civilisation, but also prepares them directly for practical life. We have had up to the present time, I believe, a most imperfect idea of what is necessary in the practical living of life. We have always started from ideas, and have proceeded thence to motor activities; thus, for example, the method of education has always been to teach intellectually, and then to have the child follow the principles he has been taught. In general, when we are teaching, we talk about the object which interests us, and then we try to lead the scholar, when he has understood, to perform some kind of work with the object itself; but often the scholar who has understood the idea finds great difficulty in the execution of the work which we give him, because we have left out of his education a factor of the utmost importance, namely, the perfecting of the senses. I may, perhaps, illustrate this statement with a few examples. We ask the cook to buy only 'fresh fish.' She understands the idea, and tries to follow it in her marketing, but, if the cook has not been trained to recognise through sight and smell the signs which indicate freshness in the fish, she will not know how to follow the order we have given her.
The education of the senses helps people become observers and not only fulfills the general need to adapt to today's society, but also directly prepares them for real-life situations. Up until now, I think we have had a very limited understanding of what is necessary for practical living. We’ve always begun with ideas and then moved on to actions; for example, the education system has typically involved teaching intellectually first and then expecting the child to apply those principles. Generally, when we teach, we discuss the object that interests us and then try to guide the student to work with that object once they’ve understood it. However, often the student who grasps the concept struggles with actually doing the task we set for them because we’ve overlooked a crucial element in their education: the refinement of their senses. Perhaps I can illustrate this with a few examples. We ask the cook to buy only 'fresh fish.' She understands the concept and tries to follow it when shopping, but if she hasn’t been trained to recognize the signs of freshness in fish through sight and smell, she won’t know how to fulfill our request.
Such a lack will show itself much more plainly in culinary operations. A cook may be trained in book matters, and may know exactly the recipes and the length of time advised in her cook book; she may be able to perform all the manipulations necessary to give the desired appearance to the dishes, but when it is a question[Pg 219] of deciding from the odor of the dish the exact moment of its being properly cooked, or with the eye, or the taste, the time at which she must put in some given condiment, then she will make a mistake if her senses have not been sufficiently prepared.
Such a lack will be much more obvious in cooking. A chef may be well-versed in theory and know all the recipes and cooking times listed in her cookbook; she might be skilled in making dishes look appealing, but when it comes to determining, by smell, the precise moment a dish is properly cooked, or by sight or taste when to add a certain seasoning, she will make a mistake if her senses aren't adequately trained.
She can only gain such ability through long practice, and such practice on the part of the cook is nothing else than a belated education of the senses—an education which often can never be properly attained by the adult. Thia is one reason why it is so difficult to find good cooks.
She can only achieve that skill through extensive practice, and for the cook, this practice is essentially a delayed education of the senses—an education that often can't be fully acquired by adults. This is one reason why it’s so hard to find good cooks.
Something of the same kind is true of the physician, the student of medicine who studies theoretically the character of the pulse, and sits down by the bed of the patient with the best will in the world to read the pulse, but, if his fingers do not know how to read the sensations his studies will have been in vain. Before he can become a doctor, he must gain a capacity for discriminating between sense stimuli.
Something similar can be said about the doctor, the medical student who learns about the pulse in theory and sits by the patient's bed with every intention of reading it. However, if his fingers can't interpret the sensations, his studies will have been useless. Before he can truly become a doctor, he must develop a capacity for discriminating between sense stimuli.
The same may be said for the pulsations of the heart, which the student studies in theory, but which the ear can learn to distinguish only through practice.
The same can be said for the pulsations of the heart, which the student learns about in theory, but which the ear can only recognize through practice.
We may say the same for all the delicate vibrations and movements, in the reading of which the hand of the physician is too often deficient. The thermometer is the more indispensable to the physician the more his sense of touch is unadapted and untrained in the gathering of the thermic stimuli. It is well understood that the physician may be learned, and most intelligent, without being a good practitioner, and that to make a good practitioner long practice is necessary. In reality, this long practice is nothing else than a tardy, and often inefficient, exercise of the senses. After he has assimilated the brilliant theories, the physician sees himself forced to the unpleas[Pg 220]ant labor of the semiography, that is to making a record of the symptoms revealed by his observation of and experiments with the patients. He must do this if he is to receive from these theories any practical results.
We can say the same about all the subtle vibrations and movements that often go unnoticed by a physician's touch. The thermometer becomes even more essential for a doctor when their sense of touch is untrained and inadequate for detecting temperature changes. It's well known that a physician can be knowledgeable and intelligent without being a skilled practitioner, and that becoming a good practitioner requires extensive experience. In reality, this extensive experience is just a delayed, and often ineffective, exercise of the senses. After grasping the impressive theories, the physician finds themselves forced into the tedious task of semiography, which involves documenting the symptoms observed through their interactions and experiments with patients. They must do this to derive any practical benefits from these theories.
Here, then, we have the beginner proceeding in a stereotyped way to tests of palpation, percussion, and auscultation, for the purpose of identifying the throbs, the resonance, the tones, the breathings, and the various sounds which alone can enable him to formulate a diagnosis. Hence the deep and unhappy discouragement of so many young physicians, and, above all, the loss of time; for it is often a question of lost years. Then, there is the immorality of allowing a man to follow a profession of so great responsibility, when, as is often the case, he is so unskilled and inaccurate in the taking of symptoms. The whole art of medicine is based upon an education of the senses; the schools, instead, prepare physicians through a study of the classics. All very well and good, but the splendid intellectual development of the physician falls, impotent, before the insufficiency of his senses.
Here, we have the beginner following a typical approach to tests of palpation, percussion, and auscultation, aimed at identifying the pulses, the resonance, the sounds, the breathings, and the various noises that alone can help him make a diagnosis. This leads to the deep and frustrating discouragement of many young doctors, and, most importantly, a significant waste of time; often it's about lost years. Moreover, it's unethical to let someone practice a profession with such great responsibility when, as is frequently the case, they are so unskilled and inaccurate in recording symptoms. The entire art of medicine is grounded in the education of the senses; instead, schools prepare doctors through studying the classics. While this is commendable, the doctor's impressive intellectual growth is rendered ineffective by their inadequate sensory skills.
One day, I heard a surgeon giving, to a number of poor mothers, a lesson on the recognition of the first deformities noticeable in little children from the disease of rickets. It was his hope to lead these mothers to bring to him their children who were suffering from this disease, while the disease was yet in the earliest stages, and when medical help might still be efficacious. The mothers understood the idea, but they did not know how to recognise these first signs of deformity, because they were lacking in the sensory education through which they might discriminate between signs deviating only slightly from the normal.
One day, I heard a surgeon teaching several low-income mothers how to recognize the early signs of deformities in young children caused by rickets. He wanted these mothers to bring their children to him when the disease was still in its initial stages, as that’s when medical treatment could still be effective. The mothers got the gist of what he was saying, but they didn’t know how to identify these early signs of deformity because they hadn’t received the sensory education needed to distinguish subtle deviations from what’s considered normal.
Therefore those lessons were useless. If we think of it[Pg 221] for a minute, we will see that almost all the forms of adulteration in food stuffs are rendered possible by the torpor of the senses, which exists in the greater number of people. Fraudulent industry feeds upon the lack of sense education in the masses, as any kind of fraud is based upon the ignorance of the victim. We often see the purchaser throwing himself upon the honesty of the merchant, or putting his faith in the company, or the label upon the box. This is because purchasers are lacking in the capacity of judging directly for themselves. They do not know how to distinguish with their senses the different qualities of various substances. In fact, we may say that in many cases intelligence is rendered useless by lack of practice, and this practice is almost always sense education. Everyone knows in practical life the fundamental necessity of judging with exactness between various stimuli.
So those lessons were pointless. If we think about it for a minute, we’ll realize that almost all the ways food can be tampered with are made possible by the dullness of the senses that most people have. Dishonest businesses thrive on the general lack of sensory awareness among the masses, as any type of fraud relies on the victim's ignorance. We often see buyers relying on the merchant's honesty, trusting the company, or believing in the label on the box. This happens because buyers struggle to assess things for themselves. They can't tell the different qualities of various substances just by using their senses. In fact, we can say that intelligence is often ineffective due to a lack of experience, and that experience usually comes from sensory education. Everyone knows the basic need in everyday life to accurately judge between different stimuli.
But very often sense education is most difficult for the adult, just as it is difficult for him to educate his hand when he wishes to become a pianist. It is necessary to begin the education of the senses in the formative period, if we wish to perfect this sense development with the education which is to follow. The education of the senses should be begun methodically in infancy, and should continue during the entire period of instruction which is to prepare the individual for life in society.
But very often, teaching the senses is really challenging for adults, just like it’s tough for them to train their hands when they want to be a pianist. It’s essential to start developing the senses during the early years if we want to enhance this sensory development alongside future education. Sensory education should be started methodically in infancy and should continue throughout all the instruction that prepares a person for life in society.
Æsthetic and moral education are closely related to this sensory education. Multiply the sensations, and develop the capacity of appreciating fine differences in stimuli, and we refine the sensibility and multiply man's pleasures.
Aesthetic and moral education are closely linked to this sensory education. Enhance the sensations and develop the ability to appreciate subtle differences in stimuli, and we refine our sensitivity and increase human pleasures.
Beauty lies in harmony, not in contrast; and harmony is refinement; therefore, there must be a fineness of the[Pg 222] senses if we are to appreciate harmony. The æsthetic harmony of nature is lost upon him who has coarse senses. The world to him is narrow and barren. In life about us, there exist inexhaustible fonts of æsthetic enjoyment, before which men pass as insensible as the brutes seeking their enjoyment in those sensations which are crude and showy, since they are the only ones accessible to them.
Beauty is found in harmony, not in contrast; and harmony requires refinement. So, we need to have a sensitivity of the[Pg 222] senses to truly appreciate harmony. Those with dull senses miss out on the aesthetic beauty of nature. To them, the world feels small and empty. In the life around us, there are endless sources of aesthetic pleasure, but many people go by without noticing, much like animals that seek enjoyment in basic and flashy experiences because those are the only ones they can reach.
Now, from the enjoyment of gross pleasures, vicious habits very often spring. Strong stimuli, indeed, do not render acute, but blunt the senses, so that they require stimuli more and more accentuated and more and more gross.
Now, from the enjoyment of extreme pleasures, bad habits often develop. Intense stimuli don’t sharpen the senses but dull them, making them require stronger and more intense stimuli.
Onanism, so often found among normal children of the lower classes, alcoholism, fondness for watching sensual acts of adults—these things represent the enjoyment of those unfortunate ones whose intellectual pleasures are few, and whose senses are blunted and dulled. Such pleasures kill the man within the individual, and call to life the beast.
Onanism, commonly seen in normal kids from lower-income families, along with alcoholism and a tendency to watch adults engage in sexual acts—these behaviors reflect the shallow enjoyment of those who have few intellectual pleasures and whose senses are numbed. Such pleasures stifle the human spirit within and awaken the baser instincts.

Indeed from the physiological point of view, the importance of the education of the senses is evident from an observation of the scheme of the diagrammatic arc which represents the functions of the nervous system. The external stimulus acts upon the organ of sense, and the impression is transmitted along the centripetal way to the nerve centre—the corresponding motor impulse is elaborated, and is transmitted along the centrifugal path to the organ of motion, provoking a movement. Although the arc represents diagrammatically the mechanism of reflex spinal[Pg 223] actions, it may still be considered as a fundamental key explaining the phenomena of the more complex nervous mechanisms. Man, with the peripheral sensory system, gathers various stimuli from his environment. He puts himself thus in direct communication with his surroundings. The psychic life develops, therefore, in relation to the system of nerve centres; and human activity which is eminently social activity, manifests itself through acts of the individual—manual work, writing, spoken language, etc.—by means of the psychomotor organs.
From a physiological standpoint, the importance of educating the senses is clear when we look at the diagram of the nervous system's functions. An external stimulus affects the sense organ, and the impression is transmitted through the centripetal pathway to the nerve center. A corresponding motor impulse is created and sent along the centrifugal pathway to the organ of motion, causing a movement. While the arc illustrates the mechanism of reflex spinal actions, it can also serve as a fundamental explanation for more complex nervous mechanisms. Humans, using their peripheral sensory system, collect various stimuli from their environment, directly interacting with their surroundings. Consequently, psychic life develops in relation to the nerve center system, and human activity, which is inherently social, is expressed through individual actions—such as manual labor, writing, spoken language, and more—utilizing psychomotor organs.
Education should guide and perfect the development of the three periods, the two peripheral and the central; or, better still, since the process fundamentally reduces itself to the nerve centres, education should give to psychosensory exercises the same importance which it gives to psychomotor exercises.
Education should guide and enhance the development of the three stages: the two outer ones and the central one. Or, more accurately, since the process fundamentally focuses on the nerve centers, education should prioritize psychosensory exercises just as much as it prioritizes psychomotor exercises.
Otherwise, we isolate man from his environment. Indeed, when with intellectual culture we believe ourselves to have completed education, we have but made thinkers, whose tendency will be to live without the world. We have not made practical men. If, on the other hand, wishing through education to prepare for practical life; we limit ourselves to exercising the psychomotor phase, we lose sight of the chief end of education, which is to put man in direct communication with the external world.
Otherwise, we isolate people from their environment. In fact, when we think we've finished education through intellectual culture, we’ve just created thinkers who are likely to live detached from the world. We haven’t developed practical individuals. Conversely, if we focus on preparing for practical life by only working on the psychomotor skills, we overlook the main goal of education, which is to connect people directly with the external world.
Since professional work almost always requires man to make use of his surroundings, the technical schools are not forced to return to the very beginnings of education, sense exercises, in order to supply the great and universal lack.
Since professional work almost always requires people to make use of their surroundings, the technical schools do not need to go back to the very beginnings of education, like sense exercises, to address the widespread gap.
CHAPTER XV
Academic Learning
"... To lead the child from the education of the senses to ideas."
"... To guide the child from sensory experiences to concepts."
Edward Séguin.
Edward Séguin.
The sense exercises constitute a species of auto-education, which, if these exercises be many times repeated, leads to a perfecting of the child's psychosensory processes. The directress must intervene to lead the child from sensations to ideas—from the concrete to the abstract, and to the association of ideas. For this, she should use a method tending to isolate the inner attention of the child and to fix it upon the perceptions—as in the first lessons his objective attention was fixed, through isolation, upon single stimuli.
The sense exercises are a form of self-education that, when practiced repeatedly, can improve a child's psychosensory processes. The teacher needs to step in to guide the child from sensations to ideas—from the concrete to the abstract—and to help them make connections between ideas. To do this, she should use a method that helps the child focus their inner attention on their perceptions, just as in the initial lessons where their objective attention was focused, through isolation, on single stimuli.
The teacher, in other words, when she gives a lesson must seek to limit the field of the child's consciousness to the object of the lesson, as, for example, during sense education she isolated the sense which she wished the child to exercise.
The teacher, in other words, when she gives a lesson must try to narrow the child's focus to the lesson's subject, just like during sense education when she isolated the sense she wanted the child to practice.
For this, knowledge of a special technique is necessary. The educator must, "to the greatest possible extent, limit his intervention; yet he must not allow the child to weary himself in an undue effort of auto-education."
For this, knowledge of a special technique is necessary. The educator must, "to the greatest possible extent, limit his intervention; yet he must not allow the child to wear himself out in an unnecessary effort of self-education."
It is here, that the factor of individual limitation and differing degrees of perception are most keenly felt in the teacher. In other words, in the quality of this inter[Pg 225]vention lies the art which makes up the individuality of the teacher.
It is here that the influence of individual limitations and varying levels of perception is most strongly felt in the teacher. In other words, the quality of this intervention reflects the unique art that makes the teacher who they are.
A definite and undoubted part of the teacher's work is that of teaching an exact nomenclature.
A clear and undeniable part of a teacher's job is teaching precise terminology.
She should, in most cases, pronounce the necessary names and adjectives without adding anything further. These words she should pronounce distinctly, and in a clear strong voice, so that the various sounds composing the word may be distinctly and plainly perceived by the child.
She should, in most cases, say the necessary names and adjectives without adding anything extra. These words should be spoken clearly and in a strong voice, so that the various sounds that make up the word can be clearly and easily understood by the child.
So, for example, touching the smooth and rough cards in the first tactile exercise, she should say, "This is smooth. This is rough," repeating the words with varying modulations of the voice, always letting the tones be clear and the enunciation very distinct. "Smooth, smooth, smooth. Rough, rough, rough."
So, for example, when feeling the smooth and rough cards in the first tactile exercise, she should say, "This is smooth. This is rough," repeating the words with different tones of voice, always ensuring the tones are clear and the pronunciation very precise. "Smooth, smooth, smooth. Rough, rough, rough."
In the same way, when treating of the sensations of heat and cold, she must say, "This is cold." "This is hot." "This is ice-cold." "This is tepid." She may then begin to use the generic terms, "heat," "more heat," "less heat," etc.
In the same way, when talking about the sensations of heat and cold, she should say, "This is cold." "This is hot." "This is ice-cold." "This is lukewarm." She can then start using the general terms, "heat," "more heat," "less heat," and so on.
First. "The lessons in nomenclature must consist simply in provoking the association of the name with the object, or with the abstract idea which the name represents." Thus the object and the name must be united when they are received by the child's mind, and this makes it most necessary that no other word besides the name be spoken.
First. "The lessons in naming should focus on connecting the name directly with the object or the idea that the name represents." So, the object and the name need to be linked in the child's mind, which makes it essential that no other word besides the name is used.
Second. The teacher must always test whether or not her lesson has attained the end she had in view, and her tests must be made to come within the restricted field of consciousness, provoked by the lesson on nomenclature.
Second. The teacher must always check if her lesson achieved its intended goal, and her evaluations should focus on the specific area of awareness triggered by the lesson on naming.
The first test will be to find whether the name is still[Pg 226] associated in the child's mind with the object. She must allow the necessary time to elapse, letting a short period of silence intervene between the lesson and the test. Then she may ask the child, pronouncing slowly and very clearly the name or the adjective she has taught: "Which is smooth? Which is rough?"
The first test will be to see if the name is still[Pg 226] linked in the child's mind to the object. She should give it enough time, allowing a brief moment of silence between the lesson and the test. Then she can ask the child, speaking slowly and very clearly the name or the adjective she has taught: "Which is smooth? Which is rough?"
The child will point to the object with his finger, and the teacher will know that he has made the desired association. But if he has not done this, that is, if he makes a mistake, she must not correct him, but must suspend her lesson, to take it up again another day. Indeed, why correct him? If the child has not succeeded in associating the name with the object, the only way in which to succeed would be to repeat both the action of the sense stimuli and the name; in other words, to repeat the lesson. But when the child has failed, we should know that he was not at that instant ready for the psychic association which we wished to provoke in him, and we must therefore choose another moment.
The child will point to the object with his finger, and the teacher will know that he has made the desired connection. But if he doesn't do this, meaning if he makes a mistake, she must not correct him, but should pause her lesson and come back to it another day. After all, why correct him? If the child hasn't been able to associate the name with the object, the only way to succeed would be to repeat both the action of the sensory stimuli and the name; in other words, to repeat the lesson. However, when the child has failed, we should recognize that he wasn't ready at that moment for the mental association we intended to encourage, and we should therefore choose another time.
If we should say, in correcting the child, "No, you have made a mistake," all these words, which, being in the form of a reproof, would strike him more forcibly than others (such as smooth or rough), would remain in the mind of the child, retarding the learning of the names. On the contrary, the silence which follows the error leaves the field of consciousness clear, and the next lesson may successfully follow the first. In fact, by revealing the error we may lead the child to make an undue effort to remember, or we may discourage him, and it is our duty to avoid as much as possible all unnatural effort and all depression.
If we say to a child when correcting them, "No, you made a mistake," those words, which are a form of reprimand, will impact them more than other words (like smooth or rough) and will stick in their mind, making it harder for them to learn the names. On the flip side, the silence that comes after the mistake keeps their mind clear, allowing the next lesson to build successfully on the first. In fact, by pointing out the mistake, we might cause the child to try too hard to remember, or we could discourage them, and it's our responsibility to minimize any unnecessary effort and discouragement.
Third. If the child has not committed any error, the teacher may provoke the motor activity corresponding to[Pg 227] the idea of the object: that is, to the pronunciation of the name. She may ask him, "What is this?" and the child should respond, "Smooth." The teacher may then interrupt, teaching him how to pronounce the word correctly and distinctly, first, drawing a deep breath and, then, saying in a rather loud voice, "Smooth." When he does this the teacher may note his particular speech defect, or the special form of baby talk to which he may be addicted.
Third. If the child hasn’t made any mistakes, the teacher can encourage the motor activity related to [Pg 227] the concept of the object: that is, the pronunciation of the name. She might ask him, "What is this?" and the child should answer, "Smooth." The teacher can then step in, showing him how to say the word correctly and clearly, first taking a deep breath and then saying in a fairly loud voice, "Smooth." When he does this, the teacher should pay attention to his specific speech issue or the particular type of baby talk he might be using.
In regard to the generalisation of the ideas received, and by that I mean the application of these ideas to his environment, I do not advise any lessons of this sort for a certain length of time, even for a number of months. There will be children who, after having touched a few times the stuffs, or merely the smooth and rough cards, will quite spontaneously touch the various surfaces about them, repeating "Smooth! Rough! It is velvet! etc." In dealing with normal children, we must await this spontaneous investigation of the surroundings, or, as I like to call it, this voluntary explosion of the exploring spirit. In such cases, the children experience a joy at each fresh discovery. They are conscious of a sense of dignity and satisfaction which encourages them to seek for new sensations from their environment and to make themselves spontaneous observers.
When it comes to the generalization of the ideas we've discussed, meaning how they apply to his surroundings, I don't recommend any lessons like this for a certain period, even for several months. Some children, after handling a few materials or just the smooth and rough cards, will naturally start to explore the different surfaces around them, repeating phrases like "Smooth! Rough! It’s velvet! etc." With typical children, we should wait for this natural curiosity about their environment, or what I like to call a voluntary explosion of their exploring spirit. In these cases, the kids feel joy with every new discovery. They have a sense of dignity and satisfaction that motivates them to seek out new sensations in their environment and become spontaneous observers.
The teacher should watch with the most solicitous care to see when and how the child arrives at this generalisation of ideas. For example, one of our little four-year-olds while running about in the court one day suddenly stood still and cried out, "Oh! the sky is blue!" and stood for some time looking up into the blue expanse of the sky.
The teacher should pay close attention to when and how the child reaches this generalization of ideas. For instance, one of our little four-year-olds, while running around in the playground one day, suddenly stopped and exclaimed, "Oh! The sky is blue!" and stood for a while gazing up at the blue sky.
One day, when I entered one of the "Children's Houses," five or six little ones gathered quietly about me[Pg 228] and began caressing, lightly, my hands, and my clothing, saying, "It is smooth." "It is velvet." "This is rough." A number of others came near and began with serious and intent faces to repeat the same words, touching me as they did so. The directress wished to interfere to release me, but I signed to her to be quiet, and I myself did not move, but remained silent, admiring this spontaneous intellectual activity of my little ones. The greatest triumph of our educational method should always be this: to bring about the spontaneous progress of the child.
One day, when I walked into one of the "Children's Houses," five or six little kids quietly gathered around me[Pg 228] and started gently touching my hands and my clothes, saying, "It feels smooth." "It feels like velvet." "This is rough." A few more came over and, with serious, focused expressions, repeated the same words while touching me. The director wanted to step in to free me, but I signaled for her to stay back, and I didn’t move but stayed silent, admiring this spontaneous intellectual activity of my little ones. The greatest achievement of our educational approach should always be: to foster the child's natural progress.
One day, a little boy, following one of our exercises in design, had chosen to fill in with coloured pencils the outline of a tree. To colour the trunk he laid hold upon a red crayon. The teacher wished to interfere, saying, "Do you think trees have red trunks?" I held her back and allowed the child to colour the tree red. This design was precious to us; it showed that the child was not yet an observer of his surroundings. My way of treating this was to encourage the child to make use of the games for the chromatic sense. He went daily into the garden with the other children, and could at any time see the tree trunks. When the sense exercises should have succeeded in attracting the child's spontaneous attention to colours about him, then, in some happy moment he would become aware that the tree trunks were not red, just as the other child during his play had become conscious of the fact that the sky was blue. In fact, the teacher continued to give the child outlines of trees to fill in. He one day chose a brown pencil with which to colour the trunk, and made the branches and leaves green. Later, he made the branches brown, also, using green only for the leaves.
One day, a little boy, during one of our design exercises, decided to fill in the outline of a tree with colored pencils. To color the trunk, he grabbed a red crayon. The teacher wanted to intervene, saying, "Do you think trees have red trunks?" I stopped her and let the child color the tree red. This design was precious to us; it showed that the child wasn't yet observing his surroundings. My approach was to encourage the child to engage with games that developed his color sense. He went into the garden daily with the other kids and could see the tree trunks at any time. Once the sensory exercises managed to capture the child's spontaneous attention to the colors around him, then, in some happy moment, he would realize that tree trunks weren't red, just like another child, during play, became aware that the sky was blue. In fact, the teacher kept giving the child outlines of trees to fill in. One day, he picked a brown pencil to color the trunk and made the branches and leaves green. Later, he colored the branches brown as well, using green only for the leaves.
Thus we have the test of the child's intellectual progress. We can not create observers by saying, "observe,"[Pg 229] but by giving them the power and the means for this observation, and these means are procured through education of the senses. Once we have aroused such activity, auto-education is assured, for refined well-trained senses lead us to a closer observation of the environment, and this, with its infinite variety, attracts the attention and continues the psychosensory education.
Thus we have the test of the child's intellectual progress. We can't create observers just by telling them, "observe,"[Pg 229] but by giving them the ability and tools for this observation, and these tools come from educating the senses. Once we have sparked such activity, self-education is guaranteed, since well-trained senses lead us to a closer look at our environment, and this, with its endless variety, captures attention and continues the psychosensory education.
If, on the other hand, in this matter of sense education we single out definite concepts of the quality of certain objects, these very objects become associated with, or a part of, the training, which is in this way limited to those concepts taken and recorded. So the sense training remains unfruitful. When, for example, a teacher has given in the old way a lesson on the names of the colours, she has imparted an idea concerning that particular quality, but she has not educated the chromatic sense. The child will know these colours in a superficial way, forgetting them from time to time; and at best his appreciation of them will lie within the limits prescribed by the teacher. When, therefore, the teacher of the old methods shall have provoked the generalisation of the idea, saying, for example, "What is the colour of this flower!" "of this ribbon?" the attention of the child will in all probability remain torpidly fixed upon the examples suggested by her.
If, on the other hand, in this matter of sense education we focus on specific concepts related to the quality of certain objects, those objects become linked to or part of the training, which is then limited to those recorded concepts. As a result, the sense training is unproductive. For instance, when a teacher conducts a lesson on color names in the old way, she imparts an idea about that particular quality, but she doesn't educate the child's sense of color. The child will have a superficial understanding of these colors, occasionally forgetting them; at best, their appreciation will be confined to the limits set by the teacher. Therefore, when the teacher using traditional methods asks questions intended to generate ideas, such as "What is the color of this flower?" or "What about this ribbon?" the child's attention will likely remain passively focused on the examples she provided.
We may liken the child to a clock, and may say that with the old-time way it is very much as if we were to hold the wheels of the clock quiet and move the hands about the clock face with our fingers. The hands will continue to circle the dial just so long as we apply, through our fingers, the necessary motor force. Even so is it with that sort of culture which is limited to the work which the teacher does with the child. The new method,[Pg 230] instead, may be compared to the process of winding, which sets the entire mechanism in motion.
We can compare a child to a clock and say that in the old way, it's like holding the clock's gears still while manually moving the hands around the face. The hands will keep moving around the dial as long as we keep applying force through our fingers. Similarly, this kind of learning only focuses on the work the teacher does with the child. The new method, [Pg 230] on the other hand, can be likened to winding the clock, which starts the whole mechanism working.
This motion is in direct relation with the machine, and not with the work of winding. So the spontaneous psychic development of the child continues indefinitely and is in direct relation to the psychic potentiality of the child himself, and not with the work of the teacher. The movement, or the spontaneous psychic activity starts in our case from the education of the senses and is maintained by the observing intelligence. Thus, for example, the hunting dog receives his ability, not from the education given by his master, but from the special acuteness of his senses; and as soon as this physiological quality is applied to the right environment, the exercise of hunting, the increasing refinement of the sense perceptions, gives the dog the pleasure and then the passion for the chase. The same is true of the pianist who, refining at the same time his musical sense and the agility of his hand, comes to love more and more to draw new harmonies from the instrument. Thia double perfection proceeds until at last the pianist is launched upon a course which will be limited only by the personality which lies within him. Now a student of physics may know all the laws of harmony which form a part of his scientific culture, and yet he may not know how to follow a most simple musical composition. His culture, however vast, will be bound by the definite limits of his science. Our educational aim with very young children must be to aid the spontaneous development of the mental, spiritual, and physical personality, and not to make of the child a cultured individual in the commonly accepted sense of the term. So, after we have offered to the child such didactic material as is adapted to provoke the development of his senses, we must wait[Pg 231] until the activity known as observation develops. And herein lies the art of the educator; in knowing how to measure the action by which we help the young child's personality to develop. To one whose attitude is right, little children soon reveal profound individual differences which call for very different kinds of help from the teacher. Some of them require almost no intervention on her part, while others demand actual teaching. It is necessary, therefore, that the teaching shall be rigorously guided by the principle of limiting to the greatest possible point the active intervention of the educator.
This process is directly connected to the child’s internal development, not just to the act of teaching. The natural mental growth of a child goes on indefinitely and relates to the child's own mental potential, rather than the teacher's input. The movement, or the spontaneous psychic activity, begins with sensory education and is supported by the child's ability to observe. For example, a hunting dog develops its skills not through training from its owner, but because of its special sharpness of senses; when this innate ability is applied in the right environment, during hunting, the dog’s enhanced sensory perceptions lead to enjoyment and eventually passion for the chase. The same applies to a pianist who, by honing both their musical sense and hand coordination, grows to love creating new harmonies on the instrument. This dual improvement continues until the pianist's growth is only limited by their individual personality. A physics student may know all the rules of harmony that are part of their education, but they may not be able to follow even a simple piece of music. Their knowledge, no matter how extensive, will remain confined within the boundaries of their field. Our educational goal for very young children should be to support the natural growth of their mental, spiritual, and physical selves, rather than just making them cultured individuals in the usual sense. After providing children with appropriate teaching materials that stimulate their senses, we must be patient and wait[Pg 231] for their observational skills to develop. This is where the art of teaching comes in; knowing how to guide the young child's personality development effectively. When approached correctly, young children quickly show significant individual differences that require diverse support from the teacher. Some children may need almost no assistance, while others may require direct teaching. Therefore, it's crucial that teaching be strictly regulated to minimize the educator's active involvement as much as possible.
Here are a number of games and problems which we have used effectively in trying to follow this principle.
Here are several games and problems that we have successfully used to follow this principle.
GAMES OF THE BLIND
The Games of the Blind are used for the most part as exercises in general sensibility as follows:
The Games of the Blind are mainly used as exercises in overall sensitivity as follows:
The Stuffs. We have in our didactic material a pretty little chest composed of drawers within which are arranged rectangular pieces of stuff in great variety. There are velvet, satin, silk, cotton, linen, etc. We have the child touch each of these pieces, teaching the appropriate nomenclature and adding something regarding the quality, as coarse, fine, soft. Then, we call the child and seat him at one of the tables where he can be seen by his companions, blindfold him, and offer him the stuffs one by one. He touches them, smooths them, crushes them between his fingers and decides, "It is velvet,—It is fine linen,—It is rough cloth," etc. This exercise provokes general interest. When we offer the child some unexpected foreign object, as, for example, a sheet of paper, a veil, the little assembly trembles as it awaits his response.
The Stuffs. In our teaching materials, we have a charming little chest filled with drawers containing various rectangular pieces of fabric. There’s velvet, satin, silk, cotton, linen, and more. We let the child touch each piece, teaching them the correct names while also discussing qualities like coarse, fine, and soft. Then, we have the child sit at a table where their classmates can see them, blindfold them, and present the fabrics one at a time. They touch them, smooth them out, crush them between their fingers, and identify them, saying, "This is velvet—this is fine linen—this is rough cloth," and so on. This activity generates a lot of excitement. When we give the child an unexpected foreign object, like a sheet of paper or a veil, the whole group holds their breath, waiting for the child's reaction.
Weight. We place the child in the same position, call[Pg 232] his attention to the tablets used for the education of the sense of weight, have him notice again the already well-known differences of weight, and then tell him to put all the dark tablets, which are the heavier ones, at the right, and all the light ones, which are the lighter, to the left. We then blindfold him and he proceeds to the game, taking each time two tablets. Sometimes he takes two of the same colour, sometimes two of different colours, but in a position opposite to that in which he must arrange them on his desk. These exercises are most exciting; when, for example, the child has in his hands two of the dark tablets and changes them from one hand to the other uncertain, and finally places them together on the right, the children watch in a state of intense eagerness, and a great sigh often expresses their final relief. The shouts of the audience when the entire game is followed without an error, gives the impression that their little friend sees with his hands the colours of the tablets.
Weight. We position the child similarly, draw[Pg 232] his attention to the tablets that are used to teach the concept of weight, have him notice once again the already familiar differences in weight, and then instruct him to place all the dark tablets, which are the heavier ones, on the right, and all the light ones, which are the lighter ones, on the left. We then blindfold him, and he starts the game, taking two tablets at a time. Sometimes he picks two of the same color, and other times two of different colors, but always in a position opposite to how he must sort them on his desk. These activities are very engaging; for instance, when the child holds two dark tablets and switches them from one hand to the other, unsure, and ultimately places them together on the right, the other children watch with great anticipation, and a collective sigh often shows their relief when he succeeds. The cheers from the crowd when the entire game is played flawlessly give the impression that their little friend can see with his hands the colors of the tablets.
Dimension and Form. We use games similar to the preceding one, having the child distinguish between different coins, the cubes and bricks of Froebel, and dry seeds, such as beans and peas. But such games never awaken the intense interest aroused by the preceding ones. They are, however, useful and serve to associate with the various objects those qualities peculiar to them, and also to fix the nomenclature.
Dimension and Form. We use games similar to the previous ones, getting the child to recognize different coins, Froebel's cubes and bricks, and dry seeds like beans and peas. However, these games don't spark the same intense interest as the earlier ones. They are still useful and help connect the various objects with their unique qualities, as well as reinforce their names.
APPLICATION OF THE EDUCATION OF THE VISUAL SENSE TO
THE OBSERVATION OF THE ENVIRONMENT
Nomenclature. This is one of the most important phases of education. Indeed, nomenclature prepares for an exactness in the use of language which is not always met with in our schools. Many children, for example,[Pg 233] use interchangeably the words thick and big, long and high. With the methods already described, the teacher may easily establish, by means of the didactic material, ideas which are very exact and clear, and may associate the proper word with these ideas.
Nomenclature. This is one of the most important phases of education. In fact, nomenclature helps develop an exactness in language use that isn't always found in our schools. For example, many children,[Pg 233] often use the words thick and big, long and high interchangeably. Using the methods already described, teachers can easily clarify ideas through didactic materials and connect the right words to these ideas.
Method of Using the Didactic Material
How to Use the Educational Material
Dimensions. The directress, after the child has played for a long time with the three sets of solid insets and has acquired a security in the performance of the exercise, takes out all the cylinders of equal height and places them in a horizontal position on the table, one beside the other. Then she selects the two extremes, saying, "This is the thickest—This is the thinnest." She places them side by side so that the comparison may be more marked, and then taking them by the little button, she compares the bases, calling attention to the great difference. She then places them again beside each other in a vertical position in order to show that they are equal in height, and repeats several times, "thick—thin." Having done this, she should follow it with the test, asking, "Give me the thickest—Give me the thinnest," and finally she should proceed to the test of nomenclature, asking, "What is this?" In the lessons which follow this, the directress may take away the two extreme pieces and may repeat the lesson with the two pieces remaining at the extremities, and so on until she has used all the pieces. She may then take these up at random, saying, "Give me one a little thicker than this one," or "Give me one a little thinner than this one." With the second set of solid insets she proceeds in the same way. Here she stands the pieces upright, as each one has a base sufficiently broad to maintain it in this position, saying, "This is the highest" and "This is the[Pg 234] lowest." Then placing the two extreme pieces side by side she may take them out of the line and compare the bases, showing that they are equal. From the extremes she may proceed as before, selecting each time the two remaining pieces most strongly contrasted.
Dimensions. The teacher, after the child has played for a long time with the three sets of solid shapes and has become comfortable with the activity, takes out all the cylinders of the same height and lays them out horizontally on the table, one next to the other. Then she picks the two ends, saying, "This is the thickest—This is the thinnest." She places them side by side to make the comparison clearer, and then, holding them by the little knob, she compares the bases, pointing out the significant difference. She then puts them back next to each other vertically to show that they are equal in height, repeating several times, "thick—thin." After this, she should follow up with a test, asking, "Give me the thickest—Give me the thinnest," and finally she should move on to the naming test, asking, "What is this?" In the following lessons, the teacher can take away the two extreme pieces and repeat the lesson with the two pieces left at the ends, and continue this until all the pieces have been used. She may then pick them up randomly, saying, "Give me one a little thicker than this one," or "Give me one a little thinner than this one." With the second set of solid shapes, she follows the same approach. Here, she stands the pieces upright, since each one has a broad enough base to support it, saying, "This is the highest" and "This is the [Pg 234] lowest." Then placing the two extreme pieces side by side, she may take them out of line and compare the bases, demonstrating that they are equal. From the extremes, she may proceed as before, selecting the two remaining pieces that are the most contrasting each time.
With the third solid inset, the directress, when she has arranged the pieces in gradation, calls the child's attention to the first one, saying, "This is the largest," and to the last one, saying, "This is the smallest." Then she places them side by side and observes how they differ both in height and in base. She then proceeds in the same way as in the other two exercises.
With the third solid inset, the teacher, after arranging the pieces by size, points out the first one, saying, "This is the largest," and the last one, saying, "This is the smallest." Then she places them next to each other and notes how they differ in height and base. She continues in the same way as with the other two activities.
Similar lessons may be given with the series of graduated prisms, of rods, and of cubes. The prisms are thick and thin and of equal length. The rods are long and short and of equal thickness. The cubes are big and little and differ in size and in height.
Similar lessons can be taught using a series of graduated prisms, rods, and cubes. The prisms are thick and thin, but all have the same length. The rods are long and short, yet share the same thickness. The cubes are big and little, varying in size and height.
The application of these ideas to environment will come most easily when we measure the children with the anthropometer. They will begin among themselves to make comparisons, saying, "I am taller,—you are thicker." These comparisons are also made when the children hold out their little hands to show that they are clean, and the directress stretches hers out also, to show that she, too, has clean hands. Often the contrast between the dimensions of the hands calls forth laughter. The children make a perfect game of measuring themselves. They stand side by side; they look at each other; they decide. Often they place themselves beside grown persons, and observe with curiosity and interest the great difference in height.
Measuring the kids with the anthropometer will make it easier to apply these concepts to their surroundings. They'll start comparing themselves, saying things like, "I'm taller—you're thicker." These comparisons also happen when they hold out their tiny hands to show they’re clean, and the teacher does the same to show she has clean hands too. The size difference in their hands often leads to laughter. The kids turn measuring into a fun game. They stand next to each other, look at one another, and make decisions. They often line up next to adults and curiously observe the significant height difference.
Form. When the child shows that he can with security distinguish between the forms of the plane geometric in[Pg 235]sets, the directress may begin the lessons in nomenclature. She should begin with two strongly-contrasted forms, as the square and the circle, and should follow the usual method, using the three periods of Séguin. We do not teach all the names relative to the geometric figures, giving only those of the most familiar forms, such as square, circle, rectangle, triangle, oval. We now call attention to the fact that there are rectangles which are narrow and long, and others which are broad and short, while the squares are equal on all sides and can be only big and little. These things are most easily shown with the insets, for, though we turn the square about, it still enters its frame, while the rectangle, if placed across the opening, will not enter. The child is much interested in this exercise, for which we arrange in the frame a square and a series of rectangles, having the longest side equal to the side of the square, the other side gradually decreasing in the five pieces.
Form. When the child shows that they can confidently distinguish between the shapes in the plane geometric insets, the teacher can start the lessons in naming. She should begin with two clearly contrasting shapes, like the square and the circle, and follow the usual method using Séguin's three periods. We don't teach all the names related to geometric figures, only those for the most common shapes, such as square, circle, rectangle, triangle, and oval. It's important to note that there are rectangles that are narrow and long, and others that are broad and short, while squares are equal on all sides and can only be big or small. These concepts are easiest to demonstrate with the insets, because while we can rotate the square, it will still fit into its frame, whereas the rectangle, if placed sideways, won't fit through the opening. The child finds this exercise very engaging, for which we set up a square and a series of rectangles in the frame, having the longest side equal to the side of the square, while the other side decreases gradually in the five pieces.
In the same way we proceed to show the difference between the oval, the ellipse, and the circle. The circle enters no matter how it is placed, or turned about; the ellipse does not enter when placed transversely, but if placed lengthwise will enter even if turned upside down. The oval, however, not only cannot enter the frame if placed transversely, but not even when turned upside down; it must be placed with the large curve toward the large part of the opening, and with the narrow curve toward the narrow portion of the opening.
In the same way, we will show the difference between the oval, the ellipse, and the circle. The circle fits in no matter how it’s positioned or rotated; the ellipse doesn’t fit when placed sideways, but when placed lengthwise, it will fit even if turned upside down. The oval, however, cannot fit in the frame if placed sideways, nor even when turned upside down; it must be positioned with the large curve facing the wider part of the opening, and the narrow curve toward the narrow section of the opening.
The circles, big and little, enter their frames no matter how they are turned about. I do not reveal the difference between the oval and the ellipse until a very late stage of the child's education, and then not to all children, but only to those who show a special interest in the forms by[Pg 236] choosing the game often, or by asking about the differences. I prefer that such differences should be recognised later by the child, spontaneously, perhaps in the elementary school.
The big and little circles fit into their frames no matter how they're rotated. I don’t explain the difference between an oval and an ellipse until much later in a child’s education, and only to those who show a particular interest in the shapes by frequently choosing the game or by asking about the differences. I would rather have kids recognize these differences on their own later, maybe in elementary school.
It seems to many persons that in teaching these forms we are teaching geometry, and that this is premature in schools for such young children. Others feel that, if we wish to present geometric forms, we should use the solids, as being more concrete.
It seems to a lot of people that when we teach these shapes, we're actually teaching geometry, and that this is too soon for such young kids in schools. Others believe that if we're going to introduce geometric shapes, we should use solids, since they are more tangible.
I feel that I should say a word here to combat such prejudices. To observe a geometric form is not to analyse it, and in the analysis geometry begins. When, for example, we speak to the child of sides and angles and explain these to him, even though with objective methods, as Froebel advocates (for example, the square has four sides and can be constructed with four sticks of equal length), then indeed we do enter the field of geometry, and I believe that little children are too immature for these steps. But the observation of the form cannot be too advanced for a child at this age. The plane of the table at which the child sits while eating his supper is probably a rectangle; the plate which contains his food is a circle, and we certainly do not consider that the child is too immature to be allowed to look at the table and the plate.
I feel I should address these biases. To observe a geometric shape is not the same as to analyze it, and geometry starts with analysis. For instance, when we talk to a child about sides and angles and explain these concepts to them, even using objective methods, as Froebel suggests (for example, a square has four sides and can be made with four sticks of the same length), we do indeed step into the realm of geometry, and I think little children are too young for these concepts. However, the observation of the shape can’t be too advanced for a child at this age. The surface of the table where the child sits while having dinner is probably a rectangle; the plate holding their food is a circle, and we certainly don’t think the child is too immature to look at the table and the plate.
The insets which we present simply call the attention to a given form. As to the name, it is analogous to other names by which the child learns to call things. Why should we consider it premature to teach the child the words circle, square, oval, when in his home he repeatedly hears the word round used in connection with plates, etc. He will hear his parents speak of the square table, the oval table, etc., and these words in common use will[Pg 237] remain for a long time confused in his mind and in his speech, if we do not interpose such help as that we give in the teaching of forms.
The insets we present simply draw attention to a specific form. Regarding the name, it's similar to other names the child learns to identify objects. Why should we think it's too early to teach the child the words circle, square, and oval, when at home he often hears the word round used in relation to plates, and so on? He will hear his parents talk about the square table, the oval table, etc., and these commonly used words will[Pg 237] remain confusing in his mind and speech for a long time if we don't provide assistance like the teaching of forms.
We should reflect upon the fact that many times a child, left to himself, makes an undue effort to comprehend the language of the adults and the meaning of the things about him. Opportune and rational instruction prevents such an effort, and therefore does not weary, but relieves, the child and satisfies his desire for knowledge. Indeed, he shows his contentment by various expressions of pleasure. At the same time, his attention is called to the word which, if he is allowed to pronounce badly, develops in him an imperfect use of the language.
We should think about the fact that often, a child, left on their own, struggles to understand the language of adults and the meaning of the world around them. Timely and logical teaching prevents this struggle, and as a result, it doesn’t weary the child but relieves them and fulfills their thirst for knowledge. In fact, they show their happiness through different signs of enjoyment. At the same time, their attention is drawn to the word, which, if they are allowed to say incorrectly, leads to an imperfect use of language.
This often arises from an effort on his part to imitate the careless speech of persons about him, while the teacher, by pronouncing clearly the word referring to the object which arouses the child's curiosity, prevents such effort and such imperfections.
This often comes from his attempt to mimic the casual speech of those around him, while the teacher, by clearly pronouncing the word for the object that sparks the child's curiosity, stops this effort and these mistakes.
Here, also, we face a widespread prejudice; namely, the belief that the child left to himself gives absolute repose to his mind. If this were so he would remain a stranger to the world, and, instead, we see him, little by little, spontaneously conquer various ideas and words. He is a traveller through life, who observes the new things among which he journeys, and who tries to understand the unknown tongue spoken by those about him. Indeed, he makes a great and voluntary effort to understand and to imitate. The instruction given to little children should be so directed as to lessen this expenditure of poorly directed effort, converting it instead into the enjoyment of conquest made easy and infinitely broadened. We are the guides of these travellers just entering the great world of human thought. We should see to it that we are in[Pg 238]telligent and cultured guides, not losing ourselves in vain discourse, but illustrating briefly and concisely the work of art in which the traveller shows himself interested, and we should then respectfully allow him to observe it as long as he wishes to. It is our privilege to lead him to observe the most important and the most beautiful things of life in such a way that he does not lose energy and time in useless things, but shall find pleasure and satisfaction throughout his pilgrimage.
Here, too, we encounter a common misconception; specifically, the belief that when a child is left to their own devices, it gives their mind total peace. If that were the case, they would remain disconnected from the world. Instead, we observe them gradually and naturally grasping various ideas and words. They are travelers through life, noticing the new experiences along their journey and trying to understand the unfamiliar language spoken by those around them. In fact, they put in significant and voluntary effort to understand and imitate. The education provided to young children should aim to reduce this waste of misdirected effort, transforming it into the enjoyment of easy and expansive learning. We are the guides for these travelers just stepping into the vast realm of human thought. We must ensure that we are intelligent and cultured guides, avoiding pointless discussions and instead briefly and clearly illustrating the artwork that interests the traveler, allowing them to observe it for as long as they like. It is our privilege to lead them to discover the most important and beautiful aspects of life, helping them to avoid wasting energy and time on irrelevant things, and ensuring they find joy and fulfillment throughout their journey.
I have already referred to the prejudice that it is more suitable to present the geometric forms to the child in the solid rather than in the plane, giving him, for example, the cube, the sphere, the prism. Let us put aside the physiological side of the question showing that the visual recognition of the solid figure is more complex than that of the plane, and let us view the question only from the more purely pedagogical standpoint of practical life.
I’ve already mentioned the bias that it’s better to introduce geometric shapes to children in their 3D forms rather than in 2D. For instance, providing them with a cube, a sphere, or a prism. Let’s set aside the physiological aspects, which show that recognizing solid shapes is more complicated than recognizing flat ones, and instead focus solely on the purely educational perspective of practical life.
The greater number of objects which we look upon every day present more nearly the aspect of our plane geometric insets. In fact, doors, window-frames, framed pictures, the wooden or marble top of a table, are indeed solid objects, but with one of the dimensions greatly reduced, and with the two dimensions determining the form of the plane surface made most evident.
The many objects we see every day look more like our flat geometric designs. Actually, doors, window frames, framed pictures, and the wooden or marble top of a table are truly solid objects, but one of their dimensions is significantly reduced, while the two dimensions that shape the flat surface are most apparent.
When the plane form prevails, we say that the window is rectangular, the picture frame oval, this table square, etc. Solids having a determined form prevailing in the plane surface are almost the only ones which come to our notice. And such solids are clearly represented by our plane geometric insets.
When the flat shape is dominant, we say that the window is rectangular, the picture frame is oval, and this table is square, etc. Shapes that have a specific form dominating the flat surface are almost the only ones that catch our attention. And these shapes are clearly shown by our flat geometric inserts.
The child will very often recognise in his environment forms which he has learned in this way, but he will rarely recognise the solid geometric forms.[Pg 239]
The child will often recognize shapes in his environment that he has learned this way, but he will rarely recognize the solid geometric shapes.[Pg 239]
That the table leg is a prism, or a truncated cone, or an elongated cylinder, will come to his knowledge long after he has observed that the top of the table upon which he places things is rectangular. We do not, therefore, speak of the fact of recognising that a house is a prism or a cube. Indeed, the pure solid geometric forms never exist in the ordinary objects about us; these present, instead, a combination of forms. So, putting aside the difficulty of taking in at a glance the complex form of a house, the child recognises in it, not an identity of form, but an analogy.
That the table leg is a prism, or a truncated cone, or an elongated cylinder, will become clear to him long after he notices that the top of the table he puts things on is rectangular. Therefore, we don’t talk about recognizing that a house is a prism or a cube. In fact, pure solid geometric shapes never exist in the everyday objects around us; they instead present a combination of forms. So, aside from the challenge of comprehending the complex shape of a house all at once, the child sees it not as an identity of form, but as an analogy.
He will, however, see the plane geometric forms perfectly represented in windows and doors, and in the faces of many solid objects in use at home. Thus the knowledge of the forms given him in the plane geometric insets will be for him a species of magic key, opening the external world, and making him feel that he knows its secrets.
He will, however, notice the simple geometric shapes clearly shown in windows and doors, and in the surfaces of many solid objects around the house. So, the understanding of these shapes learned from the flat geometric designs will serve as a kind of magic key, unlocking the outside world and making him feel like he knows its secrets.
I was walking one day upon the Pincian Hill with a boy from the elementary school. He had studied geometric design and understood the analysis of plane geometric figures. As we reached the highest terrace from which we could see the Piazza del Popolo with the city stretching away behind it, I stretched out my hand saying, "Look, all the works of man are a great mass of geometric figures;" and, indeed, rectangles, ovals, triangles, and semicircles, perforated, or ornamented, in a hundred different ways the grey rectangular façades of the various buildings. Such uniformity in such an expanse of buildings seemed to prove the limitation of human intelligence, while in an adjoining garden plot the shrubs and flowers spoke eloquently of the infinite variety of forms in nature.[Pg 240]
I was walking one day on Pincian Hill with a boy from elementary school. He had studied geometric design and understood the analysis of basic geometric shapes. When we reached the highest terrace where we could see Piazza del Popolo and the city stretching out behind it, I reached out my hand and said, "Look, all the works of man are just a bunch of geometric shapes;" and indeed, rectangles, ovals, triangles, and semicircles were punctuated or decorated in a hundred different ways on the grey rectangular façades of the various buildings. Such uniformity across such a vast area of buildings seemed to highlight the limitations of human intelligence, while in a nearby garden plot, the shrubs and flowers spoke volumes about the endless variety of forms in nature.[Pg 240]
The boy had never made these observations; he had studied the angles, the sides and the construction of outlined geometric figures, but without thinking beyond this, and feeling only annoyance at this arid work. At first he laughed at the idea of man's massing geometric figures together, then he became interested, looked long at the buildings before him, and an expression of lively and thoughtful interest came into his face. To the right of the Ponte Margherita was a factory building in the process of construction, and its steel framework delineated a series of rectangles. "What tedious work!" said the boy, alluding to the workmen. And, then, as we drew near the garden, and stood for a moment in silence admiring the grass and the flowers which sprang so freely from the earth, "It is beautiful!" he said. But that word "beautiful" referred to the inner awakening of his own soul.
The boy had never noticed these things before; he had looked at the angles, sides, and construction of geometric shapes, but he never thought beyond that and only felt frustration with this dry task. At first, he found it funny that humans grouped geometric shapes together, but then he became intrigued, gazing intently at the buildings in front of him, and an expression of lively and thoughtful interest appeared on his face. Next to the Ponte Margherita was a factory building under construction, and its steel frame outlined a series of rectangles. "What boring work!" the boy said, referring to the workers. Then, as we approached the garden and paused for a moment in silence to admire the grass and the flowers that grew so freely from the earth, he said, "It’s beautiful!" But that word "beautiful" referred to the inner awakening of his own soul.
This experience made me think that in the observation of the plane geometric forms, and in that of the plants which they saw growing in their own little gardens, there existed for the children precious sources of spiritual as well as intellectual education. For this reason, I have wished to make my work broad, leading the child, not only to observe the forms about him, but to distinguish the work of man from that of nature, and to appreciate the fruits of human labour.
This experience made me realize that observing simple geometric shapes and the plants they saw growing in their own little gardens provided children with valuable sources of both spiritual and intellectual education. Because of this, I wanted to create my work to be comprehensive, guiding the child not only to notice the forms around them but also to differentiate between human creations and natural ones, and to appreciate the results of human effort.
(a) Free Design. I give the child a sheet of white paper and a pencil, telling him that he may draw whatever he wishes to. Such drawings have long been of interest to experimental psychologists. Their importance lies in the fact that they reveal the capacity of the child for observing, and also show his individual tendencies. Generally, the first drawings are unformed and confused, and the[Pg 241] teacher should ask the child what he wished to draw, and should write it underneath the design that it may be a record. Little by little, the drawings become more intelligible, and verily reveal the progress which the child makes in the observation of the forms about him. Often the most minute details of an object have been observed and recorded in the crude sketch. And, since the child draws what he wishes, he reveals to us which are the objects that most strongly attract his attention.
(a) Free Design. I give the child a blank sheet of paper and a pencil, telling him he can draw anything he wants. These drawings have long fascinated experimental psychologists. They are important because they show the child's ability to observe and reveal his individual tendencies. Typically, the first drawings are rough and unclear, and the teacher should ask the child what he wanted to draw, writing it underneath the drawing to keep a record. Gradually, the drawings become clearer and truly reflect the progress the child makes in observing the shapes around him. Often, even the smallest details of an object are noticed and captured in the simple sketch. And since the child draws what he wants, he shows us which objects capture his attention the most.
(b) Design Consisting of the Filling in of Outlined Figures. These designs are most important as they constitute "the preparation for writing." They do for the colour sense what free design does for the sense of form. In other words, they reveal the capacity of the child in the matter of observation of colours, as the free design showed us the extent to which he was an observer of form in the objects surrounding him. I shall speak more fully of this work in the chapter on writing. The exercises consist in filling in with coloured pencil, certain outlines drawn in black. These outlines present the simple geometric figures and various objects with which the child is familiar in the schoolroom, the home, and the garden. The child must select his colour, and in doing so he shows us whether he has observed the colours of the things surrounding him.
(b) Design Consisting of Filling in Outlined Figures. These designs are really important because they serve as "the groundwork for writing." They do for the sense of color what free design does for the sense of form. In other words, they show us how well the child observes colors, just as free design demonstrates how well he observes forms in the objects around him. I'll discuss this work in more detail in the chapter on writing. The exercises involve filling in black outlines with colored pencils. These outlines feature simple geometric shapes and various objects that the child is familiar with from school, home, and the garden. The child must choose his color, and in doing so, he reveals whether he's noticed the colors of the things around him.
Free Plastic Work
Free Plastic Workshop
These exercises are analogous to those in free design and in the filling in of figures with coloured pencils. Here the child makes whatever he wishes with clay; that is, he models those objects which he remembers most distinctly and which have impressed him most deeply. We give the child a wooden tray containing a piece of clay,[Pg 242] and then we await his work. We possess some very remarkable pieces of clay work done by our little ones. Some of them reproduce, with surprising minuteness of detail, objects which they have seen. And what is most surprising, these models often record not only the form, but even the dimensions of the objects which the child handled in school.
These activities are similar to those in free design and filling in figures with colored pencils. Here, the child creates whatever they want with clay; in other words, they shape the objects that they remember most clearly and that have left a strong impression on them. We provide the child with a wooden tray containing a piece of clay,[Pg 242] and then we wait to see what they make. We have some truly amazing pieces of clay work created by our little ones. Some of them replicate, with incredible attention to detail, objects they have seen. What’s even more surprising is that these models often capture not just the shape, but also the dimensions of the objects the child handled in school.
Many little ones model the objects which they have seen at home, especially kitchen furniture, water-jugs, pots, and pans. Sometimes, we are shown a simple cradle containing a baby brother or sister. At first it is necessary to place written descriptions upon these objects, as it is necessary to do with the free design. Later on, however, the models are easily recognisable, and the children learn to reproduce the geometric solids. These clay models are undoubtedly very valuable material for the teacher, and make clear many individual differences, thus helping her to understand her children more fully. In our method they are also valuable as psychological manifestations of development according to age. Such designs are precious guides also for the teacher in the matter of her intervention in the child's education. The children who, in this work reveal themselves as observers, will probably become spontaneous observers of all the world about them, and may be led toward such a goal by the indirect help of exercises tending to fix and to make more exact the various sensations and ideas.
Many children imitate the things they see at home, especially in the kitchen, like furniture, water jugs, pots, and pans. Sometimes, they even show us a simple cradle with a baby brother or sister inside. At first, it's necessary to label these objects, just like we do with free design. However, as time goes on, the models become easily recognizable, and the kids learn to recreate geometric shapes. These clay models are really valuable for teachers and highlight many individual differences, helping them to understand their students better. In our approach, they also serve as important indicators of development based on age. These designs are also helpful for teachers in deciding how to intervene in a child's education. The children who show themselves to be keen observers in this work will likely become natural observers of everything around them, and they can be guided toward this goal through indirect support aimed at refining their various sensations and ideas.
These children will also be those who arrive most quickly at the act of spontaneous writing. Those whose clay work remains unformed and indefinite will probably need the direct revelation of the directress, who will need to call their attention in some material manner to the objects around them.
These kids will also be the ones who get to the act of spontaneous writing the fastest. Those whose clay creations stay unformed and unclear will likely need direct guidance from the teacher, who will have to draw their attention to the objects around them in some tangible way.
Geometric Analysis of Figures; Sides, Angles, Centre, Base
Geometric Analysis of Shapes; Sides, Angles, Center, Base
The geometric analysis of figures is not adapted to very young children. I have tried a means for the introduction of such analysis, limiting this work to the rectangle and making use of a game which includes the analysis without fixing the attention of the child upon it. This game presents the concept most clearly.
The geometric analysis of shapes isn't suited for very young kids. I've attempted a method for the introduction of such analysis, focusing this work on the rectangle and using a game that incorporates the analysis without forcing the child's attention on it. This game clearly presents the concept.
The rectangle of which I make use is the plane of one of the children's tables, and the game consists in laying the table for a meal. I have in each of the "Children's Houses" a collection of toy table-furnishings, such as may be found in any toy-store. Among these are dinner-plates, soup-plates, soup-tureen, saltcellars, glasses, decanters, little knives, forks, spoons, etc. I have them lay the table for six, putting two places on each of the longer sides, and one place on each of the shorter sides. One of the children takes the objects and places them as I indicate. I tell him to place the soup tureen in the centre of the table; this napkin in a corner. "Place this plate in the centre of the short side."
The rectangle I use is the surface of one of the kids' tables, and the game is about setting the table for a meal. In each of the "Children's Houses," I have a collection of toy table items, similar to what you'd find in any toy store. This includes dinner plates, soup plates, a soup tureen, salt shakers, glasses, decanters, small knives, forks, spoons, and so on. I have them set the table for six, placing two settings on each of the longer sides, and one setting on each of the shorter sides. One of the kids takes the items and arranges them as I direct. I tell him to put the soup tureen in the center of the table; this napkin in a corner. "Put this plate in the center of the short side."
Then I have the child look at the table, and I say, "Something is lacking in this corner. We want another glass on this side. Now let us see if we have everything properly placed on the two longer sides. Is everything ready on the two shorter sides? Is there anything lacking in the four corners?"
Then I have the child look at the table, and I say, "Something is missing in this corner. We need another glass on this side. Now let’s check if we have everything arranged properly on the two longer sides. Is everything ready on the two shorter sides? Is there anything missing in the four corners?"
I do not believe that we may proceed to any more complex analysis than this before the age of six years, for I believe that the child should one day take up one of the plane insets and spontaneously begin to count the sides and the angles. Certainly, if we taught them such ideas[Pg 244] they would be able to learn them, but it would be a mere learning of formulæ, and not applied experience.
I don't think we can move on to any more complicated analysis than this before the age of six because I believe that a child should eventually pick up one of the plane insets and spontaneously start counting the sides and angles. Sure, if we taught them these concepts[Pg 244], they could learn them, but it would only be about memorizing formulas, not about real experience.
Exercises in the Chromatic Sense
Exercises in Color Perception
I have already indicated what colour exercises we follow. Here I wish to indicate more definitely the succession of these exercises and to describe them more fully.
I have already mentioned the color exercises we use. Now, I want to clarify the order of these exercises and describe them in more detail.
Designs and Pictures. We have prepared a number of outline drawings which the children are to fill in with coloured pencil, and, later on, with a brush, preparing for themselves the water-colour tints which they will use. The first designs are of flowers, butterflies, trees and animals, and we then pass to simple landscapes containing grass, sky, houses, and human figures.
Designs and Pictures. We’ve created several outline drawings for the kids to fill in with colored pencils, and later on, with a brush, allowing them to mix their own watercolor shades. The first designs feature flowers, butterflies, trees, and animals, and then we move on to simple landscapes that include grass, sky, houses, and people.
These designs help us in our study of the natural development of the child as an observer of his surroundings; that is, in regard to colour. The children select the colours and are left entirely free in their work. If, for example, they colour a chicken red, or a cow green, this shows that they have not yet become observers. But I have already spoken of this in the general discussion of the method. These designs also reveal the effect of the education of the chromatic sense. As the child selects delicate and harmonious tints, or strong and contrasting ones, we can judge of the progress he has made in the refinement of his colour sense.
These designs assist us in studying how children naturally develop as they observe their surroundings, particularly in relation to color. The children choose the colors and have complete freedom in their work. For instance, if they color a chicken red or a cow green, it indicates that they haven't fully learned to observe yet. But I’ve already discussed this in the broader context of the method. These designs also show the impact of educating the sense of color. As the child selects subtle and harmonious shades or bold and contrasting ones, we can assess how much progress they have made in refining their color sense.
The fact that the child must remember the colour of the objects represented in the design encourages him to observe those things which are about him. And then, too, he wishes to be able to fill in more difficult designs. Only those children who know how to keep the colour within the outline and to reproduce the right colours may proceed to the more ambitious work. These designs are[Pg 245] very easy, and often very effective, sometimes displaying real artistic work. The directress of the school in Mexico, who studied for a long time with me, sent me two designs; one representing a cliff in which the stones were coloured most harmoniously in light violet and shades of brown, trees in two shades of green, and the sky a soft blue. The other represented a horse with a chestnut coat and black mane and tail.
The fact that the child must remember the colors of the objects shown in the design encourages him to notice the things around him. Plus, he wants to be able to fill in more challenging designs. Only those children who know how to keep the color within the lines and to use the right colors can move on to the more ambitious work. These designs are[Pg 245] very easy, yet often very effective, sometimes showcasing real artistic talent. The director of the school in Mexico, who studied with me for a long time, sent me two designs: one showed a cliff where the stones were colored beautifully in light violet and shades of brown, trees in two shades of green, and the sky a soft blue. The other depicted a horse with a chestnut coat and a black mane and tail.
CHAPTER XVI
Methods for Teaching Reading and Writing
Spontaneous Development of Graphic Language. While I was directress of the Orthophrenic School at Rome, I had already began to experiment with various didactic means for the teaching of reading and writing. These experiments were practically original with me.
Spontaneous Development of Graphic Language. When I was the director of the Orthophrenic School in Rome, I had already begun experimenting with different teaching methods for reading and writing. These experiments were practically original to me.
Itard and Séguin do not present any rational method through which writing may be learned. In the pages above quoted, it may be seen how Itard proceeded in the teaching of the alphabet and I give here what Séguin says concerning the teaching of writing.
Itard and Séguin don't provide any logical method for learning to write. In the earlier sections mentioned, you can see how Itard taught the alphabet, and here’s what Séguin says about teaching writing.
"To have a child pass from design, to writing, which is its most immediate application, the teacher need only call D, a portion of a circle, resting its extremities upon a vertical; A, two obliques reunited at the summit and cut by a horizontal, etc., etc.
"To help a child move from design to writing, which is its most immediate application, the teacher just needs to refer to D, a part of a circle, with its ends resting on a vertical line; A, two slanted lines coming together at the top and intersected by a horizontal line, and so on."
"We no longer need worry ourselves as to how the child shall learn to write: he designs, then writes. It need not be said that we should have the child draw the letters according to the laws of contrast and analogy. For instance, O beside I; B with P; T opposite L, etc."
"We no longer need to worry about how the child will learn to write: they design and then write. It goes without saying that we should have the child draw the letters based on the principles of contrast and similarity. For example, O next to I; B with P; T opposite L, etc."
According to Séguin, then, we do not need to teach writing. The child who draws, will write. But writing, for this author, means printed capitals! Nor does he, in any other place, explain whether his pupil shall write in any other way. He instead, gives much space[Pg 247] to the description of the design which prepares for, and which includes writing. This method of design is full of difficulties and was only established by the combined attempts of Itard and Séguin.
According to Séguin, we don't need to teach writing. A child who draws will naturally write. But for this author, writing means using printed capitals! He also doesn't clarify anywhere else whether his students should write in any other format. Instead, he spends a lot of time[Pg 247] describing the design that prepares for and includes writing. This design method has many challenges and was only developed through the combined efforts of Itard and Séguin.
"Chapter XL: Design. In design the first idea to be acquired is that of the plane destined to receive the design. The second is that of the trace or delineation. Within these two concepts lies all design, all linear creation.
"Chapter XL: Design. In design, the first thing to understand is the surface that will hold the design. The second is the outline or drawing. All design and linear creation are rooted in these two ideas."
"These two concepts are correlative, their relation generates the idea, or the capacity to produce the lines in this sense; that lines may only be called such when they follow a methodical and determined direction: the trace without direction is not a line; produced by chance, it has no name.
"These two ideas are connected; their relationship creates the notion, or the ability to create lines in this way: lines can only be called lines when they follow a systematic and specific direction. A trace without direction is not a line; made by chance, it has no name."
"The rational sign, on the contrary, has a name because it has a direction and since all writing or design is nothing other than a composite of the diverse directions followed by a line, we must, before approaching what is commonly called writing, insist upon these notions of plane and line. The ordinary child acquires these by instinct, but an insistence upon them is necessary in order to render the idiot careful and sensitive in their application. Through methodical design he will come into rational contact with all parts of the plane and will, guided by imitation, produce lines at first simple, but growing more complicated.
"The rational sign, on the other hand, has a name because it has a direction, and since all writing or design is nothing more than a combination of the various directions followed by a line, we must, before dealing with what is usually called writing, emphasize these ideas of plane and line. Typically, a child picks these up instinctively, but reinforcing these concepts is essential to help someone lacking ability become more attentive and sensitive in their use. Through structured design, they will connect rationally with all parts of the plane and will, guided by imitation, first create simple lines, which will gradually become more complex."
"The pupil may be taught: First, to trace the diverse species of lines. Second, to trace them in various directions and in different positions relative to the plane. Third, to reunite these lines to form figures varying from simple to complex. We must therefore, teach the pupil to distinguish straight lines from curves, vertical from[Pg 248] horizontal, and from the various oblique lines; and must finally make clear the principal points of conjunction of two or more lines in forming a figure.
"The student can be taught: First, to draw different types of lines. Second, to draw them in various directions and positions on the plane. Third, to combine these lines to create figures that range from simple to complex. Therefore, we need to teach the student to differentiate between straight lines and curves, vertical and horizontal lines, and various slanted lines; and finally, we must clarify the key points where two or more lines join to form a figure."
"This rational analysis of design, from which writing will spring, is so essential in all its parts, that a child who, before being confided to my care, already wrote many of the letters, has taken six days to learn to draw a perpendicular or a horizontal line; he spent fifteen days before imitating a curve and an oblique. Indeed the greater number of my pupils, are for a long time incapable of even imitating the movements of my hand upon the paper, before attempting to draw a line in a determined direction. The most imitative, or the least stupid ones, produce a sign diametrically opposite to that which I show them and all of them confound the points of conjunction of two lines no matter how evident this is. It is true that the thorough knowledge I have given them of lines and of configuration helps them to make the connection which must be established between the plane and the various marks with which they must cover the surface, but in the study rendered necessary by the deficiency of my pupils, the progression in the matter of the vertical, the horizontal, the oblique, and the curve must be determined by the consideration of the difficulty of comprehension and of execution which each offers to a torpid intelligence and to a weak unsteady hand.
"This rational analysis of design, from which writing will spring, is crucial in every aspect. A child who, before coming under my guidance, already wrote many letters has taken six days to learn to draw a vertical or horizontal line; he spent fifteen days before he could imitate a curve or an angle. In fact, most of my students are for a long time unable to even mimic the movements of my hand on paper before trying to draw a line in a specific direction. The ones who are more imitative, or the least slow, often create a symbol completely opposite to what I show them, and all of them struggle to connect the points where two lines meet, no matter how clear it is. It's true that the strong understanding I've given them of lines and shapes helps them make the connections needed between the plane and the various marks they must make on the surface, but in addressing the deficiencies of my students, the progression in learning about vertical, horizontal, oblique, and curved lines has to take into account the challenges of understanding and execution each presents to a slow-witted learner and a shaky hand."
"I do not speak here of merely having them perform a difficult thing, since I have them surmount a series of difficulties and for this reason I ask myself if some of these difficulties are not greater and some less, and if they do not grow one from the other, like theorems. Here are the ideas which have guided me in this respect.[Pg 249]
"I’m not just talking about getting them to do something challenging; I have them overcome a series of challenges. This makes me wonder if some of these challenges are tougher than others and whether they build on each other, like theorems. Here are the ideas that have guided me in this regard.[Pg 249]
"The vertical is a line which the eye and the hand follow directly, going up and down. The horizontal line is not natural to the eye, nor to the hand, which lowers itself and follows a curve (like the horizon from which it has taken its name), starting from the centre and going to the lateral extremity of the plane.
"The vertical line is one that the eye and hand follow directly, moving up and down. The horizontal line isn’t natural to the eye or the hand, which tends to lower itself and follow a curve (like the horizon, from which it gets its name), starting from the center and extending to the sides of the plane."
"The oblique line presupposes more complex comparative ideas, and the curve demands such firmness and so many differences in its relation to the plane that we would only lose time in taking up the study of these lines. The most simple line then, is the vertical, and this is how I have given my pupils an idea of it.
"The angled line assumes more complicated comparisons, and the curve requires so much precision and so many variations in its relationship to the plane that it would just waste time to study these lines. The simplest line, then, is the vertical, and this is how I’ve explained it to my students."
"The first geometric formula is this: only straight lines may be drawn from one given point to another.
The first geometric principle is this: only straight lines can be drawn from one specific point to another.
"Starting from this axiom, which the hand alone can demonstrate, I have fixed two points upon the blackboard and have connected them by means of a vertical. My pupils try to do the same between the dots they have upon their paper, but with some the vertical descends to the right of the point and with others, to the left, to say nothing of those whose hand diverges in all directions. To arrest these various deviations which are often far more defects of the intelligence and of the vision, than of the hand, I have thought it wise to restrict the field of the plane, drawing two vertical lines to left and right of the points which the child is to join by means of a parallel line half way between the two enclosing lines. If these two lines are not enough, I place two rulers vertically upon the paper, which arrest the deviations of the hand absolutely. These material barriers are not, however, useful for very long. We first suppress the rulers and return to the two parallel lines, between which the idiot learns to draw the third line. We then take away[Pg 250] one of the guiding lines, and leave, sometimes that on the right, sometimes that on the left, finally taking away this last line and at last, the dots, beginning by erasing the one at the top which indicates the starting point of the line and of the hand. The child thus learns to draw a vertical without material control, without points of comparison.
"Starting from this principle, which can only be shown by hand, I’ve marked two points on the board and connected them with a vertical line. My students attempt to replicate this between the dots on their paper, but some draw the vertical line to the right of the point while others place it to the left, not to mention those whose hands move in all directions. To correct these variations, which are often more about intelligence and vision than about hand control, I decided to limit their workspace by drawing two vertical lines to the left and right of the points that the child needs to connect with a parallel line halfway between the two boundary lines. If these two lines aren’t sufficient, I place two rulers vertically on the paper to completely prevent hand deviations. However, these physical boundaries don’t remain effective for long. First, we remove the rulers and revert to the two parallel lines, between which the child learns to draw the third line. Then we take away one of the guiding lines, sometimes leaving the right line and other times the left, until we finally remove the last line and ultimately the dots, starting with the one at the top that indicates the beginning of the line and the hand. This way, the child learns to draw a vertical line without any physical aids or reference points."
"The same method, the same difficulty, the same means of direction are used for the straight horizontal lines. If, by chance, these lines begin well, we must await until the child curves them, departing from the centre and proceeding to the extremity as nature commands him, and because of the reason which I have explained. If the two dots do not suffice to sustain the hand, we keep it from deviating by means of the parallel lines or of the rulers.
"The same method, the same difficulty, and the same means of direction are used for the straight horizontal lines. If, by chance, these lines start off well, we must wait until the child curves them, moving away from the center and extending to the end as nature guides him, for the reasons I have explained. If the two dots aren't enough to support the hand, we keep it from drifting using the parallel lines or rulers."
"Finally, have him trace a horizontal line, and by uniting with it a vertical ruler we form a right angles. The child will begin to understand, in this way, what the vertical and horizontal lines really are, and will see the relation of these two ideas as he traces a figure.
"Finally, have him draw a horizontal line, and by connecting it with a vertical ruler, we create right angles. This way, the child will start to grasp what vertical and horizontal lines actually are and will see the relationship between these two concepts as he outlines a figure."
"In the sequence of the development of lines, it would seem that the study of the oblique should immediately follow that of the vertical and the horizontal, but this is not so! The oblique which partakes of the vertical in its inclination, and of the horizontal in its direction, and which partakes of both in its nature (since it is a straight line), presents perhaps, because of its relation to other lines, an idea too complex to be appreciated without preparation."
"In the progression of line development, it seems like studying oblique lines should come right after vertical and horizontal lines, but that's not the case! The oblique line shares qualities with the vertical in its angle and with the horizontal in its direction, and since it's a straight line, it represents a mix of both. However, because of its relationship with other lines, it might be too complex to understand without some groundwork."
Thus Séguin goes on through many pages, to speak of the oblique in all directions, which he has his pupils trace between two parallels. He then tells of the four curves[Pg 251] which he has them draw to right and left of a vertical and above and below a horizontal, and concludes: "So we find the solution of the problems for which we sought—the vertical line, the horizontal, the oblique, and the four curves, whose union forms the circle, contain all possible lines, all writing.
Thus, Séguin continues for many pages, discussing the oblique in every direction, which he has his students draw between two parallels. He then describes the four curves[Pg 251] that he has them sketch to the right and left of a vertical line and above and below a horizontal line, and concludes: "So we find the solution to the problems we were looking for—the vertical line, the horizontal, the oblique, and the four curves, whose combination creates the circle, encompassing all possible lines, all writing.
"Arrived at this point, Itard and I were for a long time at a standstill. The lines being known, the next step was to have the child trace regular figures, beginning of course, with the simplest. According to the general opinion, Itard had advised me to begin with the square and I had followed this advice for three months, without being able to make the child understand me."
"At this point, Itard and I were stuck for a long time. The lines were established, so the next step was to have the child draw regular shapes, starting with the simplest ones. According to general consensus, Itard suggested I begin with the square, and I followed his advice for three months, but I still couldn't get the child to understand me."
After a long series of experiments, guided by his ideas of the genesis of geometric figures, Séguin became aware that the triangle is the figure most easily drawn.
After a long series of experiments, influenced by his thoughts on how geometric shapes are formed, Séguin realized that the triangle is the easiest shape to draw.
"When three lines meet thus, they always form a triangle, while four lines may meet in a hundred different directions without remaining parallel and therefore without presenting a perfect square.
"When three lines meet this way, they always create a triangle, while four lines can intersect in numerous ways without staying parallel and thus not forming a perfect square."
"From these experiments and many others, I have deduced the first principles of writing and of design for the idiot; principles whose application is too simple for me to discuss further."
"From these experiments and many others, I've figured out the basic principles of writing and design for beginners; principles that are too simple for me to explain any further."
Such was the proceeding used by my predecessors in the teaching of writing to deficients. As for reading, Itard proceeded thus: he drove nails into the wall and hung upon them, geometric figures of wood, such as triangles, squares, circles. He then drew the exact imprint of these upon the wall, after which he took the figures away and had the "boy of Aveyron" replace them upon the proper nails, guided by the design. From this design Itard conceived the idea of the plane geometric[Pg 252] insets. He finally had large print letters made of wood and proceeded in the same way as with the geometric figures, that is, using the design upon the wall and arranging the nails in such a way that the child might place the letters upon them and then take them off again. Later, Séguin used the horizontal plane instead of the wall, drawing the letters on the bottom of a box and having the child superimpose solid letters. After twenty years, Séguin had not changed his method of procedure.
This is how my predecessors taught writing to those with difficulties. As for reading, Itard did the following: he hammered nails into the wall and hung geometric shapes made of wood, like triangles, squares, and circles. He then traced their exact outlines on the wall, after which he removed the shapes and had the "boy of Aveyron" place them back on the correct nails, following the outlines. From this outline, Itard came up with the idea for the plane geometric[Pg 252] insets. He eventually had large printed letters made of wood and followed the same method as with the geometric shapes, using the outline on the wall and arranging the nails so the child could put the letters on them and then take them off again. Later, Séguin switched to using a horizontal plane instead of a wall, drawing the letters on the bottom of a box and having the child stack solid letters on top. After twenty years, Séguin hadn’t changed his approach.
A criticism of the method used by Itard and Séguin for reading and writing seems to me superfluous. The method has two fundamental errors which make it inferior to the methods in use for normal children, namely: writing in printed capitals, and the preparation for writing through a study of rational geometry, which we now expect only from students in the secondary schools.
A critique of the approach taken by Itard and Séguin for teaching reading and writing seems unnecessary to me. Their method has two major flaws that make it less effective compared to the techniques used for typical children: writing in uppercase letters and preparing for writing by studying basic geometry, which we now only expect from high school students.
Séguin here confuses ideas in a most extraordinary way. He has suddenly jumped from the psychological observation of the child and from his relation to his environment, to the study of the origin of lines and their relation to the plane.
Séguin here confuses ideas in a really unusual way. He has suddenly shifted from observing the child's psychology and his connection to his surroundings, to examining the origin of lines and their relationship to the plane.
He says that the child will readily design a vertical line, but that the horizontal will soon become a curve, because "nature commands it" and this command of nature is represented by the fact that man sees the horizon as a curved line!
He says that the child will easily draw a vertical line, but the horizontal line will quickly turn into a curve because "nature demands it" and this demand of nature is shown by the fact that people see the horizon as a curved line!
The example of Séguin serves to illustrate the necessity of a special education which shall fit man for observation, and shall direct logical thought.
The example of Séguin shows the need for a special education that prepares people for observation and guides logical thought.
The observation must be absolutely objective, in other words, stripped of preconceptions. Séguin has in this case the preconception that geometric design must prepare for writing, and that hinders him from discovering[Pg 253] the truly natural proceeding necessary to such preparation. He has, besides, the preconception that the deviation of a line, as well as the inexactness with which the child traces it, are due to "the mind and the eye, not to the hand," and so he wearies himself for weeks and months in explaining the direction of lines and in guiding the vision of the idiot.
The observation needs to be completely objective, meaning it should be free from any preconceived notions. Séguin, in this case, believes that geometric design should lead to writing, which prevents him from recognizing the truly natural process needed for that preparation. He also has the preconceived idea that any deviation of a line, as well as the inaccuracies in how a child draws it, are due to "the mind and the eye, not to the hand," leading him to exhaust himself for weeks and months explaining the direction of lines and trying to guide the vision of the child.
It seems as if Séguin felt that a good method must start from a superior point, geometry; the intelligence of the child is only considered worthy of attention in its relation to abstract things. And is not this a common defect?
It seems like Séguin believed that a good method should begin with a higher foundation, geometry; the child's intelligence is only seen as worth considering in relation to abstract concepts. Isn't this a common flaw?
Let us observe mediocre men; they pompously assume erudition and disdain simple things. Let us study the clear thought of those whom we consider men of genius. Newton is seated tranquilly in the open air; an apple falls from the tree, he observes it and asks, "Why?" Phenomena are never insignificant; the fruit which falls and universal gravitation may rest side by side in the mind of a genius.
Let's look at average people; they arrogantly act knowledgeable and look down on simple things. Let's examine the clear thinking of those we regard as geniuses. Newton is sitting calmly outside; an apple falls from the tree, he notices it and wonders, "Why?" Events are never trivial; the falling fruit and universal gravitation can coexist in the mind of a genius.
If Newton had been a teacher of children he would have led the child to look upon the worlds on a starry night, but an erudite person might have felt it necessary first to prepare the child to understand the sublime calculus which is the key to astronomy—Galileo Galilei observed the oscillation of a lamp swung on high, and discovered the laws of the pendulum.
If Newton had been a teacher for kids, he would have encouraged them to gaze at the stars on a clear night, but a knowledgeable person might have thought it essential to first teach the child about the complex math that’s crucial to understanding astronomy—Galileo Galilei studied the swinging motion of a lamp above him and uncovered the principles of the pendulum.
In the intellectual life simplicity consists in divesting one's mind of every preconception, and this leads to the discovery of new things, as, in the moral life, humility and material poverty guide us toward high spiritual conquests.
In intellectual life, simplicity means clearing your mind of all preconceived notions, which allows you to discover new ideas. Similarly, in moral life, humility and material poverty lead us to significant spiritual achievements.
If we study the history of discoveries, we will find that[Pg 254] they have come from real objective observation and from logical thought. These are simple things, but rarely found in one man.
If we look at the history of discoveries, we will find that[Pg 254] they have come from true objective observation and logical thinking. These are straightforward qualities, but they're rarely found in one person.
Does it not seem strange, for instance, that after the discovery by Laveran of the malarial parasite which invades the red blood-corpuscles, we did not, in spite of the fact that we know the blood system to be a system of closed vessels, even so much as suspect the possibility that a stinging insect might inoculate us with the parasite? Instead, the theory that the evil emanated from low ground, that it was carried by the African winds, or that it was due to dampness, was given credence. Yet these were vague ideas, while the parasite was a definite biological specimen.
Doesn’t it seem odd, for example, that after Laveran discovered the malarial parasite that invades red blood cells, we didn’t even suspect that a biting insect could transmit the parasite, despite knowing that the blood system is a closed vessel system? Instead, people believed that the disease came from low-lying areas, was carried by African winds, or was caused by dampness. But those were vague ideas, while the parasite was a specific biological entity.
When the discovery of the malarial mosquito came to complete logically the discovery of Laveran, this seemed marvellous, stupefying. Yet we know in biology that the reproduction of molecular vegetable bodies is by scission with alternate sporation, and that of molecular animals is by scission with alternate conjunction. That is, after a certain period in which the primitive cell has divided and sub-divided into fresh cells, equal among themselves, there comes the formation of two diverse cells, one male and one female, which must unite to form a single cell capable of recommencing the cycle of reproduction by division. All this being known at the time of Laveran, and the malarial parasite being known to be a protozoon, it would have seemed logical to consider its segmentation in the stroma of the red corpuscle as the phase of scission and to await until the parasite gave place to the sexual forms, which must necessarily come in the phase succeeding scission. Instead, the division was looked upon as spore-formation, and neither Laveran, nor the numer[Pg 255]ous scientists who followed the research, knew how to give an explanation of the appearance of the sexual forms. Laveran expressed an idea, which was immediately received, that these two forms were degenerate forms of the malarial parasite, and therefore incapable of producing the changes determining the disease. Indeed, the malaria was apparently cured at the appearance of the two sexual forms of the parasite, the conjunction of the two cells being impossible in the human blood. The theory—then recent—of Morel upon human degeneration accompanied by deformity and weakness, inspired Laveran in his interpretation, and everybody found the idea of the illustrious pathologist a fortunate one, because it was inspired by the great concepts of the Morellian theory.
When the discovery of the malaria-carrying mosquito linked logically to Laveran's findings, it seemed incredible and astonishing. Yet, we understand in biology that the reproduction of molecular plant organisms happens through division with alternating spore formation, while that of molecular animals occurs through division with alternating conjunction. This means that after a certain period in which the original cell has divided and subdivided into equal new cells, two different cells form: one male and one female. These must come together to create a single cell capable of restarting the cycle of reproduction through division. Given that this was known during Laveran's time, and since the malaria parasite was identified as a protozoon, it would have made sense to view its segmentation within the red blood cell as a phase of division and to wait for the appearance of the sexual forms, which would naturally follow division. Instead, the division was perceived as spore formation, and neither Laveran nor the many scientists who continued the research were able to explain the emergence of the sexual forms. Laveran proposed an idea, quickly accepted, that these two forms were degenerate variations of the malaria parasite and thus unable to cause the changes that lead to the disease. In fact, malaria seemed to be cured with the emergence of the two sexual forms of the parasite, as the union of the two cells was impossible in human blood. The then-recent theory by Morel regarding human degeneration associated with deformity and weakness influenced Laveran’s interpretation, and everyone found the pathologist's idea fortunate because it drew inspiration from the significant concepts of the Morellian theory.
Had anyone, instead, limited himself to reasoning thus: the original form of the malarial insect is a protozoon; it reproduces itself by scission, under our eyes; when the scission is finished, we see two diverse cells, one a half-moon, the other threadlike. These are the feminine and masculine cells which must, by conjunction, alternate the scission,—such a reasoner would have opened the way to the discovery. But so simple a process of reasoning did not come. We might almost ask ourselves how great would be the world's progress if a special form of education prepared men for pure observation and logical thought.
If someone had instead limited their reasoning like this: the original form of the malarial insect is a protozoan; it reproduces by splitting right in front of us; when the splitting is done, we see two different cells, one shaped like a half-moon and the other threadlike. These are the female and male cells that must, by joining together, alternate the splitting—such a thinker would have paved the way for discovery. But such a simple process of reasoning did not occur. We might even wonder how much further along the world would be if a specific type of education prepared people for pure observation and logical thinking.
A great deal of time and intellectual force are lost in the world, because the false seems great and the truth so small and insignificant.
A lot of time and mental energy are wasted in the world because what's false appears grand, while the truth seems small and unimportant.
I say all this to defend the necessity, which I feel we face, of preparing the coming generations by means of more rational methods. It is from these generations that[Pg 256] the world awaits its progress. We have already learned to make use of our surroundings, but I believe that we have arrived at a time when the necessity presents itself for utilising human force, through a scientific education.
I say all this to emphasize the need, which I believe we face, to prepare future generations using more rational methods. It is from these generations that[Pg 256] the world expects its progress. We have already learned to utilize our surroundings, but I believe we’ve reached a point where we need to tap into human potential through a scientific education.
To return to Séguin's method of writing, it illustrates another truth, and that is the tortuous path we follow in our teaching. This, too, is allied to an instinct for complicating things, analogous to that which makes us so prone to appreciate complicated things. We have Séguin teaching geometry in order to teach a child to write; and making the child's mind exert itself to follow geometrical abstractions only to come down to the simple effort of drawing a printed D. After all, must the child not have to make another effort in order to forget the print, and learn the script!
To go back to Séguin's writing method, it illustrates another truth: the complicated journey we take in teaching. This is also connected to our instinct to complicate things, similar to how we tend to appreciate complexity. We have Séguin teaching geometry to help a child learn to write; making the child work hard to grasp geometrical concepts only to ultimately reduce it to the simple task of drawing a printed D. After all, doesn’t the child also have to put in extra effort to forget the print and learn the script?
And even we in these days still believe that in order to learn to write the child must first make vertical strokes. This conviction is very general. Yet it does not seem natural that to write the letters of the alphabet, which are all rounded, it should be necessary to begin with straight lines and acute angles.
And even today, we still think that to learn how to write, a child has to start with vertical strokes. This belief is pretty widespread. However, it doesn't seem logical that to write the rounded letters of the alphabet, one must first start with straight lines and sharp angles.
In all good faith, we wonder that it should be difficult to do away with the angularity and stiffness with which the beginner traces the beautiful curve of the O.[13] Yet, through what effort on our part, and on his, was he forced to fill pages and pages with rigid lines and acute angles! To whom is due this time-honoured idea that the first sign to be traced must be a straight line? And why do we so avoid preparing for curves as well as angles?
In all good faith, we’re puzzled why it’s so hard to get rid of the awkwardness and stiffness with which beginners draw the elegant curve of the O.[13] Yet, through so much effort from both sides, they end up filling pages and pages with stiff lines and sharp angles! Who established this long-standing belief that the first mark has to be a straight line? And why do we avoid practicing curves as much as angles?
Let us, for a moment, divest ourselves of such preconceptions and proceed in a more simple way. We may be [Pg 257]able to relieve future generations of all effort in the matter of learning to write.
Let’s take a moment to set aside our assumptions and approach this more straightforwardly. We might be able to spare future generations from all effort when it comes to learning how to write. [Pg 257]
Is it necessary to begin writing with the making of vertical strokes? A moment of clear and logical thinking is enough to enable us to answer, no. The child makes too painful an effort in following such an exercise. The first steps should be the easiest, and the up and down stroke, is, on the contrary, one of the most difficult of all the pen movements. Only a professional penman could fill a whole page and preserve the regularity of such strokes, but a person who writes only moderately well would be able to complete a page of presentable writing. Indeed, the straight line is unique, expressing the shortest distance between two points, while any deviation from that direction signifies a line which is not straight. These infinite deviations are therefore easier than that one trace which is perfection.
Is it necessary to start writing with vertical strokes? A moment of clear thinking makes it obvious: no. It's too hard for a child to keep up with that kind of exercise. The first steps should be the easiest, and the up-and-down stroke is, instead, one of the most challenging pen movements. Only a skilled calligrapher could fill a whole page and keep those strokes consistent, while someone who writes reasonably well could easily complete a page of decent writing. In fact, a straight line is special; it represents the shortest distance between two points, while any deviation from that direction results in a line that isn't straight. These countless deviations are therefore easier than that one stroke of perfection.
If we should give to a number of adults the order to draw a straight line upon the blackboard, each person would draw a long line proceeding in a different direction, some beginning from one side, some from another, and almost all would succeed in making the line straight. Should we then ask that the line be drawn in a particular direction, starting from a determined point, the ability shown at first would greatly diminish, and we would see many more irregularities, or errors. Almost all the lines would be long—for the individual must needs gather impetus in order to succeed in making his line straight.
If we asked a group of adults to draw a straight line on a blackboard, each person would create a long line heading in a different direction. Some would start from one side, others from another, and almost all would manage to make their line straight. However, if we then requested that the line be drawn in a specific direction, starting from a specific point, the initial ability would drop significantly, and we would see many more irregularities or mistakes. Almost all the lines would be long—because the individual needs to gain momentum in order to successfully draw a straight line.
Should we ask that the lines be made short, and included within precise limits, the errors would increase, for we would thus impede the impetus which helps to conserve the definite direction. In the methods ordinarily used in teaching writing, we add, to such limita[Pg 258]tions, the further restriction that the instrument of writing must be held in a certain way, not as instinct prompts each individual.
Should we request that the lines be short and kept within specific limits, the mistakes would increase, as we would hinder the momentum that helps maintain the clear direction. In the typical methods used for teaching writing, we also add, to such limitations, the further restriction that the writing tool must be held in a certain way, not as each person's instincts suggest.
Thus we approach in the most conscious and restricted way the first act of writing, which should be voluntary. In this first writing we still demand that the single strokes be kept parallel, making the child's task a difficult and barren one, since it has no purpose for the child, who does not understand the meaning of all this detail.
Thus, we approach the initial act of writing in a very deliberate and limited manner, which should be voluntary. In this first writing, we still require that the individual strokes remain parallel, making the child's task challenging and unproductive, as it serves no purpose for the child, who doesn’t grasp the significance of all these details.
I had noticed in the note-books of the deficient children in France (and Voisin also mentions this phenomenon) that the pages of vertical strokes, although they began as such, ended in lines of C's. This goes to show that the deficient child, whose mind is less resistant than that of the normal child, exhausts, little by little, the initial effort of imitation, and the natural movement gradually comes to take the place of that which was forced or stimulated. So the straight lines are transformed into curves, more and more like the letter C. Such a phenomenon does not appear in the copy-books of normal children, for they resist, through effort, until the end of the page is reached, and, thus, as often happens, conceal the didactic error.
I noticed in the notebooks of struggling children in France (and Voisin points this out too) that the pages filled with vertical strokes, while starting out that way, often ended up looking like lines of C's. This shows that the child with learning difficulties, who has a less resilient mind than a typical child, slowly wears down the initial effort of imitation, and the natural movement gradually replaces what was forced or prompted. So, the straight lines turn into curves, increasingly resembling the letter C. This doesn’t happen in the notebooks of typical children, as they push through the effort until they reach the end of the page and often end up hiding their learning mistakes.
But let us observe the spontaneous drawings of normal children. When, for example, picking up a fallen twig, they trace figures in the sandy garden path, we never see short straight lines, but long and variously interlaced curves.
But let's look at the spontaneous drawings of typical kids. For instance, when they pick up a fallen twig and trace shapes in the sandy garden path, we never see short straight lines; instead, there are long, varied, and intertwined curves.
Séguin saw the same phenomenon when the horizontal lines he made his pupils draw became curves so quickly instead. And he attributed the phenomenon to the imitation of the horizon line!
Séguin noticed the same thing when the horizontal lines he had his students draw quickly turned into curves instead. He explained this phenomenon by saying it was due to the imitation of the horizon line!
That vertical strokes should prepare for alphabetical[Pg 259] writing, seems incredibly illogical. The alphabet is made up of curves, therefore we must prepare for it by learning to make straight lines.
That vertical strokes should prepare for alphabetical[Pg 259] writing seems really illogical. The alphabet consists of curves, so we need to get ready for it by learning to create straight lines.
"But," says someone, "in many letters of the alphabet, the straight line does exist," True, but there is no reason why as a beginning of writing, we should select one of the details of a complete form. We may analyse the alphabetical signs in this way, discovering straight lines and curves, as by analysing discourse, we find grammatical rules. But we all speak independently of such rules, why then should we not write independently of such analysis, and without the separate execution of the parts constituting the letter?
"But," says someone, "in many letters of the alphabet, the straight line does exist." True, but there's no reason why we should choose one specific detail of a complete form as the starting point for writing. We can break down the alphabetical signs like that, spotting straight lines and curves, just as we identify grammatical rules by analyzing discourse. But we all speak freely without those rules, so why shouldn't we write without that analysis and without separating the different parts that make up a letter?
It would be sad indeed if we could speak only after we had studied grammar! It would be much the same as demanding that before we looked at the stars in the firmament, we must study infinitesimal calculus; it is much the same thing to feel that before teaching an idiot to write, we must make him understand the abstract derivation of lines and the problems of geometry!
It would be really unfortunate if we could talk only after studying grammar! It would be just like saying that before we gaze at the stars in the sky, we have to learn infinitesimal calculus; it’s just as unreasonable to think that before teaching someone who doesn’t get it to write, we have to make them grasp the abstract concept of lines and geometry problems!
No less are we to be pitied if, in order to write, we must follow analytically the parts constituting the alphabetical signs. In fact the effort which we believe to be a necessary accompaniment to learning to write is a purely artificial effort, allied, not to writing, but to the methods by which it is taught.
We're equally deserving of pity if, to write, we have to break down the components that make up the letters. The effort we think we need to learn writing is actually a completely artificial effort, related not to writing itself, but to the methods used to teach it.
Let us for a moment cast aside every dogma in this connection. Let us take no note of culture, or custom. We are not, here, interested in knowing how humanity began to write, nor what may have been the origin of writing itself. Let us put away the conviction, that long usage has given us, of the necessity of beginning writing by making vertical strokes; and let us try to be as clear[Pg 260] and unprejudiced in spirit as the truth which, we are seeking.
Let’s take a moment to set aside all preconceived notions. Let’s disregard culture and customs. We’re not concerned here with how humanity started writing or what the true origins of writing are. Let’s dismiss the belief, ingrained in us over time, that writing must begin with vertical strokes; instead, let’s aim to be as clear and unbiased in our understanding as the truth we’re trying to find.
"Let us observe an individual who is writing, and let us seek to analyse the acts he performs in writing," that is, the mechanical operations which enter into the execution of writing. This would be undertaking the philosophical study of writing, and it goes without saying that we should examine the individual who writes, not the writing; the subject, not the object. Many have begun with the object, examining the writing, and in this way many methods have been constructed.
"Let’s observe someone who is writing, and let’s try to analyze the actions they take while writing," that is, the mechanical tasks involved in the process of writing. This would be taking on the philosophical study of writing, and it’s clear that we should look at the person who writes, not the writing; the subject, not the object. Many have started with the object, focusing on the writing, and as a result, various methods have been developed.
But a method starting from the individual would be decidedly original—very different from other methods which preceded it. It would indeed signify a new era in writing, based upon anthropology.
But a method starting from the individual would be definitely original—very different from other methods that came before it. It would truly mark a new era in writing, based on anthropology.
In fact, when I undertook my experiments with normal children, if I had thought of giving a name to this new method of writing, I should have called it without knowing what the results would be, the anthropological method. Certainly, my studies in anthropology inspired the method, but experience has given me, as a surprise, another title which seems to me the natural one, "the method of spontaneous writing."
In fact, when I started my experiments with regular kids, if I had thought about naming this new way of writing, I would have called it, not knowing what the results would be, the anthropological method. Sure, my studies in anthropology inspired this method, but experience has surprisingly given me another name that seems more fitting, "the method of spontaneous writing."
While teaching deficient children I happened to observe the following fact: An idiot girl of eleven years, who was possessed of normal strength and motor power in her hands, could not learn to sew, or even to take the first step, darning, which consists in passing the needle first over, then under the woof, now taking up, now leaving, a number of threads.
While teaching children with disabilities, I noticed something interesting: an eleven-year-old girl with normal strength and coordination in her hands couldn’t learn to sew or even master the first step of darning, which involves passing the needle over and under the fabric, picking up and leaving a number of threads.
I set the child to weaving with the Froebel mats, in which a strip of paper is threaded transversely in and out among vertical strips of paper held fixed at top and bot[Pg 261]tom. I thus came to think of the analogy between the two exercises, and became much interested in my observation of the girl. When she had become skilled in the Froebel weaving, I led her back again to the sewing, and saw with pleasure that she was now able to follow the darning. From that time on, our sewing classes began with a regular course in the Froebel weaving.
I had the child start weaving with the Froebel mats, where a strip of paper is threaded in and out among vertical strips of paper that are held in place at the top and bottom. This made me think about the similarities between the two activities, and I became very interested in observing the girl. Once she got the hang of the Froebel weaving, I brought her back to sewing and was pleased to see that she could now keep up with the darning. From then on, our sewing classes began with a regular routine in the Froebel weaving.
I saw that the necessary movements of the hand in sewing had been prepared without having the child sew, and that we should really find the way to teach the child how, before making him execute a task. I saw especially that preparatory movements could be carried on, and reduced to a mechanism, by means of repeated exercises not in the work itself but in that which prepares for it. Pupils could then come to the real work, able to perform it without ever having directly set their hands to it before.
I noticed that the necessary hand movements for sewing had been prepared without having the child sew, and that we should really figure out how to teach the child how before making him do a task. I especially saw that we could practice preparatory movements and break them down into a process through repeated exercises, not in the actual work itself but in what leads up to it. This way, students could start the real work ready to perform it without ever having directly touched it before.
I thought that I might in this way prepare for writing, and the idea interested me tremendously. I marvelled at its simplicity, and was annoyed that I had not thought before of the method which was suggested to me by my observation of the girl who could not sew.
I thought this could help me get ready for writing, and the idea really fascinated me. I was amazed by how simple it was and frustrated that I hadn't thought of it before after noticing the girl who couldn't sew.
In fact, seeing that I had already taught the children to touch the contours of the plane geometric insets, I had now only to teach them to touch with their fingers the forms of the letters of the alphabet.
In fact, since I had already shown the kids how to feel the shapes of the flat geometric pieces, I just needed to teach them to feel the shapes of the letters of the alphabet with their fingers.
I had a beautiful alphabet manufactured, the letters being in flowing script, the low letters 8 centimetres high, and the taller ones in proportion. These letters were in wood, 1/2 centimetre in thickness, and were painted, the consonants in blue enamel, the vowels in red. The under side of these letter-forms, instead of being painted, were covered with bronze that they might be more dur[Pg 262]able. We had only one copy of this wooden alphabet; but there were a number of cards upon which the letters were painted in the same colours and dimensions as the wooden ones. These painted letters were arranged upon the cards in groups, according to contrast, or analogy of form.
I had a beautiful alphabet made, with the letters designed in flowing script. The lowercase letters were 8 centimeters tall, and the uppercase letters were proportionately larger. These letters were made of wood, 0.5 centimeters thick, and were painted—consonants in blue enamel and vowels in red. Instead of being painted, the undersides of the letters were covered in bronze to make them more durable. We only had one copy of this wooden alphabet, but several cards featured the letters painted in the same colors and sizes as the wooden ones. The painted letters on the cards were arranged in groups based on contrast or similarity in form.
Corresponding to each letter of the alphabet, we had a picture representing some object the name of which began, with the letter. Above this, the letter was painted in large script, and near it, the same letter, much smaller and in its printed form. These pictures served to fix the memory of the sound of the letter, and the small printed letter united to the one in script, was to form the passage to the reading of books. These pictures do not, indeed, represent a new idea, but they completed an arrangement which did not exist before. Such an alphabet was undoubtedly most expensive and when made by hand the cost was fifty dollars.
For each letter of the alphabet, we had a picture of an object whose name started with that letter. Above it, the letter was painted in large script, and next to it, the same letter in a smaller printed form. These pictures helped reinforce the sound of the letter, and the small printed letter connected to the one in script was meant to lead to reading books. While these pictures were not a new concept, they completed an arrangement that hadn’t existed before. This kind of alphabet was definitely quite expensive, costing fifty dollars when made by hand.
The interesting part of my experiment was, that after I had shown the children how to place the movable wooden letters upon those painted in groups upon the cards, I had them touch them repeatedly in the fashion of flowing writing.
The interesting part of my experiment was that after I had shown the children how to place the movable wooden letters onto those painted in groups on the cards, I had them touch them repeatedly like flowing writing.
I multiplied these exercises in various ways, and the children thus learned to make the movements necessary to reproduce the form of the graphic signs without writing.
I varied these exercises in different ways, so the kids learned to make the movements needed to replicate the shape of the graphic signs without actually writing.
I was struck by an idea which had never before entered my mind—that in writing we make two diverse forms of movement, for, besides the movement by which the form is reproduced, there is also that of manipulating the instrument of writing. And, indeed, when the deficient children had become expert in touching all the letters[Pg 263] according to form, they did not yet know how to hold a pencil. To hold and to manipulate a little stick securely, corresponds to the acquisition of a special muscular mechanism which is independent of the writing movement; it must in fact go along with the motions necessary to produce all of the various letter forms. It is, then, a distinct mechanism, which must exist together with the motor memory of the single graphic signs. When I provoked in the deficients the movements characteristic of writing by having them touch the letters with their fingers, I exercised mechanically the psycho-motor paths, and fixed the muscular memory of each letter. There remained the preparation of the muscular mechanism necessary in holding and managing the instrument of writing, and this I provoked by adding two periods to the one already described. In the second period, the child touched the letter, not only with the index finger of his right hand, but with two, the index and the middle finger. In the third period, he touched the letters with a little wooden stick, held as a pen in writing. In substance I was making him repeat the same movements, now with, and now without, holding the instrument.
I was hit by an idea that had never crossed my mind before—that in writing, we create two different types of movements. Along with the movement that reproduces the form, there’s also the movement involved in manipulating the writing instrument. In fact, when the children with difficulties became skilled at touching all the letters[Pg 263] correctly, they still didn’t know how to hold a pencil. To hold and properly use a small stick correlates with the acquisition of a specific muscular mechanism that operates independently of the writing movement; it should actually accompany the motions needed to create all the different letter forms. Thus, it is a separate mechanism that must exist alongside the motor memory of individual graphic signs. When I prompted the children with challenges to make writing movements by having them touch the letters with their fingers, I was mechanically training the psycho-motor pathways and establishing the muscular memory of each letter. Then, there was the need to develop the muscular mechanism required to hold and control the writing instrument, and I prompted this by introducing two additional stages to the one already mentioned. In the second stage, the child touched the letter not only with the index finger of their right hand but also with two fingers: the index and middle fingers. In the third stage, they touched the letters with a small wooden stick, held like a pen. Essentially, I was having them repeat the same movements, sometimes with, and sometimes without, holding the instrument.
I have said that the child was to follow the visual image of the outlined letter. It is true that his finger had already been trained through touching the contours of the geometric figures, but this was not always a sufficient preparation. Indeed, even we grown people, when we trace a design through glass or tissue paper, cannot follow perfectly the line which we see and along which we should draw our pencil. The design should furnish some sort of control, some mechanical guide, for the pencil, in order to follow with exactness the trace, sensible in reality only to the eye.[Pg 264]
I have said that the child was supposed to follow the visual image of the outlined letter. It's true that his finger had been trained by touching the shapes of geometric figures, but that wasn't always enough preparation. In fact, even we adults, when we trace a design through glass or tissue paper, can't perfectly follow the line we see and should draw our pencil along. The design needs to provide some sort of control, a mechanical guide for the pencil, to follow the trace with accuracy, perceptible in reality only to the eye.[Pg 264]
The deficients, therefore, did not always follow the design exactly with either the finger or the stick. The didactic material did not offer any control in the work, or rather it offered only the uncertain control of the child's glance, which could, to be sure, see if the finger continued upon the sign, or not. I now thought that in order to have the pupil follow the movements more exactly, and to guide the execution more directly, I should need to prepare letter forms so indented, as to represent a furrow within which the wooden stick might run. I made the designs for this material, but the work being too expensive I was not able to carry out my plan.
The students didn't always follow the design exactly with their finger or the stick. The teaching materials didn’t provide any control during the activity; instead, they only gave the unreliable control of the child's gaze, which could see whether the finger stayed on the line or not. I thought that to help the students follow the movements more accurately and to direct their execution more effectively, I needed to create letter forms that were indented to create a groove for the wooden stick to glide along. I made designs for this material, but since the project ended up being too costly, I wasn't able to implement my plan.
After having experimented largely with this method, I spoke of it very fully to the teachers in my classes in didactic methods at the State Orthophrenic School. These lectures were printed, and I give below the words which, though they were placed in the hands of more than 200 elementary teachers, did not draw from them a single helpful idea. Professor Ferreri[14] in an article speaks with amazement of this fact.[15]
After trying out this method extensively, I shared it in detail with the teachers in my classes on teaching methods at the State Orthophrenic School. These lectures were published, and I will present the words below that, despite being given to over 200 elementary teachers, did not inspire a single helpful idea from them. Professor Ferreri[14] mentions this surprising fact in an article.[15]
"At this point we present the cards bearing the vowels painted in red. The child sees irregular figures painted in red. We give him the vowels in wood, painted red, and have him superimpose these upon the letters painted on the card. We have him touch the wooden vowels in the fashion of writing, and give him the name of each [Pg 265]letter. The vowels are arranged on the cards according to analogy of form:
"At this point, we present the cards with the vowels painted in red. The child sees irregular shapes in red. We give him wooden vowels, also painted red, and have him place these over the letters on the card. We guide him to touch the wooden vowels as if he were writing, and we tell him the name of each [Pg 265] letter. The vowels are organized on the cards based on their shape similarity:"
o e a
i u
o e a
i u
"We then say to the child, for example, 'Find o. Fat it in its place.' Then, 'What letter is this?' We here discover that many children make mistakes in the letters if they only look at the letter.
"We then say to the child, for example, 'Find o. Put it in its place.' Then, 'What letter is this?' We find that many children make mistakes with the letters if they only focus on the letter."
"They could however tell the letter by touching it. Most interesting observations may be made, revealing various individual types: visual, motor.
"They could, however, identify the letter by touching it. The most interesting observations can be made, showing different individual types: visual, motor."
"We have the child touch the letters drawn upon the cards,—using first the index finger only, then the index with the middle finger,—then with a small wooden stick held as a pen. The letter must be traced in the fashion of writing.
"We have the child touch the letters on the cards—first using just the index finger, then using the index finger and the middle finger together—then with a small wooden stick held like a pen. The letter should be traced the way it is written."
"The consonants are painted in blue, and are arranged upon the cards according to analogy of form. To these cards are annexed a movable alphabet in blue wood, the letters of which are to be placed upon the consonants as they were upon the vowels. In addition to these materials there is another series of cards, where, besides the consonant, are painted one or two figures the names of which begin with that particular letter. Near the script letter, is a smaller printed letter painted in the same colour.
"The consonants are painted blue and arranged on the cards by their shapes. Attached to these cards is a movable alphabet made of blue wood, with letters meant to be placed on the consonants just like they are on the vowels. Along with these materials, there's another set of cards that shows one or two pictures of things whose names start with that specific letter, next to the script letter. There’s also a smaller printed letter in the same color next to the script letter."
"The teacher, naming the consonant according to the phonetic method, indicates the letter, and then the card, pronouncing the names of the objects painted there, and emphasizing the first letter, as, for example, 'p-pear: give me the consonant p—put it in its place, touch it,' etc. In all this we study the linguistic defects of the child.[Pg 266]
"The teacher, using the phonetic method, names the consonant, shows the letter, and then the card, saying the names of the objects illustrated there and stressing the first letter, like this: 'p-pear: give me the consonant p—put it in its place, touch it,' etc. In all this, we address the child's language issues.[Pg 266]
"Tracing the letter, in the fashion of writing, begins the muscular education which prepares for writing. One of our little girls taught by this method has reproduced all the letters with the pen, though she does not as yet recognise them all. She has made them about eight centimetres high, and with surprising regularity. This child also does well in hand work. The child who looks, recognises, and touches the letters in the manner of writing, prepares himself simultaneously for reading and writing.
"Tracing the letters in the way we write starts the physical training needed for writing. One of our little girls taught this way has copied all the letters with a pen, even though she doesn't recognize all of them yet. She's made them about eight centimeters tall and with impressive consistency. This child also excels at craft work. The child who observes, recognizes, and touches the letters while writing is simultaneously getting ready for both reading and writing."
"Touching the letters and looking at them at the same time, fixes the image more quickly through the co-operation of the senses. Later, the two facts separate; looking becomes reading; touching becomes writing. According to the type of the individual, some learn to read first, others to write."
"Touching the letters while looking at them at the same time helps to form the image faster by engaging multiple senses. Later on, the two actions split apart; looking turns into reading, and touching turns into writing. Depending on the person, some learn to read first, while others learn to write."
I had thus, about the year 1899, initiated my method for reading and writing upon the fundamental lines it still follows. It was with great surprise that I noted the facility with which a deficient child, to whom I one day gave a piece of chalk, traced upon the blackboard, in a firm hand, the letters of the entire alphabet, writing for the first time.
I had, around the year 1899, started my method for reading and writing that it still follows today. I was really surprised by how easily a struggling child, to whom I once gave a piece of chalk, confidently traced the letters of the entire alphabet on the blackboard, writing for the first time.
This had arrived much more quickly than I had supposed. As I have said, some of the children wrote the letters with a pen and yet could not recognise one of them. I have noticed, also, in normal children, that the muscular sense is most easily developed in infancy, and this makes writing exceedingly easy for children. It is not so with reading, which requires a much longer course of instruction, and which calls for a superior intellectual development, since it treats of the interpretation of signs, and of the modulation of accents of the voice, in order[Pg 267] that the word may be understood. And all this is a purely mental task, while in writing, the child, under dictation, materially translates sounds into signs, and moves, a thing which is always easy and pleasant for him. Writing develops in the little child with facility and spontaneity, analogous to the development of spoken language—which is a motor translation of audible sounds. Reading, on the contrary, makes part of an abstract intellectual culture, which is the interpretation of ideas from graphic symbols, and is only acquired later on.
This arrived much sooner than I expected. As I mentioned, some of the kids wrote the letters with a pen and still couldn't recognize any of them. I've also noticed that for typical children, the sense of movement is easiest to develop in infancy, which makes writing very simple for them. Reading, on the other hand, requires a much longer period of instruction and demands a higher level of intellectual development, as it involves the interpretation of signs and the modulation of voice accents so that the words can be understood. All of this is a purely mental task, whereas in writing, the child, when following dictation, physically translates sounds into signs and moves, which is always easy and enjoyable for them. Writing develops in young children with ease and spontaneity, similar to how spoken language develops—which is a motor translation of sounds we hear. Reading, however, is part of an abstract intellectual culture, which is about interpreting ideas from graphic symbols and is typically learned later on.
My first experiments with normal children were begun in the first half of the month of November, 1907.
My first experiments with regular children started in the first half of November 1907.
In the two "Children's Houses" in San Lorenzo, I had, from the date of their respective inaugurations (January 6 in one and March 7 in the other), used only the games of practical life, and of the education of the senses. I had not presented exercises for writing, because, like everybody else, I held the prejudice that it was necessary to begin as late as possible the teaching of reading and writing, and certainly to avoid it before the age of six.
In the two "Children's Houses" in San Lorenzo, I had, starting from their opening dates (January 6 for one and March 7 for the other), only used activities focused on practical life and sensory education. I hadn't introduced writing exercises because, like many others, I believed it was better to start teaching reading and writing as late as possible, definitely not before the age of six.
But the children seemed to demand some conclusion of the exercises, which had already developed them intellectually in a most surprising way. They knew how to dress and undress, and to bathe, themselves; they knew how to sweep the floors, dust the furniture, put the room in order, to open and close boxes, to manage the keys in the various locks; they could replace the objects in the cupboards in perfect order, could care for the plants; they knew how to observe things, and how to see objects with their hands. A number of them came to us and frankly demanded to be taught to read and write. Even in the face of our refusal several children came to school and[Pg 268] proudly showed us that they knew how to make an O on the blackboard.
But the kids seemed to want some closure to the activities, which had already developed their intellects in a really surprising way. They knew how to put on and take off their clothes, and to bathe by themselves; they knew how to sweep the floors, dust the furniture, tidy up the room, open and close boxes, and handle the keys in different locks; they could put things back in the cupboards in perfect order and take care of the plants; they knew how to observe their surroundings and feel objects with their hands. A number of them came up to us and openly asked to be taught how to read and write. Even when we said no, several kids still showed up at school and[Pg 268] proudly demonstrated that they could draw an O on the blackboard.
Finally, many of the mothers came to beg us as a favour to teach the children to write, saying, "Here in the 'Children's Houses' the children are awakened, and learn so many things easily that if you only teach reading and writing they will soon learn, and will then be spared the great fatigue this always means in the elementary school." This faith of the mothers, that their little ones would, from us, be able to learn to read and write without fatigue, made a great impression upon me. Thinking upon the results I had obtained in the school for deficients, I decided during the August vacation to make a trial upon the reopening of the school in September. Upon second thought I decided that it would be better to take up the interrupted work in September, and not to approach reading and writing until October, when the elementary schools opened. This presented the added advantage of permitting us to compare the progress of the children of the first elementary with that made by ours, who would have begun the same branch of instruction at the same time.
Finally, many of the mothers came to ask us as a favor to teach the children to write, saying, "Here in the 'Children's Houses,' the kids are engaged and easily learn so many things that if you just teach reading and writing, they'll pick it up quickly and be spared the exhaustion that always comes with elementary school." This belief of the mothers, that their little ones could learn to read and write from us without fatigue, really made an impression on me. Reflecting on the results I had achieved in the school for children with disabilities, I decided during the August break to give it a try when the school reopened in September. After some consideration, I thought it would be better to resume the interrupted work in September and to wait until October to tackle reading and writing when the elementary schools opened. This also had the added benefit of allowing us to compare the progress of our children with those in the first elementary, who would be starting the same subject at the same time.
In September, therefore, I began a search for someone who could manufacture didactic materials, but found no one willing to undertake it. I wished to have a splendid alphabet made, like the one used with the deficients. Giving this up, I was willing to content myself with the ordinary enamelled letters used upon shop windows, but I could find them in script form nowhere. My disappointments were many.
In September, I started looking for someone who could create educational materials, but I couldn't find anyone willing to take it on. I wanted to have a beautiful alphabet made, like the one used for those with disabilities. After giving up on that idea, I was ready to settle for the regular enameled letters used on shop windows, but I couldn't find them in script form anywhere. I faced a lot of disappointments.
So passed the whole mouth of October. The children in the first elementary had already filled pages of vertical strokes, and mine were still waiting. I then decided to[Pg 269] cut out large paper letters, and to have one of my teachers colour these roughly on one side with a blue tint. As for the touching of the letters, I thought of cutting the letters of the alphabet out of sandpaper, and of gluing them upon smooth cards, thus making objects much like those used in the primitive exercises for the tactile sense.
So the entire beginning of October went by. The kids in the first grade had already filled pages with vertical strokes, while mine were still waiting. I decided to[Pg 269]cut out large paper letters and have one of my teachers color them roughly on one side with a blue tint. As for the tactile aspect, I thought about cutting the letters of the alphabet out of sandpaper and gluing them onto smooth cards, creating objects similar to those used in basic exercises for the sense of touch.
Only after I had made these simple things, did I become aware of the superiority of this alphabet to that magnificent one I had used for my deficients, and in the pursuit of which I had wasted two months! If I had been rich, I would have had that beautiful but barren alphabet of the past! We wish the old things because we cannot understand the new, and we are always seeking after that gorgeousness which belongs to things already on the decline, without recognising in the humble simplicity of new ideas the germ which shall develop in the future.
Only after I created these simple things did I realize how much better this alphabet is compared to that beautiful one I had used for my shortcomings, which I wasted two months chasing! If I had been wealthy, I would have had that stunning but empty alphabet from the past! We long for the old things because we struggle to grasp the new, and we're always after the glamour of things that are already fading away, without seeing in the humble simplicity of new ideas the potential that will grow in the future.
I finally understood that a paper alphabet could easily be multiplied, and could be used by many children at one time, not only for the recognition of letters, but for the composition of words. I saw that in the sandpaper alphabet I had found the looked-for guide for the fingers which touched the letter. This was furnished in such a way that no longer the sight alone, but the touch, lent itself directly to teaching the movement of writing with exactness of control.
I finally realized that a paper alphabet could be easily reproduced and used by many children at once, not just for recognizing letters but also for forming words. I saw that in the sandpaper alphabet, I had discovered the guide I needed for the fingers that would touch the letters. It was designed in such a way that not just sight, but touch, directly contributed to teaching the movements of writing with precise control.
In the afternoon after school, the two teachers and I, with great enthusiasm, set about cutting out letters from writing-paper, and others from sandpaper. The first, we painted blue, the second, we mounted on cards, and, while we worked, there unfolded before my mind a clear vision of the method in all its completeness, so simple that it made me smile to think I had not seen it before.
In the afternoon after school, the two teachers and I, full of energy, got busy cutting out letters from writing paper and others from sandpaper. We painted the first set blue, and we mounted the second on cards. As we worked, a clear vision of the entire method appeared in my mind, so simple that it made me smile to think I hadn't noticed it before.
The story of our first attempts is very interesting. One[Pg 270] day one of the teachers was ill, and I sent as a substitute a pupil of mine, Signorina Anna Fedeli, a professor of pedagogy in a Normal school. When I went to see her at the close of the day, she showed me two modifications of the alphabet which she had made. One consisted in placing behind each letter, a transverse strip of white paper, so that the child might recognise the direction of the letter, which he often turned about and upside down. The other consisted in the making of a cardboard case where each letter might be put away in its own compartment, instead of being kept in a confused mass as at first. I still keep this rude case made from an old pasteboard box, which Signorina Fedeli had found in the court and roughly sewed with white thread.
The story of our first attempts is really fascinating. One[Pg 270] day, one of the teachers was sick, so I sent one of my students, Signorina Anna Fedeli, who was a professor of pedagogy at a Normal school, as a substitute. When I visited her at the end of the day, she showed me two changes to the alphabet that she had created. One involved adding a strip of white paper behind each letter to help the child recognize its orientation, since they often flipped and turned it around. The other was a cardboard case she made, where each letter could be stored in its own space, instead of all mixed up like before. I still have that rough case made from an old cardboard box that Signorina Fedeli found in the courtyard and stitched together with white thread.
She showed it to me laughing, and excusing herself for the miserable work, but I was most enthusiastic about it. I saw at once that the letters in the case were a precious aid to the teaching. Indeed, it offered to the eye of the child the possibility of comparing all of the letters, and of selecting those he needed. In this way the didactic material described below had its origin.
She showed it to me while laughing and apologizing for the poor quality of the work, but I was really excited about it. I immediately noticed that the letters in the case were a valuable tool for teaching. It allowed the child to visually compare all the letters and choose the ones they needed. This is how the teaching material described below came to be.
I need only add that at Christmas time, less than a month and a half later, while the children in the first elementary were laboriously working to forget their wearisome pothooks and to prepare for making the curves of O and the other vowels, two of my little ones of four years old, wrote, each one in the name of his companions, a letter of good wishes and thanks to Signor Edoardo Talamo. These were written upon note paper without blot or erasure and the writing was adjudged equal to that which is obtained in the third elementary grade.
I just want to add that at Christmas time, less than a month and a half later, while the first graders were struggling to forget their tedious handwriting exercises and getting ready to write the curves of O and the other vowels, two of my little ones, who were four years old, wrote a letter of good wishes and thanks to Mr. Edoardo Talamo, each in the name of their classmates. These letters were written on notepaper without any blotches or corrections, and their writing was considered to be on par with that of a third grader.
[14] G. Ferreri—Per l'insegnamento della scrittura (Sistema della Dott M. Montessori) Bollettino dell' Associazione Romana per la cura medico—pedigogica dei fanciulli anormali e deficienti poveri, anno 1, n. 4, ottobre 1907. Roma Tipografia delle Terme Diocleziane.
[14] G. Ferreri—On the Teaching of Writing (Montessori System) Bulletin of the Roman Association for the Medical-Pedagogical Care of Abnormal and Underprivileged Children, year 1, no. 4, October 1907. Rome Diocletian Baths Printing House.
[15] Riassunto delle lezion di didattica, della dott. Montessori anno 1900, Stab. lit. Romano, via Frattina 62, Disp. 6a, pag. 46: "Lettura e Scrittura simultanee."
[15] Summary of the teaching lessons by Dr. Montessori, year 1900, Stab. lit. Romano, via Frattina 62, Disp. 6a, page 46: "Simultaneous Reading and Writing."
CHAPTER XVII
Description of the Method and Teaching Materials Used
FIRST PERIOD: EXERCISE TENDING TO DEVELOP THE MUSCULAR MECHANISM NECESSARY IN HOLDING AND USING THE INSTRUMENT IN WRITING
Design Preparatory to Writing.—Didactic Material. Small wooden tables; metal insets, outline drawings, coloured pencils. I have among my materials two little wooden tables, the tops of which form an inclined plane sloping toward a narrow cornice, which prevents objects placed upon the table from slipping off. The top of each table is just large enough to hold four of the square frames, into which the metal plane geometric insets are fitted, and is so painted as to represent three of these brown frames, each containing a square centre of the same dark blue as the centres of the metal insets.
Design Preparatory to Writing.—Didactic Material. Small wooden tables; metal insets, outline drawings, colored pencils. I have two small wooden tables among my materials. The tops of these tables create an inclined plane that slopes toward a narrow edge, which keeps objects on the table from sliding off. Each table's surface is just big enough to hold four of the square frames where the metal geometric insets are placed. The top is painted to show three of these brown frames, each with a square center that matches the dark blue of the centers of the metal insets.
The metal insets are in dimension and form a reproduction of the series of plane geometric insets in wood already described.
The metal insets are sized to match and replicate the series of flat geometric shapes in wood that have already been described.
Exercises. Placed side by side upon the teacher's desk, or upon one of the little tables belonging to the children, these two little tables may have the appearance of being one long table containing eight figures. The child may select one or more figures, taking at the same time the frame of the inset. The analogy between these metal insets and the plane geometric insets of wood is complete.[Pg 272] But in this case, the child can freely use the pieces, where before, he arranged them in the wooden frame. He first takes the metal frame, places it upon a sheet of white paper, and with a coloured pencil draws around the contour of the empty centre. Then, he takes away the frame, and upon the paper there remains a geometric figure.
Exercises. Placed side by side on the teacher's desk, or on one of the kids' small tables, these two tables may look like a long table with eight shapes. The child can choose one or more shapes while also taking the inset frame. The similarity between these metal insets and the wooden plane geometric insets is complete.[Pg 272] However, this time, the child can use the pieces freely, whereas before, they arranged them in the wooden frame. First, they take the metal frame, place it on a sheet of white paper, and with a colored pencil draw around the outline of the empty center. Then, they remove the frame, leaving a geometric shape on the paper.
This is the first time that the child has reproduced through design, a geometric figure. Until now, he has only placed the geometric insets above the figures delineated on the three series of cards. He now places upon the figure, which he himself has drawn, the metal inset, just as he placed the wooden inset upon the cards. His next act is to follow the contour of this inset with a pencil of a different colour. Lifting the metal piece, he sees the figure reproduced upon the paper, in two colours.
This is the first time the child has created a geometric shape deliberately. Until now, he has only placed the geometric insets on top of the figures outlined on the three sets of cards. Now, he puts the metal inset over the figure he has drawn himself, just like he did with the wooden inset on the cards. His next move is to trace the outline of this inset with a pencil of a different color. When he lifts the metal piece, he sees the figure replicated on the paper in two colors.
Here, for the first time is born the abstract concept of the geometric figure, for, from two metal pieces so different in form as the frame and the inset, there has resulted the same design, which is a line expressing a determined figure. This fact strikes the attention of the child. He often marvels to find the same figure reproduced by means of two pieces so different, and looks for a long time with evident pleasure at the duplicate design—almost as if it were actually produced by the objects which serve to guide his hand.
Here, for the first time, the abstract idea of a geometric figure is born. From two metal pieces that are so different in shape—the frame and the inset—comes the same design, which is a line representing a specific figure. This captures the child's attention. They often marvel at discovering that the same figure can be created using two such different pieces, and they gaze at the duplicate design for a long time, clearly enjoying the experience—almost as if it were actually created by the objects guiding their hand.
Besides all this, the child learns to trace lines determining figures. There will come a day in which, with still greater surprise and pleasure, he will trace graphic signs determining words.
Besides all this, the child learns to trace lines that form shapes. One day, with even more surprise and joy, he will trace graphic signs that form words.
After this, he begins the work which directly prepares for the formation of the muscular mechanism relative to the holding and manipulation of the instrument of writing. With a coloured pencil of his own selection, held as[Pg 273] the pen is held in writing, he fills in the figure which he has outlined. We teach him not to pass outside the contour, and in doing so we attract his attention to this contour, and thus fix the idea that a line may determine a figure.
After this, he starts the work that directly prepares for the development of the muscle movements needed for holding and using a writing instrument. With a colored pencil of his choice, held like[Pg 273] a pen when writing, he fills in the figure that he has outlined. We teach him not to go outside the lines, and in doing so, we draw his attention to these lines, reinforcing the idea that a line can define a shape.
The exercise of filling in one figure alone, causes the child to perform repeatedly the movement of manipulation which would be necessary to fill ten copy-book pages with vertical strokes. And yet, the child feels no weariness, because, although he makes exactly the muscular co-ordination which is necessary to the work, he does so freely and in any way that he wishes, while his eyes are fixed upon a large and brightly coloured figure. At first, the children fill pages and pages of paper with these big squares, triangles, ovals, trapezoids; colouring them red, orange, green, blue, light blue, and pink.
Filling in just one shape makes the child go through the same movements over and over again, which would be needed to fill ten pages of a copybook with vertical strokes. Yet, the child doesn’t feel tired because, even though they’re using the exact muscle coordination needed for the task, they do it freely and however they want, all while keeping their eyes on a large, colorful shape. At first, the kids fill page after page with these big squares, triangles, ovals, and trapezoids, coloring them red, orange, green, blue, light blue, and pink.
Gradually they limit themselves to the use of the dark blue and brown, both in drawing the figure and in filling it in, thus reproducing the appearance of the metal piece itself. Many of the children, quite of their own accord, make a little orange-coloured circle in the centre of the figure, in this way representing the little brass button by which the metal piece is to be held. They take great pleasure in feeling that they have reproduced exactly, like true artists, the objects which they see before them on the little shelf.
Gradually, they stick to using dark blue and brown for both drawing the figure and filling it in, effectively mimicking the look of the metal piece itself. Many of the kids, all on their own, create a small orange circle in the center of the figure, representing the little brass button for holding the metal piece. They really enjoy feeling like they’ve accurately reproduced, like true artists, the objects they see in front of them on the small shelf.
Observing the successive drawings of a child, there is revealed to us a duplicate form of progression:
Observing the series of drawings by a child, we see a similar pattern of development:
First. Little by little, the lines tend less and less to go outside the enclosing line until, at last, they are perfectly contained within it, and both the centre and the frame are filled in with close and uniform strokes.
First. Little by little, the lines start to stay more and more within the enclosing line until, eventually, they are perfectly contained within it, and both the center and the frame are filled in with tight and even strokes.
Second. The strokes with which the child fills in the[Pg 274] figures, from being at first short and confused, become gradually longer, and more nearly parallel, until in many cases the figures are filled in by means of perfectly regular up and down strokes, extending from one side of the figure to the other. In such a case, it is evident that the child is master of the pencil. The muscular mechanism, necessary to the management of the instrument of writing, is established. We may, therefore, by examining such designs, arrive at a clear idea of the maturity of the child in the matter of holding the pencil or pen in hand. To vary these exercises, we use the outline drawings already described. Through these designs, the manipulation of the pencil is perfected, for they oblige the child to make lines of various lengths, and make him more and more secure in his use of the pencil.
Second. The strokes the child uses to fill in the[Pg 274] figures start off short and messy, but gradually become longer and more parallel. Eventually, in many cases, the figures are filled in with perfectly straight up and down strokes that stretch from one side of the figure to the other. In this situation, it's clear that the child is in control of the pencil. The muscle coordination needed to handle the writing tool has developed. By looking at these designs, we can get a good sense of the child's skill level in holding the pencil or pen. To diversify these activities, we use the outline drawings mentioned earlier. These designs enhance the child's pencil control, as they require the child to create lines of different lengths, boosting their confidence in using the pencil.
If we could count the lines made by a child in the filling in of these figures, and could transform them into the signs used in writing, they would fill many, many copy-books! Indeed, the security which our children attain is likened to that of children in our ordinary third elementary grade. When for the first time they take a pen or a pencil in hand, they know how to manage it almost as well as a person who has written for a long time.
If we could count the lines drawn by a child when filling in these shapes, and turned them into the letters used in writing, they would fill up a ton of notebooks! In fact, the confidence that our kids develop is similar to that of kids in a typical third-grade class. When they first pick up a pen or a pencil, they can handle it almost as well as someone who has been writing for a long time.
I do not believe that any means can be found which will so successfully and, in so short a space of time, establish this mastery. And with it all, the child is happy and diverted. My old method for the deficients, that of following with a small stick the contours of raised letters, was, when compared with this, barren and miserable!
I don't think there's any way to achieve this kind of mastery so effectively and in such a short time. And through it all, the child is happy and entertained. My old method for teaching those with difficulties—tracing the shapes of raised letters with a small stick—seems, in comparison, ineffective and sad!
Even when the children know how to write they continue these exercises, which furnish an unlimited progression, since the designs may be varied and complicated. The children follow in each design essentially the same[Pg 275] movements, and acquire a varied collection of pictures which grow more and more perfect, and of which they are very proud. For I not only provoke, but perfect, the writing through the exercises which we call preparatory. The control of the pen is rendered more and more secure, not by repeated exercises in the writing, but by means of these filled-in designs. In this way, my children perfect themselves in writing, without actually writing.
Even when the kids know how to write, they keep doing these exercises, which provide endless opportunities for improvement since the designs can be varied and complex. The kids essentially use the same[Pg 275] movements for each design, building a diverse collection of pictures that become increasingly refined, and they take great pride in their work. I not only encourage but also enhance their writing skills through the exercises we call preparatory. The control of the pen becomes more secure not through repeated writing practice, but through these filled-in designs. In this way, my kids improve their writing skills without actually writing.
SECOND PERIOD: EXERCISES TENDING TO ESTABLISH THE VISUAL-MUSCULAR IMAGE OF THE ALPHABETICAL SIGNS, AND TO ESTABLISH THE MUSCULAR MEMORY OF THE MOVEMENTS NECESSARY TO WRITING
Didactic Material. Cards upon which the single letters of the alphabet are mounted in sandpaper; larger cards containing groups of the same letters.
Didactic Material. Cards with individual letters of the alphabet mounted on sandpaper; larger cards featuring groups of the same letters.
The cards upon which the sandpaper letters are mounted are adapted in size and shape to each letter. The vowels are in light-coloured sandpaper and are mounted upon dark cards, the consonants and the groups of letters are in black sandpaper mounted upon white cards. The grouping is so arranged as to call attention to contrasted, or analogous forms.
The cards that hold the sandpaper letters are designed in size and shape for each letter. The vowels are made of light-colored sandpaper and placed on dark cards, while the consonants and letter groups are in black sandpaper on white cards. The arrangement is set up to highlight contrasting or similar forms.
The letters are cut in clear script form, the shaded parts being made broader. We have chosen to reproduce the vertical script in use in the elementary schools.
The letters are written in a clear style, with the shaded areas made wider. We decided to use the vertical script that’s commonly used in elementary schools.
Exercises. In teaching the letters of the alphabet, we begin with the vowels and proceed to the consonants, pronouncing the sound, not the name. In the case of the consonants, we immediately unite the sound with one of the vowel sounds, repeating the syllable according to the usual phonetic method.[Pg 276]
Exercises. When teaching the letters of the alphabet, we start with the vowels and then move on to the consonants, focusing on the sound rather than the name. For the consonants, we quickly blend the sound with one of the vowel sounds, repeating the syllable using the standard phonetic approach.[Pg 276]
The teaching proceeds according to the three periods already illustrated.
The teaching goes on according to the three periods already explained.
First. Association of the visual and muscular-tactile sensation with the letter sound.
First. Linking the visual and physical sensation with the sound of the letter.
The directress presents to the child two of the cards upon which vowels are mounted (or two of the consonants, as the case may be). Let us suppose that we present the letters i and o, saying, "This is i! This is o!" As soon as we have given the sound of a letter, we have the child trace it, taking care to show him how to trace it, and if necessary guiding the index finger of his right hand over the sandpaper letter in the sense of writing.
The teacher shows the child two cards with vowels on them (or two consonants, depending on the situation). Let’s say we present the letters i and o, saying, “This is i! This is o!” After we pronounce a letter, we have the child trace it, making sure to demonstrate how to trace it, and if needed, guiding the index finger of their right hand over the sandpaper letter as if writing.
"Knowing how to trace" will consist in knowing the direction in which a given graphic sign must be followed.
"Knowing how to trace" means understanding the direction in which a specific graphic symbol should be followed.
The child learns quickly, and his finger, already expert in the tactile exercise, is led, by the slight roughness of the fine sandpaper, over the exact track of the letter. He may then repeat indefinitely the movements necessary to produce the letters of the alphabet, without the fear of the mistakes of which a child writing with a pencil for the first time is so conscious. If he deviates, the smoothness of the card immediately warns him of his error.
The child learns quickly, and his finger, already skilled in the tactile exercise, is guided by the slight roughness of the fine sandpaper along the precise path of the letter. He can then repeat endlessly the motions needed to create the letters of the alphabet, without the worry of the mistakes that a child writing with a pencil for the first time is so aware of. If he strays off course, the smoothness of the card quickly alerts him to his mistake.
The children, as soon as they have become at all expert in this tracing of the letters, take great pleasure in repeating it with closed eyes, letting the sandpaper lead them in following the form which they do not see. Thus the perception will be established by the direct muscular-tactile sensation of the letter. In other words, it is no longer the visual image of the letter, but the tactile sensation, which guides the hand of the child in these movements, which thus become fixed in the muscular memory.
The children, once they become somewhat skilled at tracing the letters, really enjoy doing it with their eyes closed, allowing the sandpaper to guide them as they follow the shapes they can’t see. This way, their understanding is built through the direct muscular-tactile feeling of the letter. In other words, it’s not just the visual image of the letter anymore, but the tactile sensation that directs the child's hand during these actions, which then become ingrained in their muscle memory.
There develop, contemporaneously, three sensations when the directress shows the letter to the child and has[Pg 277] him trace it; the visual sensation, the tactile sensation, and the muscular sensation. In this way the image of the graphic sign is fixed in a much shorter space of time than when it was, according to ordinary methods, acquired only through the visual image. It will be found that the muscular memory is in the young child the most tenacious and, at the same time, the most ready. Indeed, he sometimes recognises the letters by touching them, when he cannot do so by looking at them. These images are, besides all this, contemporaneously associated with the alphabetical sound.
Three sensations arise at the same time when the instructor shows the letter to the child and has[Pg 277] him trace it: the visual sensation, the tactile sensation, and the muscular sensation. This way, the image of the graphic sign is established in a much shorter time than when it was, according to traditional methods, learned only through visual imagery. It's evident that muscular memory is the most persistent and, at the same time, the most responsive in young children. In fact, they sometimes recognize the letters by feeling them, even when they can't do so by looking at them. Additionally, these images are simultaneously linked with the alphabetical sound.
Second. Perception. The child should know how to compare and to recognise the figures, when he hears the sounds corresponding to them.
Second. Perception. The child should be able to compare and recognize the figures when they hear the corresponding sounds.
The directress asks the child, for example, "Give me o!—Give me i!" If the child does not recognise the letters by looking at them, she invites him to trace them, but if he still does not recognise them, the lesson is ended, and may be resumed another day. I have already spoken of the necessity of not revealing the error, and of not insisting in the teaching when the child does not respond readily.
The teacher asks the child, for example, "Show me o!—Show me i!" If the child doesn't recognize the letters by looking at them, she encourages him to trace them. But if he still doesn't recognize them, the lesson ends and can be picked up another day. I’ve already mentioned how important it is to not reveal the mistake, and to avoid pushing the teaching when the child doesn’t respond easily.
Third. Language. Allowing the letters to lie for some instants upon the table, the directress asks the child, "What is this?" and he should respond, o, i.
Third. Language. After leaving the letters on the table for a moment, the instructor asks the child, "What is this?" and he should respond, o, i.
In teaching the consonants, the directress pronounces only the sound, and as soon as she has done so unites with it a vowel, pronouncing the syllable thus formed and alternating this little exercise by the use of different vowels. She must always be careful to emphasize the sound of the consonant, repeating it by itself, as, for example, m, m, m, ma, me, mi, m, m. When the child repeats the sound he isolates it, and then accompanies it with the vowel.[Pg 278]
In teaching the consonants, the teacher first pronounces the sound, and then immediately adds a vowel, saying the syllable formed and mixing it up with different vowels. She needs to make sure to highlight the sound of the consonant, repeating it on its own, like m, m, m, ma, me, mi, m, m. When the child repeats the sound, he isolates it and then pairs it with the vowel.[Pg 278]
It is not necessary to teach all the vowels before passing to the consonants, and as soon as the child knows one consonant he may begin to compose words. Questions of this sort, however, are left to the judgment of the educator.
It’s not required to teach all the vowels before moving on to the consonants, and as soon as a child knows one consonant, they can start forming words. However, decisions like this are up to the educator's judgment.
I do not find it practical to follow a special rule in the teaching of the consonants. Often the curiosity of the child concerning a letter leads us to teach that desired consonant; a name pronounced may awaken in him a desire to know what consonants are necessary to compose it, and this will, or willingness, of the pupil is a much more efficacious means than any rule concerning the progression of the letters.
I don’t think it’s practical to follow a specific rule when teaching consonants. Often, a child’s curiosity about a letter encourages us to teach that letter directly; hearing a name can spark a desire in them to learn which consonants make it up, and this want, or interest, from the student is a much more effective way than any rule about the order of the letters.
When the child pronounces the sounds of the consonants, he experiences an evident pleasure. It is a great novelty for him, this series of sounds, so varied and yet so distinct, presenting such enigmatic signs as the letters of the alphabet. There is mystery about all this, which provokes most decided interest. One day I was on the terrace while the children were having their free games; I had with me a little boy of two years and a half left with me, for a moment, by his mother. Scattered about upon a number of chairs, were the alphabets which we use in the school. These had become mixed, and I was putting the letters back into their respective compartments. Having finished my work, I placed the boxes upon two of the little chairs near me. The little boy watched me. Finally, he drew near to the box, and took one of the letters in his hand. It chanced to be an f. At that moment the children, who were running in single file, passed us, and, seeing the letter, called out in chorus the corresponding sound and passed on. The child paid no attention to them, but put back the f and took up an r. The children running by again, looked at him laughing, and[Pg 279] then began to cry out "r, r, r! r, r, r!" Little by little the baby understood that, when he took a letter in hand, the children, who were passing, cried out a sound. This amused him so much that I wished to observe how long he would persist in this game without becoming tired. He kept it up for three-quarters of an hour! The children had become interested in the child, and grouped themselves about him, pronouncing the sounds in chorus, and laughing at his pleased surprise. At last, after he had several times held up f, and had received from his public the same sound, he took the letter again, showing it to me, and saying, "f, f, f!" He had learned this from out the great confusion of sounds which he had heard; the long letter which had first arrested the attention of the running children, had made a great impression upon him.
When the child pronounces the sounds of the consonants, he feels a clear sense of joy. It’s a fascinating experience for him, this series of sounds, so diverse yet so distinct, showing mysterious symbols like the letters of the alphabet. There’s something intriguing about all this, sparking his strong interest. One day, I was on the terrace while the kids were playing freely; a little boy, two and a half years old, had been left with me for a moment by his mother. Scattered on several chairs were the alphabets we use in school. They had gotten mixed up, and I was sorting the letters back into their respective boxes. After finishing, I placed the boxes on two of the small chairs nearby. The little boy observed me. Eventually, he approached the box and picked up one of the letters. It turned out to be an f. At that moment, the children, running in a line, passed us, and upon seeing the letter, shouted out the corresponding sound in unison before moving on. The boy didn’t pay them any attention; instead, he put the f back and grabbed an r. The passing children looked at him and laughed, then started shouting "r, r, r! r, r, r!" Gradually, the toddler understood that whenever he picked up a letter, the running kids shouted out the sound. This really entertained him, and I was curious to see how long he would keep this up without losing interest. He continued for three-quarters of an hour! The children became interested in him and gathered around, making the sounds together and laughing at his delighted surprise. Finally, after he had held up the f several times and received the same sound from his audience, he took the letter again, showed it to me, and said, "f, f, f!" He had picked this up from the jumble of sounds he had heard; the long letter that first grabbed the attention of the running kids had made a significant impression on him.
It is not necessary to show how the separate pronunciation of the alphabetical sounds reveals the condition of the child's speech. Defects, which are almost all related to the incomplete development of the language itself, manifest themselves, and the directress may take note of them one by one. In this way she will be possessed of a record of the child's progress, which will help her in her individual teaching, and will reveal much concerning the development of the language in this particular child.
It’s not necessary to demonstrate how the distinct pronunciation of the letters shows the state of the child's speech. Issues, which are mostly tied to the incomplete development of the language itself, become apparent, and the teacher can observe them individually. This way, she will have a record of the child's progress, which will assist her in her personalized teaching and reveal a lot about how this specific child is developing their language skills.
In the matter of correcting linguistic defects, we will find it helpful to follow the physiological rules relating to the child's development, and to modify the difficulties in the presentation of our lesson. When, however, the child's speech is sufficiently developed, and when he pronounces all the sounds, it does not matter which of the letters we select in our lessons.
In the case of fixing language issues, it’s useful to follow the physiological guidelines connected to the child's development and adjust how we present our lessons to address any challenges. However, when the child's speech is developed enough and they can pronounce all the sounds, it doesn’t matter which letters we choose for our lessons.
Many of the defects which have become permanent in[Pg 280] adults are due to functional errors in the development of the language during the period of infancy. If, for the attention which we pay to the correction of linguistic defects in children in the upper grades, we would substitute a direction of the development of the language while the child is still young, our results would be much more practical and valuable. In fact, many of the defects in pronunciation arise from the use of a dialect, and these it is almost impossible to correct after the period of childhood. They may, however, be most easily removed through the use of educational methods especially adapted to the perfecting of the language in little children.
Many of the permanent defects seen in[Pg 280] adults are caused by functional errors in language development during infancy. Instead of focusing only on correcting language problems in older children, we should aim to guide language development when children are still young. This approach would yield much more practical and valuable results. In fact, many pronunciation issues stem from using a dialect, and these are nearly impossible to fix after childhood. However, they can be easily addressed through educational methods specifically designed to enhance language skills in young children.
We do not speak here of actual linguistic defects related to anatomical or physiological weaknesses, or to pathological facts which alter the function of the nervous system. I speak at present only of those irregularities which are due to a repetition of incorrect sounds, or to the imitation of imperfect pronunciation. Such defects may show themselves in the pronunciation of any one of the consonant sounds, and I can conceive of no more practical means for a methodical correction of speech defects than this exercise in pronunciation, which is a necessary part in learning the graphic language through my method. But such important questions deserve a chapter to themselves.
We’re not talking about actual linguistic defects caused by anatomical or physiological issues, or by pathological conditions that affect how the nervous system functions. Right now, I’m only referring to those irregularities that come from repeatedly making incorrect sounds or mimicking imperfect pronunciation. These defects can appear in the pronunciation of any consonant sound, and I believe there’s no better way to systematically correct speech issues than through this pronunciation exercise, which is essential for learning the written language using my method. However, these significant questions deserve their own chapter.
Turning directly to the method used in teaching writing, I may call attention to the fact that it is contained in the two periods already described. Such exercises have made it possible for the child to learn, and to fix, the muscular mechanism necessary to the proper holding of the pen, and to the making of the graphic signs. If he has exercised himself for a sufficiently long time in these exercises, he will be potentially ready to write all the[Pg 281] letters of the alphabet and all of the simple syllables, without ever having taken chalk or pencil in his hand.
Turning directly to the method used in teaching writing, I want to highlight that it’s included in the two periods already mentioned. These exercises have allowed the child to learn and develop the muscle coordination needed to hold the pen correctly and create the graphic signs. If the child practices these exercises for a long enough time, they will be potentially ready to write all the[Pg 281] letters of the alphabet and all of the simple syllables, without ever having picked up chalk or a pencil.
We have, in addition to this, begun the teaching of reading at the same time that we have been teaching writing. When we present a letter to the child and enunciate its sound, he fixes the image of this letter by means of the visual sense, and also by means of the muscular-tactile sense. He associates the sound with its relative sign; that is, he relates the sound to the graphic sign. But when he sees and recognises, he reads; and when he traces, he writes. Thus his mind receives as one, two acts, which, later on, as he develops, will separate, coming to constitute the two diverse processes of reading and writing. By teaching these two acts contemporaneously, or, better, by their fusion, we place the child before a new form of language without determining which of the acts constituting it should be most prevalent.
We have also started teaching reading at the same time as writing. When we show a letter to the child and pronounce its sound, he fixates on the image of that letter using both his visual sense and his muscular-tactile sense. He connects the sound to its corresponding symbol; in other words, he links the sound to the graphic representation. But when he sees and recognizes, he reads; and when he traces, he writes. This way, his mind combines two actions into one, which will later become separate as he grows, forming the distinct processes of reading and writing. By teaching these two actions simultaneously, or rather, by their fusion, we expose the child to a new form of language without deciding which of these actions should take precedence.
We do not trouble ourselves as to whether the child in the development of this process, first learns to read or to write, or if the one or the other will be the easier. We must rid ourselves of all preconceptions, and must await from experience the answer to these questions. We may expect that individual differences will show themselves in the prevalence of one or the other act in the development of different children. This makes possible the most interesting psychological study of the individual, and should broaden the work of this method, which is based upon the free expansion of individuality.
We don't worry about whether a child learns to read or write first, or which one will be easier. We need to let go of any preconceived notions and wait for experience to provide answers to these questions. We can expect that individual differences will emerge in how different children develop in either reading or writing. This opens up a fascinating psychological study of each individual and should expand the application of this method, which focuses on the free development of individuality.
THIRD PERIOD: EXERCISES FOR THE COMPOSITION OF WORDS
Didactic Material. This consists chiefly of alphabets. The letters of the alphabet used here are identical in form[Pg 282] and dimension with the sandpaper ones already described, but these are cut out of cardboard and are not mounted. In this way each letter represents an object which can be easily handled by the child and placed wherever he wishes it. There are several examples of each letter, and I have designed cases in which the alphabets may be kept. These cases or boxes are very shallow, and are divided and subdivided into many compartments, in each one of which I have placed a group of four copies of the same letter. The compartments are not equal in size, but are measured according to the dimensions of the letters themselves. At the bottom of each compartment is glued a letter which is not to be taken out. This letter is made of black cardboard and relieves the child of the fatigue of hunting about for the right compartment when he is replacing the letters in the case after he has used them. The vowels are cut from blue cardboard, and the consonants from red.
Didactic Material. This mainly consists of alphabets. The letters of the alphabet used here are the same in shape[Pg 282] and size as the sandpaper ones described earlier, but these are made from cardboard and are not mounted. This way, each letter represents an object that can be easily handled by the child and placed wherever they want. There are multiple examples of each letter, and I have designed cases to store the alphabets. These cases or boxes are very shallow and are divided into many compartments, each containing a group of four copies of the same letter. The compartments aren't all the same size; they are sized according to the dimensions of the letters themselves. At the bottom of each compartment, there's a letter glued in that isn’t meant to be taken out. This letter is made of black cardboard, which helps the child avoid the hassle of searching for the right compartment when putting the letters back after use. The vowels are cut from blue cardboard, while the consonants are made from red.
In addition to these alphabets we have a set of the capital letters mounted in sandpaper upon cardboard, and another, in which they are cut from cardboard. The numbers are treated in the same way.
In addition to these alphabets, we have a set of capital letters made of sandpaper on cardboard, and another set where they're cut out of cardboard. The numbers are handled in the same way.

Exercises. As soon as the child knows some of the vowels and the consonants we place before him the big box containing all the vowels and the consonants which he knows. The directress pronounces very clearly a word; for example, "mama," brings out the sound of the m very distinctly, repeating the sounds a number of times. Almost always the little one with an impulsive movement seizes an m and places it upon the table. The directress repeats "ma—ma." The child selects the a and places it near the m. He then composes the other syllable very easily. But the reading of the word which he has composed [Pg 283] is not so easy. Indeed, he generally succeeds in reading it only after a certain effort. In this case I help the child, urging him to read, and reading the word with him once or twice, always pronouncing very distinctly, mama, mama. But once he has understood the mechanism of the game, the child goes forward by himself, and becomes intensely interested. We may pronounce any word, taking care only that the child understands separately the letters of which it is composed. He composes the new word, placing, one after the other, the signs corresponding to the sounds.
Exercises. Once the child knows some of the vowels and consonants, we present them with a large box containing all the vowels and consonants they’ve learned. The teacher clearly pronounces a word; for example, "mama," emphasizing the sound of the m very distinctly and repeating the sounds several times. Almost always, the child instinctively grabs an m and places it on the table. The teacher repeats "ma—ma." The child picks an a and places it next to the m. They then easily form the other syllable. However, reading the word they've created [Pg 283] isn't as simple. In fact, they usually manage to read it only after a bit of effort. In this case, I assist the child, encouraging them to read, and I read the word with them once or twice, always pronouncing very clearly, mama, mama. But once they understand the mechanics of the game, the child moves forward on their own and becomes very engaged. We can say any word, just making sure the child can recognize the individual letters that make it up. They create the new word by placing the symbols corresponding to the sounds one after another.

It is most interesting indeed to watch the child at this work. Intensely attentive, he sits watching the box, moving his lips almost imperceptibly, and taking one by one the necessary letters, rarely committing an error in spelling. The movement of the lips reveals the fact that he repeats to himself an infinite number of times the words whose sounds he is translating into signs. Although the child is able to compose any word which is clearly pronounced, we generally dictate to him only those words which are well-known, since we wish his composition to result in an idea. When these familiar words are used, he spontaneously rereads many times the word he has composed, repeating its sounds in a thoughtful, contemplative way.
It’s really fascinating to watch the child do this work. He sits there, completely focused, watching the box, moving his lips almost without realizing it, and taking the necessary letters one by one, making very few spelling mistakes. The movement of his lips shows that he repeats to himself countless times the words whose sounds he is turning into signs. Even though the child can put together any word that is clearly pronounced, we usually only say the words that he already knows because we want his writing to convey an idea. When he uses these familiar words, he naturally rereads the word he’s created multiple times, repeating its sounds in a thoughtful, reflective manner.
The importance of these exercises is very complex. The child analyses, perfects, fixes his own spoken language,—placing an object in correspondence to every sound which he utters. The composition of the word furnishes him with substantial proof of the necessity for clear and forceful enunciation.
The importance of these exercises is quite intricate. The child analyzes, improves, and corrects his own spoken language—matching an object to every sound he makes. The building blocks of the word provide him with strong evidence of the need for clear and powerful pronunciation.
The exercise, thus followed, associates the sound which is heard with the graphic sign which represents it, and[Pg 284] lays a most solid foundation for accurate and perfect spelling.
The exercise that follows connects the sound you hear with the written symbol that represents it, and[Pg 284] creates a strong basis for accurate and perfect spelling.
In addition to this, the composition of the words is in itself an exercise of intelligence. The word which is pronounced presents to the child a problem which he must solve, and he will do so by remembering the signs, selecting them from among others, and arranging them in the proper order. He will have the proof of the exact solution of his problem when he rereads the word—this word which he has composed, and which represents for all those who know how to read it, an idea.
Along with this, putting words together is itself a workout for the mind. The word that is spoken presents a challenge for the child to figure out, and he will do this by recalling the letters, picking them out from others, and arranging them in the right sequence. He will know he has solved the problem correctly when he reads the word again—this word he has put together, which represents an idea for everyone who knows how to read it.
When the child hears others read the word he has composed, he wears an expression of satisfaction and pride, and is possessed by a species of joyous wonder. He is impressed by this correspondence, carried on between himself and others by means of symbols. The written language represents for him the highest attainment reached by his own intelligence, and is at the same time, the reward of a great achievement.
When the child hears others read the word he has created, he shows a look of satisfaction and pride, filled with a kind of joyful wonder. He is struck by this connection happening between him and others through symbols. For him, written language represents the peak of his intelligence and is also the reward for a significant accomplishment.
When the pupil has finished the composition and the reading of the word we have him, according to the habits of order which we try to establish in connection with all our work, "put away" all the letters, each one in its own compartment. In composition, pure and simple, therefore, the child unites the two exercises of comparison and of selection of the graphic signs; the first, when from the entire box of letters before him he takes those necessary; the second, when he seeks the compartment in which each letter must be replaced. There are, then, three exercises united in this one effort, all three uniting to fix the image of the graphic sign corresponding to the sounds of the word. The work of learning is in this case facilitated in three ways, and the ideas are acquired in a third[Pg 285] of the time which would have been necessary with the old methods. We shall soon see that the child, on hearing the word, or on thinking of a word which he already knows, will see, with his mind's eye, all the letters, necessary to compose the word, arrange themselves. He will reproduce this vision with a facility most surprising to us. One day a little boy four years old, running alone about the terrace, was heard to repeat many times, "To make Zaira, I must have z-a-i-r-a." Another time, Professor Di Donato, in a visit to the "Children's House," pronounced his own name for a four-year-old child. The child was composing the name, using small letters and making it all one word, and had begun, thus—diton. The professor at once pronounced the word more distinctly; di do nato, whereupon the child, without scattering the letters, picked up the syllable to and placed it to one side, putting do in the empty space. He then placed an a after the n, and, taking up the to which he had put aside, completed the word with it. This made it evident that the child, when the word was pronounced more clearly, understood that the syllable to did not belong at that place in the word, realised that it belonged at the end of the word, and therefore placed it aside until he should need it. This was most surprising in a child of four years, and amazed all of those present. It can be explained by the clear and, at the same time, complex vision of the signs which the child must have, if he is to form a word which he hears spoken. This extraordinary act was largely due to the orderly mentality which the child had acquired through repeated spontaneous exercises tending to develop his intelligence.
When the student has finished the writing and reading of the word, we have him, according to the routines we try to establish with all our work, "put away" all the letters, each one in its own section. In simple writing, therefore, the child combines two tasks: comparing and selecting the graphic signs; the first when he chooses the needed letters from the entire collection in front of him, and the second when he looks for the section where each letter should go back. There are, then, three tasks combined in this single effort, all contributing to fix the image of the graphic sign that corresponds to the sounds of the word. The learning process is made easier in this case in three ways, and the concepts are learned in a third[Pg 285] of the time that would have been needed with the old methods. Soon we'll see that when the child hears a word or thinks of a word he already knows, he will see, in his mind, all the letters needed to spell the word, arrange themselves. He will recreate this vision with a surprising ease. One day, a four-year-old boy, running around the terrace by himself, was heard repeatedly saying, "To make Zaira, I must have z-a-i-r-a." Another time, Professor Di Donato, during a visit to the "Children's House," said his name to a four-year-old child. The child was spelling the name, using lowercase letters and putting it all together as one word, starting with—diton. The professor then pronounced the name more clearly; di do nato, at which point the child, without scattering the letters, took the syllable to and set it aside, putting do in the vacant spot. He then added an a after the n, and taking the to he had put aside, finished the word with it. This showed that the child, upon hearing the word pronounced more clearly, understood that the syllable to didn't belong in that spot but recognized it belonged at the end of the word, so he set it aside until he would need it. This was incredibly surprising for a four-year-old and amazed everyone present. It can be explained by the clear and, at the same time, complex understanding of the signs that the child must have to form a word he hears. This remarkable act was largely due to the organized way of thinking the child had developed through repeated spontaneous exercises aimed at enhancing his intelligence.
These three periods contain the entire method for the acquisition of written language. The significance of such[Pg 286] a method is clear. The psycho-physiological acts which unite to establish reading and writing are prepared separately and carefully. The muscular movements peculiar to the making of the signs or letters are prepared apart, and the same is true of the manipulation of the instrument of writing. The composition of the words, also, is reduced to a psychic mechanism of association between images heard and seen. There comes a moment in which the child, without thinking of it, fills in the geometric figures with an up and down stroke, which is free and regular; a moment in which he touches the letters with closed eyes, and in which he reproduces their form, moving his finger through the air; a moment in which the composition of words has become a psychic impulse, which makes the child, even when alone, repeat to himself "To make Zaira I must have z-a-i-r-a."
These three stages encompass the entire process for learning to read and write. The importance of this approach is evident. The mental and physical actions involved in mastering reading and writing are separately and carefully prepared. The specific muscle movements for creating letters are practiced on their own, and the same goes for how to handle the writing tool. Forming words is also simplified into a mental process that links images heard and seen. There comes a point when the child, without even realizing it, fills in geometric shapes with a simple up and down stroke, which is smooth and consistent; a moment when he touches the letters with his eyes closed and recreates their shape by moving his finger in the air; a moment when forming words becomes an instinctive action, leading the child to think, even when he’s alone, "To make Zaira I must have z-a-i-r-a."
Now this child, it is true, has never written, but he has mastered all the acts necessary to writing. The child who, when taking dictation, not only knows how to compose the word, but instantly embraces in his thought its composition as a whole, will be able to write, since he knows how to make, with his eyes closed, the movements necessary to produce these letters, and since he manages almost unconsciously the instrument of writing.
Now this child, it's true, has never written, but he has mastered all the skills needed for writing. The child who, when taking dictation, not only knows how to form the words but also understands their structure as a whole will be able to write, since he knows how to make the necessary movements to create these letters even with his eyes closed, and since he almost unconsciously handles the writing tool.
More than this, the freedom with which the child has acquired this mechanical dexterity makes it possible for the impulse or spirit to act at any time through the medium of his mechanical ability. He should, sooner or later, come into his full power by way of a spontaneous explosion into writing. This is, indeed, the marvellous reaction which has come from my experiment with normal children. In one of the "Children's Houses," directed by Signorina Bettini, I had been especially careful in the[Pg 287] way in which writing was taught, and we have had from this school most beautiful specimens of writing, and for this reason, perhaps I cannot do better than to describe the development of the work in this school.
More than that, the freedom with which the child has developed this mechanical skill allows the impulse or spirit to express itself at any time through their mechanical ability. Eventually, they should fully realize their potential through a spontaneous burst of writing. This is truly the amazing outcome of my experiment with typical children. In one of the "Children's Houses," managed by Signorina Bettini, I was particularly careful about how writing was taught, and we've produced some beautiful examples of writing from this school. For this reason, I think it’s best to describe how the work has evolved in this school.
One beautiful December day when the sun shone and the air was like spring, I went up on the roof with the children. They were playing freely about, and a number of them were gathered about me. I was sitting near a chimney, and said to a little five-year-old boy who sat beside me, "Draw me a picture of this chimney," giving him as I spoke a piece of chalk. He got down obediently and made a rough sketch of the chimney on the tiles which formed the floor of this roof terrace. As is my custom with little children, I encouraged him, praising his work. The child looked at me, smiled, remained for a moment as if on the point of bursting into some joyous act, and then cried out, "I can write! I can write!" and kneeling down again he wrote on the pavement the word "hand." Then, full of enthusiasm, he wrote also "chimney," "roof." As he wrote, he continued to cry out, "I can write! I know how to write!" His cries of joy brought the other children, who formed a circle about him, looking down at his work in stupefied amazement. Two or three of them said to me, trembling with excitement, "Give me the chalk. I can write too." And indeed they began to write various words: mama, hand, John, chimney, Ada.
One beautiful December day when the sun was shining and the air felt like spring, I went up on the roof with the kids. They were playing freely, and quite a few of them gathered around me. I was sitting near a chimney and said to a little five-year-old boy next to me, "Draw me a picture of this chimney," as I handed him a piece of chalk. He obediently got down and made a rough sketch of the chimney on the tiles that formed the floor of the roof terrace. As I usually do with little kids, I encouraged him, praising his work. The child looked at me, smiled, and for a moment seemed on the verge of bursting into some joyful act, then shouted, "I can write! I can write!" and knelt down again to write the word "hand" on the pavement. Excited, he also wrote "chimney" and "roof." As he wrote, he kept exclaiming, "I can write! I know how to write!" His joyful shouts attracted the other kids, who formed a circle around him, staring in amazement at what he had done. Two or three of them said to me, trembling with excitement, "Give me the chalk. I can write too." And sure enough, they began to write various words: mama, hand, John, chimney, Ada.
Not one of them had ever taken chalk or any other instrument in hand for the purpose of writing. It was the first time that they had ever written, and they traced an entire word, as a child, when speaking for the first time, speaks the entire word.
Not one of them had ever picked up a piece of chalk or any other tool to write before. It was the first time they had ever written, and they formed a whole word just like a child speaking their first word says the entire word.
The first word spoken by a baby causes the mother[Pg 288] ineffable joy. The child has chosen perhaps the word "mother," seeming to render thus a tribute to maternity. The first word written by my little ones aroused within themselves an indescribable emotion of joy. Not being able to adjust in their minds the connection between the preparation and the act, they were possessed by the illusion that, having now grown to the proper size, they knew how to write. In other words, writing seemed to them only one among the many gifts of nature.
The first word a baby says brings the mother[Pg 288]unexplainable joy. The child may have picked the word "mother," almost as a way to honor motherhood. The first word my little ones wrote sparked an indescribable feeling of happiness in them. Unable to fully grasp the link between preparation and the act, they believed that, now that they had grown enough, they could write. In other words, writing felt to them like just one of the many natural gifts.
They believe that, as they grow bigger and stronger, there will come some beautiful day when they shall know how to write. And, indeed, this is what it is in reality. The child who speaks, first prepares himself unconsciously, perfecting the psycho-muscular mechanism which leads to the articulation of the word. In the case of writing, the child does almost the same thing, but the direct pedagogical help and the possibility of preparing the movements for writing in an almost material way, causes the ability to write to develop much more rapidly and more perfectly than the ability to speak correctly.
They believe that as they grow bigger and stronger, there will come a day when they will know how to write. And, in fact, that's how it works in reality. The child who talks first prepares themselves unconsciously, improving the mental and physical skills needed to say words. For writing, the child does almost the same thing, but the direct help from teachers and the chance to practice writing movements in a hands-on way allows the ability to write to develop much faster and more accurately than the ability to speak correctly.
In spite of the ease with which this is accomplished, the preparation is not partial, but complete. The child possesses all the movements necessary for writing. And written language develops not gradually, but in an explosive way; that is, the child can write any word. Such was our first experience in the development of the written language in our children. Those first days we were a prey to deep emotions. It seemed as if we walked in a dream, and as if we assisted at some miraculous achievement.
Despite how easy this is to do, the preparation is not partial but complete. The child has all the movements needed for writing. Written language doesn't develop gradually; it happens all at once. This means the child can write any word. That was our first experience with developing written language in our children. In those early days, we were overwhelmed with emotions. It felt like we were walking in a dream, witnessing something miraculous.
The child who wrote a word for the first time was full of excited joy. He might be compared to the hen who has just laid an egg. Indeed, no one could escape from[Pg 289] the noisy manifestations of the little one. He would call everyone to see, and if there were some who did not go, he ran to take hold of their clothes forcing them to come and see. We all had to go and stand about the written word to admire the marvel, and to unite our exclamations of surprise with the joyous cries of the fortunate author. Usually, this first word was written on the floor, and, then, the child knelt down before it in order to be nearer to his work and to contemplate it more closely.
The child who wrote a word for the first time was filled with excited joy. He could be compared to a hen that has just laid an egg. In fact, no one could escape from[Pg 289] the loud expressions of joy from the little one. He would call everyone to come and see, and if there were some who didn’t go, he would run to grab their clothes to drag them over. We all had to gather around the written word to admire the wonder and join our surprised exclamations with the happy cheers of the lucky author. Usually, this first word was written on the floor, and then the child would kneel down in front of it to be closer to his creation and see it better.
After the first word, the children, with a species of frenzied joy, continued to write everywhere. I saw children crowding about one another at the blackboard, and behind the little ones who were standing on the floor another line would form consisting of children mounted upon chairs, so that they might write above the heads of the little ones. In a fury at being thwarted, other children, in order to find a little place where they might write, overturned the chairs upon which their companions were mounted. Others ran toward the window shutters or the door, covering them with writing. In these first days we walked upon a carpet of written signs. Daily accounts showed us that the same thing was going on at home, and some of the mothers, in order to save their pavements, and even the crust of their loaves upon which they found words written, made their children presents of paper and pencil. One of these children brought to me one day a little note-book entirely filled with writing, and the mother told me that the child had written all day long and all evening, and had gone to sleep in his bed with the paper and pencil in his hand.
After the first word, the kids, filled with a kind of wild excitement, kept writing everywhere. I saw children crowding around each other at the blackboard, and behind the little ones standing on the floor, another line formed with kids climbing on chairs so they could write over the heads of the smaller ones. In frustration at being blocked, some kids knocked over the chairs their friends were standing on to find a spot to write. Others rushed to the window shutters or the door, covering them with their writing. During those first days, we walked on a carpet of written messages. Daily updates showed that the same thing was happening at home, and some moms, to protect their pavements and even the crust of their loaves that had words written on them, gave their kids gifts of paper and pencil. One of these kids brought me a little notebook completely filled with writing, and the mom said the child had written all day and all night, even falling asleep in bed with the paper and pencil in hand.
This impulsive activity which we could not, in those first days control, made me think upon the wisdom of Nature, who develops the spoken language little by little,[Pg 290] letting it go hand in hand with the gradual formation of ideas. Think of what the result would have been had Nature acted imprudently as I had done! Suppose Nature had first allowed the human being to gather, by means of the senses, a rich and varied material, and to acquire a store of ideas, and had then completely prepared in him the means for articulate language, saying finally to the child, mute until that hour, "Go—Speak!" The result would have been a species of sudden madness, under the influence of which the child, feeling no restraints, would have burst into an exhausting torrent of the most strange and difficult words.
This impulsive behavior that we couldn't control in those early days made me reflect on the wisdom of Nature, which develops spoken language gradually, letting it evolve alongside the gradual formation of ideas.[Pg 290] Imagine the outcome if Nature had acted recklessly like I did! What if Nature had first allowed humans to gather a rich and diverse range of experiences through their senses, building up a wealth of ideas, and then had fully equipped them for spoken language, finally telling the silent child, "Go—Speak!" The outcome would have been a kind of sudden madness, where the child, feeling no restraints, would have erupted into an overwhelming flood of the most unusual and complex words.
I believe, however, that there exists between the two extremes a happy medium which is the true and practical way. We should lead the child more gradually to the conquest of written language, yet we should still have it come as a spontaneous fact, and his work should from the first be almost perfect.
I believe, though, that there's a happy medium between the two extremes that is the true and practical way. We should guide the child more gradually towards mastering written language, but it should still happen as a spontaneous fact, and their work should be nearly perfect right from the start.
Experience has shown us how to control this phenomenon, and how to lead the child more calmly to this new power. The fact that the children see their companions writing, leads them, through imitation, to write as soon as they can. In this way, when the child writes he does not have the entire alphabet at his disposal, and the number of words which he can write is limited. He is not even capable of making all of the words possible through a combination of the letters which he does know. He still has the great joy of the first written word, but this is no longer the source of an overwhelming surprise, since he sees just such wonderful things happening each day, and knows that sooner or later the same gift will come to all. This tends to create a calm and ordered environment, still full of beautiful and wonderful surprises.[Pg 291]
Experience has shown us how to manage this phenomenon and guide the child more calmly toward this new ability. The fact that children see their peers writing encourages them to write as soon as they can, through imitation. As a result, when a child writes, they don’t have the entire alphabet available to them, and the number of words they can create is limited. They can't even form all possible words from the letters they know. However, they still experience the great joy of the first written word, although it’s no longer a source of overwhelming surprise, since they witness amazing things happening every day and understand that eventually, the same ability will come to everyone. This helps to foster a calm and structured environment, still filled with beautiful and wonderful surprises.[Pg 291]
Making a visit to the "Children's House," even during the opening weeks, one makes fresh discoveries. Here, for instance, are two little children, who, though they fairly radiate pride and joy, are writing tranquilly. Yet, these children, until yesterday, had never thought of writing!
Making a visit to the "Children's House," even in the early weeks, brings new discoveries. Here, for example, are two young kids who, while they completely radiate pride and joy, are writing calmly. Yet, these kids, until yesterday, had never considered writing!
The directress tells me that one of them began to write yesterday morning at eleven o'clock, the other, at three in the afternoon. We have come to accept the phenomenon with calmness, and tacitly recognise it as a natural form of the child's development.
The director tells me that one of them started writing yesterday morning at eleven o'clock, while the other began at three in the afternoon. We've come to accept this phenomenon calmly, and we implicitly recognize it as a natural part of a child's development.
The wisdom of the teacher shall decide when it is necessary to encourage a child to write. This can only be when he is already perfect in the three periods of the preparatory exercise, and yet does not write of his own accord. There is danger that in retarding the act of writing, the child may plunge finally into a tumultuous effort, due to the fact that he knows the entire alphabet and has no natural check.
The teacher's judgment will determine when it's time to encourage a child to write. This should only happen once the child has mastered the three stages of the preparatory exercise but still isn't writing on their own. There's a risk that by delaying the act of writing, the child might end up struggling under pressure because they know the entire alphabet and lack a natural restraint.
The signs by which the teacher may almost precisely diagnose the child's maturity in this respect are: the regularity of the parallel lines which fill in the geometric figures; the recognition with closed eyes of the sandpaper letters; the security and readiness shown in the composition of words. Before intervening by means of a direct invitation to write, it is best to wait at least a week in the hope that the child may write spontaneously. When he has begun to write spontaneously the teacher may intervene to guide the progress of the writing. The first help which she may give is that of ruling the blackboard, so that the child may be led to maintain regularity and proper dimensions in his writing.
The signs that can help the teacher accurately assess a child's readiness in this area are: the consistency of the parallel lines that fill in the geometric shapes; the ability to recognize the sandpaper letters with eyes closed; and the confidence and quickness demonstrated in forming words. Before stepping in with a direct prompt to write, it’s best to wait at least a week, hoping the child might start writing on their own. Once the child starts writing spontaneously, the teacher can step in to guide their writing development. The first support she can offer is drawing lines on the blackboard, helping the child maintain consistency and proper size in their writing.
The second, is that of inducing the child, whose writing is not firm, to repeat the tracing of the sandpaper letters.[Pg 292] She should do this instead of directly correcting his actual writing, for the child does not perfect himself by repeating the act of writing, but by repeating the acts preparatory to writing. I remember a little beginner who, wishing to make his blackboard writing perfect, brought all of the sandpaper letters with him, and before writing touched two or three times all of the letters needed in the words he wished to write. If a letter did not seem to him to be perfect he erased it and retouched the letter upon the card before rewriting.
The second approach is to help the child, whose writing isn’t steady, to repeat the tracing of the sandpaper letters.[Pg 292] She should focus on this instead of directly correcting his actual writing, because the child improves not by repeating the act of writing itself, but by going through the steps that lead up to writing. I remember a little beginner who, wanting to perfect his blackboard writing, brought all the sandpaper letters with him. Before writing, he would touch all of the letters needed in the words he wanted to write two or three times. If a letter didn’t look perfect to him, he would erase it and retouch the letter on the card before rewriting.
Our children, even after they have been writing for a year, continue to repeat the three preparatory exercises. They thus learn both to write, and to perfect their writing, without really going through the actual act. With our children, actual writing is a test; it springs from an inner impulse, and from the pleasure of explaining a superior activity; it is not an exercise. As the soul of the mystic perfects itself through prayer, even so in our little ones, that highest expression of civilisation, written language, is acquired and improved through exercises which are akin to, but which are not, writing.
Our kids, even after a year of writing, keep repeating the same three practice exercises. This way, they learn how to write and improve their writing without actually doing it. For our kids, real writing is a challenge; it comes from an inner drive and the enjoyment of expressing something greater; it’s not just practice. Just like a mystic perfects their soul through prayer, our little ones develop and enhance their written language—the highest form of civilization—through exercises that are related to but not the same as writing.
There is educational value in this idea of preparing oneself before trying, and of perfecting oneself before going on. To go forward correcting his own mistakes, boldly attempting things which he does imperfectly, and of which he is as yet unworthy dulls the sensitiveness of the child's spirit toward his own errors. My method of writing contains an educative concept; teaching the child that prudence which makes him avoid errors, that dignity which makes him look ahead, and which guides him to perfection, and that humility which unites him closely to those sources of good through which alone he can make a spiritual conquest, putting far from him the illusion that[Pg 293] the immediate success is ample justification for continuing in the way he has chosen.
There is educational value in the idea of preparing yourself before trying and working on yourself before moving forward. Correcting one’s mistakes, boldly attempting things that you’re not good at yet, and acknowledging that you’re not quite there yet dulls a child’s sensitivity to their own errors. My writing method has an educational concept; it teaches kids the caution that helps them avoid mistakes, the dignity that encourages them to look ahead and strive for perfection, and the humility that connects them to the good sources through which they can achieve spiritual growth, keeping them away from the illusion that immediate success is enough reason to stick with the path they’ve chosen.
The fact that all the children, those who are just beginning the three exercises and those who have been writing for months, daily repeat the same exercise, unites them and makes it easy for them to meet upon an apparently equal plane. Here there are no distinctions of beginners, and experts. All of the children fill in the figures with coloured pencils, touch the sandpaper letters and compose words with the movable alphabets; the little ones beside the big ones who help them. He who prepares himself, and he who perfects himself, both follow the same path. It is the same way in life, for, deeper than any social distinction, there lies an equality, a common meeting point, where all men are brothers, or, as in the spiritual life, aspirants and saints again and again pass through the same experiences.
The fact that all the kids, whether they are just starting on the three exercises or have been writing for months, do the same exercise every day brings them together and makes it easier for them to interact on what seems like an equal level. Here, there are no distinctions between beginners and experts. All the kids fill in the figures with colored pencils, touch the sandpaper letters, and create words with the movable alphabets; the little ones work alongside the big ones who help them. Those who prepare themselves and those who refine their skills are both on the same journey. It's similar in life because, deeper than any social difference, there exists an equality, a shared connection where all people are like brothers, and in the spiritual realm, seekers and saints repeatedly go through the same experiences.
Writing is very quickly learned, because we begin to teach it only to those children who show a desire for it by spontaneous attention to the lesson given by the directress to other children, or by watching the exercises in which the others are occupied. Some individuals learn without ever having received any lessons, solely through listening to the lessons given to others.
Writing is learned pretty quickly because we only start teaching it to kids who show interest by paying attention to the lessons given by the teacher to other kids or by observing the activities that others are engaged in. Some people learn without ever getting formal lessons, just by listening to the lessons taught to others.
In general, all children of four are intensely interested in writing, and some of our children have begun to write at the age of three and a half. We find the children particularly enthusiastic about tracing the sandpaper letters.
In general, all four-year-olds are really interested in writing, and some of our kids have started to write at three and a half. We notice that they are especially excited about tracing the sandpaper letters.
During the first period of my experiments, when the children were shown the alphabet for the first time, I one day asked Signorina Bettini to bring out to the terrace where the children were at play, all of the various letters which she herself had made. As soon as the children saw[Pg 294] them they gathered about us, their fingers outstretched in their eagerness to touch the letters. Those who secured cards were unable to touch them properly because of the other children, who crowded about trying to reach the cards in our laps. I remember with what an impulsive movement the possessors of the cards held them on high like banners, and began to march, followed by all the other children who clapped their hands and cried out joyously. The procession passed before us, and all, big and little, laughed merrily, while the mothers, attracted by the noise, leaned from the windows to watch the sight.
During the first phase of my experiments, when the kids were introduced to the alphabet for the first time, I asked Signorina Bettini one day to bring out all the different letters she had made to the terrace where the children were playing. As soon as the kids saw[Pg 294] them, they gathered around us with their fingers reaching out, eager to touch the letters. Those who managed to grab the cards struggled to hold them properly because of the other kids crowding around, trying to get to the cards in our laps. I remember how impulsively the kids who had the cards lifted them high like flags and started marching, followed by all the other children who clapped their hands and cheered happily. The parade moved past us, and everyone, big and small, laughed joyfully, while the mothers, drawn by the commotion, leaned out of the windows to watch the scene.
The average time that elapses between the first trial of the preparatory exercises and the first written word is, for children of four years, from a month to a month and a half. With children of five years, the period is much shorter, being about a month. But one of our pupils learned to use in writing all the letters of the alphabet in twenty days. Children of four years, after they have been in school for two months and a half, can write any word from dictation, and can pass to writing with ink in a note-book. Our little ones are generally experts after three months' time, and those who have written for six months may be compared to the children in the third elementary. Indeed, writing is one of the easiest and most delightful of all the conquests made by the child.
The average time between starting the preparatory exercises and writing the first word is about one to one and a half months for four-year-olds. For five-year-olds, this period is much shorter, around one month. However, one of our students learned to write all the letters of the alphabet in just twenty days. After being in school for two and a half months, four-year-olds can write any word from dictation and move on to writing with ink in a notebook. Generally, our little ones become proficient after three months, and those who have been writing for six months can be compared to third-grade elementary students. In fact, writing is one of the easiest and most enjoyable skills that children acquire.
If adults learned as easily as children under six years of age, it would be an easy matter to do away with illiteracy. We would probably find two grave hinderances to the attainment of such a brilliant success: the torpor of the muscular sense, and those permanent defects of spoken language, which would be sure to translate themselves into the written language. I have not made experiments along this line, but I believe that one school year would be suffi[Pg 295]cient to lead an illiterate person, not only to write, but to express his thoughts in written language.
If adults could learn as easily as children under six, we could easily eliminate illiteracy. However, we would likely encounter two major obstacles to achieving this success: the lack of engagement from the muscular sense and the persistent issues with spoken language that would inevitably affect writing. I haven't conducted experiments in this area, but I think one school year would be enough to help an illiterate person not only write but also communicate their thoughts in writing.
So much for the time necessary for learning. As to the execution, our children write well from the moment in which they begin. The form of the letters, beautifully rounded and flowing, is surprising in its similarity to the form of the sandpaper models. The beauty of our writing is rarely equalled by any scholars in the elementary schools, who have not had special exercises in penmanship. I have made a close study of penmanship, and I know how difficult it would be to teach pupils of twelve or thirteen years to write an entire word without lifting the pen, except for the few letters which require this. The up and down strokes with which they have filled their copy-book make flowing writing almost impossible to them.
So much for the time needed for learning. When it comes to execution, our children write well from the moment they start. The shape of the letters, beautifully rounded and flowing, is surprisingly similar to the sandpaper models. The beauty of our writing is rarely matched by any students in elementary schools, who haven't had special penmanship practice. I've studied penmanship closely, and I know how hard it would be to teach twelve- or thirteen-year-olds to write an entire word without lifting the pen, except for a few letters that require it. The up-and-down strokes they've filled their notebooks with make it almost impossible for them to write smoothly.
Our little pupils, on the other hand, spontaneously, and with a marvellous security, write entire words without lifting the pen, maintaining perfectly the slant of the letters, and making the distance between each letter equal. This has caused more than one visitor to exclaim, "If I had not seen it I should never have believed it." Indeed, penmanship is a superior form of teaching and is necessary to correct defects already acquired and fixed. It is a long work, for the child, seeing the model, must follow the movements necessary to reproduce it, while there is no direct correspondence between the visual sensation and the movements which he must make. Too often, penmanship is taught at an age when all the defects have become established, and when the physiological period in which the muscular memory is ready, has been passed.
Our young students, on the other hand, effortlessly and with amazing confidence write whole words without lifting their pens, perfectly maintaining the angle of the letters and keeping the spacing between each letter consistent. This has led more than one visitor to exclaim, "If I hadn't seen it, I would never have believed it." Indeed, penmanship is a superior way to teach and is essential for correcting mistakes that have already become ingrained. It's a long process because the child, seeing the model, must imitate the movements needed to recreate it, while there isn’t a direct connection between the visual experience and the movements they need to make. Too often, penmanship is taught at an age when all the mistakes have already set in, and when the physiological stage in which the muscle memory is ready has passed.
We directly prepare the child, not only for writing, but also for penmanship, paying great attention to the beauty of form (having the children touch the letters in script[Pg 296] form) and to the flowing quality of the letters. (The exercises in filling-in prepare for this.)
We get the child ready not just for writing but also for penmanship, focusing a lot on the beauty of form (making sure the kids trace the letters in script[Pg 296] form) and the smoothness of the letters. (The exercises in filling in help with this.)
READING
Didactic Material. The Didactic Material for the lessons in reading consists in slips of paper or cards upon which are written in clear, large script, words and phrases. In addition to these cards we have a great variety of toys.
Teaching Materials. The teaching materials for the reading lessons include pieces of paper or cards with words and phrases written in clear, large print. Along with these cards, we also have a wide range of toys.
Experience has taught me to distinguish clearly between writing and reading, and has shown me that the two acts are not absolutely contemporaneous. Contrary to the usually accepted idea, writing precedes reading. I do not consider as reading the test which the child makes when he verifies the word that he has written. He is translating signs into sounds, as he first translated sounds into signs. In this verification he already knows the word and has repeated it to himself while writing it. What I understand by reading is the interpretation of an idea from the written signs. The child who has not heard the word pronounced, and who recognises it when he sees it composed upon the table with the cardboard letters, and who can tell what it means; this child reads. The word which he reads has the same relation to written language that the word which he hears bears to articulate language. Both serve to receive the language transmitted to us by others. So, until the child reads a transmission of ideas from the written word, he does not read.
Experience has taught me to clearly distinguish between writing and reading, and it has shown me that the two acts do not happen at the same time. Contrary to the commonly accepted belief, writing comes before reading. I do not consider the process a child goes through when he checks the word he has written as reading. He is translating symbols into sounds, just as he initially translated sounds into symbols. In this checking process, he already knows the word and has repeated it to himself while writing it. What I define as reading is the understanding of an idea from the written symbols. The child who hasn’t heard the word spoken and recognizes it when he sees it formed with the cardboard letters, and who understands what it means; this child reads. The word he reads is related to written language in the same way that the word he hears relates to spoken language. Both serve to receive the language communicated to us by others. Therefore, until the child reads a conveyance of ideas from the written word, he does not read.
We may say, if we like, that writing as described is a fact in which the psycho-motor mechanism prevails, while in reading, there enters a work which is purely intellectual. But it is evident how our method for writing prepares for reading, making the difficulties almost imperceptible. Indeed, writing prepares the child to interpret[Pg 297] mechanically the union of the letter sounds of which the written word is composed. When a child in our school knows how to write, he knows how to read the sounds of which the word is composed. It should be noticed, however, that when the child composes the words with the movable alphabet, or when he writes, he has time to think about the signs which he must select to form the word. The writing of a word requires a great deal more time than that necessary for reading the same word.
We can say that writing, as described, is primarily driven by our physical and mental processes, while reading involves more intellectual effort. However, it's clear that our writing method sets the stage for reading, making the challenges nearly unnoticeable. In fact, writing helps children learn to recognize the sounds that make up each written word. When a child in our school knows how to write, they know how to read the sounds that form the word. It’s important to note that when a child uses the movable alphabet or writes, they have time to think about the symbols they need to choose to create the word. Writing a word takes significantly more time than it does to read that same word.
The child who knows how to write, when placed before a word which he must interpret by reading, is silent for a long time, and generally reads the component sounds with the same slowness with which he would have written them. But the sense of the word becomes evident only when it is pronounced clearly and with the phonetic accent. Now, in order to place the phonetic accent the child must recognise the word; that is, he must recognise the idea which the word represents. The intervention of a superior work of the intellect is necessary if he is to read. Because of all this, I proceed in the following way with the exercises in reading, and, as will be evident, I do away entirely with the old-time primer.
The child who knows how to write tends to be quiet for a long time when faced with a word they need to read. They usually sound out the letters just as slowly as they would write them. However, the meaning of the word only becomes clear when it's pronounced distinctly and with the right emphasis. To place the correct emphasis, the child needs to recognize the word, meaning they must understand the idea the word conveys. This requires a level of intellectual engagement for them to be able to read. Because of all this, I approach reading exercises in a specific way and completely eliminate the traditional primer.
I prepare a number of little cards made from ordinary writing-paper. On each of these I write in large clear script some well-known word, one which has already been pronounced many times by the children, and which represents an object actually present or well known to them. If the word refers to an object which is before them, I place this object under the eyes of the child, in order to facilitate his interpretation of the word. I will say, in this connection, the objects used in these writing games are for the most part toys of which we have a great many in the "Children's Houses." Among these toys, are the[Pg 298] furnishings of a doll's house, balls, dolls, trees, flocks of sheep, or various animals, tin soldiers, railways, and an infinite variety of simple figures.
I make a bunch of small cards out of regular writing paper. On each card, I write a well-known word in large, clear letters—one that the kids have already said many times and represents something they can see or know well. If the word refers to something in front of them, I make sure to place that object within the child's view to help them understand the word. I should mention that the objects used in these writing activities are mostly toys we have a lot of in the "Children's Houses." These toys include the[Pg 298] furniture from a dollhouse, balls, dolls, trees, flocks of sheep, various animals, toy soldiers, train sets, and a countless variety of simple shapes.
If writing serves to correct, or better, to direct and perfect the mechanism of the articulate language of the child, reading serves to help the development of ideas, and relates them to the development of the language. Indeed, writing aids the physiological language and reading aids the social language.
If writing helps to correct, or better yet, to guide and improve the way a child expresses themselves in spoken language, then reading helps with the growth of ideas and connects them to the advancement of language. In fact, writing supports the physical aspects of language, while reading supports social language skills.
We begin, then, as I have indicated, with the nomenclature, that is, with the reading of names of objects which are well known or present.
We start, as I've mentioned, with the names, meaning we will read the names of objects that are familiar or in sight.
There is no question of beginning with words that are easy or difficult, for the child already knows how to read any word; that is, he knows how to read the sounds which compose it. I allow the little one to translate the written word slowly into sounds, and if the interpretation is exact, I limit myself to saying, "Faster." The child reads more quickly the second time, but still often without understanding. I then repeat, "Faster, faster." He reads faster each time, repeating the same accumulation of sounds, and finally the word bursts upon his consciousness. Then he looks upon it as if he recognised a friend, and assumes that air of satisfaction which so often radiates our little ones. This completes the exercise for reading. It is a lesson which goes very rapidly, since it is only presented to a child who is already prepared through writing. Truly, we have buried the tedious and stupid A B C primer side by side with the useless copy-books!
There’s no point in starting with words that are easy or difficult, because the child already knows how to read any word; that is, they know how to read the sounds that make it up. I let the child translate the written word slowly into sounds, and if it’s accurate, I just say, "Faster." The child reads more quickly the second time, but often still without really understanding. I then repeat, "Faster, faster." They read faster each time, repeating the same collection of sounds, and eventually the word clicks in their mind. Then they look at it like they’re recognizing a friend, showing that joyful expression that our little ones often have. This wraps up the reading exercise. It’s a lesson that goes by quickly, since it’s only given to a child who is already ready thanks to writing. Honestly, we’ve left behind the boring and pointless A B C primers along with the useless copybooks!
When the child has read the word, he places the explanatory card under the object whose name it bears, and the exercise is finished.[Pg 299]
When the child has read the word, they put the explanatory card under the object that the word represents, and the exercise is complete.[Pg 299]
One of our most interesting discoveries was made in the effort to devise a game through which the children might, without effort, learn to read words. We spread out upon one of the large tables a great variety of toys. Each one of them had a corresponding card upon which the name of the toy was written. We folded these little cards and mixed them up in a basket, and the children who knew how to read were allowed to take turns in drawing these cards from the basket. Each child had to carry his card back to his desk, unfold it quietly, and read it mentally, not showing it to those about him. He then had to fold it up again, so that the secret which it contained should remain unknown. Taking the folded card in his hand, he went to the table. He had then to pronounce clearly the name of a toy and present the card to the directress in order that she might verify the word he had spoken. The little card thus became current coin with which he might acquire the toy he had named. For, if he pronounced the word clearly and indicated the correct object, the directress allowed him to take the toy, and to play with it as long as he wished.
One of our most exciting discoveries happened when we tried to create a game that would help kids learn to read words effortlessly. We laid out a variety of toys on one of the big tables. Each toy had a matching card with its name written on it. We folded these cards and mixed them up in a basket, allowing the children who knew how to read to take turns drawing cards from it. Each child had to bring their card back to their desk, unfold it quietly, and read it in their head without showing it to anyone nearby. Then, they had to fold it back up to keep its contents a secret. Holding the folded card, they went to the table. They needed to clearly say the name of a toy and show the card to the teacher so she could confirm the word they said. The little card then became a sort of currency that allowed them to get the toy they named. If they said the word clearly and pointed to the right toy, the teacher let them take it and play with it as long as they liked.
When each child had had a turn, the directress called the first child and let him draw a card from another basket. This card he read as soon as he had drawn it. It contained the name of one of his companions who did not yet know how to read, and for that reason could not have a toy. The child who had read the name then offered to his little friend the toy with which he had been playing. We taught the children to present these toys in a gracious and polite way, accompanying the act with a bow. In this way we did away with every idea of class distinction, and inspired the sentiment of kindness toward those who did not possess the same blessings as ourselves.[Pg 300] This reading game proceeded in a marvellous way. The contentment of these poor children in possessing even for a little while such beautiful toys can be easily imagined.
When each child had their turn, the teacher called the first child and allowed him to draw a card from another basket. He read the card as soon as he pulled it out. It had the name of one of his classmates who didn’t know how to read yet and, for that reason, couldn’t have a toy. The child who read the name then offered his little friend the toy he had been playing with. We taught the children to give these toys in a gracious and polite manner, complete with a bow. This way, we eliminated any thoughts of class distinction and encouraged feelings of kindness towards those who didn’t have the same blessings as we did.[Pg 300] This reading game went wonderfully. One can easily imagine the joy of these less fortunate children as they held such beautiful toys, even for just a little while.
But what was my amazement, when the children, having learned to understand the written cards, refused to take the toys! They explained that they did not wish to waste time in playing, and, with a species of insatiable desire, preferred to draw out and read the cards one after another!
But I was so amazed when the children, after learning to read the written cards, refused to take the toys! They explained that they didn’t want to waste time playing and, with an insatiable curiosity, preferred to pull out and read the cards one after another!
I watched them, seeking to understand the secret of these souls, of whose greatness I had been so ignorant! As I stood in meditation among the eager children, the discovery that it was knowledge they loved, and not the silly game, filled me with wonder and made me think of the greatness of the human soul!
I watched them, trying to understand the secret of these souls, of whose greatness I had been so unaware! As I stood in reflection among the eager kids, I discovered that it was knowledge they loved, not the silly game, and it filled me with wonder and made me think about the greatness of the human soul!
We therefore put away the toys, and set about making hundreds of written slips, containing names of children, cities, and objects; and also of colours and qualities known through the sense exercises. We placed these slips in open boxes, which we left where the children could make free use of them. I expected that childish inconstancy would at least show itself in a tendency to pass from one box to another; but no, each child finished emptying the box under his hand before passing to another, being verily insatiable in the desire to read.
We put away the toys and started creating hundreds of written slips with the names of children, cities, objects, and also with colors and qualities learned through sensory exercises. We placed these slips in open boxes, leaving them in a spot where the kids could easily access them. I thought that their childish inconsistency would at least lead to a tendency to move from one box to another; but no, each child completely emptied the box in front of them before moving on to the next one, being truly insatiable in their desire to read.
Coming into the school one day, I found that the directress had allowed the children to take the tables and chairs out upon the terrace, and was having school in the open air. A number of little ones were playing in the sun, while others were seated in a circle about the tables containing the sandpaper letters and the movable alphabet.
Walking into the school one day, I saw that the principal had let the kids take the tables and chairs out onto the terrace, and they were having class outside. Some little ones were playing in the sun, while others sat in a circle around the tables with the sandpaper letters and the movable alphabet.
A little apart sat the directress, holding upon her lap[Pg 301] a long narrow box full of written slips, and all along the edge of her box were little hands, fishing for the beloved cards. "You may not believe me," said the directress, "but it is more than an hour since we began this, and they are not satisfied yet!" We tried the experiment of bringing balls, and dolls to the children, but without result; such futilities had no power beside the joys of knowledge.
A little apart sat the director, holding in her lap[Pg 301] a long narrow box filled with written slips, and all along the edge of her box were little hands reaching for the cherished cards. "You may not believe me," said the director, "but it's been over an hour since we started this, and they're still not satisfied!" We tried bringing balls and dolls to the kids, but it didn’t work; those distractions couldn’t compare to the joys of knowledge.
Seeing these surprising results, I had already thought of testing the children with print, and had suggested that the directress print the word under the written word upon a number of slips. But the children forestalled us! There was in the hall a calendar upon which many of the words were printed in clear type, while others were done in Gothic characters. In their mania for reading the children began to look at this calendar, and, to my inexpressible amazement, read not only the print, but the Gothic script.
Seeing these surprising results, I had already thought about testing the kids with print and had suggested that the teacher print the word underneath the written word on several slips. But the kids beat us to it! There was a calendar in the hall with many words printed in clear type, while others were in Gothic characters. In their excitement for reading, the kids started looking at this calendar, and, to my absolute astonishment, read not only the print but also the Gothic script.
There therefore remained nothing but the presentation of a book, and I did not feel that any of those available were suited to our method.
There was nothing left but to present a book, and I didn’t think any of the ones available matched our approach.
The mothers soon had proofs of the progress of their children; finding in the pockets of some of them little slips of paper upon which were written rough notes of marketing done; bread, salt, etc. Our children were making lists of the marketing they did for their mothers! Other mothers told us that their children no longer ran through the streets, but stopped to read the signs over the shops.
The mothers quickly saw evidence of their children's progress; they found little slips of paper in some of their pockets with rough notes on the groceries they bought—bread, salt, and more. Our kids were making lists of the shopping they did for their moms! Other mothers shared that their children no longer raced through the streets but paused to read the signs above the stores.
A four-year-old boy, educated in a private house by the same method, surprised us in the following way. The child's father was a Deputy, and received many letters. He knew that his son had for two months been taught by means of exercises apt to facilitate the learning of read[Pg 302]ing and writing, but he had paid slight attention to it, and, indeed, put little faith in the method. One day, as he sat reading, with the boy playing near, a servant entered, and placed upon the table a large number of letters that had just arrived. The little boy turned his attention to these, and holding up each letter read aloud the address. To his father this seemed a veritable miracle.
A four-year-old boy, taught at home using the same method, surprised us in the following way. The child's father was a Deputy and received many letters. He knew that his son had been learning to read and write through specific exercises for two months, but he had paid little attention to it and didn’t really believe in the method. One day, while he was reading and the boy was playing nearby, a servant came in and placed a large stack of letters on the table that had just arrived. The little boy focused on these letters and, holding each one up, read the address out loud. To his father, this felt like a true miracle.
As to the average time required for learning to read and write, experience would seem to show that, starting from the moment in which the child writes, the passage from such an inferior stage of the graphic language to the superior state of reading averages a fortnight. Security in reading is, however, arrived at much more slowly than perfection in writing. In the greater majority of cases the child who writes beautifully, still reads rather poorly.
As for how long it usually takes to learn to read and write, experience indicates that once a child starts writing, it typically takes about two weeks to move from a basic level of understanding the written language to a more advanced level of reading. However, getting comfortable with reading takes significantly longer than achieving great writing skills. In most cases, a child who writes beautifully still struggles with reading.
Not all children of the same age are at the same point in this matter of reading and writing. We not only do not force a child, but we do not even invite him, or in any way attempt to coax him to do that which he does not wish to do. So it sometimes happens that certain children, not having spontaneously presented themselves for these lessons, are left in peace, and do not know how to read or write.
Not all kids the same age are at the same level when it comes to reading and writing. We not only don’t force a child, but we also don’t even invite them, or try in any way to persuade them to do something they’re not interested in. So sometimes, certain kids, not having spontaneously offered themselves for these lessons, are left alone and don’t know how to read or write.
If the old-time method, which tyrannized over the will of the child and destroyed his spontaneity, does not believe in making a knowledge of written language obligatory before the age of six, much less do we!
If the old-fashioned way, which oppressed the child's will and stifled their spontaneity, doesn't insist on making written language knowledge mandatory before the age of six, then neither do we!
I am not ready to decide, without a wider experience, whether the period when the spoken language is fully developed is, in every case, the proper time for beginning to develop the written language.
I’m not ready to make a decision, without broader experience, whether the time when spoken language is fully developed is always the right moment to start developing written language.
In any case, almost all of the normal children treated[Pg 303] with our method begin to write at four years, and at five know how to read and write, at least as well as children who have finished the first elementary. They could enter the second elementary a year in advance of the time when they are admitted to first.
In any case, nearly all the typical children treated[Pg 303] with our method start writing at four years old, and by five, they can read and write at least as well as kids who have completed the first grade. They could start second grade a year earlier than when they’re usually admitted to first grade.
Games for the Reading of Phrases. As soon as my friends saw that the children could read print, they made me gifts of beautifully illustrated books. Looking through these books of simple fairy lore, I felt sure that the children would not be able to understand them. The teachers, feeling entirely satisfied as to the ability of their pupils, tried to show me I was wrong, having different children read to me, and saying that they read much more perfectly than the children who had finished the second elementary.
Games for the Reading of Phrases. As soon as my friends noticed that the kids could read print, they gifted me beautifully illustrated books. While flipping through these books filled with simple fairy tales, I was convinced that the kids wouldn’t be able to grasp them. The teachers, completely confident in their students’ abilities, tried to prove me wrong by having different kids read to me and claiming that they read far better than those who had completed the second grade.
I did not, however, allow myself to be deceived, and made two trials. I first had the teacher tell one of the stories to the children while I observed to what extent they were spontaneously interested in it. The attention of the children wandered after a few words. I had forbidden the teacher to recall to order those who did not listen, and thus, little by little, a hum arose in the schoolroom, due to the fact that each child, not caring to listen had returned to his usual occupation.
I didn't let myself be fooled, so I did two tests. First, I had the teacher tell one of the stories to the kids while I watched how much they were naturally interested. Their attention drifted after just a few words. I had forbidden the teacher from calling out those who weren't paying attention, and slowly, a low chatter began in the classroom, as each child, not wanting to listen, went back to their usual occupation.
It was evident that the children, who seemed to read these books with such pleasure, did not take pleasure in the sense, but enjoyed the mechanical ability they had acquired, which consisted in translating the graphic signs into the sounds of a word they recognised. And, indeed, the children did not display the same constancy in the reading of books which they showed toward the written slips, since in the books they met with so many unfamiliar words.[Pg 304]
It was clear that the kids, who seemed to enjoy reading these books so much, weren't actually enjoying the meaning, but were instead thrilled by the skill they had developed, which involved turning the written symbols into the sounds of words they recognized. In fact, the kids didn’t show the same consistency in reading books as they did with the short written notes, since the books contained so many unfamiliar words.[Pg 304]
My second test, was to have one of the children read the book to me. I did not interrupt with any of those explanatory remarks by means of which a teacher tries to help the child follow the thread of the story he is reading, saying for example: "Stop a minute. Do you understand? What have you read? You told me how the little boy went to drive in a big carriage, didn't you? Pay attention to what the book says, etc."
My second test was to have one of the kids read the book to me. I didn't interrupt with any of those explanatory comments that teachers use to help kids follow the story, like saying, "Hold on for a second. Do you get it? What did you just read? You told me how the little boy went to ride in a big carriage, right? Focus on what the book says, etc."
I gave the book to a little boy, sat down beside him in a friendly fashion, and when he had read I asked him simply and seriously as one would speak to a friend, "Did you understand what you were reading?" He replied: "No." But the expression of his face seemed to ask an explanation of my demand. In fact, the idea that through the reading of a series of words the complex thoughts of others might be communicated to us, was to be for my children one of the beautiful conquests of the future, a new source of surprise and joy.
I gave the book to a little boy, sat down next to him in a friendly way, and after he read, I simply and seriously asked him, like I would to a friend, "Did you understand what you were reading?" He replied, "No." But the look on his face seemed to ask for an explanation of my question. In fact, the idea that by reading a series of words, we could learn the complex thoughts of others would be one of the beautiful achievements for my children in the future, a new source of wonder and joy.
The book has recourse to logical language, not to the mechanism of the language. Before the child can understand and enjoy a book, the logical language must be established in him. Between knowing how to read the words, and how to read the sense, of a book there lies the same distance that exists between knowing how to pronounce a word and how to make a speech. I, therefore, stopped the reading from books and waited.
The book relies on logical language, not just the mechanics of language. Before a child can understand and enjoy a book, they need to have logical language developed within them. The gap between knowing how to read the words and how to grasp the sense of a book is the same as the difference between knowing how to say a word and how to deliver a speech. So, I decided to pause the reading from books and wait.
One day, during a free conversation period, four children arose at the same time and with expressions of joy on their faces ran to the blackboard and wrote phrases upon the order of the following:
One day, during a free conversation period, four children got up at the same time and, with joyful expressions on their faces, raced to the blackboard and wrote phrases like the following:
"Oh, how glad we are that our garden has begun to bloom." It was a great surprise for me, and I was deeply moved. These children had arrived spontaneously at the[Pg 305] art of composition, just as they had spontaneously written their first word.
"Oh, how happy we are that our garden has started to bloom." It was such a surprise for me, and I was really touched. These kids had naturally come to the[Pg 305] art of composition, just like they had naturally written their first word.
The mechanical preparation was the same, and the phenomenon developed logically. Logical articulate language had, when the time was ripe, provoked the corresponding explosion in written language.
The mechanical preparation was the same, and the phenomenon developed logically. Well-structured language had, when the time was right, triggered the corresponding explosion in written language.
I understood that the time had come when we might proceed to the reading of phrases. I had recourse to the means used by the children; that is, I wrote upon the blackboard, "Do you love me?" The children read it slowly aloud, were silent for a moment as if thinking, then cried out, "Yes! Yes!" I continued to write; "Then make the silence, and watch me." They read this aloud, almost shouting, but had barely finished when a solemn silence began to establish itself, interrupted only by the sounds of the chairs as the children took positions in which they could sit quietly. Thus began between me and them a communication by means of written language, a thing which interested the children intensely. Little by little, they discovered the great quality of writing—that it transmits thought. Whenever I began to write, they fairly trembled in their eagerness to understand what was my meaning without hearing me speak a word.
I realized that it was time for us to move on to the reading of phrases. I used the method that the kids used; I wrote on the blackboard, "Do you love me?" The kids read it out loud slowly, paused for a moment as if thinking, then shouted, "Yes! Yes!" I kept writing; "Then be silent and watch me." They read this out loud, almost yelling, but had barely finished when a serious silence began to settle in, broken only by the sound of chairs as the kids got into positions to sit quietly. This started a communication between me and them through written language, which fascinated the kids. Bit by bit, they discovered the amazing power of writing—that it conveys thoughts. Whenever I began to write, they practically trembled with excitement to grasp my meaning without me saying a single word.
Indeed, graphic language does not need spoken words. It can only be understood in all its greatness when it is completely isolated from spoken language.
Indeed, graphic language doesn't require spoken words. It can only be fully appreciated in all its depth when it's completely separate from spoken language.
This introduction to reading was followed by the following game, which is greatly enjoyed by the children. Upon a number of cards I wrote long sentences describing certain actions which the children were to carry out; for example, "Close the window blinds; open the front door; then wait a moment, and arrange things as they were at first." "Very politely ask eight of your com[Pg 306]panions to leave their chairs, and to form in double file in the centre of the room, then have them march forward and back on tiptoe, making no noise." "Ask three of your oldest companions who sing nicely, if they will please come into the centre of the room. Arrange them in a nice row, and sing with them a song that you have selected," etc., etc. As soon as I finished writing, the children seized the cards, and taking them to their seats read them spontaneously with great intensity of attention, and all amid the most complete silence.
This introduction to reading was followed by a game that the children really enjoyed. I wrote a series of long sentences on several cards describing actions for the kids to perform; for example, "Close the window blinds; open the front door; then wait a moment, and put everything back the way it was." "Very politely ask eight of your classmates to leave their chairs and line up in two lines in the center of the room, then have them tiptoe forward and backward quietly." "Ask three of your oldest friends who sing well if they would please come to the center of the room. Arrange them in a nice row, and sing a song of your choice with them," etc., etc. As soon as I finished writing, the children grabbed the cards and took them to their seats, reading them intensely and with complete focus, all in absolute silence.
I asked then, "Do you understand?" "Yes! Yes!" "Then do what the card tells you," said I, and was delighted to see the children rapidly and accurately follow the chosen action. A great activity, a movement of a new sort, was born in the room. There were those who closed the blinds, and then reopened them; others who made their companions run on tiptoe, or sing; others wrote upon the blackboard, or took certain objects from the cupboards. Surprise and curiosity produced a general silence, and the lesson developed amid the most intense interest. It seemed as if some magic force had gone forth from me stimulating an activity hitherto unknown. This magic was graphic language, the greatest conquest of civilisation.
I asked, "Do you understand?" "Yes! Yes!" "Then do what the card says," I said, and I was thrilled to see the kids quickly and accurately do the action chosen. A great new activity was sparked in the room. Some closed the blinds and then reopened them; others had their friends tiptoe or sing; some wrote on the blackboard or took specific objects from the cupboards. Surprise and curiosity created a focused silence, and the lesson unfolded with intense interest. It felt like some magical force had come from me, triggering a new kind of activity. This magic was graphic language, the greatest achievement of civilization.
And how deeply the children understood the importance of it! When I went out, they gathered about me with expressions of gratitude and affection, saying, "Thank you! Thank you! Thank you for the lesson!"
And how much the kids understood its importance! When I went out, they surrounded me with looks of thanks and love, saying, "Thank you! Thank you! Thank you for the lesson!"
This has become one of the favourite games: We first establish profound silence, then present a basket containing folded slips, upon each one of which is written a long phrase describing an action. All those children who know how to read may draw a slip, and read it mentally[Pg 307] once or twice until they are certain they understand it. They then give the slip back to the directress and set about carrying out the action. Since many of these actions call for the help of the other children who do not know how to read, and since many of them call for the handling and use of the materials, a general activity develops amid marvellous order, while the silence is only interrupted by the sound of little feet running lightly, and by the voices of the children who sing. This is an unexpected revelation of the perfection of spontaneous discipline.
This has become one of the favorite games: First, we create absolute silence, then present a basket filled with folded slips of paper, each with a long phrase describing an action. All the children who can read can pick a slip and read it silently[Pg 307] once or twice until they’re sure they understand it. They then return the slip to the teacher and begin to carry out the action. Since many of these actions require help from other children who can’t read, and since many involve handling the materials, a lively activity unfolds in the midst of amazing order, while the silence is only broken by the sound of little feet running lightly and the voices of children singing. This is an incredible demonstration of the power of spontaneous discipline.
Experience has shown us that composition must precede logical reading, as writing preceded the reading of the word. It has also shown that reading, if it is to teach the child to receive an idea, should be mental and not vocal.
Experience has shown us that composition must come before logical reading, just as writing came before reading the word. It has also shown that reading, in order to teach the child to understand an idea, should be mental and not vocal.
Reading aloud implies the exercise of two mechanical forms of the language—articulate and graphic—and is, therefore, a complex task. Who does not know that a grown person who is to read a paper in public prepares for this by making himself master of the content? Reading aloud is one of the most difficult intellectual actions. The child, therefore, who begins to read by interpreting thought should read mentally. The written language must isolate itself from the articulate, when it rises to the interpretation of logical thought. Indeed, it represents the language which transmits thought at a distance, while the senses and the muscular mechanism are silent. It is a spiritualised language, which puts into communication all men who know how to read.
Reading aloud involves two mechanical aspects of language—spoken and written—and is, therefore, a complex task. Everyone knows that an adult who is going to read a paper in public prepares by mastering the content first. Reading aloud is one of the most challenging intellectual activities. Thus, a child who begins to read by interpreting ideas should read mentally. The written language must separate itself from the spoken when it comes to understanding logical thought. In fact, it represents the language that transmits thought at a distance, while the senses and the muscular mechanism remain silent. It is a spiritualized language that connects all individuals who know how to read.
Education having reached such a point in the "Children's Houses," the entire elementary school must, as a logical consequence, be changed. How to reform the lower grades in the elementary schools, eventually carrying[Pg 308] them on according to our methods, is a great question which cannot be discussed here. I can only say that the first elementary would be completely done away with by our infant education, which includes it.
Education has progressed significantly in the "Children's Houses," so it's only logical that the entire elementary school needs to change. Figuring out how to update the lower grades in elementary schools and implement our methods is a big issue that can't be covered here. All I can say is that our approach to early childhood education would completely replace the first elementary.
The elementary classes in the future should begin with children such as ours who know how to read and write; children who know how to take care of themselves; how to dress and undress, and to wash themselves; children who are familiar with the rules of good conduct and courtesy, and who are thoroughly disciplined in the highest sense of the term, having developed, and become masters of themselves, through liberty; children who possess, besides a perfect mastery of the articulate language, the ability to read written language in an elementary way, and who begin to enter upon the conquest of logical language.
The elementary classes in the future should start with kids like ours who can read and write; kids who know how to take care of themselves, how to dress and undress, and how to wash themselves; kids who understand the rules of good behavior and courtesy, and who are well-disciplined in the best sense of the word, having developed and gained self-mastery through freedom; kids who not only have a full command of spoken language but also have basic reading skills and are starting to grasp logical thinking.
These children pronounce clearly, write in a firm hand, and are full of grace in their movements. They are the earnest of a humanity grown in the cult of beauty—the infancy of an all-conquering humanity, since they are intelligent and patient observers of their environment, and possess in the form of intellectual liberty the power of spontaneous reasoning.
These kids speak clearly, write neatly, and move gracefully. They represent a humanity raised in the appreciation of beauty—the beginnings of a strong humanity, as they are smart and patient observers of their surroundings, and have the ability to think freely and reason spontaneously.
For such children, we should found an elementary school worthy to receive them and to guide them further along the path of life and of civilisation, a school loyal to the same educational principles of respect for the freedom of the child and for his spontaneous manifestations—principles which shall form the personality of these little men.[Pg 309]
For these children, we should create an elementary school that is truly deserving of them and that will help guide them on their journey through life and civilization. This school should be committed to the same educational principles that respect the freedom of the child and their natural expressions—principles that will shape the personalities of these young individuals.[Pg 309]

Translation: "We would like to wish a joyous Easter to the civil engineer Edoardo Talamo and the Princess Maria. We will ask them to bring their pretty children here. Leave it to me: I will write for all. April 7, 1909."
"We want to wish a happy Easter to civil engineer Edoardo Talamo and Princess Maria. We'll ask them to bring their lovely kids here. Just leave it to me: I'll write for everyone. April 7, 1909."
CHAPTER XVIII
Childhood Language
Graphic language, comprising dictation and reading, contains articulate language in its complete mechanism (auditory channels, central channels, motor channels), and, in the manner of development called forth by my method, is based essentially on articulate language.
Graphic language, which includes writing and reading, features articulate language in its entirety (auditory channels, central channels, motor channels), and, according to the development process my method encourages, is fundamentally rooted in articulate language.
Graphic language, therefore, may be considered from two points of view:
Graphic language, then, can be looked at from two perspectives:
(a) That of the conquest of a new language of eminent social importance which adds itself to the articulate language of natural man; and this is the cultural significance which is commonly given to graphic language, which is therefore taught in the schools without any consideration of its relation to spoken language, but solely with the intention of offering to the social being a necessary instrument in his relations with his fellows.
(a) The conquest of a new language that holds significant social importance, which complements the natural language of humanity; this cultural significance is what we usually attribute to written language. As a result, it's taught in schools without considering how it relates to spoken language, but purely to provide individuals with a necessary tool for interacting with others in society.
(b) That of the relation between graphic and articulate language and, in this relation, of an eventual possibility of utilising the written language to perfect the spoken: a new consideration upon which I wish to insist and which gives to graphic language a physiological importance.
(b) That of the relationship between written and spoken language, and in this context, the potential to use written language to improve the spoken: a new perspective that I want to emphasize, which gives written language a physiological significance.
Moreover, as spoken language is at the same time a natural function of man and an instrument which he utilises for social ends, so written language may be considered in itself, in its formation, as an organic ensemble[Pg 311] of new mechanisms which are established in the nervous system, and as an instrument which may be utilised for social ends.
Moreover, since spoken language is both a natural function of humans and a tool for social purposes, written language can also be viewed in its formation as an organic ensemble[Pg 311] of new mechanisms that develop in the nervous system, and as a tool that can be used for social purposes.
In short, it is a question of giving to written language not only a physiological importance, but also a period of development independent of the high functions which it is destined to perform later.
In short, it's about assigning written language not just a physiological significance, but also a developmental phase that is separate from the advanced functions it will eventually serve.
It seems to me that graphic language bristles with difficulties in its beginning, not only because it has heretofore been taught by irrational methods, but because we have tried to make it perform, as soon as it has been acquired, the high function of teaching the written language which has been fixed by centuries of perfecting in a civilised people.
It seems to me that graphic language is full of challenges at the start, not only because it's been taught using flawed methods, but also because we expect it to immediately take on the important role of teaching the written language, which has been refined over centuries in a civilized society.
Think how irrational have been the methods we have used! We have analysed the graphic signs rather than the physiological acts necessary to produce the alphabetical signs; and this without considering that any graphic sign is difficult to achieve, because the visual representation of the signs have no hereditary connection with the motor representations necessary for producing them; as, for example, the auditory representations of the word have with the motor mechanism of the articulate language. It is, therefore, always a difficult thing to provoke a stimulative motor action unless we have already established the movement before the visual representation of the sign is made. It is a difficult thing to arouse an activity that shall produce a motion unless that motion shall have been previously established by practice and by the power of habit.
Think about how irrational our methods have been! We've focused on the graphic signs instead of the physical actions needed to create the letters. We overlooked the fact that any graphic sign is hard to produce because the visual representation of the signs has no inherited link to the physical actions needed to make them; just like the way auditory representations of words are connected to the physical mechanisms of spoken language. Therefore, it's always challenging to trigger a motor action unless we've already practiced the movement before creating the visual representation of the sign. It's tough to stimulate an activity that results in motion unless that motion has been previously established through practice and habit.
Thus, for example, the analysis of writing into little straight lines and curves has brought us to present to the child a sign without significance, which therefore does[Pg 312] not interest him, and whose representation is incapable of determining a spontaneous motor impulse. The artificial act constituted, therefore, an effort of the will which resulted for the child in rapid exhaustion exhibited in the form of boredom and suffering. To this effort was added the effort of constituting synchronously the muscular associations co-ordinating the movements necessary to the holding and manipulating the instrument of writing.
Thus, for example, analyzing writing into little straight lines and curves has led us to present a sign without meaning to the child, which does[Pg 312] not engage him, and whose representation cannot trigger a natural motor response. This artificial act, therefore, required an effort of the will that resulted in the child quickly feeling exhausted, which showed itself as boredom and frustration. To this effort was added the challenge of simultaneously creating the muscular connections needed to hold and manipulate the writing instrument.
All sorts of depressing feelings accompanied such efforts and conduced to the production of imperfect and erroneous signs which the teachers had to correct, discouraging the child still more with the constant criticism of the error and of the imperfection of the signs traced. Thus, while the child was urged to make an effort, the teacher depressed rather than revived his psychical forces.
All kinds of depressing feelings came with these efforts and led to the creation of incomplete and incorrect signs that the teachers had to fix, discouraging the child even more with the constant criticism of mistakes and the flaws in their work. So, while the child was pushed to try harder, the teacher actually drained their mental energy instead of uplifting it.
Although such a mistaken course was followed, the graphic language, so painfully learned, was nevertheless to be immediately utilised for social ends; and, still imperfect and immature, was made to do service in the syntactical construction of the language, and in the ideal expression of the superior psychic centres. One must remember that in nature the spoken language is formed gradually; and it is already established in words when the superior psychic centres use these words in what Kussmaul calls dictorium, in the syntactical grammatical formation of language which is necessary to the expression of complex ideas; that is, in the language of the logical mind.
Although this mistaken path was taken, the graphic language, which was learned so painfully, was still going to be immediately used for social purposes; and, though still imperfect and underdeveloped, it was put to work in the syntactical construction of the language and in expressing the higher mental functions. It’s important to remember that in nature, spoken language develops gradually; it’s already formed in words when the higher mental functions use these words in what Kussmaul calls dictorium, in the syntactical grammatical formation of language that’s necessary for expressing complex ideas; that is, in the language of the logical mind.
In short the mechanism of language is a necessary antecedent of the higher psychic activities which are to utilise it.
In short, the way language works is a necessary precursor to the higher mental activities that are meant to use it.

There are, therefore, two periods in the development of language: a lower one which prepares the nervous[Pg 313] channel and the central mechanisms which are to put the sensory channels in relation with the motor channels; and a higher one determined by the higher psychic activities which are exteriorized by means of the preformed mechanisms of language.
There are, therefore, two stages in the development of language: a basic stage that prepares the nervous[Pg 313] system and the central processes that connect the sensory systems with the motor systems; and a more advanced stage shaped by higher mental activities that are expressed through the established mechanisms of language.

Thus for example in the scheme which Kussmaul gives on the mechanism of articulate language we must first of all distinguish a sort of cerebral diastaltic arc (representing the pure mechanism of the word), which is established in the first formation of the spoken language. Let E be the ear, and T the motor organs of speech, taken as a whole and here represented by the tongue, A the auditory centre of speech, and M the motor centre. The channels EA and MT are peripheral channels, the former centripetal and the latter centrifugal, and the channel AM is the inter-central channel of association.
Thus, for instance, in the framework that Kussmaul presents on how articulate language works, we must first distinguish a kind of cerebral diastaltic arc (which represents the pure mechanism of the word) that develops in the initial formation of spoken language. Let E represent the ear, and T represent the speech motor organs, which here include the tongue. A is the auditory center for speech, and M is the motor center. The channels EA and MT are peripheral channels, with the former being centripetal and the latter centrifugal, and the channel AM is the inter-central association channel.
The centre A in which reside the auditive images of words may be again subdivided into three, as in the following scheme, viz.: Sound (So), syllables (Sy), and words (W).
The center A where the sound images of words exist can be further divided into three parts, as shown in the following scheme: Sound (So), syllables (Sy), and words (W).
That partial centres for sounds and syllables can really be formed, the pathology of language seems to establish, for in some forms of centro-sensory dysphasia, the patients can pronounce only sounds, or at most sounds and syllables.
That partial centers for sounds and syllables can actually be formed, the pathology of language seems to confirm, because in some cases of centro-sensory dysphasia, patients can only pronounce sounds, or at most, sounds and syllables.
Small children, too, are, at the beginning, particularly sensitive to simple sounds of language, with which indeed, and especially with s, their mothers caress them and attract their attention; while later the child is sensitive to[Pg 314] syllables, with which also the mother caresses him, saying: "ba, ba, punf, tuf!"
Small children are really sensitive to basic sounds of language at first. Their mothers use these sounds, especially the s, to soothe and grab their attention. Later on, the child becomes aware of[Pg 314] syllables, which the mother also uses to comfort him, saying: "ba, ba, punf, tuf!"

Finally it is the simple word, dissyllabic in most cases, which attracts the child's attention.
Finally, it’s the simple word, usually made up of two syllables, that grabs the child's attention.
But for the motor centres also the same thing may be repeated; the child utters at the beginning simple or double sounds, as for example bl, gl, ch, an expression which the mother greets with joy; then distinctly syllabic sounds begin to manifest themselves in the child: ga, ba; and, finally, the dissyllabic word, usually labial: mama.
But the same applies to the motor centers; at first, the child makes simple or double sounds, like bl, gl, and ch, which the mother responds to with joy. Then, the child starts to produce clearer syllabic sounds like ga and ba; finally, the child says their first disyllabic word, usually a labial one: mama.

We say that the spoken language begins with the child when the word pronounced by him signifies an idea; when for example, seeing his mother and recognising her he says "mamma;" and seeing a dog says, "tettè;" and wishing to eat says: "pappa."
We say that a child starts using spoken language when the words they say represent an idea; for example, when they see their mother and recognize her, they say "mamma;" when they see a dog, they say "tettè;" and when they want to eat, they say "pappa."
Thus we consider language begun when it is established in relation to perception; while the language itself is still, in its psycho-motor mechanism, perfectly rudimentary.
Thus we consider language begun when it is established in relation to perception; while the language itself is still, in its psycho-motor mechanism, completely basic.
That is, when above the diastaltic arc where the mechanical formation of the language is still unconscious, the recognition of the word takes place, that is, the word is perceived and associated with the object which it represents, language is considered to have begun.
That is, when above the diastaltic arc where the mechanical formation of language is still unconscious, the recognition of the word occurs, meaning the word is perceived and linked to the object it represents, language is thought to have begun.
On this level, later, language continues the process of perfecting in proportion as the hearing perceives better the component sounds of the words and the psycho-motor channels become more permeable to articulation.[Pg 315]
On this level, later, language continues to improve as the listener better perceives the individual sounds of the words and the mental and physical pathways become easier to articulate.[Pg 315]
This is the first stage of spoken language, which has its own beginning and its own development, leading, through the perceptions, to the perfecting of the primordial mechanism of the language itself; and at this stage precisely is established what we call articulate language, which will later be the means which the adult will have at his disposal to express his own thoughts, and which the adult will have great difficulty in perfecting or correcting when it has once been established: in fact a high stage of culture sometimes accompanies an imperfect articulate language which prevents the æsthetic expression of one's thought.
This is the first stage of spoken language, which has its own beginning and development, leading, through our perceptions, to the *perfecting* of the basic mechanism of language itself. It is at this stage that what we call *articulate language* is established, which later becomes the tool for adults to express their thoughts. Once established, adults often find it very challenging to refine or correct this language. In fact, a high level of culture can sometimes coexist with an imperfect articulate language that hinders the aesthetic expression of one's thoughts.
The development of articulate language takes place in the period between the age of two and the age of seven: the age of perceptions in which the attention of the child is spontaneously turned towards external objects, and the memory is particularly tenacious. It is the age also of motility in which all the psycho-motor channels are becoming permeable and the muscular mechanisms establish themselves. In this period of life by the mysterious bond between the auditory channel and the motor channel of the spoken language it would seem that the auditory perceptions have the direct power of provoking the complicated movements of articulate speech which develop instinctively after such stimuli as if awaking from the slumber of heredity. It is well known that it is only at this age that it is possible to acquire all the characteristic modulations of a language which it would be vain to attempt to establish later. The mother tongue alone is well pronounced because it was established in the period of childhood; and the adult who learns to speak a new language must bring to it the imperfections characteristic of the foreigner's speech: only children who under the[Pg 316] age of seven years learn several languages at the same time can receive and reproduce all the characteristic mannerisms of accent and pronunciation.
The development of clear language happens between the ages of two and seven: the age of perceptions, when a child's attention is naturally focused on outside objects, and their memory is particularly strong. It's also the age of motility, where all the psycho-motor pathways are becoming active and the muscular mechanisms are forming. During this time, there seems to be a mysterious connection between the auditory and motor channels of spoken language, allowing auditory perceptions to directly trigger the complex movements involved in clear speech that develop instinctively from such stimuli, as if awakening from the slumber of heredity. It’s well-known that only at this age can one acquire all the distinctive tones of a language, which would be futile to try to establish later on. The mother tongue is pronounced well because it’s learned in childhood; meanwhile, an adult learning a new language will have the typical flaws of a non-native speaker. Only children under the[Pg 316] age of seven who learn multiple languages at the same time can fully absorb and replicate all the unique accents and pronunciations.
Thus also the defects acquired in childhood such as dialectic defects or those established by bad habits, become indelible in the adult.
Thus, the defects developed in childhood, such as speech issues or those formed by bad habits, become permanent in adulthood.
What develops later, the superior language, the dictorium, no longer has its origin in the mechanism of language but in the intellectual development which makes use of the mechanical language. As the articulate language develops by the exercise of its mechanism and is enriched by perception, the dictorium develops with syntax and is enriched by intellectual culture. Going back to the scheme of language we see that above the arc which defines the lower language, is established the dictorium, D,—from which now come the motor impulses of speech—which is established as spoken language fit to manifest the ideation of the intelligent man; this language will be enriched little by little by intellectual culture and perfected by the grammatical study of syntax.
What develops later, the superior language, the dictorium, no longer originates from the mechanics of language but from the intellectual growth that utilizes the mechanical language. As the articulated language evolves through the practice of its mechanics and is enriched by perception, the dictorium evolves with syntax and is enhanced by intellectual culture. Looking back at the structure of language, we see that above the curve that defines the lower language lies the dictorium, D—from which the driving impulses of speech emerge—which is established as spoken language capable of expressing the thoughts of an intelligent person; this language will gradually be enriched by intellectual culture and refined through the grammatical study of syntax.

Hitherto, as a result of a preconception, it has been believed that written language should enter only into the development of the dictorium, as the suitable means for the acquisition of culture and of permitting grammatical analysis and construction of the language. Since "spoken words have wings" it has been admitted that intellectual culture could only proceed by the aid of a language which was stable, objective, and capable of being analysed, such as the graphic language.[Pg 317]
Up until now, due to a preconceived notion, people have thought that written language should only contribute to the development of the dictorium, as the right way to gain culture and to allow for grammatical analysis and construction of language. Since "spoken words have wings," it's been accepted that intellectual culture can only progress with a language that is stable, objective, and capable of being analyzed, like written language.[Pg 317]
But why, when we acknowledge the graphic language as a precious, nay indispensable, instrument of intellectual education, for the reason that it fixes the ideas of men and permits of their analysis and of their assimilation in books, where they remain indelibly written as an ineffaceable memory of words which are therefore always present and by which we can analyse the syntactical structure of the language, why shall we not acknowledge that it is useful in the more humble task of fixing the words which represent perception and of analysing their component sounds?
But why, when we recognize graphic language as a valuable, even essential, tool for intellectual growth, since it captures ideas and allows us to analyze and absorb them in books, where they are permanently recorded as an unforgettable memory of words that are always present, enabling us to analyze the structure of the language, why shouldn’t we also acknowledge that it is helpful in the simpler task of capturing the words that represent our perceptions and breaking down their individual sounds?
Compelled by a pedagogical prejudice we are unable to separate the idea of a graphic language from that of a function which heretofore we have made it exclusively perform; and it seems to us that by teaching such a language to children still in the age of simple perceptions and of motility we are committing a serious psychological and pedagogical error.
Driven by a teaching bias, we can't separate the concept of a visual language from the specific function we've always assigned to it. It appears to us that by introducing this language to children who are still at a stage of basic understanding and physical movement, we're making a significant psychological and educational mistake.
But let us rid ourselves of this prejudice and consider the graphic language in itself, reconstructing its psycho-physiological mechanism. It is far more simple than the psycho-physiological mechanism of the articulate language, and is far more directly accessible to education.
But let's get rid of this bias and look at graphic language on its own, figuring out how it works psychologically and physiologically. It’s much simpler than the psychological and physiological mechanisms of spoken language, and it’s much easier to teach.
Writing especially is surprisingly simple. For let us consider dictated writing: we have a perfect parallel with spoken language since a motor action must correspond with heard speech. Here there does not exist, to be sure, the mysterious hereditary relations between the heard speech and the articulate speech; but the movements of writing are far simpler than those necessary to the spoken word, and are performed by large muscles, all external,[Pg 318] upon which we can directly act, rendering the motor channels permeable, and establishing psycho-muscular mechanisms.
Writing is actually quite straightforward. Let's consider dictated writing: it has a clear parallel with spoken language since a motor action must match with heard speech. While there isn't the mysterious inherited connection between the speech we hear and the speech we articulate, the writing movements are much simpler than those needed for spoken language and are carried out by large external muscles,[Pg 318] which we can directly control, making the motor pathways accessible and forming psycho-muscular mechanisms.
This indeed is what is done by my method, which prepares the movements directly; so that the psycho-motor impulse of the heard speech finds the motor channels already established, and is manifested in the act of writing, like an explosion.
This is exactly what my method does: it directly prepares the movements; so the psycho-motor impulse from the spoken words uses the motor pathways that are already set up, and is expressed in the act of writing, like an explosion.
The real difficulty is in the interpretation of the graphic signs; but we must remember that we are in the age of perceptions, where the sensations and the memory as well as the primitive associations are involved precisely in the characteristic progress of natural development. Moreover our children are already prepared by various exercises of the senses, and by methodical construction of ideas and mental associations to perceive the graphic signs; something like a patrimony of perceptive ideas offers material to the language in the process of development. The child who recognises a triangle and calls it a triangle can recognise a letter s and denominate it by the sound s. This is obvious.
The real challenge lies in the interpretation of graphic signs; but we need to keep in mind that we are in the age of perceptions, where sensations, memories, and even basic associations play a crucial role in the natural progression of development. Additionally, our children are already equipped through various sensory exercises and structured ideas and mental associations to recognize graphic signs. It's like a collection of perceptual ideas that provide the foundation for language as it develops. A child who identifies a triangle and calls it a triangle can also recognize the letter s and refer to it by the sound s. This is clear.
Let us not talk of premature teaching; ridding ourselves of prejudices, let us appeal to experience which shows that in reality children proceed without effort, nay rather with evident manifestations of pleasure to the recognition of graphic signs presented as objects.
Let's not discuss teaching too early; by removing our biases, let's turn to experience, which shows that children actually engage effortlessly, and even with clear signs of enjoyment, in recognizing graphic symbols presented as objects.

And with this premise let us consider the relations between the mechanisms of the two languages.
And with this point in mind, let's look at the connections between the mechanisms of the two languages.
The child of three or four has already long begun his articulate language according to our scheme. But he finds himself in the period in which the mechanism of[Pg 319] articulate language is being perfected; a period contemporary with that in which he is acquiring a content of language along with the patrimony of perception.
The child who is three or four has already started developing his spoken language according to our framework. However, he is in the stage where the mechanism of[Pg 319] articulate language is being perfected; this stage happens at the same time he is learning the meaning of words alongside the inherited perceptions.
The child has perhaps not heard perfectly in all their component parts the words which he pronounces, and, if he has heard them perfectly, they may have been pronounced badly, and consequently have left an erroneous auditory perception. It would be well that the child, by exercising the motor channels of articulate language should establish exactly the movements necessary to a perfect articulation, before the age of easy motor adaptations is passed, and, by the fixation of erroneous mechanisms, the defects become incorrigible.
The child might not have fully heard all the sounds of the words they say, and even if they heard them clearly, those words might have been pronounced incorrectly, leading to a mistaken understanding. It’s important for the child to practice the physical movements needed for clear speech before they outgrow the stage where learning new motor skills is easier, as settling into incorrect habits can make any speech issues impossible to fix.

To this end the analysis of speech is necessary. As when we wish to perfect the language we first start children at composition and then pass to grammatical study; and when we wish to perfect the style we first teach to write grammatically and then come to the analysis of style—so when we wish to perfect the speech it is first necessary that the speech exist, and then it is proper to proceed to its analysis. When, therefore, the child speaks, but before the completion of the development of speech which renders it fixed in mechanisms already established, the speech should be analysed with a view to perfecting it.
To achieve this, analyzing speech is essential. Just as we start teaching children how to compose before moving on to grammar when we want to improve a language, and as we first focus on writing correctly before delving into style when we want to enhance writing, similarly, when we aim to improve speech, it’s crucial that speech already exists before we analyze it. Therefore, when a child speaks, but before speech development has reached a stage where it becomes fixed in established patterns, their speech should be analyzed with the goal of refining it.
Now, as grammar and rhetoric are not possible with the spoken language but demand recourse to the written language which keeps ever before the eye the discourse to be analysed, so it is with speech.
Now, just as grammar and rhetoric can't be applied to spoken language without referring to written language, which constantly presents the discourse to be analyzed, the same goes for speech.
The analysis of the transient is impossible.
The analysis of the transient is impossible.
The language must be materialised and made stable. Hence the necessity of the written word or the word represented by graphic signs.[Pg 320]
The language needs to be put into a tangible form and made consistent. This is why we need the written word or words shown through symbols.[Pg 320]
In the third stage of my method for writing, that is, composition of speech, is included the analysis of the word not only into signs, but into the component sounds; the signs representing its translation. The child, that is, divides the heard word which he perceives integrally as a word, knowing also its meanings, into sounds and syllables.
In the third stage of my writing method, which is the composition of speech, I include the analysis of the word not just into signs, but also into the individual sounds; the signs represent its translation. The child, in other words, divides the word they hear as a whole, understanding its meanings, into sounds and syllables.
Let me call attention to the following diagram which represents the interrelation of the two mechanisms for writing and for articulate speech.
Let me bring your attention to the following diagram that shows the connection between the two mechanisms for writing and speech.

E ear; So auditory centre of sounds; Sy auditory centre of syllables; W auditory centre of word; M motor centre of the articulate speech; T external organs of articulate speech (tongue); H external organs of writing (hand); MC motor centre of writing; VC visual centre of graphic signs; V organ of vision.
E ear; So auditory center for sounds; Sy auditory center for syllables; W auditory center for words; M motor center for speaking; T external organs for speech (tongue); H external organs for writing (hand); MC motor center for writing; VC visual center for graphic signs; V organ of vision.
Whereas in the development of spoken language the sound composing the word might be imperfectly perceived, here in the teaching of the graphic sign corresponding to the sound (which teaching consists in presenting to the child a sandpaper letter, naming it distinctly and making[Pg 321] the child see it and touch it), not only is the perception of the heard sound clearly fixed—separately and clearly—but this perception is associated with two others: the centro-motor perception and the centro-visual perception of the written sign.
Whereas in the development of spoken language the sounds that make up a word might not be fully understood, in teaching the graphic sign that corresponds to that sound (which involves presenting a child with a sandpaper letter, naming it clearly, and having[Pg 321] the child see and touch it), not only is the understanding of the heard sound strongly established—distinctly and clearly—but this understanding is linked to two other perceptions: the motor perception and the visual perception of the written sign.
The triangle VC, MC, So represents the association of three sensations in relation with the analysis of speech.
The triangle VC, MC, So shows the connection between three sensations as they relate to speech analysis.
When the letter is presented to the child and he is made to touch and see it, while it is being named, the centripetal channels ESo; H, MC, So; V, VC, So are acting and when the child is made to name the letter, alone or accompanied by a vowel, the external stimulus acts in V and passes through the channels V, VC, So, M, T; and V, CV, So, Sy, M, T.
When the letter is shown to the child and they are encouraged to touch and see it while it’s being named, the central channels ESo; H, MC, So; V, VC, So are being activated. When the child names the letter, whether alone or with a vowel, the external stimulus works in V and goes through the channels V, VC, So, M, T; and V, CV, So, Sy, M, T.
When these channels of association have been established by presenting visual stimuli in the graphic sign, the corresponding movements of articulate language can be provoked and studied one by one in their defects; while, by maintaining the visual stimulus of the graphic sign which provokes articulation and accompanying it by the auditory stimulus of the corresponding sound uttered by the teacher, their articulation can be perfected; this articulation is by innate conditions connected with the heard speech; that is, in the course of the pronunciation provoked by the visual stimulus, and during the repetition of the relative movements of the organs of language, the auditory stimulus which is introduced into the exercise contributes to the perfecting of the pronunciation of the isolated or syllabic sounds composing the spoken word.
Once these channels of connection are established by showing visual cues in the graphic sign, the related movements of spoken language can be triggered and examined individually for their shortcomings. By keeping the visual cue of the graphic sign that prompts articulation and pairing it with the auditory cue of the corresponding sound pronounced by the teacher, the articulation can be improved. This articulation is naturally linked to heard speech; that is, during the pronunciation prompted by the visual cue and while repeating the related movements of the speech organs, the auditory cue integrated into the exercise helps enhance the pronunciation of the distinct or syllabic sounds that make up the spoken word.
When later the child writes under dictation, translating into signs the sounds of speech, he analyses the heard speech into its sounds, translating them into graphic move[Pg 322]ments through channels already rendered permeable by the corresponding muscular sensations.
When the child later writes by listening and translating the sounds of speech into written symbols, they break down the heard speech into its individual sounds, converting them into graphic representations through pathways that have already been made accessible by the related muscular sensations.
DEFECTS OF LANGUAGE DUE TO LACK OF EDUCATION
Defects and imperfections of language are in part due to organic causes, consisting in malformations or in pathological alterations of the nervous system; but in part they are connected with functional defects acquired in the period of the formation of language and consist in an erratic pronunciation of the component sounds of the spoken word. Such errors are acquired by the child who hears words imperfectly pronounced, or hears bad speech, The dialectic accent enters into this category; but there also enter vicious habits which make the natural defects of the articulate language of childhood persist in the child, or which provoke in him by imitation the defects of language peculiar to the persons who surrounded him in his childhood.
Defects and imperfections in language are partly due to physical causes related to malformations or issues in the nervous system; however, they are also linked to functional problems developed during the language acquisition period, which include inconsistent pronunciation of the sounds in spoken words. These errors can develop in a child who hears words pronounced incorrectly or hears poor speech. Dialectal accents fall into this category, as do bad habits that cause natural speech defects from childhood to linger, or that lead the child to imitate the speech flaws of those around them during their early years.
The normal defects of child language are due to the fact that the complicated muscular agencies of the organs of articulate language do not yet function well and are consequently incapable of reproducing the sound which was the sensory stimulus of a certain innate movement. The association of the movements necessary to the articulation of the spoken words is established little by little. The result is a language made of words with sounds which are imperfect and often lacking (whence incomplete words). Such defects are grouped under the name blæsitas and are especially due to the fact that the child is not yet capable of directing the movements of his tongue. They comprise chiefly: sigmatism or imperfect pronunciation of s; rhotacism or imperfect pronunciation of r; lambdacism or imperfect pronunciation of l; gam[Pg 323]macism or imperfect pronunciation, of g; iotacism, defective pronunciation of the gutturals; mogilalia, imperfect pronunciation of the labials, and according to some authors, as Preyer, mogilalia is made to include also the suppression of the first sound of a word.
The common issues with child language come from the fact that the complex muscle movements needed for clear speech aren’t working well yet. As a result, kids struggle to produce the sounds that are linked to certain natural movements. The necessary movements for articulating spoken words develop gradually over time. This leads to a way of speaking that includes words with imperfect and often missing sounds (hence incomplete words). These issues are categorized under the term blæsitas and are mainly because the child can’t yet control the movements of their tongue. They mainly include: sigmatism, or incorrect pronunciation of s; rhotacism, or incorrect pronunciation of r; lambdacism, or incorrect pronunciation of l; gam[Pg 323]macism, or incorrect pronunciation of g; iotacism, which is faulty pronunciation of guttural sounds; mogilalia, or incorrect pronunciation of labial sounds; and according to some authors like Preyer, mogilalia also includes omitting the first sound of a word.
Some defects of pronunciation which concern the utterance of the vowel sound as well as that of the consonant are due to the fact that the child reproduces perfectly sounds imperfectly heard.
Some pronunciation issues that involve both vowel and consonant sounds happen because the child reproduces perfectly sounds that they heard imperfectly.
In the first case, then, it is a matter of functional insufficiencies of the peripheral motor organ and hence of the nervous channels, and the cause lies in the individual; whereas in the second case the error is caused by the auditory stimulus and the cause lies outside.
In the first case, it's about the functional shortcomings of the peripheral motor organ and, therefore, the nervous pathways, with the cause residing in the individual; while in the second case, the error comes from the auditory stimulus, and the cause is external.
These defects often persist, however attenuated, in the boy and the adult: and produce finally an erroneous language to which will later be added in writing orthographical errors, such for example as dialectic orthographical errors.
These flaws often linger, though less intense, in both the boy and the adult: ultimately leading to incorrect language, which will later include spelling mistakes, such as dialect-related spelling errors.
If one considers the charm of human speech one is bound to acknowledge the inferiority of one who does not possess a correct spoken language; and an æsthetic conception in education cannot be imagined unless special care be devoted to perfecting articulate language. Although the Greeks had transmitted to Rome the art of educating in language, this practice was not resumed by Humanism which cared more for the æsthetics of the environment and the revival of artistic works than for the perfecting of the man.
If you think about the charm of human speech, you have to admit that someone who doesn’t have a good command of spoken language falls short. An aesthetic approach to education can’t be envisioned unless there’s a focus on refining articulate language. Even though the Greeks passed on the art of teaching language to Rome, Humanism didn’t pick it up again; it was more interested in the aesthetics of the surroundings and reviving artistic works than in improving individuals.
To-day we are just beginning to introduce the practice of correcting by pedagogical methods the serious defects of language, such as stammering; but the idea of linguistic gymnastics tending to its perfection has not yet penetrated[Pg 324] into our schools as a universal method, and as a detail of the great work of the æsthetic perfecting of man.
Today, we're just starting to use teaching methods to address serious language issues like stammering, but the concept of linguistic gymnastics aimed at perfecting speech hasn't yet become a[Pg 324] universal method in our schools, nor is it recognized as part of the broader effort to enhance human aesthetics.
Some teachers of deaf mutes and intelligent devotees of orthophony are trying nowadays with small practical success to introduce into the elementary schools the correction of the various forms of blæsitas, as a result of statistical studies which have demonstrated the wide diffusion of such defects among the pupils. The exercises consist essentially in silence cures which procure calm and repose for the organs of language, and in patient repetition of the separate vowel and consonant sounds; to these exercises is added also respiratory gymnastics. This is not the place to describe in detail the methods of these exercises which are long and patient and quite out of harmony with the teachings of the school. But in my methods are to be found all exercises for the corrections of language:
Some teachers of deaf students and dedicated supporters of speech correction are currently trying, with limited success, to bring the correction of various forms of blæsitas into elementary schools. This push comes after statistical studies showed that these defects are common among students. The exercises mainly involve silence treatments that provide calm and rest for the speech organs, along with patient repetition of the separate vowel and consonant sounds. Additionally, respiratory exercises are included. This isn't the right time to detail these long and patient methods, which don't align well with school teachings. However, all my methods include exercises for correcting language:
(a) Exercises of Silence, which prepare the nervous channels of language to receive new stimuli perfectly;
(a) Exercises of Silence, which ready the nervous pathways of language to fully absorb new stimuli;
(b) Lessons which consist first of the distinct pronunciation by the teacher of few words (especially of nouns which must be associated with a concrete idea); by this means clear and perfect auditory stimuli of language are started, stimuli which are repeated by the teacher when the child has conceived the idea of the object represented by the word (recognition of the object); finally of the provocation of articulate language on the part of the child who must repeat that word alone aloud, pronouncing its separate sounds;
(b) Lessons that start with the teacher clearly pronouncing a few words (especially nouns linked to a concrete idea); this creates clear and effective auditory stimuli for language, which the teacher then repeats when the child understands the idea behind the word (recognition of the object); finally, the child is encouraged to say that word alone out loud, pronouncing each sound distinctly;
(c) Exercises in Graphic Language, which analyse the sounds of speech and cause them to be repeated separately in several ways: that is, when the child learns the separate letters of the alphabet and when he composes or[Pg 325] writes words, repeating their sounds which he translates separately into composed or written speech;
(c) Exercises in Graphic Language analyze the sounds of speech and encourage them to be repeated in different ways. This happens when the child learns the individual letters of the alphabet and when they create or[Pg 325] write words, repeating the sounds that they translate individually into spoken or written language;
(d) Gymnastic Exercises, which comprise, as we have seen, both respiratory exercises and those of articulation.
(d) Gymnastic Exercises, which include, as we have seen, both breathing exercises and those focused on speech clarity.
I believe that in the schools of the future the conception will disappear which is beginning to-day of "correcting in the elementary schools" the defects of language; and will be replaced by the more rational one of avoiding them by caring for the development of language in the "Children's Houses"; that is, in the very age in which language is being established in the child.
I believe that in the schools of the future, the idea of "correcting in the elementary schools" language deficiencies will fade away; instead, it will be replaced by a more sensible approach of preventing them by nurturing the growth of language in the "Children's Houses." This means focusing on the crucial period when language is being developed in children.
CHAPTER XIX
Teaching of Number Systems; Introduction to Arithmetic
Children of three years already know how to count as far as two or three when they enter our schools. They therefore very easily learn numeration, which consists in counting objects. A dozen different ways may serve toward this end, and daily life presents many opportunities; when the mother says, for instance, "There are two buttons missing from your apron," or "We need three more plates at table."
Children as young as three already know how to count to two or three when they start school. They therefore quickly learn about numbers, which involves counting objects. There are a dozen different methods to help with this, and everyday life offers plenty of chances; for example, when a mother says, "There are two buttons missing from your apron," or "We need three more plates at the table."
One of the first means used by me, is that of counting with money. I obtain new money, and if it were possible I should have good reproductions made in cardboard. I have seen such money used in a school for deficients in London.
One of the first methods I used was counting with money. I get new money, and if possible, I would have good replicas made out of cardboard. I've seen this kind of money used at a school for students with disabilities in London.
The making of change is a form of numeration so attractive as to hold the attention of the child. I present the one, two, and four centime pieces and the children, in this way learn to count to ten.
The making of change is a way of counting that's so engaging that it captures a child's attention. I introduce the one, two, and four centime coins, and the kids, through this method, learn to count to ten.
No form of instruction is more practical than that tending to make children familiar with the coins in common use, and no exercise is more useful than that of making change. It is so closely related to daily life that it interests all children intensely.
No way of teaching is more practical than helping kids get to know the coins we use every day, and no practice is more helpful than learning to make change. It's so connected to everyday life that all kids find it really engaging.
Having taught numeration in this empiric mode, I pass to more methodical exercises, having as didactic material[Pg 327] one of the sets of blocks already used in the education of the senses; namely, the series of ten rods heretofore used for the teaching of length. The shortest of these rods corresponds to a decimetre, the longest to a metre, while the intervening rods are divided into sections a decimetre in length. The sections are painted alternately red and blue.
After teaching counting in this practical way, I move on to more structured exercises, using as teaching materials[Pg 327] one of the sets of blocks that have already been used to educate the senses; specifically, the series of ten rods previously used for teaching length. The shortest rod equals a decimetre, the longest equals a metre, and the rods in between are divided into sections that are each a decimetre long. The sections are painted in alternating red and blue.

Some day, when a child has arranged the rods, placing them in order of length, we have him count the red and blue signs, beginning with the smallest piece; that is, one; one, two; one, two, three, etc., always going back to one in the counting of each rod, and starting from the side A. We then have him name the single rods from the shortest to the longest, according to the total number of the sections which each contains, touching the rods at the sides[Pg 328] B, on which side the stair ascends. This results in the same numeration as when we counted the longest rod—1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10. Wishing to know the number of rods, we count them from the side A and the same numeration results; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10. This correspondence of the three sides of the triangle causes the child to verify his knowledge and as the exercise interests him he repeats it many times.
One day, when a child has organized the rods by length, we have them count the red and blue signs, starting with the shortest piece; that is, one; one, two; one, two, three, etc., always going back to one for each rod and starting from side A. We then have them name the individual rods from the shortest to the longest, based on the total number of sections each rod contains, touching the rods at the sides[Pg 328] B, where the staircase goes up. This gives us the same count as when we counted the longest rod—1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10. To find out how many rods there are, we count them from side A, and we get the same result; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10. This connection between the three sides of the triangle helps the child confirm what they know, and since the activity engages them, they repeat it many times.
We now unite to the exercises in numeration the earlier, sensory exercises in which the child recognised the long and short rods. Having mixed the rods upon a carpet, the directress selects one, and showing it to the child, has him count the sections; for example, 5. She then asks him to give her the one next in length. He selects it by his eye, and the directress has him verify his choice by placing the two pieces side by side and by counting their sections. Such exercises may be repeated in great variety and through them the child learns to assign a particular name to each one of the pieces in the long stair. We may now call them piece number one; piece number two, etc., and finally, for brevity, may speak of them in the lessons as one, two, three, etc.
We now combine the activities in numeration with the earlier sensory exercises where the child recognized the long and short rods. After mixing the rods on a carpet, the teacher picks one and shows it to the child, asking him to count the sections; for example, 5. She then asks him to hand her the next one in length. He selects it by his eye, and the teacher has him verify his choice by putting the two pieces side by side and counting their sections. These exercises can be repeated in many different ways, and through them, the child learns to assign a specific name to each of the pieces in the long stair. We can now refer to them as piece number one, piece number two, etc., and eventually, for simplicity, we can refer to them in lessons as one, two, three, etc.
THE NUMBERS AS REPRESENTED BY THE GRAPHIC SIGNS
At this point, if the child already knows how to write, we may present the figures cut in sandpaper and mounted upon cards. In presenting these, the method is the same used in teaching the letters. "This is one." "This is two." "Give me one." "Give me two." "What number is this?" The child traces the number with his finger as he did the letters.
At this point, if the child already knows how to write, we can present the numbers cut from sandpaper and attached to cards. The method for presenting these is the same as when teaching the letters. "This is one." "This is two." "Give me one." "Give me two." "What number is this?" The child traces the number with their finger just like they did with the letters.
Exercises with Numbers. Association of the graphic sign with the quantity.[Pg 329]
Number Exercises. Linking the graphic symbol with the amount.[Pg 329]
I have designed two trays each divided into five little compartments. At the back of each compartment may be placed a card bearing a figure. The figures in the first tray should be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and in the second, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9.
I’ve created two trays, each with five small compartments. At the back of each compartment, you can place a card with a number on it. The numbers in the first tray should be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and in the second tray, they should be 5, 6, 7, 8, 9.
The exercise is obvious; it consists in placing within the compartments a number of objects corresponding to the figure indicated upon the card at the back of the compartment. We give the children various objects in order to vary the lesson, but chiefly make use of large wooden pegs so shaped that they will not roll off the desk. We place a number of these before the child whose part is to arrange them in their places, one peg corresponding to the card marked one, etc. When he has finished he takes his tray to the directress that she may verify his work.
The exercise is straightforward; it involves placing a number of objects into the sections that match the figure shown on the card at the back of the section. We give the kids different objects to keep the lesson interesting, but we primarily use large wooden pegs designed so they won’t roll off the desk. We lay out several of these in front of the child, who is tasked with arranging them according to the corresponding card marked one, and so on. When he’s done, he takes his tray to the instructor so she can check his work.
The Lesson on Zero. We wait until the child, pointing to the compartment containing the card marked zero, asks, "And what must I put in here?" We then reply, "Nothing; zero is nothing." But often this is not enough. It is necessary to make the child feel what we mean by nothing. To this end we make use of little games which vastly entertain the children. I stand among them, and turning to one of them who has already used this material, I say, "Come, dear, come to me zero times." The child almost always comes to me, and then runs back to his place. "But, my boy, you came one time, and I told you to come zero times." Then he begins to wonder. "But what must I do, then?" "Nothing; zero is nothing." "But how shall I do nothing?" "Don't do anything. You must sit still. You must not come at all, not any times. Zero times. No times at all." I repeat these exercises until the children understand, and they are then, immensely amused at remaining quiet when I call to them to come to me zero times, or to throw me zero kisses.[Pg 330] They themselves often cry out, "Zero is nothing! Zero is nothing!"
The Lesson on Zero. We wait until the child, pointing to the compartment with the card labeled zero, asks, "And what should I put in here?" We reply, "Nothing; zero is nothing." But often that's not enough. We need to help the child feel what we mean by nothing. For this, we use little games that entertain the children a lot. I stand among them, and turning to one who has already used this material, I say, "Come, dear, come to me zero times." The child almost always comes to me, and then runs back to their spot. "But, my boy, you came one time, and I told you to come zero times." Then he starts to wonder. "But what should I do, then?" "Nothing; zero is nothing." "But how do I do nothing?" "Don't do anything. You need to sit still. You must not come at all, not any times. Zero times. No times at all." I repeat these exercises until the children understand, and then they find it really funny to stay quiet when I call them to come to me zero times or to throw me zero kisses.[Pg 330] They themselves often shout, "Zero is nothing! Zero is nothing!"
EXERCISES FOR THE MEMORY OF NUMBERS
When the children recognise the written figure, and when this figure signifies to them the numerical value, I give them the following exercise:
When the kids recognize the written number, and when this number represents the value to them, I give them the following exercise:
I cut the figures from old calendars and mount them upon slips of paper which are then folded and dropped into a box. The children draw out the slips, carry them still folded, to their seats, where they look at them and refold them, conserving the secret. Then, one by one, or in groups, these children (who are naturally the oldest ones in the class) go to the large table of the directress where groups of various small objects have been placed. Each one selects the quantity of objects corresponding to the number he has drawn. The number, meanwhile, has been left at the child's place, a slip of paper mysteriously folded. The child, therefore, must remember his number not only during the movements which he makes in coming and going, but while he collects his pieces, counting them one by one. The directress may here make interesting individual observations upon the number memory.
I cut out figures from old calendars and glue them onto pieces of paper, which are then folded and placed in a box. The children pull out the slips, carry them still folded to their seats, where they look at them and refold them, keeping the secret. Then, one by one, or in small groups, these children (who are usually the oldest in the class) go to the large table of the teacher, where various small objects have been arranged. Each one picks the amount of objects that matches the number they drew. The number, meanwhile, has been left at the child's seat, a slip of paper mysteriously folded. The child must remember their number not only while moving back and forth but also while collecting their items, counting them one by one. The teacher can make interesting individual observations about their number memory here.
When the child has gathered up his objects he arranges them upon his own table, in columns of two, and if the number is uneven, he places the odd piece at the bottom and between the last two objects. The arrangement of the pieces is therefore as follows:—
When the child has collected his items, he arranges them on his table in columns of two. If the total is odd, he places the extra piece at the bottom, between the last two objects. So, the arrangement of the pieces is as follows:—

The crosses represent the objects, while the circle stands for the folded slip containing the figure. Having arranged his objects, the child awaits the verification. The directress comes, opens the slip, reads the number, and counts the pieces.
The crosses represent the objects, while the circle stands for the folded slip with the figure. After arranging his objects, the child waits for verification. The teacher arrives, opens the slip, reads the number, and counts the pieces.
When we first played this game it often happened that the children took more objects than were called for upon the card, and this was not always because they did not remember the number, but arose from a mania for the having the greatest number of objects. A little of that instinctive greediness, which is common to primitive and uncultured man. The directress seeks to explain to the children that it is useless to have all those things upon the desk, and that the point of the game lies in taking the exact number of objects called for.
When we first played this game, it often happened that the kids took more objects than were called for on the card. This wasn't always because they forgot the number; it came from a desire to have the most objects. It was a bit of that instinctive greediness that’s typical of primitive and uncultured people. The teacher tries to explain to the kids that it’s pointless to have all those things on the desk and that the aim of the game is to take the exact number of objects listed.
Little by little they enter into this idea, but not so easily as one might suppose. It is a real effort of self-denial which holds the child within the set limit, and makes him take, for example, only two of the objects placed at his disposal, while he sees others taking more. I therefore consider this game more an exercise of will power than of numeration. The child who has the zero, should not move from his place when he sees all his companions rising and taking freely of the objects which are inaccessible to him. Many times zero falls to the lot of a child who knows how to count perfectly, and who would experience great pleasure in accumulating and arranging a fine group of objects in the proper order upon his table, and in awaiting with security the teacher's verification.
Little by little, they start to grasp this idea, but it’s not as easy as you might think. It requires real self-control for the child to stick to the limits, making him take just two of the items available, while he watches others take more. I see this game as more of a test of willpower than a counting exercise. The child who has the zero shouldn’t move from his spot when he sees all his classmates getting up and grabbing the objects he can't have. Often, zero ends up with a child who can count perfectly and would take great joy in collecting and organizing a nice set of objects on his table, waiting confidently for the teacher to check his work.
It is most interesting to study the expressions upon the faces of those who possess zero. The individual differences which result are almost a revelation of the "character" of each one. Some remain impassive, assuming a[Pg 332] bold front in order to hide the pain of the disappointment; others show this disappointment by involuntary gestures. Still others cannot hide the smile which is called forth by the singular situation in which they find themselves, and which will make their friends curious. There are little ones who follow every movement of their companions with a look of desire, almost of envy, while others show instant acceptance of the situation. No less interesting are the expressions with which they confess to the holding of the zero, when asked during the verification, "and you, you haven't taken anything?" "I have zero." "It is zero." These are the usual words, but the expressive face, the tone of the voice, show widely varying sentiments. Rare, indeed, are those who seem to give with pleasure the explanation of an extraordinary fact. The greater number either look unhappy or merely resigned.
It’s really fascinating to observe the expressions on the faces of those who have zero. The individual differences that emerge are almost a revelation of each person's "character." Some remain stoic, putting on a brave front to mask their disappointment; others display their letdown through involuntary gestures. Still, some can’t hide the smile that comes from the unique situation they find themselves in, which piques their friends' curiosity. There are little ones who watch their friends' every move with a look of longing, almost envy, while others accept the situation right away. Equally interesting are the expressions they show when admitting they have zero when asked during the verification, "And you, haven’t you taken anything?" "I have zero." "It is zero." These are the usual phrases, but their expressive faces and tone of voice reveal a range of feelings. Rarely do you find someone who happily explains the extraordinary fact. Most either look unhappy or simply resigned.
We therefore give lessons upon the meaning of the game, saying, "It is hard to keep the zero secret. Fold the paper tightly and don't let it slip away. It is the most difficult of all." Indeed, after awhile, the very difficulty of remaining quiet appeals to the children, and when they open the slip marked zero it can be seen that they are content to keep the secret.
We teach the kids about the meaning of the game, saying, "It's tough to keep the zero a secret. Fold the paper tightly and don't let it get away. It's the hardest part." Eventually, the challenge of staying quiet becomes appealing to the kids, and when they reveal the slip marked zero, it's clear they are happy to keep the secret.
ADDITION AND SUBTRACTION FROM ONE TO TWENTY:
MULTIPLICATION AND DIVISION
The didactic material which we use for the teaching of the first arithmetical operations is the same already used for numeration; that is, the rods graduated as to length which, arranged on the scale of the metre, contain the first idea of the decimal system.
The teaching materials we use for the basic arithmetic operations are the same ones we used for counting; specifically, the rods that are measured by length, arranged on the meter scale, which introduce the basic concept of the decimal system.
The rods, as I have said, have come to be called by the numbers which they represent; one, two, three, etc. They[Pg 333] are arranged in order of length, which is also in order of numeration.
The rods, as I mentioned, are now referred to by the numbers they stand for: one, two, three, and so on. They[Pg 333] are arranged by length, which also matches their numerical order.
The first exercise consists in trying to put the shorter pieces together in such a way as to form tens. The most simple way of doing this is to take successively the shortest rods, from one up, and place them at the end of the corresponding long rods from nine down. This may be accompanied by the commands, "Take one and add it to nine; take two and add it to eight; take three and add it to seven; take four and add it to six." In this way we make four rods equal to ten. There remains the five, but, turning this upon its head (in the long sense), it passes from one end of the ten to the other, and thus makes clear the fact that two times five makes ten.
The first exercise involves trying to combine the shorter pieces to make tens. The simplest way to do this is to take the shortest rods, starting from one, and place them at the end of the corresponding long rods, starting from nine. You can say, "Take one and add it to nine; take two and add it to eight; take three and add it to seven; take four and add it to six." This way, we create four rods that equal ten. The five is left over, but if you flip it upside down, it moves from one end of the ten to the other, clearly showing that two times five equals ten.
These exercises are repeated and little by little the child is taught the more technical language; nine plus one equals ten, eight plus two equals ten, seven plus three equals ten, six plus four equals ten, and for the five, which remains, two times five equals ten. At last, if he can write, we teach the signs plus and equals and times. Then this is what we see in the neat note-books of our little ones:
These exercises are repeated, and gradually the child learns the more technical language: nine plus one equals ten, eight plus two equals ten, seven plus three equals ten, six plus four equals ten, and for the five that’s left, two times five equals ten. Finally, if they can write, we teach the symbols plus, equals, and times. This is what we see in the neat notebooks of our little ones:
9 + 1 = 10 8 + 2 = 10 7 + 3 = 10 6 + 4 = 10 |
5 × 2 = 10 |
When all this is well learned and has been put upon the paper with great pleasure by the children, we call their attention to the work which is done when the pieces grouped together to form tens are taken apart, and put back in their original positions. From the ten last formed we take away four and six remains; from the next we take away three and seven remains; from the next, two and eight remains; from the last, we take away one and nine[Pg 334] remains. Speaking of this properly we say, ten less four equals six; ten less three equals seven; ten less two equals eight; ten less one equals nine.
When all of this is well learned and written down with great joy by the children, we focus their attention on the work involved when the grouped pieces that make up tens are taken apart and returned to their original positions. From the last ten formed, we take away four, leaving six; from the next, we take away three, leaving seven; from the next, we take away two, leaving eight; from the last, we take away one, leaving nine[Pg 334]. To say it correctly, we state that ten minus four equals six; ten minus three equals seven; ten minus two equals eight; ten minus one equals nine.
In regard to the remaining five, it is the half of ten, and by cutting the long rod in two, that is dividing ten by two, we would have five; ten divided by two equals five. The written record of all this reads:
In relation to the remaining five, it's half of ten, and by splitting the long rod in half, which is dividing ten by two, we would get five; ten divided by two equals five. The written record of all this says:
10 − 4 = 6 10 − 3 = 7 10 − 2 = 8 10 − 1 = 9 |
10 ÷ 2 = 5 |
Once the children have mastered this exercise they multiply it spontaneously. Can we make three in two ways? We place the one after the two and then write, in order that we may remember what we have done, 2 + 1 = 3. Can we make two rods equal to number four? 3 + 1 = 4, and 4 - 3 = 1; 4 - 1 = 3. Rod number two in its relation to rod number four is treated as was five in relation to ten; that is, we turn it over and show that it is contained in four exactly two times: 4 ÷ 2 = 2; 2 × 2 = 4. Another problem: let us see with how many rods we can play this same game. We can do it with three and six; and with four and eight; that is,
Once the kids have nailed this exercise, they start to multiply it on their own. Can we make three in two ways? We put one after the two and write it down so we can remember what we did: 2 + 1 = 3. Can we make two rods equal to four? 3 + 1 = 4, and 4 - 3 = 1; 4 - 1 = 3. The second rod in relation to the fourth rod is treated like five in relation to ten; that is, we flip it over and show that it fits into four exactly two times: 4 ÷ 2 = 2; 2 × 2 = 4. Here's another challenge: let’s see how many rods we can play this same game with. We can do it with three and six; and with four and eight; that is,
2 × 2 = 4 | 3 × 2 = 6 | 4 × 2 = 8 | 5 × 2 = 10 |
10 ÷ 2 = 5 | 8 ÷ 2 = 4 | 6 ÷ 2 = 3 | 4 ÷ 2 = 2 |
At this point we find that the cubes with which we played the number memory games are of help:
At this point, we realize that the cubes we used for the number memory games are useful:

From this arrangement, one sees at once which are the numbers which can be divided by two—all those which have not an odd cube at the bottom. These are the even numbers, because they can be arranged in pairs, two by two; and the division by two is easy, all that is necessary being to separate the two lines of twos that stand one under the other. Counting the cubes of each file we have the quotient. To recompose the primitive number we need only reassemble the two files thus 2 × 3 = 6. All this is not difficult for children of five years.
From this setup, you can immediately see which numbers can be divided by two—all those that don’t have an odd cube at the bottom. These are the even numbers, because they can be paired up, two by two. Dividing by two is simple; all you need to do is separate the two lines of twos that are stacked one on top of the other. By counting the cubes in each row, we get the result. To recreate the original number, we just need to put the two rows back together, so 2 × 3 = 6. This isn’t difficult for five-year-olds.
The repetition soon becomes monotonous, but the exercises may be most easily changed, taking again the set of long rods, and instead of placing rod number one after nine, place it after ten. In the same way, place two after nine, and three after eight. In this way we make rods of a greater length than ten; lengths which we must learn to name eleven, twelve, thirteen, etc., as far as twenty. The little cubes, too, may be used to fix these higher numbers.
The repetition quickly becomes boring, but the exercises can be easily adjusted. Instead of placing rod number one after nine, you can place it after ten. Do the same for rod two by placing it after nine, and rod three after eight. This way, we create rods that are longer than ten—lengths that we need to learn to call eleven, twelve, thirteen, and so on, up to twenty. The small cubes can also be used to help understand these larger numbers.
Having learned the operations through ten, we proceed with no difficulty to twenty. The one difficulty lies in the decimal numbers which require certain lessons.
Having learned how to operate with ten, we easily move on to twenty. The only challenge comes from decimal numbers, which need some specific lessons.
LESSONS ON DECIMALS: ARITHMETICAL CALCULATIONS
BEYOND TEN

The necessary didactic material consists of a number of square cards upon which the figure ten is printed in large type, and of other rectangular cards, half the size of the square, and containing the single numbers from one to nine. We place the numbers in a line; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10. Then, having no more numbers, we must begin over again and take the 1 again. This 1 is like that section in the set of rods which, in rod number 10, extends[Pg 336] beyond nine. Counting along the stair as far as nine, there remains this one section which, as there are no more numbers, we again designate as 1; but this is a higher 1 than the first, and to distinguish it from the first we put near it a zero, a sign which means nothing. Here then is 10. Covering the zero with the separate rectangular number cards in the order of their succession we see formed: 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19. These numbers are composed by adding to rod number 10, first rod number 1, then 2, then 3, etc., until we finally add rod number 9 to rod number 10, thus obtaining a very long rod, which, when its alternating red and blue sections are counted, gives us nineteen.
The necessary teaching materials consist of a number of square cards with the number ten printed in large type, and smaller rectangular cards that are half the size of the squares, containing the single numbers from one to nine. We line up the numbers: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10. Since there are no more numbers, we start over and take the 1 again. This 1 is like that part in the set of rods which, in rod number 10, extends beyond nine. Counting along the stair up to nine, there’s still this one section left, which, since there are no more numbers, we again call 1; but this is a higher 1 than the first, and to distinguish it from the original, we place a zero next to it, a symbol that signifies nothing. So here we have 10. Covering the zero with the separate rectangular number cards in order, we can see: 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19. These numbers are created by adding rod number 1 to rod number 10, then adding 2, then 3, and so on, until we finally add rod number 9 to rod number 10, which gives us a very long rod that, when its alternating red and blue sections are counted, totals nineteen.

The directress may then show to the child the cards, giving the number 16, and he may place rod 6 after rod 10. She then takes away the card bearing 6, and places over the zero the card bearing the figure 8, whereupon the child takes away rod 6 and replaces it with rod 8, thus making 18. Each of these acts may be recorded thus: 10 + 6 = 16; 10 + 8 = 18, etc. We proceed in the same way to subtraction.
The teacher can then show the child the cards, giving them the number 16, and they can place rod 6 after rod 10. She then removes the card with 6 on it and places the card with the number 8 over the zero, at which point the child removes rod 6 and replaces it with rod 8, making 18. Each of these actions can be recorded like this: 10 + 6 = 16; 10 + 8 = 18, and so on. We follow the same process for subtraction.
When the number itself begins to have a clear meaning to the child, the combinations are made upon one long card, arranging the rectangular cards bearing the nine figures upon the two columns of numbers shown in the figures A and B.
When the number itself starts to make sense to the child, the combinations are created on one long card, organizing the rectangular cards with the nine figures into the two columns of numbers displayed in figures A and B.
Upon the card A we superimpose upon the zero of the second 10, the rectangular card bearing the 1: and under this the one bearing two, etc. Thus while the one of the[Pg 337] ten remains the same the numbers to the right proceed from zero to nine, thus:
Upon card A, we place the zero of the second 10, along with the rectangular card showing 1: and below it, the one showing 2, and so on. So, while the one of the[Pg 337] ten stays the same, the numbers to the right go from zero to nine, like this:
In card B the applications are more complex. The cards are superimposed in numerical progression by tens.
In card B, the applications are more complex. The cards are layered on top of each other in numerical order by tens.
Almost all our children count to 100, a number which was given to them in response to the curiosity they showed in regard to learning it.
Almost all our kids can count to 100, a number that was given to them because of their curiosity about learning it.
I do not believe that this phase of the teaching needs further illustrations. Each teacher may multiply the practical exercises in the arithmetical operations, using simple objects which the children can readily handle and divide.
I don't think this part of the teaching needs more examples. Each teacher can create more practical exercises in math operations using simple items that the kids can easily handle and share.
CHAPTER XX
Workout Routine
In the practical application of the method it is helpful to know the sequence, or the various series, of exercises which must be presented to the child successively.
In using this method, it’s important to understand the order and the different sets of exercises that need to be introduced to the child one after the other.
In the first edition of my book there was clearly indicated a progression for each exercise; but in the "Children's Houses" we began contemporaneously with the most varied exercises; and it develops that there exist grades in the presentation of the material in its entirety. These grades have, since the first publication of the book, become clearly defined through experience in the "Children's Houses."
In the first edition of my book, I clearly showed a progression for each exercise; but in the "Children's Houses," we started with a wide variety of exercises at the same time. It turns out there are levels in how the material is presented overall. Since the first publication of the book, these levels have become well-defined through experience in the "Children's Houses."
SEQUENCE AND GRADES IN THE PRESENTATION OF MATERIAL
AND IN THE EXERCISES
First Grade
As soon as the child comes to the school he may be given the following exercises:
As soon as the child arrives at school, they can be given the following exercises:
Moving the seats, in silence (practical life).
Quietly shifting the seats.
Lacing, buttoning, hooking, etc.
Lacing, buttoning, hooking, etc.
The cylinders (sense exercises).
The cylinders (sensing exercises).
Among these the most useful exercise is that of the cylinders (solid insets). The child here begins to fix his attention. He makes his first comparison, his first selection, in which he exercises judgment. Therefore he exercises his intelligence.[Pg 339]
Among these, the most useful exercise is the cylinders (solid insets). Here, the child begins to focus his attention. He makes his first comparison and his first selection, which allows him to use his judgment. As a result, he exercises his intelligence.[Pg 339]
Among these exercises with the solid insets, there exists the following progression from easy to difficult:
Among these exercises with the solid insets, there is the following progression from easy to difficult:
(a) The cylinders in which the pieces are of the same height and of decreasing diameter.
(a) The cylinders where the pieces are the same height and have a decreasing diameter.
(b) The cylinders decreasing in all dimensions.
(b) The cylinders getting smaller in every way.
(c) Those decreasing only in height.
(c) Those that are only decreasing in height.
Second Grade
Exercises of Practical Life. To rise and be seated in silence. To walk on the line.
Exercises of Practical Life. To get up and sit down quietly. To walk along the line.
Sense Exercises. Material dealing with dimensions. The Long Stair. The prisms, or Big Stair. The cubes. Here the child makes exercises in the recognition of dimensions as he did in the cylinders but under a very different aspect. The objects are much larger. The differences much more evident than they were in the preceding exercises, but here, only the eye of the child recognises the differences and controls the errors. In the preceding exercises, the errors were mechanically revealed to the child by the didactic material itself. The impossibility of placing the objects in order in the block in any other than their respective spaces gives this control. Finally, while in the preceding exercises the child makes much more simple movements (being seated he places little objects in order with his hands), in these new exercises he accomplishes movements which are decidedly more complex and difficult and makes small muscular efforts. He does this by moving from the table to the carpet, rises, kneels, carries heavy objects.
Sense Exercises. Material focused on dimensions. The Long Stair. The prisms, or Big Stair. The cubes. In this activity, the child practices recognizing dimensions just as he did with the cylinders, but in a very different way. The objects are much larger, and the differences are much clearer than in the previous exercises. Here, only the child's eye detects the differences and corrects the mistakes. In the earlier exercises, the errors were automatically pointed out to the child by the teaching materials themselves. The objects can only be placed in their specific spots in the block, which allows for this self-correction. Lastly, while in the previous exercises the child made simpler movements (he sat and organized smaller items with his hands), these new exercises involve movements that are significantly more complex and challenging, requiring more physical effort. He does this by moving from the table to the carpet, standing up, kneeling, and carrying heavy objects.
We notice that the child continues to be confused between the two last pieces in the growing scale, being for a long time unconscious of such an error after he has learned to put the other pieces in correct order. Indeed[Pg 340] the difference between these pieces being throughout the varying dimensions the same for all, the relative difference diminishes with the increasing size of the pieces themselves. For example, the little cube which has a base of 2 centimetres is double the size, as to base, of the smallest cube which has a base of 1 centimetre, while the largest cube having a base of 10 centimetres, differs by barely 1/10 from the base of the cube next it in the series (the one of 9 centimetres base).
We see that the child still gets confused between the last two pieces in the growing scale, remaining unaware of the mistake for a long time after learning to arrange the other pieces correctly. In fact[Pg 340], the difference between these pieces is consistent across all varying sizes, and the relative difference decreases as the sizes of the pieces increase. For example, the small cube that has a base of 2 centimeters is twice the size, in terms of base, of the smallest cube with a base of 1 centimeter, while the largest cube, which has a base of 10 centimeters, differs by just 1/10 from the base of the cube next to it in the series (the one with a 9-centimeter base).
Thus it would seem that, theoretically, in such exercises we should begin with the smallest piece. We can, indeed, do this with the material through which size and length are taught. But we cannot do so with the cubes, which must be arranged as a little "tower." This column of blocks must always have as its base the largest cube.
Thus it seems that, in theory, we should start with the smallest piece in these exercises. We can definitely do this with the material used to teach size and length. However, we can’t do the same with the cubes, which need to be stacked into a little "tower." This column of blocks must always be built upon the largest cube at the base.
The children, attracted above all by the tower, begin very early to play with it. Thus we often see very little children playing with the tower, happy in believing that they have constructed it, when they have inadvertently used the next to the largest cube as the base. But when the child, repeating the exercise, corrects himself of his own accord, in a permanent fashion, we may be certain that his eye has become trained to perceive even the slightest differences between the pieces.
The kids, drawn in mainly by the tower, start playing with it at a very young age. So, we often see little ones having fun with the tower, convinced they built it, even if they unintentionally used the second largest cube as the base. But when the child, doing it again, corrects himself on his own, in a lasting way, we can be sure that his eye has learned to notice even the smallest differences between the pieces.
In the three systems of blocks through which dimensions are taught that of length has pieces differing from each other by 10 centimetres, while in the other two sets, the pieces differ only 1 centimetre. Theoretically it would seem that the long rods should be the first to attract the attention and to exclude errors. This, however, is not the case. The children are attracted by this set of blocks, but they commit the greatest number of errors in using it,[Pg 341] and only after they have for a long time eliminated every error in constructing the other two sets, do they succeed in arranging the Long Stair perfectly. This may then be considered as the most difficult among the series through which dimensions are taught.
In the three block systems used to teach measurements, the length system has pieces that differ from each other by 10 centimeters, while the other two sets have pieces that differ by only 1 centimeter. Theoretically, it seems like the long rods should be the first to grab attention and minimize mistakes. However, that's not the case. Kids are interested in this set of blocks, but they make the most mistakes when using it,[Pg 341] and only after they have spent a long time correcting all errors with the other two sets can they arrange the Long Stair perfectly. Thus, this is considered the most challenging among the series used to teach measurements.
Arrived at this point in his education, the child is capable of fixing his attention, with interest, upon the thermic and tactile stimuli.
At this stage in his education, the child is able to focus his attention, with interest, on temperature and touch sensations.
The progression in the sense development is not, therefore, in actual practice identical with the theoretical progression which psychometry indicates in the study of its subjects. Nor does it follow the progression which physiology and anatomy indicate in the description of the relations of the sense organs.
The development of the senses doesn't actually match the theoretical progression that psychometry suggests when studying its subjects. It also doesn't follow the progression outlined by physiology and anatomy in describing the relationships of the sense organs.
In fact, the tactile sense is the primitive sense; the organ of touch is the most simple and the most widely diffused. But it is easy to explain how the most simple sensations, the least complex organs, are not the first through which to attract the attention in a didactic presentation of sense stimuli.
In fact, the sense of touch is the most basic sense; the organ of touch is the simplest and the most widely spread. However, it's easy to understand why the simplest sensations and least complex organs aren't the first ones to grab our attention in a teaching presentation of sensory stimuli.
Therefore, when the education of the attention has been begun, we may present to the child the rough and smooth surfaces (following certain thermic exercises described elsewhere in the book).
Therefore, when the education of attention has started, we can introduce the child to rough and smooth surfaces (following specific thermal exercises described elsewhere in the book).
These exercises, if presented at the proper time, interest the children immensely. It is to be remembered that these games are of the greatest importance in the method, because upon them, in union with the exercises for the movement of the hand, which we introduce later, we base the acquisition of writing.
These exercises, when introduced at the right time, capture the children's immense interest. It's important to keep in mind that these games are of the utmost significance in the approach, because they, along with the hand movement exercises we'll introduce later, form the foundation for learning to write.
Together with the two series of sense exercises described above, we may begin what we call the "pairing[Pg 342] of the colours," that is, the recognition of the identity of two colours. This is the first exercise of the chromatic sense.
Together with the two sets of sensory exercises mentioned earlier, we can start what we refer to as the "pairing of the colors," which is the ability to identify when two colors are the same. This is the first exercise for developing color perception.
Here, also, it is only the eye of the child that intervenes in the judgment, as it was with the exercises in dimension. This first colour exercise is easy, but the child must already have acquired a certain grade of education of the attention through preceding exercises, if he is to repeat this one with interest.
Here, too, it's just the child's eye that plays a role in judgment, just like in the dimension exercises. This initial color exercise is simple, but the child needs to have developed a certain level of attention through previous exercises if they're going to engage with this one.
Meanwhile, the child has heard music; has walked on the line, while the directress played a rhythmic march. Little by little he has learned to accompany the music spontaneously with certain movements. This of course necessitates the repetition of the same music. (To acquire the sense of rhythm the repetition of the same exercise is necessary, as in all forms of education dealing with spontaneous activity.)
Meanwhile, the child has heard music and walked along the line while the teacher played a rhythmic march. Little by little, he has learned to move along with the music naturally. This, of course, requires playing the same music repeatedly. (To develop a sense of rhythm, repeating the same exercise is essential, just like in all forms of education that focus on spontaneous activity.)
The exercises in silence are also repeated.
The silent exercises are also repeated.
Third Grade
Exercises of Practical Life. The children wash themselves, dress and undress themselves, dust the tables, learn to handle various objects, etc.
Practical Life Activities. The kids wash themselves, put on and take off their clothes, clean the tables, and learn to handle different objects, etc.
Sense Exercises. We now introduce the child to the recognition of gradations of stimuli (tactile gradations, chromatic, etc.), allowing him to exercise himself freely.
Sense Exercises. We now introduce the child to recognizing different levels of stimuli (like touch and color), giving him the freedom to explore on his own.
We begin to present the stimuli for the sense of hearing (sounds, noises), and also the baric stimuli (the little tablets differing in weight).
We start by introducing the stimuli for hearing (sounds, noises), as well as the tactile stimuli (the small tablets that vary in weight).
Contemporaneously with the gradations we may present the plane geometric insets. Here begins the education of the movement of the hand in following the contours of the insets, an exercise which, together with the other and con[Pg 343]temporaneous one of the recognition of tactile stimuli in gradation, prepares for writing.
At the same time as the gradations, we can introduce the flat geometric shapes. This is where the training of the hand's movement starts as it traces the shapes' outlines, an exercise that, alongside the other one of identifying tactile sensations in gradation, prepares for writing.
The series of cards bearing the geometric forms, we give after the child recognises perfectly the same forms in the wooden insets. These cards serve to prepare for the abstract signs of which writing consists. The child learns to recognise a delineated form, and after all the preceding exercises have formed within him an ordered and intelligent personality, they may be considered the bridge by which he passes from the sense exercises to writing, from the preparation, to the actual entrance into instruction.
The set of cards with geometric shapes is introduced after the child has fully recognized the same shapes in the wooden insets. These cards help prepare for the abstract signs that make up written language. The child learns to identify a defined shape, and once all the earlier exercises have shaped him into a balanced and thoughtful individual, these cards can be seen as the bridge that takes him from sensory activities to writing, from preparation to the actual beginning of learning.
Fourth Grade
Exercises of Practical Life. The children set and clear the table for luncheon. They learn to put a room in order. They are now taught the most minute care of their persons in the making of the toilet. (How to brush their teeth, to clean their nails, etc.)
Exercises of Practical Life. The kids set and clear the table for lunch. They learn to tidy up a room. They are now taught to take the utmost care of themselves when getting ready. (How to brush their teeth, clean their nails, etc.)
They have learned, through the rhythmic exercises on the line, to walk with perfect freedom and balance.
They have learned, through the rhythmic exercises on the line, to walk with complete freedom and balance.
They know how to control and direct their own movements (how to make the silence,—how to move various objects without dropping or breaking them and without making a noise).
They know how to manage and guide their own movements (how to create silence,—how to move different objects without dropping or breaking them and without making any noise).
Sense Exercises. In this stage we repeat all the sense exercises. In addition we introduce the recognition of musical notes by the help of the series of duplicate bells.
Sense Exercises. In this stage, we go over all the sense exercises again. Additionally, we start recognizing musical notes using a series of duplicate bells.
Exercises Related to Writing / Design / The child passes to the plane geometric insets in metal. He has already co-ordinated the movements necessary to follow the contours. Here he no longer follows them with his finger, but with a pencil, leaving the double sign upon a sheet of[Pg 344] paper. Then he fills in the figures with coloured pencils, holding the pencil as he will later hold the pen in writing.
Exercises Related to Writing / Design / The child moves on to the metal geometric shapes. He has already mastered the movements needed to trace the outlines. Now he no longer traces them with his finger, but with a pencil, leaving a double mark on a sheet of [Pg 344] paper. Then he colors in the shapes with colored pencils, holding the pencil the way he will later hold the pen when writing.
Contemporaneously the child is taught to recognise and touch some of the letters of the alphabet made in sandpaper.
At the same time, the child is taught to recognize and feel some of the letters of the alphabet made from sandpaper.
Exercises in Arithmetic. At this point, repeating the sense exercises, we present the Long Stair with a different aim from that with which it has been used up to the present time. We have the child count the different pieces, according to the blue and red sections, beginning with the rod consisting of one section and continuing through that composed of ten sections. We continue such exercises and give other more complicated ones.
Exercises in Arithmetic. At this stage, by revisiting the sense exercises, we introduce the Long Stair with a new purpose compared to how it has been used so far. We ask the child to count the different pieces based on the blue and red sections, starting with the rod that has one section and going up to the one that has ten sections. We keep doing these exercises and introduce other, more complex ones.
In Design we pass from the outlines of the geometric insets to such outlined figures as the practice of four years has established and which will be published as models in design.
In Design, we move from the outlines of the geometric insets to the outlined figures that four years of practice have established, which will be published as models in design.
These have an educational importance, and represent in their content and in their gradations one of the most carefully studied details of the method.
These have educational significance and represent, in their content and levels, one of the most thoroughly examined aspects of the method.
They serve as a means for the continuation of the sense education and help the child to observe his surroundings. They thus add to his intellectual refinement, and, as regards writing, they prepare for the high and low strokes. After such practice it will be easy for the child to make high or low letters, and this will do away with the ruled note-books such as are used in Italy in the various elementary classes.
They act as a way to continue the child's education and help him notice what's around him. They therefore contribute to his intellectual growth, and when it comes to writing, they help him get ready for both high and low strokes. After this practice, it will be easy for the child to make high or low letters, and this will eliminate the need for ruled notebooks that are used in Italy in different elementary classes.
In the acquiring of the use of written language we go as far as the knowledge of the letters of the alphabet, and of composition with the movable alphabet.
In acquiring the use of written language, we go as far as understanding the letters of the alphabet and composing with the movable alphabet.
In Arithmetic, as far as a knowledge of the figures. The child places the corresponding figures beside the[Pg 345] number of blue and red sections on each rod of the Long Stair.
In Arithmetic, regarding the understanding of the numbers. The child places the matching figures next to the[Pg 345] count of blue and red sections on each rod of the Long Stair.
The children now take the exercise with the wooden pegs.
The kids are now doing the exercise with the wooden pegs.
Also the games which consist in placing under the figures, on the table, a corresponding number of coloured counters. These are arranged in columns of twos, thus making the question of odd and even numbers clear. (This arrangement is taken from Séguin.)
Also, the games involve placing a corresponding number of colored counters under the figures on the table. These are organized in columns of twos, which clearly illustrates the concept of odd and even numbers. (This arrangement is taken from Séguin.)
Fifth Grade
We continue the preceding exercises. We begin more complicated rhythmic exercises.
We continue with the previous exercises. We now start more complex rhythmic exercises.
In design we begin:
Starting with design:
(a) The use of water colours.
The use of watercolors.
(b) Free drawing from nature (flowers, etc.).
(b) Freehand drawing from nature (flowers, etc.).
Composition of words and phrases with the movable alphabet.
Composition of words and phrases using the movable alphabet.
(a) Spontaneous writing of words and phrases.
(a) Freewriting of words and phrases.
(b) Reading from slips prepared by the directress.
(b) Reading from notes prepared by the director.
We continue the arithmetical operations which we began with the Long Stair.
We continue the arithmetic operations that we started with the Long Stair.
The children at this stage present most interesting differences of development. They fairly run toward instruction, and order their intellectual growth in a way that is remarkable.
The children at this stage show the most interesting differences in their development. They eagerly run toward learning and organize their intellectual growth in a remarkable way.
This joyous growth is what we so rejoice in, as we watch in these children, humanity, growing in the spirit according to its own deep laws. And only he who experiments can say how great may be the harvest from the sowing of such seed.
This joyful growth is what we celebrate as we observe humanity developing in these children, maturing in spirit according to its own fundamental principles. Only those who try can truly understand the potential harvest from planting such seeds.
CHAPTER XXI
Discipline Overview
The accumulated experience we have had since the publication of the Italian version has repeatedly proved to us that in our classes of little children, numbering forty and even fifty, the discipline is much better than in ordinary schools. For this reason I have thought that an analysis of the discipline obtained by our method—which is based upon liberty,—would interest my American readers.
The experience we've gathered since the release of the Italian version has consistently shown us that in our classes of young children, ranging from forty to even fifty, the discipline is much better than in regular schools. Because of this, I believe that an analysis of the discipline achieved through our method—which relies on freedom—would be of interest to my American readers.
Whoever visits a well kept school (such as, for instance, the one in Rome directed by my pupil Anna Maccheroni) is struck by the discipline of the children. There are forty little beings—from three to seven years old, each one intent on his own work; one is going through one of the exercises for the senses, one is doing an arithmetical exercise; one is handling the letters, one is drawing, one is fastening and unfastening the pieces of cloth on one of our little wooden frames, still another is dusting. Some are seated at the tables, some on rugs on the floor. There are muffled sounds of objects lightly moved about, of children tiptoeing. Once in a while comes a cry of joy only partly repressed, "Teacher! Teacher!" an eager call, "Look! see what I've done." But as a rule, there is entire absorption in the work in hand.
Whoever visits a well-kept school (like the one in Rome run by my student Anna Maccheroni) is struck by the discipline of the children. There are forty little ones—aged three to seven—each focused on their own activity; one is doing a sensory exercise, another is working on math, one is playing with letters, another is drawing, one is fastening and unfastening pieces of fabric on a small wooden frame, and yet another is dusting. Some are sitting at tables, while others are on rugs on the floor. You can hear soft sounds of objects being moved around and children tiptoeing. Occasionally, you'll hear a joyful shout that’s only partly held back, "Teacher! Teacher!" with an eager call, "Look! Check out what I've done." But for the most part, they are completely absorbed in their work.
The teacher moves quietly about, goes to any child who calls her, supervising operations in such a way that any[Pg 347]one who needs her finds her at his elbow, and whoever does not need her is not reminded of her existence. Sometimes, hours go by without a word. They seem "little men," as they were called by some visitors to the "Children's House"; or, as another suggested, "judges in deliberation."
The teacher moves quietly around, going to any child who calls her, supervising in a way that anyone who needs her finds her close by, and those who don’t need her aren’t reminded of her presence. Sometimes, hours pass without a word. They seem like "little men," as some visitors to the "Children's House" described them; or, as another put it, "judges in deliberation."
In the midst of such intense interest in work it never happens that quarrels arise over the possession of an object. If one accomplishes something especially fine, his achievement is a source of admiration and joy to others: no heart suffers from another's wealth, but the triumph of one is a delight to all. Very often he finds ready imitators. They all seem happy and satisfied to do what they can, without feeling jealous of the deeds of others. The little fellow of three works peaceably beside the boy of seven, just as he is satisfied with his own height and does not envy the older boy's stature. Everything is growing in the most profound peace.
In the middle of such strong enthusiasm for work, there’s no fighting over who owns what. When someone accomplishes something remarkable, their success brings admiration and joy to everyone else: no one feels hurt by another person’s success, but the victory of one person is a pleasure for all. Often, that person finds eager followers. Everyone seems happy and content to do what they can, without jealousy towards others’ achievements. The little kid who's three works happily alongside the seven-year-old, just as he’s content with his own height and doesn’t envy the older boy’s size. Everything is developing in complete harmony.
If the teacher wishes the whole assembly to do something, for instance, leave the work which interests them so much, all she needs to do is to speak a word in a low tone, or make a gesture, and they are all attention, they look toward her with eagerness, anxious to know how to obey. Many visitors have seen the teacher write orders on the blackboard, which were obeyed joyously by the children. Not only the teachers, but anyone who asks the pupils to do something is astonished to see them obey in the minutest detail and with obliging cheerfulness. Often a visitor wishes to hear how a child, now painting, can sing. The child leaves his painting to be obliging, but the instant his courteous action is completed, he returns to his interrupted work. Sometimes the smaller children finish their work before they obey.[Pg 348]
If the teacher wants the whole group to do something, like leave the work they’re really interested in, all she has to do is say a word softly or make a gesture, and they all pay attention, looking at her eagerly, ready to know how to follow her lead. Many visitors have seen the teacher write instructions on the board, which the kids respond to happily. Not just the teachers, but anyone who asks the students to do something is amazed at how they follow directions down to the smallest detail with cheerful willingness. Often a visitor wants to see how a child who is painting can sing. The child will stop painting to help out, but as soon as he’s done, he goes right back to his art. Sometimes the younger kids complete their tasks before they comply.[Pg 348]
A very surprising result of this discipline came to our notice during the examinations of the teachers who had followed my course of lectures. These examinations were practical, and, accordingly, groups of children were put at the disposition of the teachers being examined, who, according to the subject drawn by lot, took the children through a given exercise. While the children were waiting their turn, they were allowed to do just as they pleased. They worked incessantly, and returned to their undertakings as soon as the interruption caused by the examination was over. Every once in a while, one of them came to show us a drawing made during the interval. Miss George of Chicago was present many times when this happened, and Madame Pujols, who founded the first "Children's House" in Paris, was astonished at the patience, the perseverance, and the inexhaustible amiability of the children.
A very surprising outcome of this discipline caught our attention during the evaluations of the teachers who attended my lectures. These evaluations were practical, so groups of children were made available to the teachers being assessed, who, based on the subject drawn at random, guided the children through a specific exercise. While the children waited for their turn, they could do whatever they wanted. They worked non-stop and went back to their activities as soon as the interruption from the evaluation was over. Every so often, one of them would come to show us a drawing made during the break. Miss George from Chicago was present many times when this happened, and Madame Pujols, who started the first "Children's House" in Paris, was amazed by the children's patience, perseverance, and endless friendliness.
One might think that such children had been severely repressed were it not for their lack of timidity, for their bright eyes, for their happy, free aspect, for the cordiality of their invitations to look at their work, for the way in which they take visitors about and explain matters to them. These things make us feel that we are in the presence of the masters of the house; and the fervour with which they throw their arms around the teacher's knees, with which they pull her down to kiss her face, shows that their little hearts are free to expand as they will.
One might think that such children had been seriously held back if it weren’t for their confidence, their bright eyes, their joyful, carefree demeanor, and the warmth of their invitations to check out their work. The way they show visitors around and explain things makes us feel like we’re in the presence of the ones in charge. The enthusiasm with which they hug the teacher’s knees and pull her down to kiss her face demonstrates that their little hearts are free to express themselves as they wish.

The tables are arranged in the grounds of the Franciscan Nuns' school in Rome.
Anyone who has watched them setting the table must have passed from one surprise to another. Little four-year-old waiters take the knives and forks and spoons and distribute them to the different places; they carry trays holding as many as five water-glasses, and finally they go from table to table, carrying big tureens full of hot soup. [Pg 349]Not a mistake is made, not a glass is broken, not a drop of soup is spilled. All during the meal unobtrusive little waiters watch the table assiduously; not a child empties his soup-plate without being offered more; if he is ready for the next course a waiter briskly carries off his soup-plate. Not a child is forced to ask for more soup, or to announce that he has finished.
Anyone who has seen them setting the table must have gone from one surprise to the next. Little four-year-old waiters take the knives, forks, and spoons and distribute them to each place; they carry trays holding as many as five water glasses, and they go from table to table, carrying big tureens full of hot soup. [Pg 349]Not a single mistake is made, not a glass is broken, and not a drop of soup is spilled. Throughout the meal, attentive little waiters keep an eye on the table; not a child finishes his soup without being offered more; when he’s ready for the next course, a waiter quickly takes away his soup plate. No child is made to ask for more soup or to say that he’s done.

The two girls on the left are building the large stair and the tower. The boy in the center has built the long stair and is putting the figures next to the matching rods. The child on the right is tracing sandpaper letters.
Remembering the usual condition of four-year-old children, who cry, who break whatever they touch, who need to be waited on, everyone is deeply moved by the sight I have just described, which evidently results from the development of energies latent in the depths of the human soul. I have often seen the spectators at this banquet of little ones, moved to tears.
Remembering how four-year-olds usually are—crying, breaking everything they touch, and needing constant attention—everyone is really touched by the scene I just described, which clearly comes from the development of feelings buried deep in the human soul. I've often seen the people watching this gathering of little ones moved to tears.
But such discipline could never be obtained by commands, by sermonizings, in short, through any of the disciplinary devices universally known. Not only were the actions of those children set in an orderly condition, but their very lives were deepened and enlarged. In fact, such discipline is on the same plane with school-exercises extraordinary for the age of the children; and it certainly does not depend upon the teacher but upon a sort of miracle, occurring in the inner life of each child.
But that kind of discipline can’t be achieved through orders, lectures, or any common disciplinary methods. Not only were the actions of those kids organized, but their lives were also enriched and expanded. In reality, this kind of discipline is similar to extraordinary school activities for the children’s age; and it definitely doesn’t rely on the teacher but on a sort of miracle happening in each child’s inner life.
If we try to think of parallels in the life of adults, we are reminded of the phenomenon of conversion, of the superhuman heightening of the strength of martyrs and apostles, of the constancy of missionaries, of the obedience of monks. Nothing else in the world, except such things, is on a spiritual height equal to the discipline of the "Children's Houses."
If we consider similarities in adult life, we're reminded of the experience of conversion, the extraordinary strength of martyrs and apostles, the dedication of missionaries, and the obedience of monks. Nothing else in the world, except for these examples, reaches a spiritual level comparable to the discipline of the "Children's Houses."
To obtain such discipline it is quite useless to count on reprimands or spoken exhortations. Such means might perhaps at the beginning have an appearance of efficacy:[Pg 350] but very soon, the instant that real discipline appears, all of this falls miserably to the earth, an illusion confronted with reality—"night gives way to day."
To achieve that kind of discipline, relying on reprimands or verbal encouragement is pointless. These methods might seem effective at first:[Pg 350] but as soon as true discipline kicks in, everything else quickly crumbles, like an illusion facing reality—"night gives way to day."
The first dawning of real discipline comes through work. At a given moment it happens that a child becomes keenly interested in a piece of work, showing it by the expression of his face, by his intense attention, by his perseverance in the same exercise. That child has set foot upon the road leading to discipline. Whatever be his undertaking—an exercise for the senses, an exercise in buttoning up or lacing together, or washing dishes—it is all one and the same.
The first true sense of discipline comes from work. At some point, a child becomes really interested in a task, evident from their facial expression, focused attention, and persistence with the same activity. That child has started on the path to discipline. No matter what they're doing—whether it's a sensory exercise, learning to button up or lace something, or washing dishes—it’s all the same.
On our side, we can have some influence upon the permanence of this phenomenon, by means of repeated "Lessons of Silence." The perfect immobility, the attention alert to catch the sound of the names whispered from a distance, then the carefully co-ordinated movements executed so as not to strike against chair or table, so as barely to touch the floor with the feet—all this is a most efficacious preparation for the task of setting in order the whole personality, the motor forces and the psychical.
On our side, we can influence how lasting this phenomenon is through repeated "Lessons of Silence." The complete stillness, the focused attention to hear the names whispered from afar, and the carefully coordinated movements to avoid bumping into chairs or tables, or barely touching the floor with our feet—all this is a highly effective preparation for organizing the whole personality, both the physical and the mental aspects.
Once the habit of work is formed, we must supervise it with scrupulous accuracy, graduating the exercises as experience has taught us. In our effort to establish discipline, we must rigorously apply the principles of the method. It is not to be obtained by words; no man learns self-discipline "through hearing another man speak." The phenomenon of discipline needs as preparation a series of complete actions, such as are presupposed in the genuine application of a really educative method. Discipline is reached always by indirect means. The end is obtained, not by attacking the mistake and fighting it, but by developing activity in spontaneous work.[Pg 351]
Once a work habit is established, we need to monitor it closely, adjusting the tasks based on what we’ve learned from experience. To build discipline, we must strictly apply the method’s principles. It can't be achieved through words; no one learns self-discipline just by listening to someone talk. The nature of discipline requires a series of complete actions as part of a truly educational approach. Discipline is always achieved through indirect means. The goal is not reached by directly confronting mistakes, but by fostering engagement in voluntary work.[Pg 351]
This work cannot be arbitrarily offered, and it is precisely here that our method enters; it must be work which the human being instinctively desires to do, work towards which the latent tendencies of life naturally turn, or towards which the individual step by step ascends.
This work can't just be offered at random, and this is where our method comes in; it has to be work that people instinctively want to do, work that the hidden tendencies of life naturally lead us towards, or work that an individual gradually climbs towards.
Such is the work which sets the personality in order and opens wide before it infinite possibilities of growth. Take, for instance, the lack of control shown by a baby; it is fundamentally a lack of muscular discipline. The child is in a constant state of disorderly movement: he throws himself down, he makes queer gestures, he cries. What underlies all this is a latent tendency to seek that co-ordination of movement which will be established later. The baby is a man not yet sure of the movements of the various muscles of the body; not yet master of the organs of speech. He will eventually establish these various movements, but for the present he is abandoned to a period of experimentation full of mistakes, and of fatiguing efforts towards a desirable end latent in his instinct, but not clear in his consciousness. To say to the baby, "Stand still as I do," brings no light into his darkness; commands cannot aid in the process of bringing order into the complex psycho-muscular system of an individual in process of evolution. We are confused at this point by the example of the adult who through a wicked impulse prefers disorder, and who may (granted that he can) obey a sharp admonishment which turns his will in another direction, towards that order which he recognises and which it is within his capacity to achieve. In the case of the little child it is a question of aiding the natural evolution of voluntary action. Hence it is necessary to teach all the co-ordinated movements, analysing them as much as possible and developing them bit by bit.[Pg 352]
This is the kind of work that organizes personality and opens up endless opportunities for growth. Take a baby, for example; their lack of control is really just a lack of muscle coordination. The child is always in a state of chaotic movement: they throw themselves down, make strange gestures, and cry. Behind all this is a natural urge to achieve a coordination of movement that will develop later. The baby is a person who isn’t yet in control of the various muscles in their body or the organs of speech. They will eventually master these movements, but for now, they are exploring through trial and error, facing many mistakes and tiring efforts toward an instinctive goal that they don’t yet fully understand. Telling the baby, "Stand still like I do," doesn’t help them understand; commands can’t assist in bringing order to the complex psycho-muscular system of someone still evolving. We get confused by the example of an adult who, due to a negative impulse, may actually prefer disorder and can respond to a sharp command that redirects their will towards a recognizable order, something they can achieve. For a small child, it’s about supporting their natural development of voluntary action. Therefore, it’s important to teach all the coordinated movements, breaking them down as much as possible and developing them step by step.[Pg 352]
Thus, for instance, it is necessary to teach the child the various degrees of immobility leading to silence; the movements connected with rising from a chair and sitting down, with walking, with tiptoeing, with following a line drawn on the floor keeping an upright equilibrium. The child is taught to move objects about, to set them down more or less carefully, and finally the complex movements connected with dressing and undressing himself (analysed on the lacing and buttoning frames at school), and for even each of these exercises, the different parts of the movement must be analysed. Perfect immobility and the successive perfectioning of action, is what takes the place of the customary command, "Be quiet! Be still!" It is not astonishing but very natural that the child by means of such exercises should acquire self-discipline, so far as regards the lack of muscular discipline natural to his age. In short, he responds to nature because he is in action; but these actions being directed towards an end, have no longer the appearance of disorder but of work. This is discipline which represents an end to be attained by means of a number of conquests. The child disciplined in this way, is no longer the child he was at first, who knows how to be good passively; but he is an individual who has made himself better, who has overcome the usual limits of his age, who has made a great step forward, who has conquered his future in his present.
So, for example, it’s important to teach the child the different levels of stillness that lead to silence; the actions involved in getting up from a chair and sitting down, walking, tiptoeing, and following a line drawn on the floor while maintaining balance. The child learns to move objects around, to set them down carefully, and eventually the more complex movements related to dressing and undressing themselves (which are practiced on lacing and buttoning frames at school), and for each of these activities, the different parts of the movement need to be examined. Absolute stillness and progressively perfecting action take the place of the usual command, "Be quiet! Be still!" It’s not surprising but quite natural that the child, through these exercises, develops self-discipline, given the typical lack of muscular control for their age. In short, they respond to their nature because they are in action; but since these actions are purposeful, they no longer seem disorganized but rather like work. This is discipline, representing a goal to be achieved through a series of accomplishments. A child disciplined this way is no longer the same as before; they know how to be good actively, not just passively; they have improved themselves, gone beyond the usual limits of their age, made significant progress, and taken charge of their future in the present.
He has therefore enlarged his dominion. He will not need to have someone always at hand, to tell him vainly (confusing two opposing conceptions), "Be quiet! Be good!" The goodness he has conquered cannot be summed up by inertia: his goodness is now all made up of action. As a matter of fact, good people are those who advance towards the good—that good which is made up[Pg 353] of their own self-development and of external acts of order and usefulness.
He has therefore expanded his control. He won't need someone constantly around to tell him uselessly (mixing up two conflicting ideas), "Calm down! Be nice!" The goodness he has achieved can't just be reduced to doing nothing: his goodness is now entirely about taking action. In reality, good people are those who move towards goodness—that goodness which consists of their own personal growth and external actions of order and usefulness.
In our efforts with the child, external acts are the means which stimulate internal development, and they again appear as its manifestation, the two elements being inextricably intertwined. Work develops the child spiritually; but the child with a fuller spiritual development works better, and his improved work delights him,—hence he continues to develop spiritually. Discipline is, therefore, not a fact but a path, a path in following which the child grasps the abstract conception of goodness with an exactitude which is fairly scientific.
In our work with the child, external actions are the tools that encourage internal growth, and they also serve as signs of that growth, with the two being closely connected. Work enhances the child's spiritual development; meanwhile, a child with greater spiritual growth performs better, and their improved work brings them joy—this leads to continued spiritual development. Discipline is not just a fact but a journey; by following this journey, the child understands the abstract idea of goodness with a precision that is quite scientific.
But beyond everything else he savours the supreme delights of that spiritual order which is attained indirectly through conquests directed towards determinate ends. In that long preparation, the child experiences joys, spiritual awakenings and pleasures which form his inner treasure-house—the treasure-house in which he is steadily storing up the sweetness and strength which will be the sources of righteousness.
But more than anything else, he enjoys the ultimate pleasures of that spiritual order achieved indirectly through pursuits aimed at specific goals. In that long process, the child experiences joys, spiritual awakenings, and pleasures that create his inner treasure chest—the treasure chest where he is constantly gathering the sweetness and strength that will become the foundation of righteousness.
In short, the child has not only learned to move about and to perform useful acts; he has acquired a special grace of action which makes his gestures more correct and attractive, and which beautifies his hands and indeed his entire body now so balanced and so sure of itself; a grace which refines the expression of his face and of his serenely brilliant eyes, and which shows us that the flame of spiritual life has been lighted in another human being.
In short, the child has not only learned to move around and do useful things; he has gained a special grace in his actions that makes his gestures more precise and appealing, enhancing the beauty of his hands and his whole body, which is now balanced and confident. This grace also refines the expression on his face and in his calmly bright eyes, showing us that the spark of spiritual life has been ignited in another person.
It is obviously true that co-ordinated actions, developed spontaneously little by little (that is, chosen and carried out in the exercises by the child himself), must call for less effort than the disorderly actions performed by the[Pg 354] child who is left to his own devices. True rest for muscles, intended by nature for action, is in orderly action; just as true rest for the lungs is the normal rhythm of respiration taken in pure air. To take action away from the muscles is to force them away from their natural motor impulse, and hence, besides tiring them, means forcing them into a state of degeneration; just as the lungs forced into immobility, would die instantly and the whole organism with them.
It’s clearly true that coordinated actions, developed gradually and spontaneously (meaning chosen and executed by the child themselves during exercises), require less effort than the chaotic actions of a child left on their own. Real rest for muscles, which are naturally meant for movement, comes from organized activity; just as true rest for the lungs comes from a normal rhythm of breathing in clean air. Taking action away from the muscles forces them away from their natural drive to move, and as a result, it not only tires them out but also puts them at risk of deterioration; similarly, if the lungs are forced into stillness, they would fail immediately, taking the whole body down with them.
It is therefore necessary to keep clearly in mind the fact that rest for whatever naturally acts, lies in some specified form of action, corresponding to its nature.
It’s important to remember that rest for anything that acts naturally comes from a specific form of action that aligns with its nature.
To act in obedience to the hidden precepts of nature—that is rest; and in this special case, since man is meant to be an intelligent creature, the more intelligent his acts are the more he finds repose in them. When a child acts only in a disorderly, disconnected manner, his nervous force is under a great strain; while on the other hand his nervous energy is positively increased and multiplied by intelligent actions which give him real satisfaction, and a feeling of pride that he has overcome himself, that he finds himself in a world beyond the frontiers formerly set up as insurmountable, surrounded by the silent respect of the one who has guided him without making his presence felt.
To follow the hidden laws of nature—that is true rest; and in this specific case, since humans are meant to be intelligent beings, the more intelligent their actions are, the more they find peace in them. When a child acts in a chaotic and disconnected way, his nervous energy is under a lot of stress; on the other hand, his nervous energy increases and expands through intelligent actions that bring him genuine satisfaction and a sense of pride for overcoming challenges, realizing he exists in a world beyond previously perceived limits, surrounded by the quiet respect of the one who has guided him without being noticed.
This "multiplication of nervous energy" represents a process which can be physiologically analysed, and which comes from the development of the organs by rational exercise, from better circulation of the blood, from the quickened activity of all the tissues—all factors favourable to the development of the body and guaranteeing physical health. The spirit aids the body in its growth; the heart, the nerves and the muscles are helpful[Pg 355] in their evolution by the activity of the spirit, since the upward path for soul and body is one and the same.
This "multiplication of nervous energy" is a process that can be understood biologically, stemming from the development of organs through proper exercise, improved blood circulation, and increased activity of all tissues—factors that support bodily development and ensure physical health. The mind supports the body's growth; the heart, nerves, and muscles benefit from the mind's activity, as the journey for both the soul and body is interconnected.
By analogy, it can be said of the intellectual development of the child, that the mind of infancy, although characteristically disorderly, is also "a means searching for its end," which goes through exhausting experiments, left, as it frequently is, to its own resources, and too often really persecuted. Once in our public park in Rome, the Pincian Gardens, I saw a baby of about a year and a half, a beautiful smiling child, who was working away trying to fill a little pail by shoveling gravel into it. Beside him was a smartly dressed nurse evidently very fond of him, the sort of nurse who would consider that she gave the child the most affectionate and intelligent care. It was time to go home and the nurse was patiently exhorting the baby to leave his work and let her put him into the baby-carriage. Seeing that her exhortations made no impression on the little fellow's firmness, she herself filled the pail with gravel and set pail and baby into the carriage with the fixed conviction that she had given him what he wanted.
By comparison, we can say that a child's intellectual development is like this: the mind of a young child, while often chaotic, is also "a means searching for its end," going through tiring experiments, frequently left to its own devices, and too often genuinely frustrated. Once, in our public park in Rome, the Pincian Gardens, I saw a baby about a year and a half old, a beautiful smiling child, trying to fill a small bucket by shoveling gravel into it. Next to him was a neatly dressed nurse who clearly adored him, the kind of nurse who would believe she provided the most loving and thoughtful care. It was time to head home, and the nurse was patiently encouraging the little one to stop his work and let her put him in the stroller. When she realized her encouragement wasn't affecting the little guy's determination, she took it upon herself to fill the bucket with gravel and placed both the bucket and the child into the stroller, convinced that she had given him what he wanted.
I was struck by the loud cries of the child and by the expression of protest against violence and injustice which wrote itself on his little face. What an accumulation of wrongs weighed down that nascent intelligence! The little boy did not wish to have the pail full of gravel; he wished to go through the motions necessary to fill it, thus satisfying a need of his vigorous organism. The child's unconscious aim was his own self-development; not the external fact of a pail full of little stones. The vivid attractions of the external world were only empty apparitions; the need of his life was a reality. As a matter of fact, if he had filled his pail he would probably have[Pg 356] emptied it out again in order to keep on filling it up until his inner self was satisfied. It was the feeling of working towards this satisfaction which, a few moments before, had made his face so rosy and smiling; spiritual joy, exercise, and sunshine, were the three rays of light ministering to his splendid life.
I was moved by the loud cries of the child and the look of protest against violence and injustice that was etched on his small face. What a heavy load of wrongs burdened that developing mind! The little boy didn’t want the pail full of gravel; he wanted to go through the actions needed to fill it, thus fulfilling a need of his active body. The child’s unconscious goal was his own self-growth, not the simple fact of a pail full of little stones. The vibrant appeals of the physical world were just empty illusions; the need for his life was a reality. In fact, if he had filled his pail, he would probably have dumped it out again to keep filling it until his inner self felt satisfied. It was the feeling of working towards that satisfaction which, just moments earlier, had made his face so rosy and cheerful; spiritual joy, exercise, and sunshine were the three beams of light nourishing his vibrant life.
This commonplace episode in the life of that child, is a detail of what happens to all children, even the best and most cherished. They are not understood, because the adult judges them by his own measure: he thinks that the child's wish is to obtain some tangible object, and lovingly helps him to do this: whereas the child as a rule has for his unconscious desire, his own self-development. Hence he despises everything already attained, and yearns for that which is still to be sought for. For instance, he prefers the action of dressing himself to the state of being dressed, even finely dressed. He prefers the act of washing himself to the satisfaction of being clean: he prefers to make a little house for himself, rather than merely to own it. His own self-development is his true and almost his only pleasure. The self-development of the little baby up to the end of his first year consists to a large degree in taking in nutrition; but afterwards it consists in aiding the orderly establishment of the psycho-physiological functions of his organism.
This ordinary episode in that child's life is something that happens to all kids, even the best-loved ones. They're often misunderstood because adults judge them based on their own perspectives: they think the child's wish is just to get something tangible and lovingly help them do that. However, the child usually has an unconscious desire for personal growth. As a result, they tend to dismiss what they’ve already achieved and long for what they have yet to discover. For example, they prefer the process of dressing themselves over simply being dressed, even if they look great. They value washing themselves more than just feeling clean; they enjoy building a little house for themselves instead of just having one. Their true and nearly sole pleasure comes from their own development. For a baby, the self-development during the first year largely focuses on taking in nutrition, but after that, it centers on assisting the proper establishment of the psycho-physiological functions of their body.
That beautiful baby in the Pincian Gardens is the symbol of this: he wished to co-ordinate his voluntary actions; to exercise his muscles by lifting; to train his eye to estimate distances; to exercise his intelligence in the reasoning connected with his undertaking; to stimulate his will-power by deciding his own actions; whilst she who loved him, believing that his aim was to possess some pebbles, made him wretched.[Pg 357]
That beautiful baby in the Pincian Gardens is a symbol of this: he wanted to coordinate his voluntary actions; to work his muscles by lifting; to train his eye to judge distances; to use his intelligence in reasoning related to what he was doing; to strengthen his willpower by choosing his own actions; while the person who loved him, thinking that his goal was to collect some pebbles, made him unhappy.[Pg 357]
A similar error is that which we repeat so frequently when we fancy that the desire of the student is to possess a piece of information. We aid him to grasp intellectually this detached piece of knowledge, and, preventing by this means his self-development, we make him wretched. It is generally believed in schools that the way to attain, satisfaction is "to learn something." But by leaving the children in our schools in liberty we have been able with great clearness to follow them in their natural method of spontaneous self-development.
A similar mistake is one we often make when we think that what students want is just to get a piece of information. We help them understand this separate bit of knowledge, and by doing this, we block their personal growth and make them unhappy. In schools, it’s widely thought that the way to achieve satisfaction is "to learn something." However, by allowing children the freedom in our schools, we've been able to clearly observe their natural process of spontaneous self-development.
To have learned something is for the child only a point of departure. When he has learned the meaning of an exercise, then he begins to enjoy repeating it, and he does repeat it an infinite number of times, with the most evident satisfaction. He enjoys executing that act because by means of it he is developing his psychic activities.
To have learned something is just the starting point for a child. Once they understand the meaning of an exercise, they start to enjoy doing it again and again, finding great satisfaction in the repetition. They take pleasure in performing that action because it helps them develop their mental skills.
There results from the observation of this fact a criticism of what is done to-day in many schools. Often, for instance when the pupils are questioned, the teacher says to someone who is eager to answer, "No, not you, because you know it" and puts her question specially to the pupils who she thinks are uncertain of the answer. Those who do not know are made to speak, those who do know to be silent. This happens because of the general habit of considering the act of knowing something as final.
The observation of this fact leads to criticism of what's happening in many schools today. For example, when students are asked questions, the teacher often tells a eager student, "No, not you, because you already know," and specifically directs the question to those who seem unsure of the answer. The ones who don’t know are encouraged to speak up, while those who do know are told to stay quiet. This occurs because of the common tendency to view knowing something as the end of the discussion.
And yet how many times it happens to us in ordinary life to repeat the very thing we know best, the thing we care most for, the thing to which some living force in us responds. We love to sing musical phrases very familiar, hence enjoyed and become a part of the fabric of our lives. We love to repeat stories of things which please us, which we know very well, even though we are quite[Pg 358] aware that we are saying nothing new. No matter how many times we repeat the Lord's Prayer, it is always new. No two persons could be more convinced of mutual love than sweethearts and yet they are the very ones who repeat endlessly that they love each other.
And yet how often does it happen in everyday life that we repeat the very things we know best, the things we care about most, the things that spark some living force within us? We love to sing familiar melodies, which we enjoy and that become part of our lives. We love to tell stories about things that please us, even though we know them very well, fully aware that we're not saying anything new. No matter how many times we say the Lord's Prayer, it always feels fresh. No two people can be more confident in their mutual love than couples, yet they're the ones who endlessly repeat their love for each other.
But in order to repeat in this manner, there must first exist the idea to be repeated. A mental grasp of the idea, is indispensable to the beginning of repetition. The exercise which develops life, consists in the repetition, not in the mere grasp of the idea. When a child has attained this stage, of repeating an exercise, he is on the way to self-development, and the external sign of this condition is his self-discipline.
But to repeat in this way, the idea to be repeated must first exist. Understanding the idea is essential to start the process of repetition. The exercise that fosters growth is in the repetition, not in just understanding the idea. When a child reaches this stage of repeating an exercise, he is on the path to self-development, and the external sign of this state is his self-discipline.
This phenomenon does not always occur. The same exercises are not repeated by children of all ages. In fact, repetition corresponds to a need. Here steps in the experimental method of education. It is necessary to offer those exercises which correspond to the need of development felt by an organism, and if the child's age has carried him past a certain need, it is never possible to obtain, in its fulness, a development which missed its proper moment. Hence children grow up, often fatally and irrevocably, imperfectly developed.
This phenomenon doesn't always happen. The same exercises aren't repeated by kids of all ages. In fact, repetition is linked to a need. This is where the experimental method of education comes in. It's important to provide exercises that match the developmental needs of a child, and if the child has outgrown a certain need, it’s impossible to achieve a complete development that missed its right moment. As a result, children often grow up, sometimes unfortunately and irreversibly, underdeveloped.
Another very interesting observation is that which relates to the length of time needed for the execution of actions. Children, who are undertaking something for the first time are extremely slow. Their life is governed in this respect by laws especially different from ours. Little children accomplish slowly and perseveringly, various complicated operations agreeable to them, such as dressing, undressing, cleaning the room, washing themselves, setting the table, eating, etc. In all this they are extremely patient, overcoming all the difficulties pre[Pg 359]sented by an organism still in process of formation. But we, on the other hand, noticing that they are "tiring themselves out" or "wasting time" in accomplishing something which we would do in a moment and without the least effort, put ourselves in the child's place and do it ourselves. Always with the same erroneous idea, that the end to be obtained is the completion of the action, we dress and wash the child, we snatch out of his hands objects which he loves to handle, we pour the soup into his bowl, we feed him, we set the table for him. And after such services, we consider him with that injustice always practised by those who domineer over others even with benevolent intentions, to be incapable and inept. We often speak of him as "impatient" simply because we are not patient enough to allow his actions to follow laws of time differing from our own; we call him "tyrannical" exactly because we employ tyranny towards him. This stain, this false imputation, this calumny on childhood has become an integral part of the theories concerning childhood, in reality so patient and gentle.
Another really interesting observation is about how much time it takes to get things done. Kids who are trying something for the first time are super slow. Their experience looks different from ours. Little children slowly and persistently do various complicated tasks they enjoy, like getting dressed, undressing, cleaning their room, washing themselves, setting the table, eating, and so on. Throughout all this, they are extremely patient, tackling the challenges that come with a developing body. On the other hand, when we see they're "wearing themselves out" or "wasting time" on something we could do in a snap and with barely any effort, we just jump in and do it for them. With the same wrong mindset that the goal is just to finish the task, we dress and wash the child, take away things they love to play with, pour soup into their bowl, feed them, and set the table for them. And after doing all this, we unfairly label them as incapable and clumsy, acting as if we're doing it all for their benefit. We often call them "impatient" just because we lack the patience to let them follow their own timing, and we label them "tyrannical" exactly because we're being tyrannical toward them. This misunderstanding, this false accusation, this slander against childhood has sadly become a key part of theories about childhood, which is actually so patient and gentle.
The child, like every strong creature fighting for the right to live, rebels against whatever offends that occult impulse within him which is the voice of nature, and which he ought to obey; and he shows by violent actions, by screaming and weeping that he has been overborne and forced away from his mission in life. He shows himself to be a rebel, a revolutionist, an iconoclast, against those who do not understand him and who, fancying that they are helping him, are really pushing him backward in the highway of life. Thus even the adult who loves him, rivets about his neck another calumny, confusing his defence of his molested life with a form of innate naughtiness characteristic of little children.[Pg 360]
The child, like every strong being fighting for the right to live, pushes back against anything that offends that deep urge within him which is the voice of nature, and which he should follow; and he shows through loud actions, by screaming and crying, that he has been overwhelmed and pushed away from his purpose in life. He reveals himself to be a rebel, a revolutionary, an iconoclast, against those who don’t understand him and who, believing they are helping him, are actually holding him back on his journey through life. So even the adult who loves him adds another burden around his neck, misinterpreting his defense against his troubled existence as a form of natural mischief typical of young children.[Pg 360]
What would become of us if we fell into the midst of a population of jugglers, or of lightning-change impersonators of the variety-hall? What should we do if, as we continued to act in our usual way, we saw ourselves assailed by these sleight-of-hand performers, hustled into our clothes, fed so rapidly that we could scarcely swallow, if everything we tried to do was snatched from our hands and completed in a twinkling and we ourselves reduced to impotence and to a humiliating inertia? Not knowing how else to express our confusion we would defend ourselves with blows and yells from these madmen, and they having only the best will in the world to serve us, would call us haughty, rebellious, and incapable of doing anything. We, who know our own milieu, would say to those people, "Come into our countries and you will see the splendid civilisation we have established, you will see our wonderful achievements." These jugglers would admire us infinitely, hardly able to believe their eyes, as they observed our world, so full of beauty and activity, so well regulated, so peaceful, so kindly, but all so much slower than theirs.
What would happen to us if we ended up in a crowd of jugglers or quick-change performers from a variety show? What would we do if, as we went about our usual way, we found ourselves overwhelmed by these tricksters, pushed into our outfits, fed so quickly that we could hardly swallow, if everything we tried to do was taken from our hands and done in an instant, leaving us powerless and embarrassed? Not knowing how else to show our confusion, we would lash out with blows and shouts at these crazies, and they, only wanting to help us, would call us proud, rebellious, and incapable of doing anything. We, who know our own surroundings, would tell them, "Come to our countries and you’ll see the amazing civilization we’ve built, you’ll see our incredible achievements." These jugglers would be in awe of us, barely able to believe their eyes as they watched our world, so full of beauty and energy, so well-ordered, so peaceful, so kind, but all so much slower than theirs.
Something of this sort occurs between children and adults.
Something like this happens between kids and adults.
It is exactly in the repetition of the exercises that the education of the senses consists; their aim is not that the child shall know colours, forms and the different qualities of objects, but that he refine his senses through an exercise of attention, of comparison, of judgment. These exercises are true intellectual gymnastics. Such gymnastics, reasonably directed by means of various devices, aid in the formation of the intellect, just as physical exercises fortify the general health and quicken the growth[Pg 361] of the body. The child who trains his various senses separately, by means of external stimuli, concentrates his attention and develops, piece by piece, his mental activities, just as with separately prepared movements he trains his muscular activities. These mental gymnastics are not merely psycho-sensory, but they prepare the way for spontaneous association of ideas, for ratiocination developing out of definite knowledge, for a harmoniously balanced intellect. They are the powder-trains that bring about those mental explosions which delight the child so intensely when he makes discoveries in the world about him, when he, at the same time, ponders over and glories in the new things which are revealed to him in the outside world, and in the exquisite emotions of his own growing consciousness; and finally when there spring up within him, almost by a process of spontaneous ripening, like the internal phenomena of growth, the external products of learning—writing and reading.
It’s precisely in repeating the exercises that sensory education takes place; the goal isn’t for the child to simply know colors, shapes, and the various qualities of objects, but to hone their senses through focused attention, comparison, and judgment. These exercises are true brain workouts. When guided properly with different tools, they help develop the intellect, just as physical exercises improve overall health and promote bodily growth[Pg 361]. A child who trains each of their senses individually through external stimuli focuses their attention and gradually develops their thinking skills, much like how targeted movements enhance their muscle control. These mental workouts are not just about sensory experiences; they pave the way for spontaneous connections of ideas, reasoning based on solid knowledge, and a well-rounded intellect. They are the catalysts that spark those mental breakthroughs that excite the child when they discover new things in their environment, as they reflect on and take joy in the new insights revealed to them outside, along with the beautiful feelings of their expanding awareness. Ultimately, this process leads to the natural development of essential skills like reading and writing.
I happened once to see a two-year-old child, son of a medical colleague of mine, who, fairly fleeing away from his mother who had brought him to me, threw himself on the litter of things covering his father's desk, the rectangular writing-pad, the round cover of the ink-well. I was touched to see the intelligent little creature trying his best to go through the exercises which our children repeat with such endless pleasure till they have fully committed them to memory. The father and the mother pulled the child away, reproving him, and explaining that there was no use trying to keep that child from handling his father's desk-furniture, "The child is restless and naughty." How often we see all children reproved because, though they are told not to, they will "take hold of everything." Now, it is precisely by means of guiding and developing[Pg 362] this natural instinct "to take hold of everything," and to recognise the relations of geometrical figures, that we prepare our little four-year-old men for the joy and triumph they experience later over the phenomenon of spontaneous writing.
I once saw a two-year-old child, the son of a medical colleague, who, while trying to escape his mother who had brought him to me, threw himself onto the mess covering his father's desk—the rectangular notepad and the round ink well. I was moved to watch this bright little one doing his best to go through the exercises that our kids repeat with endless joy until they’ve memorized them completely. The father and mother pulled the child away, scolding him and explaining that there was no point in trying to stop him from playing with his father’s desk items, saying, "The child is restless and naughty." We often see children get scolded because, even when told not to, they can’t help but "take hold of everything." Yet, it’s precisely by guiding and nurturing this natural instinct "to take hold of everything" and recognizing the relationships between geometric shapes that we prepare our four-year-olds for the joy and triumph they will later feel when they discover spontaneous writing.
The child who throws himself on the writing-pad, the cover to the ink-well, and such objects, always struggling in vain to attain his desire, always hindered and thwarted by people stronger than he, always excited and weeping over the failure of his desperate efforts, is wasting nervous force. His parents are mistaken if they think that such a child ever gets any real rest, just as they are mistaken when they call "naughty" the little man longing for the foundations of his intellectual edifice. The children in our schools are the ones who are really at rest, ardently and blessedly free to take out and put back in their right places or grooves, the geometric figures offered to their instinct for higher self-development; and they, rejoicing in the most entire spiritual calm, have no notion that their eyes and hands are initiating them into the mysteries of a new language.
The child who throws himself onto the writing pad, the cover of the inkwell, and other objects, always struggling in vain to get what he wants, always held back and stopped by people stronger than he is, always excited and crying over the failure of his desperate attempts, is wasting his nervous energy. His parents are mistaken if they think that such a child ever really rests, just as they are wrong when they call the little boy who longs for the foundation of his intellectual growth "naughty." The children in our schools are the ones who are truly at rest, eagerly and happily free to take out and put back the geometric shapes that appeal to their instinct for higher self-development; and they, enjoying complete spiritual peace, have no idea that their eyes and hands are introducing them to the mysteries of a new language.
The majority of our children become calm as they go through such exercises, because their nervous system is at rest. Then we say that such children are quiet and good; external discipline, so eagerly sought after in ordinary schools is more than achieved.
Most of our kids become calm as they engage in these activities because their nervous system is relaxed. We then say that these kids are quiet and well-behaved; external discipline, which is often pursued in regular schools, is more than accomplished.
However, as a calm man and a self-disciplined man are not one and the same, so here the fact which manifests itself externally by the calm of the children is in reality a phenomenon merely physical and partial compared to the real self-discipline which is being developed in them.
However, just because a man is calm doesn’t mean he is self-disciplined. The outward calmness displayed by the children is actually just a physical and limited phenomenon, compared to the true self-discipline that is being cultivated within them.
Often (and this is another misconception) we think all we need to do, to obtain a voluntary action from a child,[Pg 363] is to order him to do it. We pretend that this phenomenon of a forced voluntary action exists, and we call this pretext, "the obedience of the child." We find little children specially disobedient, or rather their resistance, by the time they are four or five years old, has become so great that we are in despair and are almost tempted to give up trying to make them obey. We force ourselves to praise to little children "the virtue of obedience" a virtue which, according to our accepted prejudices, should belong specially to infancy, should be the "infantile virtue" yet we fail to learn anything from the fact that we are led to emphasize it so strongly because we can only with the greatest difficulty make children practise it.
Often (and this is another misconception) we think all we need to do to get a child to take voluntary action is to tell them to do it. We act like this idea of a forced voluntary action really exists, and we call this idea "the obedience of the child." We find that little kids are especially disobedient, or rather their resistance becomes so strong by the time they are four or five years old that we feel hopeless and are almost ready to give up trying to get them to obey. We convince ourselves to praise little children for "the virtue of obedience," a quality that, according to our common beliefs, should naturally belong to childhood and be considered the "infantile virtue." Yet we fail to understand that we emphasize it so much because we can only get children to practice it with the greatest difficulty.
It is a very common mistake, this of trying to obtain by means of prayers, or orders, or violence, what is difficult, or impossible to get. Thus, for instance, we ask little children to be obedient, and little children in their turn ask for the moon.
It’s a common mistake to think we can achieve what’s hard or impossible through prayers, demands, or force. For example, we expect young kids to be obedient, while they, in turn, ask for the moon.
We need only reflect that this "obedience" which we treat so lightly, occurs later, as a natural tendency in older children, and then as an instinct in the adult to realise that it springs spontaneously into being, and that it is one of the strongest instincts of humanity. We find that society rests on a foundation of marvellous obedience, and that civilisation goes forward on a road made by obedience. Human organisations are often founded on an abuse of obedience, associations of criminals have obedience as their key-stone.
We just need to think about how this "obedience" that we often take for granted later becomes a natural tendency in older children and then an instinct in adults. It emerges spontaneously and is one of humanity's strongest instincts. We see that society is built on a remarkable foundation of obedience, and that civilization progresses along a path created by obedience. Human organizations are often based on a misuse of obedience, and criminal groups rely on obedience as their key principle.
How many times social problems centre about the necessity of rousing man from a state of "obedience" which has led him to be exploited and brutalised!
How many times do social problems focus on the need to wake people up from a state of "obedience" that has caused them to be exploited and mistreated!
Obedience naturally is sacrifice. We are so accustomed to an infinity of obedience in the world, to a condi[Pg 364]tion of self-sacrifice, to a readiness for renunciation, that we call matrimony the "blessed condition," although it is made up of obedience and self-sacrifice. The soldier, whose lot in life is to obey if it kills him is envied by the common people, while we consider anyone who tries to escape from obedience as a malefactor or a madman. Besides, how many people have had the deeply spiritual experience of an ardent desire to obey something or some person leading them along the path of life—more than this, a desire to sacrifice something for the sake of this obedience.
Obedience is essentially sacrifice. We are so used to seeing endless obedience in the world, to a state of self-sacrifice, to a willingness to give things up, that we call marriage the "blessed state," even though it consists of obedience and self-sacrifice. The soldier, whose duty is to obey even at the cost of his life, is envied by ordinary people, while we view anyone who tries to break free from obedience as a criminal or a lunatic. Moreover, how many people have had that deeply spiritual experience of a strong desire to obey someone or something guiding them through life—more than that, a desire to sacrifice something for the sake of that obedience?
It is therefore entirely natural that, loving the child, we should point out to him that obedience is the law of life, and there is nothing surprising in the anxiety felt by nearly everyone who is confronted with the characteristic disobedience of little children. But obedience can only be reached through a complex formation of the psychic personality. To obey, it is necessary not only to wish to obey, but also to know how to. Since, when a command to do a certain thing is given, we presuppose a corresponding active or inhibitive power of the child, it is plain that obedience must follow the formation of the will and of the mind. To prepare, in detail, this formation by means of detached exercises is therefore indirectly, to urge the child towards obedience. The method which is the subject of this book contains in every part an exercise for the will-power, when the child completes co-ordinated actions directed towards a given end, when he achieves something he set out to do, when he repeats patiently his exercises, he is training his positive will-power. Similarly, in a very complicated series of exercises he is establishing through activity his powers of inhibition; for instance in the "lesson of silence," which calls for a long con[Pg 365]tinued inhibition of many actions, while the child is waiting to be called and later for a rigorous self-control when he is called and would like to answer joyously and run to his teacher, but instead is perfectly silent, moves very carefully, taking the greatest pains not to knock against chair or table or to make a noise.
It’s completely natural that, out of love for the child, we point out that obedience is a fundamental rule of life. It’s no surprise that most people feel anxious when faced with the typical disobedience of young children. However, obedience can only be developed through a complex formation of the child's psychological personality. To obey, a child not only needs to want to obey but also needs to know how to do so. When a command is given, we assume the child has the corresponding ability to act or hold back, so it’s clear that obedience must come after the development of will and intellect. Preparing this development through targeted exercises indirectly encourages the child toward obedience. The method discussed in this book includes exercises designed to strengthen willpower. When a child completes coordinated actions aimed at a specific goal, or patiently practices their exercises, they are training their positive willpower. In a similarly complex series of exercises, they are also developing their inhibitory powers. For example, in the "lesson of silence," the child must practice prolonged inhibition of many actions while waiting to be called, and later must exercise strict self-control when they want to answer joyfully and rush to their teacher but instead remain perfectly silent, moving very carefully to avoid bumping into furniture or making any noise.
Other inhibitive exercises are the arithmetical ones, when the child having drawn a number by lot, must take from the great mass of objects before him, apparently entirely at his disposition, only the quantity corresponding to the number in his hand, whereas (as experience has proved) he would like to take the greatest number possible. Furthermore if he chances to draw the zero he sits patiently with empty hands. Still another training for the inhibitive will-power is in "the lesson of zero" when the child, called upon to come up zero times and give zero kisses, stands quiet, conquering with a visible effort the instinct which would lead him to "obey" the call. The child at our school dinners who carries the big tureen full of hot soup, isolates himself from every external stimulant which might disturb him, resists his childish impulse to run and jump, does not yield to the temptation to brush away the fly on his face, and is entirely concentrated on the great responsibility of not dropping or tipping the tureen. A little thing of four and a half, every time he set the tureen down on a table so that the little guests might help themselves, gave a hop and a skip, then took up the tureen again to carry it to another table, repressing himself to a sober walk. In spite of his desire to play he never left his task before he had passed soup to the twenty tables, and he never forgot the vigilance necessary to control his actions.
Other self-control exercises include arithmetic tasks, where a child draws a number at random and must choose from a large group of objects in front of them, but only the amount that matches the number they picked, even though they would rather take as many as they can. If they happen to draw zero, they sit patiently with empty hands. Another exercise in self-control is "the lesson of zero," where when asked to come up zero times and give zero kisses, the child stands still, visibly fighting the urge to "obey" the request. At our school dinners, the child carrying the large soup tureen isolates themselves from any distractions that could disrupt them, resists their natural urge to run and jump, doesn't give in to the temptation to swat away the fly on their face, and remains fully focused on the important task of not dropping or spilling the tureen. A little one, only four and a half years old, would hop and skip every time they set the tureen on the table for the other kids to serve themselves, then pick it up again to take it to another table, forcing themselves to walk calmly. Despite wanting to play, they never left their task until they had served soup to all twenty tables, and they always remembered to stay vigilant about controlling their actions.
Will-power, like all other activities is invigorated and[Pg 366] developed through methodical exercises, and all our exercises for will-power are also mental and practical. To the casual onlooker the child seems to be learning exactitude and grace of action, to be refining his senses, to be learning how to read and write; but much more profoundly he is learning how to become his own master, how to be a man of prompt and resolute will.
Willpower, like any other skill, is strengthened and[Pg 366] developed through systematic practice, and all our exercises for willpower are both mental and practical. To the outside observer, the child appears to be mastering precision and grace in his movements, refining his senses, and learning to read and write; but on a deeper level, he is learning how to take charge of himself, how to be someone with quick and determined will.
We often hear it said that a child's will should be "broken" that the best education for the will of the child is to learn to give it up to the will of adults. Leaving out of the question the injustice which is at the root of every act of tyranny, this idea is irrational because the child cannot give up what he does not possess. We prevent him in this way from forming his own will-power, and we commit the greatest and most blameworthy mistake. He never has time or opportunity to test himself, to estimate his own force and his own limitations because he is always interrupted and subjected to our tyranny, and languishes in injustice because he is always being bitterly reproached for not having what adults are perpetually destroying.
We often hear people say that a child's will should be "broken," and that the best way to educate a child's will is to teach them to yield to the will of adults. Setting aside the injustice at the heart of every act of tyranny, this idea is flawed because a child cannot give up what they don't have. By doing this, we prevent them from developing their own willpower, and we make a significant and blameworthy mistake. They never have the time or opportunity to test themselves, to understand their own strengths and limitations, because they are constantly interrupted and subjected to our tyranny. They suffer in injustice as they are continuously criticized for not having what adults are always undermining.
There springs up as a consequence of this, childish timidity, which is a moral malady acquired by a will which could not develop; and which with the usual calumny with which the tyrant consciously or not, covers up his own mistakes, we consider as an inherent trait of childhood. The children in our schools are never timid. One of their most fascinating qualities is the frankness with which they treat people, with which they go on working in the presence of others, and showing their work frankly, calling for sympathy. That moral monstrosity, a repressed and timid child, who is at his ease nowhere except alone with his playmates, or with street urchins,[Pg 367] because his will-power was allowed to grow only in the shade, disappears in our schools. He presents an example of thoughtless barbarism, which resembles the artificial compression of the bodies of those children intended for "court dwarfs," museum monstrosities or buffoons. Yet this is the treatment under which nearly all the children of our time are growing up spiritually.
As a result of this, childish shyness emerges, which is a moral issue caused by a will that couldn't develop; and with the usual slander that the tyrant uses, whether intentionally or not, to cover up his own failures, we see it as an inherent trait of childhood. The kids in our schools are never shy. One of their most captivating traits is the honesty with which they interact with others, the way they continue working in front of people, and how they openly share their work, seeking support. That moral disaster, a repressed and timid child who feels comfortable only when alone with his friends or with street kids,[Pg 367] because his willpower was only allowed to grow in hiding, vanishes in our schools. He serves as an example of thoughtless brutality, reminiscent of the artificial constriction of bodies of children intended to be "court dwarfs," museum oddities or jesters. Yet this is the kind of environment under which nearly all the children of our time are maturing spiritually.
As a matter of fact in all the pedagogical congresses one hears that the great peril of our time is the lack of individual character in the scholars; yet these alarmists do not point out that this condition is due to the way in which education is managed, to scholastic slavery, which has for its specialty the repression of will-power and of force of character. The remedy is simply to enfranchise human development.
In all the educational conferences, it's widely noted that a major concern today is the absence of individual character in students; however, these critics often overlook that this issue stems from how education is structured, leading to a kind of academic slavery that suppresses willpower and strength of character. The solution is straightforward: we need to promote personal growth and freedom.
Besides the exercises it offers for developing will-power, the other factor in obedience is the capacity to perform the act it becomes necessary to obey. One of the most interesting observations made by my pupil Anna Maccheroni (at first in the school in Milan and then in that in the Via Guisti in Rome), relates to the connection between obedience in a child and his "knowing how." Obedience appears in the child as a latent instinct as soon as his personality begins to take form. For instance, a child begins to try a certain exercise and suddenly some time he goes through it perfectly; he is delighted, stares at it, and wishes to do it over again, but for some time the exercise is not a success. Then comes a time when he can do it nearly every time he tries voluntarily but makes mistakes if someone else asks him to do it. The external command does not as yet produce the voluntary act. When, however, the exercise always succeeds, with absolute certainty, then an order from someone else brings[Pg 368] about on the child's part, orderly adequate action; that is, the child is able each time to execute the command received. That these facts (with variations in individual cases) are laws of psychical development is apparent from everyone's experience with children in school or at home.
Besides the exercises it provides for building willpower, another key factor in obedience is the ability to carry out the necessary actions. One of the most intriguing insights from my student Anna Maccheroni—first in the school in Milan and later in the one on Via Guisti in Rome—relates to the link between a child’s obedience and their "know-how." Obedience seems to emerge in a child as a hidden instinct as their personality starts to develop. For example, a child might attempt a certain task and, after some time, suddenly master it perfectly; they feel thrilled, stare at it, and want to repeat it. However, for a while, the task may not be successful. Eventually, there comes a point when they can almost always do it correctly when they try on their own but struggle if someone else asks them to perform it. The external command doesn't yet trigger their voluntary action. However, once the child consistently succeeds with complete confidence, an order from someone else leads to a well-organized response from them; that is, the child is able to follow the command every time. It’s clear from everyone’s experience with children at home or in school that these observations (with some variations in individual cases) are principles of psychological development.
One often hears a child say, "I did do such and such a thing but now I can't!" and a teacher disappointed by the incompetence of a pupil will say, "Yet that child was doing it all right—and now he can't!"
One often hears a child say, "I did such and such a thing, but now I can't!" and a teacher, disappointed by a student's inability, will say, "That child was doing it perfectly—and now they can't!"
Finally there is the period of complete development in which the capacity to perform some operation is permanently acquired. There are, therefore, three periods: a first, subconscious one, when in the confused mind of the child, order produces itself by a mysterious inner impulse from out the midst of disorder, producing as an external result a completed act, which, however, being outside the field of consciousness, cannot be reproduced at will; a second, conscious period, when there is some action on the part of the will which is present during the process of the development and establishing of the acts; and a third period when the will can direct and cause the acts, thus answering the command from someone else.
Finally, there’s the stage of complete development where the ability to perform a certain task is permanently acquired. There are, therefore, three stages: first, a subconscious one, when in the confused mind of the child, order emerges from disorder through a mysterious inner drive, resulting in a completed action that, however, is outside of conscious awareness and cannot be reproduced at will; second, a conscious stage, where there is some deliberate effort from the will during the process of developing and establishing those actions; and third, a stage where the will can guide and execute the actions, responding to commands from others.
Now, obedience follows a similar sequence. When in the first period of spiritual disorder, the child does not obey it is exactly as if he were psychically deaf, and out of hearing of commands. In the second period he would like to obey, he looks as though he understood the command and would like to respond to it, but cannot,—or at least does not always succeed in doing it, is not "quick to mind" and shows no pleasure when he does. In the third period he obeys at once, with enthusiasm, and as he becomes more and more perfect in the exercises he is[Pg 369] proud that he knows how to obey. This is the period in which he runs joyously to obey, and leaves at the most imperceptible request whatever is interesting him so that he may quit the solitude of his own life and enter, with the act of obedience into the spiritual existence of another.
Obedience follows a similar pattern. In the initial stage of spiritual disarray, the child doesn’t obey as if he were completely unable to hear commands. In the second stage, he wants to obey; he seems to understand the command and wishes to respond, but he can’t—or at least doesn’t always succeed, isn’t “quick to respond,” and shows no enjoyment when he does. In the third stage, he obeys immediately, with enthusiasm, and as he gets better at the tasks, he feels[Pg 369] proud of being able to obey. This is the time when he eagerly runs to comply, dropping whatever interests him at the subtlest request so he can leave his own solitary world and, through the act of obedience, enter into the shared spiritual existence of another.
To this order, established in a consciousness formerly chaotic, are due all the phenomena of discipline and of mental development, which open out like a new Creation. From minds thus set in order, when "night is separated from day" come sudden emotions and mental feats which recall the Biblical story of Creation. The child has in his mind not only what he has laboriously acquired, but the free gifts which flow from spiritual life, the first flowers of affection, of gentleness, of spontaneous love for righteousness which perfume the souls of such children and give promise of the "fruits of the spirit" of St. Paul—"The fruit of the Spirit is love, joy, peace, long-suffering gentleness, goodness, faith, meekness."
To this order, established in a mind that was once chaotic, we owe all the experiences of discipline and mental development that unfold like a new creation. From minds organized in this way, when "night is separated from day," come sudden emotions and mental achievements that reflect the Biblical story of creation. A child holds not only what they have carefully learned but also the natural gifts that arise from a spiritual life—the initial signs of affection, kindness, and instinctive love for what is right that enrich the souls of such children and promise the "fruits of the spirit" mentioned by St. Paul—"The fruit of the Spirit is love, joy, peace, patience, kindness, goodness, faithfulness, gentleness."
They are virtuous because they exercise patience in repeating their exercises, long-suffering in yielding to the commands and desires of others, good in rejoicing in the well-being of others without jealousy or rivalry; they live, doing good in joyousness of heart and in peace, and they are eminently, marvellously industrious. But they are not proud of such righteousness because they were not conscious of acquiring it as a moral superiority. They have set their feet in the path leading to righteousness, simply because it was the only way to attain true self-development and learning; and they enjoy with simple hearts the fruits of peace that are to be gathered along that path.[Pg 370]
They are virtuous because they show patience in practicing their skills, are tolerant in following the commands and wishes of others, and feel joy in the happiness of others without jealousy or competition; they live by doing good with joyful hearts and in peace, and they are incredibly hardworking. However, they don’t take pride in their righteousness because they aren’t aware of having achieved it as a form of moral superiority. They’ve chosen the path to righteousness simply because it’s the only way to achieve true self-growth and learning; and they genuinely enjoy the peaceful rewards that come from walking that path.[Pg 370]
These are the first outlines of an experiment which shows a form of indirect discipline in which there is substituted for the critical and sermonizing teacher a rational organisation of work and of liberty for the child. It involves a conception of life more usual in religious fields than in those of academic pedagogy, inasmuch as it has recourse to the spiritual energies of mankind, but it is founded on work and on liberty which are the two paths to all civic progress.
These are the initial outlines of an experiment that demonstrates a type of indirect discipline where a rational organization of work and freedom for the child replaces the critical and lecturing teacher. It involves a perspective on life that is more common in religious contexts than in academic teaching, as it draws on the spiritual energies of humanity. However, it is based on work and freedom, which are the two paths to all civic progress.
CHAPTER XXII
Conclusions and Takeaways
In the "Children's Houses," the old-time teacher, who wore herself out maintaining discipline of immobility, and who wasted her breath in loud and continual discourse, has disappeared.
In the "Children's Houses," the traditional teacher, who exhausted herself trying to keep the kids still and who talked endlessly and loudly, is no longer around.
For this teacher we have substituted the didactic material, which contains within itself the control of errors and which makes auto-education possible to each child. The teacher has thus become a director of the spontaneous work of the children. She is not a passive force, a silent presence.
For this teacher, we have replaced the didactic material with resources that allow for self-checking and enable each child to educate themselves. The teacher has now become a director of the children's natural learning processes. She is not a passive force or a silent presence.
The children are occupied each one in a different way, and the directress, watching them, can make psychological observations which, if collected in an orderly way and according to scientific standards, should do much toward the reconstruction of child psychology and the development of experimental psychology. I believe that I have by my method established the conditions necessary to the development of scientific pedagogy; and whoever adopts this method opens, in doing so, a laboratory of experimental pedagogy.
The kids are each busy in their own way, and the director, observing them, can make psychological observations that, if documented systematically and according to scientific standards, could greatly contribute to understanding child psychology and advancing experimental psychology. I believe my method has created the necessary conditions for developing scientific teaching; and anyone who adopts this method essentially opens a lab for experimental teaching.
From such work, we must await the positive solution of all those pedagogical problems of which we talk to-day. For through such work there has already come the solution of some of these very questions: that of the liberty of the pupils; auto-education; the establishment of har[Pg 372]mony between the work and activities of home life and school tasks, making both work together for the education of the child.
From this work, we need to expect the positive resolution of all the educational issues we discuss today. Because of this effort, some of these questions have already been addressed: the freedom of students; self-directed learning; the creation of harmony between home life and school tasks, allowing both to support the child's education.
The problem of religious education, the importance of which we do not fully realise, should also be solved by positive pedagogy. If religion is born with civilisation, its roots must lie deep in human nature. We have had most beautiful proof of an instinctive love of knowledge in the child, who has too often been misjudged in that he has been considered addicted to meaningless play, and games void of thought. The child who left the game in his eagerness for knowledge, has revealed himself as a true son of that humanity which has been throughout centuries the creator of scientific and civil progress. We have belittled the son of man by giving him foolish and degrading toys, a world of idleness where he is suffocated by a badly conceived discipline. Now, in his liberty, the child should show us, as well, whether man is by nature a religious creature.
The issue of religious education, which we don’t fully appreciate, should also be addressed through effective teaching methods. If religion emerges with civilization, its roots must be deeply embedded in human nature. We have seen compelling evidence of children’s natural love for knowledge, as they are often wrongly viewed as being engaged only in meaningless play and thoughtless games. A child who abandons play out of eagerness to learn shows themselves to be a true descendant of humanity, which has historically driven scientific and civil advancement. We have underestimated children by providing them with silly and degrading toys, allowing them to live in a world of idleness where they are stifled by poorly designed rules. Now, in their freedom, children should demonstrate whether humanity is inherently a religious being.
To deny, a priori, the religions sentiment in man, and to deprive humanity of the education of this sentiment, is to commit a pedagogical error similar to that of denying, a priori, to the child, the love of learning for learning's sake. This ignorant assumption led us to dominate the scholar, to subject him to a species of slavery, in order to render him apparently disciplined.
To reject, a priori, the religious sentiment in humans and to take away the education of this sentiment is to make a teaching mistake similar to denying, a priori, a child’s love of learning for its own sake. This ignorant belief caused us to control the student and subject them to a kind of slavery to make them seem disciplined.
The fact that we assume that religions education is only adapted to the adult, may be akin to another profound error existing in education to-day, namely, that of overlooking the education of the senses at the very period when this education is possible. The life of the adult is practically an application of the senses to the gathering of sensations from the environment. A lack of preparation[Pg 373] for this, often results in inadequacy in practical life, in that lack of poise which causes so many individuals to waste their energies in purposeless effort. Not to form a parallel between the education of the senses as a guide to practical life, and religious education as a guide to the moral life, but for the sake of illustration, let me call attention to how often we find inefficiency, instability, among irreligious persons, and how much precious individual power is miserably wasted.
The belief that religious education is only meant for adults may be similar to another major mistake in today's education: ignoring the education of the senses at a time when it's actually possible. An adult's life is basically about using their senses to gather experiences from the environment. Not being prepared for this often leads to struggles in real life, resulting in a lack of balance that causes many people to waste their energy on meaningless efforts. While I’m not drawing a direct comparison between sensory education as a guide to practical life and religious education as a guide to moral life, it’s worth noting how often we see inefficiency and instability in non-religious people, and how much valuable individual potential is sadly squandered.
How many men have had this experience! And when that spiritual awakening comes late, as it sometimes does, through the softening power of sorrow, the mind is unable to establish an equilibrium, because it has grown too much accustomed to a life deprived of spirituality. We see equally piteous cases of religious fanaticism, or we look upon intimate dramatic struggles between the heart, ever seeking its own safe and quiet port, and the mind that constantly draws it back to the sea of conflicting ideas and emotions, where peace is unknown. These are all psychological phenomena of the highest importance; they present, perhaps, the gravest of all our human problems. We Europeans are still filled with prejudices and hedged about with preconceptions in regard to these matters. We are very slaves of thought. We believe that liberty of conscience and of thought consists in denying certain sentimental beliefs, while liberty never can exist where one struggles to stifle some other thing, but only where unlimited expansion is granted; where life is left free and untrammelled. He who really does not believe, does not fear that which he does not believe, and does not combat that which for him does not exist. If he believes and fights, he then becomes an enemy to liberty.
How many men have gone through this experience! And when that spiritual awakening happens late, as it sometimes does, through the gentle influence of sorrow, the mind struggles to find balance because it has become too used to a life without spirituality. We also see sad cases of religious fanaticism, or we witness intense inner battles between the heart, always looking for its own safe and quiet place, and the mind that keeps pulling it back into the turbulent sea of conflicting ideas and emotions, where peace is impossible to find. These are all psychological phenomena of great significance; they may represent some of our most serious human dilemmas. We Europeans are still burdened by prejudices and limited by preconceived notions regarding these issues. We are often prisoners of our thoughts. We think that freedom of conscience and thought means rejecting certain heartfelt beliefs, while true freedom can’t exist when one is trying to suppress something else, but only where there is room for unlimited growth; where life is allowed to be free and unrestricted. A person who truly doesn't believe doesn't fear what they don't believe in and doesn't fight against what doesn't exist for them. If they believe and fight, they become an enemy to freedom.
In America, the great positive scientist, William James,[Pg 374] who expounds the physiological theory of emotions, is also the man who illustrates the psychological importance of religious "conscience." We cannot know the future of the progress of thought: here, for example, in the "Children's Houses" the triumph of discipline through the conquest of liberty and independence marks the foundation of the progress which the future will see in the matter of pedagogical methods. To me it offers the greatest hope for human redemption through education.
In America, the influential scientist William James,[Pg 374] who explains the physiological theory of emotions, is also the person who highlights the psychological significance of religious "conscience." We can’t predict the future of thought development: for instance, in the "Children's Houses," the victory of discipline through gaining freedom and independence lays the groundwork for the progress we will witness in educational methods. To me, it presents the greatest hope for human salvation through education.
Perhaps, in the same way, through the conquest of liberty of thought and of conscience, we are making our way toward a great religious triumph. Experience will show, and the psychological observations made along this line in the "Children's Houses" will undoubtedly be of the greatest interest.
Perhaps, in a similar way, by winning the freedom of thought and conscience, we are moving toward a significant religious victory. Experience will reveal this, and the psychological observations gathered in the "Children's Houses" will surely be incredibly interesting.
This book of methods compiled by one person alone, must be followed by many others. It is my hope that, starting from the individual study of the child educated with our method, other educators will set forth the results of their experiments. These are the pedagogical books which await us in the future.
This book of methods created by one person must be continued by many others. I hope that, starting from the individual study of the child educated with our method, other educators will share the results of their experiments. These are the pedagogical books that lie ahead of us.
From the practical side of the school, we have with our methods the advantage of being able to teach in one room, children of very different ages. In our "Children's Houses" we have little ones of two years and a half, who cannot as yet make use of the most simple of the sense exercises, and children of five and a half who because of their development might easily pass into the third elementary. Each one of them perfects himself through his own powers, and goes forward guided by that inner force which distinguishes him as an individual.
From the practical side of the school, our methods allow us to teach children of very different ages in one room. In our "Children's Houses," we have toddlers as young as two and a half who aren’t yet able to engage in the simplest of sensory activities, alongside five-and-a-half-year-olds who, due to their development, could easily move on to the third grade. Each child improves at their own pace, moving forward with the inner motivation that makes them unique.
One great advantage of such a method is that it will make instruction in the rural schools easier, and will be[Pg 375] of great advantage in the schools in the small provincial towns where there are few children, yet where all the various grades are represented. Such schools are not able to employ more than one teacher. Our experience shows that one directress may guide a group of children varying in development from little ones of three years old to the third elementary. Another great advantage lies in the extreme facility with which written language may be taught, making it possible to combat illiteracy and to cultivate the national tongue.
One major benefit of this method is that it will make teaching in rural schools easier, and will be[Pg 375] especially helpful in small-town schools where there are few students, but all the different grades are present. These schools can only afford to hire one teacher. Our experience shows that one instructor can effectively manage a group of children ranging in age from three years old up to the third grade. Another significant advantage is how easily written language can be taught, which helps fight illiteracy and promotes the national language.
As to the teacher, she may remain for a whole day among children in the most varying stages of development, just as the mother remains in the house with children of all ages, without becoming tired.
As for the teacher, she can spend an entire day with children at different stages of development, just like a mother stays home with kids of all ages, without getting exhausted.
The children work by themselves, and, in doing so, make a conquest of active discipline, and independence in all the acts of daily life, just as through daily conquests they progress in intellectual development. Directed by an intelligent teacher, who watches over their physical development as well as over their intellectual and moral progress, children are able with our methods to arrive at a splendid physical development, and, in addition to this, there unfolds within them, in all its perfection, the soul, which distinguishes the human being.
The kids work on their own, and in doing so, achieve active discipline and independence in their everyday activities, just as they advance intellectually through daily achievements. Guided by a knowledgeable teacher who oversees both their physical growth and their intellectual and moral development, children can, through our methods, reach excellent physical development, and alongside this, their unique human soul unfolds in all its fullness.
We have been mistaken in thinking that the natural education of children should be purely physical; the soul, too, has its nature, which it was intended to perfect in the spiritual life,—the dominating power of human existence throughout all time. Our methods take into consideration the spontaneous psychic development of the child, and help this in ways that observation and experience have shown us to be wise.
We have been wrong to think that children's natural education should only be physical; the soul also has its own nature, which is meant to be developed in the spiritual life—the central aspect of human existence throughout history. Our methods consider the child's natural psychological development and support it in ways that observation and experience have proven to be effective.
If physical care leads the child to take pleasure in[Pg 376] bodily health, intellectual and moral care make possible for him the highest spiritual joy, and send him forward into a world where continual surprises and discoveries await him; not only in the external environment, but in the intimate recesses of his own soul.
If physical care helps the child enjoy[Pg 376] good health, intellectual and moral care opens up the possibility of the greatest spiritual joy, pushing him into a world filled with constant surprises and discoveries; not just in the outside world, but also in the deep corners of his own soul.
It is through such pleasures as these that the ideal man grows, and only such pleasures are worthy of a place in the education of the infancy of humanity.
It is through pleasures like these that the ideal person develops, and only these pleasures are worthy of a role in the education of humanity's early years.
Our children are noticeably different from those others who have grown up within the grey walls of the common schools. Our little pupils have the serene and happy aspect and the frank and open friendliness of the person who feels himself to be master of his own actions. When they run to gather about our visitors, speaking to them with sweet frankness, extending their little hands with gentle gravity and well-bred cordiality, when they thank these visitors for the courtesy they have paid us in coming, the bright eyes and the happy voices make us feel that they are, indeed, unusual little men. When they display their work and their ability, in a confidential and simple way, it is almost as if they called for a maternal approbation from all those who watch them. Often, a little one will seat himself on the floor beside some visitor silently writing his name, and adding a gentle word of thanks. It is as if they wished to make the visitor feel the affectionate gratitude which is in their hearts.
Our kids are definitely different from those who grew up in the dull environment of traditional schools. Our little students have a calm and happy demeanor, and their friendly openness shows that they feel in control of their own actions. When they rush to gather around our visitors, speaking to them with genuine sweetness and extending their little hands with respectful warmth, and when they thank these visitors for coming, their bright eyes and cheerful voices make it clear that they are truly special little individuals. When they share their work and show their skills in a straightforward and trusting way, it's almost like they're seeking a mother's approval from everyone watching. Often, a little one will sit on the floor next to a visitor, quietly writing his name and adding a soft thank you. It's as if they want to express the heartfelt gratitude that's in their hearts.
When we see all these things and when, above all, we pass with these children from the busy activity of the schoolroom at work, into the absolute and profound silence which they have learned to enjoy so deeply, we are moved in spite of ourselves and feel that we have come in touch with the very souls of these little pupils.
When we witness all of this and, most importantly, transition with these kids from the bustling activity of the classroom into the complete and profound silence they have come to appreciate so much, we can’t help but be touched and feel like we've connected with the very souls of these young students.
The "Children's House" seems to exert a spiritual in[Pg 377]fluence upon everyone. I have seen here, men of affairs, great politicians preoccupied with problems of trade and of state, cast off like an uncomfortable garment the burden of the world, and fall into a simple forgetfulness of self. They are affected by this vision of the human soul growing in its true nature, and I believe that this is what they mean when they call our little ones, wonderful children, happy children—the infancy of humanity in a higher stage of evolution than our own. I understand how the great English poet Wordsworth, enamoured as he was of nature, demanded the secret of all her peace and beauty. It was at last revealed to him—the secret of all nature lies in the soul of a little child. He holds there the true meaning of that life which exists throughout humanity. But this beauty which "lies about us in our infancy" becomes obscured; "shades of the prison house, begin to close about the growing boy ... at last the man perceives it die away, and fade into the light of common day."
The "Children's House" seems to have a spiritual influence on everyone. I’ve seen people here—business leaders and important politicians focused on trade and government issues—shed their worldly burdens like an uncomfortable coat and slip into a simple state of forgetfulness. They’re touched by this idea of the human soul evolving into its true nature, and I think this is what they mean when they refer to our little ones as wonderful children, happy children—the infancy of humanity in a stage of evolution that's more advanced than our own. I get how the great English poet Wordsworth, who loved nature, sought the secret to all her peace and beauty. Eventually, it was revealed to him—the secret of all nature lies in the soul of a little child. In that soul, he holds the true meaning of the life that flows through humanity. But this beauty that "surrounds us in our infancy" gets clouded; "shadows of the prison house begin to close around the growing boy... and eventually the man sees it fade away, disappearing into the light of everyday life."
Truly our social life is too often only the darkening and the death of the natural life that is in us. These methods tend to guard that spiritual fire within man, to keep his real nature unspoiled and to set it free from the oppressive and degrading yoke of society. It is a pedagogical method informed by the high concept of Immanuel Kant: "Perfect art returns to nature."
Honestly, our social life often just dims and stifles the natural life within us. These approaches aim to protect that inner spirit, keep our true selves unharmed, and liberate us from the heavy and degrading burdens of society. It's an educational method inspired by Immanuel Kant's profound idea: "Perfect art returns to nature."
THE END
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!